04,05 - MEP Specifications PDF

16-119
AL SAHEL BEACH RESORT, BAHRAIN

100% FINAL DESIGN
MEP SPECIFICATIONS
REV. C
17 DECEMBER 2017
Revision Date By Description Resp. Consult

A 10.09.17 DTP/SKK 100% Detailed Design MSCEB NOTE: THIS DOCUMENT TO BE READ IN CONJUNCTION WITH
B 07.11.17 DTP/SKK 50% Final Design MSCEB THE MEP DRAWING PACKAGE.
C 17.12.17 DTP/SKK 100% Final Design MSCEB
SCALE: SHEET DATE STARTED: CHECKED: STAGE:
SIZE:
NTS A4 17.12.17 DTP/SKK FD

DWG № Rev:
16119-ME-GEN-0-001-00 C
MECHANICAL - ELECTRICAL INDEX
DIVISION 21- FIRE SUPPRESSION
21 01 00 OPERATION & MAINTENANCE OF FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEM

21 05 00 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION
21 12 00 FIRE SUPPRESSION STANDPIPES
21 13 13 WET PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS
21 22 00 CLEAN AGENT FIRE EXTINGUISHING SYSTEMS
DIVISION 22 - PLUMBING
22 01 00 OPERATION & MAINTENANCE OF PLUMBING SYSTEM

22 05 00 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING
22 11 23 DOMESTIC WATER PUMPS
22 13 26 DRAINAGE COLLECTION SYSTEM
22 33 00 ELECTRIC WATER HEATERS
22 33 01 SOLAR WATER HEATERS
22 35 00 DOMESTIC WATER HEAT EXCHANGERS
DIVISION 23 - HVAC
23 01 00 OPERATION & MAINTENANCE OF HVAC SYSTEM

23 05 00 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC
23 05 48 NOISE AND VIBRATION CONTROL
23 05 93 TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING FOR HVAC
23 07 13 INSULATION
23 08 00 COMMISSIONING OF HVAC
23 11 00 FUEL OIL STORAGE TANK AND PIPING SYSTEM
23 11 26 FACILITY LIQUEFIED PETROLEUM GAS PIPING SYSTEM
23 21 23 HYDRONIC PUMPS
23 25 33 MECHANICAL / PHYSICAL WATER TREATMENT
23 25 33.13 BASIN SWEEPING SYSTEM
23 25 33.19 FULL STREAM FILTRATION FOR CONDENSER WATER NETWORK
23 25 33.20 FILTRATION UNIT FOR COOLING TOWER MAKE UP WATER INLET
25 25 33.29 CENTRIFUGAL SEPARATOR TESTING APPARATUS AND PROCEDURES
23 33 00 AIR DISTRIBUTION
23 34 00 VENTILATION EQUIPMENT
23 52 39 FIRE TUBE BOILERS
23 57 00 HEAT EXCHANGERS FOR HVAC
23 64 16 CENTRIFUGAL WATER CHILLERS
23 65 00 COOLING TOWERS
23 73 13 AIR HANDLING UNITS
23 80 00 LIQUID HEAT TRANSFER
23 81 00 UNITARY AIR CONDITIONERS
23 81 23 COMPUTER ROOM AIR CONDITIONERS
23 81 29 VARIABLE REFRIGERANT FLOW HVAC SYSTEMS
23 82 19 FAN COIL UNITS
DIVISION 25 - BUILDING MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
25 00 00 BUILDING MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
AL SAHEL HOTEL RESORT

PROJECT CODE: 2016072 DECEMBER 2017 Page 1 of 2
MECHANICAL - ELECTRICAL INDEX
DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL
26 01 00 OPERATION & MAINTENANCE OF ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

26 05 00 BASIC MATERIAL AND METHODS
26 05 19 LOW VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS & CABLES
26 05 26 EARTHING SYSTEM
26 05 53 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
26 08 50 ELECTRICAL SERVICES TO MECHANICAL PLANT
26 09 43 LIGHTING/ DIMMING CONTROL SYSTEM
26 23 00 LOW-VOLTAGE SWITCHGEAR
26 27 13 ELECTRICITY KWH METERING SYSTEM
26 32 13 AUTO DIESEL GENERATOR SET
26 33 23 CENTRAL BATTERY SYSTEM
26 33 53 UPS SYSTEM
26 35 33 POWER FACTOR CORRECTION EQUIPMENT
26 41 00 LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM
26 50 00 LIGHTING INSTALLATIONS
DIVISION 28 - ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY
28 11 00 INTEGRATED FIRE ALARM & VOICE EVACUATION LIFE SAFETY SYSTEM
SCHEDULE
SCHEDULE OF APPROVED MANUFACTURERS
AL SAHEL HOTEL RESORT

PROJECT CODE: 2016072 DECEMBER 2017 Page 2 of 2
AL SAHEL BEACH RESORT, BAHRAIN SPECIFICATION PACKAGE
100% FINAL DESIGN – 17TH DECEMBER 2017
21 01 00 – Operation & Maintenance of Fire Protection System
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 Related Documents

N/A
1.2 Description of work
1.2.1 General
The Operation Manual shall prepare in line with the operator guidelines for the
Operation & Maintenance Manual. The contractor shall, three (3) months prior
to the date of taking over, submit to the engineer for his review five (5)
complete sets of the following documents: -
a) Prints of all As-Built Drawings. All as-built information shall be on REVIT
platform with LOD 500 with representation in terms of size, shape, location,
quantity, orientation, manufacturer’s details, equipment model and
performance.
b) Operation & Maintenance (O&M) Manuals in draft form.
The Engineer shall review the submission and shall advise his comments or
approval in writing within 30 days. The contractor shall finalize the documents
strictly on the basis of the Engineers comments (if any) and shall submit the
under noted documents not later than 30 days from the date of Substantial
completion: -
c) Five (5) complete sets of prints of As-Built Drawings in specified binders.
d) Five (5) CD/DVD of As-Built Drawings (in REVIT LOD 500, PDF and AutoCad
format).
e) Five (5) sets of copies of O&M Manuals.
Where it is not possible to finalize the As-Built Drawings until after the
construction works are completed, these drawings shall be submitted the issue
of taking over the certificate.
The Contractor’s submittals shall be subject to the Engineers final review and
approval. In the event of protracted delays in the finalization of the O&M
Manuals and As-Built Drawings and if these delays are attributable to the
Contractor’s lack of response, the Engineer shall make appropriate
arrangement for another specialist to complete the documentation, and the
cost of such work shall be borne by the Contractor. Additionally, the
Contractor at his own expense shall provide the necessary mechanical and
electrical plant attendance and maintenance until such time the complete set
of O&M Manuals and As-Built Drawings are accepted by the Engineer.
Contractor shall comply with all information as explained in Operator’s
Completion and Handover Requirements as detailed in the annexure of the
Project Requirement Manual.
1.2.2 As-Built Drawings

General
As-Built Drawings shall comply with the following requirements: -
a) Drawing Size : A1/A0.
b) Scale : Floor plans, elevations and sections may be drawn
to 1:100 scale, generally. Details may be shown using larger scales as
appropriate. All information shall be modeled in REVIT LOD500. All
information of equipment piping and ducting as in the O&M manual shall
be reflected on the Revit model.
21 01 00
MECHANICAL - REV. C Page 1 of 14
c) Title Block : Entries shall state the project title, the names of the
Employer, the Engineer, the contractor, etc.
d) The format shall be submitted to the Engineer for his approval. All spaces
in the Title Block shall be filled-in and signed where appropriate.
e) All drawings shall include approved standard legends and symbols, and
all technical data and information shall be to S.I. units.
f) All lettering on drawings shall be legible and of uniform sizes. The quality of
all drawings shall be consistent with good drafting practices, and the
following shall be noted in this regard.
g) All mechanical and electrical services shall be drawn with thick lines to
distinguish these from the building outline which is to be shown in very light
lines for contrast. No Engineering details or dimensions shall be shown
apart from the building grid lines. Overlay services drawings using
engineering or structural sepia transparencies will not be accepted.
h) All services shall be drawn in double lines where possible. Major items of
plant and equipment shall be drawn to scale and shall closely resemble
the actual in configuration.
i) No entries shall be made in the revision column of As-Built Drawings (This
shall only be used by the Client User to record any modifications carried
out after the completion and handover of the project).
j) All drawings shall be numbered sequentially. Where a particular item is
referred to in more than one drawing, a system of cross-referencing shall
be used.
k) Drawing showing underground or buried services, (i.e. pipework, valves,
electric cables, etc.) Shall indicate their invert levels and actual positions
relative to fixed references such as building column centre-lines, finish floor
levels, etc.
l) All drawings shall be signed by the Engineer to certify that these are an
accurate representation of the actual construction.
m) Prints of As-Built Drawings shall be neatly folded and enclosed in nominal
A4 size, 50mm thick vinyl-covered 4-ring binders. Each drawing shall be
attached to the binders through suitably reinforced holes punched along
the vertical edge of the drawing. It shall be possible to unfold each
drawing without detaching it from the binder. All drawing binders shall be
labelled in accordance with the format specified for the O&M Manuals.
n) Services coordination drawings used during the construction of the works
will not be regarded as As-Built drawings.
1.2.3 Required Submittals

The Contractor shall provide As-Built Drawings as follows: -
a) The site plan is showing all external services and other features.
b) Engineering plans, elevations, sections and details including the
layout of fixed furniture and equipment complete with dimensions.
c) Structural layout with details of typical reinforcements (for
reinforced-concrete structures), connections (for steel-framed
buildings), etc.
Mechanical Installations
a) Floor plans, elevations or sections (as may be required) of air-
conditioning, plumbing, fire protection and other services.
b) Installation details.
c) Schematic diagrams of systems, automatic controls, etc.
Electrical Installations
a) Floor plans, elevations or sections (as may be required) of lighting,
power points, communications, data and signalling systems, etc.
21 01 00
c) Wiring diagrams, panel boards load schedules, etc.
1.2.4 Operations & Maintenance (O&M) Manuals

General
Operation and Maintenance Manuals shall comply with the following under
noted requirements: -
a) Size & Type: Nominal A4 size, 50mm thick vinyl-covered with no less
than 4 ring binders.
b) Each section or part of the manual shall be separated and
identified by a hard-plastic separator. Each separator shall be
tabbed and labelled at the longitudinal edge.
c) Punched pages in the manual shall be reinforced at the rings, and
it shall be possible for each page to be detached easily.
d) The front and side covers of each manual shall bear clear and
indelible inscriptions (stick-on labels will not be accepted) in bold
types of the project title and particular installation as shown in the
following example: -
“PROJECT TITLE”
OPERATION & MAINTENANCE MANUAL
FOR
MECHANICAL INSTALLATIONS”
e) All information contained in each manual shall be in English
language only. Technical literature in languages other than English
will be rejected.
f) For large and complex projects with extensive mechanical and
electrical services, the manuals shall be prepared and submitted in
separately bound parts or volumes as may be required.
g) The texts of the manuals shall be prepared by skilled technical
writers who are trained and experienced in operation and
maintenance of the plant, systems, equipment or building works
described.
Required Information
The Operation & Maintenance manual shall comprise, but not necessarily
limited to a number of sections with the following general headings: -
a) Project Information
b) Index
c) Plants/Systems Description
d) Contact information
e) Manufacturers / Suppliers literature
f) Schedule of Equipment and Components
g) Operating Instructions
h) Maintenance Instructions
i) Automatic Control Systems
j) Test Certificates and Commissioning Data
k) Spare Parts and Consumables
l) Residual Risk and disposal instructions
m) Modifications
n) Product Guarantees and Warranties
The information required by each Section shall generally include the following: -
This shall present a concise and factual introductory summary on
the project. Essential information to be provided shall include the
names of the employer, Client User, Engineer, contractor, sub-
21 01 00
contractors, construction start date, handover date and

construction period.
b) Index
This shall provide the full listing of the O&M manuals by section, part
or other subdivisions as may be required and shall identify these
complete with page numbering all in sequential order.
c) Plant/Systems Description
i. Brief Introduction
ii. Design conditions each system, process, an item of plant,
etc., is meant to achieve including the operating
parameters.
iii. Technical descriptions of an individual system, plant or
process. This shall include a clear description of the
function of all equipment and major components and the
manner these are operated and controlled.
iv. Simplified flow diagrams of systems or plant clearly
identifying all equipment and major components cross
referenced to the Schedule of Equipment and
Components within the manuals.
d) Contact information: Provide contact information of person in-
charge from the manufacturer, supplier, and contractor.
e) Manufacturers / Suppliers literature: This section shall include
manufacturers / supplier’s data and literature to elaborate the
functioning of the equipment.
f) Schedule of Plant, Equipment and Components
This section shall include the following information: -
i. A general listing of all installed items of plant, equipment
and components for each process or system. Items so
listed shall bear the same coded identifications as those
shown on the As-Built Drawings and other diagrams for
easy referencing.
ii. General and technical schedule for individual items of
plant and equipment giving the following details: -
1. Manufacturer’s name and particulars of local
agent/supplier.
2. Equipment model and serial number.
3. Equipment location is relative to the installation.
4. Operating parameters, i.e. electrical supply
characteristics, motor ratings, power
consumptions, speed, etc.
5. Any other relevant information.
6. Manufacturer’s technical literature and drawings.
General sales information and brochures in lieu will
not be accepted.
1. Brief Introduction.
2. Detailed step by step preparatory inspection
checks prior to start up of system, plant and
equipment including Megger test of all equipment
motors before starting.
3. Clear and comprehensive instructions for a startup,
operation and shut down. This shall include
detailed safety procedures to be followed in an
emergency situation.
4. Flow or control diagrams as may be required.
21 01 00
This section shall comprise the following sub-sections: -
i. Fault finding schedule - this shall provide a comprehensive
list of failures or malfunctions which are likely to develop
during the operation of a system, plant or equipment
including the diagnosis and procedures for trouble
shooting.
ii. Preventive Maintenance - this shall contain information
and instructions relating to the routine maintenance
required for all items of plant and equipment to ensure
that these are operating at their optimum efficiency. The
information to be provided shall include the following: -
1. Recommended staffing for plant maintenance.
The minimum qualifications of each staff shall be
stated.
2. List of tools and test instruments required for
maintenance. Where a test apparatus is of a
specialist nature, the operating, maintenance and
calibration procedures shall be provided.
3. Equipment manufacturer’s maintenance literature
including drawings and diagrams.
i) Automatic Controls Systems:
This section shall contain detailed information and instructions on
the operation of the automatic controls systems for all plants,
equipment and processes generally, as follows: -
i. Controls system description and manner of operations
including schematic diagrams.
ii. Itemized list of control elements and components and their
functions, calibrations carried out and final settings for
operation.
iii. Procedures for fault finding and rectification of faults and
required maintenance. Where this information is covered
elsewhere in the Manuals, the relevant section shall be
stated.
iv. Manufacturer’s technical data including drawings and
diagrams.
j) Test Certificates & Commissioning Data
The following documents shall be provided under this Section: -
i. Industry standard or legal test certificates issued for safety
and fitness for the use of equipment such as boilers, water
heaters, pressure vessels, lifts, switchgear, etc.
ii. Certified manufacturers’ factory performance tests.
iii. Certified Testing & Commissioning Data for all mechanical
and electrical systems and equipment. This shall include
HVAC temperature/humidity tests, hydraulic pressure and
flow balancing, electrical continuity tests, etc. The tests
results obtained shall be compared with the design values
and deviations, if any, shall be noted. Details of all
specialist test instruments used shall be provided, i.e. make
and model number, a method of calibration, etc.
iv. Manufacturers, written warranty on equipment and
components, if any.
k) Spare Parts & Consumables
This section shall contain detailed information on the following: -
21 01 00
i. A complete inventory of original spare parts supplied (if

any) at the handover of the project.
ii. Comprehensive lists of spare parts and consumables (as
per the equipment manufacturers, recommendation) with
CIF Bahrain prices. Where applicable, corresponding
Central Stores Directorate’s stock numbers shall be
indicated for each spare part.
iii. Particulars of spare parts manufacturers including local
suppliers or agents.
l) Residual Risk and Disposal Instructions: Indicate any hazard and
environmental risk associated with the operation, maintenance,
and disposal of any part of equipment and system. Instruction for
safe disposal should be included within this section.
m) Modifications: Any field modification to the factory supplied
equipment shall be specifically identified in this section
n) Product Guarantees and Warranties: This section shall include all
guarantees and warranties for all the equipment /system including
those for installation.
1.2.5 Packing, storage and protection

1) All plant, equipment, apparatus, parts and materials needed to complete
the works shall be delivered to site in a new condition, properly packed
and protected against damage due to handling or adverse weather
conditions. As far as it is practicable all plant, equipment, apparatus, parts
and materials shall be kept in their packing cases, protective covering or
secured within a covered site store until fixed in position.
2) Any items suffering damage, in transit on the site shall be rejected and
replaced without any extra cost to the Client. During the installation of the
works all open ends of pipes, ducts, fans, pumps, etc., shall be suitably
capped to prevent the ingress of foreign matter.
3) All second fix finishing items such as grilles, unit casings, light fittings, switch
plates, switch socket outlets, telephone outlets, bell push, fire alarm system,
etc., shall be suitably protected, thus ensuring all the items are handed
over to the in first class condition. Any item damaged due to lack of
protection shall be replaced at no extra cost to the Ministry.
4) The Contractor shall protect all pipework, valves, fitting, ductwork, plant
and equipment where any part or parts of the installations are liable to
damage from other trades or any cause whatsoever. The Contractor shall
take all due care to screen and protect all works, whether complete or in
the course of completion from the ingress of dust or moisture or from
damage by any other means.
5) Any open-ended pipes left overnight or for a longer period shall be
plugged with approved type plugs to prevent the entry of dust, sand,
foreign matter, etc.
6) Pipework, fittings, valves or any plant and equipment which is found to be
unduly marked by tools or damaged or distorted prior to final acceptance
of the work will be rejected by the Engineer and immediately replaced by
the Contractor at his own expense.
1.2.6 Corrosion and painting

1) For all parts of the services the shop fabricated and factory built
equipment not galvanized or protected by plating, plant and equipment
liable to corrosion, the Contractor shall properly clean such parts, apply
primer and paint with at least two coats of heat resisting paint and/or
corrosion resistant paint at works and two further final painting and finishing
21 01 00
coats to approved colours. Parts that are exposed to direct sunshine shall
have special treatment to withstand the prevailing temperature
conditions. Treatment shall be as recommended by the equipment
manufacturer. Where final finishes are provided to equipment at the
manufacturer’s works, all such finishes shall be of an approved material
process and colour, and the Contractor shall provide adequate
protection during shipment and erection to ensure that no damage is
caused to finishes.
2) All steelwork in connection with supports for pipework, ductwork, plant
and equipment, etc. and all uninsulated pipework, ductwork, tanks, etc.,
must be painted two coats undercoat and two further coats of enamel
finish of approved colour.
1.2.7 Commissioning and instructions

1) The Contractor shall provide attendance during the commissioning of all
plant and apparatus connected under this Contract, whether or not the
plant and apparatus were supplied under this Contract. He shall also
demonstrate the operation of all electrical plant, apparatus and
installations necessary under this Contract, and hand over full operating
and maintenance instructions.
1.3 Taking over
1) The Contractor shall be responsible for training a number of persons who
will be selected by the Ministry in the correct and careful operation control
and maintenance of the whole work. The training shall be carried out by
the qualified commissioning staff of the Contractor and shall be continued
throughout the one (1) month period preceding the “Taking Over”unless
the Specifications call for a more extended period.
2) As soon as the Works have been completed in accordance with the
Contract Documents, except in minor respects that do not affect its use
for the intended purpose and except for the maintenance thereof as
provided under Defect Liability Period and have passed the Reliability
Tests, the Engineer shall issue a certificate, herein called a “Taking Over
Certificate”, in which he shall certify the date on which the Works have
been completed and have passed the said Tests and the Engineer shall
be deemed to have taken over the Works on the date so certified but
issue of Taking Over Certificate shall not operate as an admission that the
Works have been completed in every respect. In the event of the Works
being divided into two or more sections, the Engineer shall be entitled to
take over any section or sections of the other or others, and thereupon a
Taking Over Certificate in respect thereof shall be issued. If by agreement
between the Contractor and the Engineer, any portion of the Works (other
than a section or sections) shall be taken over before the remainder of the
Works, the Engineer shall issue a Taking Over Certificate in respect of that
portion.
3) If by any reason or any default on the part of the Contractor a Taking
Over Certificate has not been issued in relation to every portion of the
Works within one (1) month after the date fixed by the Contract for the
completion of the Works, or if no time be fixed within a reasonable time,
the Engineer shall be at liberty to use the Works or any portion thereof, in
respect of which a Taking Over Certificate has not been issued, provided
that the Works or portion so used as aforesaid shall be reasonably capable
of being used without harm to the Works (normal wear and tear
excepted), and that the Contractor shall be afforded reasonable
opportunity of taking such steps as may be necessary to permit the
21 01 00
issuance of the Taking Over Certificate. In no case, however, shall the

employer be prevented from the use of the works unless otherwise
specified.
1.4 Testing
1.4.1 Tests at the site:

i. After completing the work at the site, the test shall be made in the
presence of the Engineer. The Contractor shall give the Engineer fourteen
(14) days’ notice in writing of the date after which he will be ready to
make the test, and he shall ask the Engineer to check that the Works are
ready for such test. If in the opinion of the Engineer the said Works are not
completed or ready for the tests, then the tests shall not be made, and the
Contractor shall be required to complete all the outstanding items to the
satisfaction of the Engineer before the test can be made. All pumps,
gauges, fans, instruments, test equipment or personnel required for tests
shall be arranged by the Contractor, and he will make all provisions for
removal of test equipment after tests have been made. The test shall be
carried out on each day as the Engineer will direct and notify the
Contractor in writing.
ii. If in the opinion of the Engineer, the tests are being unduly delayed, the
Engineer may, by notice in writing, call upon the Contractor to make such
tests within ten (10) days from the receipt of the said notice and the
Contractor shall make the said test on such a day within the said ten (10)
days as the Contractor may fix and of which he shall give notice to the
Engineer. If the Contractor fails to make such tests within the time
aforesaid, the Engineer may himself proceed to make the test as he sees
necessary and all tests so made by the Engineer shall be at the risk and
expense of the Contractor.
iii. If any sections of the Works fail to pass the tests, tests of the said section
shall be repeated within a reasonable time upon the same terms and
conditions and all reasonable expenses to which the Engineer may be put
by the repetition of such tests shall be borne by the Contractor.
iv. Details of Tests on Completion:
v. The Contractor shall notify the Engineer in accordance with its previous
clause when he wants to proceed with the test on completion. All
equipment, instruments and labour necessary to perform the tests shall be
furnished by the Contractor. All tests must be made to the satisfaction of
the Engineer and shall be approved by him.
1.4.2 Operating tests
1.4.2.1 Initial Trial Test:

1) After the various systems are pressure tested and cleaned as herein before
specified, the Contractor, as directed by the Engineer, shall adjust all
equipment to perform with the least possible noise and vibration consistent
with its duty. The quiet operation of all equipment is a requirement.
2) Any equipment producing objectionable noise must be repaired or
removed and replaced with adequate equipment. After all such
adjustments, the Contractor shall demonstrate to the Engineer that the
installation is adjusted and regulated correctly to fulfil the function for
which it has been designed. Then the Contractor shall test, adjust,
balance and regulate the section concerned as necessary until the
required conditions are obtained.
21 01 00
3) Include for continuity and insulation tests on all electrical works and test all
interlocks, safety cutouts and other protective devices to ensure correct
functioning. All such tests shall be carried out in the presence of the
Engineer and full records of the values obtained shall be prepared along
with the final settings.
1.4.2.2 Tests on Piping:

1) Pressure Tests: Upon completion of the installation, but before insulation
and covering are applied, all piping connections and equipment shall be
subject to a hydrostatic or pneumatic pressure test and proved absolutely
tight. The test pressure shall be not less than 50% in excess of the pressure to
which the pipe will ordinarily be subjected; unless otherwise hereinafter
specified, the piping shall be tested in accordance with the British
Standard BS 6700. The test period shall be minimum 24 hours, and no loss
of pressure shall be observed during this time.
2) For other piping systems reference shall be made to the specification for
such particular section. However, no pipe shall be subjected to a test
pressure of less than 150 psig except as otherwise specified. Tests may be
made of isolated portions of such piping as will facilitate the general
progress of the installation.
3) Any revisions made in the piping system will subsequently necessitate
retesting of such affected portions of the piping systems.
4) Any leakage or fault discovered during such tests shall be remedied at
once by the Contractor at his own expense and the tests repeated until
the Engineer is satisfied that the section under test is sound and the
Engineer’s decision whether the test is sound or not shall be final.
5) The Contractor, except otherwise specified, shall provide at his expense
subject to the provisions of cub-clause hereunder such labour, electricity,
water, stores and as may be requisite and as may be reasonable
apparatus to carry out such tests efficiently.
6) Additional Tests
7) If any test is ordered by the Engineer which is either:
8) Not so intended by or provided for by the Contractor or,
9) Although so intended by or provided for, is ordered by the Engineer to be
carried out by an independent person at any place other than the site or
the location of manufacture or fabrication of the materials or items tested.
10) Then the cost of such test shall be borne by the Contractor if the test shows
that the design, materials or workmanship is/are not in accordance with
the provisions of the Contractor or the Engineer’s instructions but otherwise
by the Employer.
11) Consumed Electricity and Water
12) The Contractor will reimburse the Employer for the cost of electricity and
water from permanent installations used for testing, commissioning or other
purposes in carrying out this contract. Such costs are deemed to be
included in the contract sum.
1.4.2.3 Tests on Water Pumps:

Flow rate.
Total head pressure on the pump.
Pumps speed RPM.
Motor ampere readings and overload setting.
1.4.2.4 Tests on Electric Motors:

Speed in RPM, amperes for each phase and power input in kW for each motor.
21 01 00
1.4.2.5 Tests on other Plant and Equipment:

As called for in each particular specification. Any other test required in the
specifications.
A “Taking Over Certificate” shall be issued by the Engineer on satisfactory
completion of these Reliability Tests.
1.4.2.6 Reliability Tests:

1) After finishing the initial tests to the satisfaction of the Engineer, the
Contractor will be responsible for running Reliability Tests for all plant and
equipment. The Reliability Tests shall be made under the full responsibility of
the Contractor, and he shall provide full-time skilled operators for running
the plant during the whole test period.
2) Each Reliability Test shall last for a period of thirty-one (31) consecutive
days during which time the whole of the plant under test shall operate
under continuous normal operation without adjustment or repair to the
satisfaction of the Engineer.
3) In the event of any repair or adjustment having to be made other than the
normal running adjustment, the test shall be void, and the installation shall
be retested after the readjustment/repairs have been completed. A test
shall not be void due to circumstances beyond the control of the
Contractor. The reliability test will be carried out during Peak Summer
Season.
1.5 Labeling and identification of services
1.5.1 The Contractor shall follow the Operators Guideline for the Room & Equipment
Tagging Standards.
1.5.2 The Contractor shall provide and fix securely attached at close proximity to
each switchgear, starter, valve, gauge, instrument control board, pipework,
plant, equipment, etc., ivories or brass identification labels.
1.5.3 The labels shall be engraved in Arabic and English. The Arabic lettering to be
above or to the right of the English lettering. Labels and inscriptions shall be
approved by the Engineer.
1.5.4 The labels on plant and equipment shall indicate the function and duty of
such equipment and valves shall bear an identification “letter” or “number”.
1.5.5 After finish painting has been completed, the Contractor shall paint or stencil
38mm (1 ½ Inches) high black enamel block type letters and/or numerals on
all items of equipment for identification purposes. These markings shall be
included in the valve schedule. The Contractor shall paint or stencil a
complete system of pipe identification adjacent to each valve or branch
take-off and at not over 15m (50 ft) intervals on straight runs of pipe with flow
arrows at each marking.
1.5.6 The Contractor shall provide on all valves at 2.3mm (14 SWG) circular brass
label arranged to fit over the threaded end of the spindle, above the hand-
wheel and held in place by a locknut and engraved with the same letter or
number as on the adjacent label.
21 01 00
1.5.7 All automatic control valves on all utility lines, mains, laterals and sub-laterals
and branches shall be identified with a metal plate of suitable type, stamped
with the system designation, with a number assigned to the valve.
1.5.8 Each label and disc shall be coloured to assist in identifying the services.
Colours are to be approved by the Engineer and generally as those specified
in BS 1710.
1.5.9 Identification bands shall be painted on piping and ducting or insulation at

frequent intervals. Lettering and colours to be approved by the Engineer.
1.5.10 The direction of flow by means of an arrow shall also be indelibly marked on all
pipework, ductwork, etc.
1.5.11 Charts showing the colours for identification shall be provided and displayed
at all points where they are likely to be needed for quick reference.
1.5.12 The following operator’s requirement to be followed for the room & equipment
standards.
1. General
1. The purpose of this sections is to provide clear and concise
direction in formulating a standardised equipment tagging
programme applicable to all maintainable equipment throughout
the project as required by the operator.
2. A standardized equipment tagging system will ensure the following
a. Standardised descriptions of equipment and rooms throughout
the project.
b. Standardised maintenance task lists can be prepared for the
equipment.
2. Tagging process
1. The equipment collecting and tagging process can be split into

seven stages
a. Stage 1 - assign 2 digit property code
b. Stage 2 - identify separate buildings within the property and assign

4 digit building code
c. Stage 3 - assign 3 digit floor code
d. Stage 4 - identify rooms containing maintainable equipment

within the building and assign 4 digit room code.
e. Stage 5 - label rooms
f. Stage 6 - identify maintainable equipment within the room and

assign equipment code
g. Stage 7 - label equipment
2. A standardised template has been created to assist in the

equipment collection process and once completed these need
to be submitted to the engineer for review and approval
21 01 00
3. The contractor will use the same room and equipment labels
based on the submitted forms, once its approved
4. The operator in the applicable property will be responsible for
Allocation of the property, building, floor, room & system codes
etc.,
1.6 Builders works
1.6.1 All civil work for making, enlarging or making good of all openings in walls,
floors and roof, equipment foundations, plant room floors and trenches shall
be provided by the Contractor, and all the above said work should be made
to match the design of the building.
1.6.2 The Contractor shall include in his prices for drilling, anchor bolting, plugging,
screwing and nailing of all brackets, hangers for all pipework, ductwork,
conduit, cable tray, cable trunking and cable supports. The Contractor shall
also include for supplying all brackets, hangers and supports as necessary.
1.7 Access panels, doors in walls, ceilings and floors
1.7.1 Access doors shall be provided by the Contractor as required to provide

proper access to all valves, clean out, junction boxes and all other concealed
items which are located above ceilings or in walls and in partitions, whether
such accesses are shown in the drawings or not.
1.7.2 The omission shall be brought to the attention of the Engineer before
installation of equipment. All access doors shall be properly designed, sized
and located to suit the service required or as directed by the Engineer and to
his satisfaction.
1.8 Supporting structures
1.8.1 Unless otherwise noted on the drawings, the Contractor shall supply, fabricate
and fix all steel structures required for the support of plant, equipment, piping,
ducting and all services.
1.8.2 All such structures shall be constructed of rolled steel sections of adequate
strength, bolted or welded together and painted with two coats of lead
primer. Structures shall wherever possible be entirely self-supporting and
suitable for bolting to the floor of the building.
1.9 Radio/TV interference
1.9.1 All apparatus that would be likely to cause radio and/or television interference
shall be provided with an appropriate suppression device.
1.10 Spare parts
1.10.1 All spare parts and accessories provided shall be of a type and manufacture
as supplied by or approved of by, the respective equipment/plant,
supplier/manufacturer.
1.10.2 The Contractor to indicate the cost of spare parts separately as

recommended and scheduled by the respective equipment manufacturer
suitable to maintain not less than 2 years continuous operation under local
climatic conditions, after the defects liability period including lubricants, and all
necessary staging and racking.
21 01 00
1.10.3 The complete spare parts schedules to be provided, shall be supplied to the
Engineer for approval with the returned tender bid and shall indicate
separately for spares and accessories to all air conditioning equipment
including chiller units and air handling units, all pumps, control gear, valves, fire
dampers, extract fans and controls and fan coil units etc., and all equipment
listed on schedule of equipment indicated in the drawings.
1.11 Defect Liability Period
1.11.1 The Contractor shall maintain, replace, repair with utmost speed and at his
own expense, any part of the plant or material or work performed or furnished
under the Contract which may prove defective in design, erection, operation,
performance, workmanship or from any act or omission of the Contractor that
may develop under the conditions provided for by the Contract and under
proper use in the Works or any section thereof within 2 years after the Works or
that portion thereof, as the case may have been or has been taken over by
the Engineer.
1.11.2 The Contractor shall obtain and submit to the Engineer any guarantee or
certificates of warranty available from the manufacturers, but only as
supplementary to the Contractor’s own guarantee and in no way invalidates
them.
1.11.3 If any defect as above mentioned should occur, the Engineer shall inform the
Contractor thereof, stating the nature of the defect and if the Contractor
replaces or renews any portion of the Works, the provisions of this Clause shall
apply to the portion of the Works so replaced or renewed as if that portion had
been taken over on the date of replacement or renewal.
1.11.4 If any defects are not remedied within a reasonable time, the Ministry may
proceed to do the work at the Contractor’s risk and expense.
1.11.5 If the replacement or renewals are of such a character as may affect the
efficiency of the Works or any portion thereof, the Ministry may, within one (1)
month of such replacement or renewal give to the Contractor notice in writing
requiring that tests at site be made, in which case, such tests shall be carried
out as provided in “Details of Tests on Completion”.
1.11.6 These Particular Specifications shall apply to all inspections, adjustments,

replacements and renewals and to all tests occasioned thereby carried out by
the Contractor in pursuant to the Clause.
1.11.7 The Contractor shall include for complete monthly routine maintenance
checks of all plant and equipment provided by him under the Contract,
throughout the whole guaranteed maintenance period to demonstrate that
the operation of the completed system including the automatic controls,
interlocks, and safety devices for the various plant and auxiliaries are in
satisfactory working order. All required checks or tests shall be witnessed by the
Engineer or his Representative. The Contractor shall prepare and fill in the
routine maintenance service chart carried out and the name of the Engineer
or his Representative who is present, and shall submit same in duplicate to the
Engineer after every check.
1.11.8 Until the Defect Liability Certificate shall have been issued, the Contractor may
access at all reasonable working hours at his own risk and expense by himself
or his duly authorized representative whose name shall have been
21 01 00
communicated previously in writing to the Engineer to all parts of the Works for
the purpose of the working and performance thereof, for the purpose of
inspecting the same and taking notes therefrom,. Subject to the approval of
the Engineer which shall not be unreasonably withheld, the Contractor may at
his own risk and expense make any tests which he considers desirable.
1.11.9 Before the termination of the Defect Liability Period, the Contractor shall, upon
the request of the Engineer assume responsibility for the dismantling of any part
of the plant and apparatus indicated by the Engineer. If such dismantling,
however, necessitates the interruption of service of the Works, such period of
interruption shall not affect the extent of the Maintenance Period as provided
for in this Clause.
1.11.10 The Contract shall not be considered as completed until a Defect Liability
Certificate has been issued.
END OF SECTION 21 01 00
21 01 00
Al Sahel Beach Resort, Bahrain Specification Package
100% Final Design – 17th December 2017
21 05 00 - Common Work Results for Fire Suppression
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and

Supplementary Conditions and shall be read in conjunction with the following
section.
Number Description
210100 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE OF FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEM
210513 COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION EQUIPMENT
211200 FIRE SUPPRESSION STANDPIPES
211313 WET PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEM
212200 CLEAN AGENT FIRE EXTINGUISHING SYSTEM
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Description of Work:
1. Provide and install complete fire protection system as described in this section as well
as indicated on the drawings; together with all equipment to meet the full
requirements of a working system as per GCC standard published by Protection &
Safety Directorate, General Directorate of Civil Defense, Kingdom of Bahrain.
2. The fire protection drawings show design intent and the requirement for compliance
with the GCC standards published by Protection & Safety Directorate, Kingdom of
Bahrain. The works shall include the design, supply; installation; testing, commissioning
and maintenance during maintenance period by a Fire Protection Contractor
approved by the local Fire Officer and has proven experience of designing and
installing the fire protection system as per NFPA 13, NFPA 14 and BS 5306.
B. Description of System:
1. The fire protection system shall be provided to cover the complete building premises,
as under:
2. Automatic Sprinkler Protection System
3. Wet Riser and Hose Reel System
4. Test and Drain Riser
5. The water supply for the sprinkler system, hose reels and wet riser is drawn from one fire
water storage tanks located at the basement level and roof level.
6. The fire pumps shall be located in the Pump Room, adjacent to the fire water storage
tanks and the service floor. The suction piping shall ensure flooded suction for the
pumps.
C. This Section includes the following:
1. Piping materials and installation instructions common to most piping systems.

2. Mechanical sleeve seals.
21 05 00
MECHANICAL - Rev. C PAGE 1 OF 12
3. Sleeves.
4. Grout.
5. Equipment installation requirements common to equipment sections.
6. Painting and finishing.
7. Concrete bases.
8. Supports and anchorages.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Finished Spaces: Spaces other than mechanical and electrical equipment rooms,
furred spaces, pipe chases, unheated spaces immediately below roof, spaces
above ceilings, unexcavated spaces, crawlspaces, and tunnels.
B. Exposed, Interior Installations: Exposed to view indoors. Examples include finished

occupied spaces and mechanical equipment rooms.
C. Exposed, Exterior Installations: Exposed to view outdoors or subject to outdoor

ambient temperatures and weather conditions. Examples include rooftop
locations.
D. Concealed, Interior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from

physical contact by building occupants. Examples include above ceilings and in
chases.
E. Concealed, Exterior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from

weather conditions and physical contact by building occupants but subject to
outdoor ambient temperatures. Examples include installations within unheated
shelters.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data:
Submit manufacturer's detailed technical product selection data, method of
construction, material data and installation procedures for each principal component
or unit and include certified test reports on required testing. List and describe features of
control system, performances, and operating characteristics together with any further
information pertinent to the adequacy of the requirement and the system as a whole.
Submit test reports for components requiring third party certification along with the
submittal. All products shall bear the stamp of approval of authority having jurisdiction.
B. Shop Drawings:
The layouts shown on drawings are to be considered as diagrammatic and it shall be
the Contractor's responsibility to check all dimensions, pipe and duct locations against
Engineer's drawings or if the work is sufficiently advanced, by actual measurements on
site, to ensure the proper matching of mating parts. The Contractor shall provide,
suitable clearances where required.
All shop drawings shall be developed on REVIT platform with LOD 500 with
representation in terms of size, shape, location, quantity, orientation, manufacturer’s
details, equipment model and performance.
The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer shop drawings showing detailed
construction and detailed layout of the unit, its associated components and any other
related equipment material to be installed. All drawing and layouts shall bear the stamp
of approval of authority having jurisdiction.
21 05 00
Should the Engineer give provisional approval only of an order due to lack of complete
information and should the missing information not eventually meet with approval, the
Engineer will not be held responsible for any delay incurred.
For equipment where information from the manufacturers is likely to be delayed, it is
essential that the Contractor places provisionally approved orders at the earliest
possible data so as to ensure approval of orders in complete conformity with the
progress of the works.
Submittals and shop drawings shall as far as possible be complementary so that
drawings and submittals can be cross-checked.
No work shall be carried out before approval of shop drawings or equipment has been
given by the Engineer.
It is the Contractor's responsibility to co-ordinate all Mechanical works to match with the
structure of the building and the proposed arch and interior design of the building
including but limited to ducts, grilles, equipment, pipes, light fittings, false ceiling layout
and other services to allow a completely symmetrical and co-ordinated installation.
Contractor shall prepare section as required to demonstrate all constrains and co-
ordinate the same for resolving any conflicts among the services. Contractor shall
ensure that all required access, clearances and false ceiling heights are achieved as
per the requirements are achieved.
C. Samples: Submit one sample of each of the component along with the submittal.
D. Manufacturers Installation Instructions: Submit the complete methodology for

installation based on the installation instruction of the manufacturer.
E. Design Data: Submit design calculation bearing the stamp of approval of authority
having jurisdiction. Results shall include calculation that verify system pressures, flow
rates, piping pressure losses, component flow data, and pipe sizes.
Submit structural calculation for all supports, anchors, thrust, supports and all such
components with all relevant details of installation for review and approval prior to
installation.
F. Test Reports: Submit test report for the tests carried out on the installations.
G. Maintenance Manual
Submit bound manual for the system with operating and maintenance instructions,
control circuit diagrams, piping schematics, as built drawings, parts listing,
recommended parts inventory listing, emergency instructions and similar information.
All as-built information shall be on REVIT platform with LOD 500 with representation in
terms of size, shape, location, quantity, orientation, manufacturer’s details, equipment
model and performance.
H. Welding certificates: Submit copies of relevant certification.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Steel Support Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to AWS D1.1,
"Structural Welding Code--Steel."
B. Steel Pipe Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to ASME Boiler and
Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications."
1. Comply with provisions in ASME B31 Series, "Code for Pressure Piping."
21 05 00
2. Certify that each welder has passed AWS qualification tests for welding
processes involved and that certification is current.
C. Electrical Characteristics for Fire-Suppression Equipment: Equipment of higher

electrical characteristics may be furnished provided such proposed equipment is
approved in writing and connecting electrical services, circuit breakers, and
conduit sizes are appropriately modified. If minimum energy ratings or efficiencies
are specified, equipment shall comply with requirements.
D. Workmanship and Materials

The installation throughout are to be of the best quality materials erected by skilled
workmen under competent supervision and left in good working order on completion to
the satisfaction of the Engineer.
E. Compliance with Standards and Regulations:

Except where otherwise specified all work is to conform with the relevant provisions of
appropriate British Standards, NFPA and Standard Codes of Practice currently
applicable including the following:
Wet Riser - BS 5306, Part 1 & 5041

Hose Reels - BS 5036, Part 1 & BS EN 671-1:1995
NFPA 101 - Life Safety Code®
NFPA 13 - Standard for the Installation of Sprinkler Systems
NFPA 14 - Standard for the Installation of Standpipes and Hose Systems
NFPA 20 - Standard for the Installation of Stationary Pumps for Fire Protection
In addition the work is to comply with the requirements of Protection & Safety
Directorate.
F. Contractor shall employ 3rd party Commissioning Authority for the

commissioning of all systems.
G. Test on Completion: Tests as are prescribed by the specification, as per

International standards as applicable and as prescribed by TAB and CxA has to
be carried out before the plant is taken over by the owner. In case, tests are not
possible due to climatic conditions at the time of completion, the contractor
shall be bound to carry out tests at any time subsequent to the date of
completion, but before the end of defects liability period.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver pipes and tubes with factory-applied end caps. Maintain end caps through
shipping, storage, and handling to prevent pipe end damage and to prevent
entrance of dirt, debris, and moisture.
B. Store plastic pipes protected from direct sunlight. Support to prevent sagging and
bending.
1.7 COORDINATION
A. Arrange for pipe spaces, chases, slots, and openings in building structure during
progress of construction, to allow for fire-suppression installations.
21 05 00
B. Coordinate installation of required supporting devices and set sleeves in poured-in-

place concrete and other structural components as they are constructed.
C. Coordinate requirements for access panels and doors for fire-suppression items
requiring access that are concealed behind finished surfaces. Access panels and
doors are specified in Division 08 Section "Access Doors and Frames."
D. All electrical work shall conform to the requirements of DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL.
E. Builder's Work:
The following builder's work shall be allowed for by the Contractor under this section.
R.C.C. Foundation base and steel joists for the equipment wherever required.
1. Providing adequate protection to the underground pipe.
2. Forming, cutting away for and making good all openings, holes, chases, mortises
etc.
3. Necessary material and equipment for lifting, hoisting etc., to allow installation of
tank and other equipment at the required location.
4. Supplying, during the erection electrical power of necessary characteristics to
provide illumination, operation of required tools and hoists and power for starting,
testing and adjusting the equipment.
5. Access Ladder and Steel Platform etc., wherever required for proper attendance
to all components of the system.
6. Cable ducts/conduits etc., for the installation of electrical control wiring. Painting
as specified elsewhere.
7. The entire above builder's work shall be carried out to the entire satisfaction of the
Engineer and in accordance with the Fire Safety Specification
F. Co-ordinate the system installation work with the work of other trades, for proper
time and sequence to avoid construction delays and also to avoid hindrance to
work of other trades. Use bench marks, lines and levels designated by Contractor to
ensure dimensional co-ordination of the work. The Contractor shall prepare co-
ordianted drawing taking into account all the services, structure and false ceiling
requirements. Such drawings shall be prepared on Revit platform with LOD 500.
G. The Contractor shall liaise with local Fire Authorities (Protection & Safety Directorate)
and obtain their approvals for shop drawings and various components forming part
of complete installation prior to commencement of work.
Refer to drawings for smoke and fire rating of walls and floors.
The Contractor shall ensure that the installation is inspected and tested during the
course of work as well as upon completion - by the concerned authorities and
obtain their certificates as required.
The Contractor shall carry out all the tests to establish the actual performance of the
system. Contractor shall flush, pressure test the system and obtain PSD approval.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. In other Part 2 articles where subparagraph titles below introduce lists, the following
requirements apply for product selection:
21 05 00
1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,

manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work
include, but are not limited to, the manufacturers specified or equivalent.
2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products
by the manufacturers specified.
2.2 PIPE, TUBE, AND FITTINGS
A. Refer to individual Division 21 piping Sections for pipe, tube, and fitting materials and
joining methods.
2.3 JOINING MATERIALS
A. Refer to individual Division 21 piping Sections for pipe, tube, and fitting materials and
joining methods.
B. Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials: Suitable for chemical and thermal conditions of

piping system contents.
2.4 MECHANICAL SLEEVE SEALS
A. Description: Modular sealing element unit, designed for field assembly, to fill annular
space between pipe and sleeve.
B. Type : UL approved for 3hr fire rating
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by

one of the following or ‘Approved Equal’.
a. Advance Products & Systems, Inc.
b. Metraflex Co.
c. Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc. – GPT
2. Sealing Elements: Silicone interlocking links shaped to fit surface of pipe.

Include type and number required for pipe material and size of pipe. The
minimum properties shall be as follows:
Property ASTM Method Value

Hardness D-2240 50 ± 5
Tensile D-412 860 psi
Elongation D-412 250%
Compression Set S-395 38% 22hrs @300oC
Specific Gravity D-279 1.40
3. Pressure Plates: Carbon Steel. Include two for each sealing element.
4. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Stainless steel of length required to secure

pressure plates to sealing elements. Include one for each sealing element.
ANSI Type = 316 to ASTM F593-95: Tensile Strength 85000psi
21 05 00
2.5 SLEEVES
A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, galvanized, plain ends.
Cast in place concrete wall sleeves to be factory fabricated from galvanized heavy
wall seamless carbon steel pipes with anticorrosive coating. All sleeves shall have a
minimum 2" wide full perimeter water stop welded on both sides. Such sleeves shall
have 1" (25mm) annular space between pipe and sleeve to install mechanical
seals.

by one of the following or ‘Approved Equal’.

b. Metraflex Co.
c. Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc.- GPT
B. PVC Pipe: ASTM D 1785, Schedule 40.
Cast in place concrete wall sleeves to be factory fabricated from Schedule 40 PVC
pipe with minimum 2" full perimeter water sleeve, welded on both side Such sleeves
shall be two sizes higher than the service line to accommodate the mechanical
seals.


b. Metraflex Co.
c. Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc.-GPT
2.6 GROUT
A. Description: ASTM C 1107, Grade B, non-shrink and nonmetallic, dry hydraulic-

cement grout.
1. Characteristics: Post-hardening, volume-adjusting, non-staining, non-

corrosive, non-gaseous, and recommended for interior and exterior
applications.
2. Design Mix: 5000-psi (34.5-MPa), 28-day compressive strength or as specified
in structural details.
3. Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged.
2.7 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORT
Entire Pipe hanger and support system shall be designed to support five times the
weight of water filled pipe plus 250lb (114kg) at each point of piping support.
Detailed calculation to demonstrate the stresses developed in hangers, piping and
fitting and safety factors allowed shall be submitted by the contractor.
A. Adjustable Swivel Ring: For pipe sizes from 1/2" (15mm) to 2" (50mm)
1. Material : Carbon Steel.
21 05 00
2. Finish : Electro-galvanized
3. Approvals : FM, and UL listed
4. Standards : Manufacturers Standardization Society ANSI/MSS-SP-58(Type 10)
End of Line pendent sprinkler or the arm over pendent sprinkler shall be provided
with surge suppressor
B. Clevis Hangers: For pipe sizes from 21/2" (65mm) and above.

3. Approvals : FM, and UL listed
4. Standards : Manufacturers Standardization Society ANSI/MSS-SP-58(Type 1)
C. Hanger Rods: All Thread GI rods of following minimum diameter.
Pipe Size Minimum Diameter of Rod

Up to and including DN 100 (NPS 4) 10mm (3/8")
DN 150mm (NPS 6), and DN 200 (NPS 8) 13mm (1/2")
DN 250mm (NPS 10) and DN 300 (NPS 12) 16mm (5/8")
The above table indicates the smallest rod size that can be used as part of a hanger
assembly. Contractor shall submit calculation to demonstrate the adequacy of the
selected rod sizes based on actual site conditions.
D. Trapeze Hanger: Trapeze hangers shall be used wherever necessary to transfer load
to appropriate structural members all such supports shall be design in accordance
to the requirements of NFPA13. Submit calculation to demonstrate the compliance.
E. Fasteners in Concrete: All fasteners shall be of galvanized steel. The fasteners shall
be with collar flushed with the surface.

3. Approvals : FM for vertical installation, ETA for non cracked and cracked
concrete
4. Expansion shield shall not be used in cinder concrete, gypsum or such soft
material.
5. Holes for expansion shields used in vertical position shall be drilled to provide
uniform contact with shield over it entire circumference.
6. Depth of the expansion shield hole shall not be less than specified for the type
of shield used.
7. Structural consideration shall be accounted while placing the fasteners.
F. Support of Risers:
1. Risers shall be supported by riser clamps or by hangers located on the horizontal

connections within 610 mm of the centerline of the riser
2. Riser clamps supporting risers by means of set screws shall not be used
3. Riser clamps anchored to walls using hanger rods in the horizontal position shall
not be permitted to vertically support risers
21 05 00
4. In multistory buildings, riser supports shall be provided at the lowest level, at each
alternate level above, above and below offsets, and at the top of the riser
5. Supports above the lowest level shall also restrain the pipe to prevent movement
by an upward thrust where flexible fittings are used
6. The risers offset and/or do not rise from the ground, the first ceiling level above the
offset shall constitute the first level of riser support
7. Distance between supports for risers shall not exceed 7.6 m
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PIPING SYSTEMS - COMMON REQUIREMENTS
A. Install piping according to the following requirements and Division 21 Sections

specifying piping systems.
B. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and

arrangement of piping systems. Indicated locations and arrangements were used
to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design
considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved
on Coordination Drawings.
C. Install piping in concealed locations, unless otherwise indicated and except in

equipment rooms and service areas.
D. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service
areas at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless
specifically indicated otherwise.
E. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel
removal.
F. Install piping to permit valve servicing.
G. Install piping at indicated slopes.
H. Install piping free of sags and bends.
I. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.
J. Install piping to allow application of insulation.
K. Select system components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system
operating pressure.
L. Install escutcheons for penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors of One-piece, deep-
pattern type:
M. Sleeves are not required for core-drilled holes.
21 05 00
N. Permanent sleeves are not required for holes formed by removable PE sleeves.
O. Install sleeves for pipes passing through concrete and masonry walls and concrete
floor and roof slabs.
P. Install sleeves for pipes passing through concrete and masonry walls, gypsum-board
partitions, and concrete floor and roof slabs.
1. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces.
a. Exception: Extend sleeves installed in floors of mechanical equipment

areas or other wet areas DN 50 (NPS 2) above finished floor level.
2. Install sleeves in new walls and slabs as new walls and slabs are constructed.
3. Install sleeves that are large enough to provide 6mm (1/4-inch) annular clear
space between sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation as minimum. Use the
following sleeve materials:
a. GI Steel Pipe : For all the pipe size as per NFPA 13
4. Except for Concrete Wall penetrations, seal annular space between sleeve
and pipe or pipe insulation, using joint sealants appropriate for size, depth,
and location of joint.
Q. Concrete Wall Pipe Penetrations: Install Steel pipe sleeves. Seal pipe penetrations
using mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 25-mm annular clear
space between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.
1. Mechanical Sleeve Seal Installation: Select type and number of sealing

elements required for pipe material and size. Position pipe in center of sleeve.
Assemble mechanical sleeve seals and install in annular space between pipe
and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements
to expand and make watertight seal.
R. Fire-Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings,

and floors at pipe penetrations. Seal pipe penetrations with firestop materials. All
pipes penetration at the fire rated partitions which includes the wall and the floor
shall be provided with fire collars with intumescent material
3.2 PIPING JOINT CONSTRUCTION
A. Join pipe and fittings according to the following requirements and Division 21
Sections specifying piping systems.
B. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.
C. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings
before assembly.
D. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1.
Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove
burrs and restore full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows:
21 05 00
1. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads unless

dry seal threading is specified.
2. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are
corroded or damaged. Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open
welds.
E. Welded Joints: Construct joints according to AWS D10.12, using qualified processes
and welding operators according to Part 1 "Quality Assurance" Article.
F. Flanged Joints: Select appropriate gasket material, size, type, and thickness for
service application. Install gasket concentrically positioned. Use suitable lubricants
on bolt threads.
G. Plastic Piping Solvent-Cement Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces. Join pipe and
fittings according to the following:
1. Comply with ASTM F 402 for safe-handling practice of cleaners, primers, and
solvent cements.
2. CPVC Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2846/D 2846M Appendix.
H. Plastic Pressure Piping Gasket Joints: Join according to ASTM D 3139.
3.3 PAINTING
A. Painting of fire-suppression systems, equipment, and components is specified in

Division 09 Sections "Interior Painting" and "Exterior Painting."
B. Damage and Touchup: Repair marred and damaged factory-painted finishes with
materials and procedures to match original factory finish.
3.4 CONCRETE BASES
A. Concrete Bases: Anchor equipment to concrete base according to equipment

manufacturer's written instructions and according to seismic codes at Project.
1. Construct concrete bases of dimensions indicated, but not less than 100 mm
larger in both directions than supported unit.
2. Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor. Unless
otherwise indicated, install dowel rods on 450-mm centers around the full
perimeter of the base.
3. Install epoxy-coated anchor bolts for supported equipment that extend
through concrete base, and anchor into structural concrete floor.
4. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use supported equipment
manufacturer's setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and
directions furnished with items to be embedded.
5. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported
equipment.
6. Install anchor bolts according to anchor-bolt manufacturer's written
instructions.
7. Use 20.7Mpa (3000-psi) 28-day compressive-strength concrete and
reinforcement or as specified in structural details
21 05 00
3.5 ERECTION OF METAL SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGES
A. Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment,
and elevation to support and anchor fire-suppression materials and equipment.
B. Pipe Hangers:
1. Maximum distance between the hangers should not exceed 3.7m.
2. No less than one hanger shall be provided for each section of pipe.
3. Distance between a hanger and the centerline of a upright sprinkler shall not
be less than 75mm.
4. Sprinkler piping shall be adequately secured to restrict the movement of
piping upon sprinkler operation.
5. The unsupported length between the end sprinkler and the last hanger on the
line shall not be greater than 900mm. Where the limit exceeds the pipe shall
be extended beyond the end sprinkler and shall be supported by an
additional hanger.
6. Unsupported arm over length shall not exceed 610mm.
7. Wall mounted side wall sprinkler shall be retrained to prevent movement.
3.6 GROUTING
A. Mix and install grout for fire-suppression equipment base bearing surfaces, pump
and other equipment base plates, and anchors.
B. Clean surfaces that will come into contact with grout.
C. Provide forms as required for placement of grout.
D. Avoid air entrapment during placement of grout.
E. Place grout, completely filling equipment bases.
F. Place grout on concrete bases and provide smooth bearing surface for equipment.
G. Place grout around anchors.
H. Cure placed grout.
21 05 00
21 12 00 - Fire Suppression Standpipes
PART 1 - GENERAL

Supplementary Conditions and shall be read in conjunction with the following section.
Number Description
210100 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE OF FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEM
210500 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Pipes, fittings, and specialties.

2. Fire-protection valves.
3. Hose connections.
4. Hose stations.
5. Fire-department connections.
6. Alarm devices.
7. Manual control stations.
8. Control panels.
9. Pressure gages.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. High-Pressure Standpipe Piping: Fire-suppression standpipe piping designed to operate

at working pressure higher than standard 1200 kPa (175 psig), but not higher than 2070
kPa (300 psig).
B. Standard-Pressure Standpipe Piping: Fire-suppression standpipe piping designed to

operate at working pressure 1200kPa (175 psig) maximum.
21 12 00
1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTIONS
A. Automatic Wet-Type, Class I Standpipe System: Includes DN 65 (NPS 2-1/2) hose

connections. Has open water-supply valve with pressure maintained and is capable of
supplying water demand.
1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Standard-Pressure, Fire-Suppression Standpipe System Component: Listed for 1200 kPa

(175psig) minimum working pressure.
B. High-Pressure, Fire-Suppression Standpipe System Component: Listed for 2070 kPa (300
psig) working pressure.
C. Delegated Design: Design fire-suppression standpipes, including comprehensive

engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance
requirements and design criteria indicated.
D. Fire-suppression standpipe design shall be approved by authorities having jurisdiction.
1. Minimum residual pressure at each hose-connection outlet is as follows:

a. DN65 (NPS 2-1/2”) Hose Connections: 690 kPa (100 psig).
2. Maximum residual pressure at required flow at each hose-connection outlet is as

follows unless otherwise indicated:
a. DN65 (NPS 2-1/2”) Hose Connections: 1200kPa (175 psig)
Where system pressure exceeds, provide pressure reducing valves.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include rated capacities, operating
characteristics, electrical characteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories. All
products shall have “No objection” certificate from the Authority having Jurisdiction.
B. Shop Drawings: For fire-suppression standpipes. Include plans, elevations, sections,

details, and attachments to other work.
1. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring.
C. Delegated-Design Submittal: For standpipe systems indicated to comply with

performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis and calculation data
signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their
preparation.
21 12 00
Submit structural calculation for all supports, anchors, thrust supports and all such
installation.
Submit Hydraulic flow calculation for the standpipe.
D. Coordination Drawings: Fire-suppression standpipes, drawn to scale, on which the

following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers
of the items involved:
1. Domestic water piping.

2. Drainage piping.
3. HVAC hydronic piping and Ducting.
4. Electrical and ELV Systems
5. Architectural layouts and ceiling layouts
6. Structural elements
E. Approved Standpipe Drawings: Working plans, prepared according to NFPA 14, that
have been approved by authorities having jurisdiction, including hydraulic calculations.
F. Welding certificates.
G. Fire-hydrant flow test report.
H. Field Test Reports and Certificates: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance
with performance requirements and as described in NFPA 14. Include "Contractor's
Material and Test Certificate for Aboveground Piping" and "Contractor's Material and
Test Certificate for Underground Piping."
I. Field quality-control reports.
J. Operation and Maintenance Data: For fire-suppression standpipes specialties to

include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.
A. Installer Qualifications:
1. Installer's responsibilities include designing, fabricating, and installing fire-

suppression standpipes and providing professional engineering services needed
to assume engineering responsibility. Base calculations on results of fire-hydrant
flow test.
a. Engineering Responsibility: Preparation of working plans, calculations, and

field test reports by a qualified professional engineer.
21 12 00
B. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and operators according to ASME Boiler

and Pressure Vessel Code.
C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in

NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and
application.
D. NFPA Standards: Fire-suppression standpipe equipment, specialties, accessories,

installation, and testing shall comply with NFPA 14, "Standard for the Installation of
Standpipe and Hose Systems."
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PIPING MATERIALS
A. Comply with requirements in "Piping Schedule" Article for applications of pipe, tube,
and fitting materials, and for joining methods for specific services, service locations, and
pipe sizes.
2.2 STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS
A. Piping: ASTM A 53, Grade B, Seamless Hot dipped galvanized conforming to ASTM
A153. Pipe ends may conform to ANSI/AWWA C-606.
B. Threaded Fitting:

a. National Fittings, Inc.

b. Shurjoint Piping Products.
c. Tyco Fire & Building Products LP.
d. Victaulic Company.
2. For Sizes DN40 (NPS 1-1/4) and smaller
3. Malleable threaded fittings Class 150.
4. ANSI B1.20.1 Threads
5. ANSI B16.3 Dimensions, pressure rating
6. ASTM A197 Material
7. A153 Galvanizing
21 12 00
8. UL 860
9. All fittings shall be form the same manufacturer
C. Grooved-Joint, Fitting:


e. Equally approved manufacturers.
2. For Sizes NPS 2 (DN50) and above.
3. All couplings and fittings shall be UL listed or FM approved.
4. Minimum Pressure Rating for Standard-Pressure Piping: 1200kPa (175 psig)
5. Minimum Pressure Rating for High-Pressure Piping: 2070kPa (300 psig)
6. All fitting and coupling shall be form the same manufacturer. Grooving tools shall
be supplied by the same manufacturer as the grooved component
7. Grooved-End Fittings for Steel Piping: ASTM A 47/A 47M, malleable-iron casting or
ASTM A 536, ductile-iron casting; Hot dipped galvanized with dimensions
matching steel pipe.
8. Grooved-End-Pipe Couplings for Steel Piping: Manufactured in two segment of

cast ductile iron conforming to ASTM A-536, Grade 65-45-12. Gasket shall be
pressure responsive synthetic rubber, grade to suit the intended service,
conforming to ASTM D-2000. Bolts shall be zinc plated to ASTM B-633 heat treated
carbon steel track head conforming to ASTM A-449 and ASTM A-183, minimum
tensile strength of 758450kPa (110,000psi).
2.3 LISTED FIRE-PROTECTION VALVES
A. General Requirements:
1. Valves shall be UL listed or FM approved.

2. Minimum Pressure Rating for Standard-Pressure Piping: 1200kPa (175 psig).
3. Minimum Pressure Rating for High-Pressure Piping: 2070kPa (300 psig).
B. Ball Valves:
21 12 00


2. Standard: UL 1091 except with ball instead of disc.

3. Valves DN 40 (NPS 1-1/2)and Smaller: Bronze body with threaded ends.
4. Valves DN 50 (NPS 2) and above: Ductile-iron body with grooved ends.
5. Chrome plated carbon steel ball and stem, TFE seats, with Fluoroelstomer seal
C. Angle Valves:


2. Hand wheel : Aluminum
3. Hand wheel Screw: Stainless Steel
4. Stem and Body: Bronze ASTM B584 Alloy C84400
5. Seat Screw: Stainless Steel
D. Bronze Butterfly Valves:


2. Standard: UL 1091.
3. Minimum Pressure Rating: 1200 kPA (175 psig).
4. Size: Valves DN 50 (NPS 2)and Smaller
5. Body Material: Bronze.
6. End Connections: Threaded.
E. Iron Butterfly Valves:

21 12 00

3. Minimum Pressure Rating: 2070 kPa (300 psig).
4. Size: Valves DN 50 (NPS 2) and above
5. Body Material: Ductile iron conforming to ASTM A-536.
6. Disc: Ductile iron conforming to ASTM A-395, nickel plated
7. Seat Material: Grade E rubber conforming to ASTM D-2000
8. Stem: Type 416 Stainless Steel conforming to ASTM 582
9. Operator: Gear operator with iron housing.
10. End Connections: Grooved.
F. Check Valves:

3. Pressure Rating: 2070 kPa (300 psig) .
4. Type: Swing check suitable for horizontal and vertical installation.
5. Body Material: Ductile Iron. Flow direction shall be embossed on the body.
6. Cover: Ductile Iron, removable type for ease of field maintenance. Maintenance
Kit shall be available from the same manufacturer to allow back flushing without
removal of the check valve.
7. Cover Gasket: Nitrile Rubber
8. Clapper: Stainless Steel
9. Clapper Facing: EPDM Grade E
10. Spring: Stainless Steel
11. Hinge Shaft: Stainless Steel
12. Retaining Ring: Stainless Steel
13. Retention Bolt: Stainless Steel
14. Retaining Disc; Stainless Steel
15. Locknut: Stainless Steel
17. Finish: Factory applied non-lead Red paint.
G. Bronze OS&Y Gate Valves:

21 12 00

3. Pressure Rating: 1200 kPa (175 psig).
H. Iron OS&Y Gate Valves:


4. Body Material: Ductile iron.
I. Indicating-Type Butterfly Valves:


3. Pressure Rating: 1200 kPa (175 psig) minimum.
4. Valves DN 40 (NPS 1-1/2) and Smaller:
a. Valve Type: Ball or butterfly.

b. Body Material: Bronze.
c. End Connections: Threaded.
5. Valves DN 50 (NPS 2) and Larger:
a. Valve Type: Butterfly.
21 12 00
b. Body Material: Cast or ductile iron.

c. End Connections: Grooved.
6. Valve Operation: Integral Electrical, 115-V ac, prewired, two-circuit, supervisory
switch indicating device. The gear operator shall be provided with two sets of
factory installed internal switch each having SPDT contacts to indicate any
movement from the valve’s normal open position during the first two revolution of
the hand wheel.
J. NRS Gate Valves:


3. Pressure Rating: 2070 kPa (300 psig) (2070 kPa).
4. Body Material: Cast iron with indicator post flange.
5. Stem: Nonrising.
2.4 SPECIALTY VALVES
1. Standard: UL's "Fire Protection Equipment Directory” listing or "Approval Guide,"

published by FM Global, listing.
2. Pressure Rating:
a. Standard-Pressure Piping Specialty Valves: 1200 kPa (175 psig) minimum.

b. High-Pressure Piping Specialty Valves: 2070 kPa (300 psig) .
B. Alarm Valves:


21 12 00
3. Design: For horizontal or vertical installation.
4. Working Pressure: 2070 kPa (300psig)
5. Shall be divided seat ring, Rubber-Faced clapper, water flow alarm check valve.
6. Include trim sets for bypass, main drain, electrical sprinkler alarm switch, Water
Motor alarm, pressure gauges (system and supply) and fill-line attachment with
strainer.
7. Body: Ductile Iron
8. Hand Hole Cover: Ductile Iron
9. Clapper Spring and Hinge Pin: Stainless steel.
10. Clapper: Stainless steel for up to DN 65 (NPS 2-1/2). For larger pipe ductile iron.
Clapper shall have EPDM Clapper facing
C. Pressure-Reducing Valves:



3. Body: Ductile iron as per ASTM A536 Grade 65-45-12
4. Handhole Cover: Ductile iron as per ASTM A536 Grade 65-45-12
5. Diaphragm: Nylon Fabric reinforced natural rubber as per ASTM D2000
6. Diaphragm Cover Fasteners: Galvanized Carbon steel.
7. Pilot Valve: Brass and stainless steel with nylon fabric reinforced natural rubber as
per ASTM D2000 diaphragm. With tamper cap
8. Strainer: brass and Stainless Steel
9. Pressure Gauges: DN 65 (NPS 2-1/2), stainless steel case with range upto 2415 kPa
(350psig).
10. Tube, Fitting, and Needle Valve: Copper, brass and stainless steel
11. End Connection: Grooved
12. Pattern: Angle or globe.
13. Finish: Factory applied Anti corrosive coating
D. Automatic (Ball Drip) Drain Valves:


21 12 00
4. To be installed on the inlet side of the fire department check line to automatically
drain at a predetermined decease in pressure and close a predetermined
increase in pressure.
5. Body: Brass
8. Type: Automatic draining, ball check.
9. Drain: Tundish with drain, piped to nearest drain point.
10. Size: DN 15 (NPS 1/2).
2.5 LANDING VALVE
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of

the following or ‘Approved Equal’.
1. American Fire Hose & Cabinet.

2. Angus; Part of Kidde Fire Fighting Organization.
3. Viking Corporation
B. Hose Valve:
1. Standard: UL 668, DN 65 (NPS 2-1/2), Compliant with BS 9990 (BS 5306 and BS 5041
Part 1) for connecting fire hose.
2. Type: Adjustable.
3. Size: DN 65 (NPS 2-1/2).
4. Pressure-Control Device: Pressure reducing
5. Design Outlet Pressure Setting: 690 kPa (100 psig).
6. Hose Valve and Trim Finish: Brass or Bronze
8. Rated flow: 750l/m at 800kPa outlet pressure
9. Body Test Pressure: 3100 kPa (450psig) (3100kPa)
10. Pattern: Angle.
11. Material: Valve body, spindle, bonnet, Gland nut shall be of Gunmetal.
12. Hand wheel: Cast Iron with GI locknut.
13. The valve shall be complete with Gunmetal Plunger Release Lug, plastic Blank
Cap with GI Hook & chain
14. Pressure-Control Device: UL 1468, integral with Gunmetal Adjusting Cap.
15. Inlet: Flanged.
16. Outlet: Instantaneous Female and matching local fire-department requirement.
21 12 00
2.6 REEL-TYPE HOSE STATIONS


B. Hose Reel shall be as follows:
1. Standard: Shall be tested, approved and CE marked according to BS EN671-1.

2. Hose Reel and Side Disc: 1.2mm electro galvanized Steel, Powder coated
RAL3001 Red.
3. Hose-reel assembly. Include hose valve, wall bracket, hose reel, water-retention
device, hose pins, and hose.
4. Operation: Integrated Automatic Stop Valve to open to full capacity within 2
revolutions of Reel.
5. Hose: Size 25mm, Length 30m maximum. Designed to standard BS EN694 for hose
reel
6. Nozzle: Chrome Plated brass nozzle with jet/spray/shut-off operations
7. Mounting: Shall be mounted on a swinging arm with internal waterways to swing
180o to enable run out in all direction. The mounting shall be selected as per the
Architect / ID Finsishes.
8. Each Hose Reels shall be provided with Pressure reducing valve at the inlet.
2.7 CABINET


3. Viking Corporation
B. Cabinet shall be as follows

1. The cabinet shall be suitable for housing the Landing valve and the hose reel in a
horizontal arrangement in separate compartment. The cabinet shall also house
the fire extinguishers. The Compartment for the extinguisher shall be located
vertical below the hose reel and landing valve compartment of similar width.
2. The Cabinet shall be made of 0.6mm (24 gauge) Galvanized steel sheet with
Stainless Steel Brush finish.
3. The Cabinet shall be complete with Piano hinge over entire height, Door
catches/release handle.
4. The size shall be sufficient to allow the installation of necessary equipment at hose
station so that they so not interfere with prompt use of the equipment at time of
fire. Within the cabinet the hose connection shall be located so that there is at
21 12 00
least 25mm (1inch) between any part of the cabinet and the handle of the vale
when the valve is in any position
5. Knockouts for Inlet Pipe work shall be provided suitable to the entry pipe sizes.
6. Signage: The Cabinet shall be conspicuously identified both English and Arabic
text as well as pictorial indication.
7. The cabinet shall be used for fire equipments only.
2.8 FIRE-DEPARTMENT CONNECTIONS
A. Flush-Type, Fire-Department Connection- breeching Inlet:


2. Standard: Manufactured in compliance to BS 5041: Part 3.

3. Type: Flush, for recessed wall mounting within Cabinet.
4. Pressure Rating: 1200 kPa (175 psig) minimum. Tested to 24 bar hydrostatic
pressure. Shall be listed for a working pressure equal to or greater than the
pressure requirement of the system demand.
5. Body Material: Cast Iron to BS 1452.
6. Inlets: 65mm male instantaneous coupling to BS 336 and matching local fire-
department sizes with non return valve, blanking caps, chain, with bronze springs
and stainless steel lock-nut and washer
7. Caps: Inlet plastic blank cap and chain.
8. Outlet: With pipe threads.
9. Body Style: Square
10. Number of Inlets: Four
11. Outlet Location: Back.
12. Finish: Factory applied Red Enamel
13. Outlet Size: DN 150 (NPS 6).
14. Flange Size: PN16 to BS EN 1092-2
15. Drain: 25mm drain valve with blanking cap and chain.
B. Breeching Inlet Cabinet:

1. The Cabinet shall be suitable to house the 4way breeching inlet.
2. The cabinet shall be in Electro Galvanized steel with Electrostatic Powder
Coating.
3. The door shall have Wire Mesh reinforced Glass complete with locking
arrangement
4. Shall be suitable for Recess Mounting
5. Text “Breeching Inlet” shall be displayed in English and Arabic
21 12 00
2.9 ALARM DEVICES
A. Alarm-device types shall match piping and equipment connections.
B. Retain remaining paragraphs if devices are specified in this Section, or delete if devices
are specified in Division 28 Sections "Digital, Addressable Fire-Alarm System" and "Zoned
(DC Loop) Fire-Alarm System."
Water-Motor-Operated Alarm:


3. Type: Mechanically operated, with Pelton wheel.
4. Alarm Gong: Cast aluminum with red-enamel factory finish.
5. Size: 10-inch (250-mm) diameter.
6. Working Pressure: 300psig (2070kPa)
7. Components: Shaft length, bearings, and sleeve to suit wall construction.
8. Inlet : DN 20 (NPS 3/4) With Clean out Plug.
9. Outlet : DN 25 (NPS 1) drain connection, to be piped to nearest drain.
10. Y-Strainer: DN 20, cast iron, 20 mesh screen at alarm outlet of the water flow
detection valve trim
C. Electrically Operated Alarm Bell:


3. Type: Vibrating, metal alarm bell.
4. Size DN 250 (NPS 10).
5. Finish: Red-enamel factory finish, suitable for outdoor use.
21 12 00
D. Water-Flow Indicators:


3. Water-Flow Detector: Electrically supervised.
4. Components: Two single-pole, double-throw circuit switches for isolated alarm
and auxiliary contacts, 7 A, 125-V ac and 0.25 A, 24-V dc; complete with factory-
set, field-adjustable retard element to prevent false signals and tamperproof
cover that sends signal if removed.
5. Type: Paddle operated.
7. Design Installation: Horizontal or vertical.
E. Pressure Switches:


3. Type: Electrically supervised water-flow switch with retard feature.
4. Components: Single-pole, double-throw switch with normally closed contacts.
5. Design Operation: Rising pressure signals water flow.
F. Valve Supervisory Switches:

one of the following or ‘Approved Equal’

3. Type: Electrically supervised.
4. Components: Single-pole, double-throw switch with normally closed contacts.
21 12 00
5. Design: Signals that controlled valve is in other than fully open position.
2.10 PRESSURE GAGES

1. AMETEK; U.S. Gauge Division.

2. Ashcroft Inc.
3. Brecco Corporation.
4. WIKA Instrument Corporation.
B. Standard: UL 393.
C. Dial Size: DN 100 (NPS 4).
D. Pressure Gage Range: 0 to 20 bar (0 to 300 psig)
E. Water System Piping Gage: Include "WATER" label on dial face.
2.11 SLEEVES
A. Galvanized-Steel-Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, standard weight, zinc

coated, plain ends.
2.12 GROUT
A. Standard: ASTM C 1107, Grade B, posthardening and volume adjusting, dry, hydraulic-
cement grout.
B. Characteristics: Nonshrink, and recommended for interior and exterior applications.
C. Design Mix: 34 MPa (5000-psi), 28-day compressive strength.
D. Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Perform fire-hydrant flow test according to NFPA 14 and NFPA 291. Use results for
system design calculations required in "Quality Assurance" Article.
21 12 00
B. Report test results promptly and in writing.
3.2 EXAMINATION
A. Examine roughing-in for hose connections and stations to verify actual locations of
piping connections before installation.
B. Examine walls and partitions for suitable thickness, fire- and smoke-rated construction,
framing for hose-station cabinets, and other conditions where hose connections and
stations are to be installed.
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.3 WATER-SUPPLY CONNECTIONS
A. Connect fire-suppression tank directly from the water meter from the WDD network with
ball float valve.
3.4 PIPING INSTALLATION
A. Locations and Arrangements: Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate

general location and arrangement of piping. Install piping as indicated, as far as
practical.
1. Deviations from approved working plans for piping require written approval from
authorities having jurisdiction. File written approval with Architect before
deviating from approved working plans.
B. Piping Standard: Comply with requirements in NFPA 14 for installation of fire-suppression

standpipe piping.
C. Install seismic restraints on piping. Comply with requirements in NFPA 13 for seismic-
restraint device materials and installation.
D. Install listed fittings to make changes in direction, branch takeoffs from mains, and
reductions in pipe sizes.
E. Install drain valves on standpipes. Extend drain piping to outside of building.
F. Install automatic (ball drip) drain valves to drain piping between fire-department
connections and check valves. Drain to floor drain or outside building.
G. Drains and Test Riser:

1. A permanently installed DN 75 (NPS 3) drain riser shall be provided adjacent to
each standpipe equipped with pressure regulating device to facilitate tests of
21 12 00
each device. The riser shall be equipped with a DN 75 x 65 (NPS 3 x 2-1/2) tee
with internal threaded swivel fitting having NHS threads as per NFPA 1963, with
plug located on every other floor.
2. Each standpipe shall be provided with a means of draining. A drain valve and
piping, of DN 50 (NPS 2) located at the lowest point of the standpipe piping
downstream of the isolation valve, shall be arranged to discharge water at an
approval location.
H. Install alarm devices in piping systems.
I. Install hangers and supports for standpipe system piping according to NFPA 14.
Comply with requirements in NFPA 13 for hanger materials.
J. Install pressure gages on riser or feed main and at top of each standpipe. Include
pressure gages with connection not less than DN 8 (NPS ¼) and with soft-metal seated
globe valve, arranged for draining pipe between gage and valve. Install gages to
permit easy removal.
K. Pressurize and check standpipe system piping
3.5 JOINT CONSTRUCTION
A. Install couplings, flanges, flanged fittings, unions, nipples, and transition and special
fittings that have finish and pressure ratings same as or higher than system's pressure
rating for aboveground applications unless otherwise indicated.
B. Install unions adjacent to each valve in pipes DN 40 (NPS 1-1/2) and smaller.
C. Install flanges, flange adapters, or couplings for grooved-end piping on valves,

apparatus, and equipment having DN 50 (NPS 2) and larger end connections.
D. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.
E. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipes, tubes, and fittings
before assembly.
F. Flanged Joints: Select appropriate gasket material in size, type, and thickness suitable
for water service. Join flanges with gasket and bolts according to ASME B31.9.
G. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1.
Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs
and restore full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows:
1. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads.

corroded or damaged.
21 12 00
H. Steel-Piping, Cut-Grooved Joints: Cut square-edge groove in end of pipe according to

AWWA C606. Assemble coupling with housing, gasket, lubricant, and bolts. Join steel
pipe and grooved-end fittings according to AWWA C606 for steel-pipe joints.
I. Steel-Piping, Roll-Grooved Joints: Roll rounded-edge groove in end of pipe according

to AWWA C606. Assemble coupling with housing, gasket, lubricant, and bolts. Join
steel pipe and grooved-end fittings according to AWWA C606 for steel-pipe grooved
joints.
3.6 VALVE AND SPECIALTIES INSTALLATION
A. Install listed fire-protection valves, trim and drain valves, specialty valves and trim,
controls, and specialties according to NFPA 14 and authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Install listed fire-protection shutoff valves supervised-open, located to control sources of

water supply except from fire-department connections. Install permanent identification
signs indicating portion of system controlled by each valve.
C. Specialty Valves:
1. General Requirements: Install in vertical position for proper direction of flow, in

main supply to system.
2. Alarm Valves: Install bypass check valve drain-line connection.
3.7 LANDING VALVE AND HOSE REEL INSTALLATION
A. Install hose connections adjacent to standpipes.
B. Install freestanding hose connections for access and minimum passage restriction.
C. Install DN 65 (NPS 2-1/2) hose connections with quick-disconnect DN 65 x 40 (NPS 2-1/2 x

1-1/2) reducer adapter and flow-restricting device.
D. Install wall-mounted-type hose connections in cabinets. Install valves at angle required

for connection of fire hose.
E. Install test drain valve as required.
F. Valve shall be unobstructed and shall be located not less than 900mm or more than
1500mm above the floor.
G. Install hose-reel hose stations on wall with bracket in cabinet.
H. Pressure reducing valves shall be installed to all connection to hose reel.
21 12 00
I. Include pipe escutcheons, with finish matching valves, inside cabinet where water-
supply piping penetrates cabinet.
3.8 FIRE-DEPARTMENT CONNECTION INSTALLATION
A. Install wall-type, fire-department breeching inlet connections in cabinet.
B. Install automatic (ball drip) drain valve at each check valve for fire-department
connection.
C. Fire department connection shall be located not less than 450mm (18inch) nor more
than 1200mm (48inch) above the adjoining ground, sidewalk, or grade surface.
3.9 SLEEVE INSTALLATION
A. General Requirements: Install sleeves for pipes and tubes passing through penetrations
in floors, partitions, roofs, and walls.
B. Sleeves are not required for core-drilled holes.
C. Permanent sleeves are not required for holes formed in RCC by removable PE sleeves.
D. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces unless otherwise indicated.
E. Install sleeves in new partitions, slabs, and walls as they are built.
F. For interior wall penetrations, seal annular space between sleeve and pipe or pipe
insulation using joint sealants appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint.
G. For exterior wall penetrations above grade, seal annular space between sleeve and
pipe using joint sealants appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint.
H. For exterior wall penetrations below grade, the sleeve shall be provided with Puddle
flange. Seal annular space between sleeve and pipe using sleeve seals.
I. Seal space outside of sleeves in concrete slabs and walls with grout.
J. Install sleeves as recommend in NFPA 13 with respect to the pipe sizes, where is not
possible the sleeves shall provide that are large enough to provide 6mm (1/4-inch)
annular clear as minimum space between sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation.
K. Install sleeve materials according to the following applications:
1. Sleeves for Piping Passing through Concrete Slabs: Galvanized-steel pipe
a. Extend sleeves DN 50 (NPS 2) above finished floor level.
21 12 00
2. Sleeves for Piping Passing through Gypsum-Board Partitions:
a. GI Sheet sleeves (0.8mm) with necessary support for pipes smaller than DN
50 (NPS 2).
b. Galvanized-steel-sheet sleeves for pipes NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger.
3. Sleeves for Piping Passing through Concrete Walls:
a. Galvanized-steel-pipe sleeves
b. Install sleeves. as recommended by NFPA 13.
L. Fire-Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and
floors at pipe penetrations. Seal pipe penetrations with fire stop materials. Provide
complete detail of the fire stop material and system for each of the type of penetration
for engineer’s approval prior to executions. The installed system shall be inspected by
the authorized personnel and stamp of approval shall be displayed at every
installations.
3.10 IDENTIFICATION
A. Install labeling and pipe markers on equipment and piping according to requirements
in NFPA 14.
B. Identify system components, wiring, cabling, and terminals as per the electrical
sections.
C. The Labeling of the system & equipments shall meet the Operator Guideline /
Standards.
3.11 CLEANING AND TESTING
A. Tubes and all items of equipment shall be delivered, stored and maintained in closed
storage with their open ends effectively plugged, capped or sealed. All fittings, valves
and sundry items shall be stored in clean bins or bagged and stowed in suitable racks.
All such stored items shall be maintained under weatherproofed cover to be supplied
by the MEP sub-contractor until they are ready for incorporation in the works. Particular
care shall be taken to ensure that electrical equipment and components are kept
clean and dry.
B. Before installations are handed over or subjected to the inspection and tests, the entire
installation shall be thoroughly cleaned, both internally and externally.
C. All fire protection installations shall be flushed out with clean water. During the flushing
out, provision shall be made to exclude any items of plant, which could be damaged
by the cleaning operation. The entire operation shall be carried out to the satisfaction
of the Engineer.
21 12 00
D. The fire protection system shall be tested in accordance with the NFPA codes and the
relevant standards, with particular reference the requirements set forth in this section:
E. All testing shall be performed under the work of this section. All services required for
testing shall be a responsibility of the work of this section. The MEP sub-Contractor shall
notify the Engineer of all tests, 48 hours prior to testing.
F. The fire protection piping System shall be tested hydrostatically for not less than 2 hours
and at one time of the system pressure without any leaks or as directed by the local fire
department.
G. If the systems are tested in sections, the connection to the previously tested section
shall be included.
H. All tests that may be required by the local fire authorities shall be performed under the
work of this section, in the presence of their representative, if so required.
I. All leaks shall be corrected and the system re-tested until no leaks are found, at no cost
to the client.
J. Functional tests of all water flow alarms are a responsibility of the works of this Section.
K. When the various systems are completed, operation tests shall be run on all equipment
to demonstrate proper operating conditions. These tests shall be run under the
observation of the inspector and the client’s operating engineer. The client’s operators
shall be instructed during this period. Operation tests shall be performed under the work
of this section.
L. Should any piece of equipment or apparatus of any material or work fail in any of these
tests, it shall be immediately removed and replaced by a perfect material, and the
portion of the work replaces shall again be tested under the work of this Section.
M. Cost to repair any damages to the building construction occasioned by pipe leaks or
defective materials shall be become under the works of this section, at no cost to the
client. All corrective work shall commence immediately after damage occurs.
3.12 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Perform tests and inspections.
B. Tests and Inspections:

1. Leak Test: After installation, charge systems and test for leaks. Repair leaks and
retest until no leaks exist.
2. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning
controls and equipment.
3. Flush, test, and inspect standpipe systems according to NFPA 14, "System
Acceptance" Chapter.
4. Energize circuits to electrical equipment and devices.
21 12 00
5. Coordinate with fire-alarm tests. Operate as required.

6. Coordinate with fire-pump tests. Operate as required.
7. Verify that equipment hose threads are same as local fire-department
equipment.
C. Fire-suppression standpipe system will be considered defective if it does not pass tests
and inspections.
D. Prepare test and inspection reports.
3.13 DEMONSTRATION
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance

personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain specialty valves.
3.14 PIPING SCHEDULE
A. Piping between Fire-Department Connections and Check Valves: Schedule 40

seamless galvanized steel pipe with ends to match the fire department connection,
B. Standard-pressure, wet-type, fire-suppression standpipe piping, DN 40 (NPS 1-1/2) and

smaller shall be the following:
1. Schedule 40, seamless galvanized-steel pipe with cut-grooved ends; galvanized,

with threaded ends.
C. Standard-pressure, wet-type, fire-suppression standpipe piping, DN 50 (NPS 2) (DN 50)

and larger shall be the following:
1. Schedule 40, seamless galvanized-steel pipe with cut-grooved ends; galvanized,
grooved-end fittings for steel piping; grooved-end-pipe couplings for steel piping;
and grooved joints.
21 12 00
21 13 13 - Wet Pipe Sprinkler Systems
PART 1 - GENERAL

section.
Number Description
1.2 SUMMARY
1. Pipes, fittings, and specialties.

2. Fire-protection valves.
3. Fire-department connections.
4. Sprinklers.
5. Excess-pressure pumps.
6. Alarm devices.
7. Manual control stations.
8. Control panels.
9. Pressure gages.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. High-Pressure Sprinkler Piping: Wet-pipe sprinkler system piping designed to operate

at working pressure higher than standard 175 psig (1200 kPa), but not higher than
300 psig (2070 kPa).
B. Standard-Pressure Sprinkler Piping: Wet-pipe sprinkler system piping designed to

operate at working pressure of 175 psig (1200 kPa) maximum.
1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTIONS
A. Wet-Pipe Sprinkler System: Automatic sprinklers are attached to piping containing

water and that is connected to water supply through alarm valve. Water
21 13 13
discharges immediately from sprinklers when they are opened.

Sprinklers open when heat melts fusible link or destroys frangible device.
A. Standard-Pressure Piping System Component: Listed for 175-psig (1200-kPa)

minimum working pressure.
B. High-Pressure Piping System Component: Listed for 300-psig (2070-kPa) working

pressure.
C. Delegated Design: Design sprinkler system(s), including comprehensive engineering

analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and
design criteria indicated.
D. Sprinkler system design shall be approved by authorities having jurisdiction.
1. Sprinkler Occupancy Hazard Classifications: Ordinary Hazard,

Group 1
2. Minimum Density for Automatic-Sprinkler Piping Design: 0.15

gpm over 1500-sq. ft. (6.1 mm/min. over 139-sq. m)
3. Maximum Protection Area per Sprinkler: 130 sq. ft. (12.1 sq. m)
4. Total Combined Hose-Stream Demand Requirement:

According to NFPA 13 unless otherwise indicated:
1.6 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include rated capacities,
operating characteristics, electrical characteristics, and furnished specialties and
accessories.
B. Shop Drawings: For wet-pipe sprinkler systems. Include plans, elevations, sections,
details, and attachments to other work.
Delegated-Design Submittal: For sprinkler systems indicated to comply with

performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and
sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.
Submit structural calculation for all supports, anchors, thrust supports and all such
installation.
Submit Hydraulic calculation.
C. Coordination Drawings: Sprinkler systems, drawn to scale, on which the following

items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the
items involved:
21 13 13
1. Domestic water piping.

2. Compressed air piping.
3. HVAC hydronic piping.

4. HVAC Equipments and Ducting
5. Electrical and ELV Systems
6. Civil and Structural elements
D. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer and professional engineer.
E. Approved Sprinkler Piping Drawings: Working plans, prepared according to

NFPA 13, that have been approved by authorities having jurisdiction, including
hydraulic calculations.
G. Fire-hydrant flow test report.
H. Field Test Reports and Certificates: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance
with performance requirements and as described in NFPA 13. Include "Contractor's
Material and Test Certificate for Aboveground Piping."
I. Field quality-control reports.
J. Operation and Maintenance Data: For sprinkler specialties to include in

emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.
A. Installer Qualifications:
1. Installer's responsibilities include designing, fabricating, and

installing sprinkler systems and providing professional
engineering services needed to assume engineering
responsibility. Base calculations on results of fire-hydrant flow
test.
a. Engineering Responsibility: Preparation of working plans, calculations,

and field test reports by a qualified professional engineer.
B. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and operators according to ASME Boiler

and Pressure Vessel Code.

application.
D. NFPA Standards: Sprinkler system equipment, specialties, accessories, installation,

and testing shall comply with the following:
1. NFPA 13, "Installation of Sprinkler Systems."
21 13 13
1.8 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of sprinklers with other construction that

penetrates ceilings, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, and partition
assemblies.
1.9 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with
protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1. Sprinkler Cabinets: Finished, wall-mounted, steel cabinet with

hinged cover, and with space for minimum of six spare
sprinklers plus sprinkler wrench. Include number of sprinklers
required by NFPA 13 and sprinkler wrench. Include separate
cabinet with sprinklers and wrench for each type of sprinkler
used on Project.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. Comply with requirements in "Piping Schedule" Article for applications of pipe, tube,
and fitting materials, and for joining methods for specific services, service locations,
and pipe sizes.
2.2 STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS
A. Piping: ASTM A 53, Grade B Seamless Hot dipped Galvanized Steel Pipe. Pipe ends
may be factory or field formed to match joining method.
A. Threaded Fitting:
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,

provide products by one of the following or ‘Approved Equal’.

2. For Sizes NPS 1-1/4 (DN40) and smaller

3. Malleable threaded fittings Class 150.
4. ANSI B1.20.1 Threads
5. ANSI B16.3 Dimensions, pressure rating
6. ASTM A197 Material
7. A153 Galvanizing
8. UL 860
21 13 13
9. All fittings shall be form the same manufacturer
B. Grooved-Joint, Steel-Pipe Appurtenances:


2. For Sizes NPS 2 (DN50) and above.
3. All couplings and fittings shall be UL listed or FM approved.
4. Minimum Pressure Rating for Standard-Pressure Piping: 175 psig

(1200 kPa).
5. Minimum Pressure Rating for High-Pressure Piping: 300 psig

(2070 kPa).
6. All fitting and coupling shall be form the same manufacturer.

Grooving tools shall be supplied by the same manufacturer as
the grooved component.
7. Grooved-End Fittings for Steel Piping: ASTM A 47/A 47M,

malleable-iron casting or ASTM A 536, ductile-iron casting; Hot
dipped galvanized with dimensions matching steel pipe.
8. Grooved-End-Pipe Couplings for Steel Piping: Manufactured in

two segment of cast ductile iron conforming to ASTM A-536,
Grade 65-45-12. Gasket shall be pressure responsive synthetic
rubber, grade to suit the intended service, conforming to
ASTM-2000. Bolts shall be zinc plated to ASTM B-633 heat
treated carbon steel track head conforming to ASTM A-449
and ASTM A-183, minimum tensile strength of 110,000psi
(758450kPa).
C. Wet Riser Underground Pipes and fittings dual anti corrosion coating:

a. PERMA PIPE Saudi Arabia LLC
2. The Underground pipe coating application for pipes, pipelines,

fittings and girth welds shall be in accordance with the
requirements of Standards and the Manufacturer’s
recommendations.
3. The High Build Epoxy (HBE) coating materials shall

comply with the following:
21 13 13
a) A shall consist of Bisphenol epoxy resin along with

appropriate fillers, color pigments, thixotropic additives,
and other additives selected to yield abrasion resistant
properties on pipelines. Phenolic modifications of the epoxy
resin are allowed. The High Build Epoxy (HBE) coating material
shall have 98% ± 2% volume of solids as determined in accord-
ance with ASTM 02697-03.
b) Part B shall consist of appropriate amide or amine

type curing agents in the proper proportion with Part A to
thoroughly cure the applied coating within the time and
temperature limits established by the Manufacturer.
Isocyanate type modifications shall not be allowed.
MINIMUM MATERIAL REQUIREMENTS

Sl.
Item Description Test Method Acceptable Ranges
No.
Proven service history
1 demonstrated For the past 5 years
2 Volume Solids % ASTM D2697 98% ± 2%
OFT microns (mils) per
3 coat SSPC-PA2 Min 750 urn
4 Shelf life 12 months
One (1) year of immer-
5 sion in water at 40°C EN ISO 2812-Part 2 No film defects
6 Pot Life @ 20°C Min 30 Minuets
7 Touch Dry@ 20°C 8 Hrs Max.
8 Hard Dry @ 20°C 24 Hrs Max
9 Temperature Resistance 95°C
10 Adhesion psi I Test Model ASTM D4541 Min. 1740_psi, 12 MPa
Minimum Impact Re-
11 sistance ASTM G14/ 02794 4.0 Joules
12 Abrasion Resistance ASTM D4060-1(CS17) Max 115 mg per 1000 cycle
13 Cathodic Disbandment ASTM G8 23°C Max. 4 mm
14 Cathodic Disbandment ASTM G42 93 °C Max 10 mm
15 Minimum Elongation ASTM D 2370 Min2%
16 Barcol Hardness ASTM D 2583-06 Min 30
2.3 LISTED FIRE-PROTECTION VALVES
1. Valves shall be UL listed or FM approved.

2. Minimum Pressure Rating for Standard-Pressure Piping: 175 psig
(1200 kPa).
3. Minimum Pressure Rating for High-Pressure Piping: 300 psig
(2070 kPa).
21 13 13
B. Ball Valves:

2. Standard: UL 1091 except with ball instead of disc.

3. Valves NPS 1-1/2 (DN 40) and Smaller: Bronze body with
threaded ends.
4. Valves NPS 2 (DN 50) and above: Ductile-iron body with
grooved ends.
5. Chrome plated carbon steel ball and stem, TFE seats, with
Fluoroelstomer seal
C. Angle Valves:

2. Hand wheel : Aluminum
3. Hand wheel Screw: Stainless Steel
4. Stem and Body: Bronze ASTM B584 Alloy C84400
5. Seat Screw: Stainless Steel
D. Bronze Butterfly Valves:


3. Minimum Pressure Rating: 175 psig (1200 kPa).
4. Size: Valves NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller
E. Iron Butterfly Valves:

21 13 13
3. Minimum Pressure Rating: 300 psig (2070 kPa).
4. Size: Valves NPS 2 (DN 50) and above
5. Body Material: Ductile iron conforming to ASTM A-536.
6. Disc: Ductile iron conforming to ASTM A-395, nickel plated
7. Seat Material: Grade E rubber conforming to ASTM D-2000
8. Stem: Type 416 Stainless Steel conforming to ASTM 582
9. Operator: Gear operator with iron housing.
F. Check Valves:

3. Pressure Rating: 300 psig (2070 kPa).
4. Type: Swing check suitable for horizontal and vertical
installation.
5. Body Material: Ductile Iron. Flow direction shall be embossed
on the body.
6. Cover: Ductile Iron, removable type for ease of field
maintenance. Maintenance Kit shall be available from the
same manufacturer to allow back flushing without removal of
the check valve.
7. Cover Gasket: Nitrile Rubber
8. Clapper: Stainless Steel
9. Clapper Facing: EPDM Grade E
11. Hinge Shaft: Stainless Steel
13. Retention Bolt: Stainless Steel
14. Retaining Disc; Stainless Steel
15. Locknut: Stainless Steel
17. Finish: Factory applied non-lead Red paint.
G. Bronze OS&Y Gate Valves:

21 13 13
H. Iron OS&Y Gate Valves:

4. Body Material: Ductile iron.
I. Indicating-Type Butterfly Valves:

3. Pressure Rating: 175 psig (1200 kPa) minimum.
4. Valves NPS 1-1/2 (DN 40) and Smaller:
a. Valve Type: Ball or butterfly.

b. Body Material: Bronze.
c. End Connections: Threaded.
5. Valves NPS 2 (DN 50) and Larger:
a. Valve Type: Butterfly.

b. Body Material: Cast or ductile iron.
c. End Connections: Grooved.
6. Valve Operation: Integral Electrical, 115-V ac, prewired, two-
circuit, supervisory switch indicating device. The gear operator
shall be provided with two sets of factory installed internal
switch each having SPDT contacts to indicate any movement
from the valve’s normal open position during the first two
revolution of the hand wheel.
J. NRS Gate Valves:

21 13 13

4. Body Material: Cast iron with indicator post flange.
5. Stem: Nonrising.
2.4 SPECIALTY VALVES
1. Standard: UL's "Fire Protection Equipment Directory" listing or
"Approval Guide," published by FM Global, listing.
2. Pressure Rating:
a. Standard-Pressure Piping Specialty Valves: 175 psig (1200 kPa)

minimum.
b. High-Pressure Piping Specialty Valves: 300 psig (2070 kPa).
3. Body Material: Cast or ductile iron.

4. Size: Same as connected piping.
B. Alarm Valves:

2. Standard: UL 193 / UL753.

3. Design: For horizontal or vertical installation.
5. Shall be divided seat ring, Rubber-Faced clapper, water flow
alarm check valve.
6. Include trim sets for bypass, main drain, electrical sprinkler
alarm switch, Water Motor alarm, pressure gauges (system and
supply) and fill-line attachment with strainer. The sprinkler
system shall be fitted with an approved water motor alarm,
which shall be located at a distance not exceeding 21m from
the alarm valve, and at a height not to exceed 6m above the
alarm valve. The pipe work and fittings used shall be
galvanized and to the sizes determined by the NFPA-13.The
pipe work shall be arranged to drain through a fitting having
an orifice not exceeding 3 mm in diameter. The orifice plate
may form an integral part of the fitting but shall be
21 13 13
manufactured from a non-ferrous material to prevent the hole

from becoming blocked by corrosion or foreign matter.
7. A 15 mm test valve shall be installed on the installation side of
each alarm valve.
8. Body: Ductile Iron
9. Hand Hole Cover: Ductile Iron
10. Clapper Spring and Hinge Pin: Stainless steel.
11. Clapper: Stainless steel for up to NPS 2-1/2 (DN65). For larger
pipe ductile iron. Clapper shall have EPDM Clapper facing
C. Electric Alarm Pressure Switches:

1. The electric alarm pressure switch should be UL 753 Listed. It
shall be installed in the system as per NFPA 13 and they shall be
mounted on a vertical branch pipe at least 300 mm long.
2. The pressure switch shall be sufficiently sensitive to operate
when only one sprinkler is discharging. The pressure switch shall
be provided with volt free contracts to facilitate monitoring by
a Building Management System, and wired to the main fire
alarm panel.
D. Zone Control Valve: A zone control valve set shall UL, FM Approved and it is to be
provided for each sprinkler system zone as shown in the drawings, and shall
comprise:
1. Butterfly valve shall have UL 1091 .It shall be fitted with factory
installed UL/FM apporved tamper switch.
2. Flow alarm switch shall be UL listed and FM approved for the
size of the pipe in which it is installed as a paddle type water
flow indicator. Shall be fixed after the butterfly valve, on the
main supply pipe and before any connection is taken off.
3. Inspector test and drain connections.
4. Dial pressure gauges suitable for the water pressures shall be
fitted so arranged that it can be easily removed for testing and
checking without
E. Pressure-Reducing Valves:


3. Body: Ductile iron as per ASTM A536 Grade 65-45-12
4. Handhole Cover: Ductile iron as per ASTM A536 Grade 65-45-12
5. Diaphragm: Nylon Fabric reinforced natural rubber as per
ASTM D2000
6. Diaphragm Cover Fasteners: Galvanized Carbon steel.
7. Pilot Valve: Brass and stainless steel with nylon fabric reinforced
natural rubber as per ASTM D2000 diaphragm. With tamper
cap
8. Strainer: brass and Stainless Steel
21 13 13
9. Pressure Gauges: 2-1/2 inch(65 mm) diameter, stainless steel

case with range upto 350psig (2415kPa).
10. Tube, Fitting, and Needle Valve: Copper, brass and stainless
steel
11. End Connection: Grooved
12. Pattern: Angle or globe.
13. Finish: Factory applied Anti corrosive coating
F. Automatic (Ball Drip) Drain Valves:

4. To be installed on the inlet side of the fire department check
line to automatically drain at a predetermined decease in
pressure and close a predetermined increase in pressure.
5. Body: Brass
8. Type: Automatic draining, ball check.
9. Drain: Tundish with drain, piped to nearest drain point.
10. Size: NPS 1/2 (DN 15).
2.5 SPRINKLER SPECIALTY PIPE FITTINGS
A. Branch Outlet Fittings:

4. Body Material: Ductile-iron housing with EPDM seals and bolts
and nuts.
5. Type: Mechanical-T and -cross fittings.
6. Configurations: Snap-on and strapless, ductile-iron housing
with branch outlets.
7. Size: Of dimension to fit onto sprinkler main and with outlet
connections as required to match connected branch piping.
8. Branch Outlets: Grooved, (50mm and larger), (threaded
40mm and smaller).
21 13 13
B. Flow Detection and Test Assemblies:

a. Tyco Fire & Building Products LP.

b. Victaulic Company.

4. Body Material: Cast- or ductile-iron housing with orifice, sight
glass, and integral test valve.
C. Sprinkler Inspector's Test Fittings:

c. Viking Corporation.

4. Body Material: Cast- or ductile-iron housing with sight glass.
6. Inlet and Outlet: Threaded.
2.6 SPRINKLERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one

of the following or ‘Approved Equal’.
1. Tyco Fire & Building Products LP.

2. Victaulic Company.
3. Viking Corporation.
B. Sprinkler Temperature Rating Classification, and Color Coding
Temperature Max Ambient Temperature Color Code Bulb Color

Classification Ceiling Rating
Temperature
Ordinary 38oC (100oF) 68oC (155oF) Uncolored Red
Intermediate 66oC (150oF) 79oC (175oF) White Yellow
Intermediate 66oC (150oF) 93oC (200oF) White Green
Intermediate 66oC (150oF) 100oC (212oF) White Green
High 107oC (225oF) 141oC (286oF) Blue Blue
Extra High 149oC (300oF) 182oC (360oF) Red Purple
Ultra High 240oC (465oF) 260oC (500oF) Orange Black
21 13 13
C. General Requirements:

2. Pressure Rating for Automatic Sprinklers: 175 psig (1200 kPa)
minimum.
3. Pressure Rating for High-Pressure Automatic Sprinklers: 300 psig
(2070 kPa).
4. Fire Sprinklers and accessories shall be of one manufacturer
throughout the building. No mixing of sprinkler brands shall be
permitted.
5. Sprinkler shall be of all brass frame construction utilizing a metal
Belleville Spring seal.
6. Sprinklers utilizing non-metal part are strictly prohibited.
D. Automatic Sprinklers with Heat-Responsive Element:
1. Standard Response Pendent Sprinkler:
Minimum Operating Pressure; 7psi (0.5bar)

Maximum Working Pressure :175psi (12bar)
Test Pressure: Factory tested hydrostatically to 500psi (34.5bar)
Thread Size:1/2" (15mm)
Nominal K-factor: 5.6US(80.6metric)
Approvals: UL listed and FM approved.
Overall Length: 2-1/4"(57mm)
Frame Casting: Brass UNS-C84400
Deflector: Copper UNS-C19500
Bulb: Glass with nominal 5mm diameter
Belleville Spring Sealing Assembly: Nickel Alloy, Coated on
both side with PTFE tape.
Screw: Brass-UNS-C36000
Pip Cap and Insert assembly: Copper UNS-C11000 and
Stainless Steel UNS-S30400
Escutcheons: For recess installation
Finish: Chrome
2. Quick Response Pendent Sprinkler:

Maximum Working Pressure :175psi(12bar)
Test Pressure: Factory tested hydrostatically to 500psi(34.5bar)
Deflector: Brass UNS-C26000
21 13 13

Escutcheons: For recess installation
Finish: Chrome
3. Quick Response Concealed Pendent Sprinkler:

Deflector: Copper UNS-C19500
Deflector Pins: Stainless Steel Alloy
Button: Brass UNS-C36000
both side with Teflon tape.
Screw: 18-8 Stainless Steel
Cover adapter: Cold Rolled Steel UNS-G10080, Finish Clear
Chromate over Zinc Plating.
Cover Assembly Material:
Cover : Copper UNS-C11000
Base : Brass UNS-C26000
Spring : Nickel Alloy
Finish: As per Architectural surface finish. All finish shall be
factory applied.
The Sprinkler shall be preassembled with threaded adapter for
installation with low profile cover assembly that provides upto
1/2"(12.7mm) of vertical adjustment. The arrangement of
cover plate shall be such that it allows easy installation of the
cover plate after system is tested and ceiling finished. It shall
also allow removal of ceiling panels without removing the
sprinkler.
4. Quick Response Extended Coverage Horizontal Sidewall

Sprinkler:
Minimum Operating Pressure; As per application

Deflector: Phosphor Bronze UNS-C51000
21 13 13
Pip Cap : Brass UNS-C31400

Compression Screw: Brass UNS-C36000
5. Standard Response Upright Sprinkler:

Deflector: Brass UNSC23000
Finish: Brass
Provide Sprinkler Guard From the same manufacturer as
sprinkler.
6. Quick Response Upright Sprinkler:

Deflector: Brass UNSC23000
Finish: Brass
Provide Sprinkler Guard From the same manufacturer as
sprinkler.
E. Sprinkler Escutcheons:
1. Escutcheons shall be two piece Adjustable Slip-on Recessed

type as applicable to the type of sprinkler.
2. Escutcheons shall be UL listed and FM approved for use with
the sprinkler head in which they are installed.
21 13 13
3. Finish shall match architectural finish as required by the

architect.
F. Sprinkler Guards:

c. Viking Corporation.
3. Approvals: UL listed, FM approved.

4. Material : Bright Basic Steel UNS-G10100
5. Finish : Clear Chromate over Zinc Plating
6. Type: Wire cage with fastening device for attaching to
sprinkler.
2.7 ALARM DEVICES
A. Alarm-device types shall match piping and equipment connections.
A. Water-Motor-Operated Alarm:

3. Type: Mechanically operated, with Pelton wheel.
4. Alarm Gong: Cast aluminum with red-enamel factory finish.
5. Size: 10-inch (250-mm) diameter.
7. Components: Shaft length, bearings, and sleeve to suit wall
construction.
8. Inlet: NPS 3/4 (DN 20) With Clean out Plug.
9. Outlet: NPS 1 (DN 25) drain connection, to be piped to nearest
drain.
10. Y-Stainer: ¾ inch, cast iron, 20 mesh screen at alarm outlet of
the water flow detection valve trim
B. Electrically Operated Alarm Bell:

21 13 13
3. Type: Vibrating, metal alarm bell.
4. Size 10-inch (250-mm) diameter.
5. Finish: Red-enamel factory finish, suitable for outdoor use.
C. Water-Flow Indicators:

3. Water-Flow Detector: Electrically supervised.
4. Components: Two single-pole, double-throw circuit switches
for isolated alarm and auxiliary contacts, 7 A, 125-V ac and
0.25 A, 24-V dc; complete with factory-set, field-adjustable
retard element to prevent false signals and tamperproof cover
that sends signal if removed.
5. Type: Paddle operated.
7. Design Installation: Horizontal or vertical.
D. Pressure Switches:

3. Type: Electrically supervised water-flow switch with retard
feature.
4. Components: Single-pole, double-throw switch with normally
closed contacts.
5. Design Operation: Rising pressure signals water flow.
E. Valve Supervisory Switches:

a) National Fittings, Inc.
b) Shurjoint Piping Products.
c) Tyco Fire & Building Products LP.
d) Victaulic Company.
21 13 13
3. Type: Electrically supervised.

4. Components: Single-pole, double-throw switch with normally
closed contacts.
5. Design: Signals that controlled valve is in other than fully open
position.
2.8 PRESSURE GAGES

1. AMETEK; U.S. Gauge Division.

2. Ashcroft Inc.
3. Brecco Corporation.
4. WIKA Instrument Corporation.
B. Standard: UL 393.
C. Dial Size: 3-1/2- to 4-1/2-inch (90- to 115-mm) diameter.
D. Pressure Gage Range: 0 to 300 psig (0 to 2070 kPa)
E. Water System Piping Gage: Include "WATER" label on dial face.
2.9 ESCUTCHEONS
A. General: Manufactured ceiling, floor, and wall escutcheons and floor plates.
B. One-Piece, Deep-Pattern Escutcheons: Deep-drawn, box-shaped brass with

chrome-plated finish.
2.10 SLEEVES
A. Galvanized-Steel-Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, standard weight, zinc

coated, plain ends.
2.11 GROUT
A. Standard: ASTM C 1107, Grade B, posthardening and volume adjusting, dry,

hydraulic-cement grout.
B. Characteristics: Nonshrink, and recommended for interior and exterior applications.
C. Design Mix: 5000-psi (34-MPa), 28-day compressive strength.
D. Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged.
21 13 13
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Perform fire-hydrant flow test according to NFPA 13 and NFPA 291. Use results for
system design calculations required in "Quality Assurance" Article.
B. Report test results promptly and in writing.
3.2 PIPING INSTALLATION
A. Locations and Arrangements: Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate

general location and arrangement of piping. Install piping as indicated, as far as
practical.
1. Deviations from approved working plans for piping require

written approval from authorities having jurisdiction. File written
approval with Architect before deviating from approved
working plans.
B. Piping Standard: Comply with requirements for installation of sprinkler piping in

NFPA 13.
C. Install seismic restraints on piping. Comply with requirements for seismic-restraint

device materials and installation in NFPA 13.
D. Use listed fittings to make changes in direction, branch takeoffs from mains, and
reductions in pipe sizes.
E. Install unions adjacent to each valve in pipes NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller.
F. Install flanges, flange adapters, or couplings for grooved-end piping on valves,

apparatus, and equipment having NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger end connections.
G. Install "Inspector's Test Connections" in sprinkler system piping, complete with shutoff
valve, and sized and located according to NFPA 13.
H. Install sprinkler piping with drains for complete system drainage.
I. Install sprinkler control valves, test assemblies, and drain risers adjacent to
standpipes when sprinkler piping is connected to standpipes.
J. Install alarm devices in piping systems.
K. Install hangers and supports for sprinkler system piping according to NFPA 13.
Comply with requirements for hanger materials in NFPA 13.
L. Install pressure gages on riser or feed main, at each sprinkler test connection, and at
top of each standpipe. Include pressure gages with connection not less than
NPS 1/4 (DN 8) and with soft metal seated globe valve, arranged for draining pipe
21 13 13
between gage and valve. Install gages to permit removal, and install where they
will not be subject to freezing.
M. Fill sprinkler system piping with water.
N. Install electric heating cables and pipe insulation on sprinkler piping in areas subject
to freezing. Comply with requirements for heating cables in Division 21 "Heat Tracing
for Fire-Suppression Piping" and for piping insulation in Division 21 Section "Fire-
Suppression Systems Insulation."
3.3 JOINT CONSTRUCTION
A. Install couplings, flanges, flanged fittings, unions, nipples, and transition and special
fittings that have finish and pressure ratings same as or higher than system's pressure
rating for aboveground applications unless otherwise indicated.
B. Install unions adjacent to each valve in pipes NPS 1-1/2 (DN 40) and smaller.
C. Install flanges, flange adapters, or couplings for grooved-end piping on valves,

apparatus, and equipment having NPS 2 (DN 50) and larger end connections.
D. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.
E. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipes, tubes, and
fittings before assembly.
F. Flanged Joints: Select appropriate gasket material in size, type, and thickness
suitable for water service. Join flanges with gasket and bolts according to
ASME B31.9.
G. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1.
Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove
burrs and restore full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows:
1. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe

threads.
2. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with
threads that are corroded or damaged.
H. Steel-Piping, Cut-Grooved Joints: Cut square-edge groove in end of pipe

according to AWWA C606. Assemble coupling with housing, gasket, lubricant, and
bolts. Join steel pipe and grooved-end fittings according to AWWA C606 for steel-
pipe joints.
I. Steel-Piping, Roll-Grooved Joints: Roll rounded-edge groove in end of pipe

according to AWWA C606. Assemble coupling with housing, gasket, lubricant, and
bolts. Join steel pipe and grooved-end fittings according to AWWA C606 for steel-
pipe grooved joints.
21 13 13
3.4 VALVE AND SPECIALTIES INSTALLATION
A. Install listed fire-protection valves, trim and drain valves, specialty valves and trim,
controls, and specialties according to NFPA 13 and authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Install listed fire-protection shutoff valves supervised open, located to control

sources of water supply except from fire-department connections. Install
permanent identification signs indicating portion of system controlled by each
valve.
C. Provide tamper switch to all valves and connect to fire alarm system
D. Install check valve in each water-supply connection. Install backflow preventers

instead of check valves in potable-water-supply sources.
E. Specialty Valves:
1. General Requirements: Install in vertical position for proper

direction of flow, in main supply to system.
2. Alarm Valves: Include bypass check valve and drain-line
connection.
3.5 SPRINKLER INSTALLATION
A. Install sprinklers in suspended ceilings in center of acoustical ceiling panels in

coordination with other services.
B. Install dry-type sprinklers with water supply from heated space. Do not install
pendent or sidewall, wet-type sprinklers in areas subject to freezing.
C. Install Ceiling Void Sprinkler wherever the void space is more than 800mm.
3.6 SLEEVE INSTALLATION
A. General Requirements: Install sleeves for pipes and tubes passing through
penetrations in floors, partitions, roofs, and walls.
B. Sleeves are not required for core-drilled holes.
C. Permanent sleeves are not required for holes formed in RCC by removable PE
sleeves.
D. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces unless otherwise
indicated.
E. Install sleeves in new partitions, slabs, and walls as they are built.
F. For interior wall penetrations, seal annular space between sleeve and pipe or pipe
insulation using joint sealants appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint.
21 13 13
G. For exterior wall penetrations above grade, seal annular space between sleeve and
pipe using joint sealants appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint.
H. For exterior wall penetrations below grade, the sleeve shall be provided with Puddle
flange. Seal annular space between sleeve and pipe using mechanical seals.
I. Seal space outside of sleeves in concrete slabs and walls with grout.
J. Install sleeves that are large enough to provide 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) annular clear
space between sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation unless otherwise indicated.
K. Install sleeve materials according to the following applications:
1. Sleeves for Piping Passing through Concrete Slabs:

Galvanized-steel pipe
a. Extend sleeves 2 inches (50 mm) above finished floor level.
1. Sleeves for Piping Passing through Gypsum-Board Partitions:
a. PVC-pipe sleeves for pipes smaller than NPS 2 (DN 50).

b. Galvanized-steel-sheet sleeves for pipes NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger.
1. Sleeves for Piping Passing through Concrete Walls:
a. Galvanized-steel-pipe sleeves
b. Install sleeves that are large enough to provide 1-inch (25-mm) annular
clear space between sleeve and pipe for installation of mechanical
seal.
L. Fire-Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings,

and floors at pipe penetrations. Seal pipe penetrations with fire stop materials.
Provide complete detail of the fire stop material and system for each of the type of
penetration for engineer’s approval prior to executions. The installed system shall be
inspected by the authorized personnel and stamp of approval shall be displayed at
every installations.
3.7 SLEEVE SEAL INSTALLATION
A. Install sleeve seals in sleeves in exterior concrete walls at water-service piping entries
into building.
B. Select type and number of sealing elements required for pipe material and size.
Position pipe in center of sleeve. Assemble sleeve seal components and install in
annular space between pipe and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that
cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal.
3.8 IDENTIFICATION
A. Install labeling and pipe markers on equipment and piping according to

requirements in NFPA 13.
21 13 13
B. Identify system components, wiring, cabling, and terminals. Comply with

requirements for identification specified in Division 26 Section "Identification for
Electrical Systems."
1. Leak Test: After installation, charge systems and test for leaks.
Repair leaks and retest until no leaks exist.
2. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and
malfunctioning controls and equipment.
3. Flush, test, and inspect sprinkler systems according to NFPA 13,
"Systems Acceptance" Chapter.
4. Energize circuits to electrical equipment and devices.
5. Start and run excess-pressure pumps.
6. Coordinate with fire-alarm tests. Operate as required.
7. Coordinate with fire-pump tests. Operate as required.
8. Verify that equipment hose threads are same as local fire-
department equipment.
C. Sprinkler piping system will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and
inspections.
3.10 CLEANING
A. Clean dirt and debris from sprinklers.
B. Remove and replace sprinklers with paint other than factory finish.
C. Tubes and all items of equipment shall be delivered, stored and maintained in
closed storage with their open ends effectively plugged, capped or sealed. All
fittings, valves and sundry items shall be stored in clean bins or bagged and stowed
in suitable racks. All such stored items shall be maintained under weatherproofed
cover to be supplied by the MEP sub-contractor until they are ready for
incorporation in the works. Particular care shall be taken to ensure that electrical
equipment and components are kept clean and dry.
D. Before installations are handed over or subjected to the inspection and tests, the
entire installation shall be thoroughly cleaned, both internally and externally.
E. All fire protection installations shall be flushed out with clean water. During the
flushing out, provision shall be made to exclude any items of plant, which could be
damaged by the cleaning operation. The entire operation shall be carried out to
21 13 13
3.11 DEMONSTRATION
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner’s maintenance

personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain specialty valves and pressure-
maintenance pumps.
3.12 PIPING SCHEDULE
A. ASTM A 53, Grade B Seamless Hot dipped Galvanized Steel Pipe. Pipe ends may be
factory or field formed to match joining method
B. Threaded Couplings and Fitting for sizes 40mm and less
C. Grooved Couplings and Fittings for Sizes 50mm and larger.
3.13 SPRINKLER SCHEDULE
A. Use sprinkler types in subparagraphs below for the following applications:
1. Areas without Ceilings: Quick response Upright sprinklers with

Wire Guard.
2. Ceiling void: Quick response Upright sprinklers with Wire Guard
3. Rooms with Suspended Ceilings: Quick response Concealed
sprinklers
4. Wall Mounting: Sidewall sprinklers.
5. Special Applications: Extended-coverage, as required for
coverage
B. Provide sprinkler types in subparagraphs below with finishes indicated.
1. Concealed Sprinklers: Rough brass, with factory-painted white

cover plate (color to match ID requirements).
2. Flush Sprinklers: Bright chrome, with painted white escutcheon.
3. Recessed Sprinklers: Bright chrome, with bright chrome
escutcheon.
4. Residential Sprinklers: Dull chrome.
5. Upright, Pendent, and Sidewall Sprinklers: Chrome plated in
finished spaces exposed to view; rough bronze in unfinished
spaces not exposed to view; wax coated where exposed to
acids, chemicals, or other corrosive fumes.
3.14 TESTING
A. The fire protection system shall be tested in accordance with the NFPA codes and
the relevant standards, with particular reference the requirements set forth in this
section:
21 13 13
B. All testing shall be performed under the work of this section. All services required for
testing shall be a responsibility of the work of this section. The MEP sub-Contractor
shall notify the Engineer of all tests, 48 hours prior to testing.
C. The fire protection piping System shall be tested hydrostatically for not less than 2
hours and at one time of the system pressure without any leaks or as directed by the
local fire department.
D. If the systems are tested in sections, the connection to the previously tested section
shall be included.
E. All tests that may be required by the local fire authorities shall be performed under
the work of this section, in the presence of their representative, if so required.
F. All leaks shall be corrected and the system re-tested until no leaks are found, at no
cost to the client.
G. Functional tests of all water flow alarms are a responsibility of the works of this
Section.
H. When the various systems are completed, operation tests shall be run on all
equipment to demonstrate proper operating conditions. These tests shall be run
under the observation of the inspector and the client’s operating engineer. The
client’s operators shall be instructed during this period. Operation tests shall be
performed under the work of this section.
I. Should any piece of equipment or apparatus of any material or work fail in any of
these tests, it shall be immediately removed and replaced by a perfect material,
and the portion of the work replaces shall again be tested under the work of this
Section.
J. Cost to repair any damages to the building construction occasioned by pipe leaks
or defective materials shall be become under the works of this section, at no cost to
the client. All corrective work shall commence immediately after damage occurs.
21 13 13
21 22 00 - Clean-Agent Fire Extinguishing Systems
PART 1 - GENERAL

section.
Number Description
210513 COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION

EQUIPMENT
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes clean-agent extinguishing systems and the following:
1. Piping and piping specialties.

2. Extinguishing-agent containers.
3. Extinguishing agent.
4. Detection and alarm devices.
5. Control and alarm panels.
6. Accessories.
7. Connection devices for and wiring between system components.
8. Connection devices for power and integration into building's fire alarm
system.
1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Clean-agent fire-extinguishing system shall be an engineered system for total

flooding of the hazard area including the room cavity below the ceiling and below
the raised floor. Provide separate zones above and below the raised floor. If smoke
is detected below the raised floor, agent shall be discharged in the under floor zone
only. If smoke is detected above the raised floor, agent shall be discharged in
zones above and below the floor.
A. Design clean-agent extinguishing system and obtain approval from authorities

having jurisdiction. Design system for Class A, B, or C fires as appropriate for areas
being protected and include safety factor. Use clean agent indicated and in
concentration suitable for normally occupied areas.
21 22 00
B. Clean agent shall be fluorinated ketone with the systematic name 1,1,1,2,2,4,5,5,5-
nonafluoro-4-(trifluoromethyl)-3-pentanone and the structural formula
CF3CF2C(=O)CF(CF3)2, a fully fluorinated analog of ethyl isopropyl ketone. The
clean agent shall have a ozone depletion potential of 0 and global warming
potential of 1 over 100 years. the atmospheric life of the clean agent shall be of 5
days
C. Performance Requirements: Discharge clean agent within 6 to 10 seconds and

maintain 5.6 percent concentration by volume at 70 deg F (21 deg C) for 10-minute
holding time in hazard areas.
1. Concentration in hazard areas greater than 9.0 percent immediately after

discharge or less than 5.3 percent throughout holding time will not be
accepted without written authorization from Owner and authorities having
jurisdiction.
2. System Capabilities: Minimum 620-psig (4278-kPa) calculated working
pressure and 360-psig (2484-kPa) initial charging pressure.
D. Cross-Zoned Detection: Devices located in two separate zones. Sound alarm on

activating single-detection device, and discharge extinguishing agent on actuating
single-detection device in other zone.
E. Verified Detection: Devices located in single zone. Sound alarm on activating

single-detection device, and discharge extinguishing agent on actuating second-
detection device.
F. System Operating Sequence: As follows:
1. Actuating First Detector: Visual indication on annunciator panel, energize

audible alarm and visual alarms (slow pulse), shut down air-conditioning and
ventilating systems serving protected area, close doors in protected area, and
send signal to fire alarm system.
2. Actuating Second Detector: Visual indication on annunciator panel, energize
audible and visual alarms (fast pulse), shut down power to protected
equipment, start time delay for extinguishing-agent discharge for 30 seconds,
and discharge extinguishing agent.
3. Extinguishing-agent discharge will operate audible alarms and strobe lights
inside and outside the protected area.
G. Manual stations shall immediately discharge extinguishing agent when activated.
H. Operating abort switches will delay extinguishing-agent discharge while being

activated, and switches must be reset to prevent agent discharge. Release of
hand pressure on the switch will cause agent discharge if the time delay has
expired.
I. The system shall be complete in all ways. It shall include all mechanical and
electrical installation, all detection and control equipment, agent storage
containers, FM 200 agent, discharge nozzles, pipe and fittings, manual release and
abort stations, audible and visual alarm devices, auxiliary devices and controls,
shutdowns, alarm interface, caution/ advisory signs, functional checkout and
testing, training and all other operations necessary for a functional, U.L. Listed
and/or F.M. approved Clean Agent Suppression System.
21 22 00
J. Provide two (2) inspections during the first year of service. Inspections shall be made
at 6 month intervals commencing when the system is first placed into normal
service.
K. The general contractor shall be responsible for sealing and securing the protected
spaces against agent loss and/or leakage during the 10 minute "hold" period.
L. The system(s) shall be actuated by cross zoned photoelectric detectors installed at

a maximum spacing of 250 sq. ft. (23.2 sq. m) per detector, in both the room,
underfloor and above ceiling protected spaces. If the air flow is one air change per
minute, photoelectric detectors shall be installed at a spacing not to exceed 125 sq.
ft. (11.6 sq. m) per detector. (Ref. NFPA No. 72 - current edition)
M. Detectors shall be wired in Sequential Detection method of operation, standard

Cross-Zoned detection, or Single Detector Release, using either a Class "A" or Class
"B" wiring arrangement. No other detection / wiring arrangements will be
acceptable.
N. Automatic operation of each protected area shall be as follows:

1. Actuation of one (1) detector, within the system, shall:
a. Illuminate the "ALARM" lamp on the control panel face.
b. Energize an alarm bell and/or an optional visual indicator.
c. Transfer sets of 5 Amp rated auxiliary contacts which can perform
auxiliary system functions such as: Operate door holder/closures on
access doors. Transmit a signal to a fire alarm system. Shutdown
HVAC equipment.
d. Light an individual lamp on an optional graphic annunciator.
2. Actuation of a 2nd detector, within the system, shall:
a. Illuminate the "PRE-DISCHARGE" lamp on the control panel face.
b. Energize a pre-discharge horn or horn/strobe device.
c. Shut down the HVAC system and/or close dampers.
d. Start time-delay sequence (not to exceed 60 seconds). System abort
sequence is enabled at this time.
e. Light an individual lamp on an optional graphic annunciator.
3. After completion of the time-delay sequence, the HFC-227ea Clean Agent
system shall discharge and the following shall occur:
a. Illuminate a "SYSTEM FIRED" lamp on the control panel face.
b. Shutdown of all power to high-voltage equipment.
c. Energize a visual indicator(s) outside the hazard in which the discharge
occurred.
d. Energize a "System Fired" audible device. (Optional)
4. The system shall be capable of being actuated by manual discharge devices
located at each hazard exit. Operation of a manual device shall duplicate
the sequence description above except that the time delays and abort
functions SHALL be bypassed. The manual discharge station shall be of the
electrical actuation type and shall be supervised at the main control panel.
O. EPO: Will terminate power to protected equipment immediately on actuation.
P. Low-Agent Pressure Switch: Initiate trouble alarm if sensing less than set pressure.
Q. Power Transfer Switch: Transfer from normal to stand-by power source.
21 22 00
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For the following:
1. Extinguishing-agent containers.
2. Extinguishing agent.
3. Discharge nozzles.
4. Control panels.
5. Detection devices.
6. Manual stations.
7. Switches.
8. Alarm devices.
9. Pipe hangers and supports.
B. Shop Drawings: Signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer. Include

design calculations. Include the following for hazard-area enclosure, drawn to
scale:
1. Plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. Indicate
dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly,
components, and location and size of each field connection. Field installation
layout drawings scale shall be 1:100m detailing the location of all agent
storage tanks, pipe runs, including pipe sizes and lengths, control panel(s),
detectors, manual pull stations, abort stations, audible and visual alarms, etc.
2. Auxiliary details and information such as maintenance panels, door holders,
special sealing requirements and equipment shutdowns.
3. Separate layouts, or drawings, shall be provided for each level, ( i.e.; room,
under floor, and above ceiling) and for mechanical and electrical work.
4. A separate layout or drawing shall show isometric details of agent storage
containers, mounting details and proposed pipe runs and sizes.
5. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring.
6. Design Calculations: For weight, volume, and concentration of extinguishing
agent required for each hazard area. Complete flow calculations shall be
provided from a U.L. listed computer program, for all engineered Clean Agent
systems. Calculation sheet(s) must include the manufacturers name and U.L.
listing number for verification. The individual sections of pipe and each fitting
to be used, as shown on the isometrics, must be identified and included in the
calculation. Total agent discharge time must be shown and detailed by zone.
7. Reflected Ceiling Plans: Show ceiling penetrations, ceiling-mounted items,
and the following:
a. Extinguishing-agent containers, piping, discharge nozzles, detectors,

and accessories.
b. Method of attaching hangers to building structure.
c. Other ceiling-mounted items including light fixtures, diffusers, grilles,
speakers, sprinklers, and access panels.
C. Permit Approved Drawings: Working plans, prepared according to NFPA 2001, that
have been approved by authorities having jurisdiction. Include design calculations.
D. Field quality-control test reports.
E. Maintenance Data: For components to include in maintenance manuals.
21 22 00
F. Provide calculations for the battery stand-by power supply taking into consideration
the power requirements of all alarms, initiating devices and auxiliary components
under full load conditions.
G. A complete sequence of operation detailing all alarm devices, shutdown functions,

remote signaling, damper operation, time delay and agent discharge for each
zone or system.
H. Electrical layout drawings shall show the location of all devices and include point-to-
point conduit runs and a description of the method(s) used for detector mounting.
I. Internal control panel wiring diagram shall include power supply requirements and
field wiring termination points.
A. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified

to practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in
providing engineering services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are
defined as those performed for installations of clean-agent extinguishing systems
that are similar to those indicated for this Project in material, design, and extent.
B. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of

clean-agent extinguishing systems and are based on the specific system indicated.

NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.
D. The installing contractor shall be trained by the supplier to design, install, test and
maintain Suppression Systems.
E. The installing contractor shall be an experienced firm regularly engaged in the

installation of automatic Clean Agent, or similar, fire suppression systems in strict
accordance with all applicable standards.
F. The installing contractor must have a minimum of eight (8) years’ experience in the
design, installation and testing of Clean Agent, or similar, fire suppression systems.
G. A list of systems of a similar nature and scope shall be provided on request.
H. The installing contractor shall maintain, or have access to, a Clean Agent
recharging station. The installing contractor shall provide proof of his ability to
recharge the largest Clean Agent system within 24 hours after a discharge. Include
the amount of bulk agent storage available.
I. The installing contractor shall be an authorized stocking distributor of the Clean

Agent system equipment so that immediate replacement parts are available
from inventory.
J. The installing contractor shall show proof of emergency service available on a

twenty-four hour, seven-days-a-week basis.
21 22 00
1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are
packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing
contents. Deliver extra materials to Owner.
1. Detection Devices: Not less than 20 percent of amount of each type installed.
2. Container Valves: Not less than 10 percent of amount of each size and type
installed.
3. Nozzles: Not less than 20 percent of amount of each type installed.
4. Extinguishing Agent: Not less than 100 percent of amount installed in largest
hazard area. Include pressure-rated containers with valves.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. In other Part 2 articles were titles below introduce lists, the following requirements
apply to product selection:
1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide

products by one of the following or ‘Approved Equal’.
2. Acceptable manufacturer:
SFFECO
KSA Central office - Riyadh
P.O.box:4441
Riyadh 14334
Tel: +966112650070
Fax: +966112652190
Lifeco, Lichfield fire and Safety Co. Ltd

P.O.box: 18605
Jabel ali
Free zone, Dubai, UAE
Tel: +97148834070
NAFFCO FZCO
P.O.box: 262169
Jabel ali
Free zone, Dubai, UAE
Tel: +97148151111
The manufacturer of the Suppression System hardware and detection

components shall have a minimum of 10 years experience in the design and
manufacture of similar types of suppression systems and who can refer to
similar installations providing satisfactory service.
21 22 00
B. The name of the manufacturer, part numbers and serial numbers shall appear on all
major components.
C. All devices, components and equipment shall be new, standard products of the
manufacturer’s latest design and suitable to perform the functions intended.
D. All equipment shall be U.L listed and/or FM approved.
A. Refer to Part 3 piping applications Article retained for applications of pipe, tube,
fitting, and joining materials.
B. Piping, Valves, and Discharge Nozzles: Comply with types and standards listed in
NFPA 2001, Section "Distribution," for charging pressure of system.
2.3 PIPE AND FITTINGS
A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type S, Grade B or ASTM A 106, Grade B; Schedule 80,
seamless galvanized steel pipe.
1. Threaded Fittings:
a. Malleable-Iron Fittings: ASME B16.3, Class 300.
b. Flanges and Flange Fitting: ASMEB16.11, Class300. Flange Bolts and Nuts
to ASME B18.2.1 carbon steel.
2. Forged steel Welding Fitting: ASME B16.11 Class 3000, Socket Pattern.
3. Grooved-End Fittings: FMG approved and NRTL listed, ASTM A 47/A 47M
malleable iron or ASTM A 536 ductile iron, with dimensions matching steel pipe
and ends factory grooved according to AWWA C606.
2.4 VALVES
A. General: Brass; suitable for intended operation.
B. Container Valves: With rupture disc or solenoid and manual-release lever, capable
of immediate and total agent discharge and suitable for intended flow capacity.
C. Valves in Sections of Closed Piping and Manifolds: Fabricate to prevent entrapment

of liquid, or install valve and separate pressure relief device.
D. Valves in Manifolds: Check valve; installed to prevent loss of extinguishing agent

when container is removed from manifold.
21 22 00
2.5 EXTINGUISHING-AGENT CONTAINERS
A. Description: Steel tanks complying with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code:
Section VIII, for unfired pressure vessels. Include minimum working-pressure rating
that matches system charging pressure, valve, pressure switch, and pressure gage.
1. Finish: Red, enamel or epoxy paint.

2. Manifold: Fabricate with valves, pressure switches, and connections for
multiple storage containers, as indicated.
3. Manifold: Fabricate with valves, pressure switches, selector switch, and
connections for main- and reserve-supply banks of multiple storage
containers.
4. Storage-Tank Brackets: Factory- or field-fabricated retaining brackets

consisting of steel straps and channels; suitable for container support,
maintenance, and tank refilling or replacement.
2.6 FIRE-EXTINGUISHING CLEAN AGENT
A. Clean Agent: Clean agent shall be fluorinated ketone with the systematic name
1,1,1,2,2,4,5,5,5-nonafluoro-4-(trifluoromethyl)-3-pentanone and the structural
formula CF3CF2C(=O)CF(CF3)2, a fully fluorinated analog of ethyl isopropyl ketone.
The clean agent shall have a ozone depletion potential of 0 and global warming
potential of 1 over 100 years. the atmospheric life of the clean agent shall be of 5
days

a. 3M.
2.7 DISCHARGE NOZZLES
A. Equipment manufacturer's standard one-piece brass or aluminum alloy of type,

discharge pattern, and capacity required for application.
2.8 MANIFOLD AND ORIFICE UNIONS
A. Description: NRTL-listed device with minimum 2175-psig (15-MPa) pressure rating, to

control flow and reduce pressure of IG-541 gas in piping.
1. NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Piping assembly with orifice, sized for system
design requirements.
2. NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and Larger: Piping assembly with nipple, sized for system
design requirements.
2.9 CONTROL PANELS
A. Description: UL Listed and FMG approved or including equipment and features

required for testing, supervising, and operating fire-extinguishing system.
21 22 00
B. Power Requirements: 120/240-V ac; with electrical contacts for connection to

system components and fire alarm system, and transformer or rectifier as needed to
produce power at voltage required for accessories and alarm devices.
C. The SHP Control System shall be microprocessor based with hardware and software
integration designed to guarantee reliability.
D. The SHP Control System shall support Cross Zoned, Sequential, Single Detector
Release and Manual Release detection/actuation methods
E. Enclosure: NEMA ICS 6, Type 1, enameled-steel cabinet.
1. Mounting: Recessed flush with surface.
F. Supervised Circuits: Separate circuits for each independent hazard area.
1. Detection circuits equal to the required number of zones, or addressable

devices assigned to the required number of zones.
2. Manual pull-station circuit.
3. Alarm circuit.
4. Release circuit.
5. Abort circuit.
6. EPO circuit.
G. Provide the following control-panel features:
1. Electrical contacts for shutting down fans, activating dampers, and operating
system electrical devices.
2. Automatic switchover to standby power at loss of primary power.
3. Storage container, low-pressure indicator.
4. Service disconnect to interrupt system operation for maintenance with visual
status indication on the annunciator panel.
5. Three (3) Class B (Style Y) indicating appliance circuits rated for 2.0 amps @ 24
VDC.
6. Four (4) Class B (Style A) initiating circuits
7. Optional Class A (Style D) module for initiating circuits
8. Eight (8) Status LEDs plus alpha-numeric display for troubleshooting: AC
normal; alarm; pre-discharge; release; supervisory; trouble; alarms silenced
and system abort.
9. Programmable pre-discharge and discharge timers
10. Resettable and continuous auxiliary output power
11. Five (5) optional Abort types
12. Intelligent Transistor protection to prevent noise spikes and microprocessor
failure from inadvertently activating release outputs
13. A dedicated Disarm switch for release outputs
14. Dedicated alarm and trouble contacts programmable for alarm, trouble, pre-
discharge, discharge, abort, supervisory or waterflow functions, depending on
panel configuration.
15. Two (2) Form “C” relays, rated at 5 amps, are provided on the SHP p a n e l
board. Installation of the optional SRM4 Relay Module (P/N 10-2176) will
provide four (4) additional 5 amp relays.
16. Multiple input power source - 120 VAC or 208/220 VAC @ 50/60 Hz
21 22 00
17. 2.6 amp @ 24 VDC power supply to operate high current draw horns and
strobes. Capable of allowing expansion to 8 amp external power supply for a
total of 10.6 amps of available power.
18. Available in either Red or Gray finish
H. Annunciator Panel: Graphic type showing protected, hazard-area plans and

locations of detectors, abort, EPO, and manual stations. Include lamps to indicate
device-initiating alarm, electrical contacts for connection to control panel, and
stainless-steel or aluminum enclosure.
I. Standby Power: Lead-acid or nickel-cadmium batteries with capacity to operate

system for 72 hours and alarm for minimum of 15 minutes. Include automatic
battery charger, with varying charging rate between trickle and high depending on
battery voltage that is capable of maintaining batteries fully charged. Include
manual voltage control, dc voltmeter, dc ammeter, electrical contacts for
connection to control panel, and suitable enclosure.
2.10 DETECTION DEVICES
A. Description: Comply with NFPA 2001 and NFPA 72, and include the following types:
1. Ionization Detectors: Comply with UL 268, dual-chamber type, having

sampling and referencing chambers, with smoke-sensing element.
2. Photoelectric Detectors: Comply with UL 268, consisting of LED light source
and silicon photodiode receiving element.
3. Remote Air-Sampling Detector System: Includes air-sampling pipe network, a
laser-based photoelectric detector, a sample transport fan, and a control
unit.
a. Comply with UL 268 and NRTL listed, operating at 24-V dc, nominal.
b. Pipe Network: CPVC tubing connects control unit with calibrated
sampling holes.
c. Smoke Detector: Particle-counting type with continuous laser beam.
Sensitivity adjustable to a minimum of four preset values.
d. Sample Transport Fan: Centrifugal type, creating a minimum static
pressure of 0.05-inch wg (12.5 Pa) at all sampling ports.
e. Control Unit: Multizone unit as indicated on Drawings. Provides same
system power supply, supervision, and alarm features as specified for
the control panel plus separate trouble indication for airflow and
detector problems.
f. Signals to the Central Fire Alarm Control Panel: Any type of local system
trouble is reported to the central fire alarm control panel as a composite
"trouble" signal. Alarms on each system zone are individually reported to
the central fire alarm control panel as separately identified zones.
2.11 MANUAL STATIONS
A. General Description: Semirecessed FMG approved or NRTL listed, with clear plastic
hinged cover, 120-V ac or low voltage compatible with controls. Include contacts
for connection to control panel.
21 22 00
B. Manual Release: "MANUAL RELEASE" caption, and red finish. Unit can manually
discharge extinguishing agent with operating device that remains engaged until
unlocked.
C. Abort Switch: "ABORT" caption, momentary contact, with green finish.

a. The optional Abort Station shall be the "Dead Man" type and shall be
located next to each manual switch.
b. The Abort Station shall be supervised and shall indicate a trouble
condition at the Control Panel, if depressed, and no alarm condition
exists.
c. "Locking" or "Keyed" abort stations shall not be permitted.
d. The Abort Station shall be located adjacent to each manual station.
D. EPO Switch: "EPO" caption, with yellow finish.
E. The electric manual release switch shall be a dual action device which provides a
means of manually discharging the Suppression System.
F. The Manual Release switch or Manual Pull station shall be a dual action device(s)
requiring two distinct operations to initiate a system actuation.
G. Manual actuation shall bypass the time delay and abort functions, shall cause the
system to discharge, and shall cause all release and shutdown devices to operate
in the same manner as if the system had operated automatically.
H. A Manual Release switch shall be located at each exit from the protected hazard
and shall have an advisory sign, provided at each location.
2.12 SWITCHES
A. Description: FMG approved or NRTL listed, where available, 120-V ac or low voltage
compatible with controls. Include contacts for connection to control panel.
1. Low-Agent Pressure Switches: Pneumatic operation.

2. Power Transfer Switches: Key-operation selector, for transfer of release circuit
signal from main supply to reserve supply.
3. Door Closers: Magnetic retaining and release device or electrical interlock to
cause the door operator to drive the door closed.
2.13 ALARM DEVICES
A. Description: FMG approved or NRTL listed, low voltage, and surface mounting,
unless otherwise indicated.
B. The Alarm Bell, Alarm Horn and Horn/Strobe devices shall operate on 24 volts Dc
power to allow supervision of the circuit wires
C. Bells: Minimum 6-inch (150-mm) diameter.
D. Horns: 90 to 94 dBA.
E. Strobe Lights: Translucent lens, with "FIRE" or similar caption.
21 22 00
F. The alarm bell and horn shall deliver a minimum sound level of 92 decibels at a
distance of 3m.
G. Horn and strobe light are to operate simultaneous from one power supply with flash
rate of 1-3 flashes per second minimum over the listed input voltage range.
H. A Strobe device shall be placed outside, and above, each exit door from the
protected space. Provide an advisory sign at each light location.
2.14 ELECTRICAL POWER AND WIRING
A. Electrical power, wiring, and devices are specified in Division 26.
2.15 SYSTEM AND CONTROL WIRING:
A. All system wiring shall be furnished and installed by the contractor.
B. All wiring shall be installed in electrical metallic tubing (EMT), or conduit, and must
be installed and kept separate from all other building wiring.
C. All system components shall be securely supported independent of the wiring. Runs
of conduit and wiring shall be straight, neatly arranged, properly supported,
installed parallel and perpendicular to walls and partitions.
D. The sizes of the conductors shall be those specified by the manufacturer. Color
coded wire shall be used. All wires shall be tagged at all junction points and shall
be free from shorts, earth connections (unless so noted on the system drawings),
and crosses between conductors. Final termination’s between the SHP control
panel and the system field wiring shall be made under the direct supervision of a
factory trained representative.
E. All wiring shall be installed by qualified individuals, in a neat and workmanlike

manner, to conform to the National Electrical Code, Article 725, and Article 760,
except as otherwise permitted for limited energy circuits, as described in NFPA 72 -
current edition. Wiring installation shall meet all local, state, province and/or
country codes.
F. The complete system electrical installation, and all auxiliary components, shall be
connected to earth ground in accordance with the National Electrical Code.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with hazard-
area leakage requirements, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting
work performance.
1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been

corrected.
21 22 00
3.2 PIPING APPLICATIONS
A. Piping between Storage Containers and Orifice Union:
1. Flanged pipe and fittings and flanged joints may be used to connect to
specialties and accessories and where required for maintenance.
2. Fittings Working Pressure: 2175 psig (15 MPa) minimum.
3. Flanged Joints: Class 600 minimum.
4. All Sizes: Schedule 80, steel pipe; forged-steel welding fittings; and welded
joints.
B. Piping Downstream from Orifice Union:
1. Flanged pipe and fittings and flanged joints may be used to connect to
specialties and accessories and where required for maintenance.
2. Fittings Working Pressure: 1000 psig (6900 kPa) minimum.
3. Flanged Joints: Class 300 minimum.
4. All Sizes: Schedule 80, steel pipe; forged-steel welding fittings; and welded
joints.
3.3 CLEAN-AGENT EXTINGUISHING PIPING INSTALLATION
A. Install clean-agent extinguishing piping and other components level and plumb and
according to manufacturers' written instructions.
B. Grooved Piping Joints: Groove pipe ends according to AWWA C606 dimensions.
Assemble grooved-end steel pipe and steel, grooved-end fittings with steel, keyed
couplings and lubricant according to manufacturer's written instructions.
C. Install extinguishing-agent containers anchored to substrate.
D. Install pipe and fittings, valves, and discharge nozzles according to requirements
listed in NFPA 2001, Section "Distribution," and in ASME B31.1.
1. Install valves designed to prevent entrapment of liquid or install pressure relief

devices in valved sections of piping systems.
2. Support piping using supports and methods according to NFPA 13.
3. Install seismic restraints for extinguishing-agent containers and piping systems.
4. Install control panels, detection system components, alarms, and accessories,
complying with requirements of NFPA 2001, Section "Detection, Actuation,
and Control Systems," as required for supervised system application.
3.4 CONNECTIONS
A. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
B. Install piping adjacent to extinguishing-agent containers to allow service and

maintenance.
21 22 00
C. Connect electrical devices to control panel and to building's fire alarm system.
Electrical power, wiring, and devices are specified in Electrical Sections
3.5 LABELING
A. Install labeling on piping, extinguishing-agent containers, other equipment, and

panels according to NFPA 2001.
B. Install signs at entry doors for protected areas to warn occupants that they are
entering a room protected with a clean-agent fire extinguishing system.
C. Install signs at entry doors to advise persons outside the room the meaning of the
horn(s), bell(s), and strobe light(s) outside the protected space.
A. Comply with operating instructions and procedures of NFPA 2001, Section "Approval
of Installations." Include the following tests and inspections to demonstrate
compliance with requirements:
1. Check mechanical items.

2. Inspect extinguishing-agent containers and extinguishing agent, and check
mountings for adequate anchoring to substrate.
3. Check electrical systems.
4. Check enclosure integrity. Comply with NFPA 2001, Section "Enclosure
Inspection," and Appendix C, "Enclosure Integrity Procedure." Provide
necessary dampers on air-conditioning and ventilation ducts.
5. Perform functional pre-discharge test.
6. Perform system functional operational test including, EPO, abort, and manual
release.
7. Check remote monitoring operations.
8. Check control-panel primary power source.
9. Perform "puff" test on piping system, using nitrogen.
10. Each detector shall be tested in accordance with the manufacturer's
recommended procedures, and test values recorded.
11. All system and equipment interlocks, such as door release devices, audible
and visual devices, equipment shutdowns, local and remote alarms, etc. shall
function as required and designed.
12. Each control panel circuit shall be tested for trouble by inducing a trouble
condition into the system.
B. Perform field-acceptance tests of each clean-agent extinguishing system when

installation is complete. Perform system testing only after hazard-area enclosure
construction has been completed and openings sealed. Comply with operating
instructions and procedures of NFPA 2001, Section "Approval of Installations." Include
the following to demonstrate compliance with requirements:
1. Perform functional predischarge test.

2. Perform system functional operational test.
3. Check remote monitoring operations.
4. Check control-panel primary power source.
5. Perform "puff" test on piping system, using nitrogen.
21 22 00
C. Correct malfunctioning equipment, then retest to demonstrate compliance.

Replace equipment that cannot be corrected or does not perform as specified and
indicated, then retest to demonstrate compliance. Repeat procedure until
satisfactory results are obtained.
1. Report test results promptly and in writing to Architect and authorities having
jurisdiction.
D. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports:
1. After installing clean-agent extinguishing piping system and after electrical

circuitry has been energized, test for compliance with requirements.
2. Perform each electrical test and visual and mechanical inspection stated in
NETA ATS, Sections "Inspection and Test Procedures" and "System Function
Tests." Certify compliance with test parameters.
3. Leak Test: After installation, charge system and test for leaks. Repair leaks
and retest until no leaks exist.
4. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to
confirm proper motor rotation and unit operation. Remove malfunctioning
units, replace with new units, and retest.
E. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.
3.7 ACCEPTANCE TESTS:
A. At the time "As-Built" drawings and maintenance/operations manuals are submitted,

the installing contractor shall submit a "Test Plan" describing procedures to be used
to test the control system(s). The Test Plan shall include a step-by-step description of
all tests to be performed and shall indicate the type and location of test apparatus
to be employed. The tests shall demonstrate that the operational and installation
requirements of this specification have been met. All tests shall be conducted in the
presence of the owner and shall not be conducted until the Test Plan has been
approved.
B. The tests shall demonstrate that the entire control system functions as designed and
intended. All circuits shall be tested: automatic actuation, solenoid and manual
actuation, HVAC and power shutdowns, audible and visual alarm devices and
manual override of abort functions. Supervision of all panel circuits, including AC
power and battery power supplies, shall be tested and qualified.
C. A room pressurization test shall be conducted, in each protected space, to

determine the presence of openings which would affect the agent system
concentration levels. The test(s) shall be conducted using the Retro-Tec Corp. Door
Fan system, or equivalent, with integrated computer program. All testing shall be in
accordance with NFPA 2001.
D. If room pressurization testing indicates that openings exist which would result in
leakage and/or loss of the extinguishing agent, the installing contractor shall be
responsible for coordinating the proper sealing of the protected space(s) by the
general contractor or his sub-contractor or agent. The general contractor shall be
responsible for adequately sealing all protected space(s) against agent loss or
21 22 00
leakage. The installing contractor shall inspect all work to ascertain that the
protected space(s) have been adequately and properly sealed. THE SUPPRESSION
SYSTEM INSTALLING CONTRACTOR SHALL BE RESPONSIBLE FOR THE SUCCESS OF THE
ROOM PRESSURIZATION TESTS. If the first room pressurization test is not successful, in
accordance with these specifications, the installing contractor shall direct the
general contractor to determine, and correct, the cause of the test failure. The
installing contractor shall conduct additional room pressurization tests, at no
additional cost to the owner, until a successful test is obtained. Copies of successful
test results shall be submitted to the owner for record.
3.8 CLEANING
A. Each pipe section shall be cleaned internally after preparation and before
assembly by means of swabbing, using a suitable nonflammable cleaner. Pipe
network shall be free of particulate matter and oil residue before installing nozzles or
discharge devices.
3.9 SYSTEM INSPECTIONS:
A. The installing contractor shall provide two (2) inspections of each system, installed
under this contract, during the one-year warranty period. The first inspection shall
be at the six month interval, and the second inspection at the 12 month interval,
after system acceptance. Inspections shall be conducted in accordance with the
manufacturer's guidelines and the recommendations of NFPA 2001.
B. Integrity Test must be done by qualified certified Engineer. The installer must have UL
Approved filling station for refilling and maintenance purpose.
C. Documents certifying satisfactory system(s) operation shall be submitted upon

completion of each inspection.
3.10 SYSTEM FILLING
A. Preparation:
1. Verify that piping system installation is completed and cleaned.

2. Check for complete enclosure integrity.
3. Check operation of ventilation and exhaust systems.
B. Filling Procedures:
1. Fill extinguishing-agent containers with extinguishing agent and pressurize to

indicated charging pressure.
2. Install filled extinguishing-agent containers.
3. Energize circuits.
4. Adjust operating controls.
21 22 00
3.11 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE:
Prior to final acceptance, the installing contractor shall provide complete operation
and maintenance instruction manuals, four (4) copies for each system, to the
owner. All aspects of system operation and maintenance shall be detailed,
including piping isometrics, wiring diagrams of all circuits, a written description of the
system design, sequence of operation and drawing(s) illustrating control logic and
equipment used in the system. Checklists and procedures for emergency situations,
troubleshooting techniques, maintenance operations and procedures shall be
included in the manual.
Upon completion of each system, the installing contractor shall provide four (4)
copies of system "As-Built" drawings to the owner. The drawings shall show actual
installation details including all equipment locations (i.e.: control panel(s), agent
container(s), detectors, alarms, manuals and aborts, etc.) as well as piping and
conduit routing details. Show all room or facilities modifications, including door
and/or damper installations completed. One (1) copy of reproducible engineering
drawings shall be provided reflecting all actual installation details.
3.12 DEMONSTRATION
A. Train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain clean-agent

extinguishing systems. Prior to final acceptance, the installing contractor shall
provide operational training to each shift of the owners personnel. Each training
session shall include system Control Panel operation, manual and abort functions,
trouble procedures, supervisory procedures, auxiliary functions and emergency
procedures.
21 22 00
22 01 00 – Operation & Maintenance of Fire Protection System
PART 1 GENERAL

N/A
1.2.1 General
performance.
completion: -
format).

General
a) Drawing Size : A1 (A0 size will not be accepted).
22 01 00
be used.
levels, etc.

b) Engineering plans, elevations, sections and details including the layout of
fixed furniture and equipment complete with dimensions.
c) Structural layout with details of typical reinforcements (for reinforced-
concrete structures), connections (for steel-framed buildings), etc.
a) Floor plans, elevations or sections (as may be required) of air-conditioning,
plumbing, fire protection and other services.
a) Floor plans, elevations or sections (as may be required) of lighting, power
points, communications, data and signalling systems, etc.
22 01 00

General
a) Size & Type: Nominal A4 size, 50mm thick vinyl-covered with no less than 4
ring binders.
b) Each section or part of the manual shall be separated and identified by a
hard-plastic separator. Each separator shall be tabbed and labelled at
the longitudinal edge.
c) Punched pages in the manual shall be reinforced at the rings, and it shall
be possible for each page to be detached easily.
d) The front and side covers of each manual shall bear clear and indelible
inscriptions (stick-on labels will not be accepted) in bold types of the
project title and particular installation as shown in the following example: -
“PROJECT TITLE”
FOR
MECHANICAL INSTALLATIONS”
e) All information contained in each manual shall be in English language
only. Technical literature in languages other than English will be rejected.
f) For large and complex projects with extensive mechanical and electrical
services, the manuals shall be prepared and submitted in separately
bound parts or volumes as may be required.
g) The texts of the manuals shall be prepared by skilled technical writers who
are trained and experienced in operation and maintenance of the plant,
systems, equipment or building works described.
b) Index
d) Contact Information
e) Manufacturers / Suppliers literature
m) Modifications
o) Engineer and Civil Works (this Section may be included in the Mechanical
Installations manuals).
This shall present a concise and factual introductory summary on the
project. Essential information to be provided shall include the names of
22 01 00
the employer, Client User, Engineer, contractor, sub-contractors,

construction start date, handover date and construction period.
b) Index
This shall provide the full listing of the O&M manuals by section, part or
other subdivisions as may be required and shall identify these complete
with page numbering all in sequential order.
ii. Design conditions each system, process, an item of plant, etc., is meant to
achieve including the operating parameters.
iii. Technical descriptions of an individual system, plant or process. This shall
include a clear description of the function of all equipment and major
components and the manner these are operated and controlled.
iv. Simplified flow diagrams of systems or plant clearly identifying all
equipment and major components cross referenced to the Schedule of
Equipment and Components within the manuals.
d) Contact Information: Provide contact information of person in-charge
from the manufacturer, supplier and contractor.
e) Manufacturers / Supplier literature: This section shall include
manufacturers/ suppliers’ data and literature to elaborate the functioning
of the equipment.
i. A general listing of all installed items of plant, equipment and components
for each process or system. Items so listed shall bear the same coded
identifications as those shown on the As-Built Drawings and other diagrams
for easy referencing.
ii. General and technical schedule for individual items of plant and
equipment giving the following details: -
1. Manufacturer’s name and particulars of local agent/supplier.
4. Operating parameters, i.e. electrical supply characteristics, motor
ratings, power consumptions, speed, etc.
6 Manufacturer’s technical literature and drawings. General sales
information and brochures in lieu will not be accepted.
2. Detailed step by step preparatory inspection checks prior to start
up of system, plant and equipment including Megger test of all
equipment motors before starting.
3. Clear and comprehensive instructions for a startup, operation and
shut down. This shall include detailed safety procedures to be
followed in an emergency situation.
i. Fault finding schedule - this shall provide a comprehensive list of
failures or malfunctions which are likely to develop during the
operation of a system, plant or equipment including the diagnosis
and procedures for trouble shooting.
22 01 00
ii. Preventive Maintenance - this shall contain information and

instructions relating to the routine maintenance required for all
items of plant and equipment to ensure that these are operating
at their optimum efficiency. The information to be provided shall
include the following: -
1. Recommended staffing for plant maintenance. The
minimum qualifications of each staff shall be stated.
2. List of tools and test instruments required for maintenance.
Where a test apparatus is of a specialist nature, the
operating, maintenance and calibration procedures shall
be provided.
3. Equipment manufacturer’s maintenance literature
including drawings and diagrams.
i) Automatic Controls Systems
This section shall contain detailed information and instructions on the
operation of the automatic controls systems for all plants, equipment and
processes generally, as follows: -
i. Controls system description and manner of operations including
schematic diagrams.
functions, calibrations carried out and final settings for operation.
iii. Procedures for fault finding and rectification of faults and required
maintenance. Where this information is covered elsewhere in the
Manuals, the relevant section shall be stated.
iv. Manufacturer’s technical data including drawings and diagrams.
i. Industry standard or legal test certificates issued for safety and
fitness for the use of equipment such as boilers, water heaters,
pressure vessels, lifts, switchgear, etc.
iii. Certified Testing & Commissioning Data for all mechanical and
electrical systems and equipment. This shall include HVAC
temperature/humidity tests, hydraulic pressure and flow
balancing, electrical continuity tests, etc. The tests results obtained
shall be compared with the design values and deviations, if any,
shall be noted. Details of all specialist test instruments used shall be
provided, i.e. make and model number, a method of calibration,
etc.
iv. Manufacturers, written warranty on equipment and components,
if any.

i. A complete inventory of original spare parts supplied (if any) at the
handover of the project.
ii. Comprehensive lists of spare parts and consumables (as per the
equipment manufacturers, recommendation) with CIF Bahrain
prices. Where applicable, corresponding Central Stores
Directorate’s stock numbers shall be indicated for each spare part.
iii. Particulars of spare parts manufacturers including local suppliers or
agents.
22 01 00

environmental risk associated with the operation, maintenance, and
disposal of any part of equipment and system. Instruction for safe disposal
should be included within this section.
m) Modifications: Any field modification to the factory supplied equipment

shall be specifically identified in this section

guarantees and warranties for all the equipment /system including those
for installation.

1. All plant, equipment, apparatus, parts and materials needed to complete
2. Any items suffering damage, in transit on the site shall be rejected and
3. All second fix finishing items such as grilles, unit casings, light fittings, switch
4. The Contractor shall protect all pipework, valves, fitting, ductwork, plant
5. Any open-ended pipes left overnight or for a longer period shall be
6. Pipework, fittings, valves or any plant and equipment which is found to be

1. For all parts of the services the shop fabricated and factory built
22 01 00

caused to finishes.
2. All steelwork in connection with supports for pipework, ductwork, plant

1. The Contractor shall provide attendance during the commissioning of all
1.3 Taking over
1.3.1 The Contractor shall be responsible for training a number of persons who will
be selected by the Ministry in the correct and careful operation control and
maintenance of the whole work. The training shall be carried out by the
qualified commissioning staff of the Contractor and shall be continued
throughout the one (1) month period preceding the “Taking Over”unless the
Specifications call for a more extended period.
1.3.2 As soon as the Works have been completed in accordance with the Contract
Documents, except in minor respects that do not affect its use for the intended
purpose and except for the maintenance thereof as provided under Defect
Liability Period and have passed the Reliability Tests, the Engineer shall issue a
certificate, herein called a “Taking Over Certificate”, in which he shall certify
the date on which the Works have been completed and have passed the
said Tests and the Engineer shall be deemed to have taken over the Works on
the date so certified but issue of Taking Over Certificate shall not operate as
an admission that the Works have been completed in every respect. In the
event of the Works being divided into two or more sections, the Engineer shall
be entitled to take over any section or sections of the other or others, and
thereupon a Taking Over Certificate in respect thereof shall be issued. If by
agreement between the Contractor and the Engineer, any portion of the
Works (other than a section or sections) shall be taken over before the
remainder of the Works, the Engineer shall issue a Taking Over Certificate in
respect of that portion.
1.3.3 If by any reason or any default on the part of the Contractor a Taking Over
Certificate has not been issued in relation to every portion of the Works within
one (1) month after the date fixed by the Contract for the completion of the
Works, or if no time be fixed within a reasonable time, the Engineer shall be at
liberty to use the Works or any portion thereof, in respect of which a Taking
Over Certificate has not been issued, provided that the Works or portion so
used as aforesaid shall be reasonably capable of being used without harm to
the Works (normal wear and tear excepted), and that the Contractor shall be
afforded reasonable opportunity of taking such steps as may be necessary to
permit the issuance of the Taking Over Certificate. In no case, however, shall
the employer be prevented from the use of the works unless otherwise
specified.
22 01 00
1.4 Testing

The Contractor shall notify the Engineer in accordance with its previous
a. Operating tests
1.4.2 Initial Trial Test:

1. After the various systems are pressure tested and cleaned as herein before
2. Any equipment producing objectionable noise must be repaired or
3. Include for continuity and insulation tests on all electrical works and test all
22 01 00
1.4.3 Tests on Piping:

1. Pressure Tests: Upon completion of the installation, but before insulation
2. For other piping systems reference shall be made to the specification for
3. Any revisions made in the piping system will subsequently necessitate
4. Any leakage or fault discovered during such tests shall be remedied at
5. The Contractor, except otherwise specified, shall provide at his expense
6. Additional Tests
7. If any test is ordered by the Engineer which is either:
8. Not so intended by or provided for by the Contractor or,
9. Although so intended by or provided for, is ordered by the Engineer to be
10. Then the cost of such test shall be borne by the Contractor if the test shows
by the Employer.
11. Consumed Electricity and Water
12. The Contractor will reimburse the Employer for the cost of electricity and
1.4.4 Tests on Water Pumps:

Flow rate.
Pumps speed RPM.
1.4.5 Tests on Electric Motors:

Speed in RPM, amperes for each phase and power input in kW for each motor.
1.4.6 Tests on other Plant and Equipment:
22 01 00
specifications.
1.4.7 Reliability Tests:

1. After finishing the initial tests to the satisfaction of the Engineer, the
2. Each Reliability Test shall last for a period of thirty-one (31) consecutive
3. In the event of any repair or adjustment having to be made other than the
Season.
Tagging Standards.
22 01 00
in BS 1710.

standards.
1. General
i. The purpose of this sections is to provide clear and concise direction in
formulating a standardised equipment tagging programme applicable to
all maintainable equipment throughout the project as required by the
operator.
ii. A standardized equipment tagging system will ensure the following
a. Standardised descriptions of equipment and rooms throughout
the project.
equipment.
2. Tagging process
1. The equipment collecting and tagging process can be split into seven
stages



3. A standardised template has been created to assist in the equipment

collection process and once completed these need to be submitted to
the engineer for review and approval
4. The contractor will use the same room and equipment labels based on
the submitted forms, once its approved
22 01 00
5. The operator in the applicable property will be responsible for Allocation of

the property, building, floor, room & system codes etc.,
1.6 Builders works

his satisfaction.
1.10 Spare parts

22 01 00

the Engineer.
them.

22 01 00
for in this Clause.
22 01 00
22 05 00 - Common Work Results for Plumbing
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and

Supplementary Conditions, apply to this Section.
220100 OPERATION & MAINTENANCE OF PLUMBING

221123 DOMESTIC WATER PUMPS
221326 DRAINAGE COLLECTION SYSTEM
223300 ELECTRIC WATER HEATERS
23 08 00 COMMISSIONING OF HVAC
B. The installations throughout shall be of the best quality materials erected by skilled
workmen under competent supervision and left in good working order on
completion to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
C. Where a single manufacturer or make is specified alternative

manufacturers/makes can be considered by the Engineer provided that the
Contractor submits full details to demonstrate that the alternative is of equal
quality and performance and no additional cost is incurred.
D. Contractor shall employ 3rd party Commissioning Authority for the commissioning
of all systems
E. Test on Completion: Tests as are prescribed by the specification, as per

possible due to climatic conditions at the time of completion, the contractor shall
be bound to carry out tests at any time subsequent to the date of completion,
but before the end of defects liability period.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Piping materials and installation instructions common to most piping systems.

3. Pipe Fittings & Sleeves.
4. Equipment installation requirements common to equipment sections.
5. Painting and finishing.
6. Concrete bases.
7. Supports and anchorages.
22 05 00
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data:
Submit manufacturer's detailed technical product selection data, method of
construction, material data and installation procedures for each principal component
or unit and include certified test reports on required testing. List and describe features of
control system, performances, and operating characteristics together with any further
information pertinent to the adequacy of the requirement and the system as a whole.
Submit test reports for components requiring third party certification along with the
submittal. All products shall bear the stamp of approval of authority having jurisdiction.
B. Shop Drawings:
The layouts shown on drawings are to be considered as diagrammatic and it shall be
the Contractor's responsibility to check all dimensions, pipe and duct locations against
Engineer's drawings or if the work is sufficiently advanced, by actual measurements on
site, to ensure the proper matching of mating parts. The Contractor shall provide,
suitable clearances where required.
representation in terms of size, shape, location, quantity, orientation, manufacturer’s
The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer shop drawings showing detailed
construction and detailed layout of the unit, its associated components and any other
related equipment material to be installed. All drawing and layouts shall bear the stamp
of approval of authority having jurisdiction.
Should the Engineer give provisional approval only of an order due to lack of complete
information and should the missing information not eventually meet with approval, the
Engineer will not be held responsible for any delay incurred.
For equipment where information from the manufacturers is likely to be delayed, it is
possible data so as to ensure approval of orders in complete conformity with the
Submittals and shop drawings shall as far as possible be complementary so that
No work shall be carried out before approval of shop drawings or equipment has been
given by the Engineer.
It is the Contractor's responsibility to co-ordinate all Mechanical works to match with the
structure of the building and the proposed arch and interior design of the building
including but limited to ducts, grilles, equipment, pipes, light fittings, false ceiling layout
and other services to allow a completely symmetrical and co-ordinated installation.
Contractor shall prepare section as required to demonstrate all constrains and co-
ordinate the same for resolving any conflicts among the services. Contractor shall
ensure that all required access, clearances and false ceiling heights are achieved as
per the requirements are achieved.
C. Samples: Submit one sample of each of the component along with the submittal.
D. Manufacturers Installation Instructions: Submit the complete methodology for

installation based on the installation instruction of the manufacturer.
E. Design Data: Submit design calculation bearing the stamp of approval of authority
having jurisdiction. Results shall include calculation that verify system pressures, flow
rates, piping pressure losses, component flow data, and pipe sizes.
22 05 00
installation.
F. Test Reports: Submit test report for the tests carried out on the installations.
G. Maintenance Manual
Submit bound manual for the system with operating and maintenance instructions,
control circuit diagrams, piping schematics, as built drawings, parts listing,
recommended parts inventory listing, emergency instructions and similar information.
All as-built information shall be on REVIT platform with LOD 500 with representation in
terms of size, shape, location, quantity, orientation, manufacturer’s details, equipment
model and performance.
H. Welding certificates: Submit copies of relevant certification.
A. Steel Pipe Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to ASME Boiler
and Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications."
1. Comply with provisions in ASME B31 Series, "Code for Pressure Piping." or
relevant BS Code,
2. Certify that each welder has passed AWS qualification tests for welding
B. Electrical Characteristics for Plumbing Equipment: Equipment of higher electrical

characteristics may be furnished provided such proposed equipment is
conduit sizes are appropriately modified. If minimum energy ratings or
efficiencies are specified, equipment shall comply with requirements.
C. Hangers and supports shall have the manufacturer’s name and applicable size
stamped in the part itself for identification.
D. All Plumbing staff shall be EWA certified
E. Hangers and supports shall be designed and manufactured in accordance with

MSS SP 58.
F. Hangers and supports for sprinkler piping shall conform to NFPA 13 1996
specification.
A. Deliver pipes and tubes with factory-applied end caps. Maintain end caps
through shipping, storage, and handling to prevent pipe end damage and to
prevent entrance of dirt, debris, and moisture.
B. Store plastic pipes protected from direct sunlight. Support to prevent sagging
and bending.
22 05 00
1.6 COORDINATION
A. Arrange for pipe spaces, chases, slots, and openings in building structure during
progress of construction, to allow for plumbing installations.
B. Coordinate installation of required supporting devices and set sleeves in poured-

in-place concrete and other structural components as they are constructed.
C. Coordinate requirements for access panels and doors for plumbing items
requiring access that are concealed behind finished surfaces.
D. The Contractor shall prepare co-ordinated drawing taking into account all the
services, structure and false ceiling requirements. Such drawings shall be
prepared on Revit platform with LOD 500.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. The following requirements apply for product selection:

manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work.

one of the manufacturers whose equipment must have been used in the
Kingdom in last 5-10 years.
2.2 PIPE, TUBE, AND FITTINGS
A. Refer to individual Division 22 piping Sections for pipe, tube, and fitting materials
and joining methods
B. Pipe Threads: ASME B1.20.1 for factory-threaded pipe and pipe fittings
A. Refer to individual Division 22 piping Sections for special joining materials not listed
below
B. Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials: Suitable for chemical and thermal conditions of

piping system contents
1. Thermoseal C-4401, 1/16 inch thick. Do not apply gasket compounds, adhesive,
or anti- stick lubricants to gaskets
C. Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel, unless otherwise indicated.
D. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32, lead-free alloys. Include water-flushable flux
according to ASTM B 813.
E. Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12 for welding materials
appropriate for wall thickness and chemical analysis of steel pipe being welded.
22 05 00
F. Fiberglass Pipe Adhesive: As furnished or recommended by pipe manufacturer
2.4 DIELECTRIC FITTINGS
A. Description: Combination fitting of copper alloy and ferrous materials with

threaded, solder- joint, plain, or weld-neck end connections that match piping
system materials.
B. Insulating Material: Suitable for system fluid, pressure, and temperature.
C. Dielectric Unions: Factory-fabricated, union assembly, for 250-psig minimum

working pressure at 180 deg F.
D. Dielectric Flanges: Factory-fabricated, companion-flange assembly, for 250-

psig minimum working pressure as required to suit system pressures.
E. Dielectric-Flange Kits: Companion-flange assembly for field assembly. Include

flanges, full- face- or ring-type neoprene or phenolic gasket, phenolic or
polyethylene bolt sleeves, phenolic washers, and steel backing washers.
Separate companion flanges and steel bolts and nuts shall have 250-psig
minimum working pressure where required to suit system pressures.
F. Dielectric Couplings: Galvanized-steel coupling with inert and non-corrosive,

thermoplastic lining; threaded ends; and 300-psig minimum working pressure at
225 deg F.
G. Dielectric Nipples: Electroplated steel nipple with inert and non-corrosive,
thermoplastic lining; plain, threaded, or grooved ends; and 300-psig minimum
working pressure at 225 deg F.
2.5 PIPE WORK
A. All pipes shall be installed in a neat and workmanlike manner laid to proper
graded falls to facilitate draining and venting, adequately supported with
provision for expansion and suitably spaced to accommodate any insulation.
B. All pipe work fittings, valves and other components forming the piping
installation shall be erected such that they can be dismantled and are accessible
for repair and replacement. Where valves and equipment are fitted, unions and
flanges shall be provided as appropriate for the diameter pipe work in order to
allow valves and equipment removal.
C. No joints shall be made inside the thickness of walls, partitions, floors or ceilings.
Concealed or inaccessible pipe work shall be arranged so that no mechanical
joints or unions are contained within the inaccessible length. Where any site
condition makes this impracticable the ruling of the Engineer must be obtained
before installation.
D. All pipes shall be pressure-tested before insulation is applied and before pipe work
is concealed by casings, suspended ceilings, plaster, etc. Test requirements are
specific in particular sections.
a) Pipes passing through walls, floors, ceilings, partitions etc., shall be inserted
through sleeves of the same material as the pipe. Sleeves shall be free from
internal burrs and shall have an internal diameter sufficient to allow free
22 05 00
movement of the pipe and insulation if fitted off the pipe is crossing fire rated
walls; fire sleeves shall be provided.
b) In all cases the annular space shall be packed with high density glass fibre or
other appropriate material to maintain fire separation, acoustic separation or to
provide a water and/or vermin proof seal as required by the situation.
c) Cover plates to be fitted on pipes passing through walls, floors, ceilings etc.,
where exposed to view in user areas. Omission of sleeves or cover plates in
particular situations to be at the discretion of the Engineer.
E. All pipe work shall be supported at centers not exceeding those given in the
following tables and at closer intervals if warranted by the particular arrangement
of pipe work fittings or valves. Pipe work shall be supported either side of pipe
mounted equipment generally within 3 pipe diameters.
a)The type and detail of support brackets, hangers, rollers etc., to be approved by
the Engineer prior to installation.
b) The intervals given for supports on vertical pipes refer to lateral guide points. The
weight of the vertical pipe being taken at a single point or single points between
expansion joints where used. Additional guide points may be required to
control lateral movement of pipe work caused by expansion. Where Victaulic
joints are used additional supports may be required to give stability particularly
at changes in direction.
Pipe Size Horizontal Vertical

mm m m
i) Steel pipes
15 1.8 4.0
20 2.4 4.9
25 2.7 5.2
32 3.3 6.4
40 3.6 7.3
50 4.5 9.1
65 5.2 11.0
80 5.8 12.0
100 6.7 15.0
125 6.7 17.0
150 7.6 17.0
200 7.6 20.0
250 9.1 28.0
300 9.1 32.0
ii) Copper Pipe to BS 2871, Part 1, Table X

15 1.2 1.8
22-28 1.8 3.0
Stainless 32 2.4 3.0
Steel 42 2.4 3.6
Pipe type 54 2.7 3.6
316 to 76 3.0 3.6
BS 4127 108-133 3.0 4.5
159 3.6 5.4
22 05 00
c) The cast iron pipe work and fittings shall be supported in strict accordance with
the manufacturer's guidelines/recommendations.
F. Expansion
a) Expansion: The Contractor shall make all necessary arrangements to take up

the thermal expansion of pipelines under working conditions subject to
temperature difference without distortion.
b) Whenever possible movement of pipe work shall be taken up by natural

offsets and changes of direction of pipe runs. Connections from main
pipelines generally shall be made such that expansion of the branch does
not directly apply stress to the main.
c) Where it is not possible to accommodate movement by the configuration of

the pipe work suitable expansion compensators to be provided.
d) Pipes shall be anchored and guided as required. Adequate clearances shall

be allowed for pipe movement especially at branches and changes of
direction. In this respect oversized sleeves shall be used where branches pass
through walls or floors close to the mains. Pipe connections to plant items shall
be anchored and supported as necessary to prevent stresses being
transmitted to plant items.
e) Disconnect Joints: Disconnect fittings shall be provided on the dead side of all
valves and at connections to plant and equipment. Further disconnection
joints to be provided generally at a maximum spacing of 18m intervals and at
positions to be agreed with the Engineer.
G. Draining and Venting:
a) The Contractor shall be responsible for providing such drain and air release
arrangements as are required to ensure that all sections of the installation can
be completely drained and that air locks cannot form. The position and
arrangement of draining and venting points not shown on the drawings to be
agreed with the Engineer.
b) Air bottles shall comprise a full-bore collection pipe the same size as the main
to which it is installed but a minimum size of 50mm bore. The collection pipe
shall be a minimum of 150 mm long installed vertically where possible,
otherwise installed horizontally with a vertical stub connection to the main, the
stub being the same size as the collection pipe.
From the highest point of each air bottle run a 6mm discharge pipe in copper
to BS 2871 Part 1:1971 Table X to be run to an easily accessible position
terminating with an air cock.
c) Automatic Air Eliminators: Automatic air eliminators where required shall be

fitted with an isolating valve on the inlet. From the outlet, a 6mm discharge
pipe in copper to BS 2871 Part 1:1971 Table X is to be run to vent in an
approved position.
22 05 00
H. Provision of Valves and Stopcocks:
a) The Contractor shall provide all valves and stopcocks as shown on the
drawings and also as required by the following:
i) Isolation and regulation of each branch circuit.
ii) Isolation of each draw-off point or range of draw-off points and each item
of equipment.
iii) Isolation and regulation of flow and return connections to each heat
transfer equipment unless instructed otherwise by the particular
specifications.
b) Each valve to be fitted with an identifying label corresponding to a valve chart or
similar diagram.
I. Pipe work Insulations
a) Insulation Water Pipes upto 200mm shall be Factory Formed, pre slit, Flame
retarded NBR based closed ell, flexible elastomeric foam insulation with
factory applied adhesive, conforming to ASTM C534. Insulation shall have
following:
1. Free of CFCs, HFCs, HCFCs, PBDEs, formaldehyde and fiber.
2. UL / Greenguard Gold Certified for Low VOC emission.
3. Adequate measure to have resistance against mold, fungal and bacterial
growth
4. Suitable for operating range -40oC to +100oC.
5. Density: 3-6lb/ft3, according to ASTM D1667
6. Water Vapor Permeability: <0.01 perm-in according to ASTM E96
7. Water Absorption: <0.0% according to ASTM C209
8. Flame Spread / Smoke Development: <25/50 according to ASTM E84
9. Ozone Resistance: Passed according to ASTM D1171
10. Odor Emission: No objectionable odor according to ASTM C1304
11. Flexibility: Passed cold Crack test at -40oC according to ASTM D1056
12. Milddew/Fungi Resistance: Passed according to UL181, ASTMG21.
13. Air Erosion: 4000FPM Rating according to ASTM C1071
14. Leachable Chlorides: <0.05% water soluble chloride ions according to DIN
1988
15. Sound Absorption Coefficients to ASTM C423
Thickness 125HZ 250 HZ 500 HZ 1000 HZ 2000 HZ 4000 HZ NRC

25mm 0.06 0.17 1.06 0.32 0.67 0.54 0.55
16. Sound Insertion Loss(dB) to ASTM E477
Thickness 125HZ 250 HZ 500 HZ 1000 HZ 2000 HZ 4000 HZ 8000HZ

25mm 1 3 20 7 12 12 12
17. Thermal Conductivity: 0.0353W/mK at 24oC Mean temp according to ASTM

C177
18. Dimensional Stability: <7% shrinkage according to ASTMC534.
19. Minimum thickness of insulation for chilled water pipes shall be 25mm.
20. All Water pipe fittings such as elbows, tees, p-traps, flanges valves etc shall be
provided with factory fabricated formed insulation of similar material.
22 05 00
21. For Pipes and fittings above 8in(200mm) sheet insulation with factory applied
adhesive similar to material detailed above shall be used.
22. Finish:
Pipe work exposed on the roof, exposed to views and in plant rooms shall be
finished with ‘UV’ protection spray paint and with aluminum cladding suitable
for outdoor use.
23. For water piping inside the building in ceiling space and conditioned areas,
apply a water based coating/vapor barrier. The dry film of the coating shall
conform to Class ‘O’ fire rating.
24. Provide pipe support inserts where piping is supported on pipe

hangers/brackets. The inserts shall be of high density foam material capable
of supporting the operation load of piping.
25. The insulation shall be installed and finished as per the insulation
manufacturer’s recommendations.
26. Additional circumferential bends of 50mm wide reinforced self-adhesive foil

tape shall be installed 300mm centre to provide extra securement. All
circumferential joints shall be sealed with vapor tight sealant.
27. Complete insulation exposed to view including those in plant rooms or those
exposed to ambient conditions insulation shall be protected with 0.6mm (24
gauge) aluminum sheet jacketing.
28. Valves and strainers and fittings are to be finished in purpose made 0.6mm (24
gauge) `Hammer clad' sheet metal `quick release' insulated boxes.
b) Entire hot piping including the hot water return pipe shall be insulated. All
cold-water pipes exposed to ambient such as those in Roof, basement car
parks, shafts or in plant room spaces shall be insulated.
c) Thermal insulation to pipe work shall be carried out by specialists and strictly
in accordance with this specification. No thermal insulation shall be applied
to pipe work prior to pressure testing and inspection by the Consultant giving
clear instructions for further insulation applied. In order that tests may be
made of the thickness of insulation to be applied to each pipe size, plant
and equipment, the contractor shall allow for the cost of cutting away one
section for each size of pipe, plant and equipment for inspection by the
consultant. If the insulation proves to be of the thickness specified, then the
cut section shall be made good and the whole installation completed.
Should any cut section show a deficiency of thickness, further sections shall
be cut at the direction of the consultant for inspection.
d) If a deficiency of thickness or any other defects are found, the

contractor shall remove the whole of the insulation installed or as the
consultant directs and then shall supply, deliver and apply new insulation
complying with the specification and restore it to the satisfaction of the
consultant. This work shall be carried out at the contractor's own expense.
e) Thermal insulation shall be applied to all valves, strainers, non-return valves,

drain cocks, automatic air vents, and bosses for gauges/test points.
22 05 00
Insulation of these components in the pipe work system up to and including

65-mm diameter paperwork shall be carried out using sectional insulation
cut to suit and of the same size as the line pipe work.
f) No insulation shall be concealed within false ceilings or vertical and

horizontal builders works shafts prior to inspection and approval by the
consultant.
g) ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1-2010 Compliance: Provide compliance form as per

applicable requirements in ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1-2010.
h) All pipe lines shall be provided with finishing color, identification labels
complete with direction arrows complying to British Standard BS 1710
2.6 PIPE IN PIPE PLASTIC PIPING FOR DOMESTIC WATER DISTRIBUTION
A. Pipe-in-pipe plastic piping for domestic hot, cold & sweet water distribution –
concealed in wall.
B. Internal distribution: The internal distribution for hot and cold water from the
distribution station to the individual sanitary-ware shall be with a pipe-in-pipe
system using cross linked polyethylene pex pipes.
C. The Distribution Station shall be mounted above the false ceiling. The location
shall be co-ordinated with final sanitary-ware layout to maintain accessibility at
all times.
D. The Distribution Station shall be in bronze construction with core grip unions. Each
hot and cold Distribution Station shall be provided with stop valve of bronze
construction with hand wheel for easy operation.
E. The Distribution Station shall be provided with access panel in ceiling.
F. The distribution run of hot, cold and sweet water pipes from Distribution Station to
individual plumbing fixture shall be through spiral flexible plastic conduit
embedded in wall plasters/partition walls. The piping on downstream of
Distribution Station shall be of cross linked polyethylene suitable for hot, cold or
sweet water and for the working pressure & temperature.
G. The cross-linked polyethylene pressure piping above ceiling on downstream of

manifold Distribution Station shall be adequately supported.
H. The pressure plastic pipe shall be laid in flexible plastic conduit where the piping is
concealed in the wall.
2.7 PPR (RANDOM) PIPES AND FITTINGS
A. All cold water pipes within the building, in shaft other than embedded in wall shall
be of Polypropylene Random PPR - type 3 in accordance with EN ISO 15874, DIN
8077, DIN 8078, DIN 4726 for pipes and DIN 16962 for fittings.
B. All fittings shall be electro-fusion couplers and joined by electro fusion welding.
22 05 00
C. Fittings shall be both welding fittings and metal fittings. All metal inserts shall be
in dezincification resistant brass.
D. All components of polypropylene pipe systems shall be suitable for class 2

service application as per ISO 10508 with working pressure of m i n i m u m 2 5
bars at 70º C for 50 years life expectancy. The whole polypropylene piping
installation including supports shall be carried out strictly in accordance with
manufacturer’s recommendations. The contractor shall make allowance for
expansion in the pipe work. The whole PP-R installation shall be guaranteed for a
period of 5 years.
2.8 COPPER PIPEWORK AND FITTINGS
6-159mm tubes shall be Kite marked. All pipes shall meet requirements of BS EN
1057 as follows:
All dimensions mentioned in the drawings shall be considered as internal bore

diameter only.
Material Analysis
Material Grade Phosphorus de-oxidized copper; Cu-DHP or CW024A as defined
in BS EN 1976.
Minimum Copper Content99.90 % (including
silver) Phosphorus0.015-0.040 %
Total Impurity Maxima 0.060 % (excluding phosphorus and silver)
Mechanical Properties
Material Temper
Hardness
Tensile Strength Elongation min (indicative
min (N/mm2) (%)
Designation as Hv)
Common Term
per BSEN1173
R220 Annealed /Soft 220 40 40-70
R250 Half Hard 250 30 75-100
R290 Hard 290 3 >100
Dimension and Tolerances
Nominal Thickness Tolerance Diameter Tolerance

Outside
Diameter Up to 1mm 1mm and over Mean Including Ovality
6-15mm ±10% ±13% ±0.04mm ±0.09mm
22-28mm ±10% ±15% ±0.05mm ±0.1mm
35-54mm ±10%(1.2 R250) ±0.06mm ±0.07mm(R290)
±15% (other) ±0.11mm(R250)
22 05 00
66.7-76.1mm ±15% ±0.07mm ±0.1mm
108mm ±15% ±0.07mm ±0.2mm
133-159mm ±15% ±0.2mm ±0.7mm
1. Pipes Wall thickness shall be as follows:

6mm (tube size) x 0.8mm (wall thickness) EN 1057 - R250 (tensile strength)
Marking: Pipes shall be marked with Make, Origin, Size, Kitemark, and Date
Joints to Equipment: Where jointing to specified equipment varies from that

given above the appropriate mating connections are to be provided
De-zincification: All pipe work fittings and brazing materials used for hot and
cold-water supply to be made from non-dezincificable materials.
Flanges: To be bi-metal type comprising a mild steel flange with a completely

separate non-ferrous insert.
Flanges to be to BS 4504 Part 2 1974 Table 16/23 (pressure minimum of 16 bar).
Inserts to be either 85/15 brass or gunmetal depending on the potential for de-
zincification.
Flanged Joints: Flanges to be jointed with 1.6mm thick Klingerite graphite finish
inside bolt circle gasket with black hexagon bolts, nuts and washers. Bolts for BS
4504 to be BSM to BS 4190:1967 Grade 4.6 with a tensile strength of 394 N/sq.mm.
A. PLASTIC COVERED TUBES
COPPER PIPEWORK IN CONCEALED WALLS
a. The pipe work shall be coated with polyethylene in the factory. The coat
shall be tough, durable and extruded tightly on to the tube. The coat shall
be seamless and continuous for its entire length.
b. The coatings shall be of two types one directly extruded on the pipes and
other with profiled inner surface to trap air. The air trapped within shall for
a thermal barrier to reduce surface temperature/heat losses.
22 05 00
c. The fittings shall be compression type and jointing shall be as per

manufacturer's recommendations.
d. Pipes buried in concrete or screed to be with factory applied PVC coating
for protection against corrosive soil conditions. All plastic covered tubes
shall comprise of copper tubes to BS EN 1057 covered with plastic to meet
the combined requirements of BS EN 13349.
e. Plastic Material Analysis: LDPE (Low Density Polyethylene)
f. Color Identification
g. Product color coding shall be in accordance with BS 1710 for Yellow Ochre
and Green covered tubes.
B. CHROME PLATED TUBES

Chrome Plated tubes shall be half hard copper tubes, to BS EN 1057 - R250,
chrome plated in accordance with BS EN ISO 1456, generally to Service
Condition 2.
Chromium cannot be directly electrodeposited onto copper with satisfactory
adhesion, therefore a layer of nickel shall be deposited before the finishing
layer of chromium is applied.
Nominal thickness of the respective layers shall be as follows:
Nickel : 10 µm
Chromium : 0.3 µm
1. Bending Chrome Plated Tubes
2. Chrome plated tubes shall be suitable for cold bending in the ‘as
supplied’ condition using appropriately sized bending machines or springs
(as per manufacturers recommendation). When using a bending machine,
care should be taken not to damage the chromium plated surface by
ensuring that the equipment used is in good condition and a lubricant is
used to ease forming.
3. Jointing Chrome Plated Tubes

4. Capillary Jointing
Ensure to remove the chrome plating in order to solder capillary fittings by
using a fine-toothed flat file or as recommended by manufacturer.
Remove the chrome carefully until bare copper is visible all the way round
the tube for the full insertion depth of the fitting. Care must be taken not to
remove too much metal; to avoid the capillary gap from becoming too
big for a leak tight joint to be made. Once the plating has been removed
a damp rag should be wrapped around the tubes close to the fitting to
prevent damage from the blowtorch flame.
5. Compression Jointing
When making compression joints with chrome plated tubes, sufficient
torque as required because of the harder nature of the chrome plating
shall be applied to the compression nut to ensure a sound joint.
Compression fittings shall be used only for piping exposed to ambient at
roof level.
22 05 00
6. Push Fittings
7. Use special scribing tool to create a scored mark round the tube to
enable the grab ring to grip effectively.
8. Press Fittings
9. Press fittings should not be used with chrome plated tube, as the distortion
made when forming the joint will cause the chrome plating to crack.
10. All Copper piping shall be similar to Yorshire / Crane
2.9 CAST IRON PIPES AND FITTINGS
A. Cast iron pipes for soil, waste and ventilation system shall be coated internally
and externally complying with EN 877.
B. All pipes and fittings shall be suitable for working water temperature of minimum
of 95oC+/-2oC
C. The inner coating shall be of epoxy resin of 130 µm thickness. The outer coating
shall be of acrylic primer of 40 µm thickness. All pipes shall have a smooth bore.
D. The pipe couplings shall be made up of acrylic primer coated ductile iron and
flexible gasket. The couplings shall be jointed with stainless steel socket bolts. The
couplings shall incorporate Nitrile rubber gaskets.
E. Access fittings shall be with elastomeric coupling and cast-iron cover.
F. Use stack support pipe and fixing bracket for supporting vertical downpipes.
G. Cast iron pipes and fittings shall be protected with factory applied anti-corrosive
coating. Manufacturer's recommendation shall be strictly followed for the
application of coating over cast iron pipes and fittings. The pipe couplings shall
be with built-in earth continuity.
H. The piping shall be supported on rubber inserted pipe brackets.
I. Installation of the pipes and fittings shall be carried strictly in accordance with the
manufacturer's recommendations.
J. All pipes and fitting shall have component fire rating of A1, and system fire rating
of A2-s1, d0
K. All pipes and fittings shall have Kitemark.
2.10 MINERAL REINFORCED POLYPROPYLENE PIPE AND FITTINGS (Acoustic Pipes)
A. Density of material: 1.9 g/cm3.
B. Chemical Resistance, pH 2-12.
C. Wall Thickness: Minimum wall thickness shall be as follows:
22 05 00
DN(mm) Wall Thickness (mm)

50 4.0
70 4.5
90 4.5
100 5.3
125 5.3
150 5.3
200 6.2
The sizes mentioned in the drawings are minimum internal bore dimension; pipes
with internal next higher internal diameter available shall be provided.
D. The pipe system shall be polypropylene minerally reinforced, resistant to hot

water, DIN 4102, B2. and shall be tested in accordance with BS EN 1451. Certified
to BS 476 part 20 and EN 1366-3. Shall be manufactured in accordance with
quality management system ISO 9001 and environmental management system
ISO 14001.
E. Pipes and Fittings Characteristics

All Wavin AS pipes and fittings are made from the following materials:
Material: Astolan, mineral filled PP, density 1.9 kg/dm³
Colour: White / Grey RAL 7035
Stiffness: DN 110 > SN 16, DN 160 > SN 10
F. Physical Characteristics
Density 1.9g/cm³ 3 DIN 53479
Elongation at break 29%
Tensile strength 13 N/mm²
E-modulus 3800 N/mm²
Coefficient of thermal linear expansion 0.09 mm/mK
Fire resistance DIN 4102, B2
Colour Light Grey RAL 7035
G. The pipe system needs to be resistant against continuous temperatures of 90°C

and suitable for use with intermittent discharges of water up to 100°C.
H. Piping system shall meet the requirements of Part E of the Building Regulations
and has a sound performance of under 30 dB (a) at 2 l/s
I. Expansion compensator socket shall be provided as per manufacturers

recommendation.
J. Use full encircling with rubber inserts for brackets
K. Pipe shall have passed and certified to BS 476 part 20 and EN 1366-3. All pipe
crossing of floors and fire rated wall shall be provided with fire collor tested to BS
EN 1366 for a fire resistance period of up to 120 minutes.
L. Pipes and fittings shall have WRAS approval.
22 05 00
2.11 PVC-u PIPE AND FITTINGS
A. PVC-u Pipe:
1. Above Ground Soil, Waste and Vent Pipes and fittings shall be to BS EN 1329.
Kitemark / NSF certified
2. Under Ground Drainage Pipes and Fittings shall be to BS EN1401. Kitemark /
NSF Certified
2.12 Pressure Pipes shall be to BS EN 142, PN16 Kite Marked / NSF Certified
2.13 High Density Polyethylene

Material HDPE / PE100
Density 0,96 kg/dm3
Poisson ratio 0,45
Coeff. of linear expansion 15 mm/100m/ºC
Young’s modulus (of elasticity) 1.100 MPa
Tensile strength 21 MPa
MRS 10 MPa
allowable approx. 1hr. stress 12,5 MPa
melt flow index group 003/005
Strainability 5%
Rigidity SDR 17
Minimum Pressure PN16 or 1.5 times the working pressure
The PE 100 materials requirements set in the European standards: EN 12201 for water
supply and for drainage and sewerage under pressure. Maximum wall thicknesses shall
be in compliance with EN 12201-2
Diameters ≤ 63 mm available on coils of 100 m (For Municipal water only)

PE pipes can be joined by means of butt-fusion, involving the fusion together of two pipe
ends in a specialist machine. The machine shall prepare the pipe ends, heat them and
brings them together under pressure to form a homogeneous joint. The joint shall be fully
end-load resistant and is at least as strong as the parent pipe.
All fittings are made from PE 100.
2.14 PIPE SCHEDULE / AREA OF USE
Drainage
Reference
Material Remarks
Section
Above Ground Soil and Insulation to be
Waste Pipes including Acoustic Pipes 2.10 provided for
those in shafts acoustic
Vent Piping Acoustic Pipes 2.10 Non-Insulated
Rainwater Piping Acoustic Pipes 2.10 Non-Insulated
Condensate Piping Pressure Pipe 2.12 Insulated
22 05 00
Pump Discharge piping

Pressure Pipe 2.13 Non-Insulated
(Forced Main)
Kitchen / Laundry /
Cast Iron Pipe 2.9 Insulated
Pantry Drainage
Below Ground Drainage
PVCu Pipes 2.11 Non-Insulated
Piping
RO Reject Water PE100 2.13 Non-Insulated
Water Supply
Material Reference Section Remarks
Raw Municipal
PE Coil 2.13 Non-Insulated
Water Pipes
Treated Cold All pipes subjected
Water Pipes and to non-
PPR 2.7
diameter less than conditioned areas
or equal to 100mm shall be insulated
Hot Water Pipes
including Hot
Water Return Pipes All Pipes to Be
Copper 2.8
serving Kitchen & insulated
Laundry and sizes
above 100mm dia
Hot Water Pipes
including Hot
Water Return Pipes
All Pipes to Be
serving areas PPR 2.7
insulated
except kitchen &
laundry and sizes
up to 100mm dia
All Hot water and
cold-water pipes
exposed to
ambient All Pipes to Be
temperatures and insulated with
Copper 2.8
in plant rooms, aluminum
basement car cladding
parks and pipes
above 100mm
diameter.
Non-Potable
Water Pipes
(treated sewerage
PPR 2.7 Non-Insulated
effluent) and
diameter less than
or equal to 100mm
Irrigation Water
PPR 2.7 Non-Insulated
Pipes
22 05 00
2.15 VALVES AND STRAINERS
A. Valves: All valves, strainers shall be suitable for maximum working pressure and
temperature of the system. The valves shall be of gunmetal construction for sizes
up to and including 50mm. The valves of cast iron construction for sizes 65mm
and above are acceptable for chilled water and fire water services. The valves
for cold water, hot water and sweet water services shall be of gunmetal
construction for all sizes.
B. The valves shall be smooth internal surface throughout, clean and free from scale
and flaws. Holes in covers or in gates for screwed portions of spindles shall have
full threads of a length not less than the diameter of the spindle over the threads.
Gland rings shall be machined to provide a running fit between the spindle and
the stuffing box. Stuffing boxes shall be suitably packed or fitted with Ò' rings
alternatively. Valves of sizes unto and including 50mm diameter shall be with
screwed connections and of sizes 65mm and above shall be with flanged
connections to BS 4504 PN 16.
C. The Valves for Cold Water Services shall be as under:
a)Isolating valves for mains cold water of sizes up to and including 50mm shall be
non-rising stem, screwed bonnet, one-piece wedge, BS21 taper thread, bronze
construction, suitable for maximum 1.5 times working pressure or minimum of 16
bar at 1800C as per BS: 5154.
b) Isolating valves for mains cold water of sizes above 65mm shall be non-rising stem,
screwed bonnet, one-piece wedge flanged to BS:4504 suitable for 1.5 times the
maximum working pressure or minimum of 16 bar, of gunmetal (bronze)
construction as per Series B in accordance with BS:5154; fitted with hand wheel.
c) Isolating valves for all other cold-water services of sizes up to and including 50mm
shall be non-rising stem, solid gunmetal wedge, BS-21 taper thread, full way
gate valves suitable for1.5 time the maximum working pressure or minimum of 16
bar as per BS 5154 Series B, unless otherwise indicated.
d) Isolating valves for mains cold water of sizes above 65mm shall be non-rising stem,
screwed bonnet, one-piece wedge flanged to BS:4504 suitable for 1.5 times the
maximum working pressure or minimum of 16 bar, of gunmetal (bronze)
construction as per Series B in accordance with BS:5154; fitted with hand wheel.
e)Non-return valves of sizes up to and including 50mm shall be horizontal swing

pattern, screwed cover, metal to metal seat, BS 21 taper thread, bronze
construction, suitable for operation suitable for 1.5 times the maximum working
pressure or minimum of 16 bar as per BS: 5154 Series B. The non-return valves shall
be suitable for mounting in vertical or horizontal positions. Non-return valves of
sizes above 65mm shall be horizontal swing pattern, bolted cover, flanged to BS
4504 suitable for 1.5 times the maximum working pressure or minimum of 16 bar,
copper alloy trim, suitable for mounting in horizontal and vertical positions, bronze
construction suitable for operation at 16 bars at 220 0C
f) Drain cocks shall be gunmetal gland cocks with hose union, male parallel thread
(BS 2779) x hose union, fitted with iron lever suitable for 1.5 times the maximum
working pressure or minimum of 16 bar and sizes of 20mm to 25mm. Test/gauge
cocks shall be gunmetal round barrel, lever handle in line with body when open,
22 05 00
straight union outlet of sizes 4mm up to 19mm; suitable for 1.5 times the maximum
working pressure or minimum of 16 bar.
g) Vents shall be automatic type with body and dome of aluminum bronze, spindle
of stainless steel, valve and seating of nickel alloy and stainless-steel float suitable
for suitable for 1.5 times the maximum working pressure or minimum of 16 bar.
Sizes shall be 15mm or as required. Each vent shall be controlled by lock shield
valve.
h) The ball float valves shall be full bore with open discharge to tank, internal valve
designed on the balanced type single beat principle giving positive response to
changes in water level. Valve disc and balancing piston to be of synthetic
rubber. Disc and bucket renewable with valve in line. Copper ball float designed
to close against maximum pressure when half submerged.
i) Screwed ends threaded to BS21 parallel for sizes up to and including 50mm.
Flanged ends to BS 4504 for sizes above 65mm. The garden taps shall be bib tap
hose union pattern crutch top, matt finish, gunmetal construction to BS:1010.
D. The Valves for Hot Water Services shall be as under:
a) Isolating valves of sizes up to and including 50mm shall be non-rising stem,

screwed bonnet, one-piece wedge, BS21 taper thread, bronze construction
suitable for 1.5 times the maximum working pressure or minimum of 16 bar as per
BS 5154, unless indicated otherwise.
b) Isolating valves of sizes above 65mm shall be non-rising stem, screwed bonnet,
one piece wedge, flanged to BS 4504 suitable for 1.5 times the maximum working
pressure or minimum of 16 bar, of bronze construction, suitable for 16 bar as per
BS: 5154.
c) Non-return valves of sizes up to and including 50mm shall be horizontal swing

pattern, screwed cover, metal to metal seat, BS21 taper thread, bronze
construction suitable for 1.5 times the maximum working pressure or minimum of
16 bar as per BS: 5154. The non-return valves shall be suitable for mounting in
vertical or horizontal positions.
d) Drain cocks shall be gunmetal gland cocks with hose union, male parallel thread
(BS:2779) X hose union, fitted with iron lever, suitable for 1.5 times the maximum
working pressure or minimum of 16 bar and of sizes of half inch up to 1 inch. Vents
shall be automatic type, with aluminium bronze body and dome, nickel alloy
valve and seating and stainless-steel spindle and float; suitable for operation on
16 bar. Sizes shall be 15mm or as required. Each vent shall be controlled by lock
shield/valve.
E. Strainers: The strainers of sizes up to and including 50mm shall be bronze

construction, Y-type with screwed cap, ends threaded internal to BS21, stainless
steel screen with 0.75mm diameter holes (50 per square centimeter) suitable for
16 bar working pressure. The strainers of sizes above 65mm except for cold water
service shall be cast iron body and cover, Y-type, with bolted cover, flanged to
BS:4504, stainless steel screen with 1.6mm diameter holes (17 per square
centimeter) suitable for 16 bar. The strainers for cold water service shall be of
bronze construction and flanged type. The gaskets for strainers shall be asbestos
free type.
22 05 00
2.16 WATER HAMMER ARRESTORS
A. Water hammer arrestors of sizes up to and including 50mm shall be barrel

fabricated of type `K' hard drawn copper. The cap shall be standard wrought
copper fittings, attached to barrel with 95-5 solder. The piston and threaded
adapter shall be machined of free turning brass.
B. Seals shall be O-rings Parker Spec.N741-75. Seal lubricant shall be Dow Corning
Silicone compound No.111, FF and DA listed for use in potable water systems.
C. The arrestors shall be suitable for normal operating pressure up to 16 bar.
D. Provide water hammer arrestor over the entire system as required.
2.17 TRAPS
A. Copper and copper alloy traps shall be as per BS 1184.
B. The depth of seal of traps shall be as under:

a) Traps with outlets for pipes up to and including 50mm internal diameter
shall have a minimum water seal of 75mm.
b) Traps with outlets for pipes above 50mm internal diameter shall have a
minimum water seal of 50mm.
C. The minimum internal diameter of tubular traps shall be as under:

a) Wash basin, bidet, drinking fountain, bar well. : 32mm
b) Sink, bath, shower tray, domestic waste disposal
unit, hotel/canteen sink, bowl urinal. : 40mm
c) Wash tub, industrial waste disposal unit. : 50mm
d) Stall urinal (up to six only). : 65mm
D. All traps shall be provided with cleaning eyes.
2.18 TAPS
A. Screw down stop taps and bib taps shall be chromium plated brass unless
otherwise indicated.
B. All taps shall be as per BS 1010 and shall clearly indicate size, manufacturers
name or brand, BS reference.
C. Taps shall be marked clearly for identification of hot or cold-water services by

HOT/COLD or Red/Blue color codes; when they are pillar type or mixers.
2.19 MECHANICAL SLEEVE SEALS / SEALS / ESCUTCHEONS
A. Mechanical Sleeve Seals Description: Modular sealing element unit, designed

for field assembly, to fill annular space between pipe and sleeve.
a) Sealing Elements: EPDM interlocking links shaped to fit surface of pipe.

Include type and number required for pipe material and size of pipe.
b) Pressure Plates: Stainless steel. Include two for each sealing element.
22 05 00
c) Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Carbon steel with corrosion-resistant coating of

length required to secure pressure plates to sealing elements. Include one for
each sealing elements.
B. SEALS
a) Galvanized-Steel Sheet: 0.6-mm) minimum thickness; round tube closed

with welded longitudinal joint.
b) Steel Pipe: Schedule 40 for up to 250mm, standard weight for 300mm and
larger fabricated with 50mm integral seal welded water stop, finished
assembly painted with zinc rich paint.
c) Cast Iron: Cast or fabricated "wall pipe" equivalent to ductile-iron pressure
pipe, with plain ends and integral water stop, unless otherwise indicated.
d) Stack Sleeve Fittings: Manufactured, cast-iron sleeve with integral clamping
flange. Include clamping ring and bolts and nuts for membrane flashing.
e) Stainless Steel Sheet: Fabricated 304L stainless steel,2mm minimum thickness,
round tube closed with welded longitudinal joint, fabricated with 50mm
integral seal welded water stop.
C. ESCUTCHEONS:
a) Description: Manufactured wall and ceiling escutcheons and floor plates,
with an ID to closely fit around pipe, tube, and insulation of insulated piping
and an OD that completely covers opening.
b) One-Piece, Cast-Brass Type: With set screw, Finish- Polished chrome plated.
c) Split casting, Cast Brass Type: With concealed hinge and set screw, Finish-
polished chrome plated.
d) One piece, Stamped Steel Type: With Screw or spring clips and chrome plated
finished.
2.20 SUPPORTS, ANCHORS AND SEALS
A. The supports shall be purpose made type of materials suitable for the pipe
material to avoid any bimetal/galvanic corrosion.
1. The supports for copper pipe work up to 54mm sizes shall be two-piece
copper spacing clips. Alternatively cast brass wall plate brackets shall be
used.
2. The supports for copper pipe work for sizes above 54mm shall be cast brass
single rings with suitable rod.
3. The supports for steel pipe work shall be single or double bossed clamps zinc
plated with noise reducing purpose made rubber lining.
4. The supports for insulated steel pipe work shall be single bossed clamps, zinc
plated with closed cells polyurethane hard foam wrapped in aluminum foil
overlapped joint insulation of suitable thickness.
5. The supports for plastic pipe works shall be galvanized steel holder bats of
purpose made type.
B. All supports shall be suitably treated with anti-corrosion paint or galvanized.
C. The anchors shall be of steel type.
D. Fire seal or fire stops shall be provided wherever services pipes and cable runs
penetrate through fire rated walls and floors.
22 05 00
E. In case of plastic pipes, cables, the fire stops shall be based on specially treated
graphite which expands when exposed from heat to fire to form a fire resistive
barrier. The resistance produced by the fire stop barrier shall be same as that of
fire rated wall and floor. In case of metallic pipes, mineral fiber as fire seal and fire
rated silicone sealant as smoke sealant shall be used.
2.21 CHANNEL SUPPORT SYSTEM
A. Metal framing strut shall be C-profile channel with serrated in-turned edges,
fabricated from structural grade steel conforming to one of the following
specifications: ASTM A570 GR 33, ASTM A653 GR 33.
B. Finishes: Strut shall be finished in accordance with one of the following standards:
C. HOT-DIP GALVANIZED(HDG):
HDG-Single Channels: Material S235 JR according to DIN 10025 hot-dip galvanized to
minimum 45 microns.
HDG-Double Channels: Material S250 GD according to DIN 1044 hot-dip galvanized to
minimum 45 microns, pre-galvanized material.
HDG-plus: Material S235 JR according to DIN 10025 hot-dip galvanized to
approximately 70 microns.
D. Metal framing channel shall have thickness of 2.6 mm or 1.9 mm, and a 22.2 mm
continuous opening. Slotted channel shall contain 63 mm by 13.5 mm slots
punched 100 mm on center.
2.22 SUPPORTS FINISHES
A. Indoor Applications
1. Hangers and supports for steel pipe shall be electro-galvanized pre-
galvanized finish conforming to ASTM A653 GR 33 specification
B. Outdoor Applications
1. Hangers and supports for steel pipe shall be hot-dipped galvanized
conforming to ASTM A123 specification or equivalent; stainless steel hangers
and supports shall be used for applications involving corrosive environments.
2.23 WATER STORAGE TANKS
Cold water storage tanks shall be provided as shown on the drawings to the sizes
and capacities indicated.
A. GRP Sectional Insulated / Non-Insulated Tanks:
a) The manufacture and design shall be Hot Press Molded GRP Sectional Water
Storage Tanks complying with BSEN 13280:2001 for glass fiber reinforced plastic
cistern for cold water storage & BS EN ISO 9001 for quality standard
requirements.
b) Cisterns shall be manufactured by Hot press molded method, glass reinforced

plastic, molded at temperatures up to 150 deg c using polyester resin which
confirms to ISO 472; UV stabilized and ‘E’ glass fiber reinforcement, color grey
(RAL 7004).
22 05 00
c) The cistern design shall incorporate pillow panel to the walls of cisterns with
provisions for flat panels for connections and fittings. Base panels shall be
externally flanged (EFB) with 1x1m flat panels and one pillow sump panel per
internal partitions with stainless steel fasteners throughout. There shall be a
minimum of one wash-out pipe connection per internal partition with external
plugged-off valve set level with the bottom of the tank and the tank bottom
shall be gently sloped towards the wash-out point (1/100) to facilitate de-sitting.
d) All surfaces of the panels shall be smooth and crevice free to provide hygienic
finish and shall be dimensionally accurate with sharply defined profiles.
e) All overflows, vent, drain, inlet / outlet connections, water level switches,
indicators, internal partitions and all necessary connections referred to below
shall be installed in duplicate, one slightly above the other, to function as stand-
by fail-safe devices. Tanks shall be provided with SS 316l flanged end for all
connections over 54mm and SS 316 screwed bosses for connections up to and
including 54mm. Connections to PN 16 and to be set to the dimensions
acceptable to the manufacturer.
f). Float valve chambers shall be provided with central hinged lockable ABS lid with
300 mm depth, where appropriate provision for air gap type in compliance with
BSEN 13077:2008.
g) The float valves shall be of a material which is resistant to corrosion by sweet

water and shall be of the equilibrium type. The associated floats shall be of
plastic and capable of absorbing excessive water mains pressure fluctuations.
h) The tank construction shall incorporate manhole covers of 600 mm diameter

hinged lockable ABS lid to access the tank and additional provisions for controls,
cables with all necessary ventilators.
i) Overflows and ventilators shall be provided on tanks. Each tank or tank partition
section shall have an overflow/warning pipe or separate overflow and warning
pipes with a warning device wired to an indicating panel. All overflow pipes,
warning pipes and ventilator connections are to be screened suitably to
prevent the ingress of vermin.
j) All the panels shall be rigidly supported by a combination of stainless steel

(grade SS 316) tie rods and brackets internally and galvanized box section
externally.
k) The steel work shall be designed to EN 10088-3:1995. Internal stainless steel 1.4401
(316/A4) grades and external mild steel hot dip galvanized to BSEN ISO
1461:2009. Cisterns shall incorporate external wall bracing on depths 1.5m and
greater and tie rods 2m and greater.
l) Panels shall be factory insulated; using minimum 40mm thick CFC/HFC

expanded polystyrene. Panels shall be insulated within a profiled face covering
the maximum surface area and to be encapsulated with an external weather
skin made from ultraviolet stabilized material providing protection against
weathering.
m) Connections to be site fitted on flat insulated panels and all holes shall be
sealed with a recessed plastic section from the outer surface of the insulation
skin to the cistern panel.
22 05 00
n) All cisterns shall be installed on either flat continuous foundations, close center
beams, pier walls or bearer beams confirming to manufacturers specification of
flatness and deflection to be provided. Refer BSTL 1693-004 to BSTL-1693-012.
o) Provide full height partition using the standard panels where partitions are
required on the water tanks. Each compartment shall be capable of supporting
water on either side with one side empty. Wherever tank walls require external
reinforcement then the partition walls shall be similarly reinforced with grade 316
stainless steel.
p) The GRP sectional Insulated / Non-insulated tanks shall be WRAS approved and
have local water supply directorate approval and shall comply with BS EN 13077
installations.
q) The GRP sectional water tank installations shall be strictly carried out by
approved manufacturer’s installers.
r) The GRP insulated sectional panels shall comply with BSEN 13280:2001 for glass
fiber reinforced plastic cistern for cold water storage & BS EN ISO 9001 for quality
standard requirements with following characteristics: -
1. Method of manufacture – Hot Press Molded
2. Specific gravity: 1.8
3. Tensile strength: 100 MPa
4. Flexural strength: 200 MPa
5. Flexural modulus: 12 GPa
6. Impact strength: 180 kj/m²
7. Shore hardness: D90
8. Shear strength: 94.1 MPa
9. Glass fiber content: 30%
10. Thermal expansion: 2 x 10-5 / deg C
11. Thermal conductivity: 0.23 W / m K
12. Overall heat transmission: 0.6 W/ m²K
13. Water absorption %: < 0.2 %
14. Light transmission: Zero
15. Gasket / water tight seals: Balseal High density foam & butyl sealing strips
in accordance with tank manufacturer’s recommendation. .
16. Tie rods, stays, fasteners: stainless steel grade 316 / A4.
17. Frame angles and frame plates: For internal Stainless steel and for External
hot dipped galvanized steel.
18. External / internal ladder: Stainless Steel according to manufacturer’s
standards.
19. G.R.P base panel and side panel and resin cover thickness shall be based
on the size.
20. Glass tube level indicator with graduation scale for all compartments.
Note: Guarantee from manufacturer for the material and complete installation
including all accessories for 10 years after the date of testing & commissioning.
B. Polyethylene Insulated / Non-Insulated Tanks:
a) Cold water tank body shall be of 100% virgin polyethylene material, and in one
piece only. The body material shall have 3 layers for non-insulated and 4 layers for
insulated tanks, inner and outer layer of polyethylene material and insulation and
black UV light blocking layers sandwiched in between two polyethylene layers.
The polyethylene material shall be FDA approved grade, and shall help to guard
22 05 00
against bacteria, fungus and algae. It should withstand high wind pressure and
prevents stored water from ultra-violet radiation.
b) The tank shall have water inlet, outlet, overflow, drain and vent connection and
inlet ball valve shall be equilibrium type float of copper/brass material.
c) The tank construction must incorporate manhole with cover for access to the
bank and provision for control equipment in all respects.
d) Overflow and ventilator and warning pipe shall be provided with suitable screen
to prevent ingress of vermin.
e) Each tank shall have warning pipe below overflow point. Overflow and warning
can be clubbed together on separate line. Warning pipe shall be terminated at
ground floor levels so as one can visualize that tank is overflowing.
f) Tanks are to be provided with flanged pads for connections over 54mm and
screwed bosses for connections up to and including 54mm. Connections to be set
to the dimensions acceptable to the manufacturer.
g) All the above to be in accordance with the requirements of the Water Supply
Directorate.
Note: Guarantee from manufacturer for the material and complete installation
including all accessories for 10 years after the date of testing & commissioning
2.24 FLOW MEASUREMENT DEVICES
A. Flow measurement devices are to be provided as shown on the drawings or as

required in accordance with the requirement to commission the water circuits
and also to measure the flow from time to time when the system is in beneficial
use.
a) Flow measurement devices to be calibrated orifices complete with pressure

measurement tapings suitable for connecting an instrument to measure
differential pressure. Differential pressure is then related to flow rate using charts
provided by the manufacturer. In addition to the pressure measurement tapings,
standard size of testing, plug inserts shall also be provided on either side of orifice
to measure the pressure through the pressure gauge.
b) Orifice devices to be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's

recommendations regarding proximity to valves and other fittings so as not to
compromise the accuracy of the device.
c) The orifice device up to and including 50mm size shall be bronze metering
stations, BS21 taper threads, fitted with valve controlled test points suitable for 16
bar. The orifice device above 65mm size shall be cast iron metering stations,
outside diameter locating metering station centrally on BS 4504 flange bolting,
complete with gaskets, nuts, bolts extensions and valve controlled test points
suitable for 16 bar.
d) The Contractor is to allow for providing a portable measuring instrument for each
type of flow measurement device installed. The instrument to be complete with
all necessary ancillary fittings, connectors, hoses, charts, etc. and to remain on
site and become the property of the Employer.
22 05 00
2.25 TEMPERATURE AND PRESSURE INDICATION
A. Dial pressure gauges with a range not greater than twice the normal working
pressure to be fitted at each pump to indicate suction and delivery pressure.
Pressure gauges to be Bourden type not less than 100mm dial.
B. Dial type temperature gauges to be fitted to indicate the flow and return
temperatures of the water circuits in the pump room. Thermometers to be direct
mounted with brass or steel pockets in a position convenient for easy reading.
Thermometers to be mercury in steel type not less than 100mm dial.
C. In addition to the above, tapings with plugs with plugs to be fitted adjacent to
every immersion temperature sensor and each side of a heat transfer equipment
and control valve to receive portable instrument probes.
D. Calibration of all instruments to be agreed with the Engineer prior to ordering.
2.26 ELECTRIC MOTORS AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT
A. Electric Motors:
a) All electric motors whether supplied separately or as part of packaged

equipment to comply with appropriate British Standards or approved equivalents
b) Generally motors up to 0.75 kW output power will be single phase. Motors of 0.75
kW output and above to be 3 phase.
c) Generally motors up to 3.7 kW output are to be started direct on line and motors
of 3.7 kW or greater output to be provided with an appropriate form of assisted
start to suit the application.
d) All motors to be selected for operation on the nominal voltage of the local
electricity supply and to operate satisfactorily within the maximum band of
voltage variation guaranteed by the electricity supply authority.
e) In all cases motors to be selected for satisfactory performance in the particular

environment in which they are required to operate.
B. Electrical Equipment:
All electrical equipment provided for the project as separate items or as part of
packaged equipment separately specified is to comply with the IEE Regulations
for Electrical Equipment in Buildings. In all cases equipment is to be selected to
perform satisfactorily under the particular environmental conditions under which
it is required to operate.
2.27 UV ONLINE DISINFECTENT SYSTEM

Ultraviolet systems shall have a high disinfecting capacity: U.V. rays at 254 nm
(nanometer) to destroy 99.9% of pathogens.
Maximum operating pressure 8 bar
Operating temperature room 4-45 °C; water 2-80 °C
Pressure loss at maximum flow rate 0.2 bar
Power supply 230V - 50/60 Hz
Estimated T10 98%
22 05 00
Average Dose 74 mJ/cm²

Wall dose UV 51 mJ/cm²
LOG reduction 99,99%
Electric cabinet and frame SS304 with touch control panel
UV Chamber SS316
Drain and vent ports.
Other features:
UV lamps electrical status
Lamp fail indication
non-resettable running time counter
UV intensity meter,
Temperature sensor
High temperature cut-off
Auxiliary contact for shut-off
Provision for BMS Monitoring
The system shall be similar Culligan-Italy
2.28 SOFTENER
1. Water softening is the process of removing the hardness, caused by calcium

and magnesium salts, and exchanging them with sodium salts, which do not
deposit scale.
2. The exchange the water flows through a bed of resin that has been previously
charged with sodium chloride (table salt).
3. The exchange resin is suitable for contact with food, has high resistance to
mechanical shock, long life, high exchange capacity and low consumption of
salt.
4. Closely controlled resin bead size will minimize the pressure loss.
5. The softeners shall be completely automatic, and the different working phases
(service, back wash and regeneration) are controlled by an electro-
mechanical or electronic control board, that activates a valve or a group of
valves. The automatic phases may also be controlled by a metering device
that activates the regeneration phase according to the quantity of water
dispensed. In the “duplex” version of the stand-by softener shall automatically
be connected to service when the first softener exhausts its exchange
capacity, allowing it to regenerate, while the combined unit provides a
continuous flow of softened water.
6. The “extra recharge” device shall be provided, to make it possible to manually

activate the recharge without disturbing the automatic phases of the working
cycle.
7. Each softener shall be equipped with an automatic disinfection system. the

softener, valves and fittings shall be similar to culligan or equal and approved.
8. The contractor shall allow and provide for the first consumables and spare
parts as per manufacturer's recommendations.
22 05 00
9. Qualified manufacturers of water SOFTENER equipment of the type specified

are Culligan International Company or Lenntech or Degremont
2.29 OIL INTERCEPTOR
1. Materials: The separator body shall be cast in-situ to the dimensions as

specified by the manufacturer. All internal and external wall shall be coated
suitable to provide protection from aggressive chemicals and salts.
2. The oil separator shall be fitted with a coalescing unit and automatic shut-off
valve for situations when maximum oil capacity is reached. Minimum oil
storage capacity shall be 950/130 Liters; minimum suspended solids storage
capacity shall be 3000/1200 Liters as specified in the drawings. Unit shall be
fitted with bypass connection that will handle up to 60liters/sec, so that it may
handle the peak flow from the storm water network serviced by the unit.
Separator shall be resistant to uplift forces from underground water up to
finished grade water table level.
3. Performance The effluent water should contain maximum 5mg/L (5ppm) for
maximum designed flow. Comply with EN 858 class 1
4. Cover: Cover shall be manufactured from ductile iron (BS EN 124) and have a
minimum inside opening diameter of 600mm (24in). The cover should be
marked ‘Separator’ on the top. The cover shall be capable of withstanding
pedestrian / heavy vehicle traffic as required.
5. Accessories: The separator shall be equipped with high liquid level alarm /
maximum oil capacity alarm / maximum suspended solids capacity alarm
systems.
6. Installation Separator and its components shall be installed in strict accordance

with the manufacturer’s installation instructions and recommendations.
7. The oil water separator shall be ACO Oleopator NS15/3000 complete with
ductile iron cover as manufactured by ACO.
2.30 FULLY AUTOMATIC GREASE INTERCEPTOR
1. Fully automatic grease separator as per EN1825 for free-standing indoor

installation. Fully automatic odor-free disposal, cleaning and refilling.
2. Inner cleaning and chopping, mixing & rinsing of grease content with 175 bars
pressure and fresh water only. Only one standard drinking water connection for
cleaning device needed.
3. Material of the body shall be PE. Structural stability guarantee for 25 years of
the tank.
4. With vent pipe connection.
5. Switchbox/control display which can be connected to BMS for common fault
messages during operation. Electrical connection: 400V / 50 HZ / 6.9 kW
6. Filling device with solenoid valve (connection ¾) for automatic refilling.
7. If any risk of solids entering into the separator a separate coarse trap has to be
provided at the inlet pipe.
8. Separate pump for disposal and cleaning for secured operation reliability as
below schedule.
9. Automatic high-pressure internal cleaning with pump.
10. Nominal pressure: 175 bar
22 05 00
11. Capacity: 13 l/min

12. Chopping, mixing, rinsing in one process through high-pressure water
13. Disposal pump with free flow impeller (only necessary if total lifting height
between the tank and disposal connection exceeds 6m).
14. Motor power: 3.0 kW/2850 rpm
15. Delivery performance: 20 m3/h at 1 bar medium delivery head (can be
customized for higher performance depending on the project requirements)
16. Grease level alarm for electronic measurement of layer of grease which can
be connected to BMS. With two voltage-free changeover contacts to display
full warning (80%) and advance warning of fill level (50%).
17. Operating voltage: 230V
18. As per ACO Hydrojet Ext. Stage 3 or equal.
2.31 REVERSE OSMOSIS PLANT
A. General
a. Design and construction of the Reverse Osmosis System shall be in

accordance with these specifications.
b. The plant and its components shall be manufactured in Europe and

assembled at the specialist supplier’s factory in Europe. CULLIGAN OR
LENNTECH OR DEGREMONT. The RO plant should be manufactured as per
European standards. Factory test certificate and certificate of origin from
chamber of commerce of that country should be provided.
c. Purpose of the Reverse Osmosis (RO) system is to treat raw water made available
from the Municipal. The contractor shall obtain the water quality analysis from
WDD to select the RO system.
d. Specification for the components of the system for single train only. The other train
shall be similar.
B. Raw water analysis report & Capacity.
The Reverse Osmosis water treatment system will be designed based on the following:
Feed Water TDS : up to 2000ppm

Source : Municipal (obtain water quality analysis
from WDD for selection)
Flow Details
Product Flow : as indicated in drawings
Treated Water Quality
Product water TDS : < 200 mg/l
C. Water Transfer Pump (2 Duty + 1 stdby)
a. The raw water transfer pump will receive the water from the raw water
tank. The water will be transferred to the reverse osmosis unit by the water
transfer pump.
22 05 00
b. The pumps should be in one working and one standby. The pump should
be in special material of construction of stainless steel 316L.
c. The pump should be mounted on a common base plate and directly
coupled to the electric motor, totally enclosed.
d. The pump should be in accordance with the IEC standards and should
have IP 65 for the electrical protection of the terminal box.
e. The pump designed for a discharge flow rate of 13 m3/hr and discharge head
of 3 bar. The pump shall be of centrifugal type.
f. The pump switching on/off shall be on the basis of the levels in the Domestic
water tank.
g. The make of the pump shall be Grundfos or Equivalent equipped with VFD
Both the pumps shall be in operation during Backwash.
h. Water transfer pumps shall be common for both trains
D. Brackish Water Activated Carbon filter for Reverse Osmosis
1. The Brackish water will be filtered by the multimedia filter. There shall one filter
working in during the operation of the plant.
2. The filter shall be completely automatic and designed for High Brackish water
duty.
3. The material of construction of the filter should be in polypropylene (Food
grade) on inside and polyamide on the outside.
4. The filter media will be the special media for brackish water filtration , the
vendor shall use this media in the filter for removal of suspended solid, turbidity
and undissolved iron.
5. The backwash shall be automatic. The total length of backwash and rinse shall
be 16 min. approx.
- Backwash rinse : about 8 minutes
- Idle time : about 3 minutes
- Down-flow rinse : about 5 minutes
6. The backwash shall be done once a day and the backwash shall be done in
series.
7. A PLF/ MVP microprocessor based electronic programmer shall be installed
on the filter in order to control the filter operation. It shall consist of a
programming keyboard and of a bright display to indicate the operation
status.
8. The direct control of pneumatic butterfly automatic valves is carried out
through a rotating pilot distributor housed in the IP 65 box installed directly on
the filter.
9. The harness consists of hydro-pneumatic butterfly valves interconnected with
nontoxic PVC pipes and fittings.
10. The filter dimensions shall be 1200mm Diameter x 2135 mm Height The filter shall
operate on electric supply of 24-110-230V – 50 Hz The Inlet/Outlet/Drain Fittings
shall be DN 40
11. The make of the filter shall be Culligan or Lenntech or Degremont
E. Dosing system
a. The vendor shall ensure that they have provided the appropriate
chemical dosing system for the following chemicals:
b. Anti scalant – Culligan Scaleguard pH correction – Caustic Soda
c. Post chlorination- Sodium Hypochlorite
d. The chemical dosing of the chemicals shall be done using the Logic type
e. Dosing pumps. The chemical dosing pump shall be of tough and reliable
material of construction.
22 05 00
f. The body shall be in PVDF material of construction. The parts coming in

contact with the liquid for injection shall be PVDF, Viton, PTFE and ceramic.
g. The dosing pump shall have ball check valves on the injection and suction
lines. There shall be an electronic circuit which will stop the dosing pump in
case of minimum level in the tank.
h. The dosing pump shall be accompanied by 100/150 liters tank of chemical
storage. The tank shall be pre-fitted with special inserts for dosing pump
assembly. The tank shall be fitted with a minimum float level switch, anti-
siphon kit.
i. The dosing pump shall be programmable by setting with microprocessors. The
dosing pump should be able to operate continuously, or by pulse emitter
device or by 4-20mA input signal or time controlled. The operation setting
should be adjusted by using keys on the control board. The operation with On
– Off free contact should also be possible.
F. Cartridge Filtration
a. The vendor shall provide that a in line cartridge filtration system is provided.
b. The cartridge filter will be of 5 micron Nominal type and it will ensure that the
Silt Density Index15 min
c. (SDI15 min) less than 3 is achieved.
d. The Cartridge filters will be suitable for high brackish water duty.
e. The vessel shall be in PP construction, clamp and support in AISI 316 equipped
with a suitable cover for an easy cartridge replacement. It bears the following
accessories:
- inlet /outlet pressure gauge,
- bottom drain with manual valve,
- Manual air vent.
f. The cartridge filter will be suitable for a flow rate of 1 1 m3/hr. The Duplex
cartridge filter will have
g. 3number of elements of 40” length of food grade polypropylene
material of construction. The maximum operating pressure for the Cartridge
filter will 8 bar.
h. The make of the Cartridge filter will be Culligan or Lenntech or Degremont
G. Reverse Osmosis block
a. The vendor will provide as indicated a reverse osmosis system complete

with modules, control system. The system will be of an approved design as
fabricated by a manufacturer regularly engaged in the production of water
treatment equipment. All equipment and material will be supplied in
compliance with the specifications as intended for a complete and
operational system.
b. Qualified manufacturers of water treatment equipment of the type specified
are Culligan International
c. Company or Lenntech or Degremont
d. General Description
The purpose of the Single reverse osmosis system will be to reduce the
dissolved mineral salt content from a known B o r e well water/Municipal
supply. The system will be capable, upon initial startup, of reducing the
dissolved mineral salt content of the water by at least 98%, based on
membrane industry design standards, when the system is operated in
accordance with the operating instructions. The system will be capable of
supplying 6.25 m3/hr of treated water based on the influent water analysis
listed in Section 1.01 A of this equipment specification.
22 05 00
e. The Reverse Osmosis system will be equipped with a permeate flushing system
which will operate automatically at every stoppage of the system and thus
flush away the high TDS water from the membranes
f. Design Parameters
Nominal Capacity* : as per drawings
(Permeate) Approximate Recovery : 70 to 75%
Daily Water Usage : as per drawings
Membranes : BW30-LE400 (Make
DOW Brand Filmtec)
Daily Hours of Operation : 23oC

Operating Temperature : 25 oC
Max. Operating Pressure (Pump) : 14 Bar
Inlet Pressure (dynamic) : 0.5 to 5 Bar
Electrical Requirements : 380 to 400 V, 3 phase,
50Hz
The reverse Osmosis system will have the following components:
High Pressure Pump : 01
Rotameter : 03
Pressure Switches : 03
Pressure Gauges : 04
Flushing Kit : 01
g. All the above-mentioned components will be assembled on a skid with

complete hydraulic and electric connections (high pressure pipe work –
Stainless steel 316, low pressure pipe work – PVC)
H. Pressurization System.
High Pressure Pump manufactured in SS316 parts equipped with VFD. Grundfos CRN
series or equivalent.
I. Modules
The unit will use spiral wound reverse osmosis modules. The membrane shall be
suitable for high pressure duty. The 200mm diameter by 1000mm long modules will
be the polyamide thin film composite membrane type. The module array will be
capable, upon initial startup, of producing water at a nominal flow based on
equipment specifications. The module assembly will consist array arrangement to
deliver the design capacity with minimal waste flow requirements. The
membrane modules should essentially have iLec end caps arrangement
The housings shall be constructed of fiberglass (FRP) for corrosion resistance.
J. Pipe and Fittings
The equipment will include all mechanical, hydraulic and electrical controls for a
complete, self-contained unit. A suitably sized normally closed solenoid valve will
be mounted on the inlet to shut off the water supply when the unit is not operating.
K. Operating Pressure Control Valve
Operating pressure will be controlled by a panel mounted needle-type high

pressure control valve connected to the waste line of the modules. It will be
constructed of corrosion resistant materials and be equipped with a knob for setting
the operating pressure.
22 05 00
L. Waste Restrictor
A panel mounted combination flow indicator/throttling valve will be connected to
the concentrate return to display and maintain the proper recovery ratio of
product-to-feed water flow.
M. Hydraulic Connections
The system will be designed with suitably sized inlet and outlet connections.
N. Mounting
Electric welded, carbon steel skid duly treated against corrosion with epoxy coating.
O. Electrical Controls
Electric board, IP 65, with Siemens PLC and HMI . The panel suitable to contain the
power, control, monitoring and alarm devices for the plant.All the components will
be positioned so as attain an easy access for any operation that may be
necessary. The controls shall be identified by metallic plates fixed by screws.
All instruments shall be safety anchored and positioned so as to keep a proper

geometry, both horizontally and vertically. All components are mounted in such a
way as to allow dismounting a single one without interfering with the correct
operation of the others.
Copper wiring shall be fixed to the board walls to be connected to the main
earthling system. The panel should have the provision for the following indications to
connect to BMS system
- RO system On/off
- Filter Backwash
- High pressure pump trip
- Feed pump trip
- Low pressure trip
- High pressure trip
- Pretreatment Dosing tank low level
- High Conductivity –Product
- High PH – Product.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PLUMBING DEMOLITION
A. Disconnect, demolish, and remove plumbing systems, equipment, and

components indicated to be removed.
1. Piping to Be Removed: Remove portion of piping indicated to be removed

and cap or plug remaining piping with same or compatible piping material.
2. Piping to Be Abandoned in Place: Drain piping and cap or plug piping with
same or compatible piping material.
3. Equipment to Be Removed: Disconnect and cap services and remove
equipment.
22 05 00
4. Equipment to Be Removed and Reinstalled: Disconnect and cap services

and remove, clean, and store equipment; when appropriate, reinstall,
reconnect, and make equipment operational.
5. Equipment to Be Removed and Salvaged: Disconnect and cap services and
remove equipment and deliver to Owner.
B. If pipe, insulation, or equipment to remain is damaged in appearance or is

unserviceable, remove damaged or unserviceable portions and replace with
new products of equal capacity and quality.
3.2 PIPING SYSTEMS - COMMON REQUIREMENTS
A. Install piping according to the following requirements and respective

Specification Sections specifying piping systems.

arrangement of piping systems. Indicated locations and arrangements were
used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other
design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are
approved on Coordination Drawings.
C. Install piping in concealed locations, unless otherwise indicated and except in

D. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and

service areas at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are
prohibited unless specifically indicated otherwise.
E. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel
removal.
F. Install piping to permit valve servicing.
G. Install piping at indicated slopes.
H. Install piping free of sags and bends.
I. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.
J. Install piping to allow application of insulation.
K. Install escutcheons for penetrations of walls, ceilings and floors in exposed

areas.
L. Select system components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system
operating pressure.
M. Permanent sleeves are not required for holes formed by removable PE sleeves.
N. Install sleeves for pipes passing through concrete and masonry walls and
concrete floor and roof slabs.
22 05 00
O. For core drilled holes, grout sleeve into concrete, completely filling void
between sleeve and hole and maintain fire rating. Core- drilled structures are
required to be reinforced as noted on structural drawings
P. Install sleeves for pipes passing through concrete and masonry walls, gypsum-
board partitions, and concrete floor and roof slabs.
1. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces.
a. Exception: Extend sleeves installed in floors of mechanical equipment

areas or other wet areas 2 inches (50 mm) above finished floor level.
Extend cast-iron sleeve fittings below floor slab as required to secure
clamping ring if ring is specified.
2. Install sleeves in new walls and slabs as new walls and slabs are constructed.
3. Install sleeves that are large enough to provide 12.5 mm annular clear space
between sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation. Use the following sleeve
materials:
a. Cast Iron / Steel Pipe Sleeves or stainless-steel sheet sleeves: For pipes
penetrating other than gypsum board partitions or walls.
b. Galvanized Steel Sheet Sleeves: For pipes penetrating gypsum-board
partitions or walls.
c. Stack Sleeve Fittings: For pipes penetrating floors with membrane
waterproofing. Secure flashing between clamping flanges. Install
section of cast-iron soil pipe to extend sleeve to 50 mm above finished
floor level.
1) Seal space outside of sleeve fittings with grout.
4. Except for underground wall penetrations, seal annular space between

sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation, using joint sealants appropriate for size,
depth, and location of joint. Refer to Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants" for
materials and installation.
Q. Aboveground, Exterior-Wall Pipe Penetrations: Seal penetrations using sleeves

and mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 25-mm annular clear
space between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.
1. Install steel pipe for sleeves smaller than 150 mm in diameter.

2. Install cast-iron "wall pipes" for sleeves 150 mm and larger in diameter.
R. Underground, Exterior-Wall Pipe Penetrations: Install cast-iron "wall pipes" for

sleeves. Seal pipe penetrations using mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size
to allow for 25-mm annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for installing
mechanical sleeve seals.

22 05 00
S. Fire-Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings,

and floors at pipe penetrations. Seal pipe penetrations with fire stop materials.
Refer to Division 07 Section "Penetration Fire stopping" for materials.
T. Verify final equipment locations for roughing-in.
U. Refer to equipment specifications in other Sections of these Specifications for

roughing-in requirements.
3.3 PIPING JOINT CONSTRUCTION
A. Join pipe and fittings according to the following requirements and Division 22
Sections specifying piping systems.
B. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.
C. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings
before assembly.
D. Soldered Joints: Apply ASTM B 813, water-flushable flux, unless otherwise

indicated, to tube end. Construct joints according to ASTM B 828 or CDA's
"Copper Tube Handbook," using lead-free solder alloy complying with ASTM B 32.
E. Brazed Joints: Construct joints according to AWS's "Brazing Handbook," "Pipe and
Tube" Chapter, using copper-phosphorus brazing filler metal complying with
AWS A5.8.
F. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to

ASME B1.20.1. Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe
ends to remove burrs and restore full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows:
1. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads unless

dry seal threading is specified.
corroded or damaged. Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open
welds.
G. Welded Joints: Construct joints according to AWS D10.12, using qualified

processes and welding operators according to Part 1 "Quality Assurance" Article.
H. Flanged Joints: Select appropriate gasket material, size, type, and thickness for
service application. Install gasket concentrically positioned. Use suitable
lubricants on bolt threads.
I. Plastic Piping Solvent-Cement Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces. Join pipe
and fittings according to the following:
1. Comply with ASTM F 402 for safe-handling practice of cleaners, primers, and
solvent cements.
2. ABS Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2235 and ASTM D 2661 Appendixes.
3. CPVC Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2846/D 2846M Appendix.
22 05 00
4. PVC Pressure Piping: Join schedule number ASTM D 1785, PVC pipe and PVC
socket fittings according to ASTM D 2672. Join other-than-schedule-number
PVC pipe and socket fittings according to ASTM D 2855.
5. PVC Non-Pressure Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2855.
6. PVC to ABS Non-Pressure Transition Fittings: Join according to ASTM D 3138
Appendix.
J. Plastic Pressure Piping Gasketed Joints: Join according to ASTM D 3139.
K. Plastic Non-Pressure Piping Gasketed Joints: Join according to ASTM D 3212.
L. PE Piping Heat-Fusion Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces by wiping with clean
cloth or paper towels. Join according to ASTM D 2657.
1. Plain-End Pipe and Fittings: Use butt fusion.

2. Plain-End Pipe and Socket Fittings: Use socket fusion.
M. Fiberglass Bonded Joints: Prepare pipe ends and fittings, apply adhesive, and
join according to pipe manufacturer's written instructions.
3.4 PIPING CONNECTIONS
A. Make connections according to the following, unless otherwise indicated:
1. Install unions, in piping DN 50 and smaller, adjacent to each valve and at final
connection to each piece of equipment.
2. Install flanges, in piping DN 65 and larger, adjacent to flanged valves and at
final connection to each piece of equipment.
3. Dry Piping Systems: Install dielectric unions and flanges to connect piping
materials of dissimilar metals.
4. Wet Piping Systems: Install dielectric coupling and nipple fittings to connect
piping materials of dissimilar metals.
3.5 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION - COMMON REQUIREMENTS
A. Install equipment to allow maximum possible headroom unless specific mounting

heights are not indicated.
B. Install equipment level and plumb, parallel and perpendicular to other building
systems and components in exposed interior spaces, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Install plumbing equipment to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or

replacement of components. Connect equipment for ease of disconnecting,
with minimum interference to other installations. Extend grease fittings to
accessible locations.
D. Install equipment to allow right of way for piping installed at required slope.
3.6 CONCRETE BASES
A. Concrete Bases: Anchor equipment to concrete base according to equipment

manufacturer's written instructions and according to seismic codes at Project.
22 05 00
1. Construct concrete bases of dimensions indicated, but not less than 100 mm
larger in both directions than supported unit.
perimeter of the base.
3. Install epoxy-coated anchor bolts for supported equipment that extend
through concrete base, and anchor into structural concrete floor.
4. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use supported equipment
manufacturer's setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and
directions furnished with items to be embedded.
equipment.
6. Install anchor bolts according to anchor-bolt manufacturer's written
instructions.
7. Use 20.7-MPa 28-day compressive-strength concrete and reinforcement as
per structural specification.
3.7 ERECTION OF METAL SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGES
A. Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location,

alignment, and elevation to support and anchor plumbing materials and
equipment.
B. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1.
3.8 ERECTION OF WOOD SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGES
A. Cut, fit, and place wood grounds, nailers, blocking, and anchorages to support,
and anchor plumbing materials and equipment.
B. Select fastener sizes that will not penetrate members if opposite side will be
exposed to view or will receive finish materials. Tighten connections between
members. Install fasteners without splitting wood members.
C. Attach to substrates as required to support applied loads.
3.9 GROUTING
A. Mix and install grout for plumbing equipment base bearing surfaces, pump and
other equipment base plates, and anchors.
B. Clean surfaces that will come into contact with grout.
C. Provide forms as required for placement of grout.
D. Avoid air entrapment during placement of grout.
E. Place grout, completely filling equipment bases.
F. Place grout on concrete bases and provide smooth bearing surface for
equipment.
G. Place grout around anchors.
H. Cure placed grout.
22 05 00
3.10 CLEANLINESS
A. Sealing Open Ends of Pipe work: Care shall be exercised during the erection of
pipe work to ensure that foreign matter is not allowed in or enter the pipe. When
any section of installation is left open for any purpose whatsoever the open ends
shall be temporarily sealed with purpose-made plugs or blanking caps. Rags,
paper or similar substances shall not be used under any circumstances.
B. Flushing Out and Cleaning Pipe work: On the satisfactory completion of testing,
systems shall be drained and thoroughly flushed out with clean water. The flow of
water for this purpose shall be sufficient to ensure vigorous flushing and the
process shall be maintained until the discharge water runs clear. During this
period the Contractor shall remove, clean and replace the screens of all pipeline
strainers. Any items likely to be damaged by the process shall not to be included
and necessary bypass arrangement shall be provided to exclude such
equipments from the loop.
C. Sterilization of Pipe work: Immediately prior to handover or at such time as the

installation cannot be re contaminated prior to handover, the Contractor shall
thoroughly and efficiently sterilize all hot and cold-water services including
storage tanks. Sterilization shall be carried out by a specialist firm conversant with
this type of work. The disinfection process for complete system shall be carried out
in accordance with AWWA standard C651-2005
D. After sterilization water samples shall be taken and tests shall be carried out by a
third-party testing laboratory to confirm to the Engineer that the water from the
installations is suitable for human consumption. If the tests prove unsatisfactory
the sterilization shall be repeated.
3.11 PRESSURE TESTING OF PIPEWORK
A. All pipe work shall be pressure tested after installation by the Contractor to details
specified for particular systems. Pressure test shall be maintained for a minimum
of 30 minutes or for as long as is necessary to inspect the whole of the pipe work
involved. The test shall be repeated after any defect has been repaired.
B. Any plant or equipment which might be damaged by the test shall be excluded.
After re-connection, the whole system shall be re-tested within the limits of the
plant and equipment. Testing medium shall be water unless otherwise specified
C. Reasonable notice shall be given for all the tests to enable the Engineer or his
authorized representative to be present. Similarly, the Water Supply Directorate
Inspector shall be given required notice before the testing of systems under their
jurisdiction. All test results shall be recorded.
3.12 COMPLETION
A. Painting Polishing and Cleaning: The Contractor shall be responsible for painting
mild steel pipe work in "engineering" spaces such as ducts, trenches, chases,
ceiling spaces, plant rooms, tank rooms etc., together with all associated
steelwork supports. Painting shall consist of thoroughly wire brushing and painting
one coat of metal primer paint. The work shall be in accordance with painting
as described under Architectural finishes.
22 05 00
B. Thermal insulation shall be further painted as specified separately. Uninsulated

pipe work and other metalwork, branches, etc., shall be further painted with one
undercoat and one finishing coat where exposed to view within plant rooms.
C. All welds shall be painted with two coats of red lead based paint immediately
upon completion. All exposed threads on mild steel pipe work shall be wire
brushed and painted two coats red lead based paint immediately after
completion.
D. In the case of control panels and similar items for which special finish is provided
care shall be taken that these are not damaged during erection. Any damage
caused shall be made good to the satisfaction of the Engineer. Before
handover the Contractor shall thoroughly clean all items of plant and equipment.
Bright parts shall be polished and any adhesive protection removed.
IDENTIFICATION OF PLANT
E. All pumps, control panels and similar items subject to close inspection shall be
identified using engraved laminate or similar material having black characters
5mm high minimum on a white background.
F. Ventilation plant and other large surfaces may need to be identified by stencil
lettering neatly applied so that it may be read from a greater distance.
Operating positions of levers and handles shall be suitably indicated.
G. All valves in plant spaces, voids, ducts and chases shall be fitted with labels
secured to the valve by means of a key ring. Labels shall be engraved laminate
or similar material having black characters 5mm high minimum on a white
background.
H. Identification of Pipelines:
Pipelines shall be identified by the color code for General Building Services as BS
1710:1975. Identifying color bands shall be positioned: -
i) Both sides of each valve
ii) Both sides of any wall or partition through which the pipes passes.
iii) At each bend in the pipeline
iv) At maximum intervals of 2.5m on straight lengths.
In addition to the color coding lettering and arrows to be added to the primary color
bands to indicate particular service and direction of flow. Labels to be printed with
black lettering at least 20mm high on vinyl impregnated cloth or equivalent backed
with pressure sensitive adhesive. Labels to be suitable for operation between -40°C. and
115°C.
3.13 LUBRICANTS
A. The Contractor shall be responsible for the initial fill of chemicals, oil and grease
for the equipment supplied and for the maintenance of lubrication during the
construction, testing and commissioning period up to the time of handover at
which time he is to ensure that all reservoirs, etc., are full and all bearing
lubricated.
B. The Contractor shall further supply sufficient quantities of each grade of grease
and oil required to operate the plant continuously for a period of three months.
C. Lubricants shall be supplied in suitable containers with identifying labels.
22 05 00
3.14 COMMISSIONING
A. The Contractor shall be responsible for commissioning the whole of the

installations, checking performance and demonstrating that the design intent has
been achieved as detailed by CxA and TAB.
B. Work shall be carried out in accordance with the standard procedures published
by the CIBSE and BSRIA and results of tests recorded on approved commissioning
sheets. Following approval by the Engineer the commissioning record sheets shall
be incorporated into the Operating and Maintenance Manual referred to
separately.
C. Commissioning shall be carried out by staff fully experienced in this type of work
and using manufacturer's specialists where necessary. The Contractor shall ensure
that all necessary provision is built into the installations to enable commissioning
and testing procedures to be carried out properly and also to make due
allowance for commissioning in programming the work.
D. Further details of commissioning and testing requirements shall be as per

Manufacturer's recommendations for particular systems.
22 05 00
22 11 23 - Domestic Water Pumps
PART 1 - GENERAL

Supplementary Conditions Sections, apply to this Section.
B. This section on Domestic water pumps is to be read in conjunction with the

following sections:
Number Description
220500 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING
230800 COMMISSIONING OF HVAC
1.2 SUMMARY
1. Horizontal Multistage Centrifugal Pumps.

2. Vertically in-line multistage centrifugal pumps.
3. Submersible Sewage Pumps
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include materials of

construction, rated capacities, certified performance curves with operating points
plotted on curves, operating characteristics, electrical characteristics, and
furnished specialties and accessories.
B. Shop Drawings: Diagram power, signal and control wiring
C. Operation and Maintenance Data: For domestic water pumps to include in

operation and maintenance manuals.
D. ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1-2010 Compliance: Provide compliance form as per

A. Factory Test: The performance test for the equipment at the simulated
temperature and humidity condition should carry out at the factory prior to
dispatch of the equipment. The test shall be witnessed by the Engineer. Allow for
visit by two personnel from Consultant/Client for the factory test visit.
22 11 23
B. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements

of domestic water pumps and are based on the specific system indicated.
Refer to Division 1 Section "Product Requirements."
C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined

in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and
application.
D. UL Compliance: Comply with UL 778 for motor-operated water pumps.
A. Retain shipping flange protective covers and protective coatings during storage.
B. Protect bearings and couplings against damage.
C. Comply with pump manufacturer's written rigging instructions for handling.
1.6 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases with actual equipment

provided.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 TRANSFER PUMP SETS
VERTICAL, IN-LINE MULTISTAGE CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS
A. Description: The pumps shall be factory assembled and tested, Vertical Multistage
Inline, rigid-coupled Centrifugal pump; designed for Vertical installation with pump
and motor shafts mounted vertically. The pumps shall be rated for minimum
working pressure of 16 bar and a continuous water temperature of 120 deg C.
The pump and motor shall be of European origin or equal approved quality. The
pump and motor shall be coupled at the manufacturer’s works and tested.
Factory test certificates shall be available upon request.
B. Pump Construction:
1. The pump shall consist of a base and a pump head. The chamber stack and
the sleeve shall be secured between the pump head and the base by means
of stay bolts. The pump base shall have the suction and discharge ports on
the same level (in line). Pumps up to 50mm suction and discharge ports shall
have connections suitable for PJE / Victaulic couplings. DIN flanged
connections shall also be available is specifically requested. Connections of
75mm and above shall be DIN flanged.
22 11 23
All wetted parts of the pump shall be of stainless steel 1.4401 (AISI 316) / 1.4408
(cast AISI 316). Cast Iron parts of the pump shall be electro-coated internally &
externally with cataphoresis surface treatment for high corrosion resistance.
2. Impeller: The impellers shall be of stainless steel 1.4401 (AISI 316). The impeller
design shall ensure streamlined flow through it, reducing eddy flow and
frictional losses.
3. Pump Shaft: The pump shaft shall be stainless steel 1.4401(AISI 316) or better.
4. Mechanical Seal: The Mechanical seals shall be of the Cartridge type,

balanced, with Silicon carbide Vs. Silicon Carbide seal faces and EPDM /
Viton elastomers. The Cartridge seal design shall allow quick replacements,
without dismantling the Pump.
Larger pumps with heavy motors (more than 35kg), shall use spacer type
couplings to enable installation / replacement of Cartridge mechanical seals
without dismantling the motor or the pump.
5. Bearings: The pump bearings shall be of hard wearing materials to ensure

long life.
C. Motor: The motors shall be Totally Enclosed Fan Cooled high efficiency (efficiency
class IE3 or IE4; meet or exceed EuP IE3 grade) fixed speed motors as per IEC
standards, Enclosure Class IP55, Insulation class F to IEC85. The motors shall be
suitable for a minimum ambient temperature of 60deg C without deration.
Single phase motors, up to 2.2KW, shall be suitable for 230V, 50Hz power supply.
Single phase motors shall have built in thermal protection.
Three phase motors shall be suitable for 380-415V, 50Hz power supply. Three phase
motors from 3KW shall have a built in Thermister (PTC) according to DIN 44082 (IEC
34-11: TP211)
D. A duplex control panel shall be installed in the skid and wired to the motors and
shall have the following components. Incoming isolator, automatic starters,
overload relays, MCBs, Hand-off-auto selector switches for each pump,
automatic change over between two pumps through latch relay, indication lamps
for pump run, trip, and low water level. There shall be provisions for wiring from the
field devices such as low level & high level float switches etc. All switch gear shall
be Schneider Electric / Eqv approved make.
E. Two float switches, one for dry running protection and one for auto operation will
be supplied loose with the pumping unit. The float switches shall be of European
make or equal quality.
F. The pumps, control panel, suction and discharge headers with valves etc. shall be
mounted on a common base frame of epoxy coated heavy gauge steel with
vibration isolation neoprene pads. The suction & discharge headers shall be copper
or stainless steel 316, as approved.
22 11 23
2.2 BOOSTER PUMP SETS
A. Description: The pumps shall be factory assembled and tested, Vertical Multistage,
and motor shafts mounted vertically. The pumps shall be rated for minimum
working pressure of 16 bar and a continuous water temperature of 120 deg C.
The pump and motor shall be of European origin or equal quality. The pump and
motor shall be coupled at the manufacturer’s works and tested. Factory test
certificates shall be available upon request.
the same level (in line).Pumps up to 50mm suction and discharge ports shall
frictional losses.


long life.
C. Permanently lubricated ball bearings are available up through 5 HP. Larger

motors have grease-lubricated ball bearings.
D. Motor: The motors shall be Totally Enclosed Fan Cooled high efficiency (efficiency
22 11 23
1. Single phase motors, up to 2.2KW, shall be suitable for 230V, 50Hz power
supply. Single phase motors shall have built in thermal protection.
2. Three phase motors shall be suitable for 380-415V, 50Hz power supply. Three
phase motors from 3KW shall have a built in Thermister (PTC) according to DIN
44082 (IEC 34-11: TP211)
3. All motors shall be suitable for operation with Variable Frequency Drives.
Pumps with Electronic motors (with integrated VFD) shall be available for
specific requirements.
F. Pressure tank
1. The unit should be equipped with a control diaphragm tank on the discharge
side of the system. The tank shall have a non-replaceable double diaphragm.
2. The complete booster unit should be skid mounted and in ready to install
condition. The unit shall be from a local supplier having adequate stock of
spare parts and facilities to service this type of equipment.
G. Piping & Base frame
1. The unit shall include suction and discharge manifolds in stainless steel AISI 316,
isolating valves on either side of the pumps and check valves on the suction
side of the pumps.
2. The unit should be mounted on a strong stainless steel base frame.
2.3 HOT WATER CIRCULATION PUMP SETS
A. Description: The pumps shall be factory assembled and tested, Vertical Multistage
and motor shafts mounted vertically. The pumps shall be rated for minimum working
pressure of 16 bar and a continuous water temperature of 120 deg C.
The pump and motor shall be of European origin or equal quality. The pump and
motor shall be coupled at the manufacturer’s works and tested. Factory test
the same level (in line).Pumps up to 50mm suction and discharge ports shall
22 11 23
frictional losses.


long life.
C. Motor: The motors shall be totally Enclosed Fan Cooled high efficiency (efficiency
1. Single phase motors, up to 2.2KW, shall be suitable for 230V, 50Hz power supply.
2. Three phase motors shall be suitable for 380-415V, 50Hz power supply. Three phase
34-11: TP211)
D. A duplex control panel shall be installed in the skid and wired to the motors and
shall have the following components. Incoming isolator, automatic starters,
overload relays, MCBs, Hand-off-auto selector switches for each pump, automatic
change over between two pumps through 24 hours programmable timer, indication
lamps for pump run and trip. All switch gear shall be Schneider Electric / Eqv
approved make.
E. The pumps, control panel, suction and discharge headers with valves etc. shall be
mounted on a common base frame of epoxy coated heavy gauge steel with
vibration isolation neoprene pads. The suction & discharge headers shall be copper or
stainless steel 316, as approved.
2.4 PUMP LOGIC CONTROLLER:
1. Pump logic controller shall be provided and is to be a combination

variable/constant speed pump controller with the capability to stage and
control up to three pumps in parallel.
The logic controller assembly shall be listed by and bear the label
of Underwriter’s Laboratory, Inc. (UL). The controller shall be specifically
designed for mixing variable and constant speed pumps for pressure
boosting applications. The controller shall function to a proven program that
safeguard against damaging hydraulic conditions including:
22 11 23
a. Pump flow surges.

b. Hunting.
c. System over pressure.
2. The pump logic controller shall be microcomputer based and hold its
software in EPROM. On-line field modified data entries, such as set
point, shall be stored in EEPROM. EEPROM memory storage shall prevent
accidental loss of data due to voltage surge or spike. In the event of a
complete power outage, all factory preset values remain stored and shall
be able to be recalled by the operator.
3. The pump logic controller shall be capable of receiving up to two discrete
analog inputs from zone sensor/transmitters indicated on the plans. It will
then select the analog signal that has deviated the greatest amount from
its set point. This selected signal will be used as the command feedback
input for a hydraulic stabilization function to minimize hunting. Each
input signal shall be capable of maintaining a different set point value.
Controller shall be capable of controlling up to three pumps in parallel.
4. The pump logic controller shall have a flow and pressure sensor.
5. The scan an compare rate that selects the command setpoint and
process variable signal shall be continuous and automatically set for
optimum operation. Each sensor shall be scanned every 20 milliseconds.
6. All external transmitters shall be powered by the pump logic controller
through an quality integral 24 volt power supply. Over-voltage and short
circuit protection shall be on board.
7. The hydraulic stabilization program shall utilize a proportional integral
derivative control function. The proportional, integral, and derivative values
shall be user adjustable over an infinite range.
8. The pump logic controller shall be self-prompting. All messages shall be
displayed in plain English. The operator interface shall have the following
features:
a. Multi-fault memory and recall.
b. Red fault light, yellow warning light, and green power on light.
c. Soft touch membrane keypad switches.
9. The display shall have four lines, with 20 characters on three lines and
eight large characters on one line.
10. Actual pump information shall be displayed indicating pump status, flow
rate, and discharge pressure.
11. The pump controller will vary the speed of the lead pump to maintain set
point. If the set point cannot be satisfied by the variable speed pump
alone, the pump logic controller will initiate a timed sequence of events to
stage on the constant speed lag pump(s) as needed.
12. Upon decrease in building load when less pumps are required to meet set
point, the pump logic controller will initiate a timed sequence of events to
de stage the constant speed lag pump(s). The pump controller will then
vary the speed of the lead pump to maintain set point.
13. Alternation of the lag pumps is both manual via keypad and automatic
based on running hours.
14. Controller shall be capable of performing the following pressure booster
functions:
a. Low suction pressure cutout to protect the pumps against
operating with insufficient suction pressure.
b. High system pressure cutout to protect the piping system against the
high pressure conditions.
22 11 23
c. No flow shutdown to turn the pumps off automatically when system

demand is low enough to be supplied by the hydro pneumatic tank.
No flow shutdown shall not require any external flow meters, flow
switches or pressure switches to determine
when a no flow condition exists.
15. The following communication features shall be provided to the BAS:
a. Remote system start/stop non-powered digital input.
b. Failure of any system component. Output closes to indicate alarm
condition.
c. One 4-20 mA output with selectable output of:
1) Lead / assist pump frequency.
2) Process variable.
3) Flow rate in GPM.
4) Discharge pressure in PSI.
2.5 CONTROLS
A. Pressure Switches: Electric, adjustable for control of pump.
1. Type: Water-immersion pressure sensor, for installation in piping.

2. Enclosure: NEMA 250, [Type 4X]
3. Operation of Pump: On or off.
4. Transformer: Provide if required.
5. Power Requirement: [24 / 240 V, ac]
6. Settings: Start pump and stop pump
B. Thermostats: Electric; adjustable for control of [hot-water circulation] pump.
1. Type: Water-immersion temperature sensor, for installation in piping.

2. Range: [65 to 200 deg F (18 to 93 deg C)]
6. Power Requirement: [24 /[240 V, ac]
7. Settings: Start pump at [115 deg F (46 deg C)] and stop pump at [125 deg F
(52 deg C)]
C. Timers: Electric, for control of [hot-water circulation] pump.
1. Type: Programmable, [seven-day] clock with manual override on-off switch.

2. Enclosure: NEMA 250, [Type 4] suitable for wall mounting.
6. Programmable Sequence of Operation: [Up to two on-off cycles each day
for seven days]
D. Time-Delay Relays: Electric, for control of hot-water circulation pump between

water heater and connected hot-water storage tank.
1. Type: Adjustable time-delay relay.

2. Range: Up to five minutes.
3. Setting: Five minutes.
22 11 23

7. Power Requirement: [24 / 240 V, ac].
8. Programmable Sequence of Operation: Limit pump operation to periods of
electrical heater operation plus maximum five minutes after the heater stops.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine roughing-in of domestic-water-piping system to verify actual locations of

connections before pump installation.
3.2 PUMP INSTALLATION
A. Complete work shall be carried out as described in SECTION- 220500 - COMMON

WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING.
B. Install in-line, seal less centrifugal pumps with shaft horizontal unless otherwise
indicated.
C. Install horizontally mounted, in-line, [separately coupled] [and] [close-coupled]

centrifugal pumps with shaft(s) horizontal.
D. Install vertically mounted, in-line, close-coupled centrifugal pumps with shaft

vertical.
E. Pump Mounting: Install vertically mounted, in-line, close-coupled centrifugal

pumps with cast-iron base mounted on concrete base using [elastomeric pads]
[elastomeric mounts] [restrained spring isolators] Comply with requirements for
concrete base specified in Division 03 Section "[Cast-in-Place Concrete]
[Miscellaneous Cast-in-Place Concrete]."
1. Minimum Deflection: 6 mm to mximum of 25 mm.

perimeter of concrete base.
3. For supported equipment, install epoxy-coated anchor bolts that extend
through concrete base and anchor into structural concrete floor.
4. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use setting drawings, templates,
diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.
equipment.
F. Install continuous-thread hanger rods and spring hangers of size required to

support pump weight.
1. Comply with requirements for vibration isolation devices specified in Section

"Noise and Vibration Controls." Fabricate brackets or supports as required.
2. Comply with requirements for hangers and supports.
3. Install pressure switches in water supply piping.
22 11 23
G. Install thermostats in hot-water return piping.
H. Install timers on wall in engineer's office.
I. Install time-delay relays in piping between water heaters and hot-water storage
tanks.
3.3 CONNECTIONS
A. Comply with requirements for piping as specified. Drawings indicate general

arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
B. Install piping adjacent to pumps to allow service and maintenance.
C. Connect domestic water piping to pumps. Install suction and discharge piping
equal to or greater than size of pump nozzles.
1. Install flexible connectors adjacent to pumps in suction and discharge piping

of the following pumps:
a. Horizontally Multi stage centrifugal pumps.

b. Vertically inline multi stage centrifugal pumps.
c. Comply with requirements for flexible connectors.
2. Install shutoff valve and strainer on suction side of each pump, and check,
shutoff, and throttling valves on discharge side of each pump. Install valves
same size as connected piping. Comply with requirements for valves
specified in Division 22 Section "General-Duty Valves for Plumbing Piping" and
comply with requirements for strainers specified in Division 22 Section
"Domestic Water Piping Specialties."
3. Install pressure gage at suction of each pump and pressure gage at
discharge of each pump. Install at integral pressure-gage tapping’s where
provided or install pressure-gage connectors in suction and discharge piping
around pumps. Comply with requirements for pressure gages and snubbers
specified in Division 22 Section "Meters and Gages for Plumbing Piping."
D. Comply with Division 26 Sections for electrical connections, and wiring methods.
E. Connect pressure switches, thermostats, time-delay relays, and timers to pumps

that they control.
F. Interlock pump between water heater and hot-water storage tank with water
heater burner and time-delay relay.
3.4 IDENTIFICATION
A. Comply with requirements for identification.
3.5 STARTUP SERVICE
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup service.
22 11 23
1. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written

instructions.
2. Check piping connections for tightness.
3. Clean strainers on suction piping.
4. Set pressure switches, thermostats, timers, and time-delay relays for automatic
starting and stopping operation of pumps.
5. Perform the following startup checks for each pump before starting:
a. Verify bearing lubrication.

b. Verify that pump is free to rotate by hand and that pump for handling
hot liquid is free to rotate with pump hot and cold. If pump is bound or
drags, do not operate until cause of trouble is determined and
corrected.
c. Verify that pump is rotating in the correct direction.
6. Prime pump by opening suction valves and closing drains, and prepare pump
for operation.
7. Start motor.
8. Open discharge valve slowly.
9. Adjust temperature settings on thermostats.
10. Adjust timer settings.
3.6 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust domestic water pumps to function smoothly, and lubricate as

recommended by manufacturer.
B. Adjust initial temperature set points.
C. Set field-adjustable switches and circuit-breaker trip ranges as indicated.
22 11 23
22 13 26 - Drainage Collection System
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
1.1.1 The Contractor's scope of work includes supply, installation, testing,

commissioning and free maintenance during Defects Liability Period complete
sanitary and surface water drainage system from the building to the SDES
manholes as indicated.
1.1.2 The system installed shall be complete with pipe work, access
chambers/manholes with covers, sand traps, submersible pumps in pits etc., to
meet fully the requirements of a working system.
1.2 OTHER REFERENCES
Number Description
1.3.1 Separate manhole chambers as shown on the drawing shall receive sanitary
waste from various sanitary appliances.
1.3.2 The manhole chambers shall be connected with suitable pipe work for
discharge into sewerage and storm water network as indicated.
1.3.3 The rainwater shall be connected to storm water through, oil cum sand
separation and first flush system as indicated in the drawing.
1.3.4 Provide a separate sump and sump pump unit as shown in the drawing for
collection and disposal of waste from the basement.
1.3.5 The control panels for the pumps shall be provided with necessary Normally
Open/Normally Closed contacts to interface with Building Management
System.
1.3.6 The final connection to the existing SDES sewer system shall be carried out in
co-ordination with SDES as necessary.
1.3.7 All manhole covers are double seal type.
1.3.8 All floor gullies shall be of SS.
1.3.9 The kitchen drainage shall be connected to external drainage through grease
interceptor.
22 13 26
1.4 STANDARDS
All work shall be carried out in accordance with local SDES/SDOM guidelines/
requirements relevant British Standards and Codes of Practice including the
following:
BS:5572 : Code of Practice for Sanitary Pipe work
BS:8301 : Building Drainage
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
All underground pipe work shall be of UPVC conforming to BS 4660/BS 5481 as
appropriate and shall be rubber seal type jointed with UPVC couplings. Kitchen
waste pipes shall be of Cast iron.
2.1.1 The manholes covers with frames shall be as per EN 124-D400. The sizes, grade
and type shall be as detailed on the drawings. The manhole covers shall be
medium duty type suitable for regular vehicular traffic. One set of lifting keys
for each type of cover shall be provided.
2.1.2 The materials for construction of manholes/access chambers shall be

generally as described under civil works in relevant sections. The construction
of manholes shall be in accordance with SDES guidelines.
2.2 SUBMERSIBLE SEWAGE PUMPS
A. Submersible sewage Pumps:
1. Description: The pump shall be factory assembled and tested,

Submersible, single-stage, close-coupled, overhung-impeller (Grinder type),
centrifugal sewage pump as per DIN 12050-1. The pumps shall be
permanently installed using an Auto coupling –guide rail system. The
autocoupling shall have a gasket to provide a completely leak proof
connection between the pump and the base unit. The pumps shall be
rated for minimum working pressure of 10 bar and a continuous water
temperature of 40 deg C.
2. The pump shall be given the following surface treatment :

Cataphoresis treatment for all cast iron parts.
Powder coating: NCS 900N (black), gloss code 30, thickness 100 µm.
3. Motor: The motor shall be a watertight, totally encapsulated motor.

Enclosure class: IP68
Insulation class: F (155 °C)
Temperature Class: F (105 °C)
The motors shall fulfill the requirements of IEC 30034 & 30335.
The motor shall be provide with two thermal switches incorporated in the
motor windings to protect the motor against overheating.
4. The pump and motor shall be of European origin or equal approved

quality. The pump motor unit shall be assembled at the manufacturer’s
works and tested. Factory test certificates shall be available upon request.
22 13 26
5. The cable entry shall be a stainless-steel plug fastened with a union nut. The
nut and O-rings provide sealing against ingress of liquid. The plug shall be
filled with a special polyurethane potting compound that is cast into the
plug around the leads of the cable. This prevents the ingress of liquid into
the motor through the cable in case of cable breakage or rough handling
in connection with installation or service.
i. Pumps up to 1.5 kW shall have a silicon carbide/silicon carbide (SiC/SiC)

mechanical shaft seal as primary seal and a lip seal as secondary seal.
Pumps of 2.6 kW and up shall have a double shaft seal consisting of a
SiC/SiC mechanical shaft seal as primary seal and a carbon/aluminium
oxide mechanical shaft seal as secondary seal. The mechanical seals
shall be Cartridge type.
ii. The unit shall incorporate clamp assembling system enabling quick and
easy disassembly of pump from motor unit without the need of tools.
iii. The impeller clearance shall be adjustable from outside, without

opening the pump, to maintain maximum pump efficiency.
The impeller shall be fitted with an efficient grinder system to grind the
pumped matter to particles. The grinder system shall be efficient &
reliable. The grinder ring and head shall be of toughened stainless steel
AISI 304.
6. Construction:
The pump housing and stator housing shall be constructed of high grade
Cast Iron. The wetted part of Rotor / Shaft shall be Stainless steel. All pins,
nuts, keys and nameplate shall be of stainless steel. The bearings shall be
greased for life. The grinder system shall be constructed of toughened
stainless steel AISI 304 to prevent wear & tear. The mechanical seals shall be
of the cartridge type.
7. A duplex control panel shall be supplied & mounted separately and shall
have the following components. Incoming isolator, automatic starters,
Hooter, Flasher, automatic change over between two pumps, indication
lamps for pump run, trip, etc. All switch gear shall be Schneider Electric /
Eqv approved make.
8. The pump shall be controlled by four float switches for dry run protection,
pump start / stop & high level alarm. The float switches shall be of European
make or equal approved quality.
2.3 SUBMERSIBLE SUMP PUMPS
A. Submersible sump Pumps:
1. Description: The pump shall be factory assembled single stage submersible

pump designed for pumping drainage water not containing sewage. The
pumps shall allow max solid passage of 12 mm. the pump pumps shall be
suitable for water temperature of 55 deg C.
2. Motor: The motor shall be a single- or three-phase asynchronous dry- rotor

motor.
22 13 26
Enclosure class: IP68

Insulation class: F (155 °C)
Cable type: H07RN-F.
Single-phase motors have built-in thermal protection.
3. The pump shall be available for automatic as well as manual operation and
shall be installed in a permanent installation or used as a portable pump. The
pump shall be available in these versions:
• With float switch fitted for automatic on/off operation between two liquid
levels (single-phase pumps)
• With separate level switch and control box for automatic on/off operation
between two liquid levels (three-phase pumps)
• Without level switch for manual on/off operation.
4. Pump Construction: The complete pump motor unit shall be in stainless steel
AISI304. Watertight Polyurethane-filled stainless steel cable connection,
hermetically sealed, ensuring that liquid cannot penetrate through the cable
into the motor.
5. The stainless steel pump sleeve shall be made in one piece and equipped
with an insulated carrying handle. The suction strainer shall be clipped on to
the pump housing for easy removal in connection with maintenance. The
strainer shall prevent the passage of large solids and ensures a slow flow into
the pump.
6. The stainless steel pump housing shall be fitted with an internal riser pipe
ensuring high efficiency. The cable entry shall be of the socket and plug
connection type for quick and easy dismantling.
7. Impeller: The stainless steel impeller shall be a semi-open impeller with L-

shaped blades and a clearance of 12 mm.
8. Shaft seal: The shaft seal shall be a combination of a mechanical bellows

shaft seal and a lip seal with 60 ml oil between. Seal faces shall be made of
silicon carbide.
9. A duplex control panel shall be supplied & mounted separately and shall
have the following components. Incoming isolator, automatic starters,
Hooter, Flasher, automatic change over between two pumps, indication
lamps for pump run, trip, etc. All switch gear shall be Schneider Electric / Eqv
approved make.
10. The pump shall be controlled by four float switches for dry run protection,
pump start / stop & high level alarm. The float switches shall be of European
make.
2.4 PUMP LOGIC CONTROLLER:
1. Pump logic controller shall be provided and is to be a combination

variable/constant speed pump controller with the capability to stage and
control up to three pumps in parallel.
22 13 26
The logic controller assembly shall be listed by and bear the label
of Underwriter’s Laboratory, Inc. (UL). The controller shall be specifically
designed for mixing variable and constant speed pumps for pressure
boosting applications. The controller shall function to a proven program
that safeguard against damaging hydraulic conditions including:
a. Pump flow surges.

b. Hunting.
c. System over pressure.
2. The pump logic controller shall be microcomputer based and hold

its software in EPROM. On-line field modified data entries, such as
set point, shall be stored in EEPROM. EEPROM memory storage shall
prevent accidental loss of data due to voltage surge or spike. In the event
of a complete power outage, all factory preset values remain stored and
shall be able to be recalled by the operator.
3. The pump logic controller shall be capable of receiving up to two
discrete analog inputs from zone sensor/transmitters indicated on the
plans. It will then select the analog signal that has deviated the greatest
amount from its set point. This selected signal will be used as the
command feedback input for a hydraulic stabilization function to
minimize hunting. Each input signal shall be capable of maintaining a
different set point value. Controller shall be capable of controlling up to
three pumps in parallel.
4. The pump logic controller shall have a flow and pressure sensor.
5. The scan an compare rate that selects the command setpoint and
process variable signal shall be continuous and automatically set for
optimum operation. Each sensor shall be scanned every 20 milliseconds.
6. All external transmitters shall be powered by the pump logic controller
through an quality integral 24 volt power supply. Over-voltage and
short circuit protection shall be on board.
7. The hydraulic stabilization program shall utilize a proportional integral
derivative control
function. The proportional, integral, and derivative values shall be user
adjustable over an infinite range.
8. The pump logic controller shall be self-prompting. All messages shall be
displayed in plain English. The operator interface shall have the following
features:
a. Multi-fault memory and recall.
b. Red fault light, yellow warning light, and green power on light.
c. Soft touch membrane keypad switches.
9. The display shall have four lines, with 20 characters on three lines and
eight large characters on one line.
10. Actual pump information shall be displayed indicating pump status,
flow rate, and discharge pressure.
11. The pump controller will vary the speed of the lead pump to maintain
set point. If the set point cannot be satisfied by the variable speed pump
alone, the pump logic controller will initiate a timed sequence of events
to stage on the constant speed lag pump(s) as needed.
12. Upon decrease in building load when less pumps are required to meet set
point, the pump logic controller will initiate a timed sequence of events to
de stage the constant speed lag pump(s). The pump controller will then
vary the speed of the lead pump to maintain set point.
22 13 26
13. Alternation of the lag pumps is both manual via keypad and automatic
based on running hours.
14. Controller shall be capable of performing the following pressure booster
functions:
a. Low suction pressure cutout to protect the pumps against
operating with insufficient suction pressure.
b. High system pressure cutout to protect the piping system against the
high pressure conditions.
c. No flow shutdown to turn the pumps off automatically when system
demand is low enough to be supplied by the hydro pneumatic tank.
No flow shutdown shall not require any external flow meters, flow
switches or pressure switches to determine when a no flow condition
exists.
15. The following communication features shall be provided to the BAS:
a. Remote system start/stop non-powered digital input.
b. Failure of any system component. Output closes to indicate alarm
condition.
c. One 4-20 mA output with selectable output of:
1) Lead / assist pump frequency.
2) Process variable.
3) Flow rate in LPS.
4) Discharge pressure in Bar.
2.5 CONTROLS
A. Pressure Switches: Electric, adjustable for control of pump.
1. Type: Water-immersion pressure sensor, for installation in piping.

6. Settings: Start pump and stop pump
B. Timers: Electric, for control of [hot-water circulation] pump.
1. Type: Programmable, [seven-day] clock with manual override on-off switch.

2. Enclosure: NEMA 250, [Type 4] suitable for wall mounting.
6. Programmable Sequence of Operation: [Up to two on-off cycles each day
for seven days]
C. Time-Delay Relays: Electric, for control of hot-water circulation pump between

water heater and connected hot-water storage tank.
1. Type: Adjustable time-delay relay.

2. Range: Up to five minutes.
3. Setting: Five minutes.
7. Power Requirement: [24 / 240 V, ac].
22 13 26
8. Programmable Sequence of Operation: Limit pump operation to periods of

electrical heater operation plus maximum five minutes after the heater stops.
PART 3 EXECUTION AND TESTING

Complete work shall be carried out as described in SECTION 220500 –
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING
All materials shall be laid /installed in line with manufacturer's
recommendations.
3.1 PIPE WORK
3.1.1 All lines shall be laid in straight lines to even gradients.
3.1.2 Sockets shall face up the gradient and the spigot of each pipe shall be well
driven home into the socket and the joint completed as necessary.
3.1.3 Any obstruction within the bore of the pipe shall be removed before the next
section of pipe is installed.
3.1.4 Where it is necessary to shorten any pipe, it shall be out off squarely and
cleanly.
3.1.5 Where pipes of dissimilar materials or where pipes of same material but having
dissimilar joints are to be jointed together, the joints shall be made in
accordance with the manufacturers recommendations/instructions.
3.1.6 Vertical pipes and bends shall be installed so that the top of the sockets is
horizontal.
3.1.7 Long radius bends at the foot of the pipes shall be properly supported to avoid
future movement and possible disconnection.
3.1.8 Long radius bends at the foot shall be purpose made with integral
anchor/foot.
3.1.9 Contractor shall provide suitable extension or raising pieces wherever

necessary to suit the finished floor levels.
3.1.10 Expansion couplings shall be provided in accordance with the manufacturer's

recommendations and at the required centre’s at the points where pipes cross
the building expansion joint
3.2 EXCAVATION
3.2.1 All excavations of whatever purpose shall be followed up immediately by the

operation or works necessitating such excavations.
3.2.2 Any services or structures found during excavation shall be reported to the
Engineer and shall not be broken, removed unless the permission from
Engineer is obtained.
3.2.3 Unless agreed otherwise with the Architect, all excavations shall be vertically
sided and adequately supported at all times.
22 13 26
3.2.4 The trenches shall be straight and their bottoms shall be excavated to even
gradients and with an even surface.
3.2.5 The width of trenches at the bottom shall be as narrow as possible but
sufficient to allow proper installation to the work/sufficient working clearances.
3.2.6 Excavations below ground water level shall be kept dry by suitable dewatering
arrangements at all times.
3.3 BACKFILLING
3.3.1 No backfilling shall be carried out prior to testing unless the Architect's
permission has been obtained.
3.3.2 Any backfilling that is carried out prior to testing shall be removed at the
Contractor's expense.
3.3.3 Backfilling shall be undertaken immediately after necessary tests and

inspections.
3.3.4 The backfilling shall be carried out as per the manufacturers requirements and
in compliance with BS: 8301.
3.3.5 Selected granular material can be used for side fill and for the layer directly
above the pipes to a thickness of 150mm provided that it is readily
compactable.
3.3.6 It shall exclude stones retained on a 40 mm sieve, hard lumps of clay retained
on a 100 mm sieve, timber, frozen material and vegetable, foreign matters etc.
3.3.7 Generally backfill can normally be that which has been excavated from the
trench and can be used above the selected backfill. Boulders, lumps of
concrete, timber and vegetable matters shall be excluded.
3.3.8 General backfill shall be placed evenly in layers of up to 250 mm thickness and
shall be compacted/hand tapped.
3.3.9 Reinstatement of the surface shall be carried out as directed by the Engineer
and shall finish flush with the surrounding area.
3.3.10 Where it is necessary due to load conditions, it may be desirable to encase the
pipes in suitable thickness of concrete surround but the flexibility of the pipe
work must be maintained. Suitable constructional flexible joints can be formed
in the concrete by using 13 mm thick compressible board precut to finished
profile of concrete and pipe or by using other suitable fillers.
3.3.11 Where it is considered necessary the granular bedding and the initial backfill
layer should be completely surrounded with a Filter Fabric in order to avoid the
selected material being washed away.
3.3.12 Backfilling around manholes and inspection chambers shall be generally

carried out as for trenches and as part of same operation. Care shall be taken
to raise the backfill all around the shaft as to avoid uneven loading.
22 13 26
3.4 BEDDING
3.4.1 Where the design permits and the nature of the ground is such as to allow it to
be trimmed a uniform bearing, pipes may be laid on the formation.
3.4.2 Where sockets or joints occur the trench bottom shall be scraped or cut so as
to allow sufficient clearance for the socket or joint.
3.4.3 Adjustments shall be made throughout the length of the barrels. Localized
packing’s will not be accepted.
3.4.4 For granular beddings the thickness and type shall be as per manufacturer's
recommendations and BS:8301.
3.4.5 The trenches shall be excavated to a depth such as to allow the specified
thickness of granular bedding material to be placed beneath the barrels.
3.4.6 The granular bedding material shall be placed to invert level and shall extend
to the full width of the trench. Socket or joint holes shall be by shallow
depressions in the bedding material.
3.4.7 The granular bedding shall be laid so as to give even gradients.
3.5 MANHOLES AND INSPECTION CHAMBERS
3.5.1 The manholes and inspection chambers shall be constructed as set out on the
drawings and the construction shall be in accordance with SEPPD
guidelines/requirements and BS:8301.
3.5.2 The size and types of manholes and inspection chambers shall be generally as
indicated on drawings. The Contractor to adjust the length/width of manholes
as governed by the site conditions and number of connections/branches to
the manholes/chambers in accordance with BS:8301.
3.5.3 The manholes/chambers shall be built on concrete bases positioned above

50mm thick concrete blinding & 1000G polyethylene sheet. The concrete
base shall be of thickness 200 mm up to 400 mm as per SDES guidelines.
3.5.4 The walls of manholes/chambers shall be of 150 or 200 mm thick concrete

(C45/20) in accordance with SDES guidelines.
3.5.5 All walls shall be reinforced with suitable steel as directed by Architect.
3.5.6 The top of all manholes/chambers (cover supports) shall be constructed using
minimum two courses of engineering brickwork, painted internally with epoxy
mortar. Alternatively the cover support shall be precast concrete section.
3.5.7 Concrete haunch shall be provided near the cover frames as per SEPPD
guidelines
3.5.8 The Manhole Concrete haunch shall be provided near the cover frames as
per SEPPD guidelines.
22 13 26
3.5.9 The internal and external face of walls shall be protected with suitable paint as
directed by Architect.
3.5.10 Main channels shall be half round pipes. The branch bends shall be of 3/14
section, curved in the direction of the flow and set to deliver over the main
channel inlet. All channels to be bedded in 1:3 cement and mortar.
3.5.11 Benching shall be formed in concrete which shall be trowel led smooth with a
coat of 1:3 cement mortar in one continuous operation in order to achieve a
monolithic benching construction. They shall slope towards the main channel
(or flanged of the bolted access chamber) at a gradient of 1 in 12.
3.5.12 Epoxy mortar of minimum 10 mm thickness shall be applied as per SDES

guidelines.
3.5.13 Where the part of the manhole is below the water table, rendering of manhole
with suitable quality cement shall be carried out to prevent infiltration under all
conditions. The work shall be carried out in accordance with the
manufacturer's instructions.
3.5.14 All manholes/chambers shall be protected suitably during the construction

period.
3.5.15 Backdrop manholes shall be constructed if required as per site conditions.
3.6 TESTING
3.6.1 All pipe work shall be hydraulically tested as and when each section is
completed, to a minimum of 1.5 m and a maximum of 4m water head as laid
down in BS:8301, in presence of Architect's representative.
3.6.2 The water level shall be maintained for a period of thirty minutes after the initial
fill - without further addition of water.
3.6.3 The Contractor shall provide clean water and all assistance and appliances for
testing during the progress of works as well as for the final test. The Contractor
shall liaise with Statutory Authority for inspection and give adequate notice of
testing.
3.6.4 The method of testing shall be proposed by the Contractor for Architect's
approval and tests shall be carried out as per jointly agreed method.
3.6.5 The Contractor shall apply a further test to the whole of the works upon
completion of all contract works and immediately prior to the works (or where
the contract is phased, part of works) being handed over.
3.6.6 The fact that any part of the work has previously passed any test will not relieve
the Contractor of any of his obligations and any defects shown by this further
test or any defects appearing during the period of maintenance shall be
located and made good by the Contractor at his expense.
3.6.7 The Contractor shall provide and fixed Testing benches and bends as required
and shall seal off or remove as directed by the Architect.
22 13 26
3.6.8 The Contractor shall ensure that all sections of the drainage system are
completely clear of any obstructions, debris and superfluous matter before
any tests are applied to such sections and upon completion of the works. The
Contractor shall keep structures clear for inspection until they have been
tested and approved/accepted by the Engineer and Statutory Authority.
3.6.9 The test results shall be prepared by the Contractor and shall be submitted to
Architect/Statutory Authority for certification. The results shall also bear the
signature of the Tradesman responsible for carrying out the test and then shall
be sent to Architect.
3.6.10 The Contractor shall allow for the whole of the installation to be cleaned out
before the test is carried out and again immediately before handover.
3.6.11 Care shall be taken so that no air is trapped in any part of the system under
test and that all ends of the section under test are plugged with suitably
strutted plugs.
3.6.12 The sanitary & storm water drainage system shall terminate at approximately 1
meter from the property line. The Contractor shall liaise with SDES/ SDOM as
necessary to obtain final connection to municipal/government network.
3.6.13 The Contractor shall arrange for rodding out all pipe work upon completion
and testing and the system shall be handed over in a clean working order.
3.6.14 The Contractor shall allow for a detailed site survey in co-ordination with SDES
to establish the exact invert levels of existing municipal manholes and
orientation of the stub outs if provided and arrange for necessary final
connections before handing over.
22 13 26
22 33 00 - Electric Water Heaters
PART 1 - GENERAL
Number Description
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following electric water heaters:

1. Household, storage electric water heaters.
2. Commercial, storage electric water heaters.
3. Water heater accessories.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type and size of water heater indicated. Include rated
capacities, operating characteristics, furnished specialties, and accessories.
B. Shop Drawings: Diagram power, signal, and control wiring.
C. Product Certificates: For each type of Household and commercial electric water
heater, signed by product manufacturer.
D. Source quality-control test reports.
E. Field quality-control test reports.
F. Operation and Maintenance Data: For electric water heaters to include in

G. ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1-2010 Compliance: Provide compliance form as per applicable

requirements in ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1-2010.
H. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section.
A. Factory Test: The performance test for the equipment at the simulated temperature
and humidity condition should carry out at the factory prior to dispatch of the
equipment. The test shall be witnessed by the Engineer. Allow for visit by two
personnel from Consultant/Client for the factory test visit.
22 33 00
B. Source Limitations: Obtain same type of electric water heaters through one source
from a single manufacturer.
C. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of

electric water heaters and are based on the specific system indicated. Refer to
Division 01 Section "Product Requirements."
D. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in

E. ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1-2010 Compliance: Applicable requirements in

ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1-2010.
F. ASME Compliance: Where indicated, fabricate and label commercial water heater
storage tanks to comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII,
Division 1.
G. Comply with NSF 61, "Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects; Sections 1
through 9," for all components that will be in contact with potable water.
1.5 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases with Architectural and Structural
Drawings.
1.6 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to

repair or replace components of electric water heaters that fail in materials or
workmanship within specified warranty period.
1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Structural failures including storage tank and supports.

b. Faulty operation of controls.
c. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond
normal use.
2. Warranty Period(s): From date of Taking Over:
a. Household Electric Water Heaters:
1) Storage Tank: Five years.

2) Controls and Other Components: Two years.
b. Commercial Electric Water Heaters:
1) Storage Tank: Five years.

2) Controls and Other Components: Three years.
22 33 00
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. The following requirements apply to product selection:

by one of the manufacturers whose equipment must have been used in the
Kingdom in last 5-10 years.
2.2 HOUSEHOLD ELECTRIC WATER HEATERS
A. Household, Small-Capacity Electric Water Heaters: Comply with UL 174.
1. Storage-Tank Construction: Corrosion-resistant metal or steel with corrosion-

resistant coating.
a. Tappings: ASME B1.20.1 pipe thread.

b. Pressure Rating: 150 psig (1035 kPa).
c. Interior Finish: Comply with NSF 61 barrier materials for potable-water
tank linings, including extending lining material into tappings.
2. Factory-Installed Storage-Tank Appurtenances:
a. Drain Valve: ASSE 1005, if tank has drain outlet. Provide hose-end drain
valve in piping for water heaters without drain outlet.
b. Insulation: Comply with ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1-2007.
c. Jacket: Steel with enameled finish.
d. Heating Element: Electric, screw-in immersion type.
e. Temperature Control: Adjustable thermostat.
f. Safety Control: High-temperature-limit cutoff device or system.
g. Power Supply Cord: 24 to 72 inches (610 to 1830 mm) with plug.
h. Relief Valve: ASME rated and stamped and complying with
ASME PTC 25.3 for combination temperature and pressure relief valves.
Include relieving capacity at least as great as heat input, and include
pressure setting less than water heater working-pressure rating. Select
relief valve with sensing element that extends into storage tank.
B. Household, Storage Electric Water Heaters: Comply with UL 174.
1. Storage-Tank Construction: Steel.
a. Tappings: ASME B1.20.1 pipe thread.

b. Pressure Rating: 1035 kPa.
c. Interior Finish: Comply with NSF 61 barrier materials for potable-water
tank linings, including extending lining material into tappings.
2. Factory-Installed Storage-Tank Appurtenances:
a. Anode Rod: Replaceable magnesium.
22 33 00
b. Dip Tube: Provide unless cold-water inlet is near bottom of tank.

c. Drain Valve: ASSE 1005.
d. Insulation: Comply with ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1-2007.
e. Jacket: Steel with enameled finish.
1) Standard: Cylindrical shape.

2) Tabletop: Rectangular shape, with flat-top work surface and
raised back.
f. Heat Trap Fittings: Inlet type in cold-water inlet and outlet type in hot-
water outlet.
g. Heating Elements: Two; electric, screw-in immersion type with 12 kW or
less total, and wired for non simultaneous operation, unless otherwise
indicated.
h. Temperature Control: Adjustable thermostat for each element.
i. Safety Control: High-temperature-limit cutoff device or system.
j. Relief Valve: ASME rated and stamped and complying with
ASME PTC 25.3 for combination temperature and pressure relief valves.
Include relieving capacity at least as great as heat input, and include
pressure setting less than water heater working-pressure rating. Select
relief valve with sensing element that extends into storage tank.
2.3 WATER HEATER ACCESSORIES
A. Combination Temperature and Pressure Relief Valves: Include relieving capacity at

least as great as heat input, and include pressure setting less than water heater
working-pressure rating. Select relief valves with sensing element that extends into
storage tank.
B. Pressure Relief Valves: Include pressure setting less than water heater working-
pressure rating.
C. Water Heater Stand and Drain-Pan Units: High-density-polyethylene-plastic, 18-inch-

(457-mm-) high, enclosed-base stand Include integral or separate drain pan with
raised edge and NPS 1 (DN 25) drain outlet.
D. Water Heater Stands: Water heater manufacturer's factory-fabricated steel stand

for floor mounting and capable of supporting water heater and water. Include
dimension that will support bottom of water heater a minimum of 18 inches (457
mm) above the floor.
E. Water Heater Mounting Brackets: Water heater manufacturer's factory-fabricated

steel bracket for wall mounting and capable of supporting water heater and water.
F. Drain Pans: Corrosion-resistant metal with raised edge. Include dimensions not less
than base of water heater and include drain outlet not less than NPS 3/4 (DN 20).
G. Piping Manifold Kits: Water heater manufacturer's factory-fabricated inlet and

outlet piping arrangement for multiple-unit installation. Include piping and valves
for field assembly that are capable of isolating each water heater and of providing
balanced flow through each water heater.
22 33 00
H. Piping-Type Heat Traps: Field-fabricated piping arrangement according to

ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1-2010.
I. Shock Absorbers: ASSE 1010 or PDI WH 201, Size A water hammer arrester.
J. Automatic air and vacuum vent including fast venting cock
K. Dial thermometer 63mm 0-120°C
L. Pressure gauge 60mm 0-16 bar
M. Brackets for control panel
N. Temperature & safety valve
O. 1 nos. fitted inspection flange cover 400mm
P. Dielectric isolator kits for piping connections
Q. Non sacrificial electric anode provided with 240V power socket.
R. Low maintenance required.
S. No anode consumption
T. Permanent potential control
2.4 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Test and inspect water heater storage tanks, specified to be ASME-code

construction, according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code.
B. Hydrostatically test commercial water heater storage tanks before shipment to

minimum of one and one-half times pressure rating.
C. Prepare test reports.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 WATER HEATER INSTALLATION
A. Install commercial water heaters on concrete bases.
B. Install water heaters level and plumb, according to layout drawings, original design,
and referenced standards. Maintain manufacturer's recommended clearances.
Arrange units so controls and devices needing service are accessible.
C. Install combination temperature and pressure relief valves in top portion of storage
tanks. Use relief valves with sensing elements that extend into tanks. Extend
22 33 00
commercial-water-heater relief-valve outlet, with drain piping same as domestic

water piping in continuous downward pitch, and discharge by positive air gap onto
closest floor drain.
D. Install combination temperature and pressure relief valves in water piping for water
heaters without storage. Extend commercial-water-heater relief-valve outlet, with
drain piping same as domestic water piping in continuous downward pitch, and
discharge by positive air gap onto closest floor drain.
E. Install water-heater drain piping as indirect waste to spill by positive air gap into
open drains or over floor drains. Install hose-end drain valves at low points in water
piping for water heaters that do not have tank drains.
F. Install thermometer on outlet piping of water heaters.
G. Install pressure gage(s) on inlet and outlet of commercial electric water- heater
piping.
H. Assemble and install inlet and outlet piping manifold kits for multiple water heaters.
Fabricate, modify, or arrange manifolds for balanced water flow through each
water heater. Include shutoff valve, thermometer in each water heater inlet and
outlet, and throttling valve in each water heater outlet.
I. Install water regulator, with integral bypass relief valve, in booster-heater inlet piping
and water hammer arrester in booster-heater outlet piping.
J. Install piping-type heat traps on inlet and outlet piping of water heater storage tanks
without integral or fitting-type heat traps.
K. Fill water heaters with water.
3.2 CONNECTIONS
A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 22 Sections. Drawings

indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
B. Install piping adjacent to water heaters to allow service and maintenance. Arrange
piping for easy removal of water heaters.
C. Ground equipment according to Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for

D. Connect wiring according to Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power

Conductors and Cables."
A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to

inspect, test, and adjust field-assembled components and equipment installation,
including connections, and to assist in field testing. Report results in writing.
B. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports:
22 33 00
1. Leak Test: After installation, test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest until no leaks
exist.
2. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, confirm proper
operation.
C. Remove and replace water heaters that do not pass tests and inspections and
retest as specified above.
D. All Hot water system test and adjust to be in line with the requirements of TAB and
CxA.
3.4 DEMONSTRATION

personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain electric water heaters.
22 33 00
22 33 01 - Solar Water Heaters
PART 1 - GENERAL

Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this
Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following water heaters:
1. Solar Water Heaters.

2. Heat pump.
3. Water heater accessories.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type and size of water heater indicated. Include rated
B. Shop Drawings: Diagram power, signal, and control wiring.
C. Product Certificates: For each type of water heater, signed by product

manufacturer.
D. Source quality-control test reports.
E. Field quality-control test reports.
F. Operation and Maintenance Data: Include in emergency, operation, and

maintenance manuals.
G. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section.
B. Source Limitations: Obtain water heaters through one source from a single
manufacturer.
22 33 01
Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of

electric water heaters and are based on the specific system indicated. Electrical
Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and
marked for intended use.
C. EN 12975-1:2006, Thermal solar systems and components – Solar collectors – Part 1:

General Requirements
D. EN 12975-2:2006, Thermal solar systems and components – Solar collectors – Part 2:

Test methods
E. EN 12976-1:2000, Thermal solar systems and components – Factory made systems –

Part 1: General Requirements. Some of the requirements of the EN 12975 standard
are also valid for systems covered by EN 12976.
F. EN 12976-2:2000, Thermal solar systems and components – Factory made systems –

Part 2: Test methods. For systems where the collector can be tested separately it is
tested according to EN 12975. However in this case thermal performance, freeze
resistance and internal pressure test of the collector is excluded.
G. EN ISO 9488, Solar energy – Vocabulary (ISO 9488:1999).
H. ASME Compliance: Where indicated, fabricate and label commercial water heater
storage tanks to comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII,
Division 1.
I. Comply with NSF 61, "Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects; Sections 1
through 9," for all components that will be in contact with potable water.
1.5 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases with Architectural and Structural
Drawings.
1.6 WARRANTY

repair or replace components of electric water heaters that fails in materials or
1. Failures include, all solar collectors must have a minimum of a 10 year

manufacturer’s performance warranty to protect against defects and 15%
performance degradation.
2. All systems must have a minimum 10 year performance warranty to protect

the host against more than a 15% degradation of system performance over
the 10 year period that may occur as a result of faulty installation.
22 33 01
3. All systems must have a minimum 1 year warranty on installation labor and
workmanship not otherwise covered by the manufacturer’s performance
warranty.
4. The mounting system shall have a 20-year warranty covering at least structural
integrity and corrosion.
5. Design-Builder shall provide a comprehensive ten (10) year warranty on all

system components against defects in materials and workmanship under
normal application, installation, and use and service conditions.
6. All warranties must be documented in advance and be fully transferable to

Purchaser-Owner.
7. All work performed by must not render void, violate, or otherwise jeopardize
any building warranties or the warranties of system components.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one

a. Ecotherm – Australia
b. ASP Solar – Greece
c. P-Sun - Germany
2.2 SOLAR WATER HEATERS
A. Collector Subsystem.
1. Solar Collector Construction
a. Solar Rating & Certification Corporation Standard 100 Minimum

Standards for Solar Thermal Collectors (SRCC OG-100) / (ISO/TC 180/SC
1)
b. Solar Rating & Certification Corporation Standard 300 Minimum

Standards for Solar Water Heating Systems (SRCC OG-300) / (ISO/TC
180/SC 4)
c. All equipment shall be new, undamaged, fully warranted without

defect.
d. All equipment and installation shall qualify for available solar hot water
incentives.
22 33 01
e. Acceptable mounting methods for panels shall be provided by the

manufacturer. Bolted and similar connections shall be non-corrosive
and include locking devices designed to prevent twisting.
f. If collectors using hazardous materials are to be provided, then the

environmental impact of the hazardous material usage must be
disclosed, including any special maintenance requirements and proper
disposal/recycling of the collectors are the end of their useful life.
g. Glazed Closed Loop Flat Plate Collector: Provide minimum 60 to 65%

optical efficiency, rugged high quality construction using impact-
resistant, anti-reflective solar glass, copper meander/serpentine
absorber tube, selective-surface absorber plate, non-degrading thermal
insulation and optional rapid connections kits to interconnect collectors,
ports for collector temperature sensors, air vents and electronic
differential controls.
h. The collector shall have no less than 95% transmission, eta conversion
factor of no less than 0.75 by gross area.
i. Furnish collectors of weather-tight construction and with an aluminum

casing.
j. Provide aluminum or stainless steel mounting brackets and hinges.
k. Furnish stainless steel assembly hardware including all bolts, washers,

and nuts.
l. Install collectors such that tubes on the absorber plate drain by gravity.
m. Provide cover glazing completely replaceable from the front of the

collector without disturbing the piping or adjacent collectors.
2. Solar Hot water system shall consist of Selective aluminium Absorber with 25º
Tile Galvanized Steel Support. The Solar Circuit shall consist of the following
components
a. Solar expansion vessel 300 ltr., 6 bar (to ensure constant pressure in the
solar system),
b. Inline vessel 105 ltr (to protect expansion vessel from high temperatures),
c. Solar Pump Set (standby/duty) & accessories,
d. Emergency Cooler: Mandatory emergency cooler to dissipate excess

solar energy in summer time controlled by the mail control panel with 2
units of 3-way valves incl. actuator for controlling the cooling:
Cooling Capacity : 30 Kw
Water temperature in : 110°C
Water temperature out : 90°C
22 33 01
e. Pre-insulated stainless steel flexible hose pipes for solar supply and solar
return for easy and quick connection and installation of each collector
row,
f. Stainless steel ball valves for convenient maintenance,
g. All necessary connection parts incl. seals and end caps for easy
interconnecting of the collectors & Automatic air vent
3. Solar Collector Performance: Plot thermal performance on the thermal

efficiency curve in accordance with ASHRAE 93 / ISO/TC 180/SC 4 showing
the product of glazing transmittance and plate absorptivity and also the
thermal loss coefficient (btu/hr/F) of the solar collector. Show manufacturer's
recommended volumetric flow rate and the design pressure drop at the
recommended flow rate. Indicate the manufacturer's recommendations for
the number of collectors to be joined per bank while providing for balanced
flow and for thermal expansion considerations.
B. Solar Collector Array:
1. Net Absorber Area and Array Layout: Collector array shall be oriented so that
all collectors face the same direction. Space collectors arranged in multiple
rows so that no shading from other collectors is evident between 1000 hours
and 1400 hours solar time on December 21. Collectors should be south-facing
and a tilt equal to the local latitude, but other orientations may be considered
for approval. Indicate minimum spacing between rows.
a) Total Area (m²) Each : 10.33
b) Heat transfer medium : Propylene glycol
solution/water
c) Capacity (lt) Each : 9.5
d) Absorber surface (m²) Each : 9.2
e) Total dimensions (LxWxH) (mm) : 5085x2030x80
f) Collector total weight (without liquid) (kg): 165
g) Absorber : Selective aluminium
h) Max. operating pressure : 1.0 MPa (10 bar)
i) Absorbency / radiation coefficient : 95% ±2%
j) Radiation coefficient : 5% ±2%
Piping: Stainless steel flexible hose pipe (pre-insulated, two in one) Connection
fittings for flexible metal hose and collector Stainless steel flexible metal hoses
produced from Austenitic Stainless steel of 300 series which also gives the
product hygienic feature. Flexible metal hoses produced on helical, annular
corrugating form that allowed the product a sufficient bending feature
without any diameter reduction appears. Mainly on water line piping and
mounting time reduces tremendously plus easy to form for any application
condition without any extra fitting for any corners just for the inlet and outlet
fittings connections.Connect interconnecting array piping between solar
collectors, in a reverse-return configuration with approximately equal pipe
length for any possible flow path. Indicate flow rate through the collector
array. Provide each collector bank isolated by valves, with a pressure relief
valve and with the capability of being drained. Locate manually operated
air vents at system high points, and pitch array piping a minimum of 0.25 inch
22 33 01
per foot so that piping can be drained by gravity. Supply calibrated

balancing valves at the outlet of each collector bank as indicated.
2. Supports for Solar Collector Array: Provide support structure for the collector
array of aluminum, stainless steel or other corrosion-resistant approved
material. Furnish a support structure which secures the collector array at the
proper tilt angle with respect to horizontal and orientation with respect to true
south. Consideration should be made to mounting collectors parallel to the

pitched roofs. The collector tilt angle may vary by +/- 25 degrees, and the
azimuthal angle may vary by +/-45% from the optimal tilt and azimuth.
Provide a support structure that will withstand the static weight of filled
collectors and piping, wind, seismic, and other anticipated loads without
damage. For heavy systems, such as integral storage collectors, provide
structural reinforcement for the roof across at least four rafters and provide
verification that the structural modifications proposed are satisfactory.
Provide a support structure which allows access to all equipment for
maintenance, repair, and replacement. Neoprene or EPDM washers shall
separate all dissimilar metals. Depending on system type, supports for solar
array could terminate in ballast blocks to avoid roof penetrations.
C. Solar Hot water Storage: Vertical High Capacity SS Duplex / 316Ti with storage
capacity of 3000 litres each, 16 bar operating pressure & 20 bar test pressure with
Vertical incl. legs, inspection flange & insulation, Dial thermometer 0–120°C, pressure
gauge, 1 no. fitted inspection flange cover 400 mm, 1 no. non sacrificial titanium
electric anode and Insulation shall be made of Polyester Fiber Fleece minimum 80
mm thick. All connection openings shall be precise laser cut to reduce heat loss. The
material shall be flame retardant to DIN 4102-1 class 2. The insulation shall be
enclosed in a Poly propylene outer sheeting of 1.2 mm which shall have aluminum
closure strip which shall allow quick opening.
D. Piping connections for each tank: Hot water outlet 2", cold water inlet 2", circulation
inlet 6/4", drain 6/4" int, air vent 6/4” int. screw, inspection flange 400 mm. Stainless
Steel Internal solar flat coil heat exchanger for each tank with operating pressure of
16bar controlled by Main Control Panel
E. Transport Subsystem For Solar Application
1. Heat Exchanger (if required by system design for solar application): For system
designs requiring a heat exchanger, provide a minimum design pressure
rating of 100 psi. Construct heat exchanger of 316 stainless steel, titanium.
Furnish heat exchanger with a capability of withstanding temperatures of at
least 240 degrees F.
2. Pumps (for active systems): For active solar system designs requiring a pump,
provide electrically-driven, single-stage, centrifugal type circulating pumps
such as those manufactured by Grundfos, or approved equivalent. Support
pumps on a concrete foundation or mounting intended for the purpose, or by
the piping on which installed if appropriate to the size. Construct the pump
shaft of corrosion resistant alloy steel with a mechanical seal. Provide stainless
steel impellers and casings of bronze. Control motors with switches that can
be activated by either the differential temperature controller or by manual
override (Hand-Off-Automatic). Pumps shall be installed with isolation valves
so the pump can be serviced without draining the system.
22 33 01
3. Heat Transfer Fluid: Heat transfer fluid shall be compatible with all materials in
the system. The nature and amount of heat transfer fluid will depend on the
type of system proposed and the freeze conditions encountered at the site.
Any anti-freeze, conditioners or corrosion inhibitors added to the heat transfer
fluid must be non-toxic and intended for use in potable water systems.
F. Control and Instrumentation Subsystem
1. Differential Temperature Control Equipment: If the system design includes

controls, furnish the differential temperature control equipment as a system
from a single manufacturer. Furnish a solid-state electronic type controller
complete with an integral transformer to supply low voltage. Controller
accuracy shall be plus or minus 1 degree F. Supply controllers that are
compatible with the thermistor temperature sensors. Provide differential
controls with direct digital temperature readings of all temperatures sensed.
Supply controls with a visual indicator when pumps are energized. Provide a
controller that will identify open and short circuits on both the solar collector
temperature sensor circuit and the storage tank sensor circuit.
This Control unit package shall be optimized for the requirement. It shall in-
clude the main control panel which will manage the complete solar system.
Pumps, heat exchanger, pressure switches, temperature sensors, emergency
cooler, back-up and all other in and outputs shall be connected to the con-
troller. The program shall be specifically designed for each of the project re-
quirement to achieve highest performance. The control system shall constant-
ly provide the operator with information about the system’s operational status.
This microprocessor-based control system shall facilitate a large number of
specific and specialized applications and provide an optimum and reliable
supply of freshly heated potable water. Password-protected operating menus
shall enable safe control of operation and performance plus easy and flexible
operation of the water heater. The microprocessor control unit shall process
information received from the temperature sensors and calculate the hot wa-
ter flow rate required to meet the immediate demand. The Pumps and valves
shall be controlled accordingly. The operator shall be able to set the hot wa-
ter output and the primary circuit temperatures on the front panel of the mi-
croprocessor control unit. Continuous monitoring of the output and input
temperatures on the secondary and primary circuit shall guarantees exact hot
water control under all operating conditions. The microprocessor control unit
shall constantly monitor the operating parameters of the water heater and
store them in memory for upload to building management systems (BMS) via
USB or Ethernet. Minimum 12 month of operation shall be stored in memory,
depending on the sampling rate set by the operator.
Solar system control by microprocessor: 400V/50Hz,

a. Industrial standard metal basic control panel, IP55 protection (dust,
spray)
b. Mains power cut-off switch coupled to door lock
c. Power-on LED
d. Automatic electric cut-outs
e. Control voltage for all components
f. Automatic turn-over of the pumps and heating elements in case of fault
g. Auto-off-manual switch by the LCD for each of the heating stages
22 33 01
h. Individual fault indication of short circuit or safety cut-out tripping for

each heating stage
i. Low water cut-out with low pressure sensing device
j. TR/STB Automatic temperature limiter 0 – 70°C with height limit switch at
75°C
k. Operation signals and error alarms
l. BMS connection (operation stages, faults, alarms)
m. All temperature sensors and pressure transmitters are displayed on the
monitor incl. their set points and values.
n. Legionella Cycle Controller, to periodically raise the temperature of the
hot water in the storage tank to 65 ˚C
o. The controller is equipped for remote maintenance, if connected to the
internet (LAN).
p. Pressure-dependent collector cut-off temperature: If the collector
temperature increases up to evaporating temperature, the circulating
pump will be stopped. The evaporating temperature depends on the
system pressure. The controller permanent monitors the system pressure
and calculates the necessary cut-off temperature of the solar circuit.
This pressure control device reduces the risk of stagnation temperature.
2. Thermistor Temperature Sensors (if required): Provide temperature sensors that

are compatible with the differential temperature controller, with an accuracy
of plus or minus 1 percent at 77 degrees F. Supply sensors that have passed
an accelerated life test conducted by subjecting thermistor assemblies to a
constant temperature of 400 degrees F or greater for a period of 1000 hours
minimum with an accuracy of within plus or minus 1 percent as stated above.
Furnish hermetically sealed type thermistors. Provide immersion wells or
watertight threaded fittings for temperature sensors. Temperature sensors shall
be mechanically attached to the surface they are measuring and wire to the
sensor must be mechanically attached and protected along it’s length.
G. Electrical Work: If pumps are required in the system design, provide electric motor-
driven equipment complete with motor, motor starters, and controls. Provide
electrical equipment and wiring in accordance with NFPA 70. Furnish motor starters
complete with thermal overload protection and other appurtenances necessary for
the motor control specified. Provide each motor of sufficient size to drive the
equipment at the specified capacity without exceeding the nameplate rating of
the motor.
H. Piping System
1. Provide a piping system complete with pipe, pipe fittings, valves, strainers,
expansion loops, pipe hangers, inserts, supports, anchors, guides, sleeves, and
accessories with this specification and the drawings. Pipe shall be designed
to observe limits on flow velocity, pressure drop, and gauge pressure
associated with the pipe type and characteristics.
2. Pipe Insulation: Furnish interior pipe insulation and coverings such as Armaflex,
Insul-Tube, Rubatex, or approved equivalent. Provide outside array piping
insulation with a capability of withstanding 250 degrees F, except that piping
22 33 01
insulation within 1.5 feet of collector connections shall be capable of

withstanding 400 degrees F. Protect outside piping insulation from water
damage and ultraviolet degradation with a suitable outer coating
manufactured for this purpose (aluminum, sunlight resistant PVC or approved
equal).
3. Pressure Gauges: Provide pressure gauges with throttling type needle valve or
a pulsation dampener and shutoff valve. Furnish a 3-1/2 inch minimum dial
size.
4. Thermometers: Supply thermometers with wells and separable SS316L
5. Pipe Hangers and Supports: Support and hang piping so that the weight of
the piping is not supported by drywall, siding, or other building members not
designed to bear load. Support piping so that thermal expansion and
contraction of pipe lengths is accommodated.
6. Valves: Provide valves compatible with the piping. Ball valves shall be used
for shutoff, with full port, bronze body, bronze ball and teflon seat. Bronze
hose-end gate valves shall be used for draining low points of piping.
I. Auxiliary Heat Pumps
1. General: Provide high efficiency heat pump as back up to the Solar

collectors. The entire unit is to be complete with all operating controls and
require only plumbing and electrical service connections. The unit should be
with WRAS approved – seamless 90/10 cu pro-nickel heat exchanger allows
the units to be used in direct systems for potable water. The refrigerant should
be R134a ozone friendly refrigerant ensures reliable operation up to 68º C Fully
weatherproof polyester or epoxy coated cabinet Choice of centrifugal fans
to allows ducting from plant rooms or distribution of cold air for space cooling
Manufactured to ISO9001 standards
2. Performance: The water heater shall be factory integrated with a built in air to
water heat pump module rated to provide up to 31.5KW heating capacity.
Packaged heat pumps shall be selected for hot water heating to 68o C for
standby / backup for the Solar heating system.
Duty - output to water

Air on 30°C/90%RH 66.0kW
Air on 10°C/85%RH 47.1kW
Electrical Supply 380/400V/3ph/50Hz
Power Consumption 10.9 to 20.5 kW Max
Max. Supply Fuse 60Amps
Nominal Air Flow 20000m³/h
Water Flow 130 LPM
Circulating Pump Capacity 2.2 lps @1.25bar
Pressure Drop 4.2 m hd
Water Connection 2” BSPM (50mm)
Compressor 2 x Scroll
Refrigerant R134a ozone friendly refrigerant ensures reliable
operation up to 68ºC
22 33 01
Condenser Coil WRAS approved - seamless 90/10 cupro-nickel heat

exchanger
Sound Pressure level 70db
Cabinet Type Fully weather-proof polyester coated cabinet
3. Warranty: Warranty all electrical components against defects in workmanship

and material for a period of one (1) year from date of start-up, all heat pump
components for six (6) years and the pressure vessel for ten (10) years from
date of start-up, Each water heater shall be shipped with a complete set of
installation and operating instructions including spare parts list and approved
drawings.
J. Digital Re-circulating valve
1. Digital Mixing Center (DMC): Digital Re-Circulating Valve shall be supplied pre-
piped and pressure tested as a lead free Digital Mixing Center complete with
inlet hot water, inlet cold water, outlet mixed water, inlet re-circulation return
water and outlet return to heater water connections. Shall comprise check
valves, strainers, thermometers, pressure gauges, ball valves, inlet hot water to
outlet mixed water by-pass and shall be mounted onto an enamelled steel
frame.
2. Digital Re-circulating valve (DRV): Re-Circulating Valve shall be digital of lead

free stainless steel/polymer construction. DRV shall have 3” inlet/outlet
connections, deliver a mixed water flow of 165GPM @ 7.5ft/sec and shall have
no minimum system draw off requirement.
3. DRV shall have all of the following operational capabilities:

a. +/- 2F water temperature control
b. 2F minimum inlet to outlet water temperature differential
c. Automatic shutoff of hot water flow upon cold water inlet supply failure.
d. Automatic shutoff of hot water flow in the event of a power failure
e. Programmable set point range of 81-158°F (27-70°C)
f. Programmable thermal disinfection mode
g. Programmable 1st level hi/lo temp alarm display
h. Programmable temperature error level for safety shutdown
4. DRV shall have all of the following connectivity capabilities:

a. SPCO relay outputs which are energized during operation.
b. LCD display which indicates: set point, delivered temperature, error
codes and alarm conditions.
c. MODBUS 485 port for remote set point adjustment and remote
operating temperature visibility.
d. RS485 Serial Port for connection to a performance matched hot water
monitoring system.
5. DRV shall be compliant with ASSE Standard 1017 and CSA B125 and so
certified and identified.
6. DRV shall be UL listed and identified.
22 33 01
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 WATER HEATER INSTALLATION
A. Install piping straight and true to bear evenly on hangers and supports. Do not hang
piping from sheet rocked or suspended ceilings. Keep interior and ends of new
piping thoroughly cleaned of foreign matter. Keep piping systems clean during
installation by means of plugs or other approved methods. Discharge storage tank
pressure and temperature relief valves into floor drains. Horizontal runs should be flat
and vertical runs should be plumb. Install any multiple pipes in an order which does
not require them to cross or interfere with each other or other building systems.
Provide air vents with threaded plugs or caps. Install control and sensor wiring in
conduit.
B. System Flushing and Disinfection: Flush and disinfect the piping system.
C. Collector Subsystem
1. Collector Array: Install solar collector array at the proper tilt angle, orientation,
and elevation above roof. Install the solar collectors with the ability to be
removed for maintenance, repair, or replacement.
2. Array Piping: Install collector array piping in a reverse-return configuration so

that path lengths of collector supply and return are of approximately equal
length. Install air vents in the high points of the collector array piping. Provide
proper pitch for draining of collector array.
3. Array Support: Install array support in accordance with the recommendations

of the collector manufacturer.
4. Pipe Expansion: Provide for the expansion and contraction of supply and
return piping with changes in the direction of the run of pipe or by expansion
loops. Do not use expansion joints in the system piping.
5. Valves: Install ball valves at the inlet and outlet of each bank of manifolded
collectors. Install calibrated balancing valves at the outlet of each collector
bank and mark final settings on each valve. Install a union adjacent to each
ball valve. Balance flow through the collector piping with at least one
balancing valve left in the open position. Locate tempering mixing valve
downstream of auxiliary water heater to control hot water delivery
temperature.
D. Roof Penetrations: All roof penetrations shall be made permanently waterproof.

Copper or other approved flashing shall be used. Contractor shall provide a five
year warranty on materials and labor, including consequential damages, for any
roof leaks due to or arising out of the solar water heating system installation.
E. Assemble and install inlet and outlet piping manifold kits for multiple water heaters.
Fabricate, modify, or arrange manifolds for balanced water flow through each
water heater. Include shutoff valve, thermometer in each water heater inlet and
outlet, and throttling valve in each water heater outlet.
22 33 01

including connections and to assist in field testing. Report results in writing.
1. Leak Test: After installation, test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest until no leaks
exist.
2. Instructions: Provide instructions for each system type. Include in these
instructions a system schematic, and wiring and control diagrams showing the
complete layout of the solar system. Prepare condensed operating
instructions explaining preventative maintenance procedures, balanced flow
rates, methods of checking the system for normal safe operation, and
procedures for safely starting and stopping the system, in typed form, framed
as specified above, and posted beside the diagrams. Post the framed
instructions before acceptance testing of each system.
3. Acceptance Testing and Final Inspection: Maintain a written record of the
results of all acceptance tests, to be submitted in booklet form. Provide the
following tests:
4. Hydrostatic Test: Hydrostatically test each system. Isolate valving and
instrumentation not suitable for the intended test pressure.
5. Operational Test: Operationally test each system over a period of 48
consecutive hours with sufficient solar insolation to cause activation of the
solar energy system during daylight hours.
6. Overall System Operations: Demonstrate each solar energy system will
operate properly while unattended for a period of at least 72 hours. As
required by system design, demonstrate the system controller will start the
pumps after being warmed by the sun, and that it will properly shut down
during cloudy weather or in the evening over a minimum of three complete
cycles. It is permissible to manipulate the temperature of the storage tank by
the introduction of cold water.
7. Temperature Sensor Diagnostics: As required by system design, demonstrate
the controller will correctly identify open and short circuits on both the solar
collector temperature sensor circuit and the storage tank sensor circuit.
C. Remove and replace elements of the system that do not pass tests and inspections
and retest as specified above.
3.3 DEMONSTRATION

personnel to adjust, operate, and Solar water heaters.
22 33 01
22 35 00- Domestic Water Heat Exchangers
PART 1 - GENERAL

Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes plate heat exchangers.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, furnished

specialties, and accessories. At a minimum, the following parameter to be
tabulated.
1. Cooling capacity (TR)
2. Type
3. Primary circuit: Temperature in & Temperature out
4. Secondary circuit: Temperature in & Temperature out
5. Flow rate in each circuit
6. Pressure drop (Kpa)
7. Design pressure (Bar)
8. Test Pressure (Bar) differential, factory letter confirming differential pressure
for plate thickness and temperature
9. Extension Capacity (percentage)/ number of plates
10. Area (m2)
11. Equipment Shipping Weight (kg)
12. Equipment operating weight (kg)
13. Channel Depth (mm)
14. Plate Thickness
15. End Plate Thickness
16. LMTD
17. Local Service Availability within the region
18. Method Statement of Installation, Commissioning and future Maintenance
based on actual site conditions.
B. Shop Drawings: Signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer. Detail

equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required
clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each
field connection.
22 35 00
1. Design Calculations: Calculate requirements for selecting seismic restraints

and for designing bases.
Base Details: Detail fabrication including anchorages and attachments to structure

and to supported equipment.
C. Coordination Drawings: Equipment room, drawn to scale, on which the following

items are shown and coordinated with each other, based on input from installers of
the items involved:
1. Repair-Removal space and strategy.

2. Structural members to which heat exchangers will be attached.
D. Operation and Maintenance Data: For heat exchangers to include in emergency,

operation, and maintenance manuals.
B. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, performance, and dimensional

requirements of heat exchangers and are based on the specific equipment
indicated.
C. Submit ISO 9001Certificate
D. Submit Certificate of Origin of Material Supplied Duly Stamped by the relevant

authority.
E. Submit pressure test certificate as issued at the manufacturing facility complying

with pressurized equipment directive.
F. AHRI - Thermal Performance Certification in accordance with AHRI Liquid to Liquid

Heat Exchanger Certification Program
1. The contractor shall send the data sheets for verification to AHRI and the verification
package from AHRI shall be attached with the submittal. The plate heat
exchangers shall not be approved in the absence of this verification package. The
verification package from AHRI shall have the following.
a. Original request for verification form signed and stamped by AHRI.
b. Original Specification sheet
c. Replication selection sheet made by AHRI.
2. The contractor shall verify the technical details of the supplied plate heat
exchanger with mentioned parameters in the AHRI data sheet and submit a report
for final approval after delivery.
22 35 00
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS

of the manufacturers specified or ‘Approved Equal’.
1. Alfa Laval - Sweden
2. APV – USA
3. TACO - USA
2.2 GASKETED PLATE HEAT EXCHANGERS
A. Configuration: Freestanding assembly consisting of frame support, top and bottom

carrying and guide bars, fixed and movable end plates, tie rods, individually
removable plates, and one-piece gaskets.
B. Frame:
1. Capacity to accommodate 20 percent additional plates.

2. Painted carbon steel with provisions for anchoring to support.
3. The frame assembly should be bolted construction and not welded frame
assembly
4. The frame shall be carbon steel construction coated with two part blue
paint. Manufacturer painting specifications to be provided.
5. The moveable cover shall have only stainless steel material roller for ease of
movement without additional rigging or handling equipment.
6. Provide lifting lugs to allow lifting of entire units flooded weight.
7. Bolts shall be provided with rolled threads to reduce galling and minimum
high width hexagonal nuts to adequately distribute the load.
8. Critical bolts to strictly have ball bearing boxes.
9. Provide plastic covers over threaded rod extension for protection of threads
10. Connections to be studded port design with connection lining to be of
constructed of same plate material and elastomeric liner.
11. The plates shall only contact with stainless steel surfaces.
12. The portion of the carrying bar in contact with plates shall be an integrated
into the carrying bar
C. Top and Bottom Carrying and Guide Bars: stainless steel.
D. End-Plate Material: End plates shall be of AISI 316 material and 0.6mm thickness.
E. Tie Rods and Nuts: Steel or stainless steel.
F. Plate Material: Type 316 stainless steel with minimum thickness of 0.5 mm
1. One piece pressed type AISI 316 stainless steel plate, with 2B finish and
tapered gasket groove.
22 35 00
2. The plates shall not have holes for sealing of gasket – no exception.
3. Each plate to have herringbone corrugations to optimize heat transfer with
nominal pressure losses.
4. The channel depth between two plates should exceed 1.9mm but should not
be above 2.5 mm.
5. Design of plates shall strictly follow countercurrent and parallel flow principle.
6. Design to allow for removal and replacement of single plate without removal
of the plate on either side.
7. Design shall prevent fluid intermixing and provide leakage to the outside of
the unit
8. Plates should not lock to adjacent plates
9. Each plate should strictly have a built in five point alignment system to
accurately locate the plates in the frame assembly to prevent lateral plate
movement under pressure.
10. Plates shall be reinforced at the upper and lower mounting slots to prevent
bending hangers on the plate.
11. The frame plates shall shave no welded stiffeners etc and should be
designed to allow pressurization of each circuit to a full differential of 1.3
times the design pressure without buckling or deformation of heat transfer
plates
G. Gasket Material: Nitrile rubber.
1. One-piece, molded Nitrile Butyl Rubber (NBR) gasket.

2. Gaskets shall have relieving grooves to prevent intermixing of fluids and cause
leak to outside of unit.
3. The gaskets shall be locked into the groove by Clip On / Clip AD / Tape On
method. Glued gaskets are not acceptable
4. The gaskets should not be used for locking of the plates before tightening.
H. Piping Connections:
1. End plate with welded carbon-steel nozzles. Threaded pipe connection for
NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller; carbon-steel flanged pipe connection for larger
sizes.
2. Line wetted surfaces with same material as plates.
I. Accessories.
1. Provide factory fabricated removable and reusable insulation cover for each
heat exchanger. The insulation cover shall be designed for easy removal and
replacement to facilitate cleaning, inspection and maintenance of plates.
2. Provide stainless steel suitcase type latches to facilitate assembly and disas-
sembly of the insulation pieces.
22 35 00
3. The insulation panel shall be 1mm Allustucco 3s 3/4h exterior plating, 60mm
polyurethane foam insulation, 0.05mm Aluminum foil inside layer and 20mm
Armaflex lining at the bolt holes.
J. Drip Tray: Provide Insulated Galvanized, Drainable drip tray beneath each heat
exchanger.
K. Characteristics:
1. Application : Domestic Water Cooling

2. Type : Counter current and parallel flow only.
3. Performance Requirements
Units shall be sized to meet design conditions as specified in the schedule with
a maximum allowable pressure drop of 60 – 70 Kpa in each circuit.
In addition, units shall be sized with allowance for 20% extension for future
addition of plates.
4. Working Pressure / Temperature: Minimum 16 bar / 35 deg C or as per
schedule
5. Test Pressure : 1.3 times the design pressure.
6. The design shall prevent intermixing and leakage of fluid to outside of unit.
7. The units shall withstand the maximum test pressure on either hot or cold side
with the opposite side at 0 bar or as per schedule.
8. Units to be factory tested in accordance with PED code. Manufacturer to
comply with PED and mention compliance of the same on all data sheets.
9. Provide metal nameplate with the following details
a. Manufacturer’s name
b. Type of Unit
c. Serial No.
d. Year of manufacture
e. Fluid group
f. Inlet / Outlet connections
g. Volume
h. Design Pressure
i. Design temperature
j. Test Pressure
k. Test Pressure date
L. Fully established service center within the region with Reconditioning and
Regasketing facility should be available. Such facility shall have all essential spare
parts as shall have capability of full repair and overhaul of the plate heat
exchangers. 24hours service availability to attend fault at project site by factory
trained engineer should be available.
M. All units to be manufactured as per PED code.
22 35 00
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and for
structural rigidity, strength, anchors, and other conditions affecting performance of
heat exchangers.

corrected.
3.2 HEAT-EXCHANGER INSTALLATION
A. Concrete Bases: Anchor heat exchanger to concrete base.

otherwise indicated, install dowel rods on 18-inch (450-mm) centers around full
perimeter of base.
equipment.
5. Cast-in-place concrete materials and placement requirements shall be co-
ordinated with structural requirements.
3.3 CONNECTIONS
B. Maintain manufacturer's recommended clearances for service and maintenance.

Install piping connections to allow service and maintenance of heat exchangers.
C. Install shutoff valves at heat-exchanger inlet and outlet connections.
D. Install relief valves on heat-exchanger heated-fluid connection and install pipe relief
valves, full size of valve connection, to floor drain.
E. Install hose end valve to drain shell.
A. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning
22 35 00
3.5 CLEANING
A. After completing system installation, including outlet fitting and devices, inspect
exposed finish. Remove burrs, dirt, and construction debris and repair damaged
finishes.
3.6 DEMONSTRATION

personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain heat exchangers.
22 35 00

23 01 00 - Operation & Maintenance of HVAC Systems
PART 1 GENERAL

Works covered by this specification provides for the supply, installation, testing,
commissioning and maintenance (excluding routine and preventive
maintenance) during the defects liability period of the complete mechanical
services installation detailed in this specification and as indicated on the
drawings. The defects liability period for mechanical installation shall be 12
months from the date of acceptance / taking over the systems.
Without restricting the generality of the above, the following specific items of
work shall be included:
Number Description
230100 OPERATION & MAINTENANCE OF HVAC SYSTEM
230500 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC SYSTEM
230548 NOISE AND VIBRATION CONTROL
230593 TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING FOR HVAC
230713 INSULATION
231100 FUEL OIL STORAGE TANK AND PIPING SYSTEM
231126 FACILITY LIQUEFIED PETROLEUM GAS PIPING
232123 HYDRONIC PUMPS
233300 AIR DISTRIBUTION
233400 VENTILATION EQUIPMENT
237313 AIR HNADLING UNITS
238000 LIQUID HEAT TRANSFER
238100 UNITARY AIR CONDITIONERS
238123 COMPUTER ROOM AIR CONDITIONERS
238219 FAN COIL UNITS
1.1.1 Complete establishment of air conditioning and ventilation system.
1.2 Codes and Standards
1.2.1 All works done under the Contract shall be executed in the manner set out in
the Specification or where not so set out, to the complete satisfaction of the
Engineer.
1.2.2 All work shall conform to the best principles of modern practice and shall be
carried out by fully competent skilled tradesmen of appropriate grades under
competent supervision.
1.2.3 The whole of the work shall be carried out in strict accordance with the latest
current applicable standards, specifications and codes published, as follows:
British Standards and Codes of Practice.
American Society of Heating, Refrigeration and Air Conditioning Engineers
Standards and Guidelines (ASHRAE).
EDD Regulations.
23 01 00

1.2.4 Include all items of labour and material required to comply with such
standards and codes as necessary. Where quantities, sizes or other
requirements indicated on the drawings or herein specified are in excess of the
standard or code requirements, the specifications and / or drawings shall
govern.
Where the requirements of any such regulations conflict with the requirements
of this specification, the more stringent requirement shall govern.
The execution of the work shall be subject to the approval and satisfaction of
the Engineer.
1.2.5 If the Contractor wishes to propose codes or standards other than those
particularly specified, he may do so and submit to the Engineer complete
data with respect to such codes or standards with confirmation that the said
codes of standards meet, as minimum, the specified codes and standards.
The Employer and Engineer shall have the right to request the Contractor to
submit tabulated lists of the differences between the codes and standards
proposed and those specified.
1.2.6 The decision of the Employer and the Engineer whether or not to accept such
alternative codes or standards shall be final. In case of rejection of such
alternative codes or standards by the Employer and the Engineer, the
Contractor shall adhere to the code and standards specified.
1.3.1 General
performance.
completion: -
format).
23 01 00



General
a) Drawing Size : A1 (A0 size will not be accepted).
be used.
levels, etc.
23 01 00

b) Engineering plans, elevations, sections and details including the layout of
fixed furniture and equipment complete with dimensions.
c) Structural layout with details of typical reinforcements (for reinforced-
concrete structures), connections (for steel-framed buildings), etc.
a) Floor plans, elevations or sections (as may be required) of air-conditioning,
plumbing, fire protection and other services.
a) Floor plans, elevations or sections (as may be required) of lighting, power
points, communications, data and signalling systems, etc.

General
a) Size & Type: Nominal A4 size, 50mm thick vinyl-covered with no less than 4
ring binders.
b) Each section or part of the manual shall be separated and identified by a
hard-plastic separator. Each separator shall be tabbed and labelled at
the longitudinal edge.
c) Punched pages in the manual shall be reinforced at the rings, and it shall
be possible for each page to be detached easily.
d) The front and side covers of each manual shall bear clear and indelible
inscriptions (stick-on labels will not be accepted) in bold types of the
project title and particular installation as shown in the following example: -
“PROJECT TITLE”
FOR
MECHANICAL INSTALLATIONS.
e) All information contained in each manual shall be in English language
only. Technical literature in languages other than English will be rejected.
f) For large and complex projects with extensive mechanical and electrical
services, the manuals shall be prepared and submitted in separately
bound parts or volumes as may be required.
g) The texts of the manuals shall be prepared by skilled technical writers who
are trained and experienced in operation and maintenance of the plant,
systems, equipment or building works described.
b) Index
d) Contact information
e) Manufacturers /Suppliers literature
23 01 00

m) Modifications
o) Engineer and Civil Works (this Section may be included in the Mechanical
Installations manuals).
This shall present a concise and factual introductory summary on the
project. Essential information to be provided shall include the names of
the employer, Client User, Engineer, contractor, sub-contractors,
construction start date, handover date and construction period.
b) Index
This shall provide the full listing of the O&M manuals by section, part or
other subdivisions as may be required and shall identify these complete
with page numbering all in sequential order.
ii. Design conditions each system, process, an item of plant,
etc., is meant to achieve including the operating
parameters.
iii. Technical descriptions of an individual system, plant or
process. This shall include a clear description of the
function of all equipment and major components and the
manner these are operated and controlled.
iv. Simplified flow diagrams of systems or plant clearly
identifying all equipment and major components cross
referenced to the Schedule of Equipment and
Components within the manuals.
d) Contact information: Provide contact information of person in-charge

from the manufacturer, supplier, and contractor.
e) Manufacturers / Suppliers literature: This section shall include
manufacturers / supplier’s data and literature to elaborate the functioning
of the equipment.
i. A general listing of all installed items of plant, equipment and
components for each process or system. Items so listed shall bear the
same coded identifications as those shown on the As-Built Drawings
and other diagrams for easy referencing.
ii. General and technical schedule for individual items of plant and
equipment giving the following details: -
1. Manufacturer’s name and particulars of local agent/supplier.
4. Operating parameters, i.e. electrical supply characteristics, motor
ratings, power consumptions, speed, etc.
23 01 00

6 Manufacturer’s technical literature and drawings. General sales
information and brochures in lieu will not be accepted.
2. Detailed step by step preparatory inspection checks prior to start
up of system, plant and equipment including Megger test of all
equipment motors before starting.
3. Clear and comprehensive instructions for a startup, operation and
shut down. This shall include detailed safety procedures to be
followed in an emergency situation.
i. Fault finding schedule - this shall provide a comprehensive list of
failures or malfunctions which are likely to develop during the
operation of a system, plant or equipment including the diagnosis
and procedures for trouble shooting.
ii. Preventive Maintenance - this shall contain information and
instructions relating to the routine maintenance required for all
items of plant and equipment to ensure that these are operating
at their optimum efficiency. The information to be provided shall
include the following: -
1. Recommended staffing for plant maintenance. The minimum
qualifications of each staff shall be stated.
2. List of tools and test instruments required for maintenance. Where
a test apparatus is of a specialist nature, the operating,
maintenance and calibration procedures shall be provided.
3. Equipment manufacturer’s maintenance literature including
drawings and diagrams.
i) Automatic Controls Systems
This section shall contain detailed information and instructions on the
operation of the automatic controls systems for all plants, equipment and
processes generally, as follows: -
i. Controls system description and manner of operations including
schematic diagrams.
functions, calibrations carried out and final settings for operation.
iii. Procedures for fault finding and rectification of faults and required
maintenance. Where this information is covered elsewhere in the
Manuals, the relevant section shall be stated.
iv. Manufacturer’s technical data including drawings and diagrams.

i. Industry standard or legal test certificates issued for safety and fitness for
the use of equipment such as boilers, water heaters, pressure vessels, lifts,
switchgear, etc.
iii. Certified Testing & Commissioning Data for all mechanical and electrical
systems and equipment. This shall include HVAC temperature/humidity
tests, hydraulic pressure and flow balancing, electrical continuity tests, etc.
The tests results obtained shall be compared with the design values and
deviations, if any, shall be noted. Details of all specialist test instruments
23 01 00

used shall be provided, i.e. make and model number, a method of
calibration, etc.
iv. Manufacturers, written warranty on equipment and components, if any.

i. A complete inventory of original spare parts supplied (if any) at the
handover of the project.
ii. Comprehensive lists of spare parts and consumables (as per the
equipment manufacturers, recommendation) with CIF Bahrain prices.
Where applicable, corresponding Central Stores Directorate’s stock
numbers shall be indicated for each spare part.
iii. Particulars of spare parts manufacturers including local suppliers or agents.

environmental risk associated with the operation, maintenance, and
disposal of any part of equipment and system. Instruction for safe disposal
should be included within this section.
m) Modifications: Any field modification to the factory supplied equipment

shall be specifically identified in this section.

guarantees and warranties for all the equipment /system including those
for installation.

1. All plant, equipment, apparatus, parts and materials needed to complete
2. Any items suffering damage, in transit on the site shall be rejected and
3. All second fix finishing items such as grilles, unit casings, light fittings, switch
4. The Contractor shall protect all pipework, valves, fitting, ductwork, plant
5. Any open-ended pipes left overnight or for a longer period shall be
6. Pipework, fittings, valves or any plant and equipment which is found to be
23 01 00


1. For all parts of the services the shop fabricated and factory built
caused to finishes.
2. All steelwork in connection with supports for pipework, ductwork, plant

1. The Contractor shall provide attendance during the commissioning of all
1.4 Taking over
1.4.1 The Contractor shall be responsible for training a number of persons who will
be selected by the Ministry in the correct and careful operation control and
maintenance of the whole work. The training shall be carried out by the
qualified commissioning staff of the Contractor and shall be continued
throughout the one (1) month period preceding the “Taking Over”unless the
Specifications call for a more extended period.
1.4.2 As soon as the Works have been completed in accordance with the Contract
Documents, except in minor respects that do not affect its use for the intended
purpose and except for the maintenance thereof as provided under Defect
Liability Period and have passed the Reliability Tests, the Engineer shall issue a
certificate, herein called a “Taking Over Certificate”, in which he shall certify
the date on which the Works have been completed and have passed the
said Tests and the Engineer shall be deemed to have taken over the Works on
the date so certified but issue of Taking Over Certificate shall not operate as
an admission that the Works have been completed in every respect. In the
event of the Works being divided into two or more sections, the Engineer shall
be entitled to take over any section or sections of the other or others, and
thereupon a Taking Over Certificate in respect thereof shall be issued. If by
agreement between the Contractor and the Engineer, any portion of the
Works (other than a section or sections) shall be taken over before the
23 01 00

remainder of the Works, the Engineer shall issue a Taking Over Certificate in
respect of that portion.
1.4.3 If by any reason or any default on the part of the Contractor a Taking Over
Certificate has not been issued in relation to every portion of the Works within
one (1) month after the date fixed by the Contract for the completion of the
Works, or if no time be fixed within a reasonable time, the Engineer shall be at
liberty to use the Works or any portion thereof, in respect of which a Taking
Over Certificate has not been issued, provided that the Works or portion so
used as aforesaid shall be reasonably capable of being used without harm to
the Works (normal wear and tear excepted), and that the Contractor shall be
afforded reasonable opportunity of taking such steps as may be necessary to
permit the issuance of the Taking Over Certificate. In no case, however, shall
the employer be prevented from the use of the works unless otherwise
specified.
1.5 Testing

The Contractor shall notify the Engineer in accordance with its previous
1.5.2 Operating tests

a. Initial Trial Test:
23 01 00

1. After the various systems are pressure tested and cleaned as herein before
2. Any equipment producing objectionable noise must be repaired or
3. Include for continuity and insulation tests on all electrical works and test all
b. Tests on Piping:
1. Pressure Tests: Upon completion of the installation, but before insulation
2. For other piping systems reference shall be made to the specification for
3. Any revisions made in the piping system will subsequently necessitate
4. Any leakage or fault discovered during such tests shall be remedied at
5. The Contractor, except otherwise specified, shall provide at his expense
6. Additional Tests
7. If any test is ordered by the Engineer which is either:
8. Not so intended by or provided for by the Contractor or,
9. Although so intended by or provided for, is ordered by the Engineer to be
10. Then the cost of such test shall be borne by the Contractor if the test shows
by the Employer.
11. Consumed Electricity and Water
23 01 00

12. The Contractor will reimburse the Employer for the cost of electricity and
c. Tests on Water Pumps:

Flow rate.
Pumps speed RPM.
d. Tests on Electric Motors:

Speed in RPM, amperes for each phase and power input in kW for each
motor.
e. Tests on other Plant and Equipment:

specifications.
f. Reliability Tests:
1. After finishing the initial tests to the satisfaction of the Engineer, the
2. Each Reliability Test shall last for a period of thirty-one (31) consecutive
3. In the event of any repair or adjustment having to be made other than the
Season.
Tagging Standards.
23 01 00

in BS 1710.

standards.
General
1. The purpose of this sections is to provide clear and concise direction in
formulating a standardised equipment tagging programme applicable to
all maintainable equipment throughout the project as required by the
operator.
2. A standardized equipment tagging system will ensure the following
a. Standardised descriptions of equipment and rooms throughout the
project.
equipment.
Tagging process
3. The equipment collecting and tagging process can be split into seven
stages

23 01 00


4. A standardised template has been created to assist in the equipment

collection process and once completed these need to be submitted to
the engineer for review and approval
5. The contractor will use the same room and equipment labels based on
the submitted forms, once its approved
6. The operator in the applicable property will be responsible for Allocation of
the property, building, floor, room & system codes etc.,
1.7 Builders works

his satisfaction.
23 01 00

1.11 Spare parts

the Engineer.
them.
23 01 00

for in this Clause.
23 01 00

23 05 00 - Common Work Results for HVAC
PART 1 GENERAL
These sections cover the common work results common to more than one
section of Division – 230500 and shall be read in conjunction with the following
sections:
Number Description
230713 INSULATION
1.1.1 The work under this section of the specification shall include the supply, delivery
to site, installation, testing and commissioning, setting to work and Maintenance
of the Air Conditioning, Ventilation and Exhaust System.
1.1.2 The contractor shall provide all the materials, labor cartage, plant and
appliances for the supply, installation, testing, balancing and commissioning of
the work and all other minor and incidental works necessary for the system. All
testing, balancing and commissioning works to be done as per the requirements
of TAB and CxA
1.1.3 Contractor shall guarantee for the efficient performance of various equipment
which shall not be less than the specified ratings when working under the
operating conditions for the respective items as given in the specifications.
1.1.4 It is mandatory to have performance testing under simulated conditions at the

factory of prospective suppliers of chillers, pumps etc. prior to shipment. Anything,
not specifically mentioned, but necessary for the fulfillment of the guarantee and
requirements called for in the contract or necessary for the proper operation of
the installations is to be provided by the works contractor without any additional
cost.
1.1.5 Any discrepancies, omissions, ambiguities or conflicts in or among contract

documents, or any doubts as to their meaning should be called to the attention
of the Engineers by the works contractor at the time of submitting his tender.
1.1.6 The works contractor shall guarantee holding a full set of spare-parts for all of the
equipment he intends to supply and install, for a minimum period of two years. In
addition, the contractor shall include for the supply of the said spares, which shall
be delivered before the issue of the practical completion certificate.
23 05 00

1.1.7 The contractor shall not without the consent in writing of the Engineer assign or
sublet his contract or any substantial part thereof other than for raw materials or
minor details. Consent for subletting shall not relieve the contractor from any
obligation, duty or responsibility under the contract.
1.1.8 The contractor shall comply with all bye-laws and regulations of local and other
statutory authorities having jurisdiction over the works and shall be responsible for
the payment of all fees and other charges and the giving and receiving of all
necessary notices.
1.1.9 Works shall be carried out in conformity with the specifications and in
coordination with the architectural / structural / interior design / other services
requirements as well as constraints.
1.1.10 The contractor shall submit within seven days from the date of acceptance of
the tender, detailed schedules showing the programme and order in which the
contractor proposes to carry out the works with dates and estimated completion
time for various parts of the work in the form of bar-chart based on “the critical
path method”. Such schedules shall be approved by the Engineer before starting
of the work and shall be binding on the contractor.
1.1.11 Routine QA/QC checks and inspections for various items / equipment shall be
performed at contractor’s workshop or at manufacturer’s facility prior to
shipment of materials to site and furnishing of test certificates.
1.1.12 The contractor shall operate, test and adjust all air conditioning, ventilation and
exhaust system / units, fans, motors, all air handling units provided in connection
with this installation and shall make all necessary adjustments and corrections
thereof including the adjustment of all regulations, dampers for the purpose of
equalizing the flow of air to and through all ducts to each and every outlet and
inlet.
1.1.13 If the completed plant or any portion thereof before it is taken over or during the
guarantee and defects liability period be found defective or fails to fulfill the
intent of this specification, the contractor shall on receipt of notice from the
Engineer forthwith make the defective plant good. Should he fail to do so within
a time considered reasonable by the Engineer, the owner may reject and
replace at the risk and expense of the contractor the whole or any portion of the
plant, which is defective or fails to fulfill the requirements of the contract.
1.1.14 The contractor appointed for HVAC works shall have “A” Grade Credentials to
demonstrate his reputation and sufficient experience in similar nature of jobs to
the satisfaction of the Engineer. The contractor shall also submit the qualifications
and experience particulars of the HVAC Engineer, HVAC Foreman and HVAC
Technicians to be employed on the project along with their Credentials copies,
and obtain approval from the Engineer.
1.1.15 Contractor shall employ 3rd party Commissioning Authority for the
commissioning of all systems
1.1.16 Test on Completion: Tests as are prescribed by the specification, as per

possible due to climatic conditions at the time of completion, the contractor shall
23 05 00

be bound to carry out tests at any time subsequent to the date of completion,
but before the end of defects liability period.
1.2 Major Equipment and Local Representation
1.2.1 The make, model and type of all equipment, materials and accessories
proposed to be used in the Project are subject to prior approval of the Engineer.
1.2.2 Where a single manufacturer or make is specified alternative

manufacturers/makes can be considered by the Engineer provided that the
Contractor submits full details to demonstrate that the alternative is of equal
quality and performance and no additional cost is incurred.
1.2.3 All these equipment and other materials must have an established local agent
who shall have complete after-sales service & maintenance facility and also
holds adequate spare parts as recommended by the manufacturer.
1.3 Definitions:
1.3.1 Finished Spaces: Spaces other than mechanical and electrical equipment
rooms, furred spaces, pipe and duct chases, unheated spaces immediately
below roof, spaces above ceilings, unexcavated spaces, crawlspaces, and
tunnels.
1.3.2 Exposed, Interior Installations: Exposed to view indoors. Examples include finished
occupied spaces and mechanical equipment rooms.
1.3.3 Exposed, Exterior Installations: Exposed to view outdoors or subject to outdoor

locations.
1.3.4 Concealed, Interior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from
physical contact by building occupants. Examples include above ceilings and
chases.
1.3.5 Concealed, Exterior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from
weather conditions and physical contact by building occupants but subject to
outdoor ambient temperatures. Examples include installations within unheated
shelters.
1.4 Submittals:
1.4.1 Product Data:
A. Submit manufacturer's detailed technical product selection data, method of

construction, material data and installation procedures for each principal
component or unit and include certified test reports on required testing. List and
describe features of control system, performances, and operating characteristics
together with any further information pertinent to the adequacy of the
requirement and the system as a whole. Submit test reports for components
requiring third party certification along with the submittal. All products shall bear
the stamp of approval of authority having jurisdiction.
The following information should at least be covered while furnishing the
submittals:
23 05 00

1. Reference number of the specification clause and BOQ.
2. A comparison of the salient points of the equipment/material offered vis-à-
vis specified like capacity, size, model no. Etc.
3. A confirmation that the item offered complies fully with the
specifications, drawings and the application in question. Deviations, if any,
shall be clearly spelt out and reasons shall be given for the changes
proposed.
4. Complete technical literature for the particular item. In case only general
catalogues are available, the particular item/features offered should be
stated clearly on a separate sheet and also marked on the catalogues.
Points not applicable should be struck-off.
5. The Fire test and all other test certificates copy shall be a part of the
submittal where it is applicable.
6. Confirmation that equipment/material proposed can be housed within the
space available.
7. General requirement drawings.
8. Samples, wherever required by the Engineer.
9. Confirmation that the sound levels of the equipments are such that it do not
exceed the sound level requirements of the adjacent spaces.
B. The approval of a submittal shall not absolve the Contractor of their responsibility
to provide equipment's/materials/services conforming to the Specifications, Bill of
Quantities and the application in question. The Contractor shall be responsible
for the supply, installation, testing, commissioning and proper performance of a
complete functional system even though some items may not have been
specifically stated in the contract documents.
C. Waivers for deletion/deviation from the Specification, Tender drawings, Bill of

Quantities etc., must be requested by the Contractor in writing, stating
categorically the change compared to the contract (specified vis-à-vis
proposed). The same shall be considered 'waived' only if written specific
approval is obtained from the Engineer. The approval of a submittal, any implicit
reference or verbal instructions shall not be treated as a waiver. Waivers shall also
be subject to reduction in cost and/or time, conditional or unconditional as
decided by the Engineer.
D. ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1-2010 Compliance: Provide compliance form as per

1.4.2 Shop Drawings:
A. The layouts shown on drawings are to be considered as diagrammatic and it

shall be the Contractor's responsibility to check all dimensions, pipe and duct
locations against Engineer's drawings or if the work is sufficiently advanced, by
actual measurements on site, to ensure the proper matching of mating parts.
The Contractor shall provide, suitable clearances where required.
representation in terms of size, shape, location, quantity, orientation,
manufacturer’s details, equipment model and performance.
B. The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer detailed coordinated shop drawings
showing detailed construction and detailed layout of the unit, distribution
services, its associated components and any other related equipment material
to be installed as described herein. Such drawings shall indicate:
1. All civil works, openings, bases, position of sleeves etc.
23 05 00

2. The physical dimensions of the equipment.
3. The sizes of foundation base wherever required.
4. Location of centre bolts to base.
5. Position of motors, controls, air duct connections etc.
6 Detailed wiring diagram of all electrical systems.
7. Schematic / isometric diagram.
8. Sequence of Operations
9. Any other drawing found necessary or requested by the Engineer for co-
ordination of works.
C. The work described on any shop drawing submitted shall be properly checked
by the Contractor for all clearance, field conditions, maintenance space and
proper coordination. Equipment layout is to be detailed on drawings
showing the exact method of installing and clearly illustrating components to be
used in making all connections.
D. All drawing and layouts shall bear the stamp of approval of authority having
jurisdiction.
Should the Engineer give provisional approval only of an order due to lack of
complete information and should the missing information not eventually meet
with approval, the Engineer will not be held responsible for any delay incurred.
E. For equipment where information from the manufacturers is likely to be delayed,
it is essential that the Contractor places provisionally approved orders at the
earliest possible data so as to ensure approval of orders in complete conformity
with the progress of the works.
F. Submittals and shop drawings shall as far as possible be complementary so that

G. All drawings prepared by the Contractor shall be submitted in the form of three
sets to the Engineer for approval, who in turn, after making his comments will
return two sets of the same to the Contractor for necessary revisions if any. All
Engineer's comments marked shall be addressed by the contractor. On final
incorporation of comments the Contractor shall submit three sets of shop
drawings for the Engineer's final approval. Final approved drawings shall be kept
on site for execution. No work shall be carried out before approval of shop
drawings and equipment has been given by the Engineer.
H. It is the Contractor's responsibility to co-ordinate all Mechanical works to match

with the structure of the building and the proposed arch and interior design of
the building including but limited to grilles, equipment, pipes, light fittings, false
ceiling layout and other services to allow a completely symmetrical and co-
ordinated installation. Contractor shall prepare section as required to
demonstrate all constrains and co-ordinate the same for resolving any conflicts
among the services. Contractor shall ensure that all required access, clearances
and false ceiling heights are achieved as per the requirements are achieved.
I Contractor shall submit builder works drawings based on the shop drawings and
the approval thereof prior to casting of slab and other civil works.
J Contractor shall submit reflected ceiling plan co-coordinating all the elements of
the ceiling and in accordance to the design intent of the ceiling layout for review
and approval.
23 05 00

1.4.3 Samples:
Submit one sample of each of the component along with the submittal. The
Contractor shall submit at no extra cost or charge, samples of materials as
required by the Engineer for his approval
1.4.4 Manufacturers Installation Instructions:

Submit the complete methodology for installation based on the installation
instruction of the manufacturer.
1.4.5 Design Data:

Submit design calculation bearing the stamp of approval of authority having
jurisdiction or certified personal. Results shall include calculation that verify system
pressures, flow rates, piping pressure losses, component flow data, and pipe sizes.
components with all relevant details of installation of the piping and ducting
systems for review and approval prior to installation. Such calculation shall
include for vertical and horizontal pipe/duct support system both for anchorage
and guides. The calculation shall also include systems designs for expansion /
contraction compensation of the piping system.
1.4.6 Test Reports: Submit test report for the tests carried out on the installations.
1.4.7 Maintenance Manual:

Submit bound manual for the system with operating and maintenance
instructions, control circuit diagrams, piping schematics, as built drawings, parts
listing, recommended parts inventory listing, emergency instructions and similar
information. All such submittals shall be as per the requirements of TAB and CxA
All as-built information shall be on REVIT platform with LOD 500 with representation
in terms of size, shape, location, quantity, orientation, manufacturer’s details,
equipment model and performance.
1.4.8 Welding certificates: Submit copies of relevant certification.
1.4.9 A material tracking status report shall be prepared by the Contractor and
submitted every two weeks or earlier as directed by the Engineer. The report shall
indicate the following:
a. Description of the material/equipment.
b. Name of the manufacturer/supplier.
c. Submittals Number.
d. Date of Planned and Actual submission of submittal.
e. Date of approval of submittal.
f. Order number/date and L.C reference, if any.
g. Delivery period and expected arrival date on site.
h. Remarks, if any.
1.5 Quality Assurance:
1.5.1 Steel Support Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to AWS D1.1,
"Structural Welding Code--Steel."
1.5.2 Steel Pipe Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to ASME Boiler
and Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications."
a. Comply with provisions in ASME B31 Series, "Code for Pressure Piping."
b. Certify that each welder has passed AWS qualification tests for welding
23 05 00
1.5.3 Electrical Characteristics for HVAC Equipment: Equipment of higher electrical

characteristics may be furnished provided such proposed equipment is
conduit sizes are appropriately modified. Contractor shall submit compliance
forms for the energy ratings or efficiencies are specified according to ASHRAE
90.1 2010.
1.6 Compliance with Standards and Regulations:
1.6.1 Unless otherwise specified, all equipment is to comply with the relevant
British and American codes of practice as listed below. However, the
latest local regulations shall take prominence over all other regulations.
American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air

ASHRAE
Conditioning Engineers
IHVE The Institute of Heating and Ventilation Engineers, UK
AMCA Air Movement and Control Association, USA
HVCA Heating and Ventilating Contractors Association, UK
BESA The Building Engineering Services Association
DW 144 Specification for sheet metal duct work, UK
DW 172 Kitchen Ventilation System. UK
CIBSE Chartered Institute of Building Services Engineers, UK
AABC Associated Air Balancing Council, USA
NFPA National Fire Protection Association
ASME American Society of Mechanical Engineers, USA
ARI Air Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute, USA
ASTM American Society of Testing Materials, USA
AWS American Welding Society, USA
HI Hydraulic Institute, USA
ANSI American National Standards Institute
1.7 Workmanship and materials:
1.7.1 The workmen employed must be accustomed to the highest class of air-
conditioning installation.
23 05 00

1.7.2 The installations / workmanship accustomed throughout shall be of the best
quality materials installed by skilled workmen under competent supervision and
left in good working order on completion to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
1.8 Delivery Storage and Handling:
1.8.1 Deliver pipes and tubes with factory-applied end caps. Maintain end caps
1.8.2 All materials and equipment must be stored and protected properly so as to
prevent damage, corrosion, deterioration or dirt penetration.
1.8.3 Store plastic pipes protected from direct sunlight to prevent from sagging and
bending.
1.8.4 All storage of material shall be classified as flammable and non flammable
and they shall be stored as recommended by the manufacturer. However
the site shall not be used for any storage purpose except the quantity
that is required for the next 2 weeks of consumption and this shall be
approved by the consultant.
1.8.5 All equipment and materials shall be brand new, of a quality

accepted by the Engineer and presenting no dent, damage or breakage
during transportation or installation.
1.8.6 All metal parts shall be protected on site from rust, corrosion and dirt by
properly storing, packing and covering. All rusted parts of metal, subject
to the Engineer's approval, shall be cleaned of corrosion products and
given two coats of anti-rust paint before installation.
1.8.7 No material shall be stored at the site store without inspection and
acceptance from the consultant. Materials or equipments not pertaining to
the subject site shall not be permitted into this site.
1.9 Coordination:
1.9.1 Arrange for pipe spaces, chases, slots, and openings in building structure during
progress of construction, to allow for HVAC installations.
1.9.2 Coordinate installation of required supporting devices and set sleeves in poured-
in-place concrete and other structural components as they are constructed.
1.9.3 Coordinate requirements for access panels and doors for HVAC items requiring
access that are concealed behind finished surfaces. Access panels and doors
are specified in the relevant sections.
1.9.4 The Contractor shall prepare co-ordinated drawing taking into account all
the services, structure and false ceiling requirements. Such drawings shall be
prepared on Revit platform with LOD 500.
23 05 00

PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 Pipe and pipe fittings
2.1.1 Steel Pipe and Fittings

2.1.1.1 Steel Pipes: This specification shall be applicable for black mild steel pipe work
conveying water and operating up to 99 centigrade temperature and minimum
16 bars (gauge) or 1.5 times operating pressure whichever is greater. Pipes shall
be of: ASTM A 53, Grade B, Seamless. For Grooved Joint Pipes ends may
conform to ANSI/AWWA C-606.
2.1.1.2 Cast-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.4; Classes 125 and 250 wall thickness to
match adjoining pipe.
2.1.1.3 Malleable-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.3, Classes 150 and 300 wall thickness
to match adjoining pipe. Jointing material to be PTFE tape on sizes 6mm to 32mm
or foliac white jointing paste with hemp on all sizes.
2.1.1.4 Malleable-Iron Unions: ASME B16.39; Classes 150, 250, and 300.
2.1.1.5 Cast-Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.1, Classes 25, 125, and 250;
raised ground face, and bolt holes spot faced.
2.1.1.6 Wrought-Steel Fittings: ASTM A 234/A 234M, wall thickness to match adjoining
pipe.
2.1.1.7 Wrought Cast- and Forged-Steel Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.5,
including bolts, nuts, and gaskets of the following material group, end
connections, and facings:
Material Group: 1.1.

End Connections: Butt welding.
Facings: Raised face.
2.1.1.8 Grooved Mechanical-Joint Fittings and Couplings:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide
a. Anvil International, Inc.

b. Victaulic Company of America.
2. Joint Fittings: ASTM A 536, Grade 65-45-12 ductile iron; ASTM A 47/A 47M,
Grade 32510 malleable iron; ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type F, E, or S, Grade B
fabricated steel; or ASTM A 106, Grade B steel fittings with grooves or
shoulders constructed to accept grooved-end couplings; with nuts, bolts,
locking pin, locking toggle, or lugs to secure grooved pipe and fittings.
3. Couplings: Ductile- or malleable-iron housing and synthetic rubber gasket of
central cavity pressure-responsive design; with nuts, bolts, locking pin, locking
toggle, or lugs to secure grooved pipe and fittings.
2.1.1.9 Steel Pressure-Seal Fittings:

Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by
one of the following ‘Approved Equal’.
a. Anvil International, Inc.
b. Victaulic Company of America.
23 05 00

Housing: Steel.
O-Rings and Pipe Stop: EPDM.
Tools: Manufacturer's special tool.
Minimum 300-psig (2070-kPa) working-pressure rating at 230 deg F (110 deg C).
2.1.1.10 Steel Pipe Nipples: ASTM A 733, made of same materials and wall thicknesses as
pipe in which they are installed.
2.2 Copper pipe work and fittings

This specification shall be applicable for light gauge copper pipe work conveying
water and operating up to conditions given in the following tables:
Using Compression Joints:
Max. Pipe Size mm

Temp. 15 22 28 35 42 54 67 76 108 133 15
°C Maximum working pressure bars (gauge)
40 14 14 14 12 12 12 10 10 10 9 9
70 10 10 10 9 9 9 7 7 7 6 6
100 7 7 7 6 6 6 5 5 5 4.5 4.5
2.2.1 Tube
Copper tube for installations above ground to be in accordance with BS 2871
Part 1 Table X. Copper tube for installation below ground to be in accordance
with BS 2871 Part 1 Table Y.
Pipes buried in concrete or screed to be with factory applied PVC coating for
protection against corrosive soil conditions.
2.2.2 Fittings
Fittings shall be capillary brazed type for all internal copper piping.
Compression fittings shall be used only for piping exposed to ambient at roof
level.
2.2.3 Flanges
To be bi-metal type comprising a mild steel flange with a completely separate
non-ferrous insert.
Flanges to be to BS 4504 Part 2 1974 Table 16/23 (pressure up to 16 bar).
Inserts to be either 85/15 brass or gunmetal depending on the potential for de-
zincification.
2.2.4 Flanged Joints

Flanges to be jointed with 1.6mm thick Klingerite graphite finish inside bolt circle
gasket with black hexagon bolts, nuts and washers. Bolts for BS 4504 to be BSM to
BS 4190:1967 Grade 4.6 with a tensile strength of 394 N/sq.mm.
2.2.5 Joints to Equipment

Where jointing to specified equipment varies from that given above the
appropriate mating connections are to be provided.
2.3 Valves and strainers:
2.3.1 Valves:
23 05 00

1. All valves, strainers shall be of kite marked and WRAS approved and suitable
for maximum working pressure and temperature of the system.
2. The valves shall be of gunmetal construction for sizes up to and including
50mm. The valves of cast iron construction for sizes 65mm and above are
acceptable for chilled water and fire water services. The valves for cold
water, hot water and sweet water services shall be of gunmetal
construction for all sizes.
3. The valves shall be smooth internal surface throughout, clean and free from
scale and flaws.
4. Holes in covers or in gates for screwed portions of spindles shall have full
threads of a length not less than the diameter of the spindle over the
threads.
5. Gland rings shall be machined to provide a running fit between the spindle
and the stuffing box.
6. Stuffing boxes shall be suitably packed or fitted with Ò' rings alternatively.
7. Valves of sizes unto and including 50mm diameter shall be with screwed
connections and of sizes 65mm and above shall be with flanged
connections to BS 4504 minimum PN 16 rating.
2.3.2 The Valves for Chilled Water Services shall be kite marked, WRAS approved and
as listed under:
1. Isolating valves for sizes up to and including 50mm shall be dezincification
resistant copper alloy construction, blow-out proof stem, PTFE seats, double
Ò' - ring and PTFE stem seals, full bore, steel lever with plastic grip, internally
threaded ends to BS21 taper, with extension stem to accommodate
thermal insulation thickness, suitable for minimum 16 bar of ball type.
2. Isolating valves for sizes above 65mm shall be butterfly type, cast iron
semi-lugged wafer pattern with long neck for insulation, rubber liner bonded
to the body to give tight shut off and long service life, two plain PTFE lined
steel bearings for upper and lower shafts for effective stem sealing,
aluminium bronze disc pins, stainless steel shaft, lever operated; suitable for
operation of minimum 16 bar.
3. Regulating valves for sizes up to and including 50mm shall be bronze oblique
valves with double regulating features, rising stem, screwed bonnet, metal
to metal seat, regulating disc, double regulating devise, BS21 taper threads
suitable for minimum 16 bar as per BS 5154.
4. Regulating valves for sizes above 65mm shall be cast iron oblique valves with
double regulating features, outside screw, rising stem, copper alloy trim,
flanges to BS:4504, fitted with regulating disc, double regulating devise and
indicator suitable for minimum 16 bar as per BS 5152.
5. Non-return valves of sizes up to and including 50mm shall be horizontal swing
pattern, screwed cover, metal to metal seat, BS21 taper thread, bronze
construction, suitable for operation at 16 bar as per BS 5154. The non return
valves shall be suitable for mounting in vertical or horizontal positions, with
minimum PN 16 rating.
6. Non return valves of sizes above 65mm shall be horizontal swing pattern,
bolted cover, flanged to BS:4504 PN16, Copper alloy trim, suitable for
mounting in horizontal and vertical positions, cast iron body, suitable for
operation at minimum 16 bar.
7. Drain cocks shall be gunmetal gland cocks with hose union, male parallel
thread (BS 2779) x hose union fitted with iron lever, suitable for minimum 16
bar and sizes of 19mm to 25mm
8. Test/Gauge cocks shall be gunmetal round barrel, lever handle in line with
body when open, straight union outlet, sizes 19mm, suitable for minimum
working pressure 16 bar.
23 05 00

9. Vents shall be automatic type with aluminium bronze body and dome,
nickel alloy valve and seating, stainless steel spindle and float suitable for
minimum 16 bar. Sizes shall be 15mm or as required. Each vent shall be
controlled by lock shield valve.
10. The commissioning valve sets for sizes up to and including 50mm shall
comprise metering station and double regulating valve as follows:
11. Bronze metering station with valve controlled test points, BS 21 taper threads,
suitable for minimum 16 bar.
12. Bronze oblique valve with double regulating features, rising stem, screwed
bonnet, metal to metal seat and regulating disk double regulating device,
BS 21 taper threads, suitable for minimum 16 bar.
13. The commissioning valve sets for sizes above 65mm shall comprise metering
station and double regulating valve as follows:
14. Cast iron metering station with valve controlled test points, outside diameter
locating metering station centrally on BS 4504 flange bolting, complete with
gaskets, flange bolts, nuts and extensions as required, suitable for minimum
PN16.
15. Cast iron oblique valve with double regulating features, outside screw, rising
stem, copper alloy trim, flanges to BS 4504, fitted with regulating disc; double
regulating device and indicator, suitable for minimum 16 bar to BS 5152.
2.3.3 Strainers:
1. The strainers of sizes up to and including 50mm shall be bronze construction,
Y-type with screwed cap, ends threaded internal to BS21, stainless steel
screen with 0.75mm diameter holes (50 per square centimeter) suitable for
minimum 16 bar working pressure.
2. The strainers of sizes above 65mm except for cold water service shall be cast
iron body and cover, Y-type, with bolted cover, flanged to BS:4504, stainless
steel screen with 1.6mm diameter holes (17 per square centimeter) suitable
for minimum16 bar.
3. The strainers for cold water service shall be of bronze construction and
flanged type. The gaskets for strainers shall be asbestos free type. All strainers
shall be kite marked and WRAS approved.
2.4 Unions:
A. Unions are required on pipe sizes 50 mm. and under. Unions shall be ground
taper joint type, suitable for system temperature and 1.5 times of system
working pressure or minimum PN 16 whichever is higher.
B. Direct connection between pipes of dissimilar materials must be avoided to

minimize chances of galvanic corrosion. Dielectric unions should be used for
connection between steel and copper pipes.
2.4.1 Dielectric fittings:
A. Description: Combination fitting of copper alloy and ferrous materials with

threaded, solder- joint, plain, or weld-neck end connections that match piping
system materials.
B. Insulating Material: Suitable for system fluid, pressure, and temperature.
C. Dielectric Unions: Factory-fabricated, union assembly, for 25.3MPa-or

30.4MPa minimum working pressure at 180 deg F. Minimum 400 volts
23 05 00

dielectric resistance, insulated against galvanic corrosion, threaded ends, O-
ring.
D. Dielectric Flanges: Factory-fabricated, companion-flange assembly, for

25.3MPa-or 30.4MPa minimum working pressure as required to suit system
pressures.
E. Dielectric-Flange Kits: Companion-flange assembly for field assembly. Include

flanges, full- face- or ring-type neoprene or phenolic gasket, phenolic or
polyethylene bolt sleeves, phenolic washers, and steel backing washers.
Separate companion flanges and steel bolts and nuts shall have 25.3MPa-
or 30.4MPa minimum working pressure where required to suit system pressures.
F. Dielectric Couplings: Galvanized-steel coupling with inert and non-corrosive,

thermoplastic lining; threaded ends; and 30.4MPa minimum working pressure at
108 deg C.
G. Dielectric Nipples: Electroplated steel nipple with inert and non-corrosive,

thermoplastic lining; plain, threaded, or grooved ends; and 30.4MPa minimum
working pressure at 108 deg C.
2.5. Pre Insulated Buried Chilled Water Piping:
2.5.1. This section Includes material description and application schedule for the
underground pre-insulated piping system.
2.5.2. The contractor shall be required to prepare a comprehensive submittal for

the underground pipe work system including materials, construction,
jointing, bedding and backfill details plus applicable standards all as per the
manufacturer’s instructions.
2.5.3. Chilled water pipe: Carbon Steel conforming to ASTM A53 Grade B with
beveled ends for welding joints or with grooved ends for mechanical
coupling joints, and the following schedule for wall thicknesses:
a. Pipe sizes up to 250mm: Seamless with Schedule 40 wall thickness.

b. Pipe sizes 250mm upto 600mm: Seamless, Standard Weight, with wall
thickness (9.5mm).
c. Pipe sizes 650mm upto 800mm: SAW (Longitudinally welded), Standard
Weight, with
wall thickness (9.5mm).
d. Pipe sizes 900mm & larger: SAW (Longitudinally welded), Extra Strong
Weight, with wall thickness (12.7mm).
2.5.4. Prior to insulation all the external surface of core pipes & fittings shall be
grit blasted to SA 65mm near white metal finish. Then, clean external surface
of core pipes & fittings shall be coated by airless spray of self-priming
Polyamine/Polyamide Epoxy coating to a total DFT of 150 microns minimum
50mm shall be kept bare (uncoated) from both pipe ends for joint surface.
2.5.5. Thermal Insulation: Void free, rigid cellular, 100% CFC-free polyurethane
foam, factory injected between core pipe and outer casing/protective
jacket, having a density of 48 - 80 Kg/m³ (3.0–5.0 lbs./ft³) nominal, and
thermal conductivity coefficient (λ) of 0.030 W/(m•K) or (0.214
BTU•in/hr•ft²•°F) max. at a mean temperature of 50 °C (122 °F), as per ASTM
23 05 00

C518 specifications, with typical operating temperatures between -196 °C to
+150 °C.
2.5.6. Nominal insulation thicknesses shall be as follows:

Pipe sizes upto 900 – 50mm Thick Insulation
Pipe sizes 900mm & larger. – 75mm Thick Insulation
2.5.7. Outer Casing/Protective Jacket:
A. For pipe sizes Up to 1050mm Outer casing/protective jacket shall be made

of extruded High-Density Polyethylene (HDPE) pipes having a density of 950
Kg/m³, according to ASTM D1248. HDPE material is UV resistant. Minimum
wall thickness shall be according to the following table, and to be
confirmed by manufacturer:
B. For pipe size 1050mm & above: Outer casing / protective jacket shall be
made of multi- directional tension filament-wound fiberglass reinforced
polyester (FRP) resin with a nominal wall thickness of 7mm.
C. All fittings shall be pre-insulated black steel, long radius & butt-welding type,
with wall thicknesses similar to those of the core steel pipe, conforming to
ASTM A234 WPB and dimensions according to ANSI/ASME B16.9, with 300
mm long Beveled/Grooved end steel pipe extension factory welded to
each end. All fabrication welds shall be NDT tested
Nominal Minimum
Minimum wall
outside Nominal outside wall
thickness,
diameter, D diameter, D mm thickness,
emin. mm
mm emin. mm
90 2.2 6.3
400
110 2.5 7.0
450
125 2.5 7.8
500
140 3.0 8.8
560
160 3.0 9.8
630
180 3.0 11.1
710
200 3.2 12.5
800
225 3.5 12.9
900
250 3.9 13.3
1000
280 4.4 13.8
1100
315 4.9 14.6
1200
355 5.6
D. Puddle flanges shall be pre-insulated & prefabricated with 1 meter long

of carrier pipe, and steel plate welded in the middle, protruding 100mm
beyond the casing jacket.
E. Field joint insulation shall consist of Polyurethane foam chemical poured in a

prefabricated G.I. metal sheet mold 0 . 5 m m (26 gauge thickness)
fixed around the joint. Then, a heat shrinkable sleeve with a closure patch
is applied and heat shrunk over the insulation to finish the joint. After finishing
the joint, two strips of heat shrinkable sleeve & closure patch 200mm wide
each, shall be applied to overlap both ends to ensure proper seal of the
joint.
23 05 00

F. Polyurethane foam chemicals shall be stored in closed containers inside an
air conditioned storing area away from the sun light exposure, at
an ambient temperature between 20° - 25° C.
G. Heat Shrinkable Sleeve & closure patch materials shall be kept away from
the sun light exposure. It is recommended to keep in the same storing area
of the polyurethane chemicals.
H. Contractor’s technicians carrying out joint insulation at site shall be trained

at site or at the manufacturer’s facilities. Contractor’s technicians have to
be certified by the manufacturer, certificates of training should be
provided.
2.6 Above Ground FRP Pipes
Piping Specification
Service Fluid Sea Water with 75000 PPM TDS
Class of Hazard Non Hazardous
Service Condition Above Ground
Operating Temperature 45 Deg C
pH Value 7.5 – 8.5
Operating Pressure 3 Bard
Piping AWWA M45, DIN 16965, BS 7159, BS
6464
Fittings AWWA M45, DIN 16966, BS 7159, BS
6464
Design Temperature 45 Deg C
Design Pressure 6 Barg
Drilling Standard ANSI CLASS B16.5 150#
Base Material Vinyl Lined FRP
Resin Brand Derakane 411 or Equivalent
Gasket EPDM, Neoprene
Fasteners SS 304
Pipe Ends Both Ends Plain Ends
Fitting Ends Both Ends Plain Ends
Flange Full Face Flat End
Reference QA/QC Standard AWWA C950, DIN 16966, BS 7159,
BS 6464
Test Pressure 7.8 Barg
Shop Joint Butt Joint
Field Joint Butt Joint/ Flange Joint
Field Pressure Test At Every 40 meter Maximum
Material Test Certificate to be Provided by Manufacturer
Final Resin Coat shall include UV Stabilizator
2.7 Fabrication Welding:
2.7.1. All welding of piping in fabrication process shall be performed in

accordance with the latest edition of the Code for Pressure Piping
ANSI/ASME B31.1 and all addenda.
23 05 00

2.7.2. All welders performing under these specifications shall have been fully
qualified in accordance with the test requirements of Section IX of the
ASME Boiler Code. Evidence of each welder’s certificate of qualification
shall be proven. Welding procedures for each type of weld joint to be used
shall be provided.
2.7.3. Piping Stress Analysis: The complete underground pre-insulated piping

system shall be computer analyzed by the system’s manufacturer to
determine stresses, axial forces and anticipated thermal movement on the
service pipe.
2.7.4. Leak detection system shall be an integral part of the underground

pre-insulated piping system, utilizing two monitoring wires embedded in the
foam insulation, connected to an individual line monitoring unit. Leak
detection system shall be provided by the pre-insulated piping system
manufacturer with a complete interface with the BMS, based on the final
approved piping network layout.
2.8 Supports, Hangers, Anchors and Seals:

2.8.1 The supports shall be purpose made type of materials suitable for the pipe
material to avoid any bimetal / galvanic corrosion.
a. The supports for copper pipe work up to 54mm sizes shall be two pieces
copper spacing clips. Alternatively cast brass wall plate brackets shall be
used.
b. The supports for copper pipe work for sizes above 54mm shall be cast brass
single rings with suitable rod.
c. The supports for steel pipe work shall be single or double bossed clamps zinc
plated with noise reducing purpose made rubber lining.
d. The supports for insulated steel pipe work shall be single bossed clamps, zinc
plated with closed cells polyurethane hard foam wrapped in aluminium foil
overlapped joint insulation of suitable thickness.
e. The supports for plastic pipe works shall be galvanized steel holder bats of
purpose made type.
2.8.2 All supports and hangers for steel piping shall be ferrous. Supports for
copper pipes shall be non-ferrous and chromium plated, wherever
specified. Brackets or supports shall be set out so that they do not obstruct
the access to valves, flanges or other fittings requiring maintenance.
2.8.3 All pipe work shall be supported by means of approved clips or hangers
at centers as detailed. In the event of two or more pipes being carried by
a single support, the spacing shall be of a shorter interval.
2.8.4 All vertical drops shall be supported so as to prevent sagging or swinging.

Unless otherwise indicated.
2.8.5 Piping of all equipment and control valves shall be supported to prevent
strains or distortions in the connected equipment, valves and control
valves. Piping shall be supported to allow for removal of equipment,
valves and accessories with a minimum of dismantling and without
requiring additional supports after these items are removed.
23 05 00

2.8.6 All channels, angles, plates, clamps etc., necessary for fastening of hangers
shall be furnished by the Contractor. All hangers shall be properly sized
for the pipe to be supported. Oversized hangers shall not be permitted.
Details Including Calculation of hangers and supports to be used by the
Contractor shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval before
fitting. All hangers shall be provided with lock-nuts and have provision for
vertical adjustment of pipes.
2.8.7 Parallel groups of pipes shall be supported by trapeze type hangers of steel
construction. Individual horizontal piping shall be supported by hangers
consisting of malleable split rings with malleable iron sockets or steel clevis
type hangers or roller hangers where specified.
2.8.8 Pipe standard with base flange and adjustable type yokes shall be used
for pipes supported from the floor. Vertical piping shall have heavy
wrought iron or steel clamps securely bolted on the piping with the end
extension bearings on the building construction.
2.8.9 Piping shall be anchored where required to localize expansion or to prevent

undue strain on piping and branches. Anchors shall be entirely separate
from hangers and shall be heavy forged or welded construction of
approved design.
2.8.10 Hangers and supports for cold piping shall have high density rubber inserts
of approved make or high density insulation capable of
withstanding the compression and allowing the hanger to support the pipe
without any metal to metal contact.
2.8.11 All pipe supports, hangers and anchors, etc., are to be painted with two
coats of an approved rust preventive paint, preferably zinc rich primer and
two coats of enamel paint of grey color or as approved by the Engineer.
2.8.12 Fire seal or fire stops shall be provided wherever services pipes and cable runs
penetrate through fire rated walls and floors.
2.8.13 In case of plastic pipes, cables, the fire stops shall be based on specially treated
graphite which expands when exposed from heat to fire to form a fire resistive
barrier. The resistance produced by the fire stop barrier shall be same as that of
fire rated wall and floor. In case of metallic pipes, mineral fiber as fire seal and
fire rated silicone sealant as smoke sealant shall be used.
2.8.14 Manufacturer’s instructions shall be strictly followed for the application.
2.9 Pipe Sleeves:
2.9.1 All pipe openings through walls, partitions and slabs shall have sleeves having an
internal diameter at least 25 mm. larger than the outside diameter of the pipe or
of the insulation for insulated services. All the building expansion joints shall also
be provided with pipe sleeves.
2.9.2 The pipe with insulation shall be carried through the walls, floor or roof slab and
pipe sleeves around them shall be projected minimum 50 mm. on either sides of
the wall, floor and roof slab.
23 05 00

2.9.3 Sleeves shall be of Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40,
galvanized, plain ends.
2.10 Flashing Sleeves:
2.10.1 Flashing sleeves shall be provided where pipes pass through water proof
membranes. Flashing sleeves details shall be submitted to the Engineer for
approval, but generally, they shall be provided with an integral flange set into
the membrane. The associated pipes shall have flange and shield which shall
extend beyond the insert and be sealed with approved mastic.
2.11 Flow measurement devices:
2.11.1 To be provided as shown on the drawings or as required in accordance with

the requirement to commission the water circuits and also to measure the flow
from time to time when the system is in beneficial use.
a. Flow measurement devices to be calibrated orifices complete with pressure

measurement tappings suitable for connecting an instrument to measure
differential pressure. Differential pressure is then related to flow rate using
charts provided by the manufacturer. In addition to the pressure
measurement tappings, standard size of testing, plug inserts shall also be
provided on either side of orifice to measure the pressure through the
pressure gauge.
b. Orifice devices to be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's
recommendations regarding proximity to valves and other fittings so as not
to compromise the accuracy of the device.
c. The orifice device up to and including 50mm size shall be bronze metering
stations, BS21 taper threads, fitted with valve controlled test points suitable
for 16 bar.
The orifice device above 65mm size shall be cast iron metering stations,
outside diameter locating metering station centrally on BS 4504 flange
bolting, complete with gaskets, nuts, bolts extensions and valve controlled
test points suitable for 16 bar.
d. The Contractor is to allow for providing a portable measuring instrument for
each type of flow measurement device installed. The instrument shall be
complete with all necessary ancillary fittings, connectors, hoses, charts, etc.
and to remain on site and become the property of the Employer.
2.12 Temperature and pressure indication:
2.12.1 Dial pressure gauges with a range not greater than twice the normal working
pressure to be fitted at each pump to indicate suction and delivery pressure.
Pressure gauges to be Bourden type not less than 100mm dial.
2.12.2 Dial type temperature gauges to be fitted to indicate the flow and return
temperatures of the chilled water circuits in the pump room. Thermometers to
be direct mounted with brass or steel pockets in a position convenient for easy
reading. Thermometers to be mercury in steel type not less than 100mm dial.
2.12.3 In addition to the above, tapings with plugs with plugs to be fitted adjacent to
every immersion temperature sensor and each side of a heat transfer
equipment and control valve to receive portable instrument probes.
23 05 00

2.12.4 Additional instrumentation is specified separately under particular products
specifications
2.12.5 Calibration of all instruments to be agreed with the Engineer prior to ordering.
2.13 Chilled Water Treatment:
2.13.1 Water treatment shall be provided to prevent corrosion, fungal growth,

scaling and discoloration.
2.13.2 An automatic chemical dosing pot complete with all accessories shall be
fitted on the chilled water circuit to add corrosion inhibitor chemicals to the
system at the time of commissioning and periodically during operation. The
pot shall be fabricated out of M.S. sheet suitable for minimum 250 psig
working pressure.
2.13.3 The automatic chemical dosing pot shall be complete with chemical
feed valve, non-return valve, drain valve, water-in and out valves, air
cock, controls and accessories The Contractor shall add the first charge of
chemical to the system and supply additional chemical adequate, for the
operation during Warranty period. Testing chemicals/instruments shall be
included in the scope of supply.
2.13.4 The automatic chemical dosing pot and all connected pipes and fittings
shall be insulated in the same manner as the chilled water pipes.
2.13.5 The pre-commissioning cleaning shall be carried out in accordance with the
following specifications and in compliance with the Building Services
Research and Information Association (BSRIA) Application Guide 8/91.
2.13.6 The pre-commission cleaning process is designed to remove light surface

rust, mill scale and small debris such as cement splashes, from the internal
surfaces that may have entered the system during the course of
construction.
2.14 Preparation for chilled water system flushing and chemical treatment:
2.14.1 Before starting the chilled water system flushing and chemical cleaning
process the contractor shall ensure the following preparations are carried
out:
2.14.2 The system is pressure tested, complete circulation proved, flushed in the
normally accepted manner and left full with clean fresh water after venting
out all entrained air from the system.
2.14.3 Provision made to completely fill the system with fresh mains water in four
hours.
2.14.4 Provision made for a suitable effluent disposal point capable of

receiving at least double the system volume with all drain valves fully open.
2.14.5 The flushing / chemical treatment system circulating pumps tested and
being operational. The success of the pre- commission process depends on
obtaining a minimum mean flushing velocity of 1.85 meters/sec.
23 05 00

2.14.6 Provision of 19mm BSP drains at all low areas which cannot be drained using
the main drains.
2.14.7 Bypassing all items such as fine in-line filters, orifice plates and certain
designs of control valves.
2.14.8 Provision of cross connection of the same size as the pipe work between
flow and return in all “dead leg” terminal points and for bypassing the AHU‟s
and FCU‟s.
2.14.9 The entire chilled water system flushing and chemical treatment shall be
carried out by an approved water treatment specialist who will have the
job done with proper submittals, method statements, and have the water
quality tested and certified by the third party testing laboratory upon
completion of the works.
2.15 Vacuum Degassers
2.15.1 Vacuum Degassers shall be a product of an ISO9001 and ISO14001 certified

manufacturer with at least 15 year’s experience in producing Vacuum
Degassers.
2.15.2 The Vacuum degasser shall be able to condition the water to make it highly
absorptive at all points in the system by removing not only free but also micro
bubble and dissolved gasses. One unit shall be capable to treat at minimum
300m³ water within 3 weeks to an under saturated level, whereby no gasses
are left in the water.
2.15.3 The Vacuum Degasser shall be connected in side stream fashion using 2 x ¾”
flexible connections for easy installation. The unit shall be fully self-circulating.
2.15.4 The Vacuum Degasser shall include a smart switch functionality, which
automatically knows when the vacuum degasser can go in stand-by.
2.15.5 The Vacuum Degasser shall include a water flow meter and a system
pressure sensor.
2.15.6 The Vacuum Degasser shall have a valve, which isolates the vessel volume
from the main system and shall have a pump to reduce the pressure of a
sample of circulating water to below atmospheric. The pump shall run
continuously during operation to reduce the wearing of the pump.
2.15.7 The Vacuum Degasser shall automatically switch off when no gasses are
detected anymore in the system to save electricity.
2.15.8 Gasses are removed through an air release valve which is guaranteed leak
free.
2.15.9 The noise level during operation is not more than 57 dB(A) for a 6 Bar unit and
not more than 60 dB (A) for a 10 Bar and 16 Bar unit.
2.15.10 The treatment of fluid will be at minimum 1000 liter per hour.
2.15.11 A protecting cover shall be included for safety and security reasons.
23 05 00

2.15.12 The display shall show information regarding: status, time, system
temperature and pressure while in operation.
2.15.13 The pump shall have a running dry protection to prevent pump damaging in
case no water flow through.
2.15.14 Following parameters shall be adjustable: starting and blocking times;

required, refill and maximum pressure; refill alarms (how long and how
much).
2.15.15 The Vacuum Degasser shall be capable to store following data: running
times; degassing events; refill events; fault messages.
2.15.16 The Pressure Differential Deaerator shall be electronically controlled and

suitable for connection to a BMS system via volt free contacts.
2.15.17 The Deaerator shall be controlled by a 7 day timer to allow optimization of
running times.
2.15.18 The initial system fill and also the automatic refill shall be done with already
degassed water.
2.15.19 The Vacuum Degasser shall have a product warranty of at minimum 2 years
and the automatic air vent a product warranty of at minimum 20 years.
2.16 Pressure Independent Control Valves (PICVs)
Pressure independent control valves shall be used on each FCU, AHU/ FAHU and
chillers circuit. No control valves are to be mounted on the main, raisers or branches.
All material is to be suitable for minimum PN25.
Inserts shall not to be mounted during flushing of the system, where either a by-pass
or blind caps are required.
2.16.1 Pressure Independent Control Valves 15-40mm; shall the valve meet the specified
flow within either +/- 10 % or +/- 5% of the maximum insert flow rate. Valve shall have
100% authority and shall be provided with spring loaded rolling diaphragm for true
pressure independent function within prescribed differential pressure range. Valves
shall contain replaceable, visible insert that are externally field adjustable to no less
than 41 different settings. The actual setting and thereby flow rate needs to be
available from the outside by looking at the insert itself. The relations between the
setting and the flow rate shall be available in the supplier’s literature. The insert (flow
regulation unit) shall be available in at least three pressure ranges, ranging between
16-600 kPaD. Larger ranges then mentioned is accepted, but not lower ranges. The
specific range is selected based upon the system requirements.
Valves combining electronic, dynamic balancing, modulating, 2-way, pressure

independent control provided with pressure/ temperature plugs; are accepted in
principle, when above criteria’s is fulfilled.
A. Valve Actuator
1. Valve actuator housing shall be rated to at least IP54.
2. Actuator shall be driven by a 24V AC/DC power supply, and shall accept
0(2)-10V DC modulating control signal.
3. Feedback signal 0(2)-10V DC to the control system shall be standard.
4. Actuator shall use full span and provide full authority.
23 05 00

5. Manual override shall be possible through actuator adaptor.
6. Actuator shall have visible indication of stroke position.
B. Valve Housing
1. Valve housing shall consist of forged brass ASTM CuZn40Pb2, rated at no less
than 2500 KPa static pressure at +120ºC.
2. Pressure/ temperature test plugs for verifying accuracy of flow performance
shall be available for all valve sizes.
C. Flow Regulation Unit

1. Flow regulation unit shall consist of glass-reinforced PSU/POM/PPS with an
EPDM diaphragm (20mm insert) or a hydrogenated acrylonitrile-butadiene-
rubber (40mm insert).
2. Flow regulation unit shall be readily accessible, for change-out or
maintenance.
3. Flow regulation unit shall be externally adjustable to 1 to 41 different flow
rates; minimum range shall be capable of being activated by minimum 16
Kpa operation ranges; shall be capable of controlling the flow within +/-10%
of rated flow or +/-5% of maximum flow.
flow within either +/- 5 % or +/- 2% of the maximum flow rate. Valve should have
100% authority and shall be provided with spring loaded rolling diaphragm for true
pressure independent function within prescribed differential pressure range. Each
valve shall have an adjustable maximum flow rate setting to enable flow limitation
and balancing to the coils. It shall be externally field adjustable to no less than 51
different settings. The actual setting and thereby flow rate needs to be available
from the outside by looking at the DIP switch settings itself. The relations between the
setting and the flow rate shall be available in the supplier’s literature. The valve shall
be available between 32-600 kPaD pressure ranges. Larger ranges then mentioned
is accepted, but not lower ranges. The specific range is selected based upon the
system requirements.
The actuator shall be microprocessor based with a self-calibrating feature. The
actuator shall be capable of providing 4-20mA or 2-10 V DC feedback signal to the
control system. External LED read-out of current valve position and maximum valve
position setting shall be available.

independent control provided with double union end connection and pressure/
temperature plugs; are accepted in principle, when above criteria’s is fulfilled.
A. Valve Actuator
1. Valve actuator housing shall be rated to at least IP54.
2. Actuator shall be driven by a 24V AC / 30V DC actuator, and shall accept
2-10V DC, 4-20mA, 3-point floating or pulse width modulating electric signal
and shall include resistor to facilitate any of these signals.
3. Actuator shall be capable of proving 4-20 mA or 2-10V DC feedback signal
to the control system.
4. Optional fail safe system to power valve to either open or closed position
from any position in case of these signals.
5. External LED read-out of current valve position and maximum valve position
setting shall be available.
23 05 00

B. Valve Housing
than 2500 KPa static pressure and +120ºC.
2. Valve housing shall be double union end construction with a range of pipe
connections available for the appropriate pipe size.
3. Pressure/ temperature test plugs for verifying accuracy of flow performance
shall be available for all valve sizes.

1. Flow regulation unit shall consist of stainless steel and hydrogenated
acrylonitrile-butadiene-rubber and shall be capable of controlling flow
within greatest of either +/-5% of rated flow rate or +/-2% of maximum
flowrate.
2. Flow regulation unit shall be accessible, for change-out or maintenance.
flow within either +/- 5 % or +/- 2% of the maximum flow rate. Valve shall have 100%
authority and shall be provided with spring loaded rolling diaphragm for true
pressure independent function within prescribed differential pressure range. Each
valve shall have an adjustable maximum flow rate setting to enable flow limitation
and balancing to the coils. It should be externally field adjustable to no less than 51
different settings. The actual setting and thereby flow rate needs to be available
from the outside setting through programming buttons on the actuator. The
standard flow settings range shall be available in the supplier’s literature. The valve
shall be available between 35-600 kPaD pressure differential ranges. Larger ranges
then mentioned is accepted, but not lower ranges. The specific range is selected
based upon the system requirements.
The actuator shall be microprocessor based with a self-calibrating feature. The

actuator shall be capable of providing 4-20mA, 0-10 V DC or 2-10 V DC feedback
signal to the control system. External display of current valve flow, maximum valve
flow, input signal, feedback signal and operational direction shall be standard.

independent control valve of the wafer style for fitting between flanges, provided
with pressure/ temperature plugs; are accepted in principle, when above criteria’s
is fulfilled.
A. Valve Actuator
1. Valve actuator housing shall be rated to IP54.
2. Actuator shall be driven by a 24V AC / DC power supply, and shall accept
0-10V DC, 0-20mA, 4-20mA, 2-position or 3-point floating electric input signal.
3. Actuator shall be capable of proving 4-20 mA, 0-10V DV or 2-10V DC
feedback signal to the control system.
4. Optional fail safe system to power valve to either open or closed position
from any position in case of power failure shall be available.
5. Actuator shall include display and buttons for external programming of all
settings.
6. External display of current valve flow, maximum valve flow, input signal,
feedback signal and operational direction shall be standard.
B. Valve Housing
1. Valve housing shall be constructed of ductile iron ASTM A536-65T, Class 60-
45-18 rated at no less than 4000 KPa static pressure and +120ºC.
2. Valve housing shall be permanently marked to show direction of flow.
23 05 00

3. Valve housing shall be with universal flange, which helps for installation
between the mating flanges, without using reducers.
4. Dual Pressure/ temperature test plugs for verifying accuracy of flow
performance shall be available for all valve sizes.
5. Identification tags shall be available for all valves; tags shall be indelibly
marked with part number, production date and pressure differential range.
Tags shall be of aluminium and in size 50mm x 25 mm.

1. Flow regulation unit shall consist of stainless steel and hydrogenated
acrylonitrile-butadiene-rubber and shall be capable of controlling flow
within +/-5% of rated flow rate or +/-2% of maximum flow rate.
2. Flow regulation unit shall be accessible, for change-out or maintenance.
3 Way By-Pass Fan Coil Unit Flushing Unit:
3-way By-Pass unit shall be provided along with Fan Coil unit for easy installation,
system flushing and maintenance. The by-pass Fan coil flushing unit shall be with an
all integrated ball valves for by-pass and isolation.
Constructional details:
1. Housing shall consist of forged brass ASTM CuZn40Pb2, rated at no less than
2500 KPa static pressure at +120ºC.
2. Chemically nickel plated brass ball valves.
3. Union end connections with Brass alloy ISO.
Strainer for By Pass Unit:
Strainer shall be provided along with by-pass unit at supply side, before connection to
cooling/ heating coil. Valve shall consist of strainer, mesh 60.
Strainer Valve Housing:
than 2500 KPa static pressure at +120ºC.
2. Valve housing shall be permanently marked to show direction of flow.
3. Housing shall be configured for strainer unit accessibility.
4. Optional items : Drain valve and Pressure/ temperature plugs shall be provided
upon request for all valve sizes.
Insulation shell for the Complete FCU Valve Package (3-Way By Pass, PICV and Strainer):
The insulation shells are temperature insulation for FCU valve package in environments
with temperatures very different from the media temperatures in the valves. The
insulation shells are easily fitted and removed (if necessary) due to the soft snap function
of the foam. All insulation shells for valve housings shall also be included with the
accessory part ACCIPT (for easy access to the optional p/t plugs).
2.16.4 Valve schedules shall be submitted for review and shall clearly show the following
for each valve:
1. Associated system.
2. Manufacturer and model number.
3. Valve size and line size.
4. Flow rate, flow coefficient (CV) - and pressure drop at design conditions.
23 05 00

5. Valve authority, flow rate and pressure drop across the valve at design conditions
and pressure drop across the associated mechanical equipment, e.g., coil, heat
exchanger, etc., at design conditions.
6. Valve configuration (e.g. two way, three way, butterfly).
7. Leakage rate.
8. Maximum pressure shut-off capability.
9. Actuator manufacturer and model number.
10. Valve body pressure and temperature rating.
11. Normally open/closed and failure positions.
All valves shall have at least two (2) factory installed pressure/ temperature ports to
allow field verification of flow and pressure independent operation.
Third party lab test shall be provided to check flow limitation and control precision.
Valve differential pressure rating shall be equal to or greater than the associated
pump’s design head pressure. Valve assembly and actuator torque shall be selected to
close off against this differential pressure. Appropriate DPCV’s (Differential Pressure
Control Valves) shall be used, where the control valves are exposed to differential
pressure rating of more than 6 bar.
Actuator and valve shall be mounted and installed only in the location/orientation
approved by the manufacturer. Installation drawings shall clearly indicate the valve
location
Approved manufactures: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide

Flow Con International, Denmark

Danfos, Europe
Tour & Anderson, USA
2.17 Electric motors and electrical equipment:
2.17.1 All electrical works and materials shall be as described under the Electrical
specifications and shall conform to the regulations of Ministry of
Electricity and Water.
2.17.2 All electrically operated equipment shall be so designed that it will

continue to function without damage to itself or otherwise, if the voltage
and/or frequency vary within the following tolerances:
a. Voltage : +/- 6%
b. Frequency : +/- 0.3%
2.17.3 All electrically operated equipment shall be suitable for continuous and
prolonged operation within the ambient temperature or exposed condition
to the atmosphere where they are installed to operate. Allowance for
the local high ambient temperature shall be made by reducing the
permitted rise of temperature above ambient or by derating the capacity
and rating.
2.17.4 Electric Motors:
A. All electric motors whether supplied separately or as part of packaged

equipment to comply with appropriate British Standards or approved equivalents
23 05 00

B. Generally motors up to 0.75 kW output power will be single phase. Motors of 0.75
kW output and above to be 3 phase.
C. Generally motors up to 3.7 kW output are to be started direct on line and motors
of 3.7 kW or greater output to be provided with an appropriate form of assisted
start to suit the application.
D. All motors to be selected for operation on the nominal voltage of the local
electricity supply and to operate satisfactorily within the maximum band of
voltage variation guaranteed by the electricity supply authority.
E. In all cases motors to be selected for satisfactory performance in the particular
environment in which they are required to operate.
2.17.5 Electrical Equipment:
A. All electrical equipment provided for the project as separate items or as part of
packaged equipment separately specified is to comply with the IEE Regulations
for Electrical Equipment in Buildings. In all cases equipment is to be selected to
perform satisfactorily under the particular environmental conditions under which
it is required to operate.
2.17.6 Electrical Wiring:
A. All power cabling up to and including isolators to the control panels in plant
rooms. Pump, Chiller and fan isolators as indicated on the drawing shall be
carried out by the Electrical Contractor. The electric supply shall be
terminated into the main incomer of the control panel/isolator. It is the A.C.
Contractor’s responsibility to continue the connections from the isolator
up to all the air conditioning and ventilation units.
B. The A.C. Contractor shall be responsible for complete electrical

equipment/controls associated with the Air conditioning and Ventilation
works. A.C. Contractor’s scope of works shall include but not be limited to
the following:
C. All control wiring necessary conduits, cables, cable trays etc., for the air
conditioning equipment, controls and remote emergency push buttons (if
required), etc. All HVAC related equipment control components such as flow
switches, temperature/humidity sensors, thermostats etc., are to be wired to
control panel and other associated components using armoured cable on
galvanized cable rack/tray. Power cabling from FAHU/ AHU/ FCU control
panel to respective equipments, c o n t r o l panel to pumps, isolator to
chillers, power cabling from isolators to fans, etc. shall be carried out by
the A.C. Contractor. (For continuity, refer electrical drawings and
specifications).
D. Fire rated cables shall be used for all interfacing and Power wiring
between emergency ventilation fans, smoke exhaust fans, car park
exhaust fan, Co management system and all other Fire and Life safety
system to the fire alarm panel as well as for interface wiring to the
emergency generator.
E. Specification for all other electrical items such as conduits, cables, cable
trays, etc shall conform to electrical specifications.
23 05 00

2.17.7. Starters:
A. All three phase motors for A.C. units shall be provided with D.O.L./Star Delta
starters having the following facilities:
1. To disconnect the supply in the event of power failure or voltage drop
2. To protect the motor from overload in each phase.
3. Start/stop push button.
4. ON/OFF/TRIP indicating lamp.
5. Single phase preventer
B. All three phase starters shall have thermal overload protection in each phase
as well as under voltage reset plus two auxiliary normal open contacts.
2.17.8. Isolators:
All electrical drives shall have local isolators, weather proof Isolators shall
be of reputed manufacturers, as approved by Engineer.
2.17.9 Earthing:
A. All motors starting equipment panels shall have their frames, carcasses and
all metal parts effectively and continuously connected to the general mass
of the earth.
2.18 Testing:
2.18.1 All wiring within control panels shall be works checked, prior to despatch, for
loose connections, correct terminations and compliance with wiring
diagrams. In addition, functional checks shall be carried out in the works to
ensure that all interlocking and sequencing is in accordance with the
performance requirements of the specification. The Engineer shall be given 7
days written notice of such tests so that he may attend if he so desires.
2.18.2 With all control circuits disconnected but with all isolators closed and
power fuses fitted the panels shall be subjected to a voltage test of 2.5 Kv
for one minute, across the following points:
1. Phase to phase
2. Phase to neutral
3. Phase to earth
4. Neutral to earth
2.18.3 Certified schedules detailing all tests and their results shall be
submitted to the Engineer within fourteen days of the test.
2.19.4 All testing to be done in accordance to the requirements by TAB and CxA.
2.20 Approval of Workmanship Standards:
2.19.1 The standard of workmanship shall comply with the requirements of the
Engineer who shall carry out periodic inspection of completed work and
work in progress.
23 05 00

2.19.2 Any work not to the Engineers satisfaction during such inspection shall be
replaced to a standard satisfactory to the Engineer at no cost to the
contract for the subsequent inspection.
2.20 Tags, Color Coding:
2.20.1 All equipment shall be properly identified by means of permanent tags. All
components shall be labelled in the control panel as per the approved
drawings. All wires shall be color coded in accordance with the Electrical
regulations of the Ministry of Electricity & Water. Labelling system shall be
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 Installation and liaison:
3.1.1 Installation Planning

The Contractor shall co-operate with the General Contractor and the Engineer in
planning the installation before the work is commenced. Particular care shall be
taken to ensure there is close liaison with all other trades in installing services to
prevent obstruction of electrical service positions, mechanical services pipe work,
access positions and plumbing etc. Services through ducts shall be arranged to
permit maximum access in the ducts and the services shall be readily accessible
for maintenance.
The routes of services and positions of equipment and apparatus shown on the
scheme drawings are approximate only. The Contractor shall liaise with the
General Contractor and produce such working and installation drawings giving
precise setting out details as are required to achieve co-ordination with other
trades.
Particular care shall be taken to obtain uniform and tidy arrangements of wall
and ceiling mounted equipment.
3.1.2 Where ancillary works are to be carried out by other trades in connection with
the mechanical installation the Contractor shall provide full details of work
required in good time to meet the agreed programme.
3.1.3 Progress Drawings

The Contractor shall keep on site available for reference by the Engineer or other
authorized persons a full set of installation drawings on which he shall record the
work as it is installed. Any authorized variation from the scheme drawings shall be
noted on this progress set so as to form the basis of record drawings which are to
be provided by the Contractor as referred to elsewhere.
3.2 Pipe work:
3.2.1 All pipes shall be installed in a neat and workmanlike manner laid to proper
graded falls to facilitate draining and venting, adequately supported with
provision for expansion and suitably spaced to accommodate any insulation.
3.2.2 No joints shall be made inside the thickness of walls, partitions, floors or ceilings.
Concealed or inaccessible pipe work shall be arranged so that no mechanical
joints or unions are contained within the inaccessible length. Where any site
condition makes this impracticable the ruling of the Engineer must be obtained
before installation.
23 05 00

3.2.3 All pipes shall be pressure-tested before insulation is applied and before pipe
work is concealed by casings, suspended ceilings, plaster, etc. Test
requirements are specific in particular sections.
a. Pipes passing through walls, floors, ceilings, partitions etc., shall be inserted
through sleeves of the same material as the pipe. Sleeves shall be free from
internal burrs and shall have an internal diameter sufficient to allow free
movement of the pipe and insulation if fitted off the pipe is crossing fire
rated walls, fire sleeves shall be provided.
b. In all cases the annular space shall be packed UL listed fire seal system to
achieve the fire rating requirements. Provide appropriate material for
acoustic separation or to provide a water and/or vermin proof seal as
required by the situation.
c. Cover plates to be fitted on pipes passing through walls, floors, ceilings etc.,
where exposed to view in user areas. Omission of sleeves or cover plates in
particular situations to be at the discretion of the Engineer.
3.2.4 All pipe work shall be supported at centers not exceeding those given in the
following tables and at closer intervals if warranted by the particular
arrangement of pipe work fittings or valves. Pipe work shall be supported either
side of pipe mounted equipment generally within 3 pipe diameters.
a) The type and detail of support brackets, hangers, rollers etc., to be
approved by the Engineer prior to installation.
b) The intervals given for supports on vertical pipes refer to lateral guide points.
The weight of the vertical pipe being taken at a single point or single points
between expansion joints where used. Additional guide points may be
required to control lateral movement of pipe work caused by expansion.
Where grooved joints are used additional supports may be required to give
stability particularly at changes in direction.
Pipe Size Horizontal Vertical

mm m m
i) Steel pipes
15 1.8 4.0
20 2.4 4.9
25 2.7 5.2
32 3.3 6.4
40 3.6 7.3
50 4.5 9.1
65 5.2 11.0
80 5.8 12.0
100 6.7 15.0
125 6.7 17.0
150 7.6 17.0
200 7.6 20.0
250 9.1 28.0
300 9.1 32.0
23 05 00
ii) Copper Pipe to BS 2871

Part 1
Table X 15 1.2 1.8
22-28 1.8 3.0
Stainless 32 2.4 3.0
Steel 42 2.4 3.6
Pipe type 54 2.7 3.6
316 to 76 3.0 3.6
BS 4127 108-133 3.0 4.5
159 3.6 5.4
c) The cast iron pipe work and fittings shall be supported in strict accordance
with the manufacturer's guidelines/recommendations.
3.3 Refrigerant Pipe Work and Fittings:
3.3.1 Refrigerant pipe work shall be refrigerant quality copper tube to BS 2871
Table 2 (Material C106), fully annealed and internally degreased and
cleaned, with capillary fittings.
3.3.2 Piping shall be supported to prevent strains or distortion in the connected

equipment, valves and control valves. Piping shall be supported to allow for
removal of equipment, valves and accessories with a minimum of
dismantling and without requiring additional supports after these items are
removed.
3.3.3 All pipe openings through walls, partitions and slabs shall have UPVC sleeves
of an internal diameter at least 25 mm larger than the outside diameter of
the pipe or of the insulation for insulated services. All building expansion
joints shall also be provided with pipe sleeves.
3.3.4 The pipe with insulation shall be carried through the walls, floor or roof slab
and pipe sleeves through them shall be projected minimum 50 mm on either
side of the walls, floor and roof slab.
3.3.5 Pipes passing through interior partitions shall be provided with sleeves of
UPVC set flush with finished wall surfaces.
3.3.6 Joints in copper pipe shall be flanged, flared (up to 19.05 mm O. D. only) or
brazed (with or without capillary fittings). Brazing shall be carried out to the
requirements of the HVCA Code of Practice – Brazing and Bronze
Welding of Copper Pipe and Sheet.
3.3.7 Screwed joints shall not be accepted in refrigerant pipes except on the
equipment accessories. In such cases the threads shall either be of taper
form and used in conjunction with PTFE tape or an anaerobic sealant, or of
parallel form associated with machined joint faces and a suitable joint.
3.3.8 Copper pipe work shall be used as feed piping for all pressure gauge or
similar fittings.
3.3.9 Compression fittings shall not be accepted on refrigerant pipe works.
23 05 00

3.3.10 Refrigerant pipe work shall not be arranged for running compressors in
parallel (i.e. with common suction and/or discharge in pipes).The use of a
number of compressors each having an independent refrigerant circuit in a
common evaporator shall be permitted provided pressure tests between
adjacent refrigerant circuits in the evaporator are carried out during
manufacture.
3.3.11 The pipe work shall be designed so that oil in the refrigerant leaving the
compressor (and passing any oil separator fitted) shall be carried through
the system and back to the compressor at the lowest stage of capacity
unloading.
3.3.12 Pipe work shall be firmly supported and secured to minimize vibration.
Vibration eliminators shall be fitted to the compressor suction and discharge
pipes to minimize transmission of vibration or noise.
3.3.13 All refrigerant equipment shall have a strength and leakage pressure test
after manufacture in accordance with ARI standards.
3.3.14 A pressure test equal to the low test pressure quoted in the table of
equipment test pressures shall be applied to the refrigerant system after all
piping has been fitted. This test shall be in addition to the pressure test on
each unit at completion of the manufacture.
3.3.15 Provision shall be made for the supply of up to 3 sets of pressure test
sheets for each machine and system. It shall be the Works Contractors
responsibility to ensure the sheet content and presentation is acceptable to
the Engineer.
3.3.16 Refrigerant pipe work shall be insulated in accordance with QCS

requirements. Manufacturer’s recommendations shall likewise be
considered. The insulated pipe work shall be additionally wrapped with 200
gm/sqm. quality glass cloth and painted with two coats of approved
weather proofing compound and finally provided with 0.63 mm aluminium
cladding for outdoor piping.
3.4 Pipe supports:
3.4.1 All refrigerant piping shall be supported to prevent deflection, buckling

and vibration.
3.4.2 Piping shall be supported at all changes in direction and at intervals of not
more than 1.2 meters on straight runs. Pipe supports & clamps shall be
subject to approval of the Engineer.
3.4.3 Pipe work on roofs and floors shall be supported on off-set clamps,
floor or rocker stands. The pipe support stands shall be bolted to the
concrete slab or steel members.
3.4.4 Vertical pipe work shall be supported on wall brackets with clamps.
3.4.5 Suspended pipe work shall be supported with trapeze hangers with rods
suspended from inserts.
23 05 00

3.4.6 Condensate drain pipe supports shall be capable of vertical adjustment
after installation of piping.
3.4.7 All pipe works passing through the walls, floors and roof slabs shall be
provided with pipe sleeves of adequate size to allow the passage of
insulation. The gap shall be sealed with in tumescent sealants.
3.5 Condensate Drain Piping:
3.5.1 Condensate drains shall be of UPVC class E to BS 3505 for pipes in ceiling
voids, above ground, vertical drops in the walls or below ground shall be
adequately supported along their length. All condensate drains shall be
fitted with 75 mm deep trap with dirt pocket and removable plug provided
and extended to the nearest drains as shown in the drawings. Removable
plugs shall be provided at every change in direction to allow rodding
access.
3.5.2 All condensate drain pipes shall be water pressure tested before applying
insulation or covering the pipes. Drain test plugs with expandable rubber
seal shall be used for the purpose of testing.
3.5.3 Condensate drains within the building and on the roof shall be insulated
with 12 mm thick rubber foam and weather proofed to the satisfaction
of the Engineer. All exposed pipes external to the building shall be painted
with two coats of paint matching with the building color.
3.6 Flexible connections and Expansion Joints:
3.6.1 Expansion: The Contractor shall make all necessary arrangements to take up the
expansion of pipelines under working conditions without distortion.
3.6.2 Whenever possible movement of pipe work shall be taken up by natural offsets
and changes of direction of pipe runs. Connections from main pipelines
generally shall be made such that expansion of the branch does not directly
apply stress to the main.
3.6.3 Where it is not possible to accommodate movement by the configuration of the

pipe work suitable expansion compensators to be provided.
3.6.4 Pipes shall be anchored and guided as required. Adequate clearances shall be
allowed for pipe movement especially at branches and changes of direction. In
this respect oversized sleeves shall be used where branches pass through walls or
floors close to the mains. Pipe connections to plant items shall be anchored and
supported as necessary to prevent stresses being transmitted to plant items.
3.6.5 Disconnect Joints: Disconnect fittings shall be provided on the dead side of all
valves and at connections to plant and equipment. Further expansion /
disconnection joints shall be provided in straight lengths of pipe generally at a
maximum spacing of 18m intervals and at positions to be agreed with the
Engineer.
3.6.7. All flexible couplings and expansion joints must be selected so that the
working pressure, temperature and movement encountered will not be more
than 75% of that allowable for the joint selected. One side of the joints
must have all piping and/or adjacent equipment adequately anchored.
23 05 00

The other side must be supported, aligned and guided so as to allow free
movement without imposing unnecessary stresses on the joints.
3.6.8. Expansion joints shall have integral duck flanges. They shall have
individual solid steel ring reinforced with a carcass of highest grade woven
cotton or acceptable synthetic fibre. Joints shall be constructed to pipe line
size and to meet working pressure conditions, face measurements etc., as
designated. They shall be of an arch type construction with the number of
arches (corrugations) dependant on projected movement. All joints must
be finish-coated with eypalon paint to prevent ozone attach. Split back or
retaining rings shall be furnished.
3.6.9. Joints size 2” and below shall have threaded malleable iron unions on both
sides. All joints shall be suitable for minimum test pressure of one and a
half times the working pressure of the system or minimum PN 16, whichever is
higher.
3.6.10 Flexible connections shall be provided to Fans, AHU‟S, FCU‟S, pumps,

chillers etc. in order to prevent transmission of vibration to pipe work.
3.7 Draining and Venting:
3.7.1 The Contractor shall be responsible for providing such drain and air release
arrangements as are required to ensure that all sections of the installation can be
completely drained and that air locks cannot form. The position and
arrangement of draining and venting points not shown on the drawings to be
3.7.2 Air bottles shall comprise a full bore collection pipe the same size as the main to
which it is installed but a minimum size of 50mm bore. The collection pipe shall be
a minimum of 150mm long installed vertically where possible, otherwise installed
horizontally with a vertical stub connection to the main, the stub being the same
size as the collection pipe. From the highest point of each air bottle run a 6mm
discharge pipe in copper to BS 2871 Part 1:1971 Table X to be run to an easily
accessible position terminating with an air cock. These items shall be fitted so
that they are not concealed and are readily accessible. Where
equipment is cased, vents shall be extended so that they can be operated
from the outside of the casing.
3.7.3 Automatic Air Eliminators: Automatic air eliminators where required shall be fitted
with an isolating valve on the inlet. From the outlet a 6mm discharge pipe in
copper to BS 2871 Part 1:1971 Table X is to be run to vent in an approved position.
3.7.4 Drain / gland cocks shall be installed in plant rooms, on major plants /
equipment. Drain cocks shall be of the hose union pattern gland cock in
bronze (BS1400 LG2).WRc approved, asbestos free gland packing and shall
be threaded to BS21 complete with captive cap. The plugs shall have
square head with a slot to indicated plug position
3.8 Provision of Valves and Stopcocks:
3.8.1 The Contractor shall provide all valves and stopcocks as shown on the drawings
and also as required by the following:
a. Isolation and regulation of each branch circuit.
23 05 00

b. Isolation of each draw-off point or range of draw-off points and each item of
equipment.
c. Isolation and regulation of flow and return connections to each heat transfer
equipment unless instructed otherwise by the particular specifications.
3.8.2 Each valve to be fitted with an identifying label corresponding to a valve chart or
similar diagram. Details of valves required shall be as given in Part 2 of particular
sections.
3.9 Welding of Pipelines:
3.9.1 Welding of Steel and Copper Pipelines: Welding of steel and copper pipe work
shall be by oxy acetylene or metal arc. Welding shall be executed by craftsmen
who hold the appropriate Certificate of Competency as issued by the NJIC of
the Heating and Ventilating Industry, British Oxygen Company or Lloyds.
3.9.2 The names of such welders shall be submitted before any welding is executed on
site and the appropriate certificate submitted for approval at the same time.
3.9.3 Each welder shall be provided with a steel market die to identify each
completed joint and his individual identification symbol. Any welding found to
have been performed by a welder whose name has not been previously
approved shall be removed and the pipeline re-welded by an approved welder
at no extra charge.
3.9.4 In addition the Engineer may at his sole discretion request any welder to be site
tested with welding executed in situ and then cut out for examination,
mechanical and metallurgical testing.
3.9.5 Welding to be carried out in accordance with "Welding of Mild Steel Pipe work"
and "Brazing and Bronze Welding of Copper Pipe work and Sheet" issued by the
Heating & Ventilating Contractors' Association.
3.10 Cleanliness:
3.10.1 Sealing Open Ends of Pipe work: Care shall be exercised during the erection of
pipe work to ensure that foreign matter is not allowed in or enter the pipe. When
any section of installation is left open for any purpose whatsoever the open ends
shall be temporarily sealed with purpose-made plugs or blanking caps. Rags,
paper or similar substances shall not be used under any circumstances.
3.10.2 Flushing Out and Cleaning Pipe work: On the satisfactory completion of testing,
systems shall be drained and thoroughly flushed out with clean water. The flow of
water for this purpose shall be sufficient to ensure vigorous flushing and the
process shall be maintained until the discharge water runs clear. During this
period the Contractor shall remove, clean and replace the screens of all pipeline
strainers. Any items likely to be damaged by the process shall not to be included.
3.10.3 Sterilization of Pipe work: Immediately prior to handover or at such time as the
installation cannot be re contaminated prior to handover, the Contractor shall
thoroughly and efficiently sterilize all hot and cold water services including
storage tanks. Sterilization shall be carried out by a specialist firm conversant with
this type of work.
23 05 00

3.10.4 After sterilization water samples shall be taken and tests carried out to confirm to
the Engineer that the water from the installations is suitable for human
consumption. If the tests prove unsatisfactory the sterilization shall be repeated.
3.11 Pressure Testing of Pipe work:
3.11.1 All pipe work shall be pressure tested after installation by the Contractor to details
specified for particular systems. Pressure test shall be maintained for a minimum
of 30 minutes or for as long as is necessary to inspect the whole of the pipe work
involved. The test shall be repeated after any defect has been repaired.
3.11.2. Any plant or equipment which might be damaged by the test shall be excluded.
After re-connection the whole system shall be re-tested within the limits of the
plant and equipment. Testing medium shall be water unless otherwise specified.
3.11.3 Reasonable notice shall be given of all tests to enable the Engineer or his
authorized representative to be present. Similarly the Water Supply Directorate
Inspector shall be given required notice before testing systems under their
jurisdiction. All test results shall be recorded.
3.12 Testing of Chilled Water Pipe work:
3.12.1 The Works Contractor shall carry out hydraulic and performance tests, under
actual conditions, to the entire satisfaction of the Engineer before any
thermal insulation is applied.
3.12.2 The whole chilled water pipe work system shall be hydraulically tested to a
pressure equivalent to one and a half times the maximum working pressure
or ten atmospheres, whichever is higher. All flexible/ expansion joints shall be
restrained to prevent axial stretch and all control subject to damage shall
be isolated at the time of the pressure test. The indicated pressure shall be
maintained for 4 hours without further application of pressure and without
visible leakage or a drop in the indicated pressure.
3.12.3 When a section of pipe work is complete and ready for testing, it shall
be plugged and then slowly and carefully charged with water, allowing all
air to escape and avoiding all shock or water hammer. The Works
Contractor shall make arrangements for all water used in the test to be
properly drained away.
3.12.4 Pipe work which fails under test, due to pressure loss or visible leakage, shall
be relieved of pressure and all faulty joints or other defects made good.
3.12.5 Remedial work and test shall be repeated until the systems are tested
successfully. If in the opinion of the Engineer, damage has been caused
during the remedial work, or faulty materials have been used, the section
under test will be condemned. The installation shall then be removed,
cleared from site, replaced with new materials and re-tested as specified.
3.12.6 The General Works Contractor shall provide the water and electricity
supplies necessary for testing purposes.
3.13 Fixings: Fixings made to the structure or fabric of building for the purpose of
supporting pipe work or other equipment shall be appropriate to the load
23 05 00

carried and the material in question and subject to the approval of the
Engineer.
3.14 Completion:
3.14.1 Painting Polishing and Cleaning: The Contractor shall be responsible for painting
of all mild steel pipe work, ductwork in "engineering" spaces such as ducts,
trenches, chases, ceiling spaces, plant rooms, tank rooms etc., together with all
associated steelwork supports. Painting shall consist of two coats of approved rust
preventive metal primer paints and two coats of enamel paint finish to color as
approved by Architect/ Engineer. The work shall be in accordance with painting
as described in Relevant section.
3.14.2. Thermal insulation shall be further painted as specified separately. All exposed /
un insulated pipe work, duct works, and other metalwork, brackets, hangers,
etc., shall be further painted with one undercoat and two finishing coat of
enamel paint finish to approved color, wherever exposed to view.
3.14.3 All welds shall be painted with two coats of red lead based paint immediately
upon completion. All exposed threads on mild steel pipe work shall be wire
brushed and painted two coats red lead based paint immediately after
completion.
3.14.4 In the case of control panels and similar items for which special finish is provided
care shall be taken that these are not damaged during erection. Any damage
caused shall be made good to the satisfaction of the Engineer. Before handover
the Contractor shall thoroughly clean all items of plant and equipment. Bright
parts shall be polished and any adhesive protection removed.
3.15 Identification of Plant:
3.15.1 All plant items shall be clearly identified by name and reference number
corresponding to reference numbers given on the record drawings. Labels shall
be mounted on equipment and in the most convenient positions, care being
taken to ensure labels can be read without difficulty.
3.15.2 Chillers, pumps, control panels and similar items subject to close inspection shall
be identified using engraved laminate or similar material having black characters
5mm high minimum on a white background.
3.15.3 Ventilation plant and other large surfaces may need to be identified by stencil
lettering neatly applied so that it may be read from a greater distance.
Operating positions of dampers, levers and handles shall be suitably indicated.
3.16 Identification of Valves:
All valves in plant room, voids, ducts and chases shall be fitted with labels
secured to the valve by means of a key ring. Labels shall be engraved laminate
or similar material having black characters 5mm high minimum on a white
background.
3.17 Identification of Pipelines:
3.17.1 Pipelines shall be identified by the colour code for General Building Services as BS
1710:1975. Identifying colour bands shall be positioned:-
23 05 00

a. Both sides of each valve
b. Both sides of any wall or partition through which the pipes passes.
c. At each bend in the pipeline
d. At maximum intervals of 2.5m on straight lengths.
3.17.2 In addition to the colour coding lettering and arrows to be added to the primary
colour bands to indicate particular service and direction of flow. Labels to be
printed with black lettering at least 20mm high on vinyl impregnated cloth or
equivalent backed with pressure sensitive adhesive. Labels to be suitable for
operation between -40°C. and 115°C.
3.18 Identification of Ducting:
3.18.1 Ducting shall be identified by symbols painted on in accordance with the system
described in HVCA Specification DW 144 or SMACNA Duct Construction
Standards.
3.18.2 Alternatively the coded symbols may be replaced with labels specially printed
with black lettering at least 20mm high on vinyl impregnated cloth or equivalent
backed with pressure sensitive adhesive. Labels to be suitable for operation
between 0 °C to 60 °C.
3.19 Lubricants:
3.19.1 The Contractor shall be responsible for the initial fill of oil and grease for the
equipment supplied and for the maintenance of lubrication during the
construction, testing and commissioning period up to the time of handover at
which time he is to ensure that all reservoirs, etc., are full and all bearing
lubricated.
3.19.2 The Contractor shall further supply sufficient quantities of each grade of grease
and oil required to operate the plant continuously for a period of three months.
3.19.3 Lubricants shall be supplied in suitable containers with identifying labels. Other
consumables such as replacement filter cells and belt drives are considered
separately under the provision of spares within each particular section
3.20 Tests at Site:
3.20.1 The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer, one month prior to the date of
commencement of the tests, three (3) copies of the complete test
procedures to be used. The Engineer shall approve the procedures,
method of calculation etc., before any test is carried out. Three (3) copies
of the test results shall be furnished to the Engineer for his approval.
3.20.2 The Contractor shall supply skilled staff and all necessary instruments and
carryout tests of any kind on a piece of equipment, apparatus, part of
system or a complete system if the Engineer requests such a test, for
determining specified or guaranteed data as given in the specifications or
in the schedule of equipment filled in by the Contractor.
3.20.3 Any damage resulting from the test shall be repaired and/or damaged
material replaced, all to the satisfaction of the Engineer. In the event of any
repair or adjustment required to be made, other than the normal running
adjustment, the tests shall be void and shall be recommended after the
23 05 00

adjustments or repairs have been completed. The test shall not be void due
to circumstances beyond the Contractor's control. All testing, balancing
and final adjustment shall be in accordance with the provision of the
applicable 'ASHRAE' standards.
3.21 Ductwork:
3.21.1 All branches and outlets shall be tested for air quantity and the total of the
air quantities shall be within five percent of fan capacity. Volume control
dampers and splitter dampers shall be tested for proper operation.
3.21.2 Air balancing shall be carried out by AABC certified independent agency.
3.21.3 Duct Leakage Test: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test
Manual." Submit a test report for each test.
Test representative duct sections selected by Engineer from sections

installed, totaling no less than 25 percent of total installed duct area for each
designated pressure class.
Disassemble, reassemble, and seal segments of systems to accommodate

leakage testing and for compliance with test requirements.
Test for leaks before applying external insulation.
Conduct tests at static pressures equal to maximum design pressure of

system or section being tested. If static-pressure classes are not indicated,
test system at maximum system design pressure. Do not pressurize systems
above maximum design operating pressure.
3.22 Equipment:
3.22.1 All air handling and ventilating equipment, ductwork and air outlets shall be
adjusted and balanced to deliver the specified air quantities indicated at
each inlet and outlet on the drawings.
3.22.2 Where the equipment or systems depend upon controls for proper
operation, functioning and performance, the latter shall be operated
simultaneously with the equipment or system during tests.
3.22.3 If air quantities cannot be delivered without exceeding the speed

range of the sheaves or the available horsepower, the Engineer shall
be notified before proceeding with the balancing of air distribution system.
3.22.4 Other tests as specified under the specific equipment headings are to be
completed to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
3.23 Electrical Equipment:
3.23.1 All electrical equipment shall be cleaned and tested on site before
application of power as mentioned below:
a. Wire and cable tests.
b. Insulation resistance test, phase to phase and phase to earth on all
circuits and equipments using a 500-volt megger. The megger reading
shall not be less than one meg.ohm.
23 05 00

c. Earth resistance between conduit system and earth must not exceed
half ohm.
d. Phasing out and phase rotation tests.
e. Operating tests on all protective relays, starters, circuit breakers etc.,
to prove their correct operation before energizing the main equipment.
f. Operating tests on all starters, circuit breakers etc.
g. Any other required as per local electricity department regulations.
3.24 Tests on Completion:
3.24.1 After finishing the above tests and adjustments, the Contractor shall be
responsible for running a reliability trial test for the whole plant installed. The
whole of the trial of the plant shall take place during the appropriate
seasons when design conditions are met or approximated. The ventilation
trial shall take place at any reasonable time subject to the approval of the
Engineer. The trial shall last for a period of thirty one (31) consecutive days
during which time the whole of the plant shall operate continuously without
readjustments or repair to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
3.24.2 During the reliability trial test, performance tests shall be conducted on the
refrigerating and air conditioning equipment. The test data shall not deviate
by more than three percent from the guaranteed capacity data.
Temperature readings shall be taken for the entering and leaving air of
each air-handling unit. Should any part of the apparatus or system fail to
meet with the specification requirements, it shall be adjusted, repaired or
replaced to the satisfaction of the Engineer. The complete performance
test shall then be repeated. The date of commencement of the above
said tests shall be subject to agreement with the Engineer.
3.24.3 As soon as all tests prescribed in this clause are carried out satisfactorily in
the opinion of the Engineer, a formal letter of completion shall be drawn up
in three (3) copies and signed by the Engineer.
3.24.4 During the maintenance period, the Contractor shall demonstrate that all
equipment and apparatus fulfill the requirements of the specifications and
he shall operate all fans, refrigeration and air-conditioning equipment for a
sufficient time to adjust all dampers, thermostats and controls and shall
provide the Engineer with a complete log and report indicating air
quantities, fan speed etc.
3.25 Maintenance Test
3.25.1 During the last month of the defects liability period, the Contractor shall
demonstrate to the Engineer that all equipment and systems are operating
according to the capacities and the manner set down in the specifications.
3.25.2 The maintenance test shall include but not limited to.
1. Full maintenance and checking for chillers including refrigerant charge
and controllers.
2. Chilled water distribution system including pumps, vibration isolators,
balancing of the piping network, chemical dosing charge, system
cleaning / chilled water treatment air venting etc.
3. Full maintenance, checking of all airside equipments & distribution duct
work including FCU/FAHU/AHU/DX units, precision units, all type of
23 05 00

exhaust / ventilation fans, smoke extract and car park smoke exhaust
fans, filters, fans, coils, belts and system balancing.
4. Acoustical verification by qualified acoustical engineer appointed by
contractor.
5. Smoke detector in return duct of FCU & AHU’s / car park ventilation
system / emergency exhaust / ventilation fans / - interfacing with fire
alarm system.
6. BMS full checking including interfacing with other LV Systems.
7. DX type duct able and mini split units.
3.25.3 The Maintenance Certificate will not be issued to the Contractor until all
plant and equipment has been tested to the complete satisfaction of the
Engineer.
3.26 Commissioning / Verification by Specialists:
3.26.1 It shall be the cost inclusive responsibility of the contractor to arrange for
the testing and commissioning of complete HVAC works including the
hydronic and air balancing by a certified third party as approved by the
Engineer.
3.26.2 Acoustical verification of the installation shall be carried out by a qualified

acoustical engineer appointed by the contractor at his cost to the
satisfaction of the supervising Engineer / CxA.
3.27 Commissioning:
3.27.1 The Contractor shall be responsible for commissioning the whole of the
installations, checking performance and demonstrating that the design intent
has been achieved.
3.27.2 Work shall be carried out in accordance with the standard procedures published
by the CIBSE and BSRIA and results of tests recorded on approved commissioning
sheets. Following approval by the Engineer the commissioning record sheets shall
be incorporated into the Operating and Maintenance Manual referred to
separately.
3.27.3 Commissioning shall be carried out by staff fully experienced in this type of work
and using manufacturer's specialists where necessary. The Contractor shall
ensure that all necessary provision is built into the installations to enable
commissioning and testing procedures to be carried out properly and also to
make due allowance for commissioning in programming the work.
3.27.4 Commissioning of complete HVAC system shall be carried out by an

independent specialist agency as mentioned in Division 23 08 00 - Commissioning
of HVAC.
23 05 00
23 05 48 - Noise and Vibration Control
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1.1 This section specifies the environmental sound levels to be achieved and
covers the application of equipment to control noise and vibration generated
by the installations described separately in other sections of the mechanical
installation.
This section should be read in conjunction with the following:
Number Description
230713 INSULATION
1.1.2 Design intent

Sound Level: Airborne and Structure borne noise from the building services
9including equipment rooms) must not exceed the following values within
occupied spaces:
Space External Intrusion Noise Level Leq

Guestrooms NR30
Guest Corridor NR30
Meeting / Function Rooms NR30
Bar / Restaurant / Breakout NR40
Ball Room / Teen Club / Play Room/
Prefunction NR35
Meeting Room and Executive
offices NR30
Cinema NR35
Lobby / Lounge/ Reception /
Corridors NR35
Retail NR40
Squash Court and Adventure
Center NR45
Business center NR35
23 05 48
Public Restrooms NR40

Employee Toilets / Changing
Rooms NR45
Gym NR40
Spa NR30
Medical room NR30
Prayer Room NR30
Staff Area NR40
Staff Dinning NR45
BOH Manager Room NR35
Other BOH areas NR40
Services Rooms NR45
Kitchen / Laundry NR45
Parking NR60
Note that sound levels refer to noise generated by the mechanical installations
and are not intended to account for either internal or external noises from any
other source. All the noise requirements for various areas shall strictly comply
with ASHRAE requirements.
All Equipment duct work / pipework must be isolated from the building structure
in order to ensure that Vibration within the floor of any occupied room is
controlled to a level not exceeding 0.05ms-2 in any direction (vertical or
horizontal) when measured and evaluated in accordance with ISO 2631-2:2003
or BS6472:1992 or ANSIS2.71-1983
Contractor shall follow the acoustic consultants requirements for noise and
vibration control.
1.2 Quality assurance
1.2.1 Workmanship and Materials: The installations throughout are to be of the best
quality materials created by skilled workmen under competent supervision
and left in good working order on completion to the satisfaction of the
Engineer.
1.2.2 Compliance with Standards and Regulations: Except where otherwise

specified all work is to conform with the relevant provisions of appropriate
British Standard Codes of Practice currently applicable.
1.3 Submittal
The following will be required for approval prior to work commencing.
1.3.1 Product Data: Submit manufacturer's data for all equipment identifying model
references and types. Information submitted prior to ordering any silencing
equipment to include:
Materials
Methods of construction
Installation requirements
Performance (Basis of selection for complete sound spectrum)
23 05 48
Shop Drawings: Submit working drawings where required to clarify the product
data information.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 Airborne noise:
Apply attenuation to duct work systems and elsewhere as required in
connection with equipment specified or proposed to achieve specified sound
levels.
2.1.1 Duct Borne Noise Attenuators:

The outer casing of duct attenuators to be constructed in accordance with the
ductwork specification given in Section 233300 - AIR DISTRIBUTION. The class of
ductwork in respect of attenuator construction shall be Class C.
The acoustic infill shall be inorganic, incombustible, rot and vermin proof, non-
hygroscopic and inert mineral wool. It shall be packed under compression to
avoid settling and the formation to voids, to a minimum density of 48 kg/cu.m.
The infill shall be protected from the air turbulence by the use of perforated
galvanized sheet metal. The protective sheet shall not be less than 0.5mm
thick.
The acoustic infill shall be retained behind perforated galvanized sheet steel
splitters. These splitters shall be arranged within the casing to provide a specific
airway/splitter configuration dependent on the required acoustic performance
of the unit. Half width splitters shall be fixed to the side walls of the attenuator as
necessary to ensure that the stated acoustic test data is complied with.
All attenuators shall be completed with Aerodynamic leading and trailing
splitter ends to reduce turbulence and hence minimize the regenerated noise
and reduce attenuator entry/dump loss.
The attenuators shall be as manufactured by the following companies or
approved equal.
Trox, U.K.
Euro Register, Belgium
Sound Attenuators Ltd., U.K.
Install duct attenuators on supply ducts and return ducts for air handling units
exhaust and ventilation fans etc. as indicated in the drawings.
2.1.2 Acoustic Duct Lining:

25mmAcoustic duct lining shall be provided to ducts as follows.
1. AHU / FAHU / Ventilation: 3 m from the sound Attenuators
2. Guest Room FCU : Entire Length from FCU to Diffuser
3. Office FCU : 3 m from the FCU
4. Supply / Return Air Diffuser Plenum.
Liner shall be Flame retarded NBR based closed ell, flexible elastomeric foam
acoustic insulation with factory applied adhesive, conforming to ASTM C1534-
07-e1. Liner shall be have following:
1.Free of CFCs, HFCs, HCFCs, PBDEs, formaldehyde and fiber.
2.UL Greenguard Gold Certified for Low VOC emission.
growth
23 05 48

7. Water Absorption : <0.2% according to ASTM C209
8. Flame Spread / Smoke Development : <25/50 according to ASTM E84
10.Odor Emission : No objectionable odor according to ASTM C1304
11.Flexibility : Passed cold Crack test at -40oC according to ASTM D1056
12.Milddew/Fungi Resistance : Passed according to UL181, ASTMG21, ASTM C
1338.
13.Air Erosion : 4000FPM Rating according to ASTM C1071
14.Leachable Chlorides: <0.05% water soluble chloride ions according to DIN
1988
15.Sound Absorption Coefficients to ASTM C423

1in(25mm) 0.06 0.17 1.06 0.32 0.67 0.54 0.55
16.Sound Insertion Loss(dB) to ASTM E477
1000 2000 4000

Thickness 125HZ 250 HZ 500 HZ 8000HZ
HZ HZ HZ
1in(25mm) 1 3 20 7 12 12 12

C177
Note that duct sizes given on drawings refer to the inside dimension of the air
way and due allowance must be made for any lining when considering the
sheet metal sizes.
2.1.3 Test Results

Contractor shall provide instruments for testing the required NC level as
specified. Test will be conducted at random in front of Employer and the
Engineer and test results submitted in written form.
2.2 Vibration isolation:
2.2.1 All plants / equipment and supports shall be isolated from the building
structure and the supports isolated from other items of equipment in such
a manner that noise and vibration are not transmitted through the
structure.
2.2.2 The chillers shall be mounted on concrete plinth and provided with cased
spring type anti-vibration mounts with minimum 50 mm. deflection. The
spring mounts shall consist of cast metal telescopic housings with resilient
inserts to act as guides between the top and bottom housings. The
mounts shall incorporate built-in leveling arrangement. The bottom plate
of the mount shall be fitted with 6 mm thick non skid synthetic rubber
pad to reduce transmission of high frequency noise and vibrations. The
metal casing and the springs shall be powder coated for protection
against corrosion. The springs shall be color coded to facilitate
identification. The load carrying capacity of each mount to be selected to suit
the support points on the particular equipment manufacturer's
recommendations.
23 05 48
2.2.3 AHU and FAHU shall be installed on floating floor foundations with cased
spring mounts as described above with minimum 25 mm. deflection.
2.2.4 Chilled water pump sets shall be installed over factory made inertia blocks
made out of reinforced concrete or concrete-filled welded steel
framework resiliently supported from a lower concrete pad keyed into
the main floor slab. The weight of the inertia block shall be at least 1.5
times the total working weight of the pump sets. The inertia blocks shall
be mounted over cased spring mounts, as described above, with minimum
25 mm. deflection. Protruding steel lugs/brackets or recesses shall be
provided in the inertia base to facilitate installation of spring mounts. The
flexible connections to the pump shall be selected to accommodate
maximum anticipated movement of the pump during normal operation.
2.2.5 All water supply booster and transfer pump set installed at roof and in plant
rooms shall be installed on floating floor foundations with cased spring
mounts as described above similar to chilled water pumps with minimum 25
mm. deflection.
2.2.6 Fan-coil units / ceiling suspended AHU / inline fans shall be provided with
spring type anti-vibration hangers having steel frame and helical
compression type springs with minimum 25 mm deflection. The springs shall
be located within synthetic rubber cups to reduce transmission of high
frequency noise and vibrations. The rubber cup shall be complete with
embedded load distribution steel plate and with projection bush to prevent
metal-to-metal contact. The metal fame and the springs shall be powder
coated for protection against corrosion. The springs shall be color coded to
facilitate identification.
2.2.7 Exhaust fans and outdoor units of split AC units shall be mounted
on anti vibration mountings in the form of multilayer rubber pads of
32 mm thickness which shall contain a counter bored hole and fitted with
rubber grommet to permit the free passage of anchor bolt , with 1.6mm (16
G) steel sheet inserts.
2.2.8 All piping / ducts connected to isolated equipment and pipes / ducts
within mechanical rooms shall be suspended from spring type anti-
vibration hangers as described above for at least first three points of
support on all sides of the equipment. Pipes running at low level shall be
mounted on cased spring mounts. The spring hangers and mounts used for
supporting pipes / ducts shall have minimum 25 mm deflection.
2.2.9 Structural columns or vertical steel pipes used as supports for water pipes
shall have extended base plates that rest on rubber pads of adequate
load bearing capacity. Suitable rubber grommets shall be provided to
avoid contact between the base plates and the fixing bolts.
2.2.10 The ratings of anti-vibration mounts and hangers shall suit the load
distribution data furnished by the equipment manufacturer with adequate
margin of safety for weights.
2.2.11 All Duct connections to AHU/ FAHU / Fans shall be provided with 100mm
wide flexible connector.
23 05 48
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 Installation:
Installation of all vibration isolation materials specified herein shall be
accomplished following the manufacturer's written instructions. Installation
instruction shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval prior to beginning the
work.
The Contractor shall include furnishing all labor, materials, tools, appliances and
equipment and performing of the installation of noise and vibration isolation
devices and system as shown, detailed and/or scheduled on the drawings
and/or specified in this section of the specification.
3.2 Liaison with general contractor:
Where aspects of noise and vibration control require involvement of the
General Contractor, such as in the provision of concrete inertia blocks
previously described, the Mechanical Contractor is to liaise fully with the
General Contractor in providing working details of requirements together with
program to ensure progress is not delayed.
23 05 48
23 05 93 - Testing, Adjusting and Balancing for HVAC
PART 1 - GENERAL

Section.
Without restricting the generality of the above, the following specific items of work
shall be included:
Number Description
230713 INSULATION
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Air and water balancing shall be performed by an independent Test and Balance
Agency retained as a direct subcontractor, independent of the Mechanical
contractor. The Main contractor and mechanical subcontractor shall provide all
tests, inspection, and preparation necessary to facilitate activities of the Test and
Balance Agency. All works by TAB agency shall be closely co-ordinate with
requirements of CxA.
B. Section Includes
1. Balancing Air Systems:
a. Constant-volume air systems.

b. Dual-duct systems.
c. Variable-air-volume systems.
d. Multizone systems.
e. Induction-unit systems.
2. Balancing Hydronic Piping Systems:
a. Constant-flow hydronic systems.

b. Variable-flow hydronic systems.
c. Primary-secondary hydronic systems.
23 05 93
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. AABC: Associated Air Balance Council.
B. NEBB: National Environmental Balancing Bureau.
C. TAB: Testing, adjusting, and balancing.
D. TABB: Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Bureau.
E. TAB Specialist: An entity engaged to perform TAB Work.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Qualification Data: Within 45 days of Contractor's Notice to Proceed, submit

documentation that the TAB contractor and this Project's TAB team members meet
the qualifications specified in "Quality Assurance" Article.
B. Contract Documents Examination Report: Within 45 days of Contractor's Notice to

Proceed, submit the Contract Documents review report as specified in Part 3.
C. Strategies and Procedures Plan: Within 90 days of Contractor's Notice to Proceed,

submit TAB strategies and step-by-step procedures as specified in "Preparation"
Article.
D. Submit one set of applicable AABC or NEBB publication that will be the basis of TAB
work
E. Certified TAB reports.
F. Sample report forms.
G. Instrument calibration reports, to include the following:
1. Instrument type and make.

2. Serial number.
3. Application.
4. Dates of use.
5. Dates of calibration.
A. TAB Contractor Qualifications: Engage a TAB entity certified by Associated Air

Balance Council (AABC) or National Environmental Balancing Bureau (NEBB) with at
least 10years of experience in testing and balancing of HVAC systems.
1. TAB Field Supervisor: Field supervisor with day to day responsibility for the work
shall be Employee of the TAB contractor and certified by AABC or NEBB with
minimum of 10 years experience in related projects and should have
completed minimum 5 similar projects.
23 05 93
2. TAB Technician: technician performing work shall be Employee of the TAB

contractor and who is certified by AABC or NEBB as a TAB technician with
minimum 5years experience in related projects and should have completed 5
similar projects
B. TAB Conference: Meet with AE / CxA on approval of the TAB strategies and
procedures plan to develop a mutual understanding of the details. Require the
participation of the TAB field supervisor and technicians. Provide 14 days' advance
notice of scheduled meeting time and location.
1. Agenda Items:
a. The Contract Documents examination report.

b. The TAB plan.
c. Coordination and cooperation of trades and subcontractors.
d. Coordination of documentation and communication flow.
C. Certify TAB field data reports and perform the following:
1. Review field data reports to validate accuracy of data and to prepare

certified TAB reports.
2. Certify that the TAB team complied with the approved TAB plan and the
procedures specified and referenced in this Specification.
D. TAB Report Forms: Use standard TAB contractor's forms approved by AE /CxA.
E. Instrumentation Type, Quantity, Accuracy, and Calibration: As described in

ASHRAE 111, Section 5, "Instrumentation."
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Partial Owner Occupancy: Owner may occupy completed areas of building

before Substantial Completion. Cooperate with Owner during TAB operations to
minimize conflicts with Owner's operations.
1.7 COORDINATION
A. Notice: Provide 14 days advance notice for each test. Include scheduled test
dates and times.
B. Perform TAB after leakage and pressure tests on air and water distribution systems
have been satisfactorily completed.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)
23 05 93
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 TAB SPECIALISTS
A. Subject to compliance with requirements, available TAB contractors that may be

engaged include, but are not limited to, the following:
3.2 EXAMINATION
A. Examine the Contract Documents to become familiar with Project requirements and
to discover conditions in systems' designs that may preclude proper TAB of systems
and equipment.
B. Examine systems for installed balancing devices, such as test ports, gage cocks,
thermometer wells, flow-control devices, balancing valves and fittings, and manual
volume dampers. Verify that locations of these balancing devices are accessible.
C. Examine the approved submittals for HVAC systems and equipment.
D. Examine design data including HVAC system descriptions, statements of design

assumptions for environmental conditions and systems' output, and statements of
philosophies and assumptions about HVAC system and equipment controls.
E. Examine ceiling plenums and underfloor air plenums used for supply, return, or relief
air to verify that they meet the leakage class of connected ducts as specified in
Division 23 Section Metal Ducts / Nonmetal Ducts and are properly separated from
adjacent areas. Verify that penetrations in plenum walls are sealed and fire-
stopped as required.
F. Examine equipment performance data including fan and pump curves.
1. Relate performance data to Project conditions and requirements, including

system effects that can create undesired or unpredicted conditions that
cause reduced capacities in all or part of a system.
2. Calculate system-effect factors to reduce performance ratings of HVAC
equipment when installed under conditions different from the conditions used
to rate equipment performance. To calculate system effects for air systems,
use tables and charts found in AMCA 201, "Fans and Systems," or in SMACNA's
"HVAC Systems - Duct Design." Compare results with the design data and
installed conditions.
G. Examine system and equipment installations and verify that field quality-control
testing, cleaning, and adjusting specified in individual Sections have been
performed.
H. Examine test reports specified in individual system and equipment Sections.
I. Examine HVAC equipment and filters and verify that bearings are greased, belts are
aligned and tight, and equipment with functioning controls is ready for operation.
23 05 93
J. Examine terminal units, such as variable-air-volume boxes, and verify that they are
accessible and their controls are connected and functioning.
K. Examine strainers. Verify that startup screens are replaced by permanent screens
with indicated perforations.
L. Examine three-way valves for proper installation for their intended function of
diverting or mixing fluid flows.
M. Examine heat-transfer coils for correct piping connections and for clean and
straight fins.
N. Examine system pumps to ensure absence of entrained air in the suction piping.
O. Examine operating safety interlocks and controls on HVAC equipment.
P. Report deficiencies discovered before and during performance of TAB procedures.

Observe and record system reactions to changes in conditions. Record default set
points if different from indicated values.
3.3 PREPARATION
A. Prepare a TAB plan that includes strategies and step-by-step procedures.
B. Complete system-readiness checks and prepare reports. Verify the following:
1. Permanent electrical-power wiring is complete.

2. Hydronic systems are filled, clean, and free of air.
3. Automatic temperature-control systems are operational.
4. Equipment and duct access doors are securely closed.
5. Balance, smoke, and fire dampers are open.
6. Isolating and balancing valves are open and control valves are operational.
7. Ceilings are installed in critical areas where air-pattern adjustments are
required and access to balancing devices is provided.
8. Windows and doors can be closed so indicated conditions for system
operations can be met.
3.4 GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR TESTING AND BALANCING
A. Perform testing and balancing procedures on each system according to the

procedures contained in AABC's "National Standards for Total System Balance or
NEBB's "Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of Environmental
Systems or SMACNA's "HVAC Systems - Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing,
ASHRAE 111 and in this Section.
1. Comply with requirements in ASHRAE 62.1-2004, Section 7.2.2, "Air Balancing."
B. Cut insulation, ducts, pipes, and equipment cabinets for installation of test probes to
the minimum extent necessary for TAB procedures.
1. After testing and balancing, patch probe holes in ducts with same material
and thickness as used to construct ducts.
23 05 93
2. After testing and balancing, install test ports and duct access doors that
comply with requirements in Division 23 Section "Air Duct Accessories."
3. Install and join new insulation that matches removed materials. Restore
insulation, coverings, vapor barrier, and finish according to Division 23 Section
"HVAC Insulation."
C. Mark equipment and balancing devices, including damper-control positions, valve

position indicators, fan-speed-control levers, and similar controls and devices, with
paint or other suitable, permanent identification material to show final settings.
D. Take and report testing and balancing measurements metric (SI) units.
3.5 GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR BALANCING AIR SYSTEMS
A. Prepare test reports for both fans and outlets. Obtain manufacturer's outlet factors
and recommended testing procedures. Crosscheck the summation of required
outlet volumes with required fan volumes.
B. Prepare schematic diagrams of systems' "as-built" duct layouts.
C. For variable-air-volume systems, develop a plan to simulate diversity.
D. Determine the best locations in main and branch ducts for accurate duct-airflow
measurements.
E. Check airflow patterns from the outdoor-air louvers and dampers and the return-
and exhaust-air dampers through the supply-fan discharge and mixing dampers.
F. Locate start-stop and disconnect switches, electrical interlocks, and motor starters.
G. Verify that motor starters are equipped with properly sized thermal protection.
H. Check dampers for proper position to achieve desired airflow path.
I. Check for airflow blockages.
J. Check condensate drains for proper connections and functioning.
K. Check for proper sealing of air-handling-unit components.
L. Verify that air duct system is sealed as specified in Division 23 Section "Metal Ducts."
3.6 PROCEDURES FOR CONSTANT-VOLUME AIR SYSTEMS
A. Adjust fans to deliver total indicated airflows within the maximum allowable fan
speed listed by fan manufacturer.
1. Measure total airflow.
a. Where sufficient space in ducts is unavailable for Pitot-tube traverse

measurements, measure airflow at terminal outlets and inlets and
calculate the total airflow.
23 05 93
2. Measure fan static pressures as follows to determine actual static pressure:
a. Measure outlet static pressure as far downstream from the fan as

practical and upstream from restrictions in ducts such as elbows and
transitions.
b. Measure static pressure directly at the fan outlet or through the flexible
connection.
c. Measure inlet static pressure of single-inlet fans in the inlet duct as near
the fan as possible, upstream from the flexible connection, and
downstream from duct restrictions.
d. Measure inlet static pressure of double-inlet fans through the wall of the
plenum that houses the fan.
3. Measure static pressure across each component that makes up an air-

handling unit, rooftop unit, and other air-handling and -treating equipment.
a. Report the cleanliness status of filters and the time static pressures are
measured.
4. Measure static pressures entering and leaving other devices, such as sound
traps, heat-recovery equipment, and air washers, under final balanced
conditions.
5. Review Record Documents to determine variations in design static pressures
versus actual static pressures. Calculate actual system-effect factors.
Recommend adjustments to accommodate actual conditions.
6. Obtain approval from AE/CxA for adjustment of fan speed higher or lower
than indicated speed.
7. Do not make fan-speed adjustments that result in motor overload. Consult
equipment manufacturers about fan-speed safety factors. Modulate
dampers and measure fan-motor amperage to ensure that no overload will
occur. Measure amperage in full-cooling, and any other operating mode to
determine the maximum required brake horsepower.
B. Adjust volume dampers for main duct, submain ducts, and major branch ducts to
indicated airflows within specified tolerances.
1. Measure airflow of submain and branch ducts.
a. Where sufficient space in submain and branch ducts is unavailable for

Pitot-tube traverse measurements, measure airflow at terminal outlets
and inlets and calculate the total airflow for that zone.
2. Measure static pressure at a point downstream from the balancing damper,

and adjust volume dampers until the proper static pressure is achieved.
3. Remeasure each submain and branch duct after all have been adjusted.
Continue to adjust submain and branch ducts to indicated airflows within
specified tolerances.
C. Measure air outlets and inlets without making adjustments.
1. Measure terminal outlets using a direct-reading hood or outlet manufacturer's

written instructions and calculating factors.
23 05 93
D. Adjust air outlets and inlets for each space to indicated airflows within specified
tolerances of indicated values. Make adjustments using branch volume dampers
rather than extractors and the dampers at air terminals.
1. Adjust each outlet in same room or space to within specified tolerances of

indicated quantities without generating noise levels above the limitations
prescribed by the Contract Documents.
2. Adjust patterns of adjustable outlets for proper distribution without drafts.
3.7 PROCEDURES FOR VARIABLE-AIR-VOLUME SYSTEMS
A. Compensating for Diversity: When the total airflow of all terminal units is more than
the indicated airflow of the fan, place a selected number of terminal units at a
minimum set-point airflow with the remainder at maximum-airflow condition until the
total airflow of the terminal units equals the indicated airflow of the fan. Select the
reduced-airflow terminal units so they are distributed evenly among the branch
ducts.
B. Pressure-Independent, Variable-Air-Volume Systems: After the fan systems have

been adjusted, adjust the variable-air-volume systems as follows:
1. Set outdoor-air dampers at minimum, and set return- and exhaust-air dampers
at a position that simulates full-cooling load.
2. Select the terminal unit that is most critical to the supply-fan airflow and static
pressure. Measure static pressure. Adjust system static pressure so the
entering static pressure for the critical terminal unit is not less than the sum of
the terminal-unit manufacturer's recommended minimum inlet static pressure
plus the static pressure needed to overcome terminal-unit discharge system
losses.
3. Measure total system airflow. Adjust to within indicated airflow.
4. Set terminal units at maximum airflow and adjust controller or regulator to
deliver the designed maximum airflow. Use terminal-unit manufacturer's
written instructions to make this adjustment. When total airflow is correct,
balance the air outlets downstream from terminal units the same as described
for constant-volume air systems.
5. Set terminal units at minimum airflow and adjust controller or regulator to
deliver the designed minimum airflow. Check air outlets for a proportional
reduction in airflow the same as described for constant-volume air systems.
a. If air outlets are out of balance at minimum airflow, report the condition
but leave outlets balanced for maximum airflow.
6. Remeasure the return airflow to the fan while operating at maximum return
airflow and minimum outdoor airflow.
a. Adjust the fan and balance the return-air ducts and inlets the same as
described for constant-volume air systems.
7. Measure static pressure at the most critical terminal unit and adjust the static-
pressure controller at the main supply-air sensing station to ensure that
adequate static pressure is maintained at the most critical unit.
8. Record final fan-performance data.
23 05 93
C. Pressure-Dependent, Variable-Air-Volume Systems without Diversity: After the fan

systems have been adjusted, adjust the variable-air-volume systems as follows:
1. Balance variable-air-volume systems the same as described for constant-

volume air systems.
2. Set terminal units and supply fan at full-airflow condition.
3. Adjust inlet dampers of each terminal unit to indicated airflow and verify
operation of the static-pressure controller. When total airflow is correct,
balance the air outlets downstream from terminal units the same as described
for constant-volume air systems.
4. Readjust fan airflow for final maximum readings.
5. Measure operating static pressure at the sensor that controls the supply fan if
one is installed, and verify operation of the static-pressure controller.
6. Set supply fan at minimum airflow if minimum airflow is indicated. Measure
static pressure to verify that it is being maintained by the controller.
7. Set terminal units at minimum airflow and adjust controller or regulator to
deliver the designed minimum airflow. Check air outlets for a proportional
reduction in airflow the same as described for constant-volume air systems.
a. If air outlets are out of balance at minimum airflow, report the condition
but leave the outlets balanced for maximum airflow.
8. Measure the return airflow to the fan while operating at maximum return
airflow and minimum outdoor airflow.
a. Adjust the fan and balance the return-air ducts and inlets the same as
described for constant-volume air systems.
D. Pressure-Dependent, Variable-Air-Volume Systems with Diversity: After the fan

systems have been adjusted, adjust the variable-air-volume systems as follows:
1. Set system at maximum indicated airflow by setting the required number of

terminal units at minimum airflow. Select the reduced-airflow terminal units so
they are distributed evenly among the branch ducts.
2. Adjust supply fan to maximum indicated airflow with the variable-airflow
controller set at maximum airflow.
3. Set terminal units at full-airflow condition.
4. Adjust terminal units starting at the supply-fan end of the system and
continuing progressively to the end of the system. Adjust inlet dampers of
each terminal unit to indicated airflow. When total airflow is correct, balance
the air outlets downstream from terminal units the same as described for
constant-volume air systems.
5. Adjust terminal units for minimum airflow.
6. Measure static pressure at the sensor.
7. Measure the return airflow to the fan while operating at maximum return
airflow and minimum outdoor airflow. Adjust the fan and balance the return-
air ducts and inlets the same as described for constant-volume air systems.
3.8 PROCEDURES FOR MULTIZONE SYSTEMS
A. Set unit at maximum airflow through the cooling coil.
B. Adjust each zone's balancing damper to achieve indicated airflow within the zone.
23 05 93
3.9 GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR HYDRONIC SYSTEMS
A. Prepare test reports with pertinent design data, and number in sequence starting at
pump to end of system. Check the sum of branch-circuit flows against the
approved pump flow rate. Correct variations that exceed plus or minus 5 percent.
B. Prepare schematic diagrams of systems' "as-built" piping layouts.
C. Prepare hydronic systems for testing and balancing according to the following, in
addition to the general preparation procedures specified above:
1. Open all manual valves for maximum flow.

2. Check liquid level in expansion tank.
3. Check makeup water-station pressure gage for adequate pressure for highest
vent.
4. Check flow-control valves for specified sequence of operation, and set at
indicated flow.
5. Set differential-pressure control valves at the specified differential pressure.
Do not set at fully closed position when pump is positive-displacement type
unless several terminal valves are kept open.
6. Set system controls so automatic valves are wide open to heat exchangers.
7. Check pump-motor load. If motor is overloaded, throttle main flow-balancing
device so motor nameplate rating is not exceeded.
8. Check air vents for a forceful liquid flow exiting from vents when manually
operated.
3.10 PROCEDURES FOR CONSTANT-FLOW HYDRONIC SYSTEMS
A. Measure water flow at pumps. Use the following procedures except for positive-
displacement pumps:
1. Verify impeller size by operating the pump with the discharge valve closed.
Read pressure differential across the pump. Convert pressure to head and
correct for differences in gage heights. Note the point on manufacturer's
pump curve at zero flow and verify that the pump has the intended impeller
size.
a. If impeller sizes must be adjusted to achieve pump performance, obtain

approval from AE / CxA and comply with requirements in Division 23
Section "Hydronic Pumps."
2. Check system resistance. With all valves open, read pressure differential
across the pump and mark pump manufacturer's head-capacity curve.
Adjust pump discharge valve until indicated water flow is achieved.
a. Monitor motor performance during procedures and do not operate

motors in overload conditions.
3. Verify pump-motor brake horsepower. Calculate the intended brake

horsepower for the system based on pump manufacturer's performance
data. Compare calculated brake horsepower with nameplate data on the
23 05 93
pump motor. Report conditions where actual amperage exceeds motor

nameplate amperage.
4. Report flow rates that are not within plus or minus 10 percent of design.
B. Measure flow at all automatic flow control valves to verify that valves are
functioning as designed.
C. Measure flow at all pressure-independent characterized control valves, with valves

in fully open position, to verify that valves are functioning as designed.
D. Set calibrated balancing valves, if installed, at calculated presetting.
E. Measure flow at all stations and adjust, where necessary, to obtain first balance.
1. System components that have Cv rating or an accurately cataloged flow-

pressure-drop relationship may be used as a flow-indicating device.
F. Measure flow at main balancing station and set main balancing device to achieve
flow that is 5 percent greater than indicated flow.
G. Adjust balancing stations to within specified tolerances of indicated flow rate as

follows:
1. Determine the balancing station with the highest percentage over indicated
flow.
2. Adjust each station in turn, beginning with the station with the highest
percentage over indicated flow and proceeding to the station with the
lowest percentage over indicated flow.
3. Record settings and mark balancing devices.
H. Measure pump flow rate and make final measurements of pump amperage,
voltage, rpm, pump heads, and systems' pressures and temperatures including
outdoor-air temperature.
I. Measure the differential-pressure-control-valve settings existing at the conclusion of

balancing.
J. Check settings and operation of each safety valve. Record settings.
3.11 PROCEDURES FOR VARIABLE-FLOW HYDRONIC SYSTEMS
A. Balance systems with automatic two- and three-way control valves by setting
systems at maximum flow through heat-exchange terminals and proceed as
specified above for hydronic systems.
3.12 PROCEDURES FOR PRIMARY-SECONDARY HYDRONIC SYSTEMS
A. Balance the primary circuit flow first and then balance the secondary circuits.
23 05 93
3.13 PROCEDURES FOR STEAM SYSTEMS
A. Measure and record upstream and downstream pressure of each piece of

equipment.
B. Measure and record upstream and downstream steam pressure of pressure-

reducing valves.
C. Check settings and operation of automatic temperature-control valves, self-

contained control valves, and pressure-reducing valves. Record final settings.
D. Check settings and operation of each safety valve. Record settings.
E. Verify the operation of each steam trap.
3.14 PROCEDURES FOR HEAT EXCHANGERS
A. Measure water flow through all circuits.
B. Adjust water flow to within specified tolerances.
C. Measure inlet and outlet water temperatures.
D. Measure inlet pressure.
E. Check settings and operation of safety and relief valves. Record settings.
3.15 PROCEDURES FOR MOTORS
A. Motors, 1/2 HP and Larger: Test at final balanced conditions and record the
following data:
1. Manufacturer's name, model number, and serial number.

2. Motor horsepower rating.
3. Motor rpm.
4. Efficiency rating.
5. Nameplate and measured voltage, each phase.
6. Nameplate and measured amperage, each phase.
7. Starter thermal-protection-element rating.
B. Motors Driven by Variable-Frequency Controllers: Test for proper operation at

speeds varying from minimum to maximum. Test the manual bypass of the
controller to prove proper operation. Record observations including name of
controller manufacturer, model number, serial number, and nameplate data.
3.16 PROCEDURES FOR CONDENSING UNITS
A. Verify proper rotation of fans.
B. Measure entering- and leaving-air temperatures.
23 05 93
C. Record compressor data.
3.17 PROCEDURES FOR BOILERS
A. Hydronic Boilers: Measure and record entering- and leaving-water temperatures

and water flow.
B. Steam Boilers: Measure and record entering-water temperature and flow and
leaving-steam pressure, temperature, and flow.
3.18 PROCEDURES FOR HEAT-TRANSFER COILS
A. Measure, adjust, and record the following data for each water coil:
1. Entering- and leaving-water temperature.

2. Water flow rate.
3. Water pressure drop.
4. Dry-bulb temperature of entering and leaving air.
5. Wet-bulb temperature of entering and leaving air for cooling coils.
6. Airflow.
7. Air pressure drop.
B. Measure, adjust, and record the following data for each electric heating coil:
1. Nameplate data.
2. Airflow.
3. Entering- and leaving-air temperature at full load.
4. Voltage and amperage input of each phase at full load and at each
incremental stage.
5. Calculated kilowatt at full load.
6. Fuse or circuit-breaker rating for overload protection.
C. Measure, adjust, and record the following data for each steam coil:

2. Airflow.
4. Inlet steam pressure.
D. Measure, adjust, and record the following data for each refrigerant coil:

2. Wet-bulb temperature of entering and leaving air.
3. Airflow.
5. Refrigerant suction pressure and temperature.
3.19 PROCEDURES FOR TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING EXISTING SYSTEMS
A. Perform a preconstruction inspection of existing equipment that is to remain and be

reused.
23 05 93
1. Measure and record the operating speed, airflow, and static pressure of each
fan.
2. Measure motor voltage and amperage. Compare the values to motor
nameplate information.
3. Check the refrigerant charge.
4. Check the condition of filters.
5. Check the condition of coils.
6. Check the operation of the drain pan and condensate-drain trap.
7. Check bearings and other lubricated parts for proper lubrication.
8. Report on the operating condition of the equipment and the results of the
measurements taken. Report deficiencies.
B. Before performing testing and balancing of existing systems, inspect existing

equipment that is to remain and be reused to verify that existing equipment has
been cleaned and refurbished. Verify the following:
1. New filters are installed.

2. Coils are clean and fins combed.
3. Drain pans are clean.
4. Fans are clean.
5. Bearings and other parts are properly lubricated.
6. Deficiencies noted in the preconstruction report are corrected.
C. Perform testing and balancing of existing systems to the extent that existing systems
are affected by the renovation work.
1. Compare the indicated airflow of the renovated work to the measured fan
airflows, and determine the new fan speed and the face velocity of filters and
coils.
2. Verify that the indicated airflows of the renovated work result in filter and coil
face velocities and fan speeds that are within the acceptable limits defined
by equipment manufacturer.
3. If calculations increase or decrease the air flow rates and water flow rates by
more than 5 percent, make equipment adjustments to achieve the
calculated rates. If increase or decrease is 5 percent or less, equipment
adjustments are not required.
4. Balance each air outlet.
3.20 TOLERANCES
A. Set HVAC system's air flow rates and water flow rates within the following tolerances:
1. Supply Air, Return Air, Fresh Air, Exhaust Air, Makeup Air, Pressurization Air Fans
and Equipment with Fans: Minus 0 to Plus10%.
2. Air Outlets and Inlets: Minus 2 to Plus 5%
3. Cooling-Water Flow Rate: Minus 0 or Plus 5%.
3.21 REPORTING
A. Initial Construction-Phase Report: Based on examination of the Contract

Documents as specified in "Examination" Article, prepare a report on the adequacy
of design for systems' balancing devices. Recommend changes and additions to
23 05 93
systems' balancing devices to facilitate proper performance measuring and

balancing. Recommend changes and additions to HVAC systems and general
construction to allow access for performance measuring and balancing devices.
B. Status Reports: Prepare [weekly] [biweekly] [monthly] <Insert time interval> progress
reports to describe completed procedures, procedures in progress, and scheduled
procedures. Include a list of deficiencies and problems found in systems being
tested and balanced. Prepare a separate report for each system and each
building floor for systems serving multiple floors.
3.22 FINAL REPORT
A. General: Prepare a certified written report; tabulate and divide the report into
separate sections for tested systems and balanced systems.
1. Include a certification sheet at the front of the report's binder, signed and
sealed by the certified testing and balancing engineer.
2. Include a list of instruments used for procedures, along with proof of
calibration.
B. Final Report Contents: In addition to certified field-report data, include the

following:
1. Pump curves.
2. Fan curves.
3. Manufacturers' test data.
4. Field test reports prepared by system and equipment installers.
5. Other information relative to equipment performance; do not include Shop
Drawings and product data.
C. General Report Data: In addition to form titles and entries, include the following
data:
1. Title page.
2. Name and address of the TAB contractor.
3. Project name.
4. Project location.
5. AE name and address.
6. Engineer's name and address.
7. Contractor's name and address.
8. Report date.
9. Signature of TAB supervisor who certifies the report.
10. Table of Contents with the total number of pages defined for each section of
the report. Number each page in the report.
11. Summary of contents including the following:
a. Indicated versus final performance.

b. Notable characteristics of systems.
c. Description of system operation sequence if it varies from the Contract
Documents.
12. Nomenclature sheets for each item of equipment.

13. Data for terminal units, including manufacturer's name, type, size, and fittings.
14. Notes to explain why certain final data in the body of reports vary from
indicated values.
23 05 93
15. Test conditions for fans and pump performance forms including the following:
a. Settings for outdoor-, return-, and exhaust-air dampers.

b. Conditions of filters.
c. Cooling coil, wet- and dry-bulb conditions.
d. Face and bypass damper settings at coils.
e. Fan drive settings including settings and percentage of maximum pitch
diameter.
f. Inlet vane settings for variable-air-volume systems.
g. Settings for supply-air, static-pressure controller.
h. Other system operating conditions that affect performance.
D. System Diagrams: Include schematic layouts of air and hydronic distribution

systems. Present each system with single-line diagram and include the following:
1. Quantities of outdoor, supply, return, and exhaust airflows.

2. Water and steam flow rates.
3. Duct, outlet, and inlet sizes.
4. Pipe and valve sizes and locations.
5. Terminal units.
6. Balancing stations.
7. Position of balancing devices.
E. Air-Handling-Unit Test Reports: For air-handling units with coils, include the following:
1. Unit Data:
a. Unit identification.
b. Location.
c. Make and type.
d. Model number and unit size.
e. Manufacturer's serial number.
f. Unit arrangement and class.
g. Discharge arrangement.
h. Sheave make, size in mm, and bore.
i. Center-to-center dimensions of sheave, and amount of adjustments in
mm.
j. Number, make, and size of belts.
k. Number, type, and size of filters.
2. Motor Data:
a. Motor make, and frame type and size.

b. Horsepower and rpm.
c. Volts, phase, and hertz.
d. Full-load amperage and service factor.
e. Sheave make, size in mm, and bore.
f. Center-to-center dimensions of sheave, and amount of adjustments in
mm.
3. Test Data (Indicated and Actual Values):
a. Total air flow rate in L/s.

b. Total system static pressure in Pa.
23 05 93
c. Fan rpm.
d. Discharge static pressure in Pa.
e. Filter static-pressure differential in Pa.
f. Preheat-coil static-pressure differential in Pa.
g. Cooling-coil static-pressure differential in Pa.
h. Heating-coil static-pressure differential in Pa.
i. Outdoor airflow in L/s.
j. Return airflow in L/s.
k. Outdoor-air damper position.
l. Return-air damper position.
m. Vortex damper position.
F. Apparatus-Coil Test Reports:
1. Coil Data:
a. System identification.
b. Location.
c. Coil type.
d. Number of rows.
e. Fin spacing in fins per inch .
f. Make and model number.
g. Face area in sq. m.
h. Tube size in DN.
i. Tube and fin materials.
j. Circuiting arrangement.
a. Air flow rate in L/s.

b. Average face velocity in m/s.
c. Air pressure drop in Pa.
d. Outdoor-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in deg C.
e. Return-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in deg C.
f. Entering-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in deg C.
g. Leaving-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures in deg C.
h. Water flow rate in L/s.
i. Water pressure differential in kPa.
j. Entering-water temperature in deg C.
k. Leaving-water temperature in deg C.
l. Refrigerant expansion valve and refrigerant types.
m. Refrigerant suction pressure in kPa.
n. Refrigerant suction temperature in deg C.
o. Inlet steam pressure in kPa.
G. Gas- and Oil-Fired Heat Apparatus Test Reports: In addition to manufacturer's

factory startup equipment reports, include the following:
1. Unit Data:
b. Location.
c. Make and type.
d. Model number and unit size.
23 05 93

f. Fuel type in input data.
g. Output capacity in kW.
h. Ignition type.
i. Burner-control types.
j. Motor horsepower and rpm.
k. Motor volts, phase, and hertz.
l. Motor full-load amperage and service factor.
m. Sheave make, size in mm, and bore.
n. Center-to-center dimensions of sheave, and amount of adjustments in
mm.
a. Total air flow rate in L/s.

b. Entering-air temperature in deg C.
c. Leaving-air temperature in deg C.
d. Air temperature differential in deg C.
e. Entering-air static pressure in Pa.
f. Leaving-air static pressure in Pa.
g. Air static-pressure differential in Pa.
h. Low-fire fuel input in kW.
i. High-fire fuel input in kW.
j. Manifold pressure in kPa.
k. High-temperature-limit setting in deg C.
l. Operating set point in kW.
m. Motor voltage at each connection.
n. Motor amperage for each phase.
o. Heating value of fuel in kW.
H. Electric-Coil Test Reports: For electric furnaces, duct coils, and electric coils installed
in central-station air-handling units, include the following:
1. Unit Data:
b. Location.
c. Coil identification.
d. Capacity in kW.
e. Number of stages.
f. Connected volts, phase, and hertz.
g. Rated amperage.
h. Air flow rate in L/s.
i. Face area in sq. m.
j. Minimum face velocity in m/s.
a. Heat output in kW.

b. Air flow rate in L/s.
c. Air velocity in m/s.
d. Entering-air temperature in deg C.
e. Leaving-air temperature in deg C.
f. Voltage at each connection.
23 05 93
g. Amperage for each phase.
I. Fan Test Reports: For supply, return, and exhaust fans, include the following:
1. Fan Data:
b. Location.
c. Make and type.
d. Model number and size.
f. Arrangement and class.
g. Sheave make, size in mm, and bore.
h. Center-to-center dimensions of sheave, and amount of adjustments in
mm.
2. Motor Data:
a. Motor make, and frame type and size.

b. Horsepower and rpm.
c. Volts, phase, and hertz.
d. Full-load amperage and service factor.
e. Sheave make, size in mm, and bore.
f. Center-to-center dimensions of sheave, and amount of adjustments
mm.
g. Number, make, and size of belts.
a. Total airflow rate in L/s.

b. Total system static pressure in Pa.
c. Fan rpm.
d. Discharge static pressure in Pa.
e. Suction static pressure in Pa.
J. Round, Flat-Oval, and Rectangular Duct Traverse Reports: Include a diagram with a
grid representing the duct cross-section and record the following:
1. Report Data:
a. System and air-handling-unit number.

b. Location and zone.
c. Traverse air temperature in deg C.
d. Duct static pressure in Pa.
e. Duct size in mm.
f. Duct area in sq. m.
g. Indicated air flow rate in L/s.
h. Indicated velocity in m/s.
i. Actual air flow rate in L/s.
j. Actual average velocity in m/s.
k. Barometric pressure in Pa.
23 05 93
K. Air-Terminal-Device Reports:
1. Unit Data:
a. System and air-handling unit identification.

c. Apparatus used for test.
d. Area served.
e. Make.
f. Number from system diagram.
g. Type and model number.
h. Size.
i. Effective area in sq. m.

b. Air velocity in m/s.
c. Preliminary air flow rate as needed in L/s.
d. Preliminary velocity as needed in m/s.
e. Final air flow rate in L/s.
f. Final velocity in m/s.
g. Space temperature in deg C.
L. System-Coil Reports: For reheat coils and water coils of terminal units, include the
following:
1. Unit Data:
a. System and air-handling-unit identification.

c. Room or riser served.
d. Coil make and size.
e. Flowmeter type.

b. Entering-water temperature in deg C.
c. Leaving-water temperature in deg C.
d. Water pressure drop in kPa.
e. Entering-air temperature in deg C.
f. Leaving-air temperature in deg C.
M. Pump Test Reports: Calculate impeller size by plotting the shutoff head on pump
curves and include the following:
1. Unit Data:
a. Unit identification.
b. Location.
c. Service.
d. Make and size.
e. Model number and serial number.
23 05 93
f. Water flow rate in L/s.

g. Water pressure differential in kPa.
h. Required net positive suction head in kPa.
i. Pump rpm.
j. Impeller diameter in mm.
k. Motor make and frame size.
l. Motor horsepower and rpm.
m. Voltage at each connection.
n. Amperage for each phase.
o. Full-load amperage and service factor.
p. Seal type.
a. Static head in kPa.

b. Pump shutoff pressure in kPa.
c. Actual impeller size in mm.
d. Full-open flow rate in L/s.
e. Full-open pressure in kPa.
f. Final discharge pressure in kPa.
g. Final suction pressure in kPa.
h. Final total pressure in kPa.
i. Final water flow rate in L/s.
j. Voltage at each connection.
k. Amperage for each phase.
N. Instrument Calibration Reports:
1. Report Data:
a. Instrument type and make.

b. Serial number.
c. Application.
d. Dates of use.
e. Dates of calibration.
3.23 INSPECTIONS
A. Initial Inspection:
1. After testing and balancing are complete, operate each system and
randomly check measurements to verify that the system is operating
according to the final test and balance readings documented in the final
report.
2. Check the following for each system:
a. Measure airflow of at least 10 percent of air outlets.

b. Measure water flow of at least 10 percent of terminals.
c. Measure room temperature at each thermostat/temperature sensor.
Compare the reading to the set point.
d. Verify that balancing devices are marked with final balance position.
e. Note deviations from the Contract Documents in the final report.
23 05 93
B. Final Inspection:
1. After initial inspection is complete and documentation by random checks

verifies that testing and balancing are complete and accurately
documented in the final report, request that a final inspection be made by AE
/ CxA.
2. The TAB contractor's test and balance engineer shall conduct the inspection
in the presence of AE / CxA.
3. AE / CxA shall randomly select measurements, documented in the final report,
to be rechecked. Rechecking shall be limited to either 10 percent of the total
measurements recorded or the extent of measurements that can be
accomplished in a normal 8-hour business day.
4. If rechecks yield measurements that differ from the measurements
documented in the final report by more than the tolerances allowed, the
measurements shall be noted as "FAILED."
5. If the number of "FAILED" measurements is greater than 10 percent of the total
measurements checked during the final inspection, the testing and balancing
shall be considered incomplete and shall be rejected.
C. TAB Work will be considered defective if it does not pass final inspections. If TAB
Work fails, proceed as follows:
1. Recheck all measurements and make adjustments. Revise the final report
and balancing device settings to include all changes; resubmit the final report
and request a second final inspection.
2. If the second final inspection also fails, Owner may contract the services of
another TAB contractor to complete TAB Work according to the Contract
Documents and deduct the cost of the services from the original TAB
contractor's final payment.
3.24 ADDITIONAL TESTS
A. Within 90 days of completing TAB, perform additional TAB to verify that balanced
conditions are being maintained throughout and to correct unusual conditions.
B. Seasonal Periods: If initial TAB procedures were not performed during near-peak
summer and winter conditions, perform additional TAB during near-peak summer
conditions.
23 05 93
23 07 13 - Insulation
PART 1 GENERAL
Provide and install thermal insulation to the pipe work and ducting systems
described elsewhere in accordance with the information provided on the
drawings and the requirements of this section.
This section needs to be read in conjunction with the following:
Number Description
1.2.1 Workmanship and Materials: The installations throughout are to be of the best
quality materials erected by skilled workmen under competent supervision
and left in good working order on completion to the satisfaction of the
Architect.
1.2.2 Compliance with Standards and Regulations: Except where otherwise

specified all work is to conform with the relevant provisions of the appropriate
British Standards and British Standard Codes of Practice currently applicable
including the following:
BS 476: Part 6 Method of test for Fire Propagation of products
BS 476: Part 7 Method for classification of the surface spread of flame
products
BS 5422 The Use of Thermal Insulating Materials
BS 5970 Thermal Insulation of Pipe work and Equipment
BS EN 13501-1-2002 Reaction to fire tasks for building products.
1.3 Submittals
1.3.1 Extent of Insulation: Submit confirmation of the extent of insulation to be

applied to each service together with the type of insulation to be applied in
each case. This information to be supplemented with drawings or sketches if
necessary to clarify the full extent of the work.
23 07 13
1.3.2 Product data: Submit manufacturer's data for all insulating materials to be
used giving in each case details of type of insulation, density, thermal
transmittance, finish, etc., together with full details of manufacturer's
recommended application procedures.
1.3.3 Application Data: Provide specific confirmation of the way in which each
materials is to be applied to each service including special arrangements to
cover the insulation of such items as valves, brackets and similar ancillary
equipment. This information to be supplemented with drawings or sketches as
required.
1.3.4 ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1-2010 Compliance: Provide compliance form as per

PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 Insulation for chilled water pipes
2.1.1 Scope:
All chilled water and cold-water piping including all valves, flanges, fittings and
similar ancillaries to be insulated.
2.1.2 Materials:
Insulation for Chilled Water Pipes upto 8in(200mm) shall be Factory Formed, pre
slit, Flame retarded NBR based closed ell, flexible elastomeric foam insulation
with factory applied adhesive, conforming to ASTM C534. Insulation shall have
following:
1.Free of CFCs, HFCs, HCFCs, PBDEs, formaldehyde and fiber.
2.UL Greenguard Gold Certified for Low VOC emission. VOC to be limited to
contribute to LEED 2009 IEQ credit 4.1 / 4.2
growth
7. Water Absorption : <0.0% according to ASTM C209
8. Flame Spread / Smoke Development : <25/50 according to ASTM E84
10.Odor Emission : No objectionable odor according to ASTM C1304
11.Flexibility : Passed cold Crack test at -40oC according to ASTM D1056
12.Milddew/Fungi Resistance : Passed according to UL181, ASTMG21.
13.Air Erosion : 4000FPM Rating according to ASTM C1071
14.Leachable Chlorides: <0.05% water soluble chloride ions according to DIN
1988
15.Sound Absorption Coefficients to ASTM C423

1in(25mm) 0.06 0.17 1.06 0.32 0.67 0.54 0.55
16.Sound Insertion Loss(dB) to ASTM E477
Thickness 125HZ 250 HZ 500 HZ 1000 HZ 2000 HZ 4000 HZ 8000HZ

25mm 1 3 20 7 12 12 12
23 07 13

C177
18. Dimensional Stability: <7% shrinkage according to ASTMC534.
Minimum thickness of insulation for chilled water pipes (supply and return) shall
be as follows.
Pipe Size Insulation Thickness

50mm 25mm
(65mm and above 50mm
All Chilled Water fittings such as elbows, tees, p-traps, flanges valves etc shall be
provided with factory fabricated formed insulation of similar material.
For Pipes and fittings above 8in(200mm) sheet insulation with factory applied
adhesive similar to material detailed above shall be used.
2.1.3 Finish:
1. Pipe work exposed on the roof, exposed to view and in plant rooms
basement car park shall be finished with ‘UV’ protection spray paint and
with aluminium cladding suitable for outdoor use.
2. For chiller water piping inside the building in ceiling space and
conditioned areas, apply a water based coating/vapor barrier. The dry
film of the coating shall conform to Class ‘O’ fire rating.
3. Provide pipe support inserts where piping is supported on pipe

hangers/brackets. The inserts shall be of high density foam material
capable of supporting the operation load of piping.
4. The insulation shall be installed and finished as per the insulation

5. Additional circumferential bends of 50mm wide reinforced self-adhesive

foil tape shall be installed 300mm centre to provide extra securement. All
circumferential joints shall be sealed with vapor tight sealant.
6. Complete insulation exposed to view including those in plant rooms or

those exposed to ambient conditions insulation shall be protected with
0.6mm (24G) aluminum sheet jacketing.
7. Valves and strainers and fittings are to be finished in purpose made 0.6mm
(24G) `Hammer clad' sheet metal `quick release' insulated boxes.
2.2 Insulation for AC condensate drains
2.2.1 Scope
Drain connections for the air handling units, fan coil units, split indoor units and
the point of discharge to the drainage system.
23 07 13
2.2.2 Materials
CD Piping shall be insulated with 19 mm thick, flexible closed cell elastomeric
material with properties similar to that detailed above. The insulation shall non-
slit type The insulation exposed to ambient shall be painted with UV protection
paint.
2.2.3 Finishes
Pipe work to be finished with canvas and two coats of general purpose
adhesive to provide a smooth semi-flexible finish. The outer surface shall be
further protected with vapour sealant to ensure that moisture will not
accumulate within the insulation.
Insulation of all condensate pipes, both horizontal and vertical, exposed to view
within the building (indoor & outdoors) at all levels shall be protected with
0.6mm (24G) Aluminum sheet jacketing.
2.2.4 VOC from all material to be limited to contribute to IEQ credit 4.1 / 4.2
2.3 Insulation for Refrigeration Pipework
2.3.1 Scope
All refrigeration pipework including valves, fittings and similar ancillaries are to
be insulated wherever applicable.
2.3.2 Materials
CD Piping shall be insulated with 19 mm thick, flexible closed cell elastomeric
material with properties similar to that detailed above. the insulation shall non-
slit type The insulation exposed to ambient shall be painted with UV protection
paint.
All joints shall be sealed and secured using the manufacturer's approved
adhesive.
2.3.3 Finishes
Pipework exposed shall be painted, white, brushed applied, in two separate
coats, in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
2.3.4 VOC from all material to be limited to contribute to IEQ credit 4.1 / 4.2.
2.4 Insulation for Air Ductwork
2.4.1 Scope
All Supply, Return, Fresh, Exhaust air ductwork shall be provided with insulation
as below.
2.4.2 Materials
All ducts shall be insulated with Rigid Fiber glass insulation board manufactured
from stable glass fibers bounded with thermo setting resin. The insulation boards
shall have glass reinforced aluminum Kraft laminate facing. The insulation shall
have factory applied adhesive. Insulation shall have the following
23 07 13

2. Density: 48Kg/m3.
3. Water Vapor Permeability: <0.02 perm-in according to ASTM E96.
4. Water Absorption: <1% according to ASTM C1104.
5. Flame Spread / Smoke Development: <25/50 according to ASTM E84.
6. Combustibility: Fibers shall be non-combustible according to ASTM E136.
7. Thermal Conductivity: <0.031W/m K at 24oC Mean temperature
8. Thickness of the Insulation shall be as follows.
Application Thickness (mm)

Supply Air Duct Subjected to ambient
50
conditions or in unconditioned spaces
Return Air Duct Subjected to ambient
50
conditions or in unconditioned spaces
Fresh air Duct carrying un treated air
50
running in conditioned space
Fresh air Duct carrying treated air
running in unconditioned space or 50
subjected to ambient conditions
Exhaust Air Ducts
25
Supply Air Duct in conditioned spaces
25
Return Air Duct in conditioned spaces
25
Accessories on the Duct Similar to the duct where it is installed
9. Provide self adhesive fixing pins on the duct. All extra lengths of pins to be
clipped of and provide with self adhesive tape.
10.All joints shall be sealed and secured using minimum of 100mm wide,
manufacturer's recommended self adhesive tape.
2.4.3 Finishes
Entire joints on ductwork (externally) shall be provided with 8oz canvass and 2
coats of Fugus resistant Sealant with following.
1. Application : Brush Applied
2. Avg Weight : 1.40Kg/l according to ASTM D1475
3. Avg Non Volatile 56% by volume (70% by weight)
4. Coverage Area : 1.2sqm/l per coat 0.8 mm thick per coat.
5. Drying Time: 1hour set to touch, 16hour dry through as per ASTM D1640
6. Service Temperature Limits : -7oC to +93oC
7. Water Vapor Permeance : 0.5 perms at 0.8 mm as per ASTM F 1249.
8. Fungus Resistance of 0 Rating as per ASTM D 5590.
9. UL listed
10. Flame Spread / smoke Developed: 10/5 as per ASTM E84
11. Should meet the requirements of LEED IEQ 4.1 of VOC < 24g/l
Entire insulation on ductwork shall be provided with 8oz canvass and 2 coats of
Fugus resistant Vapour Barrier with following.
1. Application: Brush Applied
2. Avg Weight: 1.25Kg/l according to ASTM D1475
3. Avg Non Volatile 40% by volume (51% by weight)
4. Coverage Area: 1.5sqm/l per coat 1.6 mm thick per coat.
23 07 13
5. Drying Time: 2hour set to touch, 15hour dry through as per ASTM D1640
6. Service Temperature Limits: -18oC to +82oC
7. Water Vapor Permeance: 0.05 perms at 0.9 mm as per ASTM F 1249.
8. Fungus Resistance of 0 Rating as per ASTM D 5590.
9. UL listed
10. Flame Spread / smoke Developed: 15/30 as per ASTM E84
11. Should meet the requirements of LEED IEQ 4.1 of VOC < 15g/l
Complete insulation exposed to view including those in plant rooms or those

exposed to ambient conditions insulation shall be protected with 24 gauge
aluminum sheet jacketing.
2.5 Insulation for supports

1. To prevent condensation on exposed surfaces of pipe supports, brackets
are to be fitted with suitably shaped insulating inserts, strong enough to
carry weight of the pipe. Inserts to take the form of half round sheet steel
sleeves in pairs, insulated inside to the same standard as the main pipe run
and finished to maintain the integrity of the vapour seal. The inserts for
closed cell phenolic foam insulation for chilled water pipes shall be high
density (120 kg/m3) insulation load bearing product.
2. Similarly ductwork supports are to include a load bearing insert of the
same thickness as the insulation including finish and to have a conductivity
low enough to avoid heat bridging between duct and support. The
integrity of the vapour seal must be maintained.
2.6 Insulation for flanges and valves

1. Flanged joints to be insulated and vapour sealed to the same standard as
pipe work using pre-formed rigid sections to suit the outside diameter of
the flanges. Sections to be carefully cut and fitted and finished in
accordance with the finish required for the main pipe run.
2. All valves and strainers are to be finished in purpose made 0.6mm (24G)
aluminium sheet metal quick release insulated boxes.
2.7 Insulation for expansion bellows and flexible connections

To be enclosed in an airtight cover made of rubber or neoprene with
vulcanized joints. The ends to be secured with jubilee clips to make an airtight
joint. In the case of expansion bellows make sure that the cover cannot
become trapped in the convolutions of the bellows.
2.8 Insulation for pumps

1. The chilled water pumps shall be insulated with closed cell elastomeric
thermal insulation sheet of 25mm thickness, having density not less than 80
kgm/m3 and thermal conductivity not exceeding 0.037 at a mean
temperature of 24.00C. The insulation shall have excellent resistance
against water absorption, ozone elongation, weather and ultra violet,
flammability etc.
2. The insulation sheets shall be cut to the measured size with clean sharp
knife. Apply manufacturer's recommended adhesive on both surfaces to
be insulated. Allow adhesive to set until non-tacky to touch and then
press the sheet tightly against the surfaces.
23 07 13
3. Avoid applying insulation on wet and cold surface and covering the
moving parts such as near pump shaft/stuffing box etc.
4. The pumps other than for chilled water service shall be painted with two
coats of corrosion resistant.
5. Adequate provision shall be made to carry the condensation and any
other water leakage away to drain.
2.9 Insulation for flanges in ductwork

Where flanged connections occur in insulated ducts the insulation as specified
is to be built up to a depth equal to the width of the flange and a final strip of
insulation 25mm thick x 100mm wide is to be fitted overall and attached to the
surface of the main insulation by adhesive or other suitable means. The integrity
of the vapour seal must be maintained.
2.10 Insulation for drain trays

The drain trays for all the Fan Coil Units, shall be insulated and the insulation to
be factory applied.
Details of these requirements covered under the following section:
238219 : Fan Coil Units
2.11 Insulation of kitchen exhaust ducts works:
2.11.1 Scope
The kitchen exhaust air ductworks and its accessories inside the building above
false ceiling voids, shafts, exposed to view and exposed to outside ambient at
roof shall be insulated. The final insulated surface for ductworks exposed to
views / outside ambient at roof shall be further provided with 0.6mm (24G)
aluminum jacket cladding.
2.11.2 Materials
1. The kitchen exhaust air ducts shall be thermally insulated with high
temperature insulation blanket material specifically designed to provide a
flexible enclosure for 2 hour fire rated, material made of calcia, magnesia,
silica chemistry designed to enhance bio solubility providing excellent
insulation in a non combustible blanket product form. The core insulation
blanket shall be completely encapsulated in an aluminium foil fiberglass
reinforced scrim covering to provide additional handling strength as well
as protection from grease and moisture absorption and tearing. The
insulation material shall be similar to FyreWrap Elite 1.5 by Unifrax, USA.or
equal and approved.
2. The Insulation material / system shall comply with the following standards:
ASTM E 2336, ASTM E 814, ASTM E 84, UL 723, ASTM C518, ASTM E 119, NFPA
96, 2006 and 2009 editions of IMC and UMC.
3. The kitchen exhaust duct insulation system shall consist of a fully

encapsulated two layer system applied directly to the duct surface,
installed with minimum clearances to combustible at all locations on the
wraps.
23 07 13
4. The first layer can be installed with a transverse (perimeter) joints butted
and minimum 3” longitudinal overlaps. All overlaps for the second or outer
layer shall be minimum 3”. The second layer transverse (perimeter)
overlaps of adjacent blankets may be installed using one of these three
techniques (Telescoping overlap wrap technique, Checkerboard overlap
wrap technique or Butt splice with collar wrap technique) as per
manufacturers recommendations.
5. Attachment options shall be limited by the duct width dimensions as

Banding only for duct widths 24” or less, Banding and pins for duct width ≤
49” and pins only for duct widths > 49”. All access doors on kitchen exhaust
duct work shall be insulated as per manufacturer recommendation.
6. The complete installation shall be strictly carried out in accordance with

manufacturers recommendations.
2.12 Corner Angles
A. Aluminum Corner Angles: 1.0 mm thick, minimum 25 by 25 mm, aluminum

according to ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M), Alloy 3003, 3005, 3105 or 5005;
Temper H-14.
2.13 Tapes: Foil-face, reinforced vapor-retarder tape matching factory-applied

jacket with acrylic adhesive; complying with ASTM C 1136.
1. Width: 100 mm.

2. Thickness: 0.16 mm.
3. Adhesion: 1.0 N/mm in width.
4. Elongation: 2 percent.
5. Tensile Strength: 7.2 N/mm in width.
6. FSK Tape Disks and Squares: Precut disks or squares of FSK tape.
2.14 Securements
A. Bands:
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available

products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
2. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 167 or ASTM A 240/A 240M, Type 304 or Type 316;
0.015 inch (0.38 mm) thick, 3/4 inch (19 mm) wide with wing seal.
3. Aluminum: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M), Alloy 3003, 3005, 3105, or 5005;
Temper H-14, 0.020 inch (0.51 mm) thick, 3/4 inch (19 mm) wide with wing
seal .
B. Insulation Pins
1. Capacitor-Discharge-Weld Pins: Copper- or zinc-coated steel pin, fully

annealed for capacitor-discharge welding, 3.5-mm diameter shank,
length to suit depth of insulation indicated.
2. Metal, Adhesively Attached, Perforated-Base Insulation Hangers:

Baseplate welded to projecting spindle that is capable of holding
23 07 13
insulation, of thickness indicated, securely in position indicated when self-

locking washer is in place. Comply with the following requirements:
a. Baseplate: Perforated, galvanized carbon-steel sheet, 0.76 mm thick by

50 mm square.
b. Spindle: Fully annealed, 2.6-mm diameter shank, length to suit depth of
insulation indicated.
c. Adhesive: Recommended by hanger manufacturer. Product with
demonstrated capability to bond insulation hanger securely to substrates
indicated without damaging insulation, hangers, and substrates.
3. Insulation-Retaining Washers: Self-locking washers formed from 0.41-mm

thick, sheet, with beveled edge sized as required to hold insulation
securely in place but not less than 38 mm in diameter.
Protect ends with capped self-locking washers incorporating a spring steel

insert to ensure permanent retention of cap in exposed locations.
4. Nonmetal Insulation-Retaining Washers: Self-locking washers formed from

0.41mm thick nylon sheet, with beveled edge sized as required to hold
insulation securely in place but not less than 38 mm in diameter.
2.15 Mastics
A. Consider using water-based mastics for environmental reasons.
B. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and

substrates; comply with MIL-C-19565C, Type II.
C. Vapor-Barrier Mastic: Water based; suitable for indoor and outdoor use
on below ambient services.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the

following:
a. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 30-90.
2. Water-Vapor Permeance: ASTM E 96, Procedure B, 0.013 perm (0.009 metric

perm) at 43-mil (1.09-mm) dry film thickness.
3. Service Temperature Range: Minus 20 to plus 180 deg F (Minus 29 to plus 82
deg C).
4. Solids Content: ASTM D 1644, 59 percent by volume and 71 percent by
weight.
5. VOC content shall be less than 36 g/l, to contribute to LEED IEQ credit 4.1 /
4.2
6. Color: White.
2.16 Sealants
A. Joint Sealants:
1. Joint Sealants for Cellular-Glass, Products: Subject to compliance with

requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work
include, but are not limited to, the following:
23 07 13
2. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates.

3. Permanently flexible, elastomeric sealant.
deg C).
5. Color: White or gray.
6. For indoor applications, use sealants that have a VOC content of 31 g/L
or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
B. FSK and Metal Jacket Flashing Sealants:

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products
that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the
following:
2. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates.

3. Fire- and water-resistant, flexible, elastomeric sealant.
deg C).
5. Color: Aluminum.
6. For indoor applications, use sealants that have a VOC content of 31 g/L
or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
2.17 Application
No insulation shall be applied before the Architect's acceptance of the
specified pressure or equivalent tests.
The Contractor shall include for making good all insulation damaged during the
progress of works and for removing all rubbish and surplus materials from site.
2.18 Preparation of surfaces

Before any thermal insulation is applied, metal surfaces are to be thoroughly
cleaned and treated as necessary to prevent corrosion.
2.19 Manufacturer's instructions

In all cases insulation is to be applied in full compliance with the
recommendations of particular manufacturers including their
recommendations as to tapes, adhesives, fixings, etc., to ensure a completely
satisfactory result and as shown on the drawings.
2.20 Vapour seal

1. Particular care is to be taken to ensure that vapour seals are adequate
and continues and not compromised at points such as valves, flanges,
supports, etc. Any imperfections in this respect to be made good to the
Architect’s satisfaction before the installation are accepted.
2. In order to limit the effects of accidental breakage of the vapour seal and
to prevent moisture spreading unimpeded along the axis of the pipe,
vapour seals at right angles to the pipe at interval not exceeding 10m are
to be provided. These can be in the form of pipe support inserts
thoroughly coated with a suitable sealant or to other approved details.
23 07 13
2.21 Appearance
1. Particular attention is to be given to the finished appearance of insulation
which is required to present a neat and symmetrical appearance running
true in line with pipe and duct layouts. At the Archtiect's discretion any
rough, irregular or badly finished insulation to be stripped down and re-
lagged.
2. Pipe work is to be insulated separately and adjacent parallel pipes not to
be married together in a common insulation covering. As far as possible
insulation is to allow for easy access and disconnection of removable
items without the disturbance of adjacent insulation.
3. The final insulated surface for ductwork on roof (aluminium jacketing) shall
be provided with a nominal slope (1:100) along plan width to avoid water
collection on top surface.
2.22 Delivery, Storage, and Handling
A. Packaging: Insulation material containers shall be marked by

manufacturer with appropriate ASTM standard designation, type and
grade, and maximum use temperature.
B. Storage: Insulation material shall be stored to prevent dirt and moisture

contamination.
2.23 Coordination
A. Coordinate size and location of supports, hangers, and insulation

shields specified in Division 23 Section "Hangers and Supports for HVAC
Piping and Equipment."
B. Coordinate clearance requirements with piping Installer for piping

insulation application duct Installer for duct insulation application, and
equipment Installer for equipment insulation application. Before
preparing piping and ductwork Shop Drawings, establish and maintain
clearance requirements for installation of insulation and field-applied
jackets and finishes and for space required for maintenance.
2.24 Scheduling
A. Schedule insulation application after satisfactory pressure testing systems

and, where required, after installing and testing heat tracing.
B. Complete installation and concealment of plastic materials as

rapidly as possible in each area of construction.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 Examination
A. Examine substrates and conditions for compliance with requirements for

installation and other conditions affecting performance of insulation
application.
23 07 13
1. Verify that systems and equipment to be insulated have been tested and
are free of defects.
2. Verify that surfaces to be insulated are clean and dry.
corrected.
3.2 Preparation
A. Surface Preparation: Clean and dry surfaces to be insulated. Before

insulating, apply a corrosion coating to insulated surfaces as follows:
B. Surface Preparation: Clean and prepare surfaces to be insulated. Before

insulating, apply a corrosion coating to insulated surfaces as follows:
C. Carbon Steel: Coat carbon steel operating at a service temperature below

60 deg F with an epoxy coating. Consult coating manufacturer for appropriate
coating materials and application methods for operating temperature range.
D. Mix insulating cements with clean potable water; if insulating cements are to be
in contact with stainless-steel surfaces, use demineralized water.
3.3 General Installation Requirements
A. Install insulation materials, accessories, and finishes with smooth, straight, and
even surfaces; free of voids throughout the length of equipment, ducts and
fittings, and piping including fittings, valves, and specialties.
B. Install insulation materials, forms, vapor barriers or retarders, jackets, and

thicknesses required for each item of equipment, duct system, and pipe system as
specified in insulation system schedules.
C. Install accessories compatible with insulation materials and suitable for the
service. Install accessories that do not corrode, soften, or otherwise attack
insulation or jacket in either wet or dry state.
D. Install insulation with longitudinal seams at top and bottom of horizontal runs.
E. Install multiple layers of insulation with longitudinal and end seams staggered.
F. Do not weld brackets, clips, or other attachment devices to piping, fittings, and
specialties.
G. Keep insulation materials dry during application and finishing.
H. Install insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams and
joints with adhesive recommended by insulation material manufacturer.
I. Install insulation with least number of joints practical.
J. Where vapor barrier is indicated, seal joints, seams, and penetrations in

insulation at hangers, supports, anchors, and other projections with vapor-barrier
mastic.
23 07 13
1. Install insulation continuously through hangers and around anchor

attachments.
2. For insulation application where vapor barriers are indicated, extend
insulation on anchor legs from point of attachment to supported item to
point of attachment to structure. Taper and seal ends at attachment to
structure with vapor-barrier mastic.
3. Install insert materials and install insulation to tightly join the insert. Seal
insulation to insulation inserts with adhesive or sealing compound
recommended by insulation material manufacturer.
4. Cover inserts with jacket material matching adjacent pipe insulation. Install
shields over jacket, arranged to protect jacket from tear or puncture by
hanger, support, and shield.
K. Apply adhesives, mastics, and sealants at manufacturer's recommended

coverage rate and wet and dry film thicknesses.
L. Install insulation with factory-applied jackets as follows:
1. Draw jacket tight and smooth.

2. Cover circumferential joints with 75-mm wide strips, of same material as
insulation jacket. Secure strips with adhesive and outward clinching
staples along both edges of strip, spaced 100 mm o.c.
3. Overlap jacket longitudinal seams at least 38 mm. Install insulation with
longitudinal seams at bottom of pipe. Clean and dry surface to receive
self-sealing lap. Staple laps with outward clinching staples along edge at 50
mm o.c.
a. For below ambient services, apply vapor-barrier mastic over staples.
4. Cover joints and seams with tape as recommended by insulation material

manufacturer to maintain vapor seal.
5. Where vapor barriers are indicated, apply vapor-barrier mastic on seams
and joints and at ends adjacent to duct and pipe flanges and fittings.
M. Cut insulation in a manner to avoid compressing insulation more than 75 percent

of its nominal thickness.
N. Finish installation with systems at operating conditions. Repair joint separations

and cracking due to thermal movement.
O. Repair damaged insulation facings by applying same facing material over

damaged areas.
Extend patches at least 4 inches (100 mm) beyond damaged areas. Adhere,
staple, and seal patches similar to butt joints.
P. For above ambient services, do not install insulation to the following:
1. Vibration-control devices.
2. Testing agency labels and stamps.
3. Nameplates and data plates.
4. Manholes.
5. Handholes.
6. Cleanouts.
23 07 13
3.4 Penetrations
A. Insulation Installation at Roof Penetrations: Install insulation continuously through

roof penetrations.
1. Seal penetrations with flashing sealant.

2. For applications requiring only indoor insulation, terminate insulation above
roof surface and seal with joint sealant. For applications requiring indoor
and outdoor insulation, install insulation for outdoor applications tightly
joined to indoor insulation ends. Seal joint with joint sealant.
3. Extend jacket of outdoor insulation outside roof flashing at least 50 mm
below top of roof flashing.
4. Seal jacket to roof flashing with flashing sealant.
B. Insulation Installation at Underground Exterior Wall Penetrations: Terminate

insulation flush with sleeve seal. Seal terminations with flashing sealant.
C. Insulation Installation at above ground Exterior Wall Penetrations: Install

insulation continuously through wall penetrations.
1. Seal penetrations with flashing sealant.
2. For applications requiring only indoor insulation, terminate insulation inside
wall surface and seal with joint sealant. For applications requiring indoor
and outdoor insulation, install insulation for outdoor applications tightly
joined to indoor insulation ends. Seal joint with joint sealant. Fabricate a
cellular glass "box" around the pump which is removable. Utilize flexible
elastomeric at penetrations and seal with silicone. Allow for removal of
suction diffuser screen if a suction diffuser is installed.
3. Extend jacket of outdoor insulation outside wall flashing and overlap wall
flashing at least 50 mm.
4. Seal jacket to wall flashing with flashing sealant.
D. Insulation Installation at Interior Wall and Partition Penetrations (That Are Not
Fire Rated): Install insulation continuously through walls and partitions.
E. Insulation Installation at Fire-Rated Wall and Partition Penetrations: Install insulation

continuously through penetrations of fire-rated walls and partitions. Terminate
insulation at fire damper sleeves for fire-rated wall and partition penetrations.
Externally insulate damper sleeves to match adjacent insulation and overlap duct
insulation at least 50 mm.
1. Comply with requirements in Division 7 Section "Firestopping" and fire-

resistive joint sealers.
F. Insulation Installation at Floor Penetrations:
1. Duct: Install insulation continuously through floor penetrations that are not
fire rated.
For penetrations through fire-rated assemblies, terminate insulation at fire
damper sleeves and externally insulate damper sleeve beyond floor to
match adjacent duct insulation. Overlap damper sleeve and duct insulation
at least 2 inches (50 mm).
2. Pipe: Install insulation continuously through floor penetrations.
3. Seal penetrations through fire-rated assemblies. Comply with requirements in
Division 7 Section "Firestopping."
23 07 13
3.5 Equipment, Tank, And Vessel Insulation Installation
A. Mineral Fiber, Pipe and Tank Insulation Installation for Tanks and Vessels: Secure
insulation with adhesive and anchor pins and speed washers.
1. Apply adhesives according to manufacturer's recommended coverage

rates per unit area, for minimum 50 percent coverage of tank and vessel
surfaces.
2. Groove and score insulation materials to fit as closely as possible to
equipment, including contours. Bevel insulation edges for cylindrical
surfaces for tight joints. Stagger end joints.
3. Protect exposed corners with secured corner angles.
4. Install adhesively attached or self-sticking insulation hangers and speed
washers on sides of tanks and vessels as follows:
a. Do not weld anchor pins to ASME-labeled pressure vessels.
b. Select insulation hangers and adhesive that are compatible
with service temperature and with substrate.
c. On tanks and vessels, maximum anchor-pin spacing is 75 mm from
insulation end joints, and 400 mm o.c. in both directions.
d. Do not over compress insulation during installation.
e. Cut and miter insulation segments to fit curved sides and domed
heads of tanks and vessels.
f. Impale insulation over anchor pins and attach speed washers.
g. Cut excess portion of pins extending beyond speed washers or bend
parallel with insulation surface. Cover exposed pins and washers with
tape matching insulation facing.
5. Secure each layer of insulation with stainless-steel or aluminum bands.
Select band material compatible with insulation materials.
6. Where insulation hangers on equipment and vessels are not permitted or
practical and where insulation support rings are not provided, install a girdle
network for securing insulation. Stretch prestressed aircraft cable around
the diameter of vessel and make taut with clamps, turnbuckles, or breather
springs. Place one circumferential girdle around equipment
approximately 150 mm from each end. Install wire or cable between
two circumferential girdles 300 mm o.c. Install a wire ring around each
end and around outer periphery of center openings, and stretch
prestressed aircraft cable radially from the wire ring to nearest
circumferential girdle. Install additional circumferential girdles along the
body of equipment or tank at a minimum spacing of 1200 mm o.c. Use this
network for securing insulation with tie wire or bands.
7. Stagger joints between insulation layers at least 75 mm.
8. Install insulation in removable segments on equipment access doors,
manholes, handholes, and other elements that require frequent removal for
service and inspection.
9. Bevel and seal insulation ends around manholes, handholes, ASME
stamps, and nameplates.
10. For equipment with surface temperatures below ambient, apply mastic
to open ends, joints, seams, breaks, and punctures in insulation.
B. Flexible Elastomeric Thermal Insulation Installation for Tanks and Vessels: Install
insulation over entire surface of tanks and vessels.
23 07 13
1. Apply 100 percent coverage of adhesive to surface with manufacturer's

recommended adhesive.
2. Seal longitudinal seams and end joints.
C. Insulation Installation on Pumps:
1. Fabricate custom fitted insulation pieces. Fit pieces around pumps and
coincide joints with splits in pump casings. Fabricate joints with outward
bolted flanges. Secure box sections together using a latching mechanism
for easy removal of sections to maintain pump.
2. For below ambient services, install a vapor barrier at seams, joints, and
penetrations.
Seal between flanges with replaceable gasket material to form a vapor
barrier. Fabricate a cellular glass “box” around the pump which is
removable. Utilize flexible elastomeric at penetrations and seal with
silicone. Allow for removal of suction diffuser screen if a suction diffuser is
installed.
3.6 General Pipe Insulation Installations
A. Requirements in this article generally apply to all insulation materials except

where more specific requirements are specified in various pipe insulation material
installation articles.
B. Insulation Installation on Fittings, Valves, Strainers, Flanges, and Unions:
1. Install insulation over fittings, valves, strainers, flanges, unions, and other
specialties with continuous thermal and vapor-retarder integrity, unless
2. Insulate pipe elbows using preformed fitting insulation or mitered fittings
made from same material and density as adjacent pipe insulation. Each
piece shall be butted tightly against adjoining piece and bonded with
adhesive. Fill joints, seams, voids, and irregular surfaces with insulating
cement finished to a smooth, hard, and uniform contour that is uniform with
adjoining pipe insulation.
3. Insulate tee fittings with preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe
insulation of same material and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Cut
sectional pipe insulation to fit. But each section closely to the next and hold
in place with tie wire. Bond pieces with adhesive.
4. Insulate valves using preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe
insulation of same material, density, and thickness as used for adjacent
pipe. Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than two times the
thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker.
For valves, insulate up to and including the bonnets, valve stuffing-box
studs, bolts, and nuts. Fill joints, seams, and irregular surfaces with
insulating cement.
5. Insulate strainers using preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe
insulation of same material, density, and thickness as used for adjacent
pipe. Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than two times the
thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker. Fill
joints, seams, and irregular surfaces with insulating cement. Insulate
strainers so strainer basket flange or plug can be easily removed and
replaced without damaging the insulation and jacket. Provide a
23 07 13
removable reusable insulation cover. For below ambient services, provide

a design that maintains vapor barrier.
6. Insulate flanges and unions using a section of oversized preformed pipe
insulation.
Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than two times the thickness of
pipe insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker.
7. Cover segmented insulated surfaces with a layer of finishing cement and
coat with a mastic. Install vapor-barrier mastic for below ambient services
and a breather mastic for above ambient services. Reinforce the mastic
with fabric-reinforcing mesh. Trowel the mastic to a smooth and well-
shaped contour.
8. For services not specified to receive a field-applied jacket except for
flexible elastomeric and polyolefin, install fitted PVC cover over elbows,
tees, strainers, valves, flanges, and unions. Terminate ends with PVC end
caps. Tape PVC covers to adjoining insulation facing using PVC tape.
9. Stencil or label the outside insulation jacket of each union with the
word "UNION." Match size and color of pipe labels.
10. Install insulation at coil connection piping not required to have a continuous
vapor barrier such that the maximum length of uninsulated piping does not
exceed 3" in length.
C. Insulate instrument connections for thermometers, pressure gages, pressure

temperature taps, test connections, flow meters, sensors, switches, and
transmitters on insulated pipes, vessels, and equipment. Shape insulation at
these connections by tapering it to and around the connection with
insulating cement and finish with finishing cement, mastic, and flashing
sealant.
D. Install removable insulation covers at locations indicated. Installation shall

conform to the following:
1. Make removable flange and union insulation from sectional pipe

insulation of same thickness as that on adjoining pipe. Install same
insulation jacket as adjoining pipe insulation.
2. When flange and union covers are made from sectional pipe insulation,
extend insulation from flanges or union long at least two times the insulation
thickness over adjacent pipe insulation on each side of flange or union.
Secure flange cover in place with stainless- steel or aluminum bands.
Select band material compatible with insulation and jacket.
3. Construct removable valve insulation covers in same manner as for flanges
except divide the two-part section on the vertical center line of valve body.
4. When covers are made from block insulation, make two halves, each
consisting of mitered blocks wired to stainless-steel fabric. Secure this wire
frame, with its attached insulation, to flanges with tie wire. Extend
insulation at least 2 inches (50 mm) over adjacent pipe insulation on each
side of valve. Fill space between flange or union cover and pipe insulation
with insulating cement. Finish cover assembly with insulating cement
applied in two coats. After first coat is dry, apply and trowel second coat
to a smooth finish.
5. Unless a PVC jacket is indicated in field-applied jacket schedules,
finish exposed surfaces with a metal jacket.
23 07 13
3.7 Calcium Silicate Insulation Installation
A. Insulation Installation on Boiler Breechings and Ducts:
1. Secure single-layer insulation with stainless-steel bands at 12-inch (300-mm)

intervals and tighten bands without deforming insulation material.
2. Install 2-layer insulation with joints tightly butted and staggered at least 3
inches (75 mm). Secure inner layer with wire spaced at 12-inch (300-mm)
intervals. Secure outer layer with stainless-steel bands at 12-inch (300-mm)
intervals.
3. On exposed applications without metal jacket, finish insulation surface with a
skim coat of mineral-fiber, hydraulic-setting cement. When cement is dry, apply
flood coat of lagging adhesive and press on one layer of glass cloth. Overlap
edges at least 1 inch (25 mm). Apply finish coat of lagging adhesive over glass
cloth. Thin finish coat to achieve smooth, uniform finish.
3.8 Flexible Elastomeric Insulation Installation
A. Seal longitudinal seams and end joints with manufacturer's recommended

adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface
being insulated.
B. Insulation Installation on Pipe Flanges

1. Install pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange.
2. Make width of insulation section same as overall width of flange and bolts, plus
twice the thickness of pipe insulation.
3. Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer
circumference of adjacent straight pipe segments with cut sections of sheet
insulation of same thickness as pipe insulation.
4. Secure insulation to flanges and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended
being insulated.
C. Insulation Installation on Pipe Fittings and Elbows:

1. Install mitered sections of pipe insulation.
2. Secure insulation materials and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended
being insulated.
D. Insulation Installation on Valves and Pipe Specialties:

1. Install preformed valve covers manufactured of same material as pipe
insulation when available.
2. When preformed valve covers are not available, install cut sections of pipe
and sheet insulation to valve body. Arrange insulation to permit access to
packing and to allow valve operation without disturbing insulation.
3. Install insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application.
4. Secure insulation to valves and specialties and seal seams with
manufacturer's recommended adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that
allow passage of air to surface being insulated.
23 07 13
3.9 Mineral-Fiber Insulation
INSTALLATION
A. Board Insulation Installation on Ducts and Plenums: Secure with adhesive and
insulation pins.
1. Apply adhesives according to manufacturer's recommended coverage rates per

unit area, for minimum 50 percent coverage of duct and plenum surfaces.
2. Apply adhesive to entire circumference of ducts and to all surfaces of fittings
and transitions.
3. Install capacitor-discharge-weld pins and speed washers or cupped-head,
capacitor- discharge-weld pins on sides and bottom of horizontal ducts and sides
of vertical ducts as follows:
a. On duct sides with dimensions 450 mm and smaller, place pins along longitudinal
centerline of duct. Space 75 mm maximum from insulation end joints, and 400
mm o.c.
b. On duct sides with dimensions larger than 450 mm, space pins 400 mm o.c.
each way, and 75 mm maximum from insulation joints. Install additional pins to
hold insulation tightly against surface at cross bracing.
c. Pins may be omitted from top surface of horizontal, rectangular ducts and plenums.
d. Do not over compress insulation during installation.
e. Cut excess portion of pins extending beyond speed washers or bend parallel
with insulation surface. Cover exposed pins and washers with tape matching
insulation facing.
4. For ducts and plenums with surface temperatures below ambient, install a
continuous unbroken vapor barrier. Create a facing lap for longitudinal seams
and end joints with insulation by removing 50 mm from 1 edge and 1 end of
insulation segment. Secure laps to adjacent insulation section with 13-mm
outward-clinching staples, 25 mm o.c. Install vapor barrier consisting of factory-
or field-applied jacket, adhesive, vapor-barrier mastic, and sealant at joints,
seams, and protrusions.
a. Repair punctures, tears, and penetrations with tape or mastic to maintain

vapor- barrier seal.
b. Install vapor stops for ductwork and plenums operating below 10 deg C at 5.5-m
intervals. Vapor stops shall consist of vapor-barrier mastic applied in a Z-shaped
pattern over insulation face, along butt end of insulation, and over the surface.
Cover insulation face and surface to be insulated a width equal to 2 times the
insulation thickness but not less than 75 mm.
5. Install insulation on rectangular duct elbows and transitions with a full insulation
section for each surface. Groove and score insulation to fit as closely as possible
to outside and inside radius of elbows. Install insulation on round and flat-oval
duct elbows with individually mitered gores cut to fit the elbow.
6. Insulate duct stiffeners, hangers, and flanges that protrude beyond insulation
surface with 150-mm wide strips of same material used to insulate duct.
Secure on alternating sides of stiffener, hanger, and flange with pins spaced 150
mm o.c.
23 07 13
3.10 Fire-Rated Insulation System Installation
A. Where fire-rated insulation system is indicated, secure system to ducts and duct
hangers and supports to maintain a continuous fire rating.
B. Insulate duct access panels and doors to achieve same fire rating as duct.
C. Install Firestopping at penetrations through fire-rated assemblies.
23 07 13
23 08 00 - Commissioning of HVAC
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 Description of Works
A. Section includes commissioning process requirements for HVAC&R systems,

Plumbing and Drainage Systems Electrical systems, assemblies, and equipment.
B. Related Sections:
These sections cover the Division – 21, 22, 23, 26 and shall be read in conjunction
with the following sections:
Number Description
210513 COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR FIRE
213113 ELECTRIC DRIVE, CENTRIFUGAL FIRE PUMPS
213400 PRESSURE MAINTENANCE PUMPS
213900 CONTROLLERS FOR FIRE PUMP DRIVERS
230713 INSULATION
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Commissioning Plan: A document that outlines the organization, schedule,

allocation of resources, and documentation requirements of the commissioning
process.
B. CxA: Commissioning Authority.
C. HVAC&R: Heating, Ventilating, Air Conditioning, and Refrigeration.
23 08 00
D. Systems, Subsystems, Equipment, and Components: Where these terms are used
together or separately, they shall mean "as-built" systems, subsystems, equipment,
and components.
1.3 ALLOWANCES
A. Labor, instrumentation, tools, and equipment costs for technicians for the
performance of commissioning testing are covered by the "Schedule of Allowances"
Article in Division 01 Section "Allowances."
1.4 UNIT PRICES
A. Commissioning testing allowance may be adjusted up or down by the "List of Unit

Prices" Article in Division 01 Section "Unit Prices" when actual man-hours are computed
at the end of commissioning testing.
1.5 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES
A. Perform commissioning tests at the direction of the CxA.
B. Attend construction phase controls coordination meeting.
C. Attend testing, adjusting, and balancing review and coordination meeting.
D. Participate in HVAC&R systems, assemblies, equipment, and component maintenance

orientation and inspection as directed by the CxA.
E. Provide information requested by the CxA for final commissioning documentation.
F. Provide measuring instruments and logging devices to record test data, and provide
data acquisition equipment to record data for the complete range of testing for the
required test period.
1.6 CxA'S RESPONSIBILITIES
CxA shall perform the task in two stages as follows. All cost involved due of addition
or modification of the proposed system by the CxA shall be included in the contract
as a separate sum which shall be expended on approval of the Engineer.
A. Commissioning Process stage 1

1. The commissioning authority shall assist the owner in developing the owner’s
project requirements.
2. The commissioning authority (CxA) shall develop the Phase 1 commissioning
plan.
3. The CxA shall perform a review of design documents to meet design intent,
Owner's requirements, and commissionability.
4. The CA shall develop commissioning specifications and submit for review by the
design team
5. The CxA shall complete a commissioning report at the end of the Phase 1.
23 08 00
B. Commissioning Process During stage 2

1. A scoping meeting is shall be conducted by the CxA where the commissioning
process is reviewed with the general contractor, the commissioning team
members, and subcontractors (at minimum electrical, mechanical and
plumbing).
2. Additional meetings as required shall be scheduled by the CxA with necessary
parties attending, to plan, scope, coordinate, schedule and review future
activities and resolve problems.
3. CxA shall review submittals pertaining to equipment designated for
commissioning to ensure all equipment meets owner’s project requirements.
4. Additional equipment documentation shall be submitted to the CxA including
detailed start-up procedures and operation, maintenance, and installation
manuals.
5. The CxA shall work with the Contractor/Subcontractors in developing start-up
plans and start-up documentation formats, including providing to the Subs
prefunctional checklists to be completed during the startup process.
6. In general, the checkout and performance verification shall proceed from
simple to complex; from component level to equipment to systems and
intersystem levels with prefunctional checklists being completed before
functional testing.
7. The Contractor/Subcontractor, under their own direction, shall execute and
document the prefunctional checklists and perform startup and initial checkout.
The CA shall document that the checklists and startup were completed
according to the approved plans. This may include the CxA witnessing startup
of selected equipment.
8. The CxA shall develop specific equipment and system functional performance
test procedures. The Contractor/Subcontractor shall review the procedures.
9. The performance test procedures shall be executed by the
Contractor/Subcontractor, under the direction of and documented by the CxA.
10. Items of non-compliance are corrected at the Contractor/Subcontractor
expense and the system retested.
11. The CxA shall review the O&M documentation for completeness.
12. The CxA shall review, pre-approves and coordinates the training provided by
the Subs and verifies that it was completed.
13. The CxA shall complete a commissioning report upon the completion of
construction (stage 2) and shall provide a Systems Manual.
14. Deferred and seasonal testing and performance evaluation shall be conducted
at peak summer conditions.
15. The CxA shall complete a commissioning report at the close of the Defects
Liability Period.
C. The commissioning authority/firm (CxA) will have the following responsibilities:

1. The primary role of the CxA is to develop and coordinate whether systems are
functioning in accordance with the documented design intent and in
accordance with the contract documents and owners requirements.
2. The CxA may assist with problem-solving or resolving non-conformance or
deficiencies, but ultimately that responsibility resides with the Contractor /
Subcontractor.
3. The Contractor / Subcontractor will provide all tools or the use of tools to start,
check-out and functionally test equipment and systems, except for specified
testing with portable data-loggers, which shall be supplied and installed by the
CxA.
23 08 00
4. Develop full commissioning specifications for all commissioned equipment

listed below. The commissioning specification will include:
a) Detailed description of the responsibilities of all parties included in the
commissioning process;
b) Details of the commissioning process;
c) Reporting and documentation requirements, including formats;
d) Deficiency resolution;
e) Prefunctional checklist and startup requirements;
f) Functional testing process; and
g) Specific functional test requirements, including testing conditions; and
h) Acceptance criteria for each piece of equipment being commissioned.
5. Have the commissioning specifications approved by the A/E team
6. Develop and maintain a master deficiency and resolution log.
7. Coordinate and direct the commissioning activities in a logical, sequential
and efficient manner using consistent protocols and forms, centralized
documentation, clear and regular communications and consultations with all
necessary parties, frequently updated timelines and schedules and technical
expertise.
8. Coordinate the commissioning work and, with the Contractor to ensure that
commissioning activities are being scheduled into the master schedule.
9. Revise, as necessary, the current draft of the construction phase
commissioning plan developed during Final Design.
10. Plan and conduct a commissioning scoping meeting.
11. Request and review additional information required to perform commissioning
tasks, including O&M materials, contractor start-up and checkout procedures.
12. Before startup, gather and review the current control sequences and
interlocks and work with contractors and design engineers until sufficient
clarity has been obtained, in writing, to be able to write detailed testing
procedures.
13. Review and approve normal Contractor submittals applicable to systems
being commissioned for compliance with commissioning needs, concurrent
with the A/E reviews.
14. Write and distribute prefunctional tests and checklists.
15. Develop an enhanced start-up and initial systems checkout plan with Subs.
16. Perform site visits, as necessary, to observe component and system
installations. Attend selected planning and job-site meetings to obtain
information on construction progress. Review construction meeting minutes
for revisions/substitutions relating to the commissioning process. Assist in
resolving any discrepancies.
17. Witness all or part of the HVAC piping test and flushing procedure, sufficient to
be confident that proper procedures were followed. Document this testing
and include documentation in O&M manuals. Notify owner’s project
manager of any deficiencies in results or procedures.
18. Witness all or part of any ductwork testing and cleaning procedures, sufficient
to be confident that proper procedures were followed. Document this testing
and include documentation in O&M manuals. Notify owner’s project
manager of any deficiencies in results or procedures.
19. Approve prefunctional tests and checklist completion by reviewing
prefunctional checklist reports or by direct site observation.
20. Approve systems startup by reviewing start-up reports and by selected site
observation.
21. Review testing, adjusting and balancing (TAB) execution plan.
23 08 00
22. Oversee sufficient functional testing of the control system and approve it to
be used for TAB, before TAB is executed.
23. Approve air and water systems balancing by spot testing and by reviewing
completed reports and by selected site observation.
23. With necessary assistance and review from installing contractors, write the
functional performance test procedures for equipment and systems. This may
include energy management control system trending, stand-alone data-
logger monitoring or manual functional testing. Submit to Owner for review,
and approval if required.
24. Analyze any functional performance trend logs and monitoring data to verify
performance.
25. Coordinate, witness and approve manual functional performance tests
performed by installing contractors. Coordinate retesting as necessary until
satisfactory performance is achieved.
26. Continually maintain master deficiency and resolution log and develop a
separate testing record. Provide to the Owner written progress reports and
test results with recommended actions.
27. Witness performance testing of smoke control systems by others and all other
owner contracted tests or tests by manufacturer’s personnel over which the
CA may not have direct control. Document and include in Commissioning
Record in O&M manuals.
28. Review equipment warranties to ensure that the Owner’s responsibilities are
clearly defined.
29. Oversee and approve the training of the Owner’s operating personnel.
30. Review and approve the preparation of the O&M manuals.
31. Provide a final commissioning report.
32. Coordinate and supervise required seasonal or deferred testing and
deficiency corrections and provide the final testing documentation for the
commissioning record and O&M manuals.
33. Return to the site at close of defects liability period and review with facility
staff the current building operation and the condition of outstanding issues
related to the original and seasonal commissioning. Also interview facility staff
and identify problems or concerns they have with operating the building as
originally intended. Make suggestions for improvements and for recording
these changes in the O&M manuals. Identify areas that may come under
warranty or under the original construction contract. Assist facility staff in
developing reports and documents and requests for services to remedy
outstanding problems.
34. Assist in the development of a preventative maintenance plan, a detailed
operating plan or an energy and resource management plan.
35. Update master deficiency and resolution log.
36. Provide close of defect liability commissioning report.
1.7 COMMISSIONING DOCUMENTATION
A. Provide the following information to the CxA for inclusion in the commissioning
plan:
1. Plan for delivery and review of submittals, systems manuals, and other
documents and reports.
2. Identification of installed systems, assemblies, equipment, and components
including design changes that occurred during the construction phase.
23 08 00
3. Process and schedule for completing construction checklists and

manufacturer's prestart and startup checklists for HVAC&R systems,
assemblies, equipment, and components to be verified and tested.
4. Certificate of completion certifying that installation, prestart checks, and
startup procedures have been completed.
5. Certificate of readiness certifying that HVAC&R systems, subsystems,
equipment, and associated controls are ready for testing.
6. Test and inspection reports and certificates.
7. Corrective action documents.
8. Verification of testing, adjusting, and balancing reports.
1.8 SUBMITTALS
A. Certificates of readiness.
B. Certificates of completion of installation, prestart, and startup activities.
C. Owner’s Project Requirements

a. Description of all building and system performance criteria desired by the
owner.
b. Acceptance criteria which will be used to determine if the building meets
design intent.
D. Stage 1 Commissioning Plan which includes the following elements:

a. An overview of the Phase 1 commissioning process
b. A list of requirements, features and systems to commission during Phase 1
c. Identification of primary commissioning participants and their
responsibilities
d. A description of the management, communication, and reporting for
Phase 1 commissioning plan, as well as for resolution of issues identified.
E. Stage 2 Commissioning Plan

a. A detailed overview of the commissioning process
b. A list of all proposed commissioned features, systems, elements and
equipment
c. Identification of all commissioning participants and their responsibilities
d. A detailed description of the management, communication, and
reporting for the commissioning plan
e. A detailed description of the commissioning process scope including
submittal review, observation, start-up, testing, training, O&M
documentation, and warranty period activities
f. A detailed description of the expected written work products
g. A detailed activity schedule
h. A detailed description of the rigor and scope of testing
F. Monthly Progress Reports: Each Month progress report shall include the following
elements:
a. A brief overview and status of the construction phase commissioning
process
b. Overview of the primary commissioning participants and their
responsibilities
23 08 00
c. Activities that occurred during the previous quarter

d. Planned activities for the upcoming quarter
e. Any outstanding non-compliance items for the quarter shall be specifically
listed. Recommendations for improvement, future actions, commissioning
process changes, etc. shall also be listed.
G. Final Commissioning Report

1. The report shall include an executive summary, list of participants and roles,
building description, overview of commissioning and testing scope and a general
description of testing and verification methods. For each piece of commissioned
equipment, the report should contain the disposition of the CxA regarding the
adequacy of the equipment, documentation and training meeting the contract
documents in the following areas:
a. Equipment meeting the specifications,
b. Equipment installation,
c. Functional performance and efficiency,
d. Equipment documentation and design intent, and
e. Operator training.
2. All outstanding non-compliance items shall be specifically listed.
Recommendations for improvement to equipment or operations, future actions,
commissioning process changes, etc. shall also be listed. Each non-compliance
issue shall be referenced to the specific functional test, inspection, trend log, etc.
where the deficiency is documented. The functional performance and efficiency
section for each piece of equipment shall include a brief description of the
verification method used (manual testing, BAS trend logs, data loggers, etc.) and
include observations and conclusions from the testing.
3. Appendices shall contain acquired sequence documentation, logs, meeting
minutes, progress reports, deficiency lists, site visit reports, findings, unresolved
issues, communications, etc. Prefunctional checklists and functional tests (along
with blanks for the operators) and monitoring data and analysis will be provided in
a separate labeled binder.
H. Intermediate Defects Liability Period Commissioning Plan

The Warranty Phase Commissioning Plan shall include the following elements:
a. An overview of the warranty phase commissioning process
b. A list of features, systems, and performance to commission during the first
year of occupancy
c. Identification of primary warranty phase commissioning participants and
their responsibilities
d. A description of the management, communication, and reporting for the
warranty phase commissioning plan
e. A detailed activity schedule
f. A detailed description of the rigor and scope of testing and any
outstanding training needs
I. Intermediate Defects Liability Period Commissioning Report

The Intermediate Warranty Period Commissioning Report shall include the following
elements:
a. A brief overview and status of the warranty phase commissioning process
b. Overview of the primary commissioning participants and their
responsibilities
23 08 00
c. Deferred and seasonal testing and performance evaluation at peak

summer conditions.
d. Commissioning activities that occurred since final acceptance
e. Planned activities until the end of the warranty
f. Any outstanding non-compliance items for the period shall be specifically
listed.
g. Recommendations for improvement, future actions, commissioning
process changes, etc. shall also be listed.
J. Close of Defects Liability Commissioning Report

1. The report shall include an executive summary, list of participants and roles,
building description, overview of commissioning and testing scope and a general
description of testing and verification methods applied during the warranty
period. For each piece of commissioned equipment, the report should contain
the disposition of the CA regarding the adequacy of the equipment,
documentation and training meeting the contract documents in the following
areas:
a. Equipment meeting the specifications,
b. Equipment installation,
c. Functional performance and efficiency,
d. Equipment documentation and design intent, and
e. Operator training.
2. All outstanding non-compliance items shall be specifically listed.
Recommendations for improvement to equipment or operations, future actions,
re-commissioning, etc. shall also be listed. Each non-compliance issue shall be
referenced to the specific functional test, inspection, trend log, etc. where the
deficiency is documented. The functional performance and efficiency section for
each piece of equipment shall include a brief description of the verification
method used (manual testing, BAS trend logs, data loggers, etc.) and include
observations and conclusions from the testing.
3. Appendices shall contain acquired sequence documentation, logs, meeting
minutes, progress reports, deficiency lists, site visit reports, findings, unresolved
issues, communications, etc. Functional tests and monitoring data and analysis
will be provided in a separate labeled binder.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 TESTING PREPARATION
A. Certify that HVAC&R systems, subsystems, and equipment have been installed,
calibrated, and started and are operating according to the Contract Documents.
B. Certify that HVAC&R instrumentation and control systems have been completed
and calibrated, that they are operating according to the Contract Documents, and
that pretest set points have been recorded.
23 08 00
C. Certify that testing, adjusting, and balancing procedures have been completed
and that testing, adjusting, and balancing reports have been submitted,
discrepancies corrected, and corrective work approved.
D. Set systems, subsystems, and equipment into operating mode to be tested (e.g.,
normal shutdown, normal auto position, normal manual position, unoccupied cycle,
emergency power, and alarm conditions).
E. Inspect and verify the position of each device and interlock identified on checklists.
F. Check safety cutouts, alarms, and interlocks with smoke control and life-safety
systems during each mode of operation.
G. Testing Instrumentation: Install measuring instruments and logging devices to record

test data as directed by the CxA.
3.2 Testing AND BALANCING VERIFICATION
A. Prior to performance of testing and balancing Work, provide copies of reports,

sample forms, checklists, and certificates to the CxA.
B. Notify the CxA at least 14 days in advance of testing and balancing Work, and
provide access for the CxA to witness testing and balancing Work.
C. Provide technicians, instrumentation, and tools to verify testing and balancing of

HVAC&R systems at the direction of the CxA.
1. The CxA will notify testing and balancing Contractor/ Subcontractor 14 days
in advance of the date of field verification. Notice will not include data points
to be verified.
2. The testing and balancing Contractor/Subcontractor shall use the same
instruments (by model and serial number) that were used when original data
were collected.
3. Failure of an item includes, other than sound, a deviation of more than 10
percent. Failure of more than 10 percent of selected items shall result in
rejection of final testing, adjusting, and balancing report. For sound pressure
readings, a deviation of 3 dB shall result in rejection of final testing. Variations
in background noise must be considered.
4. Remedy the deficiency and notify the CxA so verification of failed portions
can be performed.
3.3 GENERAL TESTING REQUIREMENTS
A. Provide technicians, instrumentation, and tools to perform commissioning test at the

direction of the CxA.
B. Scope of HVAC&R testing shall include entire HVAC&R installation, from central
equipment for heat generation and refrigeration through distribution systems to
each conditioned space. Testing shall include measuring capacities and
effectiveness of operational and control functions.
23 08 00
C. Test all operating modes, interlocks, control responses, and responses to abnormal
or emergency conditions, and verify proper response of building automation system
controllers and sensors.
D. The CxA along with the Contractor/Subcontractor, testing and balancing

Contractor /Subcontractor, and HVAC&R Instrumentation and Control
Contractor/Subcontractor shall prepare detailed testing plans, procedures, and
checklists for all systems, subsystems, and equipment.
E. Tests will be performed using design conditions whenever possible.
F. Simulated conditions may need to be imposed using an artificial load when it is not
practical to test under design conditions. Before simulating conditions, calibrate
testing instruments. Provide equipment to simulate loads. Set simulated conditions
as directed by the CxA and document simulated conditions and methods of
simulation. After tests, return settings to normal operating conditions.
G. The CxA may direct that set points be altered when simulating conditions is not
practical.
H. The CxA may direct that sensor values be altered with a signal generator when
design or simulating conditions and altering set points are not practical.
I. If tests cannot be completed because of a deficiency outside the scope of the

HVAC&R system, document the deficiency and report it to the Owner. After
deficiencies are resolved, reschedule tests.
J. If the testing plan indicates specific seasonal testing, complete appropriate initial
performance tests and documentation and schedule seasonal tests.
3.4 SYSTEMS TO BE COMMISSIONED

The following systems, including all components and controls, will be commissioned:
1. Central building automation systems, including linkages to remote
monitoring and control.
2. All equipment of the heating, ventilating and air conditioning systems.
3. Central plant systems i.e. chillers, pumps, heat exchangers, cooling towers,
filtration system.
4. Life safety systems (fire alarm, egress pressurization, fire protection).
5. Pumping systems.
6. Hot and Cold Water System
7. R O Plants
8. Ecology Units
9. Sewerage Treatment Plant
10. Emergency power systems.
11. Lighting control systems.
12. Public address system.
23 08 00
The following outlines the level of effort expected for each commissioned
system:
1. The functional testing shall include operating the system and components
through each of the written sequences of operation and other significant
modes and sequences, including startup, shutdown, unoccupied mode,
manual mode, staging, miscellaneous alarms, power failure, security alarm
when impacted and interlocks with other systems or equipment. Sensors and
actuators shall be calibrated during pre-functional checklist testing by the
installing contractors and spot-checked by the commissioning authority during
functional testing.
2. Tests on respective HVAC equipment shall be executed during both the
heating and cooling season. However, some overwriting of control values to
simulate conditions may be allowed, if used judiciously. The central plant shall
have its efficiency bench-marked for later use by operations staff. Functional
testing shall be done using conventional manual methods, control system
trend logs and read-outs or stand-alone dataloggers, to provide a high level
of confidence in proper system function, as deemed appropriate by the
commissioning authority and the Owner.
3. The functional testing process and equipment shall be coordinated with the
building's energy management control system and long-term monitoring
objectives. Long-term continuous measurement and verification of
performance shall be based on the International Performance Measurement
and Verification Protocol - Option B Methods by Technology for the following:
a. Lighting systems and controls

b. Constant and variable motor loads
c. Variable frequency drive (VFD) operation
d. Cooling load
e. Heat recovery cycles
f. Air distribution static pressures and ventilation air volumes
23 08 00
23 11 00 - Fuel Oil Storage Tank and Piping System
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1.1 Provide, install, test, commission and maintain during defects liability
period complete fuel storage and piping system for the fuel oil.
The system shall be complete with tank, pumps, controls, pipework, control
wiring, filling point, vent, valves, level indicators etc.
1.2 Description of system

This Section includes diesel-fuel-oil storage and distribution systems
and the following:
A. Operation Requirement: The underground storage tank (UST) to be

filled in by gravity flow from a Road Delivery Tanker. The
submersible pump in the UST will transfer diesel oil to day tanks in
Diesel Generator Room. The submersible pump shall be
automatic in operation controlled by level sensors in day tanks.
B. The Contractor shall engage a professional engineer to carry
out design and comprehensive engineering analysis as
recommended by BAPCO and Civil Defence Authorities and
obtain approval from the said authorities. All design shall be as
per APEA guidelines. The installation shall progress as per BAPCO
requirements and stage wise inspections shall be carried out to the
satisfaction of authorities.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include

construction details, material descriptions, and dimensions of
individual components and profiles. Also include, where
applicable, rated capacities, operating characteristics, electrical
characteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories.
B. Shop Drawings: For facility fuel-oil piping layout. Include plans,

piping layout and elevations, sections, and details for fabrication of
pipe anchors, hangers, supports for multiple pipes, alignment
guides, expansion joints and loops, and attachments of the same to
building structure. Detail location of anchors, alignment guides, and
expansion joints and loops.
1. Shop Drawing Scale.

2. For fuel-oil storage tanks and pumps, include details of
supports and anchors.
C. Coordination Drawings: Plans and details, drawn to scale, on

which fuel-oil piping is shown and coordinated with other
installations, using input from installers of the items involved.
23 11 00
D. Site Survey: Plans, drawn to scale, on which fuel-oil piping and tanks
are shown and coordinated with other services and utilities.
E. Brazing certificates.
G. Field quality-control reports.
H. Operation and Maintenance Data: For fuel-oil equipment and
accessories to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance
manuals.
I. Risk Assessment Report
A. Comply with ASME B31.9, "Building Services Piping," for fuel-oil piping
materials, installation, testing, and inspecting.
B. Comply with the requirement of Civil Defence, BAPCO and the Public
Commission for the Protection of Marine Resources, Environment &
Wildlife, Government of Bahrain,
Except where specified otherwise, all work shall conform with the relevant
provisions of appropriate British Standards and British Standard Codes of
Practice currently applicable including the following:
IEE Wiring Regulations
BANOCO Guidelines for Fuel Piping and Storage
Local ED Regulations
NFPA Codes 30 & 31
C. Independent 3rd Party testing and certification by approved agency, for following
1. Tank Holiday test (test to be conducted by authorized laboratory)
2. Tank dimensional testing.
3. Tank Pressure / Vacuum test
4. Sump Vacuum test
5. Pipe Pressure test
6. Functionality of Overfill prevention valve.
A. Lift and support fuel-oil storage tanks only at designated lifting or

supporting points, as shown on Shop Drawings. Do not move or lift tanks
unless empty.
B. Deliver pipes and tubes with factory-applied end caps. Maintain end
caps through shipping, storage, and handling to prevent pipe end
damage and to prevent entrance of dirt, debris, and moisture.
C. Store PE pipes and valves protected from direct sunlight.
1.7 COORDINATION

provided.
23 11 00
1.8 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which

manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of fuel-oil storage
tanks and flexible, double- containment piping and related equipment
that fail in materials or workmanship.
1. Storage Tanks:
a. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following when used for
storage of fuel oil at temperatures not exceeding:
1) Structural failures including cracking, breakup, and collapse.
2) Corrosion failure including external and internal corrosion of
steel tanks.
b. Warranty Period: 30 years from date of Substantial Completion.
2. Flexible, Double-Containment Piping and Related Equipment:

a. Failures due to defective materials or workmanship for
materials installed together, including piping, dispenser sumps,
entry boots, and sump mounting adapters.
b. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PIPES, TUBES, AND FITTINGS FOR ABOVE GROUND PIPING:
A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/API5L, black steel, Schedule 40, Grade B.

1. Malleable-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.3, Class 150, standard
pattern.
2. Wrought-Steel Welding Fittings: ASTM A 234 for butt and socket
welding.
3. Unions: ASME B16.39, Class 150, malleable iron with brass-to-
iron seat, ground joint, and threaded ends.
4. Forged-Steel Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.5, minimum
Class 150, including bolts, nuts, and gaskets of the following
material group, end connections, and facings:
a. Material Group: 1.1.
b. End Connections: Threaded or butt welding to match
pipe.
c. Lapped Face: Not permitted underground.
d. Gasket Materials: Asbestos free, ASME B16.20 metallic, or
ASME B16.21 nonmetallic, gaskets compatible with fuel oil.
e. Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, cadmium-plated steel.
2.2 DOUBLE-CONTAINMENT PIPE AND FITTINGS FOR UNDERGROUND PIPING
A The primary delivery piping system shall be for pressure applications and have
coaxial type double wall construction, with the primary pipe loosely fitting into
the secondary pipe. This loose fit allows for detection and containment of any
eventual leak from the primary pipe into the secondary pipe. All pipe work shall
be Polyamide lined, Polyethylene material conforming to EN14125 suitable for
23 11 00
working pressure of 10bar. All pipe and fittings are designed for direct burial and
pipe runs can be joined without the use of transition sumps.
Direct buried fittings shall be true double wall construction with no bridging from
the primary to the secondary pipe. Secondary fittings shall be pressure rated for
a minimum of 50 psig. The piping system shall be compatible with chemicals
naturally found in the ground and resistant to bacterial attack. Piping shall be
supplied in flexible coils for longer pipe runs with no joints where feasible, or in
sticks for conventional piping installations.
Where desired coaxial or single wall pipe may be installed within a 4" dual layer
thermoplastic corrugated pipe chase to permit replacement of the pipe without
the need of excavation.
Include design and fabrication of double-containment pipe and fitting

assemblies with provision for field installation of cable leak-detection system in
annular space between carrier and containment piping.
2.3 JACKETED, STEEL, FUEL-OIL UST
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available

manufacturers offering that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are
not limited to, the following:
1. Cookson & Zinn
B. Description: The UST shall be double wall carbon steel tanks complying with EN
12285-1 with external coating of Endoprene on the outer shell.
C. Tank Construction:
1. The Tank shell shall be from rolled carbon steel conforming to EN10025
2. Wielding of the shell shall be in conformance to EN288.
3. Tank shall be provided with 6mm thick striker plate beneath all filling and
dipstick opening of minimum 300mm diameter with rounded weld.
4. The outer shell shall be completely covered with Endoprene coating. All exposed
metallic part shall be completely sealed to protect from corrosion.
5. Thickness of the Endroprene shall conform to EN12285-1. Thickness of the

Endoprene shall be as per the site soil test and manufacturer's recommendation
based on soil test.
6. Interstitial space shall be provided between the two tank shell.
7. The intestinal space shall be continuously monitored by Class 1 Vacuum monitoring

system.
8. Tank entry manhole shall be as shown in the drawings.
9. All flanges on the Tank Manhole shall conform to EN1092
10. Manhole collors shall have the same thickness as that of the inner shell
23 11 00
and shall be continuously welded to the inner tank. The outer surface of
manhole shall be coated with Enodoprene of thickness similar to that of the outer
shell.
11. Tank lid shall be of steel to EN10025, coated with Endoprene similar to
manhole. The dimensions shall comply with EN12285-1.
12 All fitting to be plugged prior to Endoprene coating.
13. Shell stiffing rings shall be provided in accordance to EN12285-1
14 Backfilling shall be as per manufacturers recommendation.
D FUEL-OIL UST ACCESSORIES
1. Striker Plates: Inside tank, on bottom below fill, vent, sounding, gage, and
other tube openings.
2. Lifting Lugs: For handling and installation. Lifting Lugs shall be provided as per
manufacturers requirement of lifting points.
3. Containment Sumps: Fiberglass or PE with sump base, add-on extension pieces as

required, sump top, lid, and gasket-seal joints. Sump gaskets shall be suitable for
aggressive environments and high water table.
4. Sump Entry Boots: Two-part pipe fitting for field assembly and of size required to fit
over pipe.
Include gaskets shaped to fit sump sidewall, sleeves, seals, and clamps as
required for liquid- tight pipe penetrations.
5. Anchor Straps: Storage tank manufacturer's standard anchoring system, with

straps, strap- insulating material, cables and turnbuckles, of strength at least one
and one-half times maximum uplift force of empty tank without backfill in place.
6. Overfill Prevention Valves: Factory fabricated and assembled from manufacturer's

standard components. Include drop tube, cap, fill nozzle adaptor, check valve
mechanism or other devices, and vent if required to restrict flow at 95 percent
of tank capacity and to provide complete shutoff of filling at 98 percent of tank
capacity
Include the Following
1. Diffuser
2. Air Transfer Valve
Over fill prevention valve and accessories shall be from Risbridger and factory
fitted to the tank.
2.4 SUBMERSIBLE FUEL-OIL PUMPS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available

23 11 00

1. Franklin.
2. Red Jacket Pumps; a division of Veeder-Root.
B. Controls: Pump controller panel complying with UL 353 and UL 508C and with
interlock and terminals for connections to day tank level controllers.
1. Manual reset dry-run protection. Stop pumps if fuel level falls
below pump suction.
2. Indicating lights for power on, run, and off normal conditions.
2.5 LIQUID-LEVEL GAGE SYSTEM
A. Description: Calibrated, liquid-level gage system complying with UL 1238 with

probes or other sensors and remote annunciator panel.
B. Annunciator Panel: With visual and audible, high-tank-level and low-tank-level

alarms, fuel indicator with registration in liters, and overfill alarm. Include gage
volume range that covers fuel-oil storage capacity.
2.6 LEAK-DETECTION AND MONITORING SYSTEM
A. Cable and Sensor System: Comply with UL 1238.

Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available
a. Veeder-Root.
b. Franklin
Following systems shall be provided for leak monitoring.
1. Calibrated, leak-detection and monitoring system with probes and other
sensors and remote alarm panel for fuel-oil storage tanks and fuel-oil piping.
2. Include fittings and devices required for testing.
3. Controls: Electrical
4. Calibrated, liquid-level gage complying with UL 1238 with probes or other
sensors and remote annunciator panel.
5. Remote Annunciator Panel: With visual and audible, high-tank-level and
low-tank-level alarms, fuel indicator with registration in gallons (liters), and
overfill alarm. Include gage volume range that covers fuel-oil storage
capacity.
6. Controls: Electrical
7. Pressure line leak detector shall be provided for the fuel line.
8. Class 1 Vacuum monitoring of the Interstitial space shall be provided for
tank and the pipes.
9. Monitoring wells with probes shall be provided in the bay to monitor leakage.
10 Oil water separator conforming to Class1 EN858-1 shall be provided for area
drain
11 Provide Hydrocabon sensors in all tank sump, oil water separator.
12 Provide Class 3 leak monitoring for the product line
Hazardous/Classified area classification
a. The fuel dispenser shall be certified to Ex 11 2G as per ATEX.
b. All electrical & non-electrical equipment & components shall be designed &
23 11 00
constructed according to good engineering practice & in conformity with the

required categories for Group II equipment of the ATEX 94/9/EC directive to
ensure avoidance of any ignition sources as stipulated in EN 1127-1.
c. Undesirable electrical discharge shall be avoided by earthing &

interconnecting all the metallic components of electrical & non electrical
equipment.
Operational Requirements and Other Features
1. Battery backup shall be provided to display the last delivery data for a
minimum of 5 min during power failure
2. The interrupted delivery could be resumed only if the power is restored within 3
seconds.
3. Motor should automatically shut off after 0 to 30 sec (user adjustable) after the
product delivery is stopped. (Default 10 seconds).
4. Motor should be automatically shut off when the Nozzle is replaced on the Nozzle
boot. Presets shall be provided for volume basis as well as Cash (Value) basis
5. Memory recalls of previous sales value or similar figures shall be retrievable only on
side
6. Display.(not on main display)
7. A clear distinct beep at Zero Reset shall be provided.
8. The product delivery shall start with 2 seconds delay after the nozzle is lifted from
nozzle boot
9. When the underground tank goes empty the meter should not run.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine roughing-in for fuel-oil piping system to verify actual locations of piping
connections before equipment installation.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Close equipment shutoff valves before turning off fuel oil to premises or piping
section.
B. Comply with NFPA 30 and NFPA 31 requirements for prevention of accidental

ignition.
3.3 OUTDOOR PIPING INSTALLATION
A. Install underground fuel-oil piping buried at least 450mm below finished grade.
B. Install double-containment, fuel-oil pipe at a minimum slope of 1 percent

downward toward fuel-oil storage tank sump.
C. Install vent pipe at a minimum slope of 2 percent downward toward fuel-oil

storage tank sump.
23 11 00
D. Assemble and install entry boots for pipe penetrations through sump sidewalls
for liquid-tight joints.
E. Install metal pipes and tubes, fittings, valves, and flexible connectors at piping
connections to UST.
F. Install system components with pressure rating equal to or greater than

system operating pressure.
G. Aboveground, Exterior-Wall Pipe Penetrations: Seal penetrations using steel

pipe sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals. Install sleeve size to allow for 1-inch
(25-mm) annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical
sleeve seals.
3.4 VALVE INSTALLATION
A. Install valves in accessible locations.
B. Protect valves from physical damage.
C. Install metal tag attached with metal chain indicating fuel-oil piping systems.
3.5 FUEL-OIL PUMP INSTALLATION
A. Install pump in sump on the manhole nozzle.
3.6 LIQUID-LEVEL GAGE SYSTEM INSTALLATION
A. Install liquid-level gage system. Locate panel inside building in the Electrical Room.
3.7 LEAK-DETECTION AND MONITORING SYSTEM INSTALLATION
A. Install leak-detection and monitoring system. Install alarm panel inside Electrical
Room
3.8 FUEL DISPENSER
A. Install Fuel Dispenser at location shown in the drawings.
B. Install Break away coupling
C. Connect Pipes to dispenser.
D. Install hose and Nozzle
A. Tests and Inspections: All tests and inspections shall be witnessed by 3rd Party
3.10 DEMONSTRATION
A. Engage a 3rd party certification agency for witnessing and certifying the works.
23 11 00
B. Factory-authorized service representative to train Employer’s maintenance

personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain leak-detection and monitoring
systems and automatic transfer (from storage tank to day tanks) system.
23 11 00
23 11 26 – Facility Liquefied Petroleum Gas Piping
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1.1 Provide, install, test, commission and maintain during defects liability period
complete Facility Liquefied petroleum gas piping system.
The system shall be complete with tank, pumps, controls, pipe work, control
wiring, filling point, vent, valves, level indicators etc.
1.1.2 This section shall be read in conjunction with the following:

Number Description
230713 INSULATION
This Section includes LIQUIFIED PETROLIUM GAS storage and distribution

systems and the following:
i. PIPES, TUBES, AND FITTINGS

ii. PIPING SPECIALTIES
iii. MANUAL GAS SHUTOFF VALVES
iv. PRESSURE REGULATORS
v. SERVICE METERS
vi. STORAGE CONTAINERS
vii. TRANSPORT TRUCK UNLOADING FACILITY
viii. VAPORIZERS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract apply to this Section.
23 11 26
1.4 SUMMARY
1. Pipes, tubes, and fittings.
2. Piping specialties.
3. Piping and tubing joining materials.
4. Valves.
5. Pressure regulators.
6. Service meters.
7. Storage containers.
8. Transport truck unloading facility specialties.
9. Vaporizers.
11. Grout.
12. Concrete bases.
1.5 DEFINITIONS
A. Finished Spaces: Spaces other than mechanical and electrical equipment

rooms, furred spaces, pipe and duct shafts, unheated spaces immediately
below roof, spaces above ceilings, unexcavated spaces, crawlspaces, and
tunnels.
B. Exposed, Interior Installations: Exposed to view indoors. Examples include

finished occupied spaces and mechanical equipment rooms.
C. Exposed, Exterior Installations: Exposed to view outdoors or subject to outdoor

locations.
D. LPG: Liquefied-petroleum gas.
A. The LPG installation shall comply with requirements of Civil Defence, BAPCO
and the Public Commission for the Protection of Marine Resources,
Environment & Wildlife, Government of Bahrain.
B. Minimum Operating-Pressure Ratings:

1. For Piping Containing Only Vapor:
a. Piping and Valves: 862 kPa unless otherwise indicated.
2. For Piping Containing Liquid:
a. Piping between Shutoff Valves: 2413 kPa unless otherwise indicated.
b. Piping Other than above: 1723 kPa unless otherwise indicated.
c. Valves and Fittings: 1723 kPa unless otherwise indicated.
3. Minimum Operating Pressure of Service Meter: 34.5 kPa maximum
operating pressure shall not exceed 138 kPa
C. LPG System Pressures within Buildings: Two pressure ranges. Primary pressure is
more than 3.45 kPa but not more than 13.8 kPa and is reduced to secondary
pressure of 3.45 kPa or less.
23 11 26
D. Delegated Design: Design restraints and anchors for LPG piping and
equipment, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified
professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria
indicated.
1.7 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of the following:

1. Piping specialties.
2. Corrugated stainless-steel tubing with associated components.
3. Valves. Include pressure rating, capacity, settings, and electrical
connection data of selected models.
4. Pressure regulators. Indicate pressure ratings and capacities.
5. Service meters.
6. Dielectric fittings.
7. Storage containers.
8. Transport truck unloading specialties.
10. Vaporizers.
12. Escutcheons.
B. Shop Drawings: For facility LPG piping layout. Include plans, piping layout and
elevations, sections, and details for fabrication of pipe anchors, hangers,
supports for multiple pipes, alignment guides, expansion joints and loops, and
attachments of the same to building structure. Detail location of anchors,
alignment guides, and expansion joints and loops.
1. Shop Drawing Scale [1:100]
2. Detail mounting, supports, and valve arrangements for service meter
assembly and pressure regulator assembly.
C. Delegated-Design Submittal: For LPG piping and equipment indicated to

comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis
data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for
their preparation.
D. Coordination Drawings: Plans and details, drawn to scale, on which LPG

piping is shown and coordinated with other installations, using input from
installers of the items involved.
E. Site Survey: Plans, drawn to scale, on which LPG piping is shown and
coordinated with other services and utilities.
F. Qualification Data: For qualified professional engineer.
G. Welding certificates.
H. Field quality-control reports.
I. Operation and Maintenance Data: For LPG equipment and accessories to

include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.
23 11 26
A. Handling Flammable Liquids: Remove and dispose of liquids from existing LPG
piping according to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Deliver pipes and tubes with factory-applied end caps. Maintain end caps
1.9 COORDINATION

provided.
B. Coordinate requirements of access panels and doors for valves and

accessories.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PIPES, TUBES, AND FITTINGS
A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, black steel, Schedules 80, Grade B.
1. Malleable-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.3, Class 150, standard
pattern.
2. Wrought-Steel Welding Fittings: ASTM A 234 for butt welding and
socket welding.
3. Unions: ASME B16.39, Class 150, malleable iron with brass-to-iron seat,
ground joint, and threaded ends.
4. Forged-Steel Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.5, minimum Class
150, including bolts, nuts, and gaskets of the following material group,
end connections, and facings:
a. End Connections: Threaded or butt welding to match pipe.
b. Lapped Face: Not permitted underground.
c. Gasket Materials: ASME B16.20, metallic, flat, asbestos free, aluminum
o-rings, and spiral-wound metal gaskets.
d. Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel aboveground, and stainless-
steel underground.
5. Protective Coating for Underground Piping: Factory-applied, three-
layer coating of epoxy, adhesive, and PE.
a. Joint Cover Kits: Epoxy paint, adhesive, and heat-shrink PE sleeves.
6. Mechanical Couplings:
a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available
manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the
Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1) Dresser Piping
Specialties; Division of Dresser, Inc. 2) Smith-Blair, Inc.
b. Steel flanges and tube with epoxy finish.
c. Buna-nitrile seals.
d. Steel bolts, washers, and nuts.
e. Coupling shall be capable of joining PE pipe to PE pipe, steel pipe to
PE pipe, or steel pipe to steel pipe.
f. Steel body couplings installed underground on plastic pipe shall be
factory equipped with anode.
23 11 26
B. Corrugated, Stainless-Steel Tubing: Comply with ANSI/IAS LC 1.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available

Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. OmegaFlex, Inc.
b. Parker Hannifin Corporation; Parflex Division
c. Titeflex
d. Tru-Flex Metal Hose Corp.
C. Annealed-Temper Copper Tube: Comply with ASTM B 88, Type L.

1. Copper Fittings: ASME B16.22, wrought copper, and streamlined
pattern.
2. Flare Fittings: Comply with ASME B16.26 and SAE J513.
a. Copper fittings with long nuts.
b. Metal-to-metal compression seal without gasket.
c. Dry seal threads complying with ASME B1.20.3.
D. Protective Coating for Underground Tubing: Factory-applied, extruded PE a

minimum of 0.022 inch (0.56 mm) thick.
2.2 PIPING SPECIALTIES
A. Flexible Piping Joints:

1. Approved for LPG service.
2. Stainless-steel bellows with woven, flexible, bronze, wire-reinforcing
protective jacket.
3. Minimum working pressure of 1723 kPa and 121 deg C operating
temperature.
4. Flanged- or threaded-end connections to match equipment
connected and shall be capable of minimum 20-mm misalignment.
5. Maximum 914-mm length for liquid LPG lines.
B. Appliance Flexible Connectors:

1. Indoor, Fixed-Appliance Flexible Connectors: Comply with ANSI Z21.24
2. Indoor, Movable-Appliance Flexible Connectors: Comply with ANSI
Z21.69.
3. Outdoor, Appliance Flexible Connectors: Comply with ANSI Z21.75.
4. Corrugated stainless-steel tubing with polymer coating.
5. Operating-Pressure Rating: 3.45 kPa.
6. End Fittings: Zinc-coated steel.
7. Threaded Ends: Comply with ASME B1.20.1.
8. Maximum Length: 1830 mm.
C. Quick-Disconnect Devices: Comply with ANSI Z21.41.

1. Copper-alloy convenience outlet and matching plug connector.
2. Nitrile seals.
3. Hand operated with automatic shutoff when disconnected.
4. For indoor or outdoor applications.
5. Adjustable, retractable restraining cable.
23 11 26
D. Y-Pattern Strainers:
1. Body: ASTM A 126, Class B, cast iron with bolted cover and bottom
drain connection.
2. End Connections: Threaded ends for DN 50 and smaller; flanged ends
for DN 65 and larger.
3. Strainer Screen: 60-mesh startup strainer and perforated stainless-steel
basket with 50 percent free area.
4. CWP Rating: 862 kPa.
E. Weatherproof Vent Cap: Cast- or malleable-iron increaser fitting with

corrosion-resistant wire screen, with free area at least equal to cross-sectional
area of connecting pipe and threaded-end connection.
A. Joint Compound and Tape: Suitable for LPG.

B. Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12/D10.12M for welding materials
appropriate for wall thickness and chemical analysis of steel pipe being
welded.
C. Brazing Filler Metals: Alloy with melting point greater than 540 deg C
complying with AWS A5.8/A5.8M.
2.4 MANUAL GAS SHUTOFF VALVES
A. Metallic Valves, DN 50 and Smaller for Liquid Service: Comply with ASME
B16.33 and UL 842.
1. CWP Rating: 1723 kPa
3. Socket ends for brazed joints.
4. Tamperproof Feature: Locking feature for valves indicated in
"Underground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" and
"Aboveground Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" Articles.
5. Listing by CSA or agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction
for valves 25 mm and smaller.
6. Valves 32 mm and larger shall be suitable for LPG service, with "WOG"
indicated on valve body.
B. General Requirements for Metallic Valves, DN 50 and Smaller for Vapor

Service: Comply with ASME B16.33.
3. Dry seal Threads on Flare Ends: Comply with ASME B1.20.3.
5. Listing: Listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities
having jurisdiction for valves 25 mm and smaller.
6. Service Mark: Valves 1-1/4 inch (32 mm) to DN 50 shall have initials
"WOG" permanently marked on valve body.
C. General Requirements for Metallic Valves, DN 65 and Larger: Comply with

ASME B16.38.
23 11 26
2. Flanged Ends: Comply with ASME B16.5 for steel flanges.

4. Service Mark: Initials "WOG" shall be permanently marked on valve
body.
D. One-Piece, Bronze Ball Valve with Bronze Trim: MSS SP-110.

a. Brass Craft Manufacturing Company; a Masco company.
b. Conbraco Industries, Inc.; Apollo Div.
c. Lyall, R. W. & Company, Inc.
d. McDonald, A. Y. Mfg. Co.
e. Perfection Corporation; a subsidiary of American Meter Company.
1. Body: Bronze, complying with ASTM B 584.

2. Ball: Chrome-plated brass.
3. Stem: Bronze; blowout proof.
4. Seats: Reinforced TFE; blowout proof.
5. Packing: Separate packnut with adjustable-stem packing threaded
ends.
6. Ends: Threaded, flared, or socket as indicated in "Underground
Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" and "Aboveground Manual Gas
Shutoff Valve Schedule" Articles.
CWP Rating: 4143 kPa.
7. Listing: Valves DN 25 and smaller shall be listed and labeled by an
NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
8. Service: Suitable for LPG service with "WOG" indicated on valve body.
E. Two-Piece, Full-Port, Bronze Ball Valves with Bronze Trim: MSS SP-110.
a. BrassCraft Manufacturing Company; a Masco company.
b. Conbraco Industries, Inc.; Apollo Div.
c. Lyall, R. W. & Company, Inc.
d. McDonald, A. Y. Mfg. Co.
e. Perfection Corporation; a subsidiary of American Meter Company.
1. Body: Bronze, complying with ASTM B 584.

2. Ball: Chrome-plated bronze.
3. Stem: Bronze; blowout proof.
4. Seats: Reinforced TFE; blowout proof.
5. Packing: Threaded-body packnut design with adjustable-stem
packing.
6. Ends: Threaded, flared, or socket as indicated in "Underground
Manual Gas Shutoff Valve Schedule" and "Aboveground Manual Gas
Shutoff Valve Schedule" Articles.
7. CWP Rating: 4143 kPa.
8. Listing: Valves DN 25 and smaller shall be listed and labeled by an
NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
23 11 26
9. Service: Suitable for LPG service with "WOG" indicated on valve body.
2.5 PRESSURE REGULATORS
1. Single stage and suitable for LPG.
2. Steel jacket and corrosion-resistant components.
3. Elevation compensator.
4. End Connections: Threaded for regulators DN 50 and smaller; flanged
for regulators NPS DN 65 and larger.
B. Service Pressure Regulators: Comply with ANSI Z21.80.

a. Actaris.
b. American Meter Company.
c. Fisher Control Valves and Regulators; Division of Emerson Process
Management.
d. Invensys.
e. Richards Industries; Jordan Valve Div.
1. Body and Diaphragm Case: Cast iron or die-cast aluminum.

2. Springs: Zinc-plated steel; interchangeable.
3. Diaphragm Plate: Zinc-plated steel.
4. Seat Disc: Nitrile rubber resistant to gas impurities, abrasion, and
deformation at the valve port.
5. Orifice: Aluminum; interchangeable.
Seal Plug: Ultraviolet-stabilized, mineral-filled nylon.

Single-port, self-contained regulator with orifice no larger than
required at maximum pressure inlet and no pressure sensing piping
external to the regulator.
Pressure regulator shall maintain discharge pressure setting
downstream and not exceed 150 percent of design discharge
pressure at shutoff.
Overpressure Protection Device: Factory mounted on pressure
regulator.
Atmospheric Vent: Factory- or field-installed, stainless-steel screen in
opening if not connected to vent piping. Maximum Inlet Pressure: To
be determined by the professional engineer on the basis of pressure
requirement at appliances and pressure loss in piping.
C. Line Pressure Regulators: Comply with ANSI Z21.80.

a. Actaris.
b. American Meter Company.
c. Eclipse Combustion, Inc.
d. Fisher Control Valves and Regulators; Division of Emerson Process
Management.
e. Invensys.
23 11 26
f. Maxitrol Company.
g. Richards Industries; Jordan Valve Div.
1. Body and Diaphragm Case: Cast iron or die-cast aluminum.

4. Seat Disc: Nitrile rubber resistant to gas impurities, abrasion, and
deformation at the valve port.
5. Orifice: Aluminum; interchangeable.
6. Seal Plug: Ultraviolet-stabilized, mineral-filled nylon.
7. Single-port, self-contained regulator with orifice no larger than
required at maximum pressure inlet and no pressure sensing piping
external to the regulator.
8. Pressure regulator shall maintain discharge pressure setting
downstream and not exceed 150 percent of design discharge
pressure at shutoff.
9. Overpressure Protection Device: Factory mounted on pressure
regulator.
10. Atmospheric Vent: Factory- or field-installed, stainless-steel screen in
opening if not connected to vent piping.
11. Maximum Inlet Pressure: To be determined by the professional
designer.
D. Appliance Pressure Regulators: Comply with ANSI Z21.18.

a. Canadian Meter Company Inc.
b. Eaton Corporation; Controls Div.
c. Harper Wyman Co.
d. Maxitrol Company.
e. SCP, Inc.
1. Body and Diaphragm Case: Die-cast aluminum.
4. Seat Disc: Nitrile rubber.
Seal Plug: Ultraviolet-stabilized, mineral-filled nylon.

Factory-Applied Finish: Minimum three-layer polyester and
polyurethane paint finish.
Regulator may include vent limiting device, instead of vent
connection, if approved by authorities having jurisdiction.
Maximum Inlet Pressure: As per recommendations of kitchen
equipment supplier.
2.6 SERVICE METERS

A. Provide Service Meters as per BAPCO / CDFSD recommendations.
B. Meters shall be capable of being connected to the BMS system providing real
time consumption data.
C. Meter shall have electronic visual display.
23 11 26
2.7 STORAGE CONTAINERS
A. Description: Factory fabricated, complying with requirements in NFPA 58 and

ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code and bearing the ASME label. Tanks
shall be rated for 1723-kPa minimum working pressure.
a. American Welding & Tank.
b. Hanson, Roy E. Jr. Mfg.
c. Trinity Industries, Inc.
d. United Industries Group, Inc.
2. Liquid outlet and vapor inlet and outlet connections shall have shutoff valves
with excess-flow safety shutoff valves and bypass and back-pressure check
valves with smaller than 1-mm drill-size hole to equalize pressure. Liquid-fill
connection shall have backflow check valve.
a. Connections: Color-code and tag valves to indicate type.
1) Liquid fill and outlet, red.
2) Vapor inlet and outlet, yellow.
3. Level gage shall indicate current level of liquid in the container. Gages shall
also indicate storage container contents.
4. Pressure relief valves, type and number as required by NFPA 58, connected to
vapor space and having discharge piping same size as relief-valve outlet and
long enough to extend at least 2130 mm directly overhead. Identify relief
valves as follows:
a. Discharge pressure in psig (kPa).
b. Rate of discharge for standard air in (L/s).
c. Manufacturer's name.
d. Catalog or model number.
5. Container pressure gage.
6. For outdoor installation, exposed metal surfaces mechanically cleaned,
primed, and painted for resistance to corrosion.
7. Ladders for access to valves more than 1830 mm aboveground.
8. Stainless-Steel Nameplate: Attach to aboveground storage container or to
adjacent structure for underground storage container.
a. Name and address of supplier or trade name of container.
b. Water capacity in gallons and liters.
c. Design pressure in psig kPa.
d. Outside surface area in sq. m.
e. Year of manufacture.
f. Shell thickness in mm.
g. Overall length in m.
h. OD in feet m.
i. Manufacturer's serial number
j. ASME Code label.
k. Felt support pads and two concrete or painted-steel saddles per storage
container. Corrosion protection required at container-to-felt contact.
l. Tie straps for each saddle.
m. Straps and anchors for tie-down slab.
n. Asphalt-based coating for corrosion protection.
o. Container connections and valves protected in manway at top of storage
container.
23 11 26
p. Manway equipped with ventilation louvers.
2.8 TRANSPORT TRUCK UNLOADING FACILITY
A. Description: Comply with requirements in NFPA 58.

1. Support structure consisting of a minimum 150-mm steel channel or 150-by-
100-mm rectangular steel tubing, a minimum of 914 mm above and below
grade.
2. Liquid-fill and vapor-return, quick-disconnect fittings.
3. Liquid and vapor shutoff valves with hydrostatic relief valves mounted
between the quick-disconnect fittings and shutoff valves.
4. Excess-flow safety shutoff valve in vapor-return line.
5. Backflow check valve in liquid-fill line.
6. Remote emergency shutoff valve station with underground cable to the
vapor emergency shutoff valve.
2.9 VAPORIZERS
A. Description: Factory-fabricated, -assembled, and -tested vaporizer with heat

exchanger sealed pressure-tight, built on a steel base; including insulated
jacket, flue-gas vent, liquid fuel supply and vapor connections, and controls.
Assembly shall be FMG labeled and comply with NFPA 58 and NFPA 70.
a. Algas-SDI.
b. Alternate Energy Systems, Inc.
c. Ely Energy, Inc.
d. Ransome Manufacturing; a division of Meeder Equipment Company.
B. Fabricate base and attachment to vaporizers with reinforcement strong

enough to resist vaporizer movement during a seismic event when steel base
is anchored to a concrete base.
C. Casing:
1. Mineral-fiber insulation, a minimum of 50 mm thick surrounding the heat
exchanger.
2. Integral one-piece skid with forklift access holes.
3. Lifting lugs on top of vaporizer.
4. Flue rain cap and bird screen.
5. Sheet metal jacket with screw-fastened closures and baked-enamel
protective finish.
6. Mounting base to secure boiler to concrete base.
7. Control Compartment Enclosure: Enclosure housing control panels for LPG-
fired vaporizers.
8. Explosion-proof control compartment construction required for electric
vaporizers.
D. LPG Liquid and Vapor Circuit Specialties:

1. Y-type strainer with drain valve at inlet.
2. Vaporizer coil safety pressure relief valve.
3. Vaporizer coil blowdown valve.
4. Vapor outlet isolation valve.
23 11 26
5. Pressure gages, a minimum of 63 mm in diameter, at liquid inlet and vapor

discharge. Gages shall have operating-temperature ranges so normal
operating range is at approximately 50 percent of full range.
6. Inlet safety solenoid valve to close with off-normal operation alarm.
7. Backflow check valve in bypass around inlet safety solenoid valve.
8. Liquid carryover or float-type safety shutoff switch.
9. LPG Vapor Filter: Steel shell designed and manufactured per ASME Boiler and
Pressure Vessel Code, Section VIII, Division 1; factory mounted on vaporizer
discharge. Shells larger than 125 mm shall be ASME "U" stamped. Fill with
stainless-steel, woven-mesh coalescing element to remove 99 percent of
particles larger than 10 microns. 1723-kPa minimum working pressure. Finish
with corrosion-resistant coating for an exterior application. Include factory-
mounted and -piped, differential pressure gage with gage cocks in and out,
and minimum DN 20 full-port, ball-type drain valve.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine roughing-in for LPG piping system to verify actual locations of piping
connections before equipment installation.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Close equipment shutoff valves before turning off LPG to premises or piping
section.
B. Inspect LPG piping according to NFPA 58 and the International Fuel Gas
Code to determine that LPG utilization devices are turned off in piping section
affected.
C. Comply with NFPA 58 and the International Fuel Gas Code requirements for
prevention of accidental ignition.
3.3 OUTDOOR PIPING INSTALLATION
A. Comply with NFPA 58 and the International Fuel Gas Code requirements for
installation and purging of LPG piping.
B. Install underground, LPG piping buried at least 900 mm below finished grade.
Comply with requirements in Division 31 Section "Earth Moving" for excavating,
trenching, and backfilling.
1. If LPG piping is installed less than 914 mm below finished grade, install it in
containment conduit.
C. Install underground, LPG piping according to ASTM D 2774.
D. Steel Piping with Protective Coating:
1. Apply joint cover kits to pipe after joining to cover, seal, and protect joints.
2. Repair damage to PE coating on pipe as recommended in writing by
protective coating manufacturer.
3. Replace pipe having damaged PE coating with new pipe.
E. Copper Tubing with Protective Coating:
1. Apply joint cover kits over tubing to cover, seal, and protect joints.
23 11 26
2. Repair damage to PE coating on pipe as recommended in writing by

protective coating manufacturer.
F. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.
G. Joints for connection to inlets and outlets on vaporizers, air mixers, regulators,
and valves may be flanged or threaded to match the equipment.
H. Aboveground, Exterior-Wall Pipe Penetrations: Seal penetrations using sleeves
and mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 25-mm annular
clear space between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.
1. Install steel pipe for sleeves smaller than 150 mm in diameter.
2. Install cast-iron "wall pipes" for sleeves 150 mm and larger in diameter.
I. Underground, Exterior-Wall Pipe Penetrations: Install cast-iron "wall pipes" for

sleeves. Seal pipe penetrations using mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve
size to allow for 25-mm annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for
installing mechanical sleeve seals.
J. Mechanical Sleeve Seal Installation: Select type and number of sealing
K. Install pressure gauge upstream and downstream from each service regulator.
3.4 INDOOR PIPING INSTALLATION
A. Comply with International Fuel Gas Code.

arrangement of piping systems. Indicated locations and arrangements were
used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, and other design
considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are
approved on Coordination Drawings.
C. Arrange for pipe spaces, chases, slots, sleeves, and openings in building
structure during progress of construction, to allow for mechanical installations.
D. Install piping in concealed locations unless otherwise indicated and except in
E. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and
service areas at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are
prohibited unless specifically indicated otherwise.
F. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling
panel removal.
G. Locate valves for easy access.
H. Install LPG piping at uniform grade of 2 percent down toward drip and
sediment traps.
I. . Install piping free of sags and bends.
J. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.
K. Install escutcheons for penetrations of interior walls, ceilings, and floors.
1. New Piping:
a. Piping with Fitting or Sleeve Protruding from Wall: One-piece, deep-pattern
type.
b. Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece, cast-
brass type with polished chrome-plated finish.
c. Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece, stamped-
steel type.
23 11 26
d. Piping in Unfinished Service Spaces: One-piece, cast-brass type with rough-

brass finish.
e. Piping in Unfinished Service Spaces: One-piece, stamped-steel type with set
screw or spring clips.
f. Piping in Equipment Rooms: One-piece, cast-brass type.
g. Piping in Equipment Rooms: One-piece, stamped-steel type with set screw or
spring clips.
h. Piping at Floor Penetrations in Equipment Rooms: One-piece, floor-plate type.
L. Fire-Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions,
ceilings, and floors at pipe penetrations. Seal pipe penetrations with firestop
materials.
M. Verify final equipment locations for roughing-in.
N. Comply with requirements in Sections specifying gas-fired appliances and
equipment for roughing-in requirements.
1. Prohibited Locations:
a. Do not install LPG piping in or through circulating air ducts, clothes or trash
chutes, chimneys or gas vents (flues), ventilating ducts, or dumbwaiter or
elevator shafts.
b. Do not install LPG piping in solid walls or partitions.
O. Use eccentric reducer fittings to make reductions in pipe sizes. Install fittings
with level side down.
P. Connect branch piping from top or side of horizontal piping.
Q. Install unions in pipes DN 50 and smaller, adjacent to each valve, at final
connection to each piece of equipment. Unions are not required at flanged
connections.
R. Do not use LPG piping as grounding electrode.
S. Install strainer on inlet of each line-pressure regulator and automatic or
electrically operated valve.
3.5 SERVICE-METER ASSEMBLY INSTALLATION
A. Install service-meter assemblies aboveground.

B. Install metal shutoff valves upstream from service regulators. Shutoff valves
are not required at second regulators if two regulators are installed in series.
C. Install strainer on inlet of service-pressure regulator and meter set.
D. Install service regulators mounted outside with vent outlet horizontal or facing
down. Install screen in vent outlet if not integral with service regulator.
E. Install metal shutoff valves upstream from service meters. Install dielectric
fittings downstream from service meters.
F. Install service meters downstream from pressure regulators.
3.6 VALVE INSTALLATION
A. Install manual gas shutoff valve for each gas appliance ahead of corrugated
stainless-steel tubing, aluminum, or copper connector.
B. Install underground valves with valve boxes.
C. Install regulators and overpressure protection devices with maintenance
access space adequate for servicing and testing.
D. Install earthquake valves aboveground outside buildings according to listing.
23 11 26
3.7 TRANSPORT TRUCK UNLOADING FACILITY
A. Install transport truck unloading in a cast-in-place concrete base, 1220 mm

square by 914 mm deep. Set top of concrete base at least 150 mm above
finished grade.
B. Install remote emergency shutoff station with cable release in an accessible
location, a minimum of 7.6 m and a maximum of 30 m away from transport
truck unloading.
C. Install at least two 150-mM diameter metal bollards set in and filled with
concrete on both sides of transport truck unloading. Bollard length shall be at
least 1220 mm above and below grade, with concrete encasement a
minimum of 305 mm in diameter.
3.8 STORAGE CONTAINER INSTALLATION
A. Fill storage container to at least 80 percent capacity with commercially

available liquefied petroleum gas.
B. Install piping connections with swing joints or flexible connectors to allow for
storage container settlement and for thermal expansion and contraction.
C. Set storage containers in felt pads on concrete or steel saddles. Install
corrosion protection at container-to-felt contact.
D. Install tie-downs over storage containers on saddles with proper tension.
E. Set concrete saddles on dowels set in concrete base. Anchor steel saddles to
concrete base.
F. Set storage container on concrete ballast base large enough to offset
buoyancy of empty storage container immersed in water.
G. Install tie-down straps over container anchored in ballast base and repair
damaged coating.
H. Backfill with a minimum coverage for underground containers according to
NFPA 58.
I. Install cathodic protection for storage container.
3.9 VAPORIZER INSTALLATION
A. Install vaporizer with access space for periodic maintenance.

B. Set vaporizers on and anchor to concrete base.
C. Connect liquid line from pump set, and vapor supply to distribution piping.
D. Install backup connection from vapor space of container to inlet of pressure-
regulating valve at vaporizer discharge to bypass the vaporizer during
maintenance. Install shutoff valves to change source from vaporizer to
storage container.
3.10 PAINTING
A. Paint exposed, exterior metal piping, valves, service regulators, service meters
and meter bars, earthquake valves, and piping specialties, except
components with factory-applied paint or protective coating.
1. Alkyd System: MPI EXT 5.1D.
a. Prime Coat: Alkyd anticorrosive metal primer.
b. Intermediate Coat: Exterior alkyd enamel flat.
c. Topcoat: Exterior alkyd enamel flat.
d. Color: Gray as recommended by BAPCO.
23 11 26

1. Test, inspect, and purge LPG according to NFPA 58 the International Fuel Gas
Code and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
C. LPG piping will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and
inspections.
3.12 DEMONSTRATION
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's

maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain LPG equipment.
3.13 OUTDOOR PIPING SCHEDULE
A. Underground LPG liquid piping shall be the following:

1. Schedule 80 steel pipe with wrought-steel fittings and welded joints, or
mechanical couplings. Coat pipe and fittings with protective coating for steel
piping.
B. Aboveground LPG liquid piping shall be one of the following:
1. DN 50 and Smaller: Schedule 80 steel pipe, malleable-iron threaded fittings

and threaded and seal welded joints. Coat pipe and fittings with protective
coating for steel piping.
2. DN 65 and Larger: Schedule 80, steel pipe with wrought-steel fittings and
welded joints, or mechanical couplings. Coat pipe and fittings with protective
coating for steel piping.
C. Underground LPG vapor piping shall be one of the following:
1. Schedule 40, steel pipe with wrought-steel fittings and welded joints, or
mechanical couplings. Coat pipe and fittings with protective coating for steel
piping.
D. Aboveground LPG vapor piping shall be one of the following:

1. Schedule 40, steel pipe with malleable-iron fittings and threaded joints.
2. Schedule 40, steel pipe with wrought-steel fittings and welded joints, or
mechanical couplings.
3.14 INDOOR PIPING SCHEDULE FOR SYSTEM PRESSURES LESS THAN 3.45 kPa
A. Aboveground, branch piping DN 25 and smaller shall be one of the following:

1. Corrugated stainless-steel tubing with mechanical fittings having socket or
threaded ends to match adjacent piping.
2. Annealed-temper copper tube with wrought-copper fittings and brazed joints.
23 11 26
3.15 INDOOR PIPING SCHEDULE FOR SYSTEM PRESSURES MORE THAN 3.45 kPa AND
LESS THAN 34.5 kPa
A. Aboveground, branch piping DN 25 and smaller shall be the following:
B. Aboveground, distribution piping shall be one of the following:

1. Schedule 80, steel pipe with steel welding fittings and welded joints.
C. Underground, below building, piping shall be one of the following:

1. Schedule 80, steel pipe with wrought-steel fittings and welded
joints.
23 11 26
23 21 23 - Hydronic Pumps
PART 1 - GENERAL

Supplementary Conditions Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
B. This section on Hydronic Pumps is to be read in conjunction with the following

sections:
Number Description
230713 INSULATION
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following pumps, controllers and equipment:
1. Close-coupled, end-suction centrifugal pumps.

2. Close-coupled, double suction horizontal split casing centrifugal pumps
3. Close-coupled, inline centrifugal pumps
4. Horizontal Multistage centrifugal pumps
5. Vertical Inline Multistage centrifugal pumps
6. Variable Frequency Drives
7. Differential Pressure Transmitters
8. Pump Logic Controllers
9. Pressurization Package Units
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include certified performance curves and rated capacities,

operating characteristics, furnished specialties, final impeller dimensions, and
accessories for each type of product indicated. Indicate pump's operating point
on curves.
B. Shop Drawings: Show pump layout and connections. Include setting drawings with
templates for installing foundation and anchor bolts and other anchorages.
23 21 23
C. Operation and Maintenance Data: For pumps to include in emergency, operation,

and maintenance manuals.
D. ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1-2010 Compliance: Provide compliance form as per applicable

E. Factory Performance test reports for each pump. Factory test of 1 pump from each
line item to be witnessed by Engineer and certificates of other pumps to be
reviewed. All tests to be carried out using the contract motor
A. Factory Test: The performance test for the equipment should carry out at the factory
prior to dispatch of the equipment. Factory test of 1 pump from each line item to be
witnessed by Engineer and certificates of other pumps to be reviewed. All tests to
be carried out using the contract motor. For VFD driven pumps string test must be
carried out with the Contract VFD.
The test shall be witnessed by the Engineer. Allow for visit by two personnel from
Consultant/Client for the factory test visit.
B. Source Limitations: Obtain hydronic pumps through one source from a single
manufacturer.
C. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of

hydronic pumps and are based on the specific system indicated.
D. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in

E. UL Compliance: Comply with UL 778 for motor-operated water pumps.
A. Manufacturer's Preparation for Shipping: Clean flanges and exposed machined

metal surfaces and treat with anticorrosion compound after assembly and testing.
Protect flanges, pipe openings, and nozzles with wooden flange covers or with
screwed-in plugs.
B. Store pumps in dry location.
C. Retain protective covers for flanges and protective coatings during storage.
D. Protect bearings and couplings against damage from sand, grit, and other foreign
matter.
E. Comply with pump manufacturer's written rigging instructions.
23 21 23
1.6 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish extra materials recommended by the manufacturer that match products

installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified
with labels describing contents.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS


by one of the manufacturers whose equipment must have been used in the
Kingdom similar applications in last 5-10 years.
3. The pump design shall not involve the use of any prototype design or
component. Pumps shall be selected from the manufacturer’s standard range
of pumps with established design and proven track record for pumping
applications similar to those described in the Tender documents.
2.2 DESIGN CONSIDERATIONS
A. The pumps shall be of a type as indicated in the particular requirements of

specifications and/or respective data sheets.
B. The pumps shall be designed for continuous duty at rated parameters and should
be capable of pumping the flow ranges specified in the particular specifications.
C. The design and construction of the pumps shall allow quick dismantling and
inspection/removal of impeller without removal of the suction and discharge lines.
D. The optimum efficiency of the pump shall not be less than 80% at rated duty point
for pumps above 100kW and 70% for pumps up to 100kW, unless specifically
mentioned otherwise,
E. The head-capacity curve of the pumps shall be stable at all flow rates. The curve
shall be of a continuously rising type, right up to shut-off and shall be designed for
parallel operation of duty pumps.
F. All pumps shall be of stiff shaft construction and shall be designed such that the
running speed is well below the first critical speed.
G. The pump capacity at run-out conditions shall not be less than 130% of the duty
point unless specifically mentioned otherwise.
H. Pumps should be selected so that the rated duty point is as close a possible to the
BEP. The rated duty point for pumps should be in the preferred operating range
23 21 23
which shall be between 80% and 110% of BEP for pumps above 100kW and 70% and
120% for pumps up to 100kW, unless specifically mentioned otherwise.
I. The shut-off head shall be minimum 10% higher than the rated head at rated speed
and capacity.
J. The required net positive suction head (NPSHr) of the pumps at the rated speed shall
be at least 1.5mwc below the available net positive suction head (NPSHa) for
parallel operation. The Contractor shall verify the NPSHa value prior to ordering of
pumps.
K. The combined noise level of pump-drive system and motor shall not exceed 90dbA
at 1 meter distance from equipment unless mentioned otherwise. The overall noise
level in the pump hall shall also not exceed 95 dBA measured at 1 meter from any
plant unit when all plant is running. This criteria shall be guaranteed by the
Contractor & should be verified by measurement at different points inside the pump
hall in accordance with the respective standards.
L. The pumps shall be designed for a minimum service life of 25 years.
M. The pumps shall be designed for continuous duty without requiring any major
overhaul for 3 years duration or 25,000 hours operation, whichever is later.
N. The duty impeller to be selected should be 5% under maximum impeller diameter as

maximum. In any case, the duty impeller shall not be more than 95% of the
maximum impeller and not less than 110% of the minimum impeller.
O. The Contractor shall guarantee that the pump set complete with all its auxiliaries is
capable of being operated at all loads without any undue and inadmissible
vibration in accordance with ISO 10816 Part 7 : 2009 Category I for pumps above
250kW and Category II For pumps up to 250kW
23 21 23
P. All rotating elements shall be statically and dynamically balanced to ISO 1940 G2.5
or better to minimize vibration. The Contractor /pump manufacturer shall furnish
guaranteed figure for vibration on the data sheets
2.3 END-SUCTION CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS
A. Description: Factory-assembled and tested, centrifugal, overhung-impeller, flexible

coupled, end-suction pump as per EN 733 & ISO 2858; designed for horizontal
mounting, with pump and motor shafts horizontal. Rate pump for 16 bar minimum
working pressure and a continuous water temperature of 120 deg C.
B. The pump and motor shall be of USA/European origin. The pump and motor shall be
coupled at the manufacturer’s works and tested as per section 1.4A. Factory test
C. Pump Construction:
1. Casing: Radial split, with replaceable wear rings, threaded gage tapings at
inlet and outlet, drain plug at bottom and air vent at top of volute, and
flanged connections to EN 1092-2. Provide integral feet on pump volute to
support the casing and attached piping, to allow removal and replacement
of impeller without disconnecting piping or requiring the realignment of pump
and motor shaft.
23 21 23
The pump housing and pump head shall be electro-coated internally &
2. Impeller: Statically and dynamically balanced, keyed to shaft, and secured

with a locking cap screw. Trim impeller to match specified performance.
3. Pump Shaft: Stainless steel.
4. Mechanical Seal: Single mechanical bellows type Carbon Vs. Silicon carbide
seal faces. The rubber parts shall be EPDM
5. Pump Bearings: Permanently lubricated or Grease-lubricated (for large

pumps) ball bearings contained in cast-iron housing. Bearing must be rated
for a L10 life of 50,000hrs.
6. Refer to the pump data sheet for the applicable material of construction.
7. Motor: Single speed, with permanently lubricated/ grease-lubricated ball

bearings, unless otherwise indicated; rigidly mounted to pump casing with
integral pump support.
D. Shaft Coupling: Flexible Cast Iron couplings with rubber inserts for absorbing
vibration. Couplings shall be provided with spacer, against specific requirements, to
allow disassembly and removal without removing pump shaft or motor
E. Coupling Guard: Stainless steel 1.4301; removable; attached to mounting frame.
F. Mounting Frame: Steel base frame, factory fabricated, in accordance with EN

23661. Fabricate to mount pump casing, coupling guard, and motor.
G. Motor: Motor: Motors should be sized so that it does not get overloaded at any
point of the Q-H Curve of the pump. The motors shall be Totally Enclosed Fan
Cooled high efficiency (efficiency class IE3) fixed speed motors as per IEC
standards, Enclosure Class IP55, Insulation class F with Class B temperature rise to
IEC85. The motors shall be suitable for a minimum ambient temperature of 55 deg C
without capacity deration.
Single phase motors, up to 2.2KW, shall be suitable for 230V, 50Hz power supply.
Three phase motors shall be suitable for 380-415V, 50Hz power supply.
All motors shall be suitable for operation with Variable Frequency Drives
Note: The material of construction of all pumps for sea water application shall be of
super duplex stainless steel material and all other wetted component shall be
suitable for marine application. Refer to the pump data sheet for the applicable
2.4 DOUBLE SUCTION HORIZONTAL SPLIT CASING CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS
A. Description: Factory-assembled and tested, centrifugal, impeller-between-bearings,

separately coupled, double-suction pump conforming to HI standards; designed for
base mounting, with pump and motor shafts horizontal. Rate pump for 16 bar
minimum working pressure and a continuous water temperature of 100 deg C.
23 21 23
The pump and motor shall be coupled at the manufacturer’s works and tested as
per section 1.4A. Factory test certificates shall be available upon request.
coupled at the manufacturer’s works and tested. Factory test certificates shall be
available upon request.
1. Casing: Axially split, with replaceable wear rings, threaded gage tappings at
inlet and outlet, drain plug at bottom and air vent at top of volute, and
flanged connections to EN 1092-2. Casing supports shall allow removal and
replacement of impeller without disconnecting piping.
2. Impeller: Statically and dynamically balanced according to ISO 1940 Class

G6.3, and keyed to shaft. Trim impeller to match specified performance.
4. Mechanical Seal: Bellows type mechanical seal with Carbon Vs. Aluminium
Oxide seal faces. The rubber parts shall be Nitrile rubber (NBR). The seal
dimensions shall conform to EN 12756.
5. Pump Bearings: Grease-lubricated ball bearings contained in cast-iron

housing with grease fittings. Bearing must be rated for a L10 life of 50,000hrs.
7. Motor: Single speed, with permanently lubricated/ grease-lubricated ball

bearings, unless otherwise indicated; rigidly mounted to pump casing with
integral pump support.
D. Shaft Coupling: Flexible grid type coupling shall be provided to assist reduction of
vibrations and to cushion shock loads. The coupling shall consist of two steel flanges
with tapered teeth and a grid spring to transmit the torque. The coupling is held
together by means of horizontally split coupling halves.
E. Coupling Guard: A fully enclosed coupling guard of steel shall be provided and
firmly attached to mounting frame.
F. Mounting Frame: Welded-steel frame and cross members, factory fabricated from
channels and angles. Fabricate to mount pump casing, coupling guard, and
motor. The base frame shall be designed according to HI Standard, ANSI/HI 1.3-
2000.
G. Motor: Motor: Motors should be sized so that it does not get overloaded at any
point of the Q-H Curve of the pump. The motors shall be Totally Enclosed Fan
Cooled high efficiency (efficiency class IE2 or above) fixed speed motors as per IEC
standards, Enclosure Class IP55, Insulation class F with Class B temperature rise to
without deration.
The motors shall be suitable for 3 phase, 380-415V, 50Hz power supply.
All motors shall be suitable for operation with Variable Frequency Drives
23 21 23
2.5 CLOSE-COUPLED, INLINE CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS
A. Description: Factory assembled and tested, centrifugal, overhung-impeller, close-

coupled, in-line pump; designed for installation with pump and motor shafts
mounted Vertically. Pumps with motor rating up to 7.5KW shall be suitable for
horizontal mounting also. The pumps shall be rated for minimum working pressure of
10 bar and a continuous water temperature of 120 deg C.
coupled at the manufacturer’s works and tested as per Section 1.4A. Factory test
1. Casing: Radial split, with replaceable neck ring, threaded gauge tapings at
inlet and outlet, and threaded or flanged connections up to 2” and flanged
connections above 2”. The flanges shall be as per EN 1092-2 and ISO 7005-2.
The pumps shall be of the top pull out design. The power head (motor, pump
head and impeller) shall be removable for service while the pump housing is in
the pipe work. The pump housing and pump head shall be electro-coated
internally & externally with cataphoresis surface treatment for high corrosion
resistance.
2. Impeller: Statically and dynamically balanced & keyed to the pump shaft,
4. Mechanical Seal: The Mechanical seals shall be of the Bellows type with
Silicon Carbide / Carbon seal faces and EPDM bellows.
5. Pump Bearings: The pump radial and axial forces shall be absorbed by the
fixed bearings in the motor drive end, without the need of bearings in the
pump shaft. The bearings shall be permanently lubricated / grease lubricated
ball bearings. Bearing must be rated for a L10 life of 50,000hrs
D. Motor: Motors should be sized so that it does not get overloaded at any point of
the Q-H Curve of the pump. The motors shall be totally Enclosed Fan Cooled high
efficiency (efficiency class IE3 or IE4) fixed speed motors as per IEC standards,
Enclosure Class IP55, Insulation class F with class B temperature rise to IEC85. The
motors shall be suitable for a minimum ambient temperature of 55 deg C without
capacity deration.
Single phase motors, up to 2.2 KW, shall be suitable for 230V, 50Hz power supply.
Three phase motors shall be suitable for 380-415V, 50Hz power supply.
23 21 23
All motors shall be suitable for operation with Variable Frequency Drives.
2.6 HORIZONTAL MULTISTAGE CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS
A. Description: Factory assembled and tested, Horizontal Multistage, Close-coupled

Centrifugal pump; designed for Horizontal installation with axial suction port and
radial discharge port. The pumps shall be rated for minimum working pressure of 10
bar and a continuous water temperature of 120 deg C.
certificates shall be available for each pump witnessed by Engineer.
1. Casing: The pump shall consist of a Suction part and a discharge part. The
chambers shall be secured between the suction part & discharge part. The
pumps shall have threaded Rp connections. The pump shall have a base
plate for mounting.
All wetted parts of the pump shall be of stainless steel 1.4301 (AISI 304).
Complete 1.4401 (AISI 316) constructions shall be provided upon specific
request. Cast Iron parts of the pump shall be electro-coated internally &
externally with cataphoresis surface treatment for high corrosion resistance
2. Impeller: The impellers shall be of stainless steel 1.4301 (AISI 304) or 1.4401 (AISI
316) upon specific request. The impeller design shall ensure streamlined flow
through it, reducing eddy flow and frictional losses.
4. Mechanical Seal: The Mechanical seals shall be of the O ring type with fixed
driver, & Silicon carbide Vs. Silicon Carbide seal faces. The seal design shall
have stainless steel parts.
5. Pump Bearings: The pump radial and axial forces shall be absorbed by the
fixed bearings in the motor drive end, without the need of bearings in the
pump shaft. The bearings shall be permanently lubricated. Bearing must be
rated for a L10 life of 50,000hrs.
D. Motor: Motors should be sized so that it does not get overloaded at any point of the
Q-H Curve of the pump. The motors shall be Totally Enclosed Fan Cooled high
efficiency fixed speed motors as per IEC standards and principal dimensions to EN
standards. Enclosure Class IP55, Insulation class F with Class B temperature rise to
without deration.
23 21 23
Single phase motors shall be suitable for 230V, 50Hz power supply. Single phase
motors shall have built in thermal protection.
34-11: TP211)
All 3 phase motors shall be suitable for operation with Variable Frequency Drives.
Pumps with Electronic motors (with integrated VFD) shall be available for specific
requirements.
2.7 VERTICAL INLINE MULTISTAGE CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS
A. Description: Factory assembled and tested, Vertical Multistage Inline, rigid-coupled

Centrifugal pump; designed for Vertical installation with pump and motor shafts
mounted vertically. The pumps shall be rated for minimum working pressure of 16
bar and a continuous water temperature of 120 deg C.
certificates shall be available for each pump witnessed by Engineer.
1. Casing: The pump shall consist of a base and a pump head. The chamber
stack and the sleeve shall be secured between the pump head and the base
by means of stay bolts. The pump base shall have the suction and discharge
ports on the same level (in line). Pumps up to 2” suction and discharge ports
shall have connections suitable for PJE / Victaulic couplings. DIN flanged
3” and above shall be DIN flanged.
frictional losses.

5. Larger pumps with heavy motors (more than 35 kg), shall use spacer type
6. Pump Bearings: The pump bearings shall be of hard wearing materials to

ensure long life. Bearing must be rated for a L10 life of 50,000hrs
23 21 23
D. Motor: Motors should be sized so that it does not get overloaded at any point of the
Q-H Curve of the pump. The motors shall be Totally Enclosed Fan Cooled high
efficiency (efficiency class IE3 or IE4; meet or exceed EuP IE3 grade) fixed speed
motors as per IEC standards, Enclosure Class IP55, Insulation class F with Class B
temperature rise to IEC85. The motors shall be suitable for a minimum ambient
temperature of 60 deg C without capacity deration.
Single phase motors, up to 2.2 KW, shall be suitable for 230V, 50Hz power supply.
34-11: TP211)
All motors shall be suitable for operation with Variable Frequency Drives. Pumps with
Electronic motors (with integrated VFD) shall be available for specific requirements.
2.8 PUMP DUTIES
1. Pumps and motors shall be capable of operating at a system pressure 20%

above the design pressure for the specific water volume.
2. The design head indicated in the drawings are for guidance only. The
contractor shall be responsible for determining the exact head based on
approved shop drawings.
3. Different pump types/ capacities shall be selected from one manufacturer for
after sales services etc.
4. Pumps shall be selected with an impeller at least one size down from the
largest impeller and a motor size to suit the larger impeller so that an impeller
change can take place without changing the motor.
5. The pump manufacturer shall provide dedicated performance curves

indicating the point of operation and maximum duty with the selected drive
configuration.
6. All pump shafts shall be of stainless steel construction unless otherwise stated
specifically elsewhere.
7. All pumps bases shall be of heavy cast iron/ steel construction.
8. All pumps & motors shall be factory assembled & tested and certificates shall
be produced to the engineer in charge prior to shipment.
9. All pump motors shall have a service factor of 1.15. All pump motors of
capacity 3.73 kilowatts and larger shall be with high efficiency construction.
2.9 PUMP AND PROTECTION REQUIREMENTS
1. Split case and end suction pumps shall be fitted with resistance temperature
detectors (RTDs) that are set to initiate an alarm and shut down the pump in
the event that the temperature exceeds high level set points.
23 21 23
2. Each bearing housing shall be supplied with an RTD socket, complete with a
resistance thermometer element.
3. Pump (and pump motor bearing) temperature monitoring shall be integrated

with the control system to continuously display and record temperature levels
and to provide alarm signals when bearing temperatures rise to a preset limit.
These limits are to be advised in advance by the pump manufacturer and set
during pump commissioning; these settings shall also be included in the
operation and maintenance manual.
4. All pumps shall be fitted with vibration transducers (velometers) mounted on

the bearing housings in the vertical and horizontal (orthogonal) positions plus
one axial position on the non-drive end bearing as indicated in BS ISO 10816
Part 7. Vibration signal monitoring shall be integrated with the control system
to continuously display and record the vibration level and provide alarm
signals when vibration levels rise to a preset limit.
5. These limits are to be advised in advance by the pump manufacturer and set
during pump commissioning and these settings shall also be included in the
operation and maintenance manual.
6. Pump and motor bearing temperature and vibration signals and motor
winding temperature signals shall be directly connected to the pump starter
to provide hardwired protection in the event that bearing temperatures,
vibration levels or motor winding temperatures rise to a preset high limit where
the pump will be shut down.
2.10 INSPECTION AND TESTING
Manufacturer's Shop Testing
A. At least one pump in each main pump group shall be Factory Acceptance Tested
(FAT) as a string test using contract motor and starter panel and witnessed by the
Employer / Employers Representative. All other main pumps shall be tested as a
string test and certificates submitted for review and approval.
B. ENGINEER reserve the right for shop inspection/stage inspection by their authorized
representatives.
C. The Contractor shall submit a detailed Inspection and Test Plan (ITP) or Quality
Control Plan (QCP) for approval of the Employer / Employer’s Representative
showing manufacturing, inspection and testing activities complete with their
acceptance criteria prior to commencement of manufacturing.
D. Each individual component of the pump (casing, impeller shaft etc.) shall be
subjected to heat treatments and tests (including NDT) as required by the specific
applicable material specifications.
E. The below documentation shall as a minimum, be subject to review and approval

by the Third Party Inspection Agency and the Employer / Employer’s Representative
during the Factory Acceptance Tests:
1. Materials certificates to ISO 10474 3.2 for pump components indicating:
23 21 23
- Heat treatment
- Material chemical analysis
- Material mechanical properties
2. Pump casing inspection and test report
3. Pump casing hydrostatic test report
4. Pump impeller inspection and test report
5. Pump impeller and shaft balancing report
6. Pump impeller/wear ring clearance report
7. Pump paint testing reports
8. Pump final visual inspection and dimensional control report
F. Certificates to BS EN10204 (type 3.2) shall be issued for all major pump components.
On satisfactory completion of the pumps, the Contractor shall provide a
Conformance Certificate, endorsed by the Third Party Inspection Authority (TPIA), to
verify that the pump meets the specified requirements.
G. The below mentioned tests shall be identified in the quality control plan as
witness/hold points for TPIA / Employer / Employer’s Representative. The factory
acceptance tests for each pump system shall include, but shall not be limited to:
1. Visual examination of the pumps to ensure compliance with the

approved drawings and specifications.
2. Pump performance tests to determine the pump curve at the design
pump speed. Tests shall be carried out from the lower head limit of the
pump guaranteed performance curve to the shut off head.
3. Pump performance tests at the guaranteed duty point. Tests shall
confirm the guaranteed performance values for duty flow, head, power,
efficiency, and NPSHr.
4. Variable speed pump performance tests (if applicable) for at least 4
speed points to be decided by the Employer / Employer’s
Representative.
5. Pump bearing temperature and vibration monitoring.
6. Noise testing
7. String Test (Pump + Contract Motor or Pump+ Contract Motor + Contract
VFD as applicable)
8. Pump internal inspection following performance testing
Certificates type 3.2 to ISO 10474 shall be issued for all tests mentioned above.
H. The Contractor / Manufacturer shall make suitable provisions for detailed shop
testing of the pump, and inform /ENGINEER sufficiently (at least one month) in
advance to enable their representatives to witness the tests.
I. The pump set shall be tested in accordance with the procedures described in ISO
9906 (latest edition), or relevant approved equivalent standard, at the
manufacturer's premises to show that pump is capable of achieving the duty point
values as detailed in the Contract.
23 21 23
J. All pump/motor sets shall undergo performance testing and the tests shall be carried
out with the job motor.
K. The pump curves at various heads/flow rates shall be plotted together with power
requirements, efficiencies, NPSH(r) etc.
L. Certified data, curves, etc. both for witnessed test conditions and corrected for
actual site conditions shall be plotted & furnished for each test and submitted for
approval by ENGINEER or their representatives.
M. The factory tests for each variable speed pump shall include, but shall not be limited
to:
1. Mechanical running test
2. String test with V.S.D.S. & job motor
3. NPSH(r)
4. Discharge characteristics including power consumption & efficiency
5. Bearing temperature measurement
6. Noise measurement
7. Vibration measurement
N. The above tests shall be conducted at minimum, maximum and average speed
except NPSH(r) and Mechanical Test shall be conducted at rated speed. (Minimum
speed should not be more than 50%).
O. The material certificates, physical properties, heat treatments and shop test
certificates shall be duly approved and certified by CONTRACTOR/Manufacturer's
Inspectors and Engineer’s personnel who have witnessed the test.
P. After shop test, the upper half of the pump casing shall be disconnected and top half
ofteh casing to be opened. Visual inspection shall be carried out for any possible
defects/deformations. Any defects/faults/deformations detected shall be promptly
repaired / replaced by CONTRACTOR/Manufacturer after obtaining approval of
ENGINEER, prior to dispatch. Engineer’s decision in this regard, within tender
specifications, shall be final and binding on the Contractor.
Q. If witnessing of any tests is not satisfactory and a retest is required, the cost of the
witnessed retests shall then be borne by the Contractor.
R. All instruments used during shop tests at manufacturer's premises shall be duly
calibrated by recognized laboratories and the valid calibration certificates shall be
inspected and certified by Engineers inspectors prior to starting the shop tests.
S. SPARE PARTS
The Contractor shall include in his bid, as a minimum, consumables and spare parts
for commissioning, and spare parts for guarantee period operation. The Contractor /
Manufacturer shall guarantee the availability of spare parts for a minimum duration of
10 years.
The Contractor shall supply the below mentioned spare parts (as a minimum) for
each pump model, size and type supplied under the Contract:
- 2 Complete set of pump and motor bearings (DE & NDE bearings included in
one set).
23 21 23
- 2 Complete set of wear rings for impeller and casing.

- 2 Complete set of impeller keys and shaft nuts.
- 2 Complete set of shaft sleeves.
- 2 sets of all "O" rings/gaskets/washers etc.
- 2 sets of flexible couplings complete with all necessary accessories.
- One complete set of mechanical seals.
Any spares over and above the specified minimum, shall be listed and priced
separately by the Contractor, for Engineer’s approval / acceptance.
PUMP DATA SHEET

Project and Application
Project: AL SAHEL RESORT BEACH

RESORT, BAHRAIN
Tag Number CHPP-01, 02, 03, 04 & 05 CHSP-01, 02 & 03
HOTEL BUILDING - LVL 097 -

Location GF ENERGY CENTER
CHILLED WATER PUMP ROOM
CHILLED WATER SECONDARY

Service CHILLED WATER PRIMARY PUMPS
PUMPS
Number of Pump Sets 4 Duty + 1 Standby 2 Duty + 1 Standby
Manufacturer and Supplier Details
Pump Manufacturer / Motor

* *
Manufacturer/ VFD Manufacturer
Place of Manufacturing
* *
(Pump/Motor/VFD)
Place of FAT * *
Local Agent in Bahrain ( Name /
* *
Contact details)
Performance Data -Pump
HORIZONTAL SPLIT CASING, SINGLE STAGE, HORIZONTAL SPLIT CASING,

Pump Type
CENTRIFUGAL SINGLE STAGE, CENTRIFUGAL
Pump model * *
Rated Flow ( lps) 131 175
Rated Head ( Mtr) 70 60
Pump Efficiency ( % ) * *
Maximum power consumption
* *
( KW)
Motor rating ( KW) * *
Rated Speed ( rpm) * *
Motor Efficiency at full load ( %) * *
NPSH required at duty Point ( mtr) * *
Minimum Continuous Flow required

* *
through the pump ( lps)
Shuoff head of Pump ( mtr) * *
23 21 23
Head rise to shut off ratio * *

Impeller diameter mm ( Max /
* *
Rated / Min)
Mechanical Details -Pump
Inlet Branch (Size/ Rating / Facing) * *
Outlet Branch (Size / Rating /

* *
facing)
Shaft sealing Mechanical seal Mechanical seal
Bearing Life ( L10) 50,000hrs 50,000hrs
Lubricant Grease Grease
Coupling Type Flexible spacer Flexible spacer
Base Plate Fabricated Steel base plate Fabricated Steel base plate
Hoop type that extends beyond ends of Hoop type that extends
Coupling Guard
coupling beyond ends of coupling
Motor
Motor Rating * *
Frame * *
Area Safe Safe
RPM * *
IP Rating IP 55 IP 55
V/PH/HZ 415/3/ 50 415/3/ 50
Full Load current * *
Ambient temperature 55 Deg C 55 Deg C
Insulation Class / Temperature rise F/B F/B
Starting Variable frequency Drive Variable frequency Drive
Starter Panel
Starting method Variable Frequency Drive Variable Frequency Drive
Motor Rating * *
Ambient Temperature 50 Deg C 50 Deg C
Enclosure NEMA 4X NEMA 4X
Model of VFD * *
Materials of Construction -Pump

Casing C.I IS 210 FG 260 (EN-GJL-250 C.I IS 210 FG 260 (EN-GJL-250
Impeller BR 1S:318 GR-LTB2 BR 1S:318 GR-LTB2
Shaft ST ST ASTM A 276 -410 ANLD ST ST ASTM A 276 -410 ANLD
Wear Rings BR 1S:318 GR-LTB2 BR 1S:318 GR-LTB2

Sleeve ST ST ASTM A 276 -410 ANLD ST ST ASTM A 276 -410 ANLD
Auxilliaries
Suction Discharge Pressure
Suction Discharge Pressure gauges
Pressure Gauges gauges mounted on a
mounted on a gauge Board
gauge Board
23 21 23
Bearing RTDS Drive end and Non drive end Drive end and Non drive end
Vibration Sensors Drive end and Non drive end Drive end and Non drive end
Automatic release valve on

Release Valve Automatic release valve on casing
casing
Instrumentation to be terminated in Instrumentation to be

Junction Box
Junction Box terminated in Junction Box
Anti Condensation Heaters Anti Condensation Heaters

Insulated End Shield Insulated End Shield
Accessories for Motor
Winding RTD (2 Per Phase) Winding RTD (2 Per Phase)
Bearing RTD (1 Per Bearing) Bearing RTD (1 Per Bearing)
Testing and Documents
Inspection test plan To be submitted for approval To be submitted for approval
BS EN ISO 9906:2012 / HI
BS EN ISO 9906:2012 / HI Centrifugal Pump
Performance Test standard- pump Centrifugal Pump Tests - 2011
Tests - 2011 Grade 2B
Grade 2B
1 pump subjected to
1 pump subjected to witnessed string test witnessed string test using
No of pumps tested ( Witnessed /
using contract equipment others subjected contract equipment others
Non witnessed)
to non witnessed tests subjected to non witnessed
tests
Hydro test Yes Yes
Vibration Test Yes Yes
Witnessed Removal of Top
Witnessed Removal of Top half casing
Strip Test half casing following test for
following test for inspection
inspection
Motor Routine test certificate Routine test certificate
NOTE:
* To be filled in by Pump Manufacturer
PUMP DATA SHEET
Project and Application
Project: AL SAHEL RESORT BEACH RESORT, BAHRAIN
CWPP-01, 02, 03, CWSP-01, 02, 03,

Tag Number CMP-01 & 02 CTBP-01 & 02 BS-01 & 02
04 & 05 04 & 05
ENERGY CENTER ENERGY CENTER ENERGY

GF ENERGY GF ENERGY
Location ROOF PLANT ROOF PLANT CENTER ROOF
CENTER CENTER
ROOM ROOM PLANT ROOM
COOLING TOWER
CHILLER CONDENSER COOLING
CONDENSER WATER COOLING TOWER COOLING TOWER TOWER BASIN
Service WATER PRIMARY SECONDARY MAKE UP WATER BLEED OFF WATER WATER
PUMPS (BETWEEN PUMPS (BETWEEN PUMPS PUMPS SWEEPING
CHILLER & HEX) COOLING TOWER PUMP
& HEX)
4 Duty + 1 1 Duty + 1 1 Duty + 1 1 Duty + 1
Number of Pump Sets 4 Duty + 1 standby
standby standby standby standby
23 21 23
Manufacturer and
Supplier Details
Pump Manufacturer
/ Motor
* * * * *
Manufacturer/ VFD
Manufacturer
Place of
Manufacturing * * * * *
(Pump/Motor/VFD)
Place of FAT * * * * *
Local Agent in
Bahrain ( Name / * * * * *
Contact details)
Performance Data -
Pump
HORIZONTAL SPLIT HORIZONTAL SPLIT HORIZONTAL END HORIZONTAL END

VERTICAL ,
CASING, SINGLE CASING, SINGLE SUCTION, SINGLE SUCTION, SINGLE
Pump Type SINGLE STAGE,
STAGE, STAGE, STAGE, STAGE,
CENTRIFUGAL
CENTRIFUGAL CENTRIFUGAL CENTRIFUGAL CENTRIFUGAL
Pump model * * * * *
Rated Flow ( lps) 255.5 255.5 35 30 216
Rated Head ( Mtr) 30 40 25 20 37

Pump Efficiency
* * * * *
(%)
Maximum power
consumption * * * * *
( KW)
Motor rating ( KW) * * * * *

Rated Speed
* * * * *
( rpm)
Motor Efficiency at
* * * * *
full load ( %)
NPSH required at
* * * * *
duty Point ( mtr)
Minimum Continuous
Flow required
* * * * *
through the pump
( lps)
Shuoff head of Pump
* * * * *
( mtr)
Head rise to shut off
* * * * *
ratio
Impeller diameter
mm ( Max / Rated / * * * * *
Min)
Mechanical Details -
Pump
Inlet Branch (Size/

* * * * *
Rating / Facing)
23 21 23
Outlet Branch (Size /

* * * * *
Rating / facing)
Mechanical
Shaft sealing Mechanical seal Mechanical seal Mechanical seal Mechanical seal
seal
Bearing Life ( L10) 50,000hrs 50,000hrs 50,000hrs 50,000hrs 50,000hrs
Lubricant Grease Grease Grease Grease Grease
Coupling Type Flexible spacer Flexible spacer Flexible spacer Flexible spacer Flexible spacer
Fabricated
Fabricated Steel Fabricated Steel Fabricated Steel Fabricated Steel
Base Plate Steel base
base plate base plate base plate base plate
plate
Hoop type that
Hoop type that Hoop type that Hoop type that Hoop type that
extends
Coupling Guard extends beyond extends beyond extends beyond extends beyond
beyond ends
ends of coupling ends of coupling ends of coupling ends of coupling
of coupling
Motor
Motor Rating * * * * *
Frame * * * * *
Area Safe Safe Safe Safe Safe
RPM * * * * *
IP Rating IP 55 IP 55 IP 55 IP 55 IP 55
V/PH/HZ 415/3/ 50 415/3/ 50 415/3/ 50 415/3/ 50 415/3/ 50
Full Load current * * * * *
Ambient temperature 55 Deg C 55 Deg C 55 Deg C 55Deg C 55 Deg C
Insulation Class /
F/B F/B F/B F/B F/B
Temperature rise
Variable Variable
Starting Soft Starter Soft Starter Soft Starter
frequency Drive frequency Drive
Starter Panel
Variable Variable
Starting method Soft Starter Soft Starter Soft Starter
Frequency Drive Frequency Drive
Motor Rating * * * * *
Ambient Temperature 50 Deg C 50 Deg C 50 Deg C 50 Deg C 50 Deg C
Enclosure NEMA 4X NEMA 4X NEMA 4X NEMA 4X NEMA 4X
Model of VFD * * * * *
Materials of
Construction -Pump
SUP DUP ST ST SUP DUP ST ST SUP DUP ST ST SUP DUP ST ST
C.I IS 210 FG 260
Casing ASTM A 890/M - ASTM A 890/M - ASTM A 890/M - ASTM A 890/M
(EN-GJL-250
CE3MN - 5A CE3MN - 5A CE3MN - 5A -CE3MN - 5A

Impeller BR 1S:318 GR-LTB2 ASTM A 890/M - ASTM A 890/M - ASTM A 890/M - ASTM A 890/M
23 21 23

ST ST ASTM A 276 -
Shaft ASTM A 276 ASTM A 276 ASTM A 276 ASTM A 276
410 ANLD
UNSS32760 UNSS32760 UNSS32760 UNSS32760
Wear Rings BR 1S:318 GR-LTB2 ASTM A 890/M - ASTM A 276 ASTM A 276 ASTM A 890/M
CE3MN - 5A UNSS32760 UNSS32760 -CE3MN - 5A

ST ST ASTM A 276 -
Sleeve ASTM A 890/M - ASTM A 890/M - ASTM A 890/M - ASTM A 890/M
410 ANLD
Auxilliaries
Suction
Suction Discharge Suction Discharge Suction Discharge Suction Discharge Discharge
Pressure gauges Pressure gauges Pressure gauges Pressure gauges Pressure
Pressure Gauges
mounted on a mounted on a mounted on a mounted on a gauges
gauge Board gauge Board gauge Board gauge Board mounted on a
gauge Board
Drive end and Drive end and Drive end and Drive end and Drive end and
Bearing RTDS
Non drive end Non drive end Non drive end Non drive end Non drive end
Drive end and Drive end and Drive end and Drive end and Drive end and
Vibration Sensors
Non drive end Non drive end Non drive end Non drive end Non drive end
Automatic
Automatic release Automatic release Automatic release Automatic release
Release Valve release valve
valve on casing valve on casing valve on casing valve on casing
on casing
Instrumentatio
Instrumentation to Instrumentation to Instrumentation to Instrumentation to
n to be
Junction Box be terminated in be terminated in be terminated in be terminated in
terminated in
Junction Box Junction Box Junction Box Junction Box
Junction Box
Anti Anti Anti Anti Anti
Condensation Condensation Condensation Condensation Condensation
Heaters Heaters Heaters Heaters Heaters
Insulated End Insulated End Insulated End Insulated End Insulated End
Accessories for Motor Shield Shield Shield Shield Shield
Winding RTD (2 Winding RTD (2 Winding RTD (2 Winding RTD (2 Winding RTD (2
Per Phase) Per Phase) Per Phase) Per Phase) Per Phase)
Bearing RTD (1 Per Bearing RTD (1 Per Bearing RTD (1 Per Bearing RTD (1 Per Bearing RTD (1
Bearing Bearing Bearing Bearing Per Bearing
Testing and
Documents
To be
To be submitted To be submitted To be submitted To be submitted
Inspection test plan submitted for
for approval for approval for approval for approval
approval
BS EN ISO BS EN ISO BS EN ISO BS EN ISO BS EN ISO

9906:2012 / HI 9906:2012 / HI 9906:2012 / HI 9906:2012 / HI 9906:2012 / HI
Performance Test
Centrifugal Pump Centrifugal Pump Centrifugal Pump Centrifugal Pump Centrifugal
standard- pump
Tests - 2011 Grade Tests - 2011 Grade Tests - 2011 Grade Tests - 2011 Grade Pump Tests -
2B 2B 2B 2B 2011 Grade 2B
1 pump
subjected to
1 pump subjected 1 pump subjected 1 pump subjected 1 pump subjected
witnessed
to witnessed string to witnessed string to witnessed string to witnessed string
string test
No of pumps tested ( test using test using test using test using
using contract
Witnessed / Non contract contract contract contract
equipment
witnessed) equipment others equipment others equipment others equipment others
others
subjected to non subjected to non subjected to non subjected to non
subjected to
witnessed tests witnessed tests witnessed tests witnessed tests
non witnessed
tests
Hydro test Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
23 21 23
Vibration Test Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Witnessed Witnessed Witnessed

Removal of Top Removal of Top Removal of
Routine test Routine test
Strip Test half casing half casing Top half casing
certificate certificate
following test for following test for following test
inspection inspection for inspection
Routine test Routine test Routine test Routine test Routine test
Motor
certificate certificate certificate certificate certificate
NOTE:
* To be filled in by Pump Manufacturer
2.11 VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE
Individual variable frequency drive with individual manual bypass (star delta) shall be
provided for individual chilled water pumps.
1. The variable frequency drive(s) shall be pulse width modulation (PWM) type;
microprocessor controlled design, and shall be capable of operating in
voltage ranges of 380 to 460V AC, three-phase, at frequencies of 48 to 63
Hz.
2. The VFD, including all factory-installed options, shall have UL approval.
3. VFD shall be mounted within an enclosure protected to IP54 as minimum,

ventilated for installation as a floor-mounted unit. Drive shall be equipped
with an input disconnect switch, and fuses to protect against ground faults.
4. A manual bypass option shall be available to enable the operator to select

normal or manual bypass of the drive. The bypass includes two contactors.
One contactor is the bypass contactor that connects the motor directly to
the incoming power line in the event that the drive is out of service. The other
is the drive output contactor that disconnects the drive from the motor when
the motor is operating in the bypass mode. The drive output contactor and
the bypass contactor are electrically and mechanically interlocked to
prevent "back feeding."
5. VFD shall utilize a full wave rectifier to convert three-phase AC to a fixed DC

voltage. Power factor shall remain above 0.98 regardless of speed or load.
VFDs employing power factor correction capacitors shall not be acceptable.
6. Insulated gate bipolar transistors shall be used in the inverter section to

convert fixed DC voltage to a three-phase, adjustable frequency, AC output.
7. The output switching frequency shall be selectable at 4 or 8 kHz.
8. Built-in DC link filters to reduce harmonic distortion on the main supply. The 5th
harmonic must be reduced to 35% or below in accordance with IEEE
Standard 519-1992. No external reactors allowed.
9. The VFD shall be suitable for elevations to 1000m above sea level without
de rating. Maximum operating ambient temperature shall not be less than 40
degrees C. VFD shall be suitable for operation in environments up to 95%
non-condensing humidity.
23 21 23
10. The VFD shall be capable of displaying the following information in plain
English via an alphanumeric display:
a. Output
Frequency
b. Output Voltage
c. Motor Current
d. Kilowatts per hour
e. Fault identification with
text f. RPM
11. All VFDs and controllers shall be furnished by the pump vendor for unit
responsibility for successful system operation.
Approved Makes of VFD (countries of origin):
1. Siemens (Germany)
2. ABB (Finland)
3. Danfoss (France)
2.12 DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE TRANSMITTER
a. Furnish field mounted differential pressure transmitter(s)-3 sets as required for

measuring differential pressure and transmitting an isolated linear 4 to 20 mA dc
output for use in a standard two-wire 24 V dc system. The unit shall be
accurate to +/- 0.25% of full span and shall have an adjustable span limit
applicable for the system pressure, and shall withstand over ranges up to a
static pressure of 2000 psi with negligible change in output. It shall have a
corrosion resistant steel body with ¼” NPT process connections. Unit shall be
protected against radio frequency interference and shall have a watertight
(NEMA type 4X) electrical enclosure with 1/2 “ NPT conduit connection.
b. Contractor shall also include for the supply and installation of interlinking cable
between differential pressure transmitter and pump controller.
2.13 PUMP LOGIC CONTROLLER
1. The pump logic controller assembly shall be listed by and bear the label of
Underwriter’s laboratory, Inc (UL). The controller shall meet Part 15 of FCC
regulations pertaining to Class A computing devices. The controller shall be
specifically designed for variable speed pumping applications.
2. The variable speed pump controller shall function to a proven program that
safeguards against damaging hydraulic conditions including:
a. Motor Overload
b. Pump Flow Surges
c. Hunting
3. End of Curve Protection: The pump logic controller through a factory

pre- programmed algorithm shall be capable of protecting the pumps from
hydraulic damage due to operation beyond their published end-of-curve. This
feature requires an optional flow meter for activation.
23 21 23
4. The pump logic controller shall be capable of staging and de staging pumps
based on an efficiency optimization program to provide the lowest kw draw
.This optimization program requires an optional flow meter, kw meter and
system differential pressure sensor for activation.
5. The pump logic controller shall be capable of accepting discrete analog inputs
from zone sensor/transmitters. Ana log input resolution shall be 12 bit minimum,
and the controller shall scan each analog input a minimum of once every 100
milli seconds. Use of a multiplexer for multiple sensor inputs is not acceptable.
All sensors/transmitter inputs shall be individually wired to the pump logic
controller for continuous scan and comparison function. All analog inputs
shall be provided with current limit circuitry to provide short circuit
protection and safeguard against incorrect wiring of sensors.
6. The pump logic controller will select analog input signal that deviates the
greatest amount from its set point. This selected signal will be used as the
command feedback input for a closed loop hydraulic stabilization function to
minimize hunting. The hydraulic stabilization program shall utilize a proportional
integral derivative control function. The proportional, integral and derivative
values shall be user- adjustable over an infinite range. The scan and compare
rate that selects the command set point and process variable signal
shall be continuous and automatically set for optimum performance. Each
sensor shall be scanned at least once every 100 milli seconds.
7. The pump controller shall be capable of controlling pumps in parallel. The

pump logic controller shall be self-prompting. All messages shall be
displayed in plain English. The following features shall be provided:
a. Multi-fault memory and recall

b. On-screen help functions
c. Soft-touch membrane keypad switches
d. LED pilot lights and switches.
8. The variable speed pumping system shall be provided with a user-friendly

operator interface complete with membrane switches and numeric keypad.
Display shall be no less than four lines with each line capable of displaying up
to twenty characters. The human interface panel shall display the following
values:
a. Flow in GPM (requires optional flow meter)

b. Pump On/Off status
c. Pump % Speed
d. Individual Alarm Conditions
e. Troubleshooting Diagnostics
f. User-adjustable parameters such as alternation, PID, set points etc.
9. A data-logging feature shall be provided as a function of the pump logic

controller. The Alarm log shall include last 20 alarms with date/time stamp. The
pump data log shall display individual pump run timers and pump cycle
counters. A system data log will indicate operation mode, system cycles and
panel power cycles, each with date/time stamp. A signal log shall be
provided to display the maximum and minimum values with date/time
stamps for each process variable and flow, when optional flow meter is
provided. The signal log shall also be capable of displaying the cumulative
23 21 23
value of kilowatt-hours for each pump and of system minimum and maximum
flow along with individual counter reset capability.
10. The logic controller shall incorporate a Flash Memory for saving and reloading
customized settings. These field determined values shall be permanently
retained in Flash memory for automatic reloading of the site specific setup
values in the event of data corruption due to external disturbances. The
Controller shall also employ a sensor setup copy feature.
11. The pump controller shall be capable of communicating with the Building
Automation System (BAS) by both hard-wired and serial communications. The
following communication features shall be provided to BAS in „hardwired‟
FORM VIA 4-20 ma analogue signals and digital outputs.
12. Remote system start/stop (dry contact supplied by BAS)

Failure of any system component (relay output from pump controller) Process
variable (4-20 ma analogue output supplied by pump controller) VFD speed
(0-10 VDC analogue output supplied by pump controller) Optional: Pump
On/Off status (relay output supplied by pump controller)
13. The following communication features shall be interfaced to the Building

TM
Automation System utilizing BACnet class ll MSTP protocol in addition to I/O
summary shown elsewhere.
a. All sensor process variables

b. Individual zone set points
c. Individual pump failure
d. Individual pump On/Off status
e. Individual pump H/O/A status
f. Individual pump discharge pressure
g. Individual pump motor run hours
h. Individual VFD On/Off status
i. VFD speed
j. Individual VFD failure
k. Individual sensor failure
14. Pumps shall be selected to operate at the point of maximum efficiency and
shall not be selected under any circumstances at the end of its curve.
15. The Contractor is expected to cross check the pressure head requirements in
conjunction with the water side equipment selected by him and submit the
necessary calculations to the Engineer for approval. Pump shall be selected at
its maximum efficiency point. T h e pump will not be approved if selected to
operate near the end of its curve.
23 21 23
2.11 PRESSURIZATION PACKAGE UNIT
1. The chilled water system shall be a closed pressurized system incorporating a

combined pressurization and automatic water make-up unit as indicated on
the drawings.
2. The pressurization unit shall be an integrated unit, factory assembled and

tested.
3. The pressurization unit shall incorporate a break tank, two make-up pumps
(one running, one standby), twin expansion vessels, associated pipe work and
valves and controls.
4. The expansion vessels shall be of the pre-pressurized diaphragm type

manufactured to BS 4814 and shall be subjected to a test pressure of 750 KPa.
5. The twin expansion vessels shall each have a capacity to suit the chilled
water network size with a maximum working pressure not exceeding 150 KPa.
6. The controls shall include the following:
a. Automatic pump change over upon failure of duty pump indicated by pump
failure light.
b. Manual pump selector switch
c. Duty pump run light.
d. Hours run indicators for pumps
e. Low pressure visible and audible alarm.
2.12 AUTOMATIC CHEMICAL-FEED EQUIPMENT
A. Inhibitor Injection Timers:

1. Microprocessor-based controller with LCD display in NEMA 4X, Type 12
enclosure with gasketed and lockable door. Interface for start/stop and
status indication at BAS.
2. Programmable timers with infinite adjustment over full range, and mounted
in cabinet with hand-off-auto switches and status lights.
3. Test switch.
4. Hand-off-auto switch for chemical pump.
5. Illuminated legend to indicate feed when pump is activated.
6. Programmable lockout timer with indicator light. Lockout timer to
deactivate the pump and activate alarm circuits.
7. LCD makeup tantalizer to measure amount of makeup and bleed-off water
from two water meter inputs.
8. Timer mode includes: Choice of percent timer, water meter timer, limit timer
and 28- day programmable timer.
B. pH Integral Controller:
1. Microprocessor-based controller, 1 percent accuracy in a range from zero to 14
units.
Incorporate solid-state integrated circuits and digital LCD display in NEMA 250,
Type 12 enclosure with gasketed and lockable door. Interface for start/stop
and status indication at BAS.
2. Digital display and touch pad for input.
23 21 23
3. Sensor probe adaptable to sample stream manifold.

4. High, low, and normal pH indication.
5. High or low pH alarm light, trip points field adjustable; with silence switch.
6. Hand-off-auto switch for acid pump.
7. Internal adjustable hysteresis or dead band.
C. Chemical Solution Tanks:

1. Chemical-resistant reservoirs fabricated from high-density opaque
polyethylene or higher quality stainless steel, with minimum 110 percent
containment vessel.
2. Molded cover with recess for mounting pump.
3. Capacity: Maintain inventory sufficient to meet the system demands
D. Chemical Solution Injection Pumps:

1. Self-priming, positive-displacement; rated for intended chemical with
minimum 25 percent safety factor for design pressure and temperature.
2. Adjustable flow rate.
3. Metal and thermoplastic construction.
4. Built-in relief valve.
5. Fully enclosed, continuous-duty, single-phase motor.
E. Chemical Solution Tubing: Polyethylene tubing with compression fittings
F. Injection Assembly:
1. Quill: Minimum NPS 1/2 (DN 15) with insertion length sufficient to discharge
into at least 25 percent of pipe diameter.
2. Ball Valve: Two-piece, stainless steel.
3. Packing Gland: Mechanical seal on quill of sufficient length to allow quill
removal during system operation.
4. Assembly Pressure/Temperature Rating: Minimum 600 psig (4137 kPa) at 200
deg F (93 deg C).
5. Materials of construction: Stainless steel 316.
G. Fail-Safes and Alarms

1. Corrosion safety interlock: Alarm indication, lock-out all chemical feed,
open bleed- off valve to flush corrosive water from system.
2. PH interlock: Alarm indication, lock-out all chemical feed, open bleed-off
valve to reduce total dissolved solids in cooling tower water.
3. Flow interlock (on loss of flow): Alarm indication, lock-out all control outputs
and chemical feeds.
H. Low Level Alarms

1. Low level alarm system to monitor chemical solution level in inhibitor, pH
modifier (acid or alkali), biocide, and dispersant drums.
2. Alarm probes, suitable current system capacity and connected with flexible
cable.
3. Signal output suitable for remote alarm function in addition to local alarm.
23 21 23
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine equipment foundations and anchor-bolt locations for compliance with

requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance
of work.
B. Examine roughing-in for piping systems to verify actual locations of piping

connections before pump installation.
C. Examine foundations and inertia bases for suitable conditions where pumps are to
be installed.
D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 CONCRETE BASES
A. Install concrete bases of dimensions indicated for pumps and controllers.

perimeter of base.



equipment.
B. Cast-in-place concrete materials and placement requirements are specified in

Division 03.
3.3 PUMP INSTALLATION
A. Install pumps with access for periodic maintenance including removal of motors,
impellers, couplings, and accessories.
B. Independently support pumps and piping so weight of piping is not supported by

pumps and weight of pumps is not supported by piping.
C. Install continuous-thread hanger rods and spring hangers of sufficient size to support
pump weight. Vibration isolation devices are specified in Division 23 Section
"Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment." Fabricate brackets
or supports as required. Hanger and support materials shall be checked and
approved structurally by structural engineer.
D. Set base-mounted pumps on concrete foundation. Disconnect coupling before

setting. Do not reconnect couplings until alignment procedure is complete.
23 21 23
1. Support pump base plate on rectangular metal blocks and shims, or on metal
wedges with small taper, at points near foundation bolts to provide a gap of
3/4 to 1-1/2 inches (19 to 38 mm) between pump base and foundation for
grouting.
2. Adjust metal supports or wedges until pump and driver shafts are level. Check
coupling faces and suction and discharge flanges of pump to verify that they
are level and plumb.
3.4 ALIGNMENT
A. Align pump and motor shafts and piping connections after setting on foundation,
grout has been set and foundation bolts have been tightened, and piping
connections have been made.
B. Comply with pump and coupling manufacturers' written instructions.
C. Adjust pump and motor shafts for angular and offset alignment by methods
specified in "Centrifugal Pumps for Nomenclature, Definitions, Application and
Operation], " Vertical Pumps for Nomenclature, Definitions, Application and
Operation]."
D. After alignment is correct, tighten foundation bolts evenly but not too firmly.
Completely fill base plate with non shrink, nonmetallic grout while metal blocks and
shims or wedges are in place. After grout has cured, fully tighten foundation bolts.
3.5 CONNECTIONS

B. Install piping adjacent to machine to allow service and maintenance.
C. Connect piping to pumps. Install valves that are same size as piping connected to
pumps.
D. Install suction and discharge pipe sizes equal to or greater than diameter of pump
nozzles.
E. Install check valve on discharge side of pumps.
F. Install Y-type strainer/ suction diffuser and shutoff valve on suction side of pumps.
G. Install flexible connectors on suction and discharge sides of base-mounted pumps
between pump casing and valves.
H. Install pressure gages on pump suction and discharge, at integral pressure-gage
tapping, or install single gage with multiple input selector valve.
I. Install check valve and gate or ball valve on each condensate pump unit
discharge.
J. Install electrical connections for power, controls, and devices.
K. Ground equipment according to Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for
L. Connect wiring according to Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power
3.6 STARTUP SERVICE
23 21 23

instructions.
2. Check piping connections for tightness.
3. Clean strainers on suction piping.
4. Perform the following startup checks for each pump before starting:
a. Verify bearing lubrication.
b. Verify that pump is free to rotate by hand and that pump for handling hot
liquid is free to rotate with pump hot and cold. If pump is bound or drags,
do not operate until cause of trouble is determined and corrected.
c. Verify that pump is rotating in the correct direction.
5. Prime pump by opening suction valves and closing drains, and prepare pump
for operation.
6. Start motor.
7. Open discharge valve slowly.
3.7 DEMONSTRATION

personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain hydronic pumps.
23 21 23
23 25 33 - Mechanical/Physical Water Treatment
1. Part I – General
The Filtration system will remove unwanted solids from cooling water or process
cooling networks, and targeted network parts and equipment but not limited to such
as sumps, remote basin and heat exchangers using a centrifugal-action vortex solids-
liquid separator. The liquid-solids separation system will remove solids to help prevent
particle fouling of the cooling system's components, reduce maintenance and
servicing routines, maintain optimum energy efficiency of the heat exchange
process, limit blow down, enhance effect of chemical treatment and mitigate
harmful bacteria in the basin/sump/fills by removing environment/food sources
necessary for growth and propagation.

Section.
1.2 Summary:
A. This Section includes the Solids Removal Solutions within the Cooling Water
Network, including the different types of treatment based on the required
removal efficiency, time response of the system and the specified connections
defined in the drawings and applications. These different treatment solutions are
further defined as provided below :
1. Section 23 25 33.13 “Basin Sweeping System”

2. Section 23 25 33.19 “Full Stream Filtration for Condenser Water Network
Protection”
As per design requirements and applications, multiple types of filtration equipment

may be required to provide optimum system protection.
B. Related Sections Include the following:

1. Section 23 25 33.29 “Centrifugal Separator Testing Apparatus and
Procedures”. For verification of solids removal performance.
Protection”
3. Section 23 25 33.13 Cooling Towers Basin Sweeping System for targeted
equipment By Solids Filtration and requirements that relates to this section.
1.3 Definitions:
A. Total Dissolved Solids (TDS): Are the total amount of mobile charged ions,
including minerals, salts or metals dissolved in a given volume of water, expressed
in units of mg per unit volume of water (mg/L), also referred to as parts per million
(ppm).
B. Total Suspended Solids (TSS): The Solids which are suspended in the fluid and
would be caught by a filter. Suspended solids are measured by passing sample
fluid through a filter. The solids caught by the filter, once dried, are the suspended
solids.
23 25 33
C. Hydro Booster: A nozzles type family that creates sweeping action on the cooling
tower basin floor preventing accumulating solids on the basin, and this reduces
under-deposit corrosion, cooling tower nozzle clogging and extend cooling tower
life.
D. Separator: A centrifugal action equipment to remove solids that are heavier than
water by use of tangential inlet that starts the centrifugal action.
E. Basin Sweeping: A method of filtration that directly prevents solids accumulation
on the cooling tower basin or remote sump, and this by drawing water from the
cooling tower basin/sump to the filtration unit, and then pumping the filtered
water directly back to the tower basin through the basin Hydro Boosters piping
network.
F. Side Stream Filtration: A method of filtration that remove solids from the process
water in close or open loop circuits, by drawing a specified percentage of Water
Flow OR Capacity from the piping network, and return it to the same line which
can be done through a boosting pump to force water through the filtration
system.
G. Full Stream Filtration: A method of filtration that remove solids from the process
water in close or open loop circuits, by directing all the network water to go
through the filtration units, and this operate as an Inline system with the piping
network components.
H. Single Pass: The process water pass the separation unit only once, and do not
return to the unit for further treatment.
I. Recirculated Flow: The Process water pass the separation unit multiple times, and
return to the unit for further treatment and better process water quality.
J. Closed Loop: It is the piping network containing the process, cooling or heating-
system water, which does not meet outside air.
K. Open Loop: It is the piping network containing the process water, which meet
outside air, and most often used in Condenser Water Networks.
1.4 Performance Requirements:
A. Separator Performance Criteria in a Single Pass for a Single Separator should be

selected within the below criteria:
1. In one pass through a Single Separator operating at flows up to 4,350

GPM, given solids with a specific gravity ratio to liquid of 2.6 and greater,
performance is predictably 98% of 75 microns and larger solids size, but
less than the mesh size of any preceding strainers or fine screens
protecting the pumping element.
B. Separator Performance Criteria in Multiple Passes:
1. Particles smaller in size, heavier by specific gravity (given solids with a

specific gravity ratio to liquid of 2.6) and some lighter by specific gravity to
be removed, resulting in an appreciable aggregate removal of particles
(up to 75%) by volume as fine as 5 microns, where entire cooling system
volume filtered once per 24 hours.
Performance is measured while no additional solids presented during the

filtration duration.
C. Filtration System Performance Criteria Using Enhanced In-System Side Stream

Polishing Filters:
23 25 33
1. In Closed Loop applications, 90% of all solids down to filter Cartridge

micron rating-recommended 5 microns for multiple passes in 24 hours.
2. In Open Loop applications, 90% of all solids down to filter Cartridges

micron rating-recommended 10 microns for multiple passes in 24 hours.
.
D. Separator performance must be supported by published independent test results
from a recognized and identified agency. Standard test protocol of upstream
injection, downstream capture and separator purge recovery is allowed with the
50-200 mesh particles to enable effective, repeatable results. Refer to Test
Specifications Section 23 25 33.29.
1. 50-200 mesh test media size (297-75 Microns)-up to 4,350 GPM for a single
separator.
2. For multiple separators in parallel or series or both, the single separator test
noted in “1” above applies.
E. Single pass test performance must be not less than 95% removal using designated
test media. Model tested must be of the same design series as specified unit.
F. Time Response to Weather Conditions:
1.5 Design Parameters:
Contractor to follow the sizing and removal efficiencies as per specifications and
parameters of selected cooling towers:
A. Fluid viscosity must be 100 SSU or less.

B. Basin Dimensions Length X Width
C. Basin Water Depth
1. Basin Flow Rate to Area Factor to be 1.5 GPM/Square Foot for basins have
depth of water less than 1 meter.
2. Basins have more than 1 meter depth must have system manufacturer
involved in deciding the factor.
D. Separator and all package components need to withstand High TDS Level up
to 75,000 and High outside humidity levels.
1.6 Submittals:
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details,
material descriptions, and dimensions of individual components and profiles.
Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, electrical characteristics, and
B. Spare Parts List for two years as recommended from the manufacturer.
C. Submittal Drawings: For Separator Systems. Include plans, elevations, sections,

details, and attachments to other work:
1. Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads,

required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location
and size of each field connection.
23 25 33

3. Motor data Sheets.
4. Pump Curves.
5. Coating Specs.
D. Performance Qualification Certificates: For Separators, pumps (if Packaged

System), accessories, and components, from manufacturer;
1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on

actual test of assembled components or on calculation.
2. Tests To be carried out as per section 23 25 33.29
3. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Locate and describe
mounting and anchorage provisions.
4. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the
certification is based and their installation requirements.
5. Detailed description of equipment optimum pressure operation range on
which the certification is based and their installation requirements.
E. Operation and Maintenance Data:
1. Installation, Operation and maintenance Manuals are to be provided from

the manufacturer.
B. Make the complete installation in accordance with all state and local municipal
codes, all applicable codes and authorities having jurisdiction, and the
applicable requirements and standards of the following:
BS-EN : British Standards / European Standards
ASA : American Standards Association
IEEE : Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers
ANSI : American National Standards Institute
ASHRAE : American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air
ASME : American Society of Mechanical Engineers
ASTM : American Society for Testing and Materials
AWS : American Welding Society
AWWA : American Water works Society
AMCA : Air Movement and Control Association
MSS : Manufacturer’s Standardization Society of the Valve and
Fittings Industry
NEC : National Electrical Code
NEMA : National Electrical Manufacturers Association
PDI : Plumbing and Drainage Institute
SBI : Steel Boiler Institute
UL : Underwriters Laboratories
SMACNA : Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National
Association
NFPA : National Fire Protection Association
23 25 33
Provide all work necessary to comply with these requirements at no extra cost to the
Employer.
1.8 Delivery, Storage And Handling:
A. Retain protective coatings and flange's protective marine package suitable for
ocean freight and storage.
B. Storage & Handling of equipment’s as per the recommendation of the Engineer
and Manufacturer instructions.
1.9 Warranty:

repair or replace components of Separator Systems those fail in materials or

a. Electrical Panel Components Failure.
b. Electric Motor Failure.
c. Pump Failure excluding seals.
d. Separator leak.
2. Warranty Period: 5 years for the Separator only from date of Substantial
Completion, and for all other components 12 months from date of installation;
if installed 6 months or more after ship date, warranty shall be a maximum of
18 months from shipping date.
1.10 Extra Materials
A. The contractor should furnish extra materials as described below that match
products installed, and that are packaged with protective covering for storage
and identified with labels describing contents.
1. Two years spare parts as per the manufacturer recommendations per each
unit system provided.
2. Part II – Products
2.1 Manufacturer
A. Subject to compliance with requirements; provide from the list of approved

manufacturer’s, and it is only accepted complete system is produced and
assembled within their own facilities
2.2 Liquid-Solids Centrifugal Separator:
A. A tangential inlet and mutually tangential internal accelerating slots shall be

employed to promote the proper velocity necessary for the removal of the
separable solids. The internal accelerating slots shall be spiral-cut for optimal flow
transfer, laminar action and particle influence into the separation barrel. The
separator’s internal vortex shall allow this process to occur without wear to the
accelerating slots.
23 25 33
B. Separated particle matter shall spiral downward along the perimeter of the inner
separation barrel, in a manner, which does not promote wear of the separation
barrel, and into the solids collection chamber, located below the vortex deflector
stool.
C. To insure maximum particle removal characteristics, systems featuring the

Separator shall incorporate a vortex-induced pressure relief line (Vortube),
drawing specific pressure and fluid from the separator’s solids collection chamber
via the outlet flow’s vortex/venturi effect, thereby efficiently encouraging solids
into the collection chamber without requiring a continuous underflow or excessive
system fluid loss. In case of separate chambers design the Vortube is
compensated by the Separation barrel length and diameter as per manufacturer
recommendation.
D. System fluid shall exit the separator by following the center vortex in the
separation barrel and spiral upward to the separator outlet.
E. The separator shall feature the following access capabilities for either inspection
or the removal of unusual solids/debris:
1. An upper chamber full sized grooved coupling or flanged top to allow

complete access to the inlet chamber, acceleration slots, and internal
separation barrel.
F. The separator shall be of unishell construction with SA-36, SA-53B or equivalent

quality carbon steel, minimum thickness of 0.25 inches (6.35 mm). Maximum
operating pressure shall be 150 psi (10.3 bar), unless specified otherwise.
G. Paint coating shall be Scothckote 134 fusion bonded epoxy on ID; Separator OD
to be coated with 3 part system (zinc rich primer/high solids epoxy/polyurethane)
for marine service.
H. A Coat of NanaFlex Dura from Nanocare Germany shall be applied on the

exterior surface of the complete unit to make the unit hydrophobic. The coat shall
provide a permanent weather protection, strong dirt-and water repellence and
Corrosion resistant.
I. Inlet & outlet shall be Flanged.
J. The separator shall operate within the specified flow range.
K. Pressure loss shall be between 3-22 psi (0.2-1.5 bar), remaining constant, varying
only when the flow rate changes.
2.3 Solids Handling
A. Separated solids must be continuously purged under controlled flow into a Solids
Recovery Vessel equipped with fiberfelt solids collection bag. Excess liquid shall
pass through the bag and return to system flow via piping connected to the
system pump’s suction line. The system shall include an air/pressure relief line for
the vessel. System will also include an indicator package (SRI) that includes;
manual isolation valves for use when servicing the collection bag; sight glasses for
verification of flow through the vessel; annunciator for indicating when the
23 25 33
collector bag needs cleaning/replacement; flow control orifice to minimize fluid

volume/velocity through the vessel and collector bag.
B. Housing shall be carbon steel with Scotchkote 134 epoxy; (3) stainless steel
baskets; T-bolt closure coated carbon steel lid with air pressure relief valve;
Housing OD to be coated with 3 part system (zinc rich primer/high solids
epoxy/polyurethane) for marine service; *50-micron fiberfelt solids collection bag;
indicator package for bag change out. Capacity: 1080 cubic inches (18 Liters)
C. A Coat of NanaFlex Dura from Nanocare Germany shall be applied on the

Corrosion resistant
The Solids Recovery Vessel will follow the Engineers Specifications as indicated for the
type of filtration selected in the project, and all capacities and construction materials
are to be followed as per the specified sections listed in clause (1.2.A.) above.
2.4 Pump & Motor:
A. The selected pump needs to follow the specified filtration requirement being
specified to this project, and to take into consideration piping arrangement, head
losses through that piping to ensure proper flow of water under the specified flow
rates as well as voltage, frequency and number of phases. Specific criteria are
provided in specified sections listed above in clause (1.2.A.)
B. MOC: Super Duplex stainless steel housing; Super Duplex stainless steel impeller;
Duplex stainless steel shaft sleeve; mechanical shaft seal; TEFC IE3 efficient motor;
IP55; 1500 RPM; frame mounted w/coupling and guard on steel baseplate;
flooded suction required.
2.5 Control Panel:
A. Proper voltage, frequency, phase(s) as well as specific start requirements and

protections, lights, BMS requirements to be considered. Specific criteria are
provided in specified sections listed above in clause (1.2.A.)
2.6 Piping Connections:
A. Proper piping sizes, pressure ratings, connection types and other specific criteria
are provided in sections listed above in clause (1.2.A.)
2.7 Mounting Requirements:
A. Loading, anchoring, and anti-vibration requirements set forth in sections listed

above in clause (1.2.A.)
23 25 33
3. Part III – Execution
3.1 Examination:
A. Verify that power supply is available to control unit for installation, pre-startup, start-up
and commissioning.
B. Verify that piping, valves and equipment-mounted devices are installed before
proceeding with installation.
C. Contractor to follow manufacturer Check Lists and Method of Statements.
3.2 Installation:
A. Install Coordinate with the installing contractor to ensure equipment is installed in

conformance with manufacturer’s recommendations and those found in the
specification.
B. If deficiencies are noted by the field service representative, the contractor shall make
the necessary corrections and the manufacturer’s field service personnel will visit the
installation site and oversee any corrections and or modifications required. A written
report shall be filed with the Engineer at each visit.
3.3 Connections:
A. Contractor to verify and assure that all piping connection have the proper support
system, to ensure no stresses are transmitted to the equipment connection points and
nozzles.
B. Contractor to verify and assure that all electrical works are done properly against
project specifications.
3.4 Field Quality Control:

including connections, and to assist in field testing. Report results in writing based on
manufacturer check lists and reports.
confirm proper unit operation. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and
retest.
2. Test and adjust controls and safeties.
3. Leak Test: After installation, run system and test for leaks. Repair leaks and
3.5 Startup Service:
To follow manufacturer O&M manuals and recommendations.
23 25 33
3.6 Adjusting:
A. Calibrating and Adjusting:
1. Calibrate instruments.
2. Make three-point calibration test for both linearity and accuracy for each
analog instrument.
3. Calibrate equipment and procedures using manufacturer's written
recommendations and instruction manuals. Use test equipment with accuracy
at least double that of instrument being calibrated.
4. Control System Inputs and Outputs:
a. Check analog outputs using milli ampere meter.
5. Flow:
a. Set differential pressure to read between inlet and outlet of the
separator to be within the range of (0.20-1.2 Bar).
3.7 Demonstration:

personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain HVAC instrumentation and controls.
23 25 33
23 25 33.13 - Basin Sweeping System
The system will remove unwanted solids from a cooling water or process cooling
networks, and targeted network parts and equipment but not limited to such as
sumps, remote basin and heat exchangers using a centrifugal-action vortex solids-
liquid separator combined with a Basin Sweeping Network installed at the Cooling
Tower Basin, the Network will be equipped with Nozzles/Hydro Boosters having a
sweeping impact on all settled solids on the basin, and it will be forced to go through
the separator when those solids are near enough to the Separator package suction
line.
The Basin Sweeping Filtration system is an automatic cooling towers basin cleaning
system, and will help prevent particle fouling of the cooling system's components,
reduce maintenance and servicing routines, maintain optimum energy efficiency of
the heat exchange process, limit blow down & chemical use practices and control
harmful bacteria growth in the basin/sump/fills.

Section.
1.2 Summary:
A. This Section includes the Solids Treatment within the Cooling Water Network, using
the Basin Sweeping System. Based on the required treatment efficiency, time
response and the specified connections defined in the drawings and
applications.
26 08 50 ELECTRICAL SERVICES TO MECHANICAL PLANTS
CENTRIFUGAL SEPARATOR TESTING APPARATUS AND
23 25 33.29
PROCEDURES
1.3 Definitions:
(ppm).
B. Total Suspended Solids (TSS): The Solids which are suspended in the fluid and
solids.
23 23 33 .13
life.
network.
system.
network components.
system water which does not come in contact with outside air.
K. Open Loop: It is the piping network containing the process water which come in
contact with outside air, and most often used in Condenser Water Networks.
A. Separator Performance Criteria in a Single Pass for a Single Separator:
1. In one pass through a Single Separator operating at flows up to 4,350

GPM, given solids with a specific gravity ratio to liquid of 2.6 and greater,
performance is predictably 98% of 75 microns and larger solids size, but
less than the mesh size of any preceding strainers or fine screens
protecting the pumping element.
B. Separator Performance Criteria in Multiple Passes:
1. Particles smaller in size, heavier by specific gravity (given solids with a

specific gravity ratio to liquid of 2.6) and some lighter by specific gravity to
be removed, resulting in an appreciable aggregate removal of particles
(up to 75%) by volume as fine as 5 microns, where entire cooling system
volume filtered multiple times per 24 hours.
Measured performance is while no additional solids presented during the

filtration duration.
2. Separator performance must be supported by published independent test

results from a recognized and identified agency. Standard test protocol of
upstream injection, downstream capture and separator purge recovery is
23 23 33 .13
allowed with the 50-200 mesh particles to enable effective, repeatable

results. Refer to Test Specifications Section 23 25 33.29.
3. 50-200 mesh test media size (297-75 Microns)-up to 4,350 GPM for a single
separator.
4. For multiple separators in parallel or series or both, the single separator test
noted in “1” above applies.
C. Single pass test performance must be not less than 95% removal. Model tested
must be of the same design series as specified unit.
D. Time Response to Weather Conditions:
As specified in the Design Parameters, contractor to follow the sizing and removal
efficiencies considering the below operational conditions for filtration systems flow
rate, recovery time, and solids handling capacity:
1. Average Case Event Air Quality (No Sand/Dust Storm):

2. Worst Case Event Air Quality (Sand/Dust Storm):
E. Design Parameters:
a) Fluid viscosity must be 100 SSU or less.

b) Cooling System Volume:
c) Mass Air flow of cooling towers:
d) Basin Dimensions Length X Width
e) Basin Water Depth
f) Air Quality:
1. Solids Loading : xxx µg/m3
2. Duration : xxx Hours
3. Frequency : xxx Days/Year
g) Separator and all package components need to withstand High TDS level up
to 75,000.
1.5 Submittals:
C. Shop Drawings: For Separator Systems. Include plans, elevations, sections, details,
and attachments to other work:

3. Motor data Sheets.
4. Pump Curves.
23 23 33 .13
D. Solids Handling Capacity is to be provided and calculated based on the

expected volume of solids, and desired preventive maintenance schedule (Bag
Filters Change).
E. Performance Qualification Certificates: For Separators, pumps (if Packaged


F. Operation and Maintenance Data:
1. Installation & Operation Manuals are to be provided from the manufacturer.
A. Make the complete installation in accordance with all state and local municipal

Fittings Industry
Association
Provide all work necessary to comply with these requirements at no extra cost to the
Employer.
23 23 33 .13
A. Retain protective coatings and flange's protective marine package suitable for
ocean freight and storage.
and manufacturer instructions.
1.8 Warranty:


c. Pump Failure.
d. Separator leak.
1.9 Extra Materials
2.1 Cooling Tower Basin Sweeping with Solids Filtration:
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements; provide from the list of

approved manufacturer’s, and it is only accepted complete system is produced and
assembled within their own facilities.
B. Description: Factory-assembled and tested Solids Filtration Unit for cooling tower
basin, with pump, piping, valves, specialties, controls, and mounted on base, and to
be connected to the Nozzles/Hydro Boosters network inside the cooling tower basin
for the effect of basin sweeping and solids filtration.
C. Separator:
a) A tangential inlet and mutually tangential internal accelerating slots shall be

accelerating slots.
23 23 33 .13
b) Separated particle matter shall spiral downward along the perimeter of the inner
separation barrel, in a manner which does not promote wear of the separation
stool.
c) To insure maximum particle removal characteristics, systems featuring the Series

recommendation.
d) System fluid shall exit the separator by following the center vortex in the
e) The separator shall feature the following access capabilities for either inspection
separation barrel.
f) The separator shall be of unishell construction with SA-36, SA-53B or equivalent

quality carbon steel, minimum thickness of .25 inches (6.35 mm). Maximum
g) Paint coating shall be Scothckote 134 fusion bonded epoxy on ID; Separator OD
for marine service.
h) Inlet & outlet shall be flanged.
i) The separator system configuration shall operate within the flow range specified.
j) Pressure loss shall be between 3-12 psi (.2-.8 bar), remaining constant, varying only
when the flow rate changes.
D. Pump:
1. Horizontal end suction centrifugal single stage pump; Hydraulics MOC: Super
Duplex stainless steel housing; Super Duplex stainless steel impeller; Duplex
stainless steel shaft sleeve; mechanical shaft seal; TEFC IE3 efficient motor;
IP55; 1500 RPM; frame mounted w/coupling and guard on steel baseplate;
flooded suction required.
E. Motor: Single speed, with grease-lubricated, ball-type bearings, and directly mounted
to pump casing. Select motor that will not overload through full range of pump
performance curve.
F. Solids Recovery Vessel (SRV): Housing shall be carbon steel with Scotchkote 134
epoxy; (3) stainless steel baskets; T-bolt closure coated carbon steel lid with air
pressure relief valve; Housing OD to be coated with 3 part system (zinc rich
23 23 33 .13
primer/high solids epoxy/polyurethane) for marine service; *50-micron fiberfelt solids

collection bag; indicator package for bag change out.Capacity: 1080 cubic inches
(18 Liters)
G. A Coat of NanaFlex Dura from Nanocare Germany shall be applied on the exterior
surface of the complete unit to make the unit hydrophobic. The coat shall provide a
permanent weather protection, strong dirt-and water repellence and Corrosion
resistant
H. Valves: Duplex stainless steel ball valve on purge line for isolation of solids-
handling/purging equipment.
I. Control Panel: Thermal magnetic circuit breaker w/ overload module; HOA selector
switch; NEMA-4X enclosure; re-set/disconnect/trip switch; 120 volt, single phase
control voltage; Soft starting (as applicable for pumps 50 HP and higher); 50 degrees
C rating; UL Listed
J. Nozzles/Hydro Boosters: Each HydroBooster shall be capable of increasing its input

flow, at 20 psi (1.4 bar) or more, to six times greater output flow without abrasive wear
to the HydroBooster, thereby providing the proper directed turbulence to prevent
troublesome solids accumulation and induce separable solids to the separator
package's pump suction. Required submergence shall be as little as 2-3 inches (50-75
mm).
K. Skid Plate: Fabricated structural carbon steel; marine service duty coating.
L. Piping: Schedule 40 galvanized carbon steel; reinforced rubber hose to solids

recovery vessel.
3.1 Examination:
A. It is under the contractor responsibility to make sure that the basin piping nozzles
network, and the suction lines are within the accepted parameters as per the
manufacturer recommendations, and this to have no sweeping action toward the
main system suction line, and it needs to be as much as possible toward the opposite
side of that point.
B. It is under the contractor responsibility to make sure that basin sweeping suction point
is laid within a sump pit if concrete basins/sumps are used.
3.2 Installation:

specification.
23 23 33 .13
3.3 Connections:
nozzles.

confirm proper unit operation. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and
retest.
3.6 Adjusting:
As the fluid dynamics of water while having any moving forces is not predictable for
the open basin/sump/channel as for the closed piping systems, the Hydro Boosters
alignment to be checked after system commissioning to make sure no dead zones
are present while the system is in operation. This checkup only runs when the first
shutdown schedule of the open basin is defined and agreed on.
3.7 Demonstration:

END OF SECTION 23 25 33.13
23 23 33 .13
23 25 33.19 - Full Stream Filtration for Condenser Water Network
The system will remove unwanted solids from cooling water or process cooling
sumps, remote basin and heat exchangers using a centrifugal-action vortex
separator. The liquid-solids Side Stream Filtration system will help prevent particle
fouling of the cooling system's components, reduce maintenance and servicing
routines, maintain optimum energy efficiency of the heat exchange process, limit
blow down & chemical use practices and control harmful bacteria growth in the
basin/sump/fills.

Section.
1.2 Summary:
A. This Section includes the Solids Treatment within the Cooling Water Network,
including the deferent modes of treatment based on the required treatment
efficiency, time response and the specified connections defined in the drawings
and applications. Those modes can be described as per the treatment mode of
function below:
1. Full Stream Solids Filtration for Condenser Water Network.
As per design requirements and applications needs multi modes can be

introduced to provide optimum filtration performance.
26 08 50 ELECTRICAL SERVICES TO MECHANICAL PLANTS
CENTRIFUGAL SEPARATOR TESTING APPARATUS AND
23 25 33.29
PROCEDURES
1.3 Definitions:
(ppm).
B. Total Suspended Solids (TSS): The Solids, which are suspended in the fluid and
would be caught by a filter. Suspended solids sured by passing sample fluid
through a filter. The solids caught by the filter, once dried, are the suspended
solids.
23 25 33.19
life.
network.
system.
network components.
A. Main Performance Index:

1. In a single pass through the Normal Separator system, given solids with a
specific gravity ratio to liquid is to be of 2.6 and higher, performance is
predictably 98% of 74 microns and larger solids size, but less than the mesh
size of any preceding strainers or fine screens protecting the pumping
element.
B. Low Micron Filtration Level Performance:
1. Particles finer in size, heavier by specific gravity and some lighter by

specific gravity to be removed, resulting in an appreciable aggregate
removal of particles (up to 75%) as fine as 5 microns.
2. In a recirculating system, 98% performance is predictable to as fine as 40
microns (given solids with a specific gravity ratio to liquid of 2.6), with
correspondingly higher aggregate performance percentages (up to 90%)
of solids as fine as 5 microns.
C. Separator performance must be supported by published independent test results

from a recognized and identified agency. Standard test protocol of upstream
injection, downstream capture and separator purge recovery is allowed with the
50-200 mesh particles to enable effective, repeatable results.
23 25 33.19
D. Single pass test performance must be not less than 95% removal. Model tested
must be of the same design series as specified unit.
E. Time Response to Weather Conditions:
As specified in the Design Parameters, contractor to follow the sizing as per the
below operational conditions:
F. Design Parameters:
1. Fluid viscosity must be 100 SSU or less.

2. Separator Maximum Flow not to exceed 4,350 GPM.
3. Total Flow if exceeding single separator maximum flow rate a parallel
system of separators’ to be used.
4. Solids collection to take place with zero water loss option.
5. Separator and all package components need to withstand High TDS Level
up to 75,000 and High outside humidity levels.
1.5 Submittals:
C. Shop Drawings: For Separator Systems. Include plans, elevations, sections, details,

D. Performance Qualification Certificates: For Separators, pumps (if Packaged


E. Operation and Maintenance Data:
23 25 33.19
A. Make the complete installation in accordance with all state and local municipal

Fittings Industry
Association
ADCD : Abu Dhabi Civil Defense
UAE – Fire & Life Safety Codes 2011
AD – IBC : Abu Dhabi International Building Codes
AD – IMC : Abu Dhabi International Mechanical Codes
AD – IFC : Abu Dhabi International Fire Codes
AD – IPC : Abu Dhabi International Plumbing Codes
Provide all work necessary to comply with these requirements at no extra cost
to the Employer.
A. Retain protective coatings and flange's protective covers during storage.

1.8 Warranty:


c. Pump Failure.
d. Separator leak.
23 25 33.19
1.9 Extra Materials
2.1 Manufacturer:

B. Description: Factory-assembled and tested Solids Filtration Separator.
2.2 Liquid-Solids Centrifugal Separator:
A. A tangential inlet and mutually tangential internal accelerating slots shall be

accelerating slots.
B. Separated particle matter shall spiral downward along the perimeter of the inner
separation barrel, in a manner, which does not promote wear of the separation
stool.
C. To insure maximum particle removal characteristics, systems featuring the

recommendation.
D. System fluid shall exit the separator by following the center vortex in the
E. The separator shall feature the following access capabilities for either inspection
23 25 33.19

separation barrel.
F. The separator shall be of unishell construction with SA-36, SA-53B or equivalent

quality carbon steel, minimum thickness of 0.25 inches (6.35 mm). Maximum
G. Paint coating shall be Scothckote 134 fusion bonded epoxy on ID; Separator OD
for marine service.
H. A Coat of NanaFlex Dura from Nanocare Germany shall be applied on the

I. Inlet & outlet shall be Flanged.
I. The separator shall operate within the specified flow range.
J. Pressure loss shall be between 3-22 psi (0.2-1.5 bar), remaining constant, varying
only when the flow rate changes.
2.3 Solids Handling
A. Separated solids must be continuously purged under controlled flow into a Solids
Recovery Vessel equipped with fiberfelt solids collection bag. Excess liquid shall
pass through the bag and return to system flow via piping connected to the
system pump’s suction line. The system shall include an air/pressure relief line for
the vessel. System will also include an indicator package (SRI) that includes;
manual isolation valves for use when servicing the collection bag; sight glasses for
verification of flow through the vessel; annunciator for indicating when the
collector bag needs cleaning/replacement; flow control orifice to minimize fluid
volume/velocity through the vessel and collector bag.
B. Housing shall be carbon steel with Scotchkote 134 epoxy; (3) stainless steel
baskets; T-bolt closure coated carbon steel lid with air pressure relief valve;
Housing OD to be coated with 3 part system (zinc rich primer/high solids
epoxy/polyurethane) for marine service; *50-micron fiberfelt solids collection bag;
indicator package for bag change out. Capacity: 1080 cubic inches (18 Liters)
C. A Coat of NanaFlex Dura from Nanocare Germany shall be applied on the

The Solids Recovery Vessel will follow the Engineers Specifications as indicated for the
type of filtration selected in the project, and all capacities and construction materials
are to be followed as per the specified sections listed in clause (1.2.A.) above.
23 25 33.19
2.4 Piping Connections:
A. Proper piping sizes, pressure ratings, connection types and other specific criteria
are provided in sections listed above in clause (1.2.A.)
2.5 Mounting Requirements:
A. Loading, anchoring, and anti-vibration requirements set forth in sections listed

above in clause (1.2.A.)
3.1 Examination:
A. Verify that piping, valves and equipment-mounted devices are installed before
B. Contractor to follow manufacturer Check Lists and Method of Statements.
3.2 Installation:

specification.
3.3 Connections:
nozzles.

23 25 33.19
3.6 Adjusting:
1. Flow:
a. Set differential pressure to read between inlet and outlet of the separator to
be within the range of (0.20-1.2 Bar).
3.7 Demonstration:
Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance

23 25 33.19
23 25 33.20 - Filtration Unit for Cooling Tower Make Up Water Inlet
Part I – General
The system will remove unwanted solids from cooling water or process cooling
sumps, remote basin and heat exchangers using a centrifugal-action vortex
separator. The liquid-solids AFM Media Filtration system will help prevent particle
fouling of the cooling system's components reduce maintenance and servicing
routines, maintain optimum energy efficiency of the heat exchange process, limit
blow down & chemical use practices and control harmful bacteria growth in the
basin/sump/fills.

Section.
1.2 Summary:
A. This Section includes the filtration of the water from the canal going to the water
makeup tanks.
1. Filtration units for cooling tower make up water inlet.
1.3 Definitions:
(ppm).
would be caught by a filter. Suspended solids sured by passing sample fluid
through a filter. The solids caught by the filter, once dried, are the suspended
solids.
life.
network.
system.
23 25 33.20
network components.
L. AFM: AFM stands for Activated Filter Material, a revolutionary filter media made
from green glass. Exceeds the performance of quartz and glass AFM by filtering
about 30 % more organics. Bio-resistant and self-sterilizing which means no biofilm
is formed in the filter bed.
A. Main Performance Index:

1. In a single pass through the AFM media filter the nominal separation will be
not less than 5 micron at 90% efficiency using AFM / MediaGem55 media.
B. Design Parameters:
1. Fluid viscosity must be 100 SSU or less.

2. AFM Media Filter’s Maximum Flow not to exceed 312 GPM per filter. With
qty (4) filters, 3 for Filtration & 1 for Backwash. The system design flow is 826
GPM.
3. Total Flow if exceeding single media maximum flow rate a second AFM
media filter or more must be used.
4. Solids collection to take place in the AFM bed with backwash occurring
after a set differential pressure is met..
5. AFM Media Filter tanks need to withstand High TDS Level up to 56,000 and
High outside humidity levels.
6. The tanks will be manifolded together using polyethylene manifolds.
1.5 Submittals:
C. Shop Drawings: For AFM Media Filters. Include plans, elevations, sections, details,

23 25 33.20
D. Operation and Maintenance Data:
B. Make the complete installation in accordance with all state and local municipal

Fittings Industry
Association
ADCD : Abu Dhabi Civil Defense
UAE – Fire & Life Safety Codes 2011
AD – IBC : Abu Dhabi International Building Codes
AD – IMC : Abu Dhabi International Mechanical Codes
AD – IFC : Abu Dhabi International Fire Codes
AD – IPC : Abu Dhabi International Plumbing Codes
Provide all work necessary to comply with these requirements at no extra cost
to the Employer.
A. Retain protective coatings and flange's protective covers during storage.

B. Storage & Handling of equipment as per the recommendation of the Engineer
23 25 33.20
1.8 Warranty:


b. Tank leak.
2. Warranty Period: 1 years for the AFM Media Filter only from date of Substantial
1.9 Extra Materials
Part II – Products
2.1 Manufacturer:

B. Description: Factory-assembled and tested AFM Media and components.
2.2 AFM Media Filter:
A. Premium Performance AFM media filter in coated carbon steel.
B. 80psi design pressure.
C. Full coverage Lateral Pattern underdrains cover the entire media bed and feature an
open area of 3.6 times greater than the inlet.
D. Paint coating shall be Scotchkote 134 fusion bonded epoxy on ID; AFM Media Filter
OD to be coated with 3 part system (zinc rich primer/high solids epoxy/polyurethane)
for marine service.
E. A Coat of NanaFlex Dura from Nanocare Germany shall be applied on the exterior
surface of the complete unit to make the unit hydrophobic. The coat shall provide a
permanent weather protection, strong dirt-and water repellence and Corrosion
resistant
F. Inlet & outlet shall be grooved coupling.
23 25 33.20
I. The separator shall operate within the specified flow range.
J. Pressure loss shall be between 2-3psid clean.
K. Dirty pressure loss shall be between 7-12 psid.
2.3 Backwashing
A. Differential pressure will build as the AFM media filters are operated. As the
specified set point is hit, the filter will begin a backwash. The controller will then
sequentially backwash each filter for a set duration.
B. A typically backwash uses approximately 200gpm and backwashes for 2 minutes.
Part III – Execution
3.1 Examination:
A. Verify that piping, valves and equipment-mounted devices are installed before
B. Contractor to follow manufacturer Check Lists and Method of Statements.
3.2 Installation:

specification.
3.3 Connections:
nozzles.

23 25 33.20
3.6 Adjusting:
1. Backwash:
a. Depending on the solids loading of the liquid, the backwash initiation
differential pressure and backwash duration can be set and
adjusted as needed. Typically the dirtier the water the longer
backwash time is required.
23 25 33.20
23 25 33.29 - Centrifugal Separator Testing Apparatus and Procedures
This specification outlines approved test apparatus and procedures to verify

Separator Performance through an approved 3rd party lab/institute, that selected
Centrifugal Separators are performing within the manufacturer published ranges and
efficiencies, and to insure that all manufacturers are testing their provided equipment
within a standard test apparatus and procedures by the designated
agency/lab/institute.
This section allows for maintaining adherence to standardized testing procedures

specifications, providing foundation to ensure validity, accuracy and comparable
test results between manufacturers.
The purpose of this section is to establish a benchmark for specified separator’s solids
removal performance, and to validate separator performance using single pass
performance testing. The results are the only approved criteria for those separators’
efficiency performance.

Section.
1.2 Summary:
A. This Section includes the Centrifugal Separator Testing Apparatus and Procedures,
which will be describe how those are to be configured, and how to take place.
B. Related sections Include:
1. Section 23 25 33.13 “Basin Sweeping System”

Protection”
1.3 Definitions:
(ppm).
solids.
C. Hydro Booster: A specialized nozzle that creates sweeping action on the cooling
tower basin floor preventing accumulation of solids in the basin, thus reducing
under-deposit corrosion, cooling tower spray nozzle clogging and extending
cooling tower life.
D. Separator: A centrifugal action device to remove separable solids by use of
tangential flow velocities that imparts the centrifugal action.
23 25 33.29

network.
system.
network components.
L. Batch Test: A laboratory testing procedure in which one sample of an order being
fabricated is done simultaneously, to verify the performance claimed for.
Required single pass separator removal efficiency in the cooling system is to be

selected through performance criteria listed below in Section A or B. Separators are
to comply with one of the presented performance removal efficiency clauses (A OR
B) depending on selected single separator flow rate and type of separator:
A. Main Removal Performance Criteria of Single Separator with flow rate up to 4,350
GPM:
1. In a single pass through the Single Separator, given solids with a specific
gravity ratio to liquid is to be of 2.5-2.8 and higher, performance is
predictably 98% of 75 microns (200 mesh) and larger solids size, but less
than the mesh size of any preceding strainers or fine screens protecting
the pumping element.
2. Separator performance must be supported by published independent test
results from a recognized and identified agency listed in 1.5-D.2. Standard
test protocol of upstream injection, downstream capture and separator
purge recovery is allowed with the 250-75 microns (60-200 mesh) particles
to enable effective, repeatable results.
3. Single pass test performance must be not less than 95% removal of the
tested sample. Model tested must be of the same design series as
specified unit.
4. Test Sample Parameters:
As per project conditions the Engineer has the right to request on of the
following samples to be the basis of Separator performance test.
23 25 33.29
A. Artificially Generated Samples:
A.1 Sample Weight: 300 Grams

A.2 250-150 microns (60-100 mesh) sized Silicon Dioxide (Quarts), 33-34%
of Total Sample Weight.
A.3 150-106 microns (100-140 mesh) sized Silicon Dioxide (Quarts), 33-
34% of Total Sample Weight.
A.4 106-75 microns (140-200 mesh) sized crushed Silicon Dioxide
(Quarts), 33% of Total Sample Weight.
B. Project Collected/Provided Sample:

B.1 The Engineer and Client has the right to provide the sample
required for testing, and it need to be sieved to properly know the
weight and percentage within the sample.
B.2 If Most of the provided sample is known to be 75 Microns and
above with 2.6 Specific gravity and Higher, the performance
accepted criteria need to reach 98%.
5. Test results are to be obtained using a flow rate within the top 75% (95%) of
the flow range described in the separator manufacturer data sheet for the
unit under test.
6. For Parallel Separators Performance Test where using multiple separators
to achieve required total system flow rate, the individual single separator
test applies.
B. Removal Performance Criteria for flow rates above, the single separator test for
the level of removal desired shall apply for multiple separators of the same size
tested whether ultimately installed in parallel or series or both.
1.5 Test Report Submittals and Forms:
A. Product/Separator Data: For each type of product indicated. Include

construction details, material descriptions, and dimensions of individual
components and profiles. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics,
furnished specialties and accessories (i.e. Flow Rate, Pressure Differential, Removal
Efficiency...etc.).
B. Test report shall indicate all elements being utilized to conclude the final results.
C. Complete diagram showing the location, sizes, equipment and tools in the testing
being conducted to the product.
D. Performance/Calibration Qualification/Certificates for all instruments and

components, from manufacturer being used in the test apparatus:

2. Tests To be carried out within the following test agencies/labs:
a. International Center for Water Technology (ICWT) – Fresno, CA
b. Others to be provided for Engineer Approval.
c. All test facilities must use the same design and testing protocol to
included exact same equipment and protocol as “a” above and
listed elsewhere within this specification.
23 25 33.29

4. Sample Handling and Sourcing Validation to be provided by “Powder
Technologies” including all of the below:
a. Sample Size by Mesh in grams for each portion of the sample.
b. Sample total weight.
c. Description of the sample material
d. Signed and Stamped by Powder Technology.
e. Sample to be sent directly to testing facility.
f. Said sample to be sieved and weighed by the lab for verification prior
to testing.
E. The Test Report must follow and present the results as per the below table format:
Separation Test Completed On: MODEL TESTED
The filter assembly was installed with test components defined as follows installed in the
following order starting upstream:
1. XX" Venturi-type flow meter
2. XX micron disc filter assembly
3. XX" pipe spool with sand-injection pump
4. Separator under test
5. XX" pipe spool
6. XX micron disc filter assembly
Test Conditions:
Pressure Drop:
Flow Rate (GPM) (psi)
Sample Weight Break Down (Grams):
Mesh Size Weight (Grams)
75-100 mesh
100-120 mesh
120-140 mesh
140-200 mesh
200-325 mesh
Total Sample Weight

(Grams)
Recovered Grams from Downstream Filters:
Separator Efficiency:
23 25 33.29
2. Part II – Testing Apparatus
The testing apparatus is to be composed of the following elements:
2.1 Centrifugal pump sufficient in capacity to maintain 50 psi minimum inlet pressure at
required test flow rate throughout the entire test
2.2 Calibrated flow meter
2.3 Solids injection system - Injection system to utilize a side stream booster pump, Venturi-
type injector and open top solids receiver to provide for controlled and complete
visual introduction of test solids. Static standpipe injection method is not allowed due
to its inherent inability to be accurately controlled.
2.4 Calibrated differential pressure gauge(s) installed across inlet/outlet of separator
2.5 Separator under test
2.6 Separator purge valve
2.7 Downstream barrier filter sized and rated according to the efficiency expected from
the separator and to be located at the outlet of the separator under test for the
purposes of collection of unseparated solids
2.8 Downstream control valve
The above listed elements of the testing apparatus must follow the below
arrangement:
Figure 1
3. Part III – Testing Protocol and Procedures
3.1 Test Protocol:
Performance testing of sand separators shall begin with a head loss test conducted
to verify the high flowrate over the separator, and this to be spanning approximately
23 25 33.29
between 2 psid to 22 psid. The inlet static pressure is to be maintained at

approximately 50 psig (+/- 5 psi) during this evaluation. This pretest hydraulic study
verifies that the expected flow versus pressure loss characteristics are in line with
manufacturer's expectations, and enables the determination of the flow versus
pressure loss fitted function.
Measured test samples of crushed Silicon Dioxide (Quartz) (Specific Gravity = 2.5-2.8)
are weighed out, and shall be comprised of the following size ranges and
percentages:
A. For Single Separator with flow rates up to 4,350 GPM:
- 250-150 microns (60-100 mesh) sized crushed Silicon Dioxide (Quartz), 33-34%
of total sample weight
- 150-106 microns (100-140) mesh sized crushed Silicon Dioxide (Quartz), 33-34%
- 106-75 microns (140-200 mesh) sized crushed Silicon Dioxide (Quartz), 33-34%
B. Water Speed within the piping from the injection point to the separator needs to be 5
fps at a minimum.
A minimum of three individual samples are to be collected and set aside to be

injected at a minimum of three trials along the separator's flowrate corresponding
with the manufacturer's recommended highest one.
3.2 Test Procedures:
1. Upon startup of the separator for efficiency testing, all air is to be vented at the
highest point in the separator and piping. Flow is then stabilized at the pre-
determined test flow rate with an inlet pressure set at approximately 50 psig. This inlet
pressure may rise as required to maintain a steady flow rate through the downstream
capture filters as they capture bypassed solids.
2. In no case shall the supply pressure be allowed to drop below 50 psi (+/- 5 psi). The
separator's purge valve is opened sufficiently long so as to thoroughly purge the
separator of any debris collected during manufacturing, shipping and installation. The
purge valve is then shut for the duration of the test so there is no underflow through
the purge valve and the separated contaminant remains in the separator throughout
the test.
3. The sand samples are then introduced at least 10 pipe diameters upstream of the
separator inlet at a steady rate not to exceed 300 parts per million (ppm). 100 ppm is
recommended as a maximum for best practice and to give enough time to inject all
the solids without inadvertently slugging the separator.
4. The separator shall then be run undisturbed for a minimum period of one minute after
visual confirmation of the complete injection of the test solids, continuously
monitoring the flow rate to ensure the flow does not drop more than 10% below the
starting flow rate due to downstream capture filter blockage. If the flow drops off
below this point during the test, the test shall be stopped immediately and the results
disregarded.
23 25 33.29
5. After completion of a successful test run, the downstream control valve is shut as
quickly as feasible to minimize running the separator below its rated flow during shut
down. The system is then shut down and vented. The separator is drained through the
purge valve and subsequently flushed to remove all solids inside the unit that may be
resting on the interior surfaces. (Note: Collection of the separated solids within the
separator for evaluation is optional and not required for final testing. If the separated
solids within the separator are collected, there is always some loss of solids in this type
of physical testing due to solids reaching inaccessible recesses inside the separator.
The combined weight of the recovered solids from the separator plus the solids held in
the capture filters can be compared to the injected weight to validate the integrity
of the testing procedure. The total recovered amount should be at least 95% of the
injected weight to consider it a successful test procedure.)
6. The downstream capture filters are likewise opened and drained/washed to retrieve
all unseparated solids that passed through the separator. The recovered solids are
then dried.
7. The dry weights of solids recovered from the downstream capture filters are
compared to the total amount of solids injected to determine the separator
efficiency.
Note:
Minimum Water Speed within the piping from Solids Injection Point to the catchment
filters are to be following the following formula:
- Speed (m/s) = Required Solids Specific Gravity X 0.65

- Speed (ft/s) = Required Solids Specific Gravity X 2.0
3.3 Test Reports:
It is under the responsibility of the manufacturer and contractor to provide the original
test certificates along with the testing agency/lab documents such as registration
and legal documents, and those test reports must be provided along with the
materials approval once delivered, and any change or misleading documents
against the tested equipment is to be considered enough to cancel those equipment
of being installed/used at the site, and the contractor with the manufacturer are
subjected to recover all damages occurred due to this reason by cost and time to
meet the project agreed delivery schedules and operation.
23 25 33.29
23 33 00 - Air Distribution
PART 1 GENERAL
The supply and installation of air distribution systems shall be as indicated on the
drawings. Installations to include all equipment required to form a complete
working system.
This section to be read in conjunction with the following:
Number Description
230713 INSULATION
1.2 Description of systems

Refer to Drawings for detailed system of HVAC.
1.3 Quality assurance:
1.3.1 Workmanship and Materials:

The installations throughout are to be of the best quality materials erected by
skilled workmen under competent supervision and left in good working order on
completion to the satisfaction of the Architect / Engineer.
1.3.2 Compliance with Standards and Regulations:

Except where otherwise specified all work is to conform with the relevant
provisions of appropriate British Standard Code of Practice, ASHRAE standards
currently applicable.
All galvanized steel sheet ductwork installations to conform to specification DW

144 as published by the Heating and Ventilating Contractors Association, UK.
Copies of this may be obtained from:
The BESA Publications
1.4 Submittals
1.4.1 Product Data

Submit manufacturer's data for all equipment identifying model references and
types. Information submitted to include:
23 33 00
Technical data of all equipment and materials proposed, performance curves,

selection date sheets, catalogues, etc, as applicable.
Methods of Construction
Installation Requirements
Guarantee particulars.
List of spare parts required as indicated elsewhere
1.4.2 Shop Drawings

Submit working drawings showing detailed arrangement of air distribution
systems and equipment. Drawings to show all supports required and to be co-
ordinated with both building structure and other services such as electrical, fire
protection and fire detection system etc.
1.4.3 Maintenance Manual

Submit bound manual for the equipment and components with operating and
maintenance instructions, parts listing, recommended parts inventory listing,
emergency instructions and similar information.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 Sheet metal ductwork:

Unless otherwise specifically mentioned, all ductwork to be constructed from
hot dip galvanized sheet steel or coil to BS 2989 Grade Z2 coating type.
Ductwork to be constructed and installed in accordance with DW 144
Specification for sheet metal Ductwork published by the Heating and
Ventilating Contractors Association.
The permitted air leakage for ductwork shall be as follows in accordance with
EUROVENT Standard
For low pressure duct

(Class A) : 0.027 x p0.65
liters/sec./sq.m of duct surface area.
For medium pressure
duct (Class B) : 0.009 x p0.65
liters/sec./sq.m. of duct surface area.
For high pressure duct (Class C): 0.003 x p0.65

liters/sec/sqm of duct surface area
: where p is the differential pressure in

pascals.
2.2 Pre-insulated ductwork:

All Supply Air/Return Air ducts and fresh air ducts within the building will be
European make pre-insulated aluminium/ polyisocynnurate sandwich duct of
20mm thick polyisocyannurate rigid foam board faced on both sides 80/80
microns aluminium foil. The rigid board density will be 45 kg/m3, 0.022 W/mK or
better thermal conductivity. The panel board should comply with following
standards
NFPA 101 Life Safety Load Class ‘A’
ASTM E84 Class ‘1’
NFPA255
23 33 00
Toxicity index shall not exceed 5.7 according to NES 713 Class ‘O’ and BS 476
Parts 6&7.
Pre insulated duct will be installed, supported as per DW144 and as per
manufacturer’s recommendation.
2.3 Duct work & fittings:
2.3.1 General
1. Low velocity ductwork and fittings shall be manufactured and installed

in accordance with specification DW144 issued by the BESA
(HVCA)/SMACNA Standards except where specified hereunder to the
contrary.
2. The Works Contractor shall supply and install all the ductwork,
sheet metal, supports, dampers, grilles, diffusers and auxiliaries, as
required to complete the various ventilation and air conditioning
system. The installation shall be as shown on the Drawings, but the
Works Contractor must include for checking site dimension.
3. All supply, return and exhaust air ducts, support members and fittings
shall be constructed from new high quality galvanized mild steel
sheet and shall conform to the requirements of THE BESA, including
ASHRAE Standards.
4. All ductwork shall be manufactured and erected by ductwork

specialists and shall be installed to run parallel with the building
structure and provide a neat arrangement. The ductwork shall be true
in section and continuous with air-tight joints, presenting a smooth
surface on the inside and neatly finished on the outside.
Internal roughness or obstruction to air flow, and sharp edges or
corners on the outside of ducts. Fittings or supports will not be
accepted.
5. Variations in direction and in the shape of ductwork shall be effected

with easy changes to the airflow. The slope of a change in shape,
a contraction or an expansion shall not exceed 22.5 degrees on any
side.
6. All square bends shall be fitted with turnings vanes of proprietary

manufacture.
7. Flanged duct joints shall be used for all circular ducts of

diameters 600 mm or greater and all rectangular ducts having any
dimension equal or greater than 800 mm.
8. All duct joints shall be made air-tight incorporating pop-riveted seams,

approved sealants, gaskets and finished tapes. All excess sealant
must be removed before tape is applied.
9. Rectangular ducts having any dimension equal or greater than 400

mm shall be externally stiffened all around the duct.
10. Ductwork test holes shall be provided at air handling units (positioned
in a straight section of duct near to the fan discharge) and in all main
23 33 00
branch ducts with two or more terminals served from the branch. Test
holes shall be 25 mm diameter, suitably strengthened and fitted with
an effective removable seal.
11. Open ends of ducts shall be covered during erection with plastic
sheeting to prevent ingress of dust and rubbish.
12. Where damage (or rusting) has occurred on galvanized ductwork,

the affected section shall be made good by preparing, cleaning
and painting with two coats of zinc rich paint and an approved
finishing paint. Where damage, in the Engineers opinion, cannot be
made good, then a new section of ductwork shall be provided at no
cost to the contract.
13. All ductwork supports and hangers shall be painted with two coats of
zinc rich paint. The steelwork supports at roof level shall be provided
by the Works Contractor and shall be painted with two coats of gray
bit mastic paint.
14. All ductwork supports and hangers shall be of the angle iron and drop
rod type or other approved suspension systems:
15. Neoprene/compressible rubber strip or timber spacers shall be inserted

between the ducts and supports to reduce the transmission on noise
and vibration and to provide a thermal break.
16. Vertical drop rods or angle support members shall be positioned as

close to the edge of the duct as possible, but not touching it. The
supports shall be outside any insulation, vapour sealing or other finish.
17. Additional supports shall be provided adjacent to dampers, grilles,

diffusers, or other similar equipment so as to prevent duct distortion.
18. Maximum support centre shall be 2.4m for any horizontal or vertical
ducts and 1.2m for large horizontal ducts whose cross-section area
exceeds 3 sq.m. On no accounts shall angles, used for ductwork
stiffening or joints be used as part of the supports.
19. No ceilings, light fittings, pipes or any other equipment shall be

supported from the ductwork or the ductwork supports.
2.3.2 Construction:
General
1. The constructional requirements for rectangular ductwork have been

established following independent tests, the limits of use being related
to the characteristics of rolled steel angle longitudinal beams, cross
joints and stiffeners described in this Specification.
2. Sealant shall be used with all longitudinal seams irrespective of the

pressure class. The sealant must be included in the seam during
manufacture or be applied as an edge sealant. All joints are to be
neatly Pop-riveted or spot-welded. No folded seams will be allowed.
23 33 00
2.4 Ductwork connections and accessories:
2.4.1 Duct connections to grilles and diffusers shall be detailed to manufacturers

requirements, and where flexible connections are used, the cross sectional
area of the duct is to be maintained throughout the length of the flexible
connections.
1. All connections to air handling units and sound attenuators if any shall
be made with mating flanges to suit the plant items as delivered to site,
and shall be made air-tight with suitable gaskets and washers such that
they may readily be removed
2. Flexible connections shall be fitted to the ducted inlet and outlet of all
fans and air handling equipment,
3. General Construction requirements

The minimum metal thickness shall be 0.6 mm. In all cases the larger
dimensions and/or pressure classification shall determine the sheet
thickness and stiffening.
2.4.2 Stiffeners
The flat side of fittings shall be stiffened in accordance with the construction.
On the flat sides of bends, stiffeners shall be arranged in a radial pattern,
with the spacing measured along the center line of the bend.
2.4.3 Splitters
Splitters shall be attached to the duct by bolts or mechanically closed rivets
at 100 mm maximum spacing.
2.4.4 Turning vanes

Square bends shall be fitted with turning vanes, which shall be securely
attached at each end either to the duct or to internal runners, and the
runners fastened to the duct by mechanically closed rivets or bolts at 150 mm
maximum spacing.
For single skin vanes, the maximum length between supports shall be 615
mm and for double skin vanes the maximum length between supports shall
be 2250 mm.
2.4.5 Twin Bends

Turning vanes in twin bends in which the width of the straight section and
branch differ shall be set so that the leading and the trailing edges of the
turning vanes are parallel to the duct vanes
2.4.6 Branches
A branch should be taken off a straight section of duct, not off a taper.
Connection of branch to duct shall be cleats, rivets or bolts, and
sealant shall be used between ducts and branch.
2.4.7 Expansion and Contraction

Where these are required, an expansion shall be made upstream of a branch
connection and a connection downstream of a branch connection. The
slope of either an expansion or a contraction should not exceed 22.5% on
any side. Where this angle is not practicable, the slope may be increased,
23 33 00
providing that splitters are positioned to bisect the angle between any
side and the center line of the duct.
2.4.8 Access Openings:

All access openings shall be rigidly framed, with air tight covers designed so
that they can be speedily removed and re fixed. The recommendation of
specification DW144:1998 shall be strictly followed,
2.4.9 Access Panels and Doors

a) Acoustical quality access panels or doors shall be provided in supply,
return and exhaust air ductwork, false ceiling and builders work shafts, as
required to facilitate the routine inspection, maintenance, cleaning and
adjustment of air conditioning and ventilation equipment.
b) Access panels and doors shall be air-tight when closed, with
compressible rubber gaskets around the entire perimeter, and shall
generally be of the hinged type.
c) Where space limitations preclude the use of hinges, access doors
shall be fixed with a minimum of four heavy window type latches.
d) For thermally insulated ducts, all access doors or cover shall be of
double panel-insulated construction, extended beyond the face of the
duct by a measurement equal to the thickness of insulation and be so
arranged that the insulation and finish can be dressed' into the frame
ensuring that the opening is not concealed and that the edges of the
insulation are protected from accidental damage. For un-insulated
ducts, access doors may be of single panel construction. All duct
access doors shall be mounted in their own separate frames.
e) The access doors shall be provided in the upstream side of the Fire damper
& other apparatus as per NFPA 90 A
2.4.10 Test holes shall be provided in the horizontal side of the ducts and shall
be of 1 3 mm. dia. Each test hole shall be fitted with an Instrument
Test Port having galvanized cast metal body, expandable rubber sealing
element and metal wing nut for operation. Test port base shall be seated
on soft rubber gasket and riveted to the duct wall. The wing nut shall
extend outside the finished insulation so that the duct interior can be
accessed without disturbing the insulation. Rubber plugs or stick-on seals
shall not be used for closing test holes. The number of test holes shall be
as per recommendation of DW142. Test holes shall be provided at the
following locations:
a. At fans (in the straight section of duct near to fan outlet).
b. At main supply and return ducts of air handling units/cooling coils.
c. At main branches after regulating dampers.
d. At any other position, as per Engineer’s requirements.
2.5 Fire Rated Ductwork: All Ducts providing Makeup air for smoke management
strategy and all ducts carrying smoke shall be fire rated as follows
a. Provide fire rated ductwork where shown on the drawings. Fire resistant
ducting shall be tested as per BS 476 part 24 for stability, integrity
and insulation by an independent laboratory and the certificates shall
be submitted for approval.
b. Fire resistance rating of the ductwork, when tested from either side, shall
not be less than 2 hours for stability, integrity and insulation.
23 33 00
c. The ductwork systems shall be manufactured and installed in

accordance with BS 5588 part 9 and shall be suitable to class C
pressure/leakage classification of DW144.
d. Manufacturers proprietary insulating material tested and certified as per
BS 476 shall be used for the fire rated ducting. Sprayed coatings, where
used, shall be cement spray system with smooth, hard set exterior finish.
e. All joints in the insulation shall be glued using suitable fire rated glues
and secured with nails. The jointing method shall be as per Manufacturers
standards.
f. Composite panels or ducting shall be fiber-cement reinforced by
bonded zinc coated steel sheet.
g. The fire resistance ductworks shall be provided integral fire resisting
supports.
h. The fire rated ductworks shall be provided with fire resistant access
panels. Fire resistant access panels shall be open able without tools.
2.6 Dampers:
2.6.1 Volume Control Dampers:
i. Volumes control dampers shall be placed in ducts at every branch

supply or return air duct connection whether or not indicated on the
drawings for the proper volume control and balancing of the system.
ii. The dampers shall have sturdy corrosion resistant construction. All
dampers shall have multi-leaf double skin, aerofoil section, opposed
action blades. Individual blades should not exceed 2200 mm. in length
or 175 mm. in width. Double skin blades shall be made out of 0.8mm (22
G) thick galvanized steel sheet with seamed edges. Dampers frames
shall be galvanized made out of steel sheet. The thickness shall be
1.2mm (18 G) for max duct width of 900 mm. & 1.4mm (16 G) for
duct sizes of width exceeding 900 mm. Blade ends shall be gasketed to
minimize air leakage.
iii. Damper quadrants shall be of cast metal construction, marked OPEN

and SHUT in damper sizes up to 300x150 mm. Single skin blades shall be
fabricated from 1.4mm (18 G) galvanized steel sheet.
iv. The control linkage shall be outside the air stream. Clear airflow area
equal to the duct size shall be maintained within the damper frame.
Maximum clearance between the blades and the frame shall be limited
to 3 mm. Indication of damper blade position shall be provided.
v. Wherever required the damper shall be solenoid or motorized operated.

In such case the control damper shall be provided with extra linkage and
the actuator to perform close and open operation. Volt free contacts shall
be provided for operation and monitoring from fire alarm system and BMS
as per the control scheme. Power supply to these dampers shall be from
emergency generators supply by fire rated cables with GI Conduits as
detailed in electrical specification. Separate power supply unit fed from
emergency circuit shall be provided for the distribution of power to all the
motorized dampers according to the location of the dampers.
23 33 00
2.6.2 Splitters Dampers:
At each point of division in a supply duct, where a branch is taken off a trunk,
an adjustment, splitter or deflecting damper shall be fitted two gauge
heavier than the duct, with operating rod and locking quadrant. These
deflecting dampers shall be permanently set and locked in position after
completion of the installation and adjustment with length extending through
the duct to externally mounted bearing plates.
2.6.3 Non-Return Dampers
Non-return dampers shall be constructed from light weight aluminum alloy

extrusions with metered and welded / cleated frames and the blades shall be
supported on plastic moulded bearing with felt rubber or neoprene strips
on long edges of blades to ensure positive shut-off and quiet closure.
The dampers shall be provided in standard finish with white polyester powder
coating.
The dampers shall be duct or wall mounted depending upon its application.
Dampers on fresh air inlets shall be similar edged to prevent ingress of dust
and sand particles.
2.6.4 Fire Dampers:
i. Fire dampers with fusible links shall be fixed in ducts at all floor to floor
crossings (vertical traverse) or wall to wall crossings of all fire rated walls
(horizontal traverse), irrespective of it being shown on the drawings or
not, without any additional cost. No variation claims shall be
entertained in this regard.
ii. Fire dampers shall be of the galvanized steel curtain type with fusible link.
iii. The steel blades of the damper curtain shall fold completely upon
themselves and be stacked at one end of the damper outside the air
stream. The dampers shall be arranged for vertical or horizontal
operation as detailed on the drawings. The damper fusible links shall be
rated at 73.8° C. (165F)
iv. The dampers shall be leakage rated class 1 according to UL 555S or

equivalent standards and fire rated 2 hours resistance. Both the curtain
and fusible link shall be accessible for servicing through air tight
inspection doors placed up or down stream wherever possible.
v. Each access door shall be of a minimum size of 250x250 mm. or full

duct width on ducts of less than 450 mm.
vi. Ducting dampers and casings are to be manufactured in strict

compliance with UL 555 and NFPA 90A.
vii. All fire damper shall be equipped with micro-switch to give indication on
its closure to Building Management System.
23 33 00
viii. All other accessories such as side seal pull rings, visual indicator, blade
guides, catch plate and spring shall be provided as standard and all
necessary fixing frameworks shall be supplied and installed by the works
contractor as recommended by the manufacturer.
ix. Access for resetting the damper shall be provided in the duct work as
described elsewhere. Fire dampers and their installation details shall have
to meet the requirements of local Fire officer.
2.6.5 Motorized fire and smoke dampers

i. Motorized Fire & smoke dampers shall be provided at locations as
shown in drawings. The damper frame shall be multiple blade type shall
be fabricated with roll-formed, 0.85-mm thick galvanized steel; with
mitered and interlocking corners, 74 deg c rated replaceable fusible
link, factory installed electric resettable link and switch gear package and
smoke detector.
ii. The blades shall be roll-formed, horizontal, interlocking, 0.85-mm thick,

galvanized sheet steel. In place of interlocking blades, use full-length,
0.85-mm thick, galvanized- steel blade connectors
iii. The dampers shall be leakage rated to class 1 according to UL 555 and
UL 555S or equivalent standards and fire rated 11/2 hours resistance.
Damper shall be of modulating action and motors with dual input
provision (Fire alarm & BMS).
iv. All necessary frameworks fixing shall be supplied and installed by the
works contractor as recommended by the manufacturer. Access for
resetting the damper shall be provided in the duct work as described
elsewhere. Fire dampers and their installation details shall have to meet
the requirements of local Fire officer
v. The control damper shall be provided with extra linkage and the actuator
to perform close and open operation. Volt free contacts shall be provided
for operation and monitoring from fire alarm system and BMS as per the
control scheme.
vi. Power supply to these dampers shall be from emergency generators

supply by fire rated cables with GI Conduits as detailed in electrical
specification. Separate power supply unit fed from emergency circuit shall
be provided for the distribution of power to all the motorized dampers
according to the location of the dampers.
2.6.6 Low Leakage Pressure Relief/Pressure Regulating Dampers:

1. The low leakage pressure regulating dampers shall be purpose made from
Aluminum extrusions and include a balanced blade mounted in an
installation frame.
2. The damper shall provide automatic pressure regulation and shall be
motorized type.
3. The operating pressure range for the damper shall be 18 Pa-65 Pa
adjustable to any required point.
4. The damper shall be supplied in standard finish with white polyester
powder coating.
5. The damper shall be fitted with fixing flange to mount into angle iron frame
prepared in the opening.
6. The damper shall be similar to Euro Register or equal.
23 33 00
2.7 Flexible Round Duct:
1. Flexible ductwork shall be manufactured with a two ply aluminium inner

core supported by helically wound spring galvanized steel wire, with lock
seam to form a corrugated duct capable of being bent or set by hand
without spring back and without deforming the circular section ,
surrounded by 25 mm thickness of 24 kg/m3 density fibre glass
insulation, all wrapped in a reinforced aluminium outer jacket. The
overall U value shall be 0.034 W/m.K. Ductwork shall meet the standards
of NFPA 90A, and be UL listed or to meet BS 476 and BS 413.
2. Flexible ducts installed in an externally insulated duct system shall

be factory insulated with glass fibre insulation not less than 25 mm thick
and a density not less than 24 kg/m3, and covered with an acceptable
vapour seal.
3. Flexible ducts installed in internally (acoustic) insulated duct system, shall

be factory insulated with glass fibre insulation not less than 25 mm thick
and a density not less than 24 kg/m3, faced on air side with PVC
coated glass cloth having an open area not more than 25%, and on
room side with material specified above.
4. Flexible duct installation shall be in accordance with manufactures

instruction. Joints between factory insulated flexible ducts and field
insulated ductwork shall be clamped by nylon straps to suit duct size
and applied with sealant., to eliminate any chance of air leakage.
2.8 Flexible Connectors:
Flexible connector material shall be flame retardant or non combustible fabric,

coating and adhesives complying with UL 181, class 1. Flexible joints shall be
provided at the intake and discharge connections of Air handling unit, supply
and exhaust air fans and fan coil units, in the sheet metal duct work wherever it
crosses building structure expansion joints.
The flexible joints shall be kept as short as possible but with minimum width of
150mm. In no case the flexible joint shall exceed 250mm width.
The flexible joints shall be connected to the duct work or equipment with flange
or spigot connections
2.9 Metal-Edged Connectors:
2.9.1 Factory fabricated with a fabric strip 89 mm wide attached to 2 strips of

70mm wide, 0.7-mm thick, galvanized sheet steel or 0.8-mm thick aluminum
sheets. Provide m e t a l c o m p a t i b l e w it h connected ducts.
2.9.2 Indoor System, Flexible Connector Fabric shall be glass fabric double
coated with neoprene, minimum weight: 26 oz./sq. yd. (880 g/sq. m), tensile
strength: 480 lbf/inch (84 N/mm) in the warp and 360 lbf/inch (63 N/mm) in
the filling and service temperature: Minus 40 to plus 200 deg F (Minus 40 to
plus 93 deg C).
2.9.3 Outdoor System, Flexible Connector Fabric shall be glass fabric double
coated with weatherproof, synthetic rubber (Hypalon) resistant to UV rays
and ozone, miinimum weight: 24 oz./sq. yd. (810 g/sq. m), tensile strength:
23 33 00
530 lbf/inch (93 N/mm) in the warp and 440 lbf/inch (77 N/mm) in the filling
and service temperature: Minus 50 to plus 250 deg F (Minus 45 to plus 121
deg C
2.9.4 High-Corrosive-Environment (Grease Duct) System, Flexible Connectors

shall be
glass fabric with chemical-resistant coating, minimum weight: 14 oz./sq. yd.
(474g/sq. m) tensile Strength: 450 lbf/inch (79 N/mm) in the warp and 340
lbf/inch (60 N/mm) in the filling and service temperature: Minus 67 to plus
500 deg F (Minus 55 to plus 260 deg C).
2.10 Air Terminals:
2.10.1 Ceiling Diffusers for back of house areas
i. Ceiling diffusers shall be of made of high quality extruded aluminium

profile, square neck pattern, with a removable core assembly, suitable
for a quiet draft less air distribution. Diffusers shall be of extruded
aluminium construction and of arctic white baked epoxy powder
coat finish as standard. However, the finish shall be subject to the
final approval of architect / engineer. All diffusers shall have precisely
mitered corners mechanically fastened for tight, invisible joints.
ii. All supply / return air four directional diffusers shall be cone type as one
piece die formed aluminium construction arranged in concentric cones
and have as integral opposed blade volume damper to permit equal
distribution of air over the entire face of the diffuser. Opposed
blade volume dampers shall be constructed of galvanized steel.
Frames are 1 . 4 m m ( 18 G) and the blades of 0 . 6 m m ( 24 G)
materials, fixed rigidly to the frame by aluminium rivets or by spring clips.
Damper blades are separated from its frame by nylon bushes. Core shall
be easily removable to ease for installation, maintenance and damper
adjustment. Opposed blade damper is screw operated from the face
opening of the diffuser after removal of cone.
iii. All supply air terminals shall be complete with compressible rubber
gaskets at the flanges to prevent air leakage. The return air diffuser shall
be same as supply air diffusers except without volume control damper
and return air diffuser OBD shall be painted black.
iv. Air terminals shall be ARI certified. (ARI 880-89).
2.10.2 Square Diffusers for Front of house areas
1. Square panel ceiling diffusers shall be Aluminum diffuser of the sizes and
mounting types shown on the plans and outlet schedule. The diffuser shall
have a heavy gauge aluminum face panel that captures a secondary
heavy gauge aluminum panel. The diffuser shall be entirely aluminum. The
face panel is removable by means of four hanger brackets. The exposed
surface of the face panel shall be smooth, flat, and free of visible fasteners.
2. The face panel shall project 6mm below the outside border of the diffuser
backpan. Panels projecting more than 6mm below the outside border
are not acceptable. The back of the face panel shall have an
aerodynamically shaped, rolled edge to ensure a tight horizontal
discharge pattern. A single metal thickness on the edges of the face
23 33 00
panel will not be accepted. Ceiling diffusers with a 600 x 600mm full face
shall have no less than an 450 x 450mm face panel size. Ceiling diffusers
with a 300 x 300mm full face shall have no less than a 275 x 275mm face
panel size.
3. The backpan shall be one piece precision die-stamped and shall include
an integrally drawn inlet (welded-in inlets and corner joints are not
acceptable). The diffuser backpan shall be constructed of 0.8mm (22G)
aluminum. The diffuser neck shall have a minimum of 32mm depth
available for duct connection.
4. The finish shall be as per architectural approval. The finish shall be an
anodic acrylic paint, baked at 157°C for 30 minutes. The pencil hardness
must be HB to H. The paint must pass a 100-hour ASTM B117 Corrosive
Environments Salt Spray Test without creepage, blistering or deterioration
of film. The paint must pass a 250-hour ASTM D870 Water Immersion Test.
The paint must also pass the ASTM D2794 Reverse Impact Cracking Test
with a 50-inch pound force applied.
5. Round dampers shall be provided at the neck. Damper shall be
constructed of heavy gauge steel. Damper must be operable from the
face of the diffuser. Directional Blow clips shall be available to restrict the
discharge air in certain directions.
6. Insulation blanket shall be available. The insulation will be R-6, foil-backed,
and provide an additional 1-inch gap around the neck to install insulated
flex duct.
7. The manufacturer shall provide published performance data for the
square panel diffuser. The diffuser shall be tested in accordance with
ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 70-1991.
2.10.3 Door Grilles
1. Door grilles shall be of the inverted B-Blades type not permitting vision
through the grille blades not more than 12 mm apart. Minimum free
area shall be at least 60%. Louver shall be of the adjustable width
double frame type with a frame each side of the door. Door grilles
shall be fitted where indicated on the Drawings.
2. Door grilles shall be with extruded Aluminium frame and Aluminium

blades. The finish shall be subject to the final approval of architect /
engineer.
2.10.4 Grilles and Registers
1. Supply Grilles
a. Aluminum supply grilles shall be of the sizes and mounting types shown on
the plans and outlet schedule. The deflection blades shall be available
parallel to the long dimension of the grille or register. Construction shall be of
aluminum with a 1¼-inch wide border on all sides. Sizes 600 x 600mm and
below shall have roll-formed borders with a minimum thickness of 0.8mm.
Larger sizes shall be constructed using continuous aluminum extrusions with
a nominal thickness of 1.0 – 1.3mm shall be interlocked at the four corners
and mechanically staked to form a rigid frame. Screw holes shall be
countersunk for a neat appearance.
b. Deflection blades shall be contoured to a specifically designed and tested
cross-section to meet published test performance data. Blades shall be
spaced on 20mm centers. Blades shall have friction pivots on both sides to
allow individual blade adjustment without loosening or rattling or be inserted
23 33 00
through the frame and held tight with steel friction wire interlocked to the
frame on both ends of each side. Plastic blade pivots are not acceptable.
c. Opposed blade volume damper shall be constructed of heavy gauge
steel. Damper must be operable from the face of the grille.
d. The grille finish shall be as per architectural approval. The finish shall be an
anodic acrylic paint, baked at 157° C for 30 minutes. The pencil hardness
Environments Salt Spray Test without creepage, blistering or deterioration of
film. The paint must pass a 250-hour ASTM D870 Water Immersion Test. The
paint must also pass the ASTM D2794 Reverse Impact Cracking Test with a
50-inch pound force applied.
e. The manufacturer shall provide published performance data for the grille.
The grille shall be tested in accordance with ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 70-
1991.
2. Return Grilles
a. Aluminum return grilles shall be of the sizes and mounting types shown on
the plans and outlet schedule. The fixed deflection blades shall be
available parallel to the long or short dimension of the grille. Construction
shall be of extruded aluminum with a 32mm wide border on all sides.
Minimum border thickness shall be 1.0-1.3mm Sizes 600 x 600mm and smaller
shall be constructed using a roll-formed frame.
b. Corners shall be welded with full penetration resistance welds. Sizes larger
than 600 x 600mm shall be constructed by using heavy aluminum extrusions
and shall be interlocked at the four corners and mechanically staked to
form a rigid frame. Screw holes shall be counter-sunk for a neat
appearance.
c. Deflection blades shall be contoured to a specifically designed and tested
cross-section to meet published test performance data. Blades shall be
firmly held in place by mullions from behind the grille and fixed in place by
crimping or welding. Blade deflection angle shall be available at 35°.
d. Optional opposed blade volume damper shall be constructed of heavy
gauge steel or aluminum. Damper must be operable from the face of the
grille.
e. The grille finish shall be as per architectural approval. The finish shall be an
anodic acrylic paint, baked at 157°C for 30 minutes. The pencil hardness
Environments Salt Spray Test without creepage, blistering or deterioration of
film. The paint must pass a 250-hour ASTM D870 Water Immersion Test. The
paint must also pass the ASTM D2794 Reverse Impact Cracking Test with a
50-inch pound force applied.
f. The manufacturer shall provide published performance data for the grille.
The grille shall be tested in accordance with ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 70-
1991.
2.10.5 Linear Diffusers
1. Provide all materials and equipment required for a complete installation of

all linear slot air distribution systems as shown on the architectural and
mechanical drawings and/or indicated in the architectural or mechanical
specifications. The systems shall be complete in every respect and shall
include all required appurtenances. Mechanical contractor shall furnish and
install all plenums, hoods, blank-offs and associated sheet metal
components including all duct connections thereto.
23 33 00
2. Provide all continuous linear slot diffusers as shown on the drawings. The slot
diffusers shall integrate into the ceiling system. Where curved linear slot
diffusers are indicated, they shall be stretched formed to the exact radii
required. Segmented linear slot diffusers will not be accepted.
3. The linear slot diffusers shall have a 2 slots unless shown otherwise and shall
be capable of being used for supply air, return air, exhaust air or any
combination thereof.
4. The linear slot diffusers shall be capable of supporting the ceiling system.
Linear diffusers supported by screws in the flanges or from air plenums are
unacceptable. For lay-in ceiling, provide hanger wire support clips that are
integral with the linear slot diffusers allowing the linear slot diffusers to be
supported from the building structure with ceiling wire. For hard ceilings,
provide clips that are integral with the linear slot diffusers allowing the
diffusers to be secured directly to the ceiling framing without the
requirement for hanger supports. Provide spline clips to secure joints and
ceiling tees to the diffusers.
5. Provide ends and corners as required. Ends shall be butt type, field installed,
or mitered picture frame type factory installed, as indicated herein or shown
on the drawings. Corners shall be mitered one piece unit.
6. Pattern controllers shall be one piece extruded aluminum, 600mm long
maximum, positioned between spring loaded spacers. Pattern controllers
shall allow the airstream to be directed flat against the ceiling in either
direction or downward as well as allowing throw reduction every two feet
along the entire length of the linear slot diffusers. The airstream shall be
maintained at the ceiling plane and shall not dump when volume is
reduced. Only extruded aluminum pattern controllers are acceptable.
Where shown or noted pattern controllers shall be designed to allow the
airstream to be jetted into the occupied space and be adjustable to vector
the airstream as required.
7. Material shall be minimum wall thickness 1.6mm extruded aluminum. Spring
steel retainers shall be used under the spacers to hold the slot diffusers
assembly tightly together and allow the slot diffusers to be disassembled
easily for field trimming. Materials other than extruded aluminum and spring
steel will not be accepted.
8. Flanges exposed to view shall be painted factory as per architectural
approval. All other surfaces shall be painted flat black.
9. All slot diffusers shall be manufactured by the same manufacturer of the
plenums and hoods. No exceptions will be allowed. Plenum lengths and
entry collar sizes shall be as indicated on the plan schedules.
10. Plenums shall be minimum 0.6mm (24G) galvanized steel and lined inside
with black matte fiberglass insulation and externally insulated with 25mm
fiberglass insulation and provided with canvass and 2 coats of vapor barrier.
Hoods shall be 51 percent free area and constructed of 0.6mm (24G)
perforated sheet metal painted flat black.
11. provide a Volume control damper located in the entry collar of the supply
air plenum, accessible through the slot diffuser.
12. Perform all air testing and balancing of all slot diffuser systems in full
accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations.
13. All slot diffusers shall be performance tested with air plenums as a composite
assembly in full accordance with ASHRAE, and/or ARI standards. The
contractor shall provide for a visit by the engineer to the product testing
laboratory to verify performance data and testing procedures. All cost
associated thereto shall be provided at the expense of the contractor.
14. Diffusers shall be selected to achieve a throw to room length ratio which
meets the requirements of the ASHRAE 2001 Fundamentals Handbook,
23 33 00
Chapter 32, Table 4, at both maximum design flow rate, and for VAV
systems, at the minimum flow rate expected during partial occupancy.
Diffusers shall be selected to achieve a minimum of 70 percent ADPI over
the range of expected loads in the space. The diffusers’ reported
performance shall be based on tests conducted in accordance with
ASHRAE Standard 70–91. ADPI performance on at least one unit size of the
selected diffuser shall have been tested in accordance with ASHRAE
Standard 113–90, to validate conformance and applicability to the ASHRAE
table.
2.10.6 Outside Air Louvres:

1. The outside air louvres shall be constructed out of extruded aluminium
alloy finished with polyester powder coating. The louvres shall be similar to
'Air Guide' type OL-4-Flange-K or Euro Register – 600 Series – AG 639 or
approved equal.
2. Wherever louvres are installed within the building and aesthetics is the
main criteria, the louvres shall be similar to 'Air Guide' type OL-2-Flange "J"
or approved equal.
3. The blade configuration shall be such that as to help turn back driving rain
and the material shall be storm and rain resistant. The louvres shall be
provided with expanded aluminium bird screen installed directly to the
rear of louvre with sheet metal screws and shall be field removable type.
The screen shall have 12mm x 20mm diamond shaped pattern. All the air
louvers shall be polyester powder coated to color and finish as per RAL
color number approved by Architects/Engineers in charge. The louvers
shall be AMCA certified
2.10.7 Fresh Air Intake:
1. The fresh air intake shall be fitted with external louvers, sand trap
louvers, opposed blade volume control damper, aluminium insect
wire mesh and bird screen and 25 mm thick filter as indicated on the
drawings.
2. Filter media thickness shall not be less than 45 mm and shall be

washable metallic filter.
3. Louvers shall be stationary weather louvers with extruded aluminium

frame and with aluminium blades of not less than 2 mm thick.
Louvers shall have powder coated finish as approved by Architect.
4. Sand louvers shall have double deflection sand passage with

separation efficiency of not less than 80% on 20-200 micron test dust
and 50% on 1-70 micron test dust.
5. Sand louvers shall be of aluminium sections with 2 mm thick casing

and 1.6 mm thick blades. The base of the louver shall have self-
emptying sand holes. Where exposed to view, Sand trap louvers
shall have powder coated finish & color as per Architect
/Engineer’s approval. The louvers shall be AMCA certified.
23 33 00
2.11 Sound Attenuation
2.11.1 Sound Attenuators for Package AC unit, AHU’s, TFAHU and exhaust fans
1. The supply air/return air ductworks shall be attenuated to limit the

noise level to the values specified in the design criteria. The
method of fabrication and supporting ducts should be such as to
avoid generation of noise because of air movements or drumming of
sheet metal.
2. The silencers shall be provided in the supply air/return air ducts as

shown on tender drawings. The silencers shall be constructed and
tested according to BS 4718 for dynamic insertion loss; self generated
noise and aerodynamic performance.
3. The silencers shall be complete with flanges to facilitate their removal

for inspection externally; the silencers shall be insulated in the same
manner as the adjoining air ducting.
4. The contractor shall carry out sound absorption calculations with

respect to the characteristics and the duct system to ensure the
proper selection of silencers. Submit the calculation for review and
approval.
2.11.2 Acoustic Liner
Refer Section 23 07 13 INSULATION
2.11.3 Smooth Elastomeric Sound Insulation Panels:
The contractor shall provide acoustic box around the fan coil unit in
ceiling voids made of 20 mm marine plywood lined with 13 mm smooth
elastomeric sound insulation panel coupled with a high density of
elastomeric sheet, heavy class) fire classification to BS 476 part 6 and 7,
similar to K Fonik ST GK 072 from K Flex or equal and approved to prevent
any noise breakout from the equipment. The Box shall be all around such
that the unit is enclosed and isolated from adjoining spaces (on all side
and bottom). Suitable access shall be provided in the boxing for
maintenance with all required support arrangement from the slab shall be
provided for a sturdy installation. The partition along the zone boundary of
the units shall be raised till the under surface of the slab to separate zones.
The return air shall be through elbow piece lined acoustically with 12 mm,
48 kg/cum density acoustic insulation with woven fabric fiber.
2.12 Hangers and Supports
2.12.1 General
a) Threaded rods hangers shall be electro-zinc coated.

b) With a proprietary device, it shall be the responsibility of the
Works.
Contractor to ensure that the device meets the requirements, with
sufficient margin of overload and that it is installed in accordance with
the manufacturers recommendations
23 33 00
2.12.2 Horizontal Ductwork
a) The choice of the lower support shall be dictated by the actual duct
section.
b) Duct shall be supported by means of U channels and angle profiles.
Ducts supported on the roof shall be rigidly supported by means of
concrete piers or plinth laid on the waterproof complex.
c) All structural support profiles and plates shall be hot dip galvanized
50 microns minimum to BS 729, plus an approved anti-rust grey paint
suitable for exposed atmospheric conditions.
2.12.3 Vertical Ducts
a) The design of support for vertical ducts is dictated by site conditions,

and they are often located to concise with the individual floor slabs.
b) Vertical ducts should be supported from the stiffening angle of the
angle frame, or by separate supporting angles fixed on the duct.
c) Air duct passing through roof shall be suitably weatherproofed.
2.12.4 Heavy Loading
Wherever heavy equipment is to be applied to the duct work, supports

shall be designed to suit the conditions.
2.13 Protective finishes
2.13.1 Metal Spraying
Zinc or aluminum spraying shall be to BS 2569 Part 1 (1964) and used only
for remedial works.
2.13.2 Paints
a) Surface preparation and Paint application
Surface preparation of the metal and paint application shall be in
accordance with the paint manufacturers recommendations.
b) Making Good Welding Damage
Galvanizing or other metallic zinc finish damaged by welding shall be
suitably cleaned and painted with two coat of zinc-rich or aluminium
paint.
c) Ducts made from Galvanized Sheet or Coil
Ducts made from conventional sheet or coil, do not require further
protection when located inside buildings. When located outside the
building, one coat of each primer or one coat of calcium plum bate
primer shall be applied together with a suitable finishing coat.
d) Supporting Members
Supporting members made of hot dip galvanized steel 50 microns to
BS729
e) External Equipments etc.
All external equipment, ductwork, support frames and brackets are
to be finished with one undercoat and one top coat.
23 33 00
2.14 Structural Penetration and Waterproofing
1. All duct penetrations of walls; floor and roofs shall be provided with
sleeves of length equal to the full thickness of the structure. In concrete
walls or slabs, the sleeves shall be galvanized steel of minimum thickness
1.0 mm. In block walls, the openings larger than a hollow block shall be
supported by a lintel
2. Each sleeve shall be sized to allow a 22 mm clearance around the duct

and any required insulation/finish. It shall be built into the
structure using mortar. Subsequently the gap between the
duct/insulation and sleeve shall be sealed with mastic.
3. All ducts passing through a roof construction shall be suitably weather

proofed.
2.15 Connections to Builder’s Work
1. All joints between mating flanges, companion rings and wooden

frames shall be fitted with sealing gaskets.
2. Where ductwork is connected to outside louvers, the bottom inside

portion of the ductwork should be sloped to drain outside. The inside
surfaces of the duct shall also be treated for external exposure for a
distance equal to the height of the louver connection, or to the nearest
plant item.
2.16 Miscellaneous For Duct Work:

1. All duct work shall be provided with supports and hangers as
recommended by specification DW 144.
2. In general all grilles / diffusers / louvres etc., installed within the building shall
be white polyester powder coated. Architect’s/ID’s approval on this
matter shall be sought before ordering out these items.
3. Duct attenuators shall be installed on supply and return ducts emerging
from air handling unit rooms. The Contractor shall submit calculation for
required insertion loss from attenuator and size attenuators accordingly, to
achieve less than NC 30 level in all rooms around the AHU Room. The
attenuator length shall not be less than 1200 mm. The attenuators shall
also be installed on the axial flow fans for continuous operation.
4. All grilles / diffusers / louvres etc., provided on the exterior of the building
shall be polyester powder coated to RAL color specified by architects.
Architect's / ID’s approval on this matter shall be sought before ordering
out these items.
5. All the accessories such as louvres, dampers, diffusers, grilles etc., shall be
provided with wall/duct mounting frame, gaskets, nut bolts, screws etc., to
complete the installation.
6. Duct work and related outlets and inlets in all areas where false ceilings
are provided, shall be selected to suit the interior design schemes.
7. The duct mounted and side wall type grilles in masonry wall shall be of
horizontal face bar and vertical rear bar and shall be powder coated to
match the wall/room finish, as per Architect’s approval.
8. The classification of ductwork for various locations/installations shall be as
follows:
9. Low Pressure Class 'A':
23 33 00
10. For ventilation of toilet and pantries, supply air ducting from re circulating
type air handling units, supply air duct of chilled water fan coil units, supply
air ductwork on the downstream of variable air volume units.
11. Medium Pressure Class ‘B’:
12. For treated fresh air supply air duct from all Air Handling Units up to the
construct volume air units, on each floor.
13. For re circulating type Air Handling Units serving ground floor and
mezzanine floor shall have variable air volume units.
2.17 Stainless Steel Ducting for Grease and Vapor Conducting Ducts:
2.17.1 All duct for conveying grease and moisture laden vapours shall be stainless steel
Type 304 of minimum thickness of 1.02 mm and fire rated in accordance with DW
171
2.17.2 Install ducts without dips or traps that may collect residues unless traps have
continuous residue removal.
2.17.3 Adequately sized cleaning doors should be provided, regardless of whether
grease filters are fixed at the entry points, so that access for interior cleaning is
possible at intervals of not more than 3.0m.
2.17.4 Volume control damper frame, and blades shall be fabricated from stainless steel
Type 304.
2.17.5 The operating mechanism of the volume control dampers shall be outside the air
stream and shall be capable of withstanding higher air temperatures associated
with kitchen / laundry extract system.
2.17.6 Precautions must be taken against possible leakage of condensate and/or
grease from the ducts by avoiding longitudinal seams along the bottom face, and
employing suitable gasket material at the joints between sections.
2.17.7 The ducts shall be fixed with a slight fall, preferably in the direction of air flow, and
at low points such as at the bottom of risers there should be plugged drainage
points suitable with necessary MS piping to nearest GT.
2.17.8 Thermal Insulation of 25 mm, 48 Kg/cm2 density shall be applied on all kitchen and
laundry extract ducts.
2.18 Grease Hood Exhaust Ducts:

2.18.1 All duct for conveying grease and moisture laden vapours shall be stainless steel
171
2.18.2 Continuous liquid tight welds on external surface.
2.18.3 Access door at every change in direction and at every 3 mtrs intervals for
horizontal & vertical duct runs.
2.18.4 Access door shall be grease tight, hinged and self closing. Gasket shall be suitable
for higher temperature application associated with kitchen extract system.
2.18.5 Mount access door a minimum of 40 mm above from underside of the duct.
2.18.6 Fasteners for access doors shall not penetrate ductwork for horizontal duct runs.
2.18.7 Label each access door equal “Access Panel Do Not Obstruct”.
2.18.8 Slope duct work ¼” per foot back to the grease hood. Do not create any low
spots in ductwork.
23 33 00
2.18.9 Provide 150 mm to 300 minimum clearances from shaft / walls.

2.18.10 Support duct such that hangers and attachments can support weight of ducts as
outlined in the DW144, unless noted otherwise.
2.18.11 Provide 450 mm clearance to combustible materials and coordinate with all
services such that a minimum of 100 mm clearance is provided between duct
work and limited combustible materials such as gypsum board, fiber glass
insulation, etc
2.19 Dish washer and Pot wash Hood Exhaust Ducts:

2.19.1 All duct for conveying grease and moisture laden vapors shall be stainless steel
171
2.19.2 Weld all seams and joints. Site welds cross joints particularly across the bottom and
for 40 mm up each side.
2.19.3 Duct work shall be installed with a fall back to the hoods.
2.19.4 Thermal Insulation of 25 mm, 48 kg/cm2 density shall be applied to minimize
condensation.
2.19.5 Cleaning doors are to be from the sides of ductwork and not form underside.
2.20 Wet Air / Laundry Dryer Exhaust Ducts:

2.20.1 Duct material shall be of stainless steel sheet type 304 not lighter than 1.02 mm
sheet thickness
2.20.2 All seams and joints shall be continuously welded externally with 304L welding rod
and ground smooth. Spiral pipe is not acceptable. Butt weld all connections.
2.20.3 Duct material shall not be connected or installed with sheet metal screws or other
fasteners that will obstruct the exhaust flow
2.20.4 Male ends of ducts at overlapped duct joints shall extend in the direction of
airflow.
2.20.5 Where ducts are not self draining back to the equipment, provide low point drain
pocket with polypropylene drain pipe to sanitary sewer. Drain pocket is not to
accumulate more than one gallon.
2.20.6 Provide access door or panel for duct cleaning inside of horizontal ducts at drain
pockets at 3 mtrs intervals and at each change of direction including on vertical
risers.
2.20.7 Access door shall be grease tight, hinged and self closing. Gasket shall be suitable
for higher temperature application associated with laundry extract system
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 General
The Contractor shall ensure that the individual components in the installation
are compatible and allow for all necessary items required for the inter-
connection of the components to complete the installation.
3.2 Ductwork generally

1. All ductwork and plant to be rigidly supported to prevent sagging and
vibration by means of purpose made hangers, cantilever or pedestal
23 33 00
supports. All supports to be adequate for the loads imposed. Brackets in

contact with ducting to be lined with 6mm latex rubber.
2. Ductwork to be manufactured and installed by a specialist firm in this
particular trade. Workshop detail drawings of all ductwork including the
type and location of supports to be prepared and submitted to the
Engineer for approval before manufacture is commenced. The duct runs
are shown as accurately as possible on the plans but the Contractor is to
allow for setting round piers and other obstructions or for minor
modifications required by the Engineer to circumvent site difficulties which
are not obvious from the drawings.
3. Dampers to be provided where shown on the drawings and also wherever
required to facilitate proper balancing.
4. Note that equipment items shown on the drawings are not necessarily
drawn precisely to scale and the Contractor is required to check
dimensions of proposed equipment and to provide all necessary
transitions between duct size and equipment size.
5. Access and cleaning doors to be provided in convenient positions for
access not more than 6m apart and in accordance with the following:
• At each side of all cooling coils for the purpose of inspection and
cleaning.
• At each side of all filters if required for ease of access for removal and
maintenance.
• At each side of all attenuators.
• At each air flow sensor position.
• At one side of all dampers.
• As required for access to working parts and replacement of thermal link
in fire dampers.
• At the base of riser ducts.
6. Open ends of ducts to be covered and protected during erection to
prevent ingress of dirt and rubbish. Each range of ductwork to be
cleaned out during the process of the contract.
7. Ductwork is not to come in direct contact with the building except in the
case of fire dampers and purpose-made builder frames. Where ductwork
passes through a wall, roof, floor etc., a galvanized sleeve of adequate
clearance to be provided packed with slag wool to prevent air
movement and transmission of noise or vibrations.
23 33 00
23 34 00 - Ventilation Equipment
PART 1 - GENERAL

Supplementary Conditions apply to this Section.
B. This section on Ventilation Fans is to be read in conjunction with the following

sections:
Number Description
230713 INSULATION
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Axial fans.
2. Centrifugal fans.
3. Roof ventilators.
4. Up blast propeller roof exhaust fans.
5. Centrifugal ventilators.
6. In-line centrifugal fans.
7. Propeller fans.
8. Air Curtain.
9. Ecology Units
A. Operating Limits: Classify according to AMCA 99.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Include rated capacities, furnished specialties, and accessories for
each type of product indicated and include the following:
1. Certified fan performance curves with system operating conditions indicated.

2. Certified fan sound-power ratings.
23 34 00
3. Motor ratings and electrical characteristics, plus motor and electrical

accessories.
4. Material thickness and finishes, including color charts.
5. Dampers, including housings, linkages, and operators.
6. Fan speed controllers.
7. Roof curbs.
B. Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights,

loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location

2. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work
3. Design Calculations: Calculate requirements for selecting vibration isolators
and seismic restraints and for designing vibration isolation bases.
4. Vibration Isolation Base Details: Detail fabrication, including anchorages and
attachments to structure and to supported equipment. Include auxiliary
motor slides and rails, and base weights.
C. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans and other details, drawn to scale,
on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, based on
input from installers of the items involved:
1. Roof framing and support members relative to duct penetrations.

2. Ceiling suspension assembly members.
3. Size and location of initial access modules for acoustical tile.
4. Ceiling-mounted items including light fixtures, diffusers, grilles, speakers,
sprinklers, access panels, and special moldings.
D. Field quality-control test reports.
E. Operation and Maintenance Data: For power ventilators to include in emergency,

F. Delegated Design: Contractor shall carry out complete CFD analysis of the carpark
exhaust system and allow for any modification required over and above the details
that are shown on the drawings. Contractor shall submit the results of the CFD
analysis. Contractor shall demonstrate the performance of the system to Civil
defense an obtain approval on the performance.
G. ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1-2007 Compliance: Provide compliance form as per applicable

B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in

23 34 00
C. AMCA Compliance: Products shall comply with performance requirements and

shall be licensed to use the AMCA-Certified Ratings Seal.
D. NEMA Compliance: Motors and electrical accessories shall comply with NEMA
standards.
E. UL Standard: Power ventilators shall comply with UL 705.
F. Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of air curtains and are
based on the specific product indicated. Refer to Division 01 Section "Product
Requirements."
G. Comply with AMCA 220, "Test Methods for Air Curtain Units," for airflow, outlet
velocity, and power consumption.
H. Comply with NSF 37, "Air Curtains for Entranceways in Food and Food Service
Establishments."
I. The Ecology unit precipitator shall conform to the IMC, NFPA 96 and be listed to the
following standards - UL 867 Safety Standards for Electrostatic Precipitators, and
ANSI/UL 710 Exhaust Hoods for Commercial Cooking Equipment
A. Deliver fans as factory-assembled units, to the extent allowable by shipping

limitations, with protective crating and covering.
B. Disassemble and reassemble units, as required for moving to final locations,
according to manufacturer's written instructions.
C. Lift and support units with manufacturer's designated lifting or supporting points.
1.7 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate size and location of structural-steel support members.

B. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases.
Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 03.
C. Coordinate installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations.
These items are specified in Division 07 Section "Roof Accessories."
D. Coordinate layout and installation of air curtains and suspension system
components with other construction, including light fixtures, fire-suppression-system
components, and partition assemblies.
E. Coordinate installation of wall penetrations and louvers.
1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS
contents.
1. Belts: Furnish TWENTY percent of spare fan belts for each type of belt installed.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide

products by one of the manufacturers whose equipment must have been used in
23 34 00
the Kingdom in last 5-10 years. All the fans for smoke extract system, jet fans, make
up air fan for smoke extract, stairwell pressurization fans shall have local CD&FSD
approvals
2.2 AXIAL FANS
A. Description: Fan wheel and housing, factory-mounted motor with belt drive or
direct drive, an inlet cone section, and accessories. Fans shall be selected for 400oC
for 2hours duty conditions.
B. Housings: Casings are manufactured from mild steel to BSEN 10111 Grade DD14.
Casing and flanges will have a thickness of 3 mm up to and including 630mm in
diameter. Casings are of the long type, enclosing the entire length of the impeller
and motor assembly and are complete with an inspection port closed with a rubber
molding. A steel closing plate shall be used for Emergency High Temperature
applications above 200°C. Casing Finish shall be Hot dip galvanized after
manufacture to BSENISO1461.
C. Impeller: Cast or extruded aluminum LM 13 with airfoil-shaped blades mounted on

cast-iron wheel plate keyed to shaft with solid-steel key.
1. Blade Design: High Twist Aerofoil section blades

2. Hub Design: Aluminum hub and clamp plate, with integral steel shaft insert to
ensure correct motor drive shaft fit. Hub design shall allow for each blade pitch
angle to be individually adjusted.
3. All die cast impeller components shall be examined using real time X-ray
radiography (in accordance with ASTM E-155) before machining.
4. Balance: In accordance with BS 848-7 / ISO 14694, Grade G16 to G6.3.
5. Form of Running: Form B: Airflow through impeller then over the motor (as
standard)
6. Impeller location and fixing: Impeller shall be located and fixed to the motor
drive shaft by a key and keyway manufactured in accordance with BS
4235:1972. Axial location shall be provided by a collar or shoulder on the drive
shaft together with a retaining washer and screw, fitted into a tapped hole in
the end of the shaft. The screw is locked in position
D. Drives: Factory mounted, with final alignment and belt adjustment made after
installation.
1. Service Factor Based on Fan Motor Size: 1.2

2. Fan Shaft: Turned, ground, and polished steel designed to operate at no
more than 70 percent of first critical speed at top of fan's speed range.
3. Fan Pulleys: Cast iron with split, tapered bushing; dynamically balanced at
factory.
4. Motor Pulleys: Adjustable pitch for use with motors through 5 hp; fixed pitch
for use with larger motors. Select pulley so pitch adjustment is at the middle of
adjustment range at fan design conditions.
5. Belts: Oil resistant, non sparking, and non static; matched sets for multiple belt
drives.
6. Belt Guards: Fabricate of steel for motors mounted on outside of fan cabinet.
7. Motor Mount: Adjustable base.
23 34 00
8. Shaft Bearings: Either ball or roller type bearing with an L10 design life of at
least 20,000 hours when calculated using ISO 281 for rated fan duty.
Extend lubrication lines to outside of casing and terminate with grease fittings.
E. Accessories:
1. Companion Flanges: Rolled flanges of same material as housing.

2. Inspection Door: Bolted door allowing limited access to internal parts of fan,
of same material as housing.
3. Propeller Access Section Door: Short duct section bolted to fan inlet/ outlet
allowing access to internal parts of fan for inspection and cleaning, of same
material as housing.
4. Swing out Construction: Assembly allowing entire fan section to swing out
from duct for cleaning and servicing, of same material as housing.
5. Mounting Clips: Fans shall be provided with attachable feet, suitable for
horizontal or vertical mounting, fabricated from mild steel to BSEN 10111
Grade DD14, up to 8mm thick. Feet shall be hot dip galvanized in
accordance with BSENISO 1461 after manufacture.
6. Inlet and Outlet Screens: Wire-mesh screen on fans not connected to
ductwork, of same material as housing.
7. Back draft Dampers: Butterfly style, for bolting to the discharge of fan or outlet
cone, of same material as housing.
8. Shaft Seal: Elastomeric seal and Teflon wear plate, suitable for up to 400
deg F (149 deg C).
9. Motor Cover: Cover with side vents to dissipate motor heat, of same material
as housing.
10. Inlet Vanes: Adjustable; with peripheral control linkage operated from outside
of airstream, bronze sleeve bearings on each end of vane support, and
provision for manual or automatic operation of same material as housing.
11. Inlet Bell: Curved inlet for when fan is not attached to duct, of same material
as housing.
12. Inlet Cones: Round-to-round transition of same material as housing.
13. Outlet Cones: Round-to-round transition of same material as housing.
14. Stack Cap: Vertical discharge assembly with back draft dampers, of same
material as housing.
Flexible Connectors: Flexible connectors can be provided where requested
and are fabricated from silicon coated glass fibre fabric. The materials shall
withstand temperatures up to 400°C/2hrs and be flame resistant, conforming
to BS 476-7. Flexible connectors shall be fitted using stainless steel worm drive
clips.
F. Motors: Fan motors are of the totally enclosed, squirrel cage induction, continuous
duty variable torque type.
1. Motor insulation: The minimum insulation standard (for standard temperature
fans) is Class "F". High temperature fans designed for Smoke Extraction have a
minimum insulation standard of Class "H". When operating under the smoke
condition the motor temperature rise shall be in accordance with EN 60034-1,
or EN 12101-3 in cases of High Temperature applications.
2. Motor output ratings: Motor outputs are airstream rated (based on insulation
class), unless otherwise agreed. Performance shall be in accordance with
BSEN 60034-1.
3. Motor Finish: Aluminum self-finish or Cast iron painted to motor manufacturers
specification.
4. Ingress Protection: IP55 with drain plug fitted.
23 34 00
5. Terminal Boxes: All terminal boxes shall have the same level of protection as
the motor.
6. Motor Speed Control: Speed Control: All fans shall be provided with variable
speed controller to vari the air flow in proportion to the CO / NOx levels. All
variable speed controllers shall be UL listed
G. Factory Finishes:
1. Sheet Metal Parts: Prime coat before final assembly.

2. Exterior Surfaces: Baked-enamel finish coat after assembly.
3. Coatings: Powder-baked enamel.
a. Apply to finished housings.

b. Apply to fan wheels.
4. Vibration Isolators: Restrained spring isolators having a static deflection of 1

inch (25 mm).
2.3 JET FANS

Motor
Material: Cast Iron
Mounting: Pad Mounted
Ingress Protection: IP55
Bearings: Sealed for Life
Operating Range: +50°C Continuous
High Temperature: F400 2hrs
Insulation: Class H
Lubrication: Krytox GPL266
Supply: 380-420 V, 50Hz, Three Phase Ratings shall Comply With BS5000 and IEC
60034-1
1. Motor Speed Control: All fans shall be provided with variable speed controller
to vari the air flow in proportion to the CO / NOx levels. All variable speed
controllers shall be UL listed
2. Impellers
Form of Running: Form B (Forward)
Material: Aluminum
Manufacture: Precision die-cast hub and clamp-plate with equally spaced,
fully adjustable high pressure die cast aerofoil section blades.
Balance: Impellers balanced to ISO 14694: 2003, Category BV-3, Grade
G6-3.
Operation: Corrosive Resistant and suitable for continuous outdoor use.
Jet fan impellers shall have an aerodynamic section blade to optimize the
efficiency of the performance.
The impellers in shall, allow high aerodynamic and acoustic performance
whether in forward or reverse operation.
3. Accessories
Provide sound attenuators on inlet and outlet of the fans.
Provide guide vanes for directional adjustment for the jet fans.
23 34 00
4. Finish
Motors: Cast iron self finish or painted to motor manufacturers
specification.
Silencers: Pre-Galvanized sheet steel grade Z2 G275N
Fan castings, motor mounting arms, mounting feet, airflow deflectors and
guards shall be hot dipped galvanized after manufacture (in accordance
with BS EN ISO 1461: 1999)
5. TEST METHODS
Testing: The air performance data has been measured by the latest version
of British and International Standards: - ISO 13350: 1999 Industrial Fans
Performance Testing of Jet Fans
6. HT Certification: The induction fans are high temperature certified to the latest
European standard EN12101-3 and are CE compliant.
2..3.1 Sensors
A. Nitrogen Dioxide (NO2) Gas Detector
Gas type: Nitrogen Dioxide (NO2)
Detector: element Electrochemical
Output: 4-20 mA or 2-10 Vdc
Power supply: 24 Vdc
Ranges: 0-30 ppm
IP65 enclosure with quick locking screws
Digital measurement value processing incl. temperature compensation
Internal function control with integrated hardware watchdog
Data / measured values in micro controller of sensor unit, therefore simple exchange
calibrated
Hardware & software according to SIL2 compliant development process
Easy maintenance and calibration by exchange of the sensor unit or by comfortable on-
site calibration
Duct mounting set available for sensing Nitrogen Dioxide (NO2) gas in ventilation ducts.
Power supply: 16 -29 Vdc, reverse-polarity protect
Power consumption: 50 mA, max. (1.7VA for 24V)
Analog output: signal Proportional, overload and short-circuit proof,

load ≤ 500 Ohm for current signal,
≥ 10kΩ for voltage signal
4-20 mA or 2-10V = measuring range
3.2 <4 mA or 1.6-2V = under range
23 34 00
>20-21.6 mA or 10-10.8V = over range

2.5 mA or 1.25V = fault
>21.8 mA or 10.9V = fault high
Detector coverage: 400 m2 garage application minimum. Actual nos to be

determined by manufacturers requirements
Accuracy: ±0.5 ppm
Resolution: 2 ppm
Repeatability: < ± % sig. 2
t90 Time
(time allowed for sensor
to detect 90% of existing
gas conc.): ≤ 25 secs.
Zero-point variation: ±0.2 ppm
Drift (zero): <1 % signal/month
Drift (Gain): <2 % signal/month
Temperature range: -20°C to +50°C
Humidity range, non-condensing: 15 to 95% r.H.
Sensor life time: 24 months
Relative gas density: 1.59 (Air = 1)
Mounting height: 0.2 meter above floor
Storage temperature: 5°C to 30°C
Calibration interval*: 12 months
Pressure range Atmospheric: ± 20 %
Storage time: 6 months
Enclosure Color: White
Dimensions: (W x H x D) 110 x 85 x 60 mm, excl. sensor unit and cable

gland
Weight: Ca. 0.2 kg
Protection class: IP 65 incl. gas sensor unit
Pre-embossed entries
for cable / sensor unit: PG 13.5
Conformity to: EN 50271

EN 601010-1
23 34 00
ANSI/UL 61010-1
CAN/CSA-C22.2 No.61010-1
B. Carbon Monoxide (CO) Gas Detector
Gas type: Carbon Monoxide (CO)
Detector element: Electrochemical
Output: 4-20 mA or 2-10 Vdc
Power supply: 24 Vdc
Ranges: 0-100 ppm or 0-300 ppm
IP65 enclosure with quick locking screws
Digital measurement value processing incl. temperature compensation
Power supply: 16 -29 Vdc, reverse-polarity protect
Power consumption: 50 mA, max. (1.7VA for 24V)
Analog output signal: Proportional, overload and short-circuit proof,

load ≤ 500 Ohm for current signal,
≥ 10kΩ for voltage signal
4-20 mA or 2-10V = measuring range
3.2 <4 mA or 1.6-2V = under range
>20-21.6 mA or 10-10.8V = over range
2.5 mA or 1.25V = fault
>21.8 mA or 10.9V = fault high
Detector coverage: 400 m2 garage application, as minimum. Actual numbers

to be as per manufacturers requirement.
Measuring range: See ordering codes
Accuracy: ±3 ppm
Resolution: 0.5 ppm
Repeatability: < ± % sig. 5
t90 Time (time allowed for

sensor to detect 90% of
existing gas conc.): ≤ 50 sec.
Zero-point variation: ±4 ppm
Drift (zero): <0.4 % signal/month
Drift (Gain): <0.4 % signal/month
Temperature range: -15°C to +50°C
23 34 00
Humidity range, non-condensing: 10 to 95% R.H

.
Sensor life time: 6 years
Relative gas density: 0.97 (Air = 1)
Mounting height: 1.5 - 1.8 m above floor
Storage temperature: 5°C to 30°C
Calibration Interval: 12 months
Pressure range Atmospheric: ± 20 %
Storage time: 6 months
Enclosure colour: White
Dimensions
(W x H x D): 110 x 85 x 60 mm, excl. sensor unit and cable gland
Weight: Ca. 0.2 kg
Protection class: IP 65 incl. gas sensor unit
Pre-embossed entries for

cable / sensor unit: PG 13.5
Conformity to: EN 50271

EN 601010-1
ANSI/UL 61010-1
CAN/CSA-C22.2 No.61010-1
2.4 JET FAN (INDUCTION TYPE)
1. Induction Fan shall be in compact casing with high efficiency radial fan
with revision switch.
2. Fans shall be with horizontal construction compact casing for thin ceiling
height.
3. All steel parts are made of galvanized steel, for best corrosion protection.
4. IEC standard motors, insulation class H, enclosure class IP55.
5. Induction fans shall be tested in accordance with EN 12101-3 and are CE

labeled and fans shall be variable outlet.
6. Motor shall be rated for F400 for 400°c/120min.
23 34 00
2.5 RADIAL FANS (SMOKE EXTRACT)
1. The casing and motor encapsulation shall be manufactured from seawater

resistant aluminium. The base frame and inlet nozzle made of pre-galvanized
steel, zinc-magnesium (ZM) coated. Impeller with backward curved blades is
manufactured from pre-galvanized steel (sizes 355, 450), respectively from
steel, welded and galvanized. Motor outside air stream is cooled with fresh air.
2. The smoke extract fan shall be of roof up blast, horizontal blowing, fire rated to
F 400 °C / 120 min, radial fans intended for the extraction of hot flue gases in
the case of fire as well as for the normal daily ventilation of medium with
temperature up to 120°c in continuous operation and up to 80°C in standstill.
3. The fan shall be with electroplated backward curved radial impeller made of
steel sheet, single inlet, with hub and secured bolted joint directly assembled
on the motor shaft. Impeller according. to VDI 2060, dynamically balanced
acc. to ISO 1940 T1, balancing quality Q 6.3, driven by an high efficiency
motor, insulation class F, enclosure class IP 55, suitable for connection to 3
phase, 380-415 v, 50 hz power supply.
4. Motor outside air stream shall be cooled with ambient air, thermal protection
of motor by EC controller, factory pre-set. IP 55 service switch serial outside on
the casing.
5. Fans shall be tested according to EN 12101-3. CE-certification according to EN

12101-3:2002-06,
6. Fans shall be supplied with Modbus/ backnet control; fire mode integrated
controller for interfacing provision with CO management system and building
fire alarm system.
2.6 AIR CURTAINS
A. Housing Materials: Galvanized steel with electro statically applied epoxy enamel
finish over powdered mirror.
B. Housing Materials: One-piece, molded, high-impact, white polymer material.
C. Housing Materials: Heavy-gage, electroplated-zinc steel with welded construction

and polyester-coated finish.
D. Housing Materials: Heavy-gage, aluminum construction.
1. Anodized Finish: Match finish and color of adjacent architectural metals.

Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal
Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
2. Finish designations prefixed by AA comply with the system established by the
Aluminum Association for designating aluminum finishes.
a. Class II, Clear Anodic Finish: AA-M12C22A31 (Mechanical Finish:

nonspecular as fabricated; Chemical Finish: etched, medium matte;
Anodic Coating: Architectural Class II, clear coating 0.010 mm or
thicker) complying with AAMA 611.
b. Class II, Color Anodic Finish: AA-M12C22A32/A34 (Mechanical Finish:
nonspecular as fabricated; Chemical Finish: etched, medium matte;
23 34 00
Anodic Coating: Architectural Class II, integrally colored or

electrolytically deposited color coating 0.010 mm or thicker).
3. Mounting Brackets: Steel, for wall/ ceiling mounting.
E. Intake Louvers: Integral part of the housing, mechanically field adjustable and
capable of reducing air-outlet velocity by 60 percent with louver in totally closed
position.
F. Fans: Galvanized steel/ Aluminum, Centrifugal, forward curved, double width,

double inlet, statically and dynamically balanced.
G. Fan Drives: Direct/ Belt, equipped with belt guards and adjustable sheaves and
pulleys for adjusting air-outlet velocity.
H. Motor Type: Two speed, resiliently mounted, continuous duty, totally enclosed, fan
cooled, with integral thermal-overload protection.
I. Bearings: Permanently sealed, life time, pre lubricated, ball bearings.
J. Disconnect: Internal power cord with plug and receptacle.
K. Automatic Door Switch: Plunger type installed in door area to activate air curtain
when door opens and to deactivate air curtain when door closes.
L. Start-Stop, Push-Button Switch: Manually activates and deactivates air curtain.
M. Time-Delay Relay: Factory installed and adjustable to allow air curtain to operate
from 0.5 seconds to 10 hours.
N. Motor-Control Panel: Complete with motor starter, 115-V ac transformer with

primary and secondary fuses, terminal strip, and NEMA 250, Type [1] [12] enclosure.
O. Mounting Brackets: Adjustable mounting brackets for drum-type roll-up doors.
2.7 DUCT MOUNTED INLINE TWIN FAN
1. Duct Mounted Units: Manufactured from pre-galvanized sheet steel, arranged

for horizontal air discharge.
2. Fans: The fans shall be double inlet, double width type using a backward
curve centrifugal impeller fitted within a scroll and either directly connected
or through a belt drive to their individual motors. Fan shall be selected such
that each of the two fans shall give 100% duty as per the specified
requirement
3. Motors: The motors shall be manufactured to BS5000. Fans driven by high

efficiency EC external rotor motors. Power electronics shall be integrated in
the motor housing, one potential-free terminal for error message, integrated
electronic motor protection, Speed control by a 0-10V signal. On direct driven
units anti-vibration mounts are fitted between the motor mounting arms and
impeller scroll. Overheat protection is a standard fitment to direct drive single
phase motors. Belt driven units have the mounts fitted between a common
fan base frame and the unit casing.
23 34 00
4. Electrical Supply: 220 - 240 V / 50 Hz /
5. Noise Levels: All units can either be acoustically lined to ensure the specified
sound levels in the occupied zones is achieved.
6. Control Unit
• Output 24V to the sensors, inputs are 0-10V from sensors
• Indicates fan run, fault and service requirements
• Can be integrated with a Building Management System (BMS)
• Remote monitoring availability e.g. BMS
• Varies fan performance in response to input signals
• Provides ventilation from maximum to trickle to stop
• Duty sharing and auto changeover facility
• Indicates total running time, to assist servicing
7. Fans shall be equipped with backward curved centrifugal impellers wired out
to an IP65 Terminal box.
2.8 ECOLOGY UNITS

The Ecology System shall be supplied complete with Filter Module, Odor Control
Module, Fan Module, and Control Panel. System mounting to be designed for;
Interior/Exterior, Suspended/Floor/Roof. The unit shall be ETL Listed.
Unit shall be complete with
• Weather Proof Insulation Package
• Rear Access Doors
• 24v Control Wiring
A. Filter Module
The unit casing shall be fully painted and be a double wall construction
reinforced and braced for maximum rigidity. Inner walls shall be 16-gauge liquid
tight welded and construction and outer walls shall be minimum 20-gauge steel.
Filter sections to be insulated with 38mm insulation to the requirements of
UL/ULC. The unit shall be complete with three stages of filtration.
1. The first stage filter shall be a 50mm deep pleated MERV 8 performance per
ASHRAE 52.2 and classified to UL900 standard. The filter clean resistance shall
not exceed 10mm of WC.
2. The second stage filter shall be a 375mm deep Multi- Pocket MERV 14
performance per ASHRAE 52.2 and classified to UL900 standard. The filter clean
resistance shall not exceed 25mm of WC and rated for at least 85% efficiency
at 0.4 microns.
3. The third stage filter shall be constructed from HEPA grade medium, 300mm
deep Mini-Pleat V-Bank MERV 16 performance per ASHRAE 52.2 and classified
to UL900 standard. The filter clean resistance shall not exceed 15mm of WC
efficiency of at least 95% at 0.4 microns.
4. A UL/ULC Listed fire damper actuated by fusible link (165°F UL / 286°F ULC) shall
be located at the outlet. This module to be complete with three pressure
switches to monitor the condition of each of the three stages of filtration, and
a fourth pressure switch to detect a lack of air pressure.
5. Hinged access doors shall be provided to allow easy access to the filters.
6. Unit shall be complete with
• Fire Suppression System
23 34 00
• Extra Set of Filters

• Inlet Plenum
• Missing Filter Pressure Switch
• Air Proving Switch
• Magnehelic Gauge (Visual Monitors)
B. Odor Control Module

1. The Odor Control Module shall consist of housing and a self-contained
odor reducing system. The housing shall be fully painted and be
constructed of 16 gauge (minimum) steel with all joints suitably reinforced
and braced for rigidity. The liquid spray odor reducing system shall
produce an atomized spray that permeates the filtered exhaust air to
attack and neutralize airborne odors. The system housing shall be
constructed of heavy steel with locking hinged access door and two
security bolts. The system shall be complete with an adjustable spray
nozzle, 5-gallon liquid reservoir. Timers mounted in the control panel to
switch on, off and cycle control to provide for infinite adjustment.
2. Carbon, Bonded, activated carbon panels shall be furnished to remove a
broad range of both base and acid gases. Panels are held in place by
gasketed, extruded aluminum tracks arranged in a V-bank configuration
• Extra Container of Odor Solution
• Low Level Odor Control Indicator Light
C. Fan Module
1. The fan housing shall be fully painted and be constructed from 16

gauge (minimum) steel with all joints suitably reinforced and braced for
rigidity. The fan shall be AMCA rated be a DWDI (double width, double
inlet), Class 2, backward inclined, with airfoil type blades and with non-
overloading
2. Characteristics. The complete fan assembly is statically and dynamically
balanced. The shaft is ground and polished steel. Bearings shall be pillow
block type with lubrication nipples.
• Acoustic Insulation Package
• Outlet Cowl
• Non Standard Voltage
• Single Phase Motor
• Internal Seismic Isolators
• Top Discharge
• Piggy Back Mount
• Variable Frequency Drive (VFD)
4. Drives shall be V belt or grip notch with capacity 25% greater than motor
horsepower. The fan and motor shall be mounted on a common base which
is spring vibration isolated from the fan housing. A fire stat shall be located
at the fan inlet to stop the fan on high air temperature. Hinged access doors
shall be provided to allow easy access to fan and motor. Units to be
23 34 00
complete with a 220 / 440 Volt 1 / 3 Phase Hz motor, motor starter complete
with electrical overloads and electrical disconnect switch.
D. Control Panel
1. The control panel shall be constructed from heavy gauge steel, be suitable for
surface mounting or remote mounting or recessed in the wall front locking
screws. Controls shall be complete with touch screen. Display will indicate
system operational status, condition of all three filter stages, percent (%) filter
loaded for each stage, lack of air pressure, fire condition and odor reducing
operation. Controls and interconnecting field wiring to be per the local codes.
2. Controls shall be suitable for sensing the section of hood in operation and
controlling the motorized damper of that section and module the fan speed
accordingly.
3. Units shall be with 4 pressure transducers, a microprocessor and VFD. The 4

Pressure Transducers will monitor the pressure drop across each filter as well as
pressure in the main duct to provide the status of each filter as a % loaded as
well as notify the operator with an early warning of when the filters need to be
replaced. On startup, the main pressure transducer is calibrated with the
Capture Jet Testing and Balancing Ports to design airflow. The setting will be
stored in the system memory and acts as the reference point for design
exhaust. The Microprocessor will read the signals from the pressure transducer
and controls the VFD to maintain constant airflow in the system regardless of
the filter conditions. The V.F.D. (Variable Frequency Drive) will controls the RPM
of the fan module based on the signal received from the microprocessor.
4. The units shall be manufactured by Halton USA
2.9 MOTORS
A. Enclosure Type: Totally enclosed, fan cooled.
A. Sound-Power Level Ratings: Comply with AMCA 301, "Methods for Calculating Fan
Sound Ratings from Laboratory Test Data." Factory test fans according to
AMCA 300, "Reverberant Room Method for Sound Testing of Fans." Label fans with
the AMCA-Certified Ratings Seal.
B. Fan Performance Ratings: Establish flow rate, pressure, power, air density, speed of
rotation, and efficiency by factory tests and ratings according to AMCA 210,
"Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Rating."
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas and conditions where equipment will be installed for compliance
with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting
performance.
23 34 00
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install fans level and plumb.
B. Support floor-mounting units using restrained spring isolators having a static

deflection of 25 mm.
1. Secure noise and vibration controls to concrete bases using anchor bolts cast
in concrete base.
C. Install floor-mounting units on concrete bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and

formwork requirements are specified in Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete."
D. Install floor-mounting units on concrete bases designed to withstand, without

damage to equipment, the seismic force required by authorities having jurisdiction.
Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 03
Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete."
E. Support suspended units from structure using threaded steel rods and spring hangers
with vertical-limit stops having a static deflection of 25 mm.
F. Install units with clearances for service and maintenance.
G. Label fans according to requirements.
H. Install air curtains with clearance for equipment service and maintenance.
3.3 CONNECTIONS
A. Duct installation and connection requirements are specified in other Division 23

Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of ducts and duct accessories.
Make final duct connections with flexible connectors. Flexible connectors are
specified in Division 23 Section "Air Duct Accessories."
B. Ground equipment according to Division 26 under "Grounding and Bonding for

C. Connect wiring according to Division 26 under "Low-Voltage Electrical Power

D. Install ducts adjacent to fans to allow service and maintenance.
E. Install line-sized piping from scroll drain connection, with trap with seal equal to 1.5
times specified static pressure, to nearest floor drain.
A. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports:
1. Verify that shipping, blocking, and bracing are removed.
23 34 00
2. Verify that unit is secure on mountings and supporting devices and that
connections to ducts and electrical components are complete. Verify that
proper thermal-overload protection is installed in motors, starters, and
disconnect switches.
3. Verify that cleaning and adjusting are complete.
4. Disconnect fan drive from motor, verify proper motor rotation direction, and
verify fan wheel free rotation and smooth bearing operation. Reconnect fan
drive system, align and adjust belts, and install belt guards.
5. Adjust belt tension.
6. Adjust damper linkages for proper damper operation.
7. Verify lubrication for bearings and other moving parts.
8. Verify that manual and automatic volume control and fire and smoke
dampers in connected ductwork systems are in fully open position.
9. Disable automatic temperature-control operators, energize motor and
confirm proper motor rotation and unit operation, adjust fan to indicated rpm,
and measure and record motor voltage and amperage.
10. Shut unit down and reconnect automatic temperature-control operators.
11. Refer to Division 23 Section "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC" for
testing, adjusting, and balancing procedures.
12. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.
B. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning
3.5 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust damper linkages for proper damper operation.
B. Adjust belt tension.
C. Lubricate bearings.
D. Refer to Division 23 Section "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC" for testing,
adjusting, and balancing procedures.
E. Adjust/ replace fan and motor pulleys as required to achieve design airflow.
F. Adjust discharge louver and dampers to regulate airflow.
G. Adjust air-directional vanes.
3.6 GENERAL
A. Installation and start-up of all equipment to be carried out only by qualified installer
and services mechanics. The manufacturers detailed instructions to be followed
and the actual start-up is only to be done under the supervision of a qualified
mechanic.
B. Wherever required, the Contractor shall liaise with local Fire Authorities (Civil Defense
and Fire Services Directorate - Protection and Prevention Section) and obtain their
approvals for shop drawings and various components forming part of complete
installation on 'STAIRWELL PRESSURIZATION / SMOKE EXTRACT / CAR PARK SMOKE
EXTRACT FANS' prior to commencement of work.
23 34 00
C. Smoke extract fans shall be long cased-axial flow type, suitable to withstand 400˚C
temperature. Casing shall be made of heavy gauge mild steel sheet, roll formed
and welded and hot dip galvanized to BS 729. Blades shall be of pressure die cast
aluminum to BS 1490 fully adjustable aerofoil type.
D. The Contractor shall ensure that the installation is inspected and tested during the
course of work as well as after completion - by the concerned authorities and
obtain their certificates as required.
3.7 DEMONSTRATION

personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain air curtains.
23 34 00
23 52 39 Fire Tube Boilers
SECTION 1
HOT WATER BOILERS, WATER HEATERS AND ACCESSORIES
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1. RELATED DOCUMENTS
Drawings and general provisions of the contract, including Conditions of Contract

and Division 1 Specification Sections apply to this section.
1.2. SECTION INCLUDES
A. Packaged Three Pass Reverse Flame Hot Water Boiler

B. Burner
C. Hydraulic Separator
D. High Capacity Water Heaters
E. Master control panel
F. Chimney
G. Manufacturer / Supplier
H. Installation at site
1.3. SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit the following according to Conditions of Contract and Division 1

Specifications Sections.
B. Product Data: Size, dimensions, capacity, pressure rating, accessories and special
features and operating characteristics of all equipments.
C. Shop Drawing: Detailed equipment assemblies indicating dimensions, required

clearances, method of field assembly, components and location and size of each
field connection.
D. Wiring Diagrams: Detailed wiring diagram for each item of equipment with electric
power supply. Include ladder type wiring diagrams for interlock and control wiring
required for final installation. Differentiate between portions of wiring that are factory
installed and portion that are field installed.
E. Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data and parts list for each boiler, control
and accessories, including “trouble shooting” maintenance guide. Include this data
and product data in maintenance manual in accordance with the requirements of
Division – 1.
1.4. QUALITY ASSURANCE
23 52 39
B. The boilers shall comply with CE certificate and with the following regulations (or
harmonized regulations): EN 60335-1, EN 303-1, pr EN 303-3
In accordance with the board’s regulations:

- Gas Directive 90/396/CEE
- Low Voltage Directive 73/23/CEE (modified by 93/68)
- Efficiency Directive 92/42/CEE
- EMC Directive 89/336/CEE
C. Manufacturer must be in possession of a valid ISO quality assurance certificate.
D. Boilers tested and rated according to the Testing and Rating Standard for Boilers and
shall be rated according to 92/42/CEE directives on efficiency.
E. The boiler shall be completely pre-assembled and tested at the factory. All controls
shall be tested and controls set as for normal operation.
F. Manufacturer’s Qualification: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of boilers or

types and capacities required whose products have been satisfactory used in similar
services for not less than 10 years.
1.5. COORDINATION
A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Concrete, reinforcement and

framework requirements are to be coordinated with respective civil work.
1.6. DELIVERY STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Product shall be delivered to site stored and protected under provisions of General
Conditions of Contract.
B. Factory packaged items shall be stored in shipping containers until time of installation.
1.7. SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Fully packaged three pass reverse flame hot water boilers will be installed in the boiler
room of the building along with Duplex St steel High Capacity Water Heaters and all
other specified related equipment to generate required temperature for the proper
operation of hot water supply for the equipments.
PART 2 – PRODUCT
A. HOT WATER BOILER
2.1 GENERAL
Supply, deliver and install where indicated of hot water boiler & burner package
automatic fully packaged, forced draft horizontal Three Pass Reverse Flame, fire tube
type hot water boiler designed and constructed in accordance with current edition
European Pressure Equipment Directive and comply with the requirements of the
latest Factories Act as well as the Health and Safety Executive Guidance Notes.
23 52 39
2.2 MANUFACTURERS
A. Ecotherm GmbH Austria

B. ICI Caldaie S.p.A Italy
C. HOVAL Switzerland
2.3 CHARACTERISTICS OF BOILER
The hot water boiler shall be completely factory assembled with all necessary
components, refractory, insulation, pipes and shall be on a heavy structure steel skids
base ready for installation and operation. The wiring between control components
and all safety devices shall be completed at the factory. Each unit shall have all
safety and operating controls adjusted, set and tested at the factory.
The boiler shall have a capacity as stated on the drawings and the following design /
working and test pressures:
Type Horizontal, forced draft, fire tube Packaged Three Pass Reverse Flame, LPG fired
packaged steel construction.
2.4 AREAS TO SERVE:
2.4a Main Building Domestic Water Heating,

2.4b. Kitchen & Laundry Domestic Hot water Supply
2.4c. Low Heat Service to HVAC System
2.4a. Main Building Domestic Water Heating
2.4a-1 LPG Fired Boilers
Tag No: BOI-B13 & B14 (one duty / one standby/assistant)

Installation Location: 1st Basement
Technical data per unit:

Rated heating capacity out: 750 kW
Rated heating capacity input: 813 kW
Boiler efficiency: 92.25 %
Width: 1296 mm
Depth: 2247 mm (without burner)
Height: 1510 mm
Weight: 1205 kg
Max. Operating pressure: 5 bar
Working temperature: 60 - 110°C
Chimney connection 350 mm
Insulation boiler body: 80 mm
Electrical 200 v/1PH/50 Hz
1) The boilers shall be high performance reverse flame hot water boilers designed for
gaseous and liquid fuel supply and shall combine excellent reliability and long-lasting
life with high thermal efficiency (>90%) fully meeting the requirements provided
92/42/CEE, directive on efficiency.
2) Product quality and reliability shall be guaranteed by ISO 9001 Quality Certification of
materials, components and processing precision, but also by correctly sizing thermal
loads according to the volume of the combustion chamber and the boiler transfer
surfaces. The design shall be well balanced to provide high performance with a focus
23 52 39
savings on fuel, low gas temperature and reduction of polluting emissions (CO and
NOx).
3) The boiler shell should be in RST37.2 DIN 17100 steel; all boiler components should be laser
cut for top precision semi-finished products; high ampere robotic welding machines should
be used to guarantee perfect welded material-to-sheet melting. ST37.0 DIN1629 steel flue
pipes should be inserted in AISI 304 stainless steel laminar turbulator to increase the
gas/water transfer factor and therefore generator efficiency.
4) The front tube shall be flanged towards the furnace thus enabling efficient
mechanical and thermal stress absorption.
5) The combustion chamber should be cylindrical with a fully wet back. A stay support is
to be welded between the bottom and the rear tube plate supports of the furnace.
6) In designing the boiler, special attention should be given to the problem of scaling.
Since this problem affects the areas in which temperature is higher, this risk should be
eliminated by removing all sources of overheating and by adopting a unique tube
and front plate that distribute the temperature evenly.
7) The boiler shall be fitted with special devices that reduce the risk of gas condense,
and Improve the working life of a generator. The design shall include a special system
that conveys internal hot water flows to protect the rear plate and tubes where the risk
of excessive gas cooling is the highest.
8) The inside of the manhole shall be made of ceramic fibre for high insulation and low
thermal inertia. This shall contribute to a higher seasonal efficiency of the plant. The
boiler has to be insulated with 80-mm high-density rock wool panels. Casing shall be
made of easy-to-mount steel panels and reduce heat dispersions by almost 1%.
9) The boiler above 1200 KW shall be lagged and clad with circular stucco aluminium
casings which are fitted at the factory.
10) The efficiency shall be guaranteed by the manufacturer to be not less than 90% over
the complete range. The efficiency shall be complete as per the EN Standards using
the lower calorific value (higher calorific value) efficiency values with the gross
calorific values shall not be considered.
11) The control panel supplied with the boilers is made of self-extinguishing plastic and
houses the regulation and safety instruments.
12) Control panel shall be complete with:
- 2 boiler control thermostats
- 2 safety limit thermostats – manual reset
- pump thermostat
- main switch
- pump on/off switch
- boiler thermometer
2.4a-2. Burner: Quantity – 2 Nos
LPG BURNER, modulating, Ecoflam Blue 1000.1 PAB TL, gas pressure 170-500mbar NOx
class 3 (NOx < 80 mg/kWh)
1. Complete with:
• Aluminium casing up to Blu 2000.1 and steel casing from 3000.1 with electrical panel
integrated on the burner (standard IP40). Version in loosen form or with remote switch
cabinet on request (IP54).
• New high efficiency fan ventilator designed to give flame stability and easy
matching.
• Adjustable combustion head for fine tuning / matching with different shapes of
combustion chamber.
• Easy maintenance of firing head from the burner top cover
23 52 39
• Low NOx version available in class 3 < 80mg/kWh and in class 2 < 120mg/kWh as per
EN676.
• Hi - Low version with easy and fast butterfly ratio system available from Blu 500.1 up to
Blu 2000.1.
• Progressive version with "mechanical movable head" with turndown 1: 5 (standard
turndown 1:3).
• Modulating version with PID system controller with digital set point display and real
time value
• (PID RWF 40 or LMV 51/52).
• Firing head with adjustable system for primary air that changes according to the
output required.
2. Flame surveillance
The burner shall be complete with QRA2 UV cell for flame surveillance.
3. Control Panel – Burner Mounted

Pre-wired control cabinet for all primary components. The cabinet houses the
• ignition unit,
• starter for FD fan
• PID RWF 40 or LMV 51/52 controls.
• All necessary relays and circuit breakers
• All wiring/wiring colours will be in accordance with BS: EN 60204-1-2006.
4. Multi block Gas Train - gas train constructed to BS EN 161 shall be supplied including:
• Main gas pipe
• Ball valve
• Antivibration coupling
• Gas governor
• Gas pressure switch
• Safety gas valve
• Working gas valve
• Leakage control
• Gas filter
• Actuator
5. Modulating control
Modulating control of the burner shall be by means of PID Controller which is a panel
mounted indicating controller with twin digital display showing set point and
measured boiler pressure or temperature.
Power – Min: 240 kW

Power – Max: 975 kW
Electric power: 1,1kW
2.4a-3 Expansion vessel: 1 nos. expansion vessel ~200ltr. for two boilers
2.4a-4 Circulating pumps for boilers: 2 nos. Grundfos circulating pumps between boiler and
hydraulic separator, 15m³@20m one pump for each boiler
2.4a-5 Pump mounted with accessories to complete pump group

incl. accessories like shut off valves, strainer and non return valves mounted with piping to
pump set
23 52 39
2.4a-6 Master Control Panel
1) Control Panel with microprocessor control with touch screen display for automatic
operation, automatic / manual control of all pumps, burners, calorifiers and boilers
and other devices. The complete 3D/2D visualisation of the system is displayed on a
touch control panel and guarantee a clear overview of the whole system.
2) Control equipment is designed to operate with ventilation cooling device.
Control and indicating equipment is mounted on the front of the enclosure.
Circuit protections are supplied for all controls, consequently an electrical fault has
not any influence on one or more units or systems.
3) The protection can be executed either by circuit breaker or by fuse. For servicing of
individual systems or control components, they can be disconnected separately. All
fuses and service adjustments are easily reachable without removing the equipment
from operation. Sources of electromagnetic disturbances will be separated from
sensitive equipment, if possible in a separate cabinet.
4) Service and operation local on control panel.
5) Compliance to following manufacturing standards: IEC Standards:
IEC60439 /IEC61439 (2014) Low voltage switchgear and control gear assemblies
EN60204, Earthing: EN50178 / IEC60364-4;
6) The equipment is designed for bottom cable entry with adequate space for cable
spreading and facilities for cable support.
7) Human-Machine Interface (HMI):
Fast, flexible and reliable communication with the control, other components, and
numerous interface connections by using of a touch control panel (high resolution TFT
colour display).
Customer specific front labels and button layouts allow individual configuration of the
terminal for easy handling and operation of the system.
8) Signals BMS:
All contacts are signalled free of potential to a separate terminal strip (disconnect
terminals). Contact details (voltage, current bearing capacity, make
contact/change over contact) corresponds to the technical specification.
9) One common alarm and operating signal is supplied generally.
Quantity: 1 nos.
Operating temperatures: +5°C … +35°C
Power supply: will be specified after PO
Nominal Voltage: acc. to customer
Frequency: acc. to customer
Humidity: acc. to customer
Sea height: acc. to customer
Protection Rating: EN60529: IP55 (NEMA12)
Colour: RAL7035
Doors: open angle >160°
Materials: Industrial Enclosures Rittal
VFD (Variable frequency drive): Vacon
PLC: Sigmatek
Overload switches, contactors: EATON
Disconnectors, circuit breakers: Schrack
Relays, timing relays: Tele
10) The materials are selected and designed for long lifetime, perfect continuous
operation of the system and optimum operator protection
23 52 39
2.04a-7 DOCUMENTATION
• CE Certificate of Conformity
• Burner User’s Manual
2.04a-8 HYDRAULIC SEPERATOR
Function
1) To optimise the variable volume flows, the hydraulic separator is required between
the heating boiler and heat exchangers cycle.
2) The hydraulic separator has to facilitate the water distribution, the differential pressure
maintenance and the constant regulation of the forward and return flow
temperature. The heating boilers will be uncoupled from the control cycles. The
hydraulic separator has the task of distributing and collecting the heating water flows,
however, it must not decrease the pressure. The planner and engineer must have
precise knowledge of the subject and design the hydraulic separator according to
system capacity.
3) The zero point of the heating system has to be located exactly at the centre (vertical)
of the hydraulic separator. Subsequently, different volumes shall flow during operation
without the various cycles being affected by one another hydraulically.
4) The hydraulic separator shall provide a sensible adjustment and distribution of
different volume flows. All control cycles shall be supplied with the required quantity
of water at all times.
2.04a-9 HIGH CAPACITY WATER HEATERS
MANUFACTURERS: Ecotherm Austria or approved equivalent
2.04a-9a Quantity: 6 nos.

Tag No: B21, B22, B23, B24, B25, B26.
B25 & B26 are combined with the Internal Solar Thermal HEX & External Boiler HEX.
Please see Solar Section.
1) General
High capacity external heat exchanger made completely of Duplex St steel / stainless
steel AISI 316 Ti, with free floating tabulator rods for performance enhancement and self
cleaning effect. Microprocessor system for exact control of hot water temperature –
heating with hot water from boiler, heat exchanger anti-fouling cycle, anti-legionella
cycle. Units completely pre-assembled and wired with all accessories acc
2) Quantity: 6 units complete with external heat exchanger-unit manufactured to

European industrial TÜV standard
3) Each unit consists of: Storage tank 10000 ltr with one external heat exchanger 250 kW
Microprocessor control
4) Rating per unit: 250 kW, 100000X litres storage capacity
5375 litres per hour continuous domestic hot water at 20°C  60°C
5) Storage Tank: 10000 litres storage capacity, stainless steel AISI 316 Ti or Duplex St
Steel, all joints welded front and back for smooth inside joint seams and maximum
corrosion resistance. Material: Stainless Steel AISI 316 Ti or Duplex St Steel.
6) Material: Stainless steel Duplex/316Ti
7) Dimensions: Diameter 2200 mm, height 4400 mm
vertical (incl. insulation, inspection flange)
8) Weight: Tank 1110 kg empty
9) Pressure: Operating pressure maximum 10 bar for storage tank / test pressure 13 bar
23 52 39
10) Welding quality:

- Automatic inert gas (front and back) welding for exact seams with constant
grain structure, free of oxidation pockets and highly resistant to corrosion.
- All finished products are submerged in pickling baths to give a smooth
surface finish and further enhancing resistance to corrosion and fouling.
- 100% full penetration welding
2.04a-9b. Anodes:
The storage tank shall be equipped with non-sacrificial titanium electric anodes. This
anode with its titanium oxide element remains permanently intact and should have
an unlimited lifespan. It shall not require replacement or maintenance. Once the
wires are connected correctly, the green light should indicate that effective corrosion
protection is activated. (A red light indicates that flow of current is not providing
protection.)
2.04a-9c Insulation:
Insulation shall be made of Polyester Fiber Fleece minimum 100 mm thick, all
connection openings shall be precise laser cut to reduce heat loss; the material shall
be flame retardant to DIN 4102-1 class 2. The insulation shall be enclosed in a Poly
propylene outer sheeting of 1.2 mm which shall have aluminum closure strip which
shall allow quick opening.
2.04a-9d Heat Exchanger:

1) Technical description: Stainless steel high capacity shell and tube heat exchanger
with free floating turbulator rods for increased performance and self cleaning
effect.
2) Material: Stainless Steel AISI 316 Ti
3) Welding quality: Automatic inert gas (front and back) welding for exact seams
with constant grain Structure, free of oxidation pockets and highly resistant to
corrosion.
4) All finished products are submerged in pickling baths to give a smooth surface
finish and further enhancing resistance to corrosion and fouling.
5) 100% full penetration welding
6) Burning protection: Steel sheet, 150 mm distance to heat exchanger
2.04a-9e Control panel:

1) Each high-capacity water heater shall be equipped with an efficient, easy to operate
control system to ensure permanent control and performance monitoring of hot water
output at all times. The control system shall constantly provide the operator with
information about the system’s operational status. An alarm shall be triggered if the
power transmission drops below the operating value due to fouling.
2) This microprocessor-based control system shall facilitate a large number of specific
and specialised applications and provide an optimum and reliable supply of freshly
heated potable water.
3) Flexible control facilities

Password-protected operating menus shall enable safe control of operation and
performance plus easy and flexible operation of the water heater.
4) Pumps, valves, sensors: The microprocessor control unit shall process information
received from the temperature sensors and calculates the hot water flow rate
required to meet the immediate demand. The Pumps and valves shall be controlled
accordingly.
23 52 39
5) Exact temperature control: The operator shall be able to set the hot water output and
the primary circuit temperatures on the front panel of the microprocessor control unit.
Continuous monitoring of the output and input temperatures on the secondary and
primary circuit shall guarantees exact hot water control under all operating conditions.
6) Performance logging: The microprocessor control unit shall constantly monitors the
operating parameters of the water heater and store them in memory for upload to
building management systems (BMS) via USB or Ethernet. Approximately 12 month of
operation shall be stored in memory, depending on the sampling rate set by the
operator.
7) Fuel saving program: The microprocessor control unit shall be programmable to

minimise the number of inefficient burner starts by preventing the burner from cycling
on and off during periods of low hot water demand. Cold water shall be heated at full
boiler capacity until the storage tank is full of hot water. The boiler shall then be
switched off and hot water shall be supplied solely by the storage tank. When most of
the hot water stored in the storage tank has been used up, the boiler shall restarts at
full capacity, refilling the storage tank with hot water. This method of operation shall
save fuel compared to non-microprocessor controlled water heaters.
8) It shall have function such as:

• Automatic boiler start (remote).
• 5inch graphic touch screen color display shows all operating functions.
• Anti-fouling high speed cold water cycle.
• Remote control via TCP/IP and web browser.
• download of control units internal performance monitoring log files for export to
spread sheet graphic software e.g. MS-Excel.
• Legionella cycle controller – Weekly electronic timer for the legionella Cycle, to
periodically raise the temperature of the hot water in the storage tank to 65°C for
short periods.
• Electric power: 650W per unit, 230 V ±5%, 50Hz
2.04a-9f. Accessories:
1) 4temperature sensors, motorised condensate control valve, adjustable safety
thermostat near T3 automatically disable microprocessor. Wired and pre-
assembled for easy installation. (Maximum ambient air temperature 40°C). dial
thermometer 100mm 0–120°C, pressure gauge 60mm 0–16bar, fitted inspection
flange cover 200/400 mm, built-in connections for optional heat exchanger
sludge flushing.
2) Dielectric isolator kits for piping connections & non-sacrificial electric anodes.
2.04a-9g Pre-assembled:
The above descripted elements: storage-tank, control panel and heat-exchanger
shall be delivered totally pre-assembled, complete with primary pumps, below sealed
stop valves, motor valve, non-return valve, dial thermometers, temperature sensors,
electric anodes (non sacrificial) and accessories, mounted and ready wired.
2.04a-9h Warranty:
5 years warranty against corrosion leakage on all stainless steel parts. All connections
to copper piping to be fitted with dielectric isolator kits & e-anodes operational at all
times. 1 year warranty on electrical and other parts.
2.04a-9i. Documentation: CAD technical drawings, parts list, start-up report.
23 52 39
2.04a-9j Laws & Standards:

TÜV certified welding and manufacturing facility
TÜV Bayern HP0-Certification in conjunction with DIN EN 729-3
Designed and produced acc. to European Pressure Vessel Directive 97/23/EC
Approved to SVGW, WEA Bern, DVGW
ISO 14001 Environment Management
Standard electrical testing of domestic appliances:
Radio interference suppression testing:
Low voltage standard: 73/23/EWG
EN60 204-1 electrical machine components
EMV standard 89/336/EWG
EN50081 EMV Radio frequency emissions
EN50082 EMV Interference suppression
2.04a-9k. Master control panel with touch Screen display: 1 no.

The Master control panel shall be min. 8,4” Touch screen display and manage the
complete Hot water-system, including Pumps, valves, heat exchanger for hot-water,
pressure transmitter, burner, chemical dosage and all other inputs and outputs shall
be connected with the master controller. The complete Visualisation of the system
shall be displayed on a Touch control panel and shall guarantee a clear overview of
the plant room.
General specification
1) Industrial standard metal basic control panel, IP 54 protection (dust, spray)
2) Mains power cut-off switch coupled to door lock
3) Power-On LED
4) Automatic electric cut-outs
5) Control Voltage for all components
6) Automatic turn-over of the pumps and burners in case of fault
7) Automatic interval changing of pumps and burners operation (duty/standby)
8) Auto-Off-Manual on the control Panel for each component
9) Alarm-List of all Faults with appeared-time and gone-time
10) All parameter are to be password protected against changes (three access
levels) and all parameters should have an adjustment range
11) All temperature sensors and transmitter should be displayed on the monitor, incl.
their set points and values
12) The hydraulic schematic shall be represented in the display, incl. operation and
fault of pumps, valves and burners
13) BMS connection (temperature sensors, operation signals, faults, alarms)
14) The Controller shall be equipped for remote maintenance, if connected to the
internet
15) Boiler low pressure switch
16) Boiler pump with fault signal
17) TR/STB Automatic temperature limiter 0-70°C with height limit switch at 90°C
18) Alarms for Boiler:
o Fault burner
o Fault high temperature STB (safety temperature limiter)
o Warning TR
o Fault boiler pump
23 52 39
o Fault pressure switch

o Sensor fault temperature transmitter boiler
2.04a-9l. Documentation: CAD technical drawings, parts list, start-up report.
2.04a-9m Laws & Standards:

2.04a-9n. CHIMNEY
Make: JEREMIAS GmbH Germany
Quantity: 1 no.
Chimney Type: dw-fu in stainless steel
Diameter: 350mm.
Insulation 32,5mm
Flue dampers for boiler,
Horizontal piping same as in the drawing.
Vertical piping 11m outside up to the top.
Material:Inside- SS1.4571, Outside-SS1.4301

Wall Thickness: Inside & Outside: 0.6mm
Certification: 0036 CPD 9174001
Calcification: T400-N1-D-V3-L50060-G50, T400-N1-W-V2-L50060-O20, T600-N1-D-V3-
L50060-G50, T600-N1-D-V2-L50060-O50,
1) The stack shall be supplied by the boiler manufacturer in sections complete with
rain-cap and hardware, with sizes and gauge steel as per his recommendations.
2) The stack sections shall be twin shell insulated stainless steel or as recommended
by manufacturer 316 L inside and outside.
3) The sections supplied loose shall be delivered with the necessary assembly
hardware, bolts, nuts and gaskets.
4) An inspection opening assembly complete with the relevant hardware shall be
supplied loose for field assembly and mounting.
5) A rain-cap assembly complete with the relevant hardware shall be supplied loose
for field assembly and mounting.
6) If guying is required for stack stability and wind effect, this will be done locally and
the section flange bolts shall be used as guy lines tie joints to suit local conditions.
END OF SECTION FOR MAIN BUILDING DWH
23 52 39
2.04b Kitchen & Laundry Domestic Hot water Supply
2.04b –1 LPG Fired Hot Water Boiler
Quantity: 2 units (one duty / one standby)

Tag No: BOI-B11 & B12

Rated heating capacity output. 350 kW
Rated heating capacity input. 379 kW
Width: 906 mm
Height: 1180 mm
Weight: 542 kg
Max. operating pressure: 5 bar
Insulation boiler body: 80 mm
Electrical 200 v/1PH/50 Hz
NOx).
cut for top precision semi-finished products; high ampere robotic welding machines
should be used to guarantee perfect welded material-to-sheet melting. ST37.0 DIN1629
steel flue pipes should be inserted in AISI 304 stainless steel laminar turbulator to increase
the gas/water transfer factor and therefore generator efficiency.
23 52 39
that conveys internal hot water flows to protect the rear plate and tubes where the
risk of excessive gas cooling is the highest.

- pump thermostat
- main switch
2.04b-2. Burner: Quantity – 2 Nos
LPG BURNER, modulating, Ecoflam Max Gas 500 PAB TL, gas pressure 52-360mbar,
NOx class 3 (NOx < 80 mg/kWh)
1) Complete with:
• High efficiency fan ventilation system (HPV) allowing easy matching with
boilers having high combustion chamber pressure
• Combustion head easy to assemble and adjust for fine set up
• Single bolt burner fixing with the possibility to firmly secure it to the flange in
three different positions for easy maintenance
• Separate gas train (available for different inlet gas pressure) easy to assemble
into the burner
• The hinge flange allows accessibility to burner head without losing burner
settings
• New control box Thermowatt allowing to improve the interface
o With service personnel. The digital display (PAB versions)
o Featuring the interactive language with pictograms gives
o Real time information about burner operation and statistics
o Stored during the heating season
2) Flame surveillance
3) Control Panel – Burner Mounted

• ignition unit,
23 52 39
4) Multi block Gas Train - gas train constructed to BS EN 161 shall be supplied including:
• Main gas pipe
• Ball valve
• Gas governor
• Leakage control
• Gas filter
Actuator
5) Modulating control: Modulating control of the burner shall be by means of PID

Controller which is a panel mounted indicating controller with twin digital display
showing set point and measured boiler pressure or temperature.
Electric power: .1,1kW
2.4b-3 Expansion vessel: 1 nos. expansion vessel ~200ltr. for two boilers
2.04b-4 Circulating pumps for boilers: 2 nos. Grundfos circulating pumps between boiler and
hydraulic seperator, 15m³@20m one pump for each boiler
2.04b-5 Pump mounted with accessories to complete pump group: incl. accessories like shut off
valves, strainer and non-return valves mounted with piping to pump set
2.04b-6 Master Control Panel:

operation, automatic / manual control of all pumps, burners, calorifiers and boilers and
other devices. The complete 3D/2D visualisation of the system is displayed on a touch
control panel and guarantee a clear overview of the whole system.
sensitive equipment, if possible in a separate cabinet. Service and operation local on
control panel.
EN60204, Earthing: EN50178 / IEC60364-4
6) Human-Machine Interface (HMI): Fast, flexible and reliable communication with the
control, other components, and numerous interface connections by using of a touch
control panel (high resolution TFT colour display).
23 52 39
7) Customer specific front labels and button layouts allow individual configuration of the
8) Signals BMS: All contacts are signalled free of potential to a separate terminal strip
(disconnect terminals).
9) Contact details (voltage, current bearing capacity, make contact/change over
contact) corresponds to the technical specification.One common alarm and
operating signal is supplied generally.
Quantity: 1 nos.
Colour: RAL7035
Materials: Industrial Enclosures Rittal
VFD (Variable frequency drive)
Vacon
PLC Sigmatek
Overload switches, contactors
EATON
Disconnectors, circuit breakers
Schrack
Relays, timing relays Tele
2.04b-7 DOCUMENTATION
2.04b-8. HYDRAULIC SEPERATOR

1) Function
To optimise the variable volume flows, the hydraulic separator is required between
system capacity.
2.04b-9. HIGH CAPACITY WATER HEATERS
23 52 39
2.04b-9a Quantity: 2 nos.

Tag No: B27, B28.
1) General
steel AISI 316 Ti, with free floating tabulator rods for performance enhancement and self-
2) Quantity : 2 units complete with external heat exchanger-unit manufactured to
3) Each unit consists of :Storage tank 10000 ltr with one external heat exchanger 350 kW
1. 7525 litres per hour continuous domestic hot water at 20°C  60°C
5) Storage Tank: 10000 litres storage capacity, stainless steel AISI 316 Ti or Duplex St Steel,
all joints welded front and back for smooth inside joint seams and maximum corrosion
resistance. Material: Stainless Steel AISI 316 Ti or Duplex St Steel.
1. vertical (incl. insulation, inspection flange)

• Automatic inert gas (front and back) welding for exact seams with constant grain
structure, free of oxidation pockets and highly resistant to corrosion.
• All finished products are submerged in pickling baths to give a smooth surface finish
and further enhancing resistance to corrosion and fouling.
• 100% full penetration welding
2.04b-9b. Anodes:
protection.)
2.04b-9c Insulation:
Insulation shall be made of Polyester Fiber Fleece minimum 100 mm thick, all connection
openings shall be precise laser cut to reduce heat loss; the material shall be flame
retardant to DIN 4102-1 class 2. The insulation shall be enclosed in a Poly propylene outer
sheeting of 1.2 mm which shall have aluminum closure strip which shall allow quick
opening.
2.04b-9d. Heat Exchanger:

Technical description: Stainless steel high capacity shell and tube heat exchanger
with free floating turbulator rods for increased performance and self-cleaning effect.
Material: Stainless Steel AISI 316 Ti

Welding quality:
• Structure, free of oxidation pockets and highly resistant to corrosion.
23 52 39
and further enhancing

• Resistance to corrosion and fouling.
Burning protection: Steel sheet, 150 mm distance to heat exchanger
2.04b-9e Master control panel with touch Screen display: 1 no.

the plant room.
3) Power-On LED
10) All parameter are to be password protected against changes (three access levels)
and all parameters should have an adjustment range
11) All temperature sensors and transmitter should be displayed on the monitor, incl. their
set points and values
12) The hydraulic schematic shall be represented in the display, incl. operation and fault
of pumps, valves and burners
internet
o Fault burner
o Warning TR
o Fault boiler pump
2.04b-9f. Accessories:
1) 4 temperature sensors, motorised condensate control valve, adjustable safety
thermostat near T3 automatically disable microprocessor.
2) Wired and pre-assembled for easy installation. (Maximum ambient air temperature
40°C). dial thermometer 100mm 0–120°C, pressure gauge 60mm 0–16bar, fitted
23 52 39
inspection flange cover 200/400 mm, built-in connections for optional heat
exchanger sludge flushing.
3) Dielectric isolator kits for piping connections & non-sacrificial electric anodes.
2.04b-9g Pre-assembled:
1) The above descripted elements: storage-tank, control panel and heat-exchanger
2.04b-9h Warranty:
1) 5 years warranty against corrosion leakage on all stainless steel parts. All connections
2.04b-9i. Documentation: CAD technical drawings, parts list, start-up report.
2.04b-9j Laws & Standards:

2.04b-9k. Master control panel with touch Screen display: 1 no.
the plant room.
3) Power-On LED
10) All parameter are to be password protected against changes (three access levels)
and all parameters should have an adjustment range
23 52 39
11) All temperature sensors and transmitter should be displayed on the monitor, incl. their
set points and values
12) The hydraulic schematic shall be represented in the display, incl. operation and fault
of pumps, valves and burners
internet
o Fault burner
o Warning TR
o Fault boiler pump
2.04b-9l. Documentation: CAD technical drawings, parts list, start-up report.
2.04b-9m Laws & Standards:

2.04c-9n. CHIMNEY
1) Quantity: 1 no.
2) Chimney Type: dw-fu in stainless steel
3) Diameter: 250mm.
4) Insulation 32,5mm
5) Flue dampers for boiler,
6) Horizontal piping same as in the drawing.
7) Vertical piping Max. 11m outside up to the top.
Material:
1) Inside- SS1.4571, Outside-SS1.4301
2) Wall Thickness: Inside & Outside: 0.6mm
3) Certification: 0036 CPD 9174001
23 52 39
4) Calcification: T400-N1-D-V3-L50060-G50, T400-N1-W-V2-L50060-O20, T600-N1-D-V3-

L50060-G50, T600-N1-D-V2-L50060-O50,
5) The stack shall be supplied by the boiler manufacturer in sections complete with rain-
cap and hardware, with sizes and gauge steel as per his recommendations.
6) The stack sections shall be twin shell insulated stainless steel or as recommended by
manufacturer 316 L inside and outside.
7) The sections supplied loose shall be delivered with the necessary assembly hardware,
bolts, nuts and gaskets.
8) An inspection opening assembly complete with the relevant hardware shall be
9) A rain-cap assembly complete with the relevant hardware shall be supplied loose for
field assembly and mounting.
10) If guying is required for stack stability and wind effect, this will be done locally and the
section flange bolts shall be used as guy lines tie joints to suit local conditions.
END OF KITCHEN & LAUNDRY
2.04c. Low Heat Service to HVAC System
2.04c-1LPG Fired Boiler System

Quantity: 2 units (Two duty / one standby)
Tag No: BOI-B15, B16 & B17
Rated heating capacity out: 620 kW
Rated heating capacity input: 672 kW
Width: 1166 mm
Height: 1380 mm
Weight: 963 kg
Max. operating pressure: 5 bar
Standard equipment:
Outer casing with high density insulation 80mm
Tabulators
Cleaning tools
Origin of boiler: Made in Italy / Europa
NOx).
23 52 39
cut for top precision semi-finished products; high ampere robotic welding machines
should be used to guarantee perfect welded material-to-sheet melting. ST37.0 DIN1629
steel flue pipes should be inserted in AISI 304 stainless steel laminar turbulator to increase
the gas/water transfer factor and therefore generator efficiency.
that conveys internal hot water flows to protect the rear plate and tubes where the
risk of excessive gas cooling is the highest.

- pump thermostat
- main switch
2.04c-2Burner: Quantity – 3 Nos
LPG BURNER, modulating, Ecoflam Blue 1000.1 PR TL, gas pressure 75-360mbar
1) Complete with:
• Aluminium casing up to Blu 2000.1 and steel casing from 3000.1 with electrical
panel integrated on the burner (standard IP40). Version in loosen form or with
remote switch cabinet on request (IP54).
• New high efficiency fan ventilator designed to give flame stability and easy
matching.
• Adjustable combustion head for fine tuning / matching with different shapes of
combustion chamber.
23 52 39
• Easy maintenance of firing head from the burner top cover.

• Low NOx version available in class 3 < 80mg/kWh and in class 2 < 120mg/kWh as
per EN676.
• Hi - Low version with easy and fast butterfly ratio system available from Blu 500.1
up to Blu 2000.1.
• Progressive version with "mechanical movable head" with turndown 1: 5 (standard
turndown 1:3).
• Modulating version with PID system controller with digital set point display and real
time value (PID RWF 40 or LMV 51/52).
• Firing head with adjustable system for primary air that changes according to the
output required.
• On request tailored solutions of flame shape.
• Duoblock range 180 - 25000 kW.
• Continuous ventilation on request.
• Version for LPG.
• Special version for all type of applications and fuel characteristics on request.
2) Flame surveillance
3) Control Panel – Burner Mounted

• ignition unit,
4) Multi block Gas Train - gas train constructed to BS EN 161 shall be supplied including:
• Main gas pipe
• Ball valve
• Gas governor
• Leakage control
• Gas filter
• Actuator
5) Modulating control
Modulating control of the burner shall be by means of PID Controller which is a panel
mounted indicating controller with twin digital display showing set point and
measured boiler pressure or temperature.
Electric power: .1,1kW
2.04c-3 Expansion vessel: 1 nos. expansion vessel ~400ltr. for three boilers
2.04c-4 Circulating pumps for boilers: 3 nos. Grundfos circulating pumps between boiler and
hydraulic separator, 27m³@20m one pump for each boiler
23 52 39
2.04c-5.Pump mounted with accessories to complete pump group: incl. accessories like shut off
valves, strainer and non-return valves mounted with piping to pump set
2.04c-6 Master Control Panel:
operation, automatic / manual control of all pumps, burners, Calorifier and boilers and
other devices. The complete 3D/2D visualisation of the system is displayed on a touch
control panel and guarantee a clear overview of the whole system.
sensitive equipment, if possible in a separate cabinet.
4) Service and operation local on control panel.
EN60204, Earthing: EN50178 / IEC60364-4;
7) Human-Machine Interface (HMI):
Fast, flexible and reliable communication with the control, other components, and
numerous interface connections by using of a touch control panel (high resolution TFT
colour display).
Customer specific front labels and button layouts allow individual configuration of the
8) Signals BMS: All contacts are signalled free of potential to a separate terminal strip
(disconnect terminals).
9) Contact details (voltage, current bearing capacity, make contact/change over
contact) corresponds to the technical specification.
One common alarm and operating signal is supplied generally.
Quantity: 1 nos.
Colour: RAL7035
Materials: Industrial Enclosures (Rittal)
VFD (Variable frequency drive) Vacon
PLC Sigmatek
Overload switches, contactors EATON
Disconnectors, circuit breakers Schrack
Relays, timing relays Tele
23 52 39
2.04c-7. DOCUMENTATION
2.04c-8. HYDRAULIC SEPERATOR
Function
1) To optimise the variable volume flows, the hydraulic separator is required between
system capacity.
2.04c-9 HIGH CAPACITY WATER HEATERS
2.04c-9a. Quantity: 2 nos.

Tag No: B27, B28.
1) General
steel AISI 316 Ti, with free floating tabulator rods for performance enhancement and self-
2) Quantity: 2 units complete with external heat exchanger-unit manufactured to

3) Each unit consists of: Storage tank 1500 ltr with one external heat exchanger 620 kW
5) Rating per unit: 620 kW, 1500ltr. storage
1. 26655 litres per hour continuous domestic hot water at 60°C  80°C
6) Storage Tank: 1500 litres storage capacity, stainless steel AISI 316 Ti or Duplex St Steel,
all joints welded front and back for smooth inside joint seams and maximum corrosion
resistance. Material: Stainless Steel AISI 316 Ti or Duplex St Steel.
2. vertical (incl. insulation, inspection flange)
23 52 39

structure, free of oxidation pockets and highly resistant to corrosion.
and further enhancing resistance to corrosion and fouling.
2.04c-9b.Anodes:
protection.)
2.04c-9c.Insulation:
Insulation shall be made of Polyester Fiber Fleece minimum 100 mm thick, all connection
openings shall be precise laser cut to reduce heat loss; the material shall be flame
retardant to DIN 4102-1 class 2. The insulation shall be enclosed in a Poly propylene outer
sheeting of 1.2 mm which shall have aluminum closure strip which shall allow quick
opening.
2.04c-9d.Heat Exchanger:
1) Technical description: Stainless steel high capacity shell and tube heat exchanger
with free floating turbulator rods for increased performance and self-cleaning effect.
2) Material: Stainless Steel AISI 316 Ti
3) Welding quality:
o Automatic inert gas (front and back) welding for exact seams with constant
grain
o Structure, free of oxidation pockets and highly resistant to corrosion.
o All finished products are submerged in pickling baths to give a smooth surface
finish and further enhancing
o Resistance to corrosion and fouling.
o 100% full penetration welding
o Burning protection: Steel sheet, 150 mm distance to heat exchanger
2.04c-9e Microprocessor-based control system with graphic touchscreen colour display:

1) Each high-capacity water heater shall be equipped with an efficient, easy to operate
control system to ensure permanent control and performance monitoring of hot water
output at all times. The control system shall constantly provide the operator with
information about the system’s operational status. An alarm shall be triggered if the power
transmission drops below the operating value due to fouling.
2) This microprocessor-based control system shall facilitate a large number of specific and
specialised applications and provide an optimum and reliable supply of freshly heated
potable water.
3) Flexible control facilities
4) Password-protected operating menus shall enable safe control of operation and

performance plus easy and flexible operation of the water heater.
23 52 39
5) Pumps, valves, sensors
6) The microprocessor control unit shall process information received from the temperature
sensors and calculates the hot water flow rate required to meet the immediate demand.
The Pumps and valves shall be controlled accordingly.
7) Exact temperature control
The operator shall be able to set the hot water output and the primary circuit
temperatures on the front panel of the microprocessor control unit. Continuous monitoring
of the output and input temperatures on the secondary and primary circuit shall
guarantees exact hot water control under all operating conditions.
Performance logging
8) The microprocessor control unit shall constantly monitors the operating parameters of the
water heater and store them in memory for upload to building management systems
(BMS) via USB or Ethernet. Approximately 12 month of operation shall be stored in memory,
depending on the sampling rate set by the operator.
9) Fuel saving program
10) The microprocessor control unit shall be programmable to minimise the number of
inefficient burner starts by preventing the burner from cycling on and off during periods of
low hot water demand. Cold water shall be heated at full boiler capacity until the storage
tank is full of hot water. The boiler shall then be switched off and hot water shall be
supplied solely by the storage tank. When most of the hot water stored in the storage tank
has been used up, the boiler shall restarts at full capacity, refilling the storage tank with hot
water. This method of operation shall save fuel compared to non-microprocessor
controlled water heaters.
11) It shall have function such as:
• Automatic boiler starts (remote).
• 5inch graphic touchscreen colour display shows all operating functions.
• Anti-fouling high speed cold water cycle.
• Remote control via TCP/IP and web browser.
• download of control units internal performance monitoring log files for export to
spread sheet graphic software e.g. MS-Excel.
• Legionella cycle controller – Weekly electronic timer for the legionella Cycle, to
periodically raise the temperature of the hot water in the storage tank to 65°C for short
periods.
Electric power: 2,3 kW per unit, 230 V ±5%, 50Hz
2.04c-9f. Accessories:
1. 4 temperature sensors, motorised condensate control valve, adjustable safety
thermostat near T3 automatically disable microprocessor.
23 52 39
2. Wired and pre-assembled for easy installation. (Maximum ambient air

temperature 40°C). dial thermometer 100mm 0–120°C, pressure gauge 60mm 0–
16bar, fitted inspection flange cover 200/400 mm, built-in connections for optional
heat exchanger sludge flushing.
3. Dielectric isolator kits for piping connections & non-sacrificial electric anodes.
2.04c-9g Pre-assembled:
The above descripted elements: storage-tank, control panel and heat-exchanger
2.04c-9h Warranty:
5 years warranty against corrosion leakage on all stainless steel parts. All connections
2.04c-9i. Documentation: CAD technical drawings, parts list, start-up report.
2.04c-9j Laws & Standards:

2.04c-9k.Master control panel with touch Screen display : 1 no.

the plant room.
3) Power-On LED
10) All parameter are to be password protected against changes (three access
levels) and all parameters should have an adjustment range
23 52 39
11) All temperature sensors and transmitter should be displayed on the monitor, incl.
their set points and values
12) The hydraulic schematic shall be represented in the display, incl. operation and
fault of pumps, valves and burners
internet
• Boiler low pressure switch
• Boiler pump with fault signal
• TR/STB Automatic temperature limiter 0-70°C with height limit switch at 90°C
• Alarms for Boiler:
• Fault burner
• Fault high temperature STB (safety temperature limiter)
• Warning TR
• Fault boiler pump
• Fault pressure switch
• Sensor fault temperature transmitter boiler
2.04c-9l. Documentation: CAD technical drawings, parts list, start-up report.
2.04c-9m Laws & Standards:

2.04c-9n. CHIMNEY
Quantity: 1 no.
Chimney Type: dw-fu in stainless steel
Diameter: 600mm.
Insulation 32,5mm
Flue dampers for boiler,
Horizontal piping same as in the drawing.
Vertical piping 11m outside up to the top.
Material:
Inside- SS1.4571, Outside-SS1.4301
Wall Thickness: Inside & Outside: 0.6mm
Certification: 0036 CPD 9174001
Calcification: T400-N1-D-V3-L50060-G50, T400-N1-W-V2-L50060-O20, T600-N1-D-V3-
L50060-G50, T600-N1-D-V2-L50060-O50,
23 52 39
1. The stack shall be supplied by the boiler manufacturer in sections complete with rain-
cap and hardware, with sizes and gauge steel as per his recommendations.
2. The stack sections shall be twin shell insulated stainless steel or as recommended by
manufacturer 316 L inside and outside.
3. The sections supplied loose shall be delivered with the necessary assembly hardware,
bolts, nuts and gaskets.
4. An inspection opening assembly complete with the relevant hardware shall be
5. A rain-cap assembly complete with the relevant hardware shall be supplied loose for
field assembly and mounting.
6. If guying is required for stack stability and wind effect, this will be done locally and the
section flange bolts shall be used as guy lines tie joints to suit local conditions.
END OF LOW HEAT FOR HVAC
G. PRE-ASSEMBLING
The whole equipment ( primary side) shall be turnkey pre-assembled in the factory
(except chimney), mounted on to stabile black mild steel base frames, pre-piped;
automatically welded (orbital) and pre-wired for easy site installation. Components,
pipes and cables numbered and indicated delivered together with set-up/installation
plan for site installation.
H. INSTALLATION AT SITE
Examine area to receive boiler for compliance with requirements for installation
tolerances and other conditions affecting boiler performance. Do not proceed with
installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
1. Install boilers level and plumb, according to manufacturer's written instructions and
referenced standards.
2. Install according to local codes.
3. Support boilers on minimum 200-mm thick reinforced concrete base, 100 mm larger
on each side than base of unit. Dowel base to floor on 450-mm centers along
perimeter of base. Cast anchor-bolt inserts through base into floor.
4. Assemble boiler trim according to manufacturer's written installation instructions.
5. Install electrical devices furnished with boiler, but not specified to be factory
mounted.
CONNECTIONS
a. Connect gas piping full size to boiler gas-train inlet with union.
b. Connect as indicated, boiler feed water piping, vents, drains etc
c. Connect breeching to boiler outlet, full size of outlet
d. Electrical: Comply with to applicable requirements in Division 16 –Electrical works.
e. Ground equipment
f. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published
torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those
specified in UL 486A and UL 486B.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

a. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to
supervise the field assembly of components and installation of boilers, including
piping and electrical connections. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace
damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.
b. Hydrostatically test assembled boiler and piping, according to applicable sections of
the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code.
23 52 39
CLEANING
a. Flush and clean boilers on completion of installation, according to manufacturer's
written instructions.
b. After completing system installation, including outlet fittings and devices, inspect
finishes including chips, scratches, and abrasions with manufacturer's touchup paint.
COMMISSIONING
a. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to provide startup service.
b. Verify that installation is as indicated and specified.
c. Verify that electrical wiring installation complies with manufacturer's submittal and
installation requirements in Division 16 Sections. Do not proceed with boiler startup
until wiring installation is acceptable to equipment Installer.
d. Complete manufacturer's installation and startup checklist and verify the following:
1. Boiler is level on concrete base.
2. Flue and chimney are installed without visible damage.
3. No damage is visible to boiler jacket, refractory, or combustion chamber.
4. Pressure-reducing valves are checked for correct operation and specified relief
pressure. Adjust as required.
5. Clearances have been provided and piping is flanged for easy removal and servicing.
6. Heating circuit pipes have been connected to correct ports.
7. Labels are clearly visible.
8. Boiler, burner, and flue are clean and free of construction debris.
9. Burner blower rotates in correct direction.
10. Pressure and temperature gages are installed.
11. Control installations are completed.
Before starting the boiler, check that:

- The rating plate specifications and power supply network (electricity, water, gas or fuel
oil) specifications correspond.
- The burner power range is compatible with the power of the boiler.
- The boiler room also contains the instructions for the burner;
- The flue gas exhaust pipe is operating correctly;
- The air inlet supply is well dimensioned and free from any obstacle;
- The manhole, the smoke box and the burner plate are closed in order to provide a
complete flue gas seal;
- The system is full of water and that any air pockets have therefore been eliminated;
- The water circulation pumps are operating correctly.
- The expansion vessel and the safety valve(s) have been connected correctly (with no
interception) and are properly operating.
- Check the electrical parts and thermostat operation.
23 52 39
23 57 00 - Heat Exchangers for HVAC
PART 1 - GENERAL

Section
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes plate heat exchangers.
1.3 SUBMITTALS

specialties, and accessories. At a minimum, the following parameter to be
tabulated.
1. Cooling capacity (TR)
2. Type
3. Primary circuit: Temperature in & Temperature out
4. Secondary circuit: Temperature in & Temperature out
5. Flow rate in each circuit
6. Pressure drop (Kpa)
7. Design pressure (Bar)
8. Test Pressure (Bar) differential, factory letter confirming differential pressure
for plate thickness and temperature
9. Extension Capacity (percentage)/ number of plates
10. Area (m2)
11. Equipment Shipping Weight (kg)
12. Equipment operating weight (kg)
13. Channel Depth (mm)
14. Plate Thickness
15. End Plate Thickness
16. LMTD
17. Local Service Availability within the region
18. Method Statement of Installation, Commissioning and future Maintenance
based on actual site conditions.
B. Shop Drawings: Signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer. Detail

equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required
clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of
each field connection.
23 57 00
1. Design Calculations: Calculate requirements for selecting seismic restraints

and for designing bases.
Base Details: Detail fabrication including anchorages and attachments to structure

and to supported equipment.
C. Coordination Drawings: Equipment room, drawn to scale, on which the following

items are shown and coordinated with each other, based on input from installers
of the items involved:
1. Repair-Removal space and strategy.

2. Structural members to which heat exchangers will be attached.
D. Operation and Maintenance Data: For heat exchangers to include in

B. Retain first paragraph below to allow Drawing details based on one

manufacturer's product to establish requirements and still allow competition.
Coordinate with Division 01 requirements.
C. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, performance, and dimensional

requirements of heat exchangers and are based on the specific equipment
indicated.
D. Submit ISO 9001Certificate
E. Submit Certificate of Origin of Material Supplied Duly Stamped by the relevant

authority.
F. Submit pressure test certificate as issued at the manufacturing facility complying

with pressurized equipment directive.
G. The heat exchangers shall be inspected and verified by the client or consultant in
the factory before shipment
H. AHRI - Thermal Performance Certification in accordance with AHRI Liquid to Liquid

Heat Exchanger Certification Program
I. The contractor shall send the data sheets for verification to AHRI and the
verification package from AHRI shall be attached with the submittal. The plate
heat exchangers shall not be approved in the absence of this verification
package. The verification package from AHRI shall have the following.
a. Original request for verification form signed and stamped by AHRI.
b. Original Specification sheet
c. Replication selection sheet made by AHRI.
23 57 00
The contractor shall verify the technical details of the supplied plate heat
exchanger with mentioned parameters in the AHRI data sheet and submit a report
for final approval after delivery.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by

one of the manufacturers specified or ‘Approved Equal’.
1. Alfa Laval - Sweden

2. APV – USA
3. TACO - USA
2.2 GASKETED PLATE HEAT EXCHANGERS
A. Configuration: Freestanding assembly consisting of frame support, top and

bottom carrying and guide bars, fixed and movable end plates, tie rods,
individually removable plates, and one-piece gaskets.
B. Frame:
1. Capacity to accommodate 20 percent additional plates.

2. Painted carbon steel with provisions for anchoring to support.
3. The frame assembly should be bolted construction and not welded frame
assembly
4. The frame shall be carbon steel construction coated with two-part blue
paint. Manufacturer painting specifications to be provided.
5. The moveable cover shall have only stainless-steel material roller for ease of
movement without additional rigging or handling equipment.
6. Provide lifting lugs to allow lifting of entire units flooded weight.
7. Bolts shall be provided with rolled threads to reduce galling and minimum
high width hexagonal nuts to adequately distribute the load.
8. Critical bolts to strictly have ball bearing boxes.
9. Provide plastic covers over threaded rod extension for protection of threads
10. Connections to be studded port design with connection lining to be of
constructed of same plate material and elastomeric liner.
11. The plates shall only contact with stainless steel surfaces.
23 57 00
12. The portion of the carrying bar in contact with plates shall be an integrated
into the carrying bar
C. Bottom Guide Bars: Stainless steel.
D. End-Plate Material: End plates shall be of titanium and 0.6mm thickness.
E. Tie Rods and Nuts: Steel or stainless steel.
F. Plate Material: Type titanium with minimum thickness of 0.5 mm
1. One piece pressed type titanium plates and tapered gasket groove.
2. The plates shall not have holes for sealing of gasket – no exception.
3. Each plate to have herringbone corrugations to optimize heat transfer with
nominal pressure losses.
4. The channel depth between two plates should exceed 1.9mm but should not
be above 2.5 mm.
5. Design of plates shall strictly follow countercurrent and parallel flow principle.
6. Design to allow for removal and replacement of single plate without removal
of the plate on either side.
7. Design shall prevent fluid intermixing and provide leakage to the outside of
the unit
8. Plates should not lock to adjacent plates
9. Each plate should strictly have a built in five point alignment system to
accurately locate the plates in the frame assembly to prevent lateral plate
movement under pressure.
10. Plates shall be reinforced at the upper and lower mounting slots to prevent
bending hangers on the plate.
11. The frame plates shall shave no welded stiffeners etc and should be
designed to allow pressurization of each circuit to a full differential of 1.3
times the design pressure without buckling or deformation of heat transfer
plates
G. Gasket Material: Nitrile rubber.
1. One-piece, molded Nitrile Butyl Rubber (NBR) gasket.

2. Gaskets shall have relieving grooves to prevent intermixing of fluids and cause
leak to outside of unit.
3. The gaskets shall be locked into the groove by Clip On / Clip AD / Tape On
method. Glued gaskets are not acceptable
4. The gaskets should not be used for locking of the plates before tightening.
H. Piping Connections:
1. Studded port connections as per the pressure rating
23 57 00
2. Line wetted surfaces with same material as plates.
I. Accessories.
1. Provide factory fabricated removable and reusable insulation cover for each
heat exchanger. The insulation cover shall be designed for easy removal and
replacement to facilitate cleaning, inspection and maintenance of plates.
2. Provide stainless steel suitcase type latches to facilitate assembly and disas-
sembly of the insulation pieces.
3. The insulation panel shall be 1mm Allustucco 3s 3/4h exterior plating, 60mm
polyurethane foam insulation, 0.05mm Aluminum foil inside layer and 20mm
Armaflex lining at the bolt holes.
J. Drip Tray: Provide Insulated Galvanized, Drainable drip tray beneath each heat
exchanger.
K. Characteristics:
1. Application : Condenser Water Cooling

2. Type : Counter current and parallel flow only.
3. Performance Requirements
Units shall be sized to meet design conditions as specified in the schedule with
a maximum allowable pressure drop of 90-100 Kpa in each circuit or as per
schedule
In addition, units shall be sized with allowance for 20% extension for future
addition of plates.
4. Working Pressure / Temperature: Minimum 10 bar / 35 deg C or as per
schedule
5. Test Pressure : 1.3 times the design pressure.
6. The design shall prevent intermixing and leakage of fluid to outside of unit.
7. The units shall withstand the maximum test pressure on either hot or cold side
with the opposite side at 0 bar or as per schedule.
8. Units to be factory tested in accordance with PED code. Manufacturer to
comply with PED and mention compliance of the same on all data sheets.
9. Provide metal nameplate with the following details
a. Manufacturer’s name
b. Type of Unit
c. Serial No.
d. Year of manufacture
e. Fluid group
f. Inlet / Outlet connections
g. Volume
h. Design Pressure
i. Design temperature
j. Test Pressure
23 57 00
k. Test Pressure date
L. Fully established service center within the region with Reconditioning and
Regasketing facility should be available. Such facility shall have all essential spare
parts as shall have capability of full repair and overhaul of the plate heat
exchangers. 24hours service availability to attend fault at project site by factory
trained engineer should be available.
M. All units to be manufactured as per PED code.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and
for structural rigidity, strength, anchors, and other conditions affecting
performance of heat exchangers.

corrected.
3.2 HEAT-EXCHANGER INSTALLATION
A. Concrete Bases: Anchor heat exchanger to concrete base.

perimeter of base.
equipment.
5. Cast-in-place concrete materials and placement requirements shall be co-
ordinated with structural requirements.
3.3 CONNECTIONS
B. Maintain manufacturer's recommended clearances for service and

maintenance. Install piping connections to allow service and maintenance of
heat exchangers.
C. Install shutoff valves at heat-exchanger inlet and outlet connections.
23 57 00
D. Install relief valves on heat-exchanger heated-fluid connection and install pipe

relief valves, full size of valve connection, to floor drain.
E. Install hose end valve to drain shell.
A. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning
3.5 CLEANING
A. After completing system installation, including outlet fitting and devices, inspect
finishes.
3.6 DEMONSTRATION
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's

maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain heat exchangers.
23 57 00
23 64 16 - Centrifugal Water Chillers
PART 1 - GENERAL

Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
1. Packaged, water-cooled, electric-motor-driven centrifugal chillers.

2. Packaged, portable refrigerant recovery units.
3. Heat-exchanger, brush-cleaning system.
B. Related Section:
1. Division 28 Section "Refrigerant Detection and Alarm" for refrigerant monitors,

alarms, supplemental breathing apparatus, and ventilation equipment
interlocks.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. BAS: Building automation system.
B. COP: Coefficient of performance. The ratio of the rate of heat removal to the rate
of energy input using consistent units for any given set of rating conditions.
C. EER: Energy-efficiency ratio. The ratio of the cooling capacity given in terms of
Btu/h to the total power input given in terms of watts at any given set of rating
conditions.
D. IPLV: Integrated part-load value. A single-number part-load efficiency figure of

merit calculated per the method defined by ARI 550/590 and referenced to ARI
standard rating conditions.
E. (kW/kW: The ratio of total power input of the chiller in kilowatts to the net
refrigerating capacity in kW at any given set of rating conditions.
F. NPLV: Nonstandard part-load value. A single-number part-load efficiency figure of

merit calculated per the method defined by ARI 550/590 and intended for
operating conditions other than the ARI standard rating conditions.
A. Condenser-Fluid Temperature Performance:
23 64 16
1. Startup Condenser-Fluid Temperature: Chiller shall be capable of starting with

an entering condenser-fluid temperature as per schedule and providing
stable operation until the system temperature is elevated to the minimum
operating entering condenser-fluid temperature.
2. Minimum Operating Condenser-Fluid Temperature: Chiller shall be capable of
continuous operation over the entire capacity range indicated with an
entering condenser-fluid temperature as per the schedule
3. Make factory modifications to standard chiller design if necessary to comply
with performance indicated.
B. Site Altitude: Chiller shall be suitable for altitude at which installed without affecting
performance indicated. Make adjustments to affected chiller components to
account for site altitude.
C. Performance Tolerance: Comply with the following in lieu of ARI 550/590:
1. Allowable Capacity Tolerance: 5 percent.

2. Allowable IPLV/NPLV Performance Tolerance: 5 percent.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include refrigerant, rated
1. Performance at ARI standard conditions and at conditions indicated.

2. Performance at ARI standard unloading conditions.
3. Minimum evaporator flow rate.
4. Refrigerant capacity of chiller.
5. Oil capacity of chiller.
6. Fluid capacity of evaporator, condenser
7. Characteristics of safety relief valves.
8. Minimum entering condenser-fluid temperature.
9. Performance at varying capacities with constant design condenser-fluid
temperature. Repeat performance at varying capacities for different
condenser-fluid temperatures from design to minimum in (3 deg C
increments.
B. LEED Submittal:
1. Product Data for Credit EA 4: Documentation required by Credit EA 4

indicating that equipment and refrigerants comply.
C. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to

other work.
1. Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, load

distribution, required clearances, and method of field assembly, components,
and location and size of each field connection.
D. Coordination Drawings: Floor plans, drawn to scale, on which the following items
are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items
involved:
23 64 16
1. Structural supports.
2. Piping roughing-in requirements.
3. Wiring roughing-in requirements, including spaces reserved for electrical
equipment.
4. Access requirements, including working clearances for mechanical controls
and electrical equipment, and tube pull and service clearances.
E. Certificates: For certification required in "Quality Assurance" Article.
F. Seismic Qualification Certificates: For chillers, accessories, and components, from

manufacturer.

2. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity
and locate and describe mounting and anchorage provisions.
G. Source quality-control reports.
H. Startup service reports.
I. Operation and Maintenance Data: For each chiller to include in emergency,

J. Warranty: Sample of special warranty.
B. ARI Certification: Certify chiller according to ARI 550 certification program.
C. ARI Rating: Rate chiller performance according to requirements in ARI 550/590.
D. ASHRAE Compliance:
1. ASHRAE 15 for safety code for mechanical refrigeration.

2. ASHRAE 147 for refrigerant leaks, recovery, and handling and storage
requirements.
E. ASHRAE/IESNA Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1-2004.
F. ASME Compliance: Fabricate and label chillers to comply with ASME Boiler and
Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII, Division 1, as applicable to chiller design. For
chillers charged with R-134a refrigerant, include an ASME U-stamp and nameplate
certifying compliance.
G. Comply with NFPA 70.
23 64 16
H. Comply with requirements of UL and UL Canada, and include label by a qualified

testing agency showing compliance.
I. Green Seal Compliance: Signed Green Seal certifying compliance with GS-31.
A. Ship chillers from the factory fully charged with refrigerant.
B. Ship each chiller with a full charge of refrigerant. Charge each chiller with nitrogen
if refrigerant is shipped in containers separate from chiller.
C. Ship each oil-lubricated chiller with a full charge of oil.
1. Ship oil factory installed in chiller.
D. Package chiller for export shipping in totally enclosed crate with bagging.
1.8 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases with actual equipment provided.
Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases.
B. Coordinate sizes, locations, and anchoring attachments of structural-steel support

structures.
1.9 WARRANTY

repair or replace components of chillers that fail in materials or workmanship within
specified warranty period.
1. Extended warranties include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Complete chiller including refrigerant and oil charge.

b. Complete compressor and drive assembly including refrigerant and oil
charge.
c. Refrigerant and oil charge.
d. Parts and labor.
e. Loss of refrigerant charge for any reason.
2. Warranty Period Five years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS

of the following but are not limited to, the following:
23 64 16
1. Carrier Corporation; a United Technologies company.

2. Daikin.
3. Trane; a division of American Standard.
4. YORK International Corporation.
2.2 MANUFACTURED UNIT
A. Description: Factory-assembled and -tested chiller complete with compressor,

compressor motor, compressor motor controller, [lubrication system ]evaporator,
condenser, [heat-reclaim condenser as indicated, ]controls, interconnecting unit
piping and wiring, and indicated accessories.
1. Disassemble chiller into major assemblies as required by the installation after

factory testing and before packaging for shipment.
2. For chillers with dual compressors, provide each compressor with a dedicated
motor and motor controller, and provide for continued operation when either
compressor-drive assembly fails or is being serviced.
B. Fabricate chiller mounting base with reinforcement strong enough to resist chiller
movement during a seismic event when chiller is anchored to field support structure.
2.3 COMPRESSOR-DRIVE ASSEMBLY
A. Description: Single-stage or multistage, variable-displacement, centrifugal-type

compressor driven by an electric motor.
1. Where indicated, provide oil-free compressor technology using a permanent

magnet synchronous motor, magnetic bearings, integral variable frequency
controller, and digital electronic controls.
B. Compressor:
1. Casing: Cast iron, precision ground.

2. Impeller: High-strength cast aluminum or cast-aluminum alloy on carbon- or
alloy-steel shaft.
C. Drive: Gear-drive, open design using an electric motor as the driver.
1. Gear Drives: For chillers with gear drives, provide single- or double-helical
gear design continuously coated with oil while chiller is operating. Gears shall
comply with American Gear Manufacturer Association standards.
2. Drive Coupling: For chillers with open drives, provide flexible disc with all-
metal construction and no wearing parts to ensure long life without the need
for lubrication.
3. Seals: Seal drive assembly to prevent refrigerant leakage.
D. Compressor Motor:
1. Continuous-duty, squirrel-cage, induction-type, two-pole motor with energy

efficiency required to suit chiller energy efficiency indicated.
2. Factory mounted, aligned, and balanced as part of compressor assembly
before shipping.
23 64 16
3. Motor shall be of sufficient capacity to drive compressor throughout entire

operating range without overload and with sufficient capacity to start and
accelerate compressor without damage.
4. For chillers with open drives, provide motor with open-drip proof enclosure.
5. Provide motor with thermistor or RTD in each of three-phase motor windings to
monitor temperature and report information to chiller control panel.
6. Provide motor with thermistor or RTD to monitor bearing temperature and
report information to chiller control panel.
7. Provide open-drive motor with internal electric heater, internally powered
from chiller power supply.
E. Vibration Balance: Balance chiller compressor and drive assembly to provide a

precision balance that is free of noticeable vibration over the entire operating
range.
1. Overspeed Test: 25 percent above design operating speed.
F. Service: Easily accessible for inspection and service.
1. Compressor's internal components shall be accessible without having to

remove compressor-drive assembly from chiller.
2. Provide lifting lugs or eyebolts attached to casing.
G. Economizers: For multistage chillers, provide interstage economizers.
H. Capacity Control: Modulating, variable-inlet, guide-vane assembly combined with

hot-gas bypass, if necessary, to achieve performance indicated.
1. Maintain stable operation that is free of surge, cavitation, and vibration

throughout range of operation. Configure to achieve most energy-efficient
operation possible.
2. Operating Range: From 100 to 10 percent of design capacity.
3. Chillers with variable frequency controllers shall modulate compressor speed
with variable-inlet, guide-vane control to achieve optimum energy efficiency.
I. Oil Lubrication System: Consisting of pump, filtration, heater, cooler, factory-wired

power connection, and controls.
1. Provide lubrication to bearings, gears, and other rotating surfaces at all

operating, startup, coast down, and standby conditions including power
failure.
2. Thermostatically controlled oil heater properly sized to remove refrigerant
from oil.
3. Dual oil filters, one redundant, shall be the easily replaceable cartridge type,
minimum 0.5-micron efficiency, with means of positive isolation while servicing.
4. Refrigerant cooled oil cooler.
5. Factory-installed and pressure-tested piping with isolation valves and
accessories.
6. Oil compatible with refrigerant and chiller components.
7. Positive visual indication of oil level.
23 64 16
2.4 REFRIGERATION
A. Refrigerant:
1. Type: R-134a; ASHRAE 34, Class A1.

2. Compatibility: Chiller parts exposed to refrigerants shall be fully compatible
with refrigerants, and pressure components shall be rated for refrigerant
pressures.
B. Refrigerant Flow Control: Manufacturer's standard refrigerant flow-control device

satisfying performance requirements indicated.
C. Pressure Relief Device:
1. Comply with requirements in ASHRAE 15 and in applicable portions of ASME

Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII, Division 1.
2. For Chillers Using R-134a: ASME-rated, spring-loaded, pressure relief valve;
single- or multiple-reseating type. Pressure relief valve(s) shall be provided for
each heat exchanger. Condenser shall have dual valves with one being
redundant and configured to allow either valve to be replaced without loss of
refrigerant.
D. Refrigeration Transfer: Provide service valves and other factory-installed accessories

required to facilitate transfer of refrigerant from chiller to a remote refrigerant
storage and recycling system. Comply with requirements in ASHRAE 15 and
ASHRAE 147.
E. Refrigerant Isolation for Chillers Using R-134a: Factory install positive shutoff,
manual isolation valves in the compressor discharge line to the condenser and the
refrigerant liquid line leaving the condenser to allow for isolation and storage of full
refrigerant charge in the chiller condenser shell. In addition, provide isolation valve
on suction side of compressor from evaporator to allow for isolation and storage of
full refrigerant charge in the chiller evaporator shell.
F. Purge System:
1. System shall be a thermal purge design, refrigerant or air cooled, equipped
with a carbon filter that includes an automatic regeneration cycle.
2. Factory wire to chiller's main power supply and system complete with controls,
piping, and refrigerant valves to isolate the purge system from the chiller.
3. Construct components of noncorrodible materials.
4. Controls shall interface with chiller control panel to indicate modes of
operation, set points, data reports, diagnostics, and alarms.
5. Efficiency of not more than (9 g of refrigerant per gram of air when rated
according to ARI 580.
6. Operation independent of chiller per ASHRAE 147.
G. Positive-Pressure System:
1. During nonoperational periods, positive-pressure system shall automatically
maintain a positive pressure for atmosphere in the refrigerant pressure vessel
of not less than 3 kPa (adjustable) up to a pressure that remains within the
vessel design pressure limits.
2. System shall be factory wired and include controller, electric heat, pressure
transmitter, or switch.
23 64 16
2.5 EVAPORATOR
A. Description: Shell-and-tube design with water in tubes and refrigerant surrounding

tubes within shell. Shell is separate from condenser.
B. Shell Material: Carbon-steel rolled plates with continuously welded seams or

seamless pipe.
C. Designed to prevent liquid refrigerant carryover from entering compressor.
D. Provide evaporator with sight glass or other form of positive visual verification of
liquid-refrigerant level.
E. Tubes:
1. Individually replaceable from either end and without damage to tube sheets
and other tubes.
2. Mechanically expanded into end sheets and physically attached to
intermediate tube sheets.
3. Material: Copper.
4. External Finish: Enhanced.
5. Internal Finish: Enhanced.
F. End Tube Sheets: Continuously welded to each end of shell; drilled and reamed to
accommodate tubes with positive seal between fluid in tubes and refrigerant in
shell.
G. Intermediate Tube Sheets: Installed in shell and spaced along length of tube at
intervals required to eliminate vibration and to avoid contact of tubes resulting in
abrasion and wear.
H. Water Box:
1. Carbon-steel construction; arranged to provide visual inspection and

cleaning of tubes from either end without disturbing refrigerant in shell.
2. Standard type for water box with piping connections. Standard type for water
box without piping connections.
3. Provide water boxes with lifting lugs or eyebolts.
4. Davited water boxes.
5. Nozzle Pipe Connections: Grooved for mechanical-joint coupling.
6. Thermistor or RTD temperature sensor factory installed in each nozzle.
I. Additional Corrosion Protection:
1. Electrolytic corrosion-inhibitor anode.

2. Coat wetted surfaces with a corrosion-resistant finish.
3. Using same material as tubes, clad surfaces of end tube sheets in contact with
fluid. Coat other wetted surfaces, including water boxes, with a corrosion-
resistant finish.
23 64 16
2.6 CONDENSER
A. Description: Shell-and-tube design with water in tubes and refrigerant surrounding

tubes within shell. Shell is separate from evaporator.
B. Shell Material: Carbon-steel rolled plates with continuously welded seams or

seamless pipe.
C. Designed to prevent direct impingement of high-velocity hot gas from compressor

discharge on tubes.
D. Provide condenser with sight glass or other form of positive visual verification of
refrigerant charge and condition.
E. Tubes:
1. Individually replaceable from either end and without damage to tube sheets
and other tubes.
2. Mechanically expanded into end sheets and physically attached to
intermediate tube sheets.
3. Material: Copper.
4. External Finish: Enhanced.
5. Internal Finish: Enhanced.
F. End Tube Sheets: Continuously welded to each end of shell; drilled and reamed to
accommodate tubes with positive seal between fluid in tubes and refrigerant in
shell.
G. Intermediate Tube Sheets: Installed in shell and spaced along length of tube at
intervals required to eliminate vibration and to avoid contact of tubes resulting in
abrasion and wear.
H. Water Box:
1. Cast-iron or carbon-steel construction; arranged to provide visual inspection

and cleaning of tubes from either end without disturbing refrigerant in shell.
2. Standard type for water box with piping connections. Standard type for water
box without piping connections.
3. Provide water boxes with lifting lugs or eyebolts.
4. Davited water boxes.
5. Nozzle Pipe Connections: Grooved for mechanical-joint coupling.
6. Thermistor or RTD temperature sensor factory installed in each nozzle.
7. Fit each water box with drain connection at low point and vent connection at
high point, each with threaded plug.
I. Additional Corrosion Protection:
1. Electrolytic corrosion-inhibitor anode.

2. Coat wetted surfaces with a corrosion-resistant finish.
3. Using same material as tubes, clad surfaces of end tube sheets in contact with
fluid. Coat other wetted surfaces, including water boxes, with a corrosion-
resistant finish.
23 64 16
2.7 INSULATION
A. Closed-cell, flexible elastomeric thermal insulation complying with ASTM C 534,

Type I for tubular materials and Type II for sheet materials.
1. Thickness: 38 mm
B. Adhesive: As recommended by insulation manufacturer.
C. Factory-applied insulation over all cold surfaces of chiller capable of forming

condensation. Components shall include, but not be limited to, evaporator shell
and end tube sheets, evaporator water boxes including nozzles, refrigerant suction
pipe from evaporator to compressor, cold surfaces of compressor, refrigerant-
cooled motor, and auxiliary piping.
1. Apply adhesive to 100 percent of insulation contact surface.

2. Before insulating steel surfaces, prepare surfaces for paint, and prime and
paint as indicated for other painted components. Do not insulate unpainted
steel surfaces.
3. Seal seams and joints to provide a vapor barrier.
4. After adhesive has fully cured, paint exposed surfaces of insulation to match
other painted parts.
2.8 ELECTRICAL
A. Factory installed and wired, and functionally tested at factory before shipment.
B. Single-point, field-power connection to circuit breaker. Minimum withstand rating

shall be as required by electrical power distribution system,.
1. Branch power circuit to each motor, electric heater, dedicated electrical

load, and controls circuit breaker.
a. NEMA KS 1, heavy-duty, fusible switch with rejection-type fuse clips rated

for fuses. Select and size fuses to provide Type 2 protection according
to IEC 60947-4-1.
b. NEMA AB 1, motor-circuit protector (circuit breaker) with field-
adjustable, short-circuit-trip set point.
2. NEMA ICS 2-rated motor controller for auxiliary motors, hand-off-auto switch,
and overcurrent protection for each motor. Provide variable frequency
controller for each variable-speed motor furnished.
3. Control-circuit transformer with primary and secondary side fuses.
C. Terminal blocks with numbered and color-coded wiring to match wiring diagram.
Spare wiring terminal block for connection to external controls or equipment.
D. Factory-installed wiring outside of enclosures shall be in metal raceway except

make terminal connections with not more than a 610-mm length of liquid tight
conduit.
23 64 16
E. Factory installs and wire capacitor bank for the purpose of power factor correction
to 0.95 at all operating conditions.
1. If capacitors are mounted in a dedicated enclosure, use same NEMA

enclosure type as motor controller. Provide enclosure with service entrance
knockouts and bushings for conduit.
2. Capacitors shall be non-PCB dielectric fluid, metallized electrode design, low
loss with low-temperature rise. The kVA ratings shall be indicated and shall not
exceed the maximum limitations set by NFPA 70. Provide individual cells as
required.
3. Provide each cell with current-limiting replaceable fuses and carbon-film
discharge resistors to reduce residual voltage to less than 50 V within one
minute after de-energizing.
4. Provide a ground terminal and a terminal block or individual connectors for
phase connection.
2.9 MOTOR CONTROLLER
A. Enclosure: Factory furnished, field mounted, NEMA 250 Type 4X, with hinged full-
front access door with lock and key or padlock and key.
B. Control Circuit: Obtained from integral control power transformer with a control
power [transformer] [source] of enough capacity to operate connected control
devices.
C. Overload Relay: Shall be sized according to UL 1995 or shall be an integral

component of chiller control microprocessor.
D. Across-the-Line Controller: NEMA ICS 2, Class A, full voltage, nonreversing; include

isolation switch and current-limiting fuses.
E. Star-Delta, Reduced-Voltage Controller: NEMA ICS 2, closed transition.
F. Autotransformer Reduced-Voltage Controller: NEMA ICS 2, closed transition; include

isolation switch and current-limiting fuses.
G. Solid-State, Reduced-Voltage Controller: NEMA ICS 2.
1. Surge suppressor in solid-state power circuits providing three-phase protection

against damage from supply voltage surges 10 percent or more above
nominal line voltage.
2. Visual indication of motor and control status, including the following
conditions:
a. Controller on.
b. Overload trip.
c. Loss of phase.
d. Starter fault.
H. Accessories: Devices shall be factory installed in controller enclosure unless

23 64 16
1. Externally Operated, Door-Interlocked] Disconnect: Minimum withstand rating

shall be as required by electrical power distribution system,.
2. Push-Button Stations, Pilot Lights, and Selector Switches: NEMA ICS 2, heavy-
duty type.
3. Stop and Lockout Push-Button Station: Momentary-break, push-button station
with a factory-applied has arranged so padlock can be used to lock push
button in depressed position with control circuit open.
4. Control Relays: Time-delay relays.
5. Elapsed-Time Meters: Numerical readout in hours on face of enclosure.
6. Number-of-Starts Counter: Numerical readout on face of enclosure.
7. Meters: Panel type, 108 mm 270-degree scale and 1percent accuracy.
Where indicated, provide transfer device with an off position. Meters shall
indicate the following:
a. Ammeter: Output current for each phase, with current sensors rated to
suit application.
b. Voltmeter: Output voltage for each phase.
c. Frequency Meter: Output frequency.
d. Real-time clock with current time and date.
e. Total run time.
8. Multifunction Digital-Metering Monitor: Microprocessor-based unit suitable for

three- or four-wire systems and with the following features:
a. Selectable, digital display of the following:
1) Phase Currents, Each Phase: Plus or minus 1 percent.

2) Phase-to-Phase Voltages, Three Phase: Plus or minus 1 percent.
3) Phase-to-Neutral Voltages, Three Phase: Plus or minus 1 percent.
4) Three-Phase Real Power: Plus or minus 2 percent.
5) Three-Phase Reactive Power: Plus or minus 2 percent.
6) Power Factor: Plus or minus 2 percent.
7) Frequency: Plus or minus 0.5 percent.
8) Integrated Demand with Demand Interval Selectable from Five to
60 Minutes: Plus or minus 2 percent.
9) Accumulated energy, in megawatt hours (joules), plus or minus 2
percent; stored values unaffected by power outages for up to 72
hours.
b. Mounting: Display and control unit flush or semirecessed in instrument

compartment door.
9. Phase-Failure, Phase-Reversal, Undervoltage Relays: Solid-state sensing circuit

with adjustable undervoltage setting and isolated output contacts for
hardwired connection.
10. Power Protection: Chiller shall shut down within six cycles of power
interruption.
2.10 VARIABLE FREQUENCY CONTROLLER
A. Motor controller shall be factory mounted and wired on the chiller to provide a
single-point, field-power termination to the chiller and its auxiliaries.
23 64 16
B. Description: NEMA ICS 2; listed and labeled as a complete unit and arranged to
provide variable speed by adjusting output voltage and frequency.
C. Enclosure: Unit mounted, NEMA 250, Type 4x, with hinged full-front access door with
lock and key.
D. Integral Disconnecting Means: Door-interlocked, NEMA AB 1, instantaneous-trip

circuit breaker with lockable handle. Minimum withstand rating shall be as required
by electrical power distribution system.
E. Technology: Pulse width modulated (PWM) output with insulated gate bipolar
transistors (IGBT); suitable for variable torque loads.
F. Controller shall consist of a rectifier converter section, a digital/analog driver

regulator section, and an inverter output section.
1. Rectifier section shall be a full-wave diode bridge that changes fixed-voltage,

fixed-frequency, ac line power to a fixed dc voltage. Silicon controller
rectifiers, current source inverters, and paralleling of devices are
unacceptable. Rectifier shall be insensitive to phase rotation of the ac line.
2. Regulator shall provide full digital control of frequency and voltage.
3. Inverter section shall change fixed dc voltage to variable-frequency, variable
ac voltage, for application to a squirrel-cage motor. Inverter shall produce a
sine-coded, pulse width modulated (PWM) output wave form and shall
conduct no radio-frequency interference back to the input power supply.
G. Output Rating: Three phase; with voltage proportional to frequency throughout

voltage range.
H. Operating Requirements:
1. Input AC Voltage Tolerance: 11-KV ac, plus 10 percent.

2. Input frequency tolerance of 50 Hz, plus or minus 2 Hz.
3. Capable of driving full load, without derating, under the following conditions:
a. Ambient Temperature: 0 to 50 deg C.

b. Relative Humidity: Up to 95 percent (noncondensing).
c. Altitude: 3.6 m
4. Minimum Efficiency: 96 percent at 60 Hz, full load.

5. Minimum Displacement Primary-Side Power Factor: 95 percent without
harmonic filter, 98 percent with harmonic filter.
6. Overload Capability: 1.05 times the full-load current for 7 seconds.
7. Starting Torque: As required by compressor-drive assembly.
8. Speed Regulation: Plus or minus 1 percent.
9. Isolated control interface to allow controller to follow control signal over a 10:1
speed range.
10. To avoid equipment resonant vibrations, provide critical speed lockout
circuitry to allow bands of operating frequency at which controller shall not
operate continuously.
11. Capable of being restarted into a motor coasting in either the forward or
reverse direction without tripping.
I. Internal Adjustability Capabilities:
23 64 16
1. Minimum Output Frequency: 5 Hz.

2. Maximum Output Frequency: 50 Hz.
3. Acceleration: 2 seconds to a minimum of 60 seconds.
4. Deceleration: 2 seconds to a minimum of 60 seconds.
5. Current Limit: 30 percent to a minimum of 100 percent of maximum rating.
J. Self-Protection and Reliability Features: Subjecting the controller to any of the

following conditions shall not result in component failure or the need for
replacement:
1. Overtemperature.
2. Short circuit at controller output.
3. Ground fault at controller output. Variable frequency controller shall be able
to start a grounded motor.
4. Open circuit at controller output.
5. Input undervoltage.
6. Input overvoltage.
7. Loss of input phase.
8. Reverse phase.
9. AC line switching transients.
10. Instantaneous overload, line to line or line to ground.
11. Sustained overload exceeding 100 percent of controller rated current.
12. Starting a rotating motor.
K. Motor Protection: Controller shall protect motor against overvoltage and

undervoltage, phase loss, reverse phase, overcurrent, overtemperature, and ground
fault.
L. Automatic Reset and Restart: Capable of 3 restarts after controller fault or on return
of power after an interruption and before shutting down for manual reset or fault
correction. Controller shall be capable of automatic restart on phase-loss and
overvoltage and undervoltage trips.
M. Visual Indication: On face of controller enclosure or chiller control enclosure;

indicating the following conditions:
1. Power on.
2. Run.
3. Overvoltage.
4. Line fault.
5. Overcurrent.
6. External fault.
7. Motor speed (percent).
8. Fault or alarm status (code).
9. DC-link voltage.
10. Motor output voltage.
11. Input kilovolt amperes.
12. Total power factor.
13. Input kilowatts.
14. Input kilowatt-hours.
15. Three-phase input voltage.
16. Three-phase output voltage.
17. Three-phase input current.
18. Three-phase output current.
23 64 16
19. Three-phase input voltage total harmonic distortion.

20. Three-phase input current total harmonic distortion.
21. Output frequency (Hertz).
22. Elapsed operating time (hours).
23. Diagnostic and service parameters.
N. Operator Interface: At controller or chiller control panel; with start-stop and auto-
manual selector with manual-speed-control potentiometer.
O. Control Signal Interface:
1. Electric Input Signal Interface: A minimum of two analog inputs (0 to 10 V or

0/4-20 mA) and six programmable digital inputs.
P. Active Harmonic Distortion Filter: Factory mounted and wired to limit total voltage
and current distortion to 5 percent.
Q. Input Line Conditioning:
R. Cooling: Air / Refrigerant cooled.
S. Accessories: Devices shall be factory installed in controller enclosure unless

1. Control Relays: Auxiliary and adjustable time-delay relays.
T. Chiller Capacity Control Interface: Equip chiller with adaptive control logic to
automatically adjust the compressor motor speed and the compressor pre-rotation
inlet vane position independently to achieve maximum part-load efficiency in
response to sensor inputs that are integral to the chiller controls.
2.11 CONTROLS
A. Control: Standalone and microprocessor based, with all memory stored in

nonvolatile memory so that reprogramming is not required on loss of electrical
power.
B. Enclosure: Unit mounted, NEMA 250, Type 4x, hinged or lockable; factory wired with
a single-point, field-power connection and a separate control circuit.
C. Operator Interface: Multiple-character digital or graphic display with dynamic

update of information and with keypad or touch-sensitive display located on front
of control enclosure. In either imperial or metric units selectable through the
interface, display the following information:
1. Date and time.

2. Operating or alarm status.
3. Fault history with not less than last 10 faults displayed.
4. Set points of controllable parameters.
5. Trend data.
6. Operating hours.
7. Number of chiller starts.
23 64 16
8. Outdoor-air temperature or space temperature if required for chilled-water

reset.
9. Entering- and leaving-fluid temperatures of evaporator and condenser.
10. Difference in fluid temperatures of evaporator and condenser.
11. Fluid flow of evaporator and condenser.
12. Fluid pressure drop of evaporator and condenser.
13. Refrigerant pressures in evaporator and condenser.
14. Refrigerant saturation temperature in evaporator and condenser shell.
15. Compressor refrigerant suction and discharge temperature.
16. Compressor bearing temperature.
17. Motor bearing temperature.
18. Motor winding temperature.
19. Oil temperature.
20. Oil discharge pressure.
21. Phase current.
22. Percent of motor rated load amperage.
23. Phase voltage.
24. Demand power (kilowatts).
25. Energy use (kilowatt-hours).
26. Power factor.
27. For chillers equipped with variable frequency controllers and harmonic filters,
include the following:
a. Output voltage and frequency.

b. Voltage total harmonic distortion for each phase.
c. Supply current total demand distortion for each phase.
d. Inlet vane position.
e. Controller internal ambient temperature.
f. Heatsink temperature.
28. Purge suction temperature if purge system is provided.

29. Purge elapsed time if purge system is provided.
30. <Insert status display items>.
D. Control Functions:
1. Manual or automatic startup and shutdown time schedule.

2. Entering and leaving chilled-water temperatures, control set points, and motor
load limits. Evaporator fluid temperature shall be reset based on [return-
water] [outdoor-air] [space] temperature.
3. Current limit and demand limit.
4. Condenser-fluid temperature.
5. External chiller emergency stop.
6. Variable evaporator flow.
7. Thermal storage.
8. Heat reclaim.
E. Manually Reset Safety Controls: The following conditions shall shut down chiller and
require manual reset:
1. Low evaporator pressure or temperature; high condenser pressure.

2. Low evaporator fluid temperature.
3. Low oil differential pressure.
23 64 16
4. High or low oil pressure.

5. High oil temperature.
6. High compressor-discharge temperature.
7. Loss of condenser-fluid flow.
8. Loss of evaporator fluid flow.
9. Motor overcurrent.
10. Motor overvoltage.
11. Motor under voltage.
12. Motor phase reversal.
13. Motor phase failure.
14. Sensor- or detection-circuit fault.
15. Processor communication loss.
16. Motor controller fault.
17. Extended compressor surge.
F. Trending: Capability to trend analog data of up to five parameters simultaneously

over an adjustable period and frequency of polling.
G. Security Access: Provide electronic security access to controls through identification

and password with at least three levels of access: view only; view and operate; and
view, operate, and service.
H. Control Authority: At least four conditions: Off, local manual control at chiller, local
automatic control at chiller, and automatic control through a remote source.
I. Communication Port: RS-232 port, USB 2.0 port, or equivalent connection capable
of connecting a printer and a notebook computer.
J. BAS Interface: Factory-installed hardware and software to enable the BAS to

monitor, control, and display chiller status and alarms.
1. Hardwired Points:
a. Monitoring: On-off status, common trouble alarm electrical power

demand (kilowatts) electrical power consumption (kilowatt-hours)
power factor
b. Control: On-off operation, chilled-water, discharge temperature set-
point adjustment electrical power demand limit
2. ASHRAE 135 (BACnet) communication interface with the BAS shall enable the
BAS operator to remotely control and monitor the chiller from an operator
workstation. Control features and monitoring points displayed locally at chiller
control panel shall be available through the BAS.
2.12 FINISH
A. Paint chiller, using manufacturer's standard procedures, except comply with the
following minimum requirements:
1. Provide at least one coat of primer with a total dry film thickness of at least
0.05 mm.
2. Provide at least two coats of alkyd-modified, vinyl enamel or epoxy,
polyurethane finish with a total dry film thickness of at least 0.10 mm.
23 64 16
3. Paint surfaces that are to be insulated before applying the insulation.

4. Paint installed insulation to match adjacent uninsulated surfaces.
5. Color of finish coat to be manufacturer's standard.
B. Provide Owner with quart container of paint used in application of topcoat to use in
touchup applications after Project Closeout.
2.13 ACCESSORIES
A. Flow Switches:
1. Chiller manufacturer shall furnish a switch for each evaporator and condenser
and verify field-mounting location before installation.
2. Paddle Flow Switches:
a. Vane operated to actuate a double-pole, double-throw switch with

one pole field wired to the chiller control panel and the other pole field
wired to the BAS.
b. Contacts: Platinum alloy, silver alloy, or gold-plated switch contacts
with a rating of 10 A at 120-V ac.
c. Pressure rating equal to pressure rating of heat exchanger.
d. Construct body and wetted parts of Type 316 stainless steel.
e. House switch in a NEMA 250, Type 4x enclosure constructed of die-cast
aluminum.
f. Vane length to suit installation.
3. Pressure Differential Switches:
a. Construction: Wetted parts of body and trim constructed of Type 316

stainless steel.
b. Performance: Switch shall withstand, without damage, the full-pressure
rating of the heat exchanger applied to either port and exhibit zero set-
point shift due to variation in working pressure.
c. Set Point: Screw type, field adjustable.
d. Electrical Connections: Internally mounted screw-type terminal blocks.
e. Switch Enclosure: NEMA 250, Type 4x
f. Switch Action: Double-pole, double-throw switch with one pole field
wired to the chiller control panel and the other pole field wired to the
BAS.
B. Vibration Isolation:
1. Chiller manufacturer shall furnish vibration isolation for each chiller.

2. Neoprene Pad:
a. Two layers of 10-mm thick, ribbed- or waffle-pattern neoprene pads

separated by a 16-gage, stainless-steel plate.
b. Fabricate pads from 40- to 50-durometer neoprene.
c. Provide stainless-steel square bearing plate to load the pad uniformly
between 138 and 276 kPa with a 3- to 4-mm deflection.
23 64 16
3. Spring Isolator:
a. Stable in operation and designed for not less than 30 percent reserve
deflection beyond actual operating conditions. Isolators shall be
designed so that the Kx/Ky ratio shall be 1.0 or more for stability.
b. Provide PVC or neoprene-coated springs and hot-dip, galvanized-steel
components. Aluminum components shall be etched and painted.
Nuts, bolts, and washers shall be zinc electroplated.
c. Isolators shall be adjustable and with an open spring, having one or
more coil springs attached to a top compression plate and a
baseplate. An elastomeric pad with a minimum thickness of 6 mm shall
be bonded to the baseplate.
d. Spring assembly shall be removable and shall fit within a welded steel
enclosure consisting of a top plate and rigid lower housing, which serves
as a blocking device during installation. Isolated restraining bolts shall
not be engaged during normal operation and shall connect the top
plate and lower housing to prevent the isolated equipment from rising
when drained of fluid.
e. Isolators shall be selected for a nominal 25-mm deflection as minimum /
manufacturer recommendation shall be follwoed.
C. Sound Barrier:
1. Furnish removable and reusable sound-barrier covers over the compressor

housing, hermetic motor, compressor suction and discharge piping, and
condenser shell.
2. Provide for repeated installation and removal without use of tape or calk.
3. Inner and outer cover shall consist of a PTFE-impregnated fiberglass cloth
enclosing heavy-density, needled fiberglass insulation material with a mass-
loaded vinyl acoustic barrier.
4. Covers shall be double sewn and lock stitched with edges folded and sewn so
no raw cut edges are exposed.
5. Form covers around control devices, gages, conduit, piping, and supports
without degrading sound-barrier performance.
6. Continuously lap all exposed seams at least 50 mm for better sound
containment.
7. Permanently label each section of cover to indicate its location, description,
size, and number sequence.
8. Randomly place stainless-steel quilting pins to prevent covers from shifting and
sagging.
D. Tool Kit: Chiller manufacturer shall assemble a tool kit specially designed for use in
serving the chiller(s) furnished. Include special tools required to service chiller
components not readily available to Owner service personnel in performing routine
maintenance. Place tools in a lockable case with hinged cover. Provide a list of
each tool furnished and attach the list to underside of case cover.
2.14 CAPACITIES AND CHARACTERISTICS
A. Capacity: As Per Schedule
B. Full-Load Efficiency:
23 64 16
1. COP: As per 90.1 – 2016 minimum

2. EER: As per 90.1 – 2016 minimum
3. Power Input/Cooling Output: As per 90.1 – 2016 minimum
4. Comply with GS-31.
5. Comply with FEMP.
C. Part-Load : Described in 100% Technical Submission
2.15 PACKAGED REFRIGERANT RECOVERY UNITS
A. Packaged portable unit consisting of compressor, air-cooled condenser, recovery

system, tank pressure gages, filter-dryer, and valving that allows for switching
between liquid and vapor recovery mode. Refrigerant recovery unit shall be
factory mounted on an ASME-constructed and -stamped refrigerant storage vessel
that is sized to hold the full refrigerant charge of the largest chiller furnished.
2.16 HEAT-EXCHANGER, BRUSH-CLEANING SYSTEM
A. Furnish for field installation a brush-cleaning system on each chiller condenser for
tube cleaning and improved heat transfer.
B. System shall maintain tube fouling at or below design conditions without interrupting
normal equipment operation.
C. System shall consist of a brush inserted in each tube and a catch basket attached
to each end of the tube. A four-way valve shall operate to reverse the direction of
water flow to push the brush through the tube while removing tube deposits. Four-
way reversing valve's actuator shall be controlled by a preset time cycle that
provides regular tube brushing during equipment operation. Frequency of the
brushing cycle shall be set up to match Project requirements.
D. Components:
1. Brush: Each brush shall have nylon bristles, titanium wires, and polypropylene
tips. Brush interference fit with the ID of the tube shall not exceed 0.6 mm.
2. Basket: Single-piece polypropylene basket with neck OD to press fit inner
diameter of tube. Design shall provide for insertion of eddy current probe or
removal of brushes without removing baskets from the valve.
3. Four-Way Valve:
a. Construct valve body of carbon steel with internal sealing parts of hard
rubber and Type 304 stainless steel.
b. Configure valve with parallel flow connections to minimize field
installation piping.
c. Construct to comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code:
Section VIII, Division 1, at a system working pressure equal to condenser.
d. Pipe connections shall be flanged.
e. Valve manufacturer to test and certify a maximum leakage rate of less
than 0.05 percent of the design flow rate at operation conditions of
maximum differential pressure.
f. Hydrostatically test to 1.5 times the design working pressure.
23 64 16
g. Design the valve to cause no more than 3-kPa pressure drop at design
flow conditions.
h. Provide valve with valve-mounted indicating/warning light, which shall
light before the valve begins rotation.
i. Valve Actuator: Mount electric actuator to operate valve.
j. Valve Actuator: Mount pneumatic piston-type actuator to operate
valve. Actuator shall be suitable for operation using field-supplied air
pressure.
k. Position Switches: Factory mount micro switches on the valve to
indicate the complete turn of valve in both normal and reverse flow.
4. Control Panel: Factory or field mount a control panel on chiller. Control panel
shall include the following features:
a. NEMA 250, Type 4x enclosure.

b. Timer to automatically initiate the cleaning cycle over a 24-hour period.
c. Manual override of preset cleaning cycle.
d. Visual indication of "Power On," "Diverter Position," "Normal Flow,"
"Reverse Flow," and "Valve Malfunction" indicating a slow turn or
incomplete valve turn.
e. For pneumatic actuators, mount four-way solenoid valve for actuator
operation in the control panel.
f. Flow switch bypass.
g. Unloading signal to chiller.
A. Perform functional run tests of chillers before shipping.
B. Factory performance test chillers, before shipping, according to ARI 550/590.
1. Test the following conditions:
a. Design conditions indicated.

b. Reduction in capacity from design to minimum load in steps of 10 with
condenser fluid at design conditions.
c. At five point(s) of varying part-load performance to be selected by
Owner at time of test.
C. For chillers using R-134a refrigerant, factory test and inspect evaporator and
condenser according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII,
Division 1.
D. For chillers located indoors, rate sound power level according to ARI 575.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine chillers before installation. Reject chillers that are damaged.
23 64 16
B. Examine roughing-in for equipment support, anchor-bolt sizes and locations, piping,
and electrical connections to verify actual locations, sizes, and other conditions
affecting chiller performance, maintenance, and operations before equipment
installation.
1. Final chiller locations indicated on Drawings are approximate. Determine

exact locations before roughing-in for piping and electrical connections.
3.2 CHILLER INSTALLATION
A. Install chillers on support structure indicated.
B. Equipment Mounting: Install chiller using restrained spring isolators.
1. Minimum Deflection: 25 mm / Manufacturer Recommendation
C. Equipment Mounting: Install chiller on concrete bases. Comply with requirements

for concrete bases specified in Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete."

equipment.
D. Maintain manufacturer's recommended clearances for service and maintenance.
E. Charge chiller with refrigerant and fill with oil if not factory installed.
F. Install separate devices furnished by manufacturer and not factory installed.
3.3 HEAT-EXCHANGER, BRUSH-CLEANING SYSTEM INSTALLATION
A. Install brush-cleaning system control panel adjacent to chiller control panel.
B. Arrange piping to provide service access to four-way valve assembly without

affecting access to chiller. Secure valve to prevent lateral movement and vibration
during operation.
C. Provide field electric power, as required, to each system control panel and electric
actuated valve.
D. Provide pneumatic piping with pressure regulator and isolation valve to each
pneumatic supply connection. Coordinate field source of air with manufacturer to
ensure that requirements are satisfied for proper valve operation.
23 64 16
E. Interconnect brush-cleaning system controls with chiller controls. Coordinate

requirements to ensure safe, trouble-free operation.
F. Functionally test the entire brush-cleaning system, including the valve, actuator,
position indicator, and control panel, with chiller in operation.
3.4 CONNECTIONS
A. Comply with requirements for piping specified in Division 23 Section "Hydronic

Piping" and Division 23 Section "Refrigerant Piping." Drawings indicate general
B. Install piping adjacent to chiller to allow service and maintenance.
C. Evaporator Fluid Connections: Connect to evaporator inlet with shutoff valve,

strainer, flexible connector, thermometer, and plugged tee with pressure gage.
Connect to evaporator outlet with shutoff valve, balancing valve, flexible
connector, flow switch, thermometer, plugged tee with shutoff valve and pressure
gage, flow meter, and drain connection with valve. Make connections to chiller
with a mechanical coupling.
D. Condenser-Fluid Connections: Connect to condenser inlet with shutoff valve,

strainer, flexible connector, thermometer, and plugged tee with pressure gage.
Connect to condenser outlet with shutoff valve, balancing valve, flexible
connector, flow switch, thermometer, plugged tee with shutoff valve and pressure
gage, flow meter, and drain connection with valve. Make connections to chiller
with a mechanical coupling.
E. Heat-Reclaim Condenser-Fluid Connections: Connect to condenser inlet with

shutoff valve, strainer, flexible connector, thermometer, and plugged tee with
pressure gage. Connect to condenser outlet with shutoff valve, balancing
valve, flexible connector, flow switch, thermometer, plugged tee with shutoff valve
and pressure gage, flow meter, and drain connection with valve. Make
connections to chiller with a mechanical coupling.
F. Refrigerant Pressure Relief Device Connections: For chillers installed indoors, extend
vent piping to the outdoors without valves or restrictions. Comply with ASHRAE 15.
Connect to chiller pressure relief device with flexible connector and dirt leg with
drain valve.
G. For chillers equipped with a purge system, extend [purge vent piping] [separate
purge vent piping for each chiller] to the outdoors. Comply with ASHRAE 15 and
ASHRAE 147.
H. Connect each chiller drain connection with a union and drain pipe, and extend
pipe, full size of connection, to floor drain. Provide a shutoff valve at each
connection.
3.5 STARTUP SERVICE
23 64 16

instructions.
2. Verify that refrigerant charge is sufficient and chiller has been leak tested.
3. Verify that pumps are installed and functional.
4. Verify that thermometers and gages are installed.
5. Operate chiller for run-in period.
6. Check bearing lubrication and oil levels.
7. Verify that refrigerant pressure relief device is vented outside.
8. Verify proper motor rotation.
9. Verify static deflection of vibration isolators, including deflection during chiller
startup and shutdown.
10. Verify and record performance of fluid flow and low-temperature interlocks
for evaporator and condenser.
11. Verify and record performance of chiller protection devices.
12. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged or malfunctioning
B. Inspect field-assembled components, equipment installation, and piping and

electrical connections for proper assembly, installation, and connection.
C. Prepare test and inspection startup reports.
3.6 DEMONSTRATION

personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain chillers. [Video record the training
sessions.]
23 64 16
23 65 00 - Cooling Towers
PART 1 - GENERAL

Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
1. Open-circuit, induced-draft, counter flow cooling towers.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. BMS: Building management system.
B. FRP: Fiber-reinforced polyester.
A. Delegated Design: Design cooling tower support structure and wind restraints,
including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer,
using performance requirements and design criteria. Cooling tower structural design
calculations, certified by Manufacturer’s Professional Engineer shall be submitted for
review and approval.
1.5 REFERENCES
CTI STD 111 : Gear speed reducers for Industrial Water Cooling Tower.
CTI ATC 105 : Acceptance Test Code for Water Cooling Towers.
CTI ATC 128 : Code for Measurement of Sound from Water Cooling Towers
CTI WTG 122 : Guideline for Side Stream Filtration as an Aid to Cooling Tower
Performance
CTI STD 131 : Fiberglass-Reinforced Plastic Panels
CTI STD 136 : Thermoplastic Materials Used for Fills, Louvers and Drift Eliminators
ASTM E 84 : Surface burning characteristics of building materials
NEMA MG 1 : Motors and Generators
CTI-STD-137: Fiberglass Pultruded Structural Products for Use in Cooling Towers”
CTI Bulletin ESG-152 “Structural Design of FRP Components”
NFPA 214 Standards on Water-Cooling Towers
23 65 00
1.6 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include rated capacities,
pressure drop, fan performance data, rating curves with selected points indicated,
furnished specialties, and accessories.
1. Maximum flow rate.

2. Minimum flow rate.
3. Drift loss as percent of design flow rate.
4. Volume of water in suspension for purposes of sizing a remote storage tank.
5. Sound power levels in eight octave bands for operation with fans off, fans at
minimum, and design speed.
6. Performance curves for the following:
a. Varying entering-water temperatures from design to minimum.

b. Varying ambient wet-bulb temperatures from design to minimum.
c. Varying water flow rates from design to minimum.
d. Varying fan operation (off, minimum, and design speed).
7. Cooling tower performance at the following:
a. Part load operation.
b. Higher ambient / condenser water supply temperature.
a. The maximum cooling capacity that can be obtained from selected unit, at
Design conditions.
c. The maximum wet bulb temperature tolerable
8. Fan airflow, brake horsepower, and drive losses.

9. CTI Performance Curves
10. Pump flow rate, head, brake horsepower, and efficiency.
11. Motor amperage, efficiency, and power factor at 100, 75, 50, and 25 percent
of nameplate horsepower.
12. Electrical power requirements for each cooling tower component requiring
power.
B. Shop Drawings: Complete set of manufacturer's prints of cooling tower assemblies,

control panels, sections and elevations, and unit isolation. Include the following:
1. Assembled unit dimensions.

2. Weight and load distribution.
3. Required clearances for maintenance and operation.
4. Sizes and locations of piping and wiring connections.
6. Structural and Builders Work Details
C. Delegated-Design Submittal: Design cooling tower support structure and wind

restraints, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional
engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria. Cooling tower
structural design calculations, certified by Manufacturer’s Professional Engineer shall
be submitted for review and approval.
1. Detail fabrication and assembly of support structure.

2. Vibration Isolation Base Details: Detail fabrication including anchorages and
attachments to structure and to supported equipment. Include adjustable
motor bases, rails, and frames for equipment mounting.
23 65 00
3. Design Calculations: Calculate requirements for selecting vibration isolators

and wind restraints and for designing vibration isolation bases.
D. Coordination Drawings: Floor plans, drawn to scale, on which the following items
are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from Installers of the items
involved:
1. Structural supports.
2. Piping roughing-in requirements.
3. Wiring roughing-in requirements, including spaces reserved for electrical
equipment.
4. Access requirements, including working clearances for mechanical controls
and electrical equipment, and tube pull and service clearances.
E. Certificates: For certification required in "Quality Assurance" Article.
F. Source quality-control reports.
G. Field quality-control reports.
H. Startup service reports.
I. Operation and Maintenance Data: For each cooling tower to include in

J. Warranty: Sample of special warranty.
A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Certified by CTI by authorized third party agency for
testing as per CTI ATC-105.

application.
C. ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1-2010 Compliance: Applicable requirements in

ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1-2010, Section 6 - "Heating, Ventilating, and Air-Conditioning."
D. ASME Compliance: Fabricate and label heat-exchanger coils to comply with ASME
Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII, Division 1.
E. CTI Certification: Cooling tower thermal performance according to CTI STD 201,
"Certification Standard for Commercial Water-Cooling Towers Thermal
Performance."
F. FMG approval and listing in the latest edition of FMG's "Approval Guide."
1.8 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases with actual equipment provided.
23 65 00
B. Coordinate sizes, locations, and anchoring attachments of structural-steel support

structures.
C. Coordinate sizes and locations of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof
penetrations with actual equipment provided.
1.9 WARRANTY

repair or replace the following components of cooling towers that fail in materials or
workmanship within specified warranty period:
1. Fan assembly including fan, drive, and motor.

2. All components of cooling tower.
3. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.
1.10 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Spare Parts as recommended by the manufacturer, including but not limited to the
following:
1. Electric Motor 2 No
2. Gear Reducer 2 No
3. Drive Shaft 2 No
4. Fan Assembly 2 Set
5. Vibration Limit Switch 1 No
6. Low Oil Level Switch 1 No
B. Spare parts supplied under this clause shall be provided in original packing, clearly
labeled and referenced.
C. Spare parts furnished under this clause shall not be used during the maintenance pe-
riod without the written permission of the owner (Contractor shall procure spares, tools
etc., to fulfill his obligation to operate and maintain the system during the contract
period).
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 OPEN-CIRCUIT, INDUCED-DRAFT, COUNTERFLOW COOLING TOWERS
A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following

available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not
limited to, the following:
1. Evapco Inc.; USA
2. SPX-Marley Cooling Technologies USA.
23 65 00
B. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide induced

draft, counter-flow, field erected, industrial duty cooling tower as shown in the plans
or comparable product by one of the following:
1. Evapco Inc. USA
2. SPX-Marley Cooling Technologies USA.
C. The tower and all its components shall be designed to withstand a wind load based
on ASCE-7 and a seismic load based on UBC. As a minimum, a stability load of 2
1/2% shall be applied to the structure. For non-domestic jobs, a minimum design
wind load of 30 lbf/sq ft. (1.44kPa) shall be used. Fan decks and other work levels
shall be designed for a uniform load of 60 lbf/sqft (2.88kPa), or a concentrated live
load of 600 lbs (275kg). Allowable deflection at 60 psf uniform load shall be 1/180 of
span. Fill and fill supports shall be capable of withstanding a 40 lbf/sq ft. (1.92kPa)
live load. Guardrails shall be capable of withstanding a concentrated live load of at
least 200 lb applied in any direction at any point along the top rail.
D. The cooling tower manufacturer shall guarantee that the tower supplied will meet
the specified performance conditions when the tower is installed according to
plans. If, because of a suspected thermal performance deficiency, the owner
chooses to conduct an on-site thermal performance test in the presence of the
manufacturer, and under the supervision of a qualified, disinterested third party in
accordance with CTI (Cooling Technology Institute) ATC-105 standards during the
first full year of operation; and if the tower fails to perform within the limits of test
tolerance; then the cooling tower manufacturer shall make alterations as it deems
necessary to overcome indicated deficiency. Should alterations prove to be
inadequate, the owner, at the cooling tower manufacturer’s option, shall be
compensated by either (or a combination of both) of the following: (a) Installation
of additional cooling tower capacity; (b) A refund of a percentage of the contract
price proportional to the deficiency as established.
E. Structure:
1. Tower framework shall consist of structural shapes of pultruded fiberglass

composites having a flame spread rate of 25 or less. Columns and diagonals
shall be 75 x 75mm or larger box-section, with a minimum 6.5mm wall
thickness. Columns shall be spaced on no greater than 1.8m centers
transversely and 2.75m centers longitudinally. Columns requiring anchorage
shall be anchored to the concrete cold-water basin by heavy gauge series
316 stainless steel anchor clips.
2. Except at fill and fan deck support levels, longitudinal and transverse girts shall
be 100mm channel sections located on both sides of interior columns; and on
the inside of all perimeter columns. Girts at the fill and fan deck support levels
shall typically be 6" channel sections. These members sizes may vary
depending on tower loading. Girt lines shall be located on vertical centers not
to exceed 1900mm, except as may be required in towers requiring fill heights
that would encounter the girt line. In that case, the lower girt line in the fill
area may be lowered to provide room for the fill.
3. A tension/compression system of diagonal braces shall stiffen the structure

and transfer wind and seismic loads to the basin anchor points. Diagonal
connectors used to transmit forces through column lines shall be of 12.5mm
thick fiber reinforced polyester (FRP). Diagonals shall be anchored to the cold-
23 65 00
water basin using heavy gauge series 316 stainless steel anchor clips. The line
of action through the diagonal to the point of anchorage shall be straight.
4. All structural connections and splices shall be through-bolted using full shank
12.5mm diameter, or larger, series silicon bronze machine bolts, nuts and
washers. Glued structural connections will not be allowed.
5. Critical framing joints shall be augmented with 12.5mm I.D., heavy wall
(Sched. 40) structural sleeves of silicon bronze or fiberglass pultrusion. Framing
specific to those joints shall be factory-drilled to accept insertion of the
sleeves. Bidders shall include with their quotation complete framework wind
and/or seismic diagrams along with column operating and shutdown point
loads for all models quoted, based upon the specified performance and
design loadings.
F. Fan Deck and Fan Cylinders:
The fan deck shall act as a working platform for maintenance personnel. It shall be
pultruded fiberglass having a flame spread rating of 25 or less with a top surface at
least 3mm thick and shall have a slip resistant surface. Fan deck panels shall be sup-
ported by framing girts and shall interlock along the lengths of the panels to prevent
differential deflections between panels. To minimize turbulence of airflow into the fan
cylinder, fan deck protrusion into the fan cylinder opening shall not exceed 25mm.
Fan cylinders shall be molded FRP, no less than 2.1 high, velocity recovery type fan
cylinders, with a maximum flare angle of 12°, with a maximum assumed velocity re-
covery of 75% of the difference in average velocity pressure, with eased inlets to
promote smooth airflow at blade tips. The operating plane of the fan shall be at a
level above the fan deck of at least 15% of the overall fan diameter. Fan tip clear-
ance shall not exceed 0.5% of the fan diameter. Each fan cylinder segment shall be
through-bolted to both the fan deck and a primary fan deck framing member. Fan
cylinder connection and anchorage hardware shall be of silicon bronze material.
Each fan cylinder shall include a 150mm diameter, screened view port with a remov-
able clear plastic window.
G. Collection Basin: Configure tower for installation with a field-constructed collection

basin.
H. Ultrasonic Collection Basin Water-Level Controller with Solenoid Valve:
1. Enclosure: NEMA 250, Type 4X.

2. Controller: Ultrasonic level sensor/transmitter and relays factory wired to a
terminal strip to control water makeup valve and signal a level alarm.
Controller shall provide continuous level indication through a 4- to 20-mA
signal for connection to BMS.
3. Water Stilling Chamber: FRP.
4. Solenoid Valve: Slow closing with stainless-steel body; controlled and
powered through level controller in response to water-level set point.
5. Electrical Connection Requirements: 120 V, single phase, 50 Hz.
I. Pressurized Hot Water Distribution Piping: Hot water shall be distributed to the fill in
each cell via a system of headers, laterals, branch arms, and nozzles, installed in the
region above the fill and beneath the drift eliminators. Headers may be either RTR
(reinforced thermosetting resin) or PVC. Laterals shall be PVC. Branch arms and
23 65 00
nozzles shall be injection-molded polypropylene. The joint between branch arms

and nozzles shall be threaded so nozzles can be easily removed for cleaning of the
branch arms. Nozzles shall be of the large orifice, low-pressure, down-spray type,
having no moving parts or restrictors that will promote clogging.
The piping system shall be sized for a flow velocity that will insure relatively equal
flow to all areas of the cooling tower fill. Headers shall be equipped with individual
1.2kpa flanged inlets, drilled to conform to Class 125 and Class 150 ANSI
requirements, and located approximately 305 mm outside the tower casing at or
near the transverse centerline of each cell. Headers shall be vented to atmosphere
by an open standpipe at the downstream end of the header.
J. Fill:
1. The fill media shall be fabricated from rigid, corrugated PVC sheets that are
designed specifically for cooling tower service and is UV protected. The
media modules shall be resistant to rot, fungi, bacteria and inorganic /
organic acids and alkalis commonly found
in cooling towers. The PVC sheet shall be prime, rigid PVC conforming to ASTM
D1784: 12454B with the following minimum properties:
2. Flame Spread Rating ASTM E-84 Less than 20
3. Flammability D635 Self-extinguishing < 5 sec.
4. The fill media shall be bonded into rigid packs that are self-supporting. The fill
pack shall be bottom supported on FRP fill beams and capable of a
concentrated bearing capacity of 300 lb/ft2 to handle temporary
maintenance traffic on the fill surface. Alternate layers of fill shall be stacked
at 90degree angles. The fill design shall be high performance PVC film fill with
a minimum flute size of 19mm. The fill should be non-fouling by incorporating
vertical flutes that provide directional changes in air and water. The fill pack is
to be designed for a maximum operating temperature of 50oC without
damage. The thickness of the PVC sheet material shall be made of 0.38mm
minimum before forming to provide long structural life of the fill packs and to
resist erosion from water spray.
K. Drift Eliminator:
1. Material: PVC; resistant to rot, decay, and biological attack; with maximum
flame-spread index of 20 according to ASTM E 84.
2. Drift eliminators shall be thermoformed of 17 mil or heavier PVC. They shall be
cellular type, triple-pass, and shall limit drift losses to no more than 0.0005% of
design GPM flow rate. They shall be factory-assembled into easily-handled
packs that nest together to form a continuous plane of drift eliminators
throughout the plan area of each tower cell. Eliminators shall be supported by
framing girds on no greater than 915mm centers.
3. UV Treatment: Inhibitors to protect against damage caused by UV radiation.
4. Configuration: Multipass, designed and tested to reduce water carryover to
achieve performance indicated.
5. Section shall be provided for access to the distribution system in each cell
through the drift eliminator.
L. Air-Intake Louvers:
1. Material: FRP.
23 65 00
2. UV Treatment: Inhibitors to protect against damage caused by UV radiation.

3. Louver Blades: Arranged to uniformly direct air into cooling tower, to minimize
air resistance, and to prevent water from splashing out of tower during all
modes of operation including operation with fans off.
4. Inlet louvers shall be constructed from FRP with a flame spread rating of 25 or
less, designed to minimize water from blowing out of the tower basin. Provide
removable louver sections on each air side of each cell that include stainless
steel quick latching devices to allow removal and replacement during
cleaning of basin that require no tools to operate. Size of removable sections
shall be a minimum of 1 meter wide by 1.5 meter high to allow personnel
access
M. Fan: Balanced at the factory after assembly.
1. Blade Material: FRP with minimum of 6 blades with appropriate twist and
taper to produce maximum flow.
2. Hub Material: Galvanized steel with triple epoxy coat.
3. Blade Pitch: Field adjustable.
4. Protective Enclosure: Removable, galvanized-steel, wire-mesh screens,
complying with OSHA regulations.
5. Fan Shaft Bearings: Self-aligning ball or roller bearings with moisture-proof
seals and premium, moisture-resistant grease suitable for temperatures
between minus 29 and plus 149 deg C. Bearings designed for an L-10 life of
50,000 hours.
6. Bearings Grease Fittings: Extended lubrication lines to an easily accessible
location.
7. The fans shall be adjustable pitch, multi-blade, axial flow, propeller type
selected to
deliver the required design airflow at a maximum efficiency and provide long
life when
handling saturated air at high velocities. The blade material shall be fiberglass-
reinforced
polyester of vinyl ester resin. An FRP air seal disc shall be provided to prevent
recirculation of the air at the fan hub. The fan hub shall be hot dipped
galvanized after fabrication. The fan hardware shall be grade 316 stainless
steel bolts, nuts, and washers. The leading edges of the fan blades shall
include a leading edge protection system to prevent erosion from entrapped
water and solid particles in the airflow. The fan shall be designed with a
maximum tip speed of 12,000 feet per minute (61 m/s) to minimize fan noise.
N. Gear Drive: Right angle, reduced speed, and designed for cooling tower
applications according to CTI STD 111and AGMA Std 420.04. Motor and gear drive
shall be aligned before shipment.
1. Gear Drive and Coupling Service Factor: 2.0 based on motor nameplate
horsepower.
2. Housing: Gray Cast iron, with epoxy or polyurethane finish, beveled high-
strength steel gears continuously bathed in oil, and with lubrication to other
internal parts at all operating speeds.
3. Mounting: Directly mounted to fan hub and connected to motor so motor
shaft is in horizontal position.
4. Operation: Able to operate both forward and in reverse.
23 65 00
5. Drive-to-Motor Connection: Connected to motor located outside of cooling

tower casing by a full-floating non lubricated drive shaft.
6. Drive Shaft: Each drive system includes a composite fiber, single piece drive
shaft connected by flexible, self-aligning couplings to the motor and to the
gear reducer. Each drive shaft and coupling set is sized for a minimum service
factor of 2.0 based on the motor nameplate rating. The coupling hubs are
keyed to the shafts, and the shaft assembly is dynamically balanced.
Coupling hubs and hardware are of grade 316 stainless steel material.
7. Extend oil fill, drain, and vent to outside of cooling tower casing using
galvanized-steel piping. Provide installation with oil-level sight glass.
O. Fan Motor:
1. Motor Enclosure: NEMA rated design B Totally enclosed fan cooled TEFC
2. Corrosion protection: Epoxy Coating
3. Energy Efficiency: Comply with ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1 2010.
4. Service Factor: 1.15 (not to be considered for available load).
5. Insulation: Class F.
6. Variable-Speed Motors: Inverter-duty rated per NEMA MG-1, Section IV,
"Performance Standard Applying to All Machines,
7. Motor Location: Mounted outside of cooling tower casing and cooling tower
discharge airstream.
8. Ambient temperature: 50-55oC
9. Temperature Rise: 40oC
10. Speed: 1500RPM
11. Noise level 85dbA at 1 meter
12. Electric characteristics: 3phase 50Hz 415 Volts
13. Motor Base: Adjustable, or other suitable provision for adjusting belt tension.
14. Motors shall be located outside the fan cylinders and shall be connected to
the speed reducers by tubular, extended, full floating, non-lubricated drive
shafts. Driveshaft tubes shall be carbon fiber/glass/epoxy composite. Flanges
shall be manufactured of type 316 stainless steel, attached to the tube by
type 316 stainless steel compression rings. Couplings shall be cast 316 stainless,
joined to the driveshaft by flexible neoprene bushings and type 316 stainless
steel inserts. Connecting hardware shall be 316 Stainless steel. Driveshaft
assemblies shall be dynamically balanced at the factory at full motor speed.
Two galvanized steel driveshaft guards anchored to the mechanical
equipment support shall surround the driveshaft for containment in the event
of failure.
P. Fan Discharge Stack:

1. The fan stacks shall be manufactured from high quality hand-laid FRP and
shall provide a minimum of 0.43mm UV gel-coat protection all surfaces.
2. The fan stacks shall be fabricated from fire retardant, self-extinguishing resin
with a flame spread rating of 25 or less per ASTM E-84.
3. The stack profile shall have a curved bell inlet to minimize fan inlet losses and a
velocity recovery exit profile to reduce fan energy.
4. The fan stack shall include a bolted-in-place removable access panel for
inspection of the mechanical drive equipment from the deck level.
5. The stack shall also provide an observation port above the fan blade path.
Fan hardware shall be grade 316 stainless steel.
6. The stacks shall be anchored to the FRP deck on 460 mm centers maximum,
and also to tower fan deck structural member in at least one place per fan
stack section.
23 65 00
7. Maintain minimum tip clearance of no greater than 0.5% of overall fan

diameter.
8. The minimum stack height shall be minimum 2134mm and no fan screen is
required. If fan stacks of 2134mm are not possible and a lower fan stack is
installed, a grade 316 stainless steel removable fan screen shall be provided.
Q. Vibration Switch: For each fan drive.
1. Enclosure: NEMA 250, Type 4.

2. Type: Double Pole, double throw (DPDT)
3. Vibration Detection: Sensor with a field-adjustable, acceleration-sensitivity set
point in a range of 0 to 1 g and frequency range of 0 to 3000 cycles per
minute. Cooling tower manufacturer shall recommend switch set point for
proper operation and protection.
4. Provide switch with manual-reset button for field connection to a BMS
and hardwired connection to fan motor electrical circuit.
5. Switch shall, on sensing excessive vibration, signal an alarm through the BMS
and shut down the fan.
R. Gear-Drive, Oil-Level Switch: Low-oil-level warning switch for connection to a BMS.
1. Switch shall, on reaching a low-oil-level set point recommended by cooling

tower manufacturer, signal an alarm through the BMS.
2. Type: Solid state, capacitance –actuated CSA approved
S. Cell Partitions:
1. The tower shall be partitioned such that the fan of each cell can be operated
and cycled independently of the remaining cells. Full-width and full height, 12
oz/sq ft FRP panel partitions, Fire Retardant having a flame spread rate of 25
or less, shall extend from casing to casing across the tower, and from the top
of the basin partition wall upward to the underneath side of the fan deck
floor.
2. A full-length, 12 oz/sq ft FRP panel partitions, Fire Retardant having a flame
spread rate of 25 or less, panel partition shall extend from end wall to end wall
along the approximate centerline of the tower, rising from the normal
operating water level to the underneath side of the fill. If end walls are open
for air entry, wind walls shall extend inward at an approximate 45° angle from
the corner columns of the end cells to meet the longitudinal partition. The
purpose of this partition system will be to prevent falling water from being
blown out the leeward face of the tower.
T. Access and Safety: The tower shall be designed and equipped to provide
comfortable, safe access to all components requiring routine inspection and
maintenance.
1. The fan deck of the tower shall be surrounded by sturdy 100 x 100mm
pultruded FRP angle top rail and toe board plus a 90mm pultruded FRP
channel intermediate rail, all conforming to OSHA standards. The guardrail
shall be 1100 high. Top rails and intermediate rails shall be through-bolted to
75 x 75mm columns both longitudinally and transversely. The toe boards shall
be fastened to the tower columns or guardrail posts with self drilling/self
tapping screws.
23 65 00
2. One end wall of the tower shall be equipped with a structural fiberglass
stairway rising from the level of the grade to the fan deck. Stairs shall be
600mm wide with a slope of 41.5° and have an 200mm rise and 230mm run.
Treads shall have a nonskid surface. Landings shall occur at 6'-0 elevations.
Handrails and knee rails shall be 50x 50mm, through-bolted to 75 x 75mm
stairway posts. All stairway bolts and fasteners shall be series 316 stainless steel.
3. Each cell shall have a 900mm square hinged access hatch in the fan deck
floor, and a fiberglass ladder leading down to a landing at the drift eliminator
level. A removal section through the eliminators lifts out for access into the
spray chamber for nozzle cleaning and inspection. Other end wall of the
tower shall be equipped with a HDG/FRP Ladder with safety cage designed
per OSHA recommendations, rising from the level of the grade to the fan
deck.
4. Provide a 600mm wide portable expanded aluminum catwalk, complete with
guard rail, that will extend from the fan cylinder access-way to the fan
hub/gear reducer/driveshaft region.
5. Fan cylinders, fire Retardant having a flame spread rate of 25 or less, shall
have removable segments for access to mechanical equipment
components, and shall have a coupling guard, conforming to OSHA
standards, to shroud that portion of the driveshaft that extends outside the fan
cylinder.
6. Plenum Access: Each cell shall be provided with an FRP access hatch from
the tower roof deck to the plenum area. A FRP ladder assembly shall provide
access from the fan deck to a 1 x 1m FRP grating inspection landing at the
drift eliminator level
U. Controls: Comply with requirements in Division 23 Section "Instrumentation and

Control for HVAC."
V. Control Package: Factory installed and wired, and functionally tested at factory
before shipment.
1. NEMA 250, Type 4enclosure with removable internally mount backplate.

2. Control-circuit transformer with primary and secondary side fuses.
3. Terminal blocks with numbered and color-coded wiring to match wiring
diagram. Spare wiring terminal block for connection to external controls or
equipment.
4. Microprocessor-based controller for automatic control of fan based on
cooling tower leaving-water temperature with control features to improve
operating efficiency based on outdoor ambient wet-bulb temperature by
using adaptive logic.
5. Fan motor sequencer for multiple-cell and two-speed applications with
automatic lead stage rotation.
6. Collection basin level controller complying with requirements Ultrasonic
Collection Basin Water-Level Controller with Solenoid Valve Paragraph.
7. Electric basin heaters with temperature control and low-water-level safety
switch for each cell, complying with requirements in "Electric Basin Heater"
Paragraph.
8. Vibration switch for each fan, complying with requirements in "Vibration
Switch" Paragraph.
9. Oil-level switch for each fan with a gear drive, complying with requirement in
"Gear-Drive, Oil-Level Switch" Paragraph.
10. Single-point, field-power connection to a circuit breaker for each cooling
tower cell.
23 65 00
a. Branch power circuit to each motor and electric basin heater and to
controls circuit breaker.
b. NEMA-rated motor controller, hand-off-auto switch, and overcurrent
protection for each motor. Provide variable frequency controller with
manual bypass and line reactors for each variable-speed motor
indicated.
11. Factory-installed wiring outside of enclosures shall be in metal raceway,

except make connections to each motor and electric basin heater with liquid
tight conduit.
12. Visual indication of status and alarm with momentary test push button for each
motor.
13. Audible alarm and silence switch.
14. Visual indication of elapsed run time, graduated in hours for each motor.
15. Cooling tower shall have hardware to enable BMS to remotely monitor and
display the following:
a. Operational status of each motor.

b. Position of dampers.
c. Cooling tower leaving-fluid temperature.
d. Fan vibration alarm.
e. Oil-level alarm.
f. Collection basin high- and low-water-level alarms.
W. Personnel Access Components:
1. Doors: Large enough for personnel to access cooling tower internal

components from both cooling tower end walls. Doors shall be operable from
both sides of the door.
2. External Ladders with Safety Cages: Aluminum, galvanized- or stainless-steel,
fixed ladders with ladder extensions to access external platforms and top of
cooling tower from adjacent grade without the need for portable ladders.
Comply with 29 CFR 1910.27.
3. External Platforms with Handrails: Aluminum, FRP, or galvanized-steel bar
grating at cooling tower access doors when cooling towers are elevated and
not accessible from grade.
4. Handrail: Aluminum, galvanized steel, or stainless steel complete with knee rail
and toe board, around top of cooling tower. Comply with 29 CFR 1910.23.
5. Internal Platforms: Aluminum, FRP, or galvanized-steel bar grating.
a. Spanning the collection basin from one end of cooling tower to the
other and positioned to form a path between the access doors.
Platform shall be elevated so that all parts are above the high-water
level of the collection basin.
b. Elevated internal platforms with handrails accessible from fixed vertical
ladders to access the fan drive assembly when out of reach from
collection basin platform.
X. Capacities and Characteristics:
1. Number of Cells: 2 .
2. Air-Inlet Arrangement: All sides.
3. Maximum Drift Loss: 0.005 percent of design water flow.
23 65 00
4. Water Flow/Cell: 511 l/s

5. Minimum Water Flow/Cell: 153 l/s
6. Water Pressure Drop: kPa.
7. Entering-Water Temperature: 41.7 deg C.
8. Leaving-Water Temperature: 36.0 deg C.
9. Entering-Air Wet-Bulb Temperature: 32.2 deg C.
10. Economizer Mode: Yes
11. Fan Drive: Belt / direct / gear.

12. Fan Motor:
a. Type: Variable speed.

b. Horsepower/Cell:
c. Maximum Overcurrent Protection Device:
d. Electrical Characteristics: 415V ac, 3 phase, 50 Hz.
13. Sound Pressure Level: 35dBA at 5 m [when measured according to

CTI ATC 128].
A. Verification of Performance: Test and certify cooling tower performance according

to CTI STD 201, "Certification Standard for Commercial Water-Cooling Towers
Thermal Performance."
B. Factory pressure test heat exchangers after fabrication and prove to be free of
leaks.
C. Allow for Fact
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Before cooling tower installation, examine roughing-in for tower support, anchor-bolt
sizes and locations, piping, and electrical connections to verify actual locations,
sizes, and other conditions affecting tower performance, maintenance, and
operation.
1. Cooling tower locations indicated on Drawings are approximate. Determine

exact locations before roughing-in for piping and electrical connections.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install cooling towers on the concrete basin.
B. Equipment Mounting: Install cooling tower on concrete bases. Comply with

requirements in Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete."
23 65 00

C. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported

equipment.
D. Maintain manufacturer's recommended clearances for service and maintenance.
E. Loose Components: Install electrical components, devices, and accessories that

are not factory mounted.
3.3 CONNECTIONS

B. Install piping adjacent to cooling towers to allow service and maintenance.
C. Install flexible pipe connectors at pipe connections of cooling towers mounted on

vibration isolators.
D. Provide drain piping with valve at cooling tower drain connections and at low
points in piping.
E. Connect cooling tower overflows and drains, and piping drains to sanitary sewage
system.
F. Supply and Return Piping: Comply with applicable requirements in Division 23

Section "Hydronic Piping." Connect to entering cooling tower connections with
shutoff valve, balancing valve, thermometer, plugged tee with pressure gage, flow
meter, and drain connection with valve. Connect to leaving cooling tower
connection with shutoff valve. Make connections to cooling tower with flange, or
mechanical coupling.
G. Equalizer Piping: Piping requirements to match supply and return piping. Connect
an equalizer pipe, full size of cooling tower connection, between tower cells.
Connect to cooling tower with shutoff valve.
H. Hot-Water Piping: Comply with applicable requirements in Division 23 Section

"Hydronic Piping." Connect to supply and return basin heater with shutoff valve,
strainer, control valve, and union or flange on supply connection and union or
flange and balancing valve on return connection. Provide supply and return piping
with pressure gage and thermometer.
A. Testing Agency:
23 65 00
B. Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.
C. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to

perform field tests and inspections.
D. Perform tests and inspections.
1. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service

representative to inspect components, assemblies, and equipment
installations, including connections, and to assist in testing.
E. Tests and Inspections: Comply with CTI ATC 105, "Acceptance Test Code for Water
Cooling Towers."
F. Cooling towers will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and
inspections.
G. Prepare test and inspection reports.
3.5 STARTUP SERVICE
B. Inspect field-assembled components, equipment installation, and piping and

electrical connections for proper assemblies, installations, and connections.
C. Obtain performance data from manufacturer.

instructions and perform the following:
a. Clean entire unit including basins.

b. Verify that accessories are properly installed.
c. Verify clearances for airflow and for cooling tower servicing.
d. Check for vibration isolation and structural support.
e. Lubricate bearings.
f. Verify fan rotation for correct direction and for vibration or binding and
correct problems.
g. Adjust belts to proper alignment and tension.
h. Verify proper oil level in gear-drive housing. Fill with oil to proper level.
i. Operate variable-speed fans through entire operating range and check
for harmonic vibration imbalance. Set motor controller to skip speeds
resulting in abnormal vibration.
j. Check vibration switch setting. Verify operation.
k. Verify water level in tower basin. Fill to proper startup level. Check
makeup water-level control and valve.
l. Verify operation of basin heater and control.
m. Verify that cooling tower air discharge is not recirculating air into tower
or HVAC air intakes. Recommend corrective action.
n. Replace defective and malfunctioning units.
D. Start cooling tower and associated water pumps. Follow manufacturer's written
starting procedures.
23 65 00
E. Prepare a written startup report that records the results of tests and inspections.
3.6 ADJUSTING
A. Set and balance water flow to each tower inlet.
B. Adjust water-level control for proper operating level.
3.7 DEMONSTRATION

personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain cooling towers.
23 65 00
23 73 13 - Air Handling Units
PART 1 - GENERAL

B. This section on Rooftop Packaged Unit is to be read in conjunction with the

following section:
Number Description
230713 INSULATION
1.2 SUMMARY
1. Constant-air-volume, single-zone air-handling units.

2. Constant-air-volume, multi zone air-handling units.
3. Variable-air-volume, single-zone air-handling units.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each air-handling unit indicated.
1. Unit dimensions and weight.

2. Cabinet material, metal thickness, finishes, insulation, and accessories.
3. Fans:
a. Certified fan-performance curves with system operating conditions

indicated.
b. Certified fan-sound power ratings.
c. Fan construction and accessories.
d. Motor ratings, electrical characteristics, and motor accessories.
4. Certified coil-performance ratings with system operating conditions indicated.

5. Dampers, including housings, linkages, and operators.
6. Filters with performance characteristics.
23 73 13

1. The layout shown on drawings are to be considered as diagrammatic and it

shall be the Contractor's responsibility to check all dimensions, pipe and duct
locations against Architect's drawings, or if the work is sufficiently advanced,
by actual measurements on site, to ensure the proper matching of mating
parts. The Contractor shall provide suitable clearances where required.
2. The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer shop drawings showing detailed
construction and detailed layout of the unit, its associated components and
any other related equipment/material to be installed. No work shall be
carried out before the approval of shop drawings or equipment has been
given by the Architect.
3. Where data certified drawings or other required information is not available

until all requested drawings and information have been supplied to the
Engineer and approved by him, it is the Contractor's responsibility to ensure
that all necessary information is supplied to the Engineer in accordance with
the progress of the work.
4. Should the Engineer give provisional approval only of an order due to lack of
complete information and should the missing information not eventually meet
with approval, the Engineer will not be held responsible for any delay incurred.
For equipment where information from the manufacturers is likely to be
delayed, it is essential that the Contractor places provisionally approved
orders at the earliest possible date so as to ensure approval of orders in
complete conformity with the progress of the works.
5. Submittals and shop drawings shall as far as possible be complementary so

that drawings and submittals can be cross-checked.
C. Coordination Drawings: Floor plans and other details, drawn to scale, on which the
following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from
installers of the items involved:
1. Mechanical-room layout and relationships between components and

adjacent structural and mechanical elements.
2. Support location, type, and weight.
3. Field measurements.
D. Builder's work: The following builder's work shall be allowed for by the contractor
under this section:
1. R.C.C. Foundation base for the unit.
2. Forming, cutting away for and making good all openings, holes, chases,
mortises etc.
3. Necessary material and equipment for lifting, hoisting etc., to allow installation
of unit at the required location.
4. Supplying during the erection electrical power of necessary characteristics to
provide illumination, operation of required tool and hoists and power for
starting, testing, and adjusting the equipment.
5. Access ladder and safety rails wherever required.
6. Cable ducts/conduits etc., for the installation of elect. /control wiring.
7. Painting as specified elsewhere.
23 73 13
8. All the above builder's work shall be carried out to the entire satisfaction of the
Architect and in accordance with the unit specification.
E. Operation and Maintenance Data: For air-handling units to include in emergency,

F. ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1-2007 Compliance: Provide compliance form as per applicable

G. Factory Performance test reports shall be submitted for each unit. The factory test
shall be witnessed by Engineer

application.
C. NFPA Compliance: Comply with NFPA 90A for design, fabrication, and installation
of air-handling units and components.
D. ARI Certification: Air-handling units and their components shall be factory tested
according to ARI 430, "Central-Station Air-Handling Units," and shall be listed and
labeled by ARI.
E. ASHRAE Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE 62.1-2007, Section 5 -

"Systems and Equipment" and Section 7 - "Construction and Startup."
F. ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1-2010 Compliance: Applicable requirements in

G. Comply with NFPA 70.
H. Comply with NFPA 92 for units used for Smoke Control purposes including those
used for Make air supply.
1.5 WARRANTY
A. Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to replace

components of AHUs that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty
period.
1. Refer Specification Section 230100.
23 73 13
1.6 EXTRA MATERIALS
1. Filters: Furnish FIVE percent of spare filters for each type of filters installed and
complete set of Bag Filters.
2. Fan Belts: Furnish TWENTY percent of spare fan belts for each type of belt
installed.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide

products by one of the manufacturers whose equipment must have been used
and in operation in the Kingdom for 10 years.
B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one

of the manufacturers specified or ‘Approved equal’.
a. York
b. Carrier
c. Trane
2.2 GENERAL
A. The Air Handling Unit shall be a draw-thru type in double skinned modular
construction. The size and capacity shall be as indicated in the drawings,
equipment schedule etc. Each unit shall comprise of fan section, cooling coil
section, pre filter and bag filter section, fan motor and drive set etc.
B. The Air handling units for 100% fresh air application shall be additionally provided
with sand trap louvers, intake cowl with bird screen. The air handling unit on roof
top shall be provided with weatherproof outer skin to protect against direct sunlight
and rains.
2.3 UNIT CASINGS
A. General Fabrication Requirements for Casings:
1. Formed and reinforced double-wall insulated panels, fabricated to allow

removal for access to internal parts and components, with joints between
sections sealed.
2. The casing shall be constructed of minimum 50mm thick double skinned

heavy gauge mill galvanized sheet, internally and externally coated with
oven baked epoxy paint. The casing and the framework shall be suitably
reinforced for stability and strength.
3. The space between double skin shall be pressure injected with polyurethane
foam insulation of density 35-40 kg/m3 with k factor not exceeding 0.02
W/m0C. The outer box of the twin box frame section shall be packed
23 73 13
insulated to avoid condensation. Fan section shall have additional 50mm

thick fibre glass insulation, covered with perforated aluminum sheet.
4. The Air handling unit shall have minimum 50mm thick double skin pressure
injected with polyurethane.
5. The panels shall be sealed to the frame work by heavy duty self adhesive 'o'
ring gasket held captive in the framed extrusion. The gasket shall be spongy
so as to reduce vibration especially at low frequencies and provide perfect air
tightness even at high pressures.
6. The panels of the casing shall be lift off type and shall be easily removable to
have access to inspection. The door latch shall be quick release type.
7. Condensate Drain Pans: Formed sections of galvanized-steel sheet, a

minimum of 50 mm deep, and complying with ASHRAE 62.1-2007.
- Double-Wall Construction: Fill space between walls with foam
insulation and seal moisture tight.
- Drain Connections: Threaded nipple.
- Retain subparagraph below for galvanized-steel drain pans and
delete for stainless-steel drain pans.
- Pan-Top Surface Coating: Corrosion-resistant compound.
- Drain Pan shall be of heavy gauge with drain connections. Drain Pan
shall be insulated with 25mm (50 mm thick in case of outdoor installed
unit) polyurethane foam insulation sandwiched between inner and
outer pan. The drain pan shall extend completely under the coil
section.
- The drain pan shall be sloped with bottom exit and non trapping side
discharge drain to eliminate standing moisture virtually avoiding the
possibility of microbial growth.
8. Airstream Surfaces: Surfaces in contact with the airstream shall comply with
requirements in ASHRAE 62.1-2007.
B. Inspection and Access Panels and Access Doors:
1. Panel and Door Fabrication: Formed and reinforced, single- or double-wall

and insulated panels of same materials and thicknesses as casing.
2. Inspection and Access Panels:
a. Fasteners: Two or more cam lock type for panel lift-out operation.
Arrangement shall allow panels to be opened against air-pressure
differential.
b. Gasket: Neoprene, applied around entire perimeters of panel frames.
c. Size: Large enough to allow inspection and maintenance of air-
handling unit's internal components.
3. Access Doors:
a. Hinges: A minimum of two ball-bearing hinges or stainless-steel piano

hinge and two wedge-lever-type latches, operable from inside and
outside. Arrange doors to be opened against air-pressure differential.
b. Gasket: Neoprene, applied around entire perimeters of panel frames.
23 73 13
c. Fabricate windows in doors of double-glazed, wire-reinforced safety

glass with an air space between panes and sealed with interior and
exterior rubber seals.
d. Size: At least 450 mm wide by full height of unit casing up to a maximum
height of 1500 mm.
4. Locations and Applications:
a. Fan Section: Doors and inspection and access panels.

b. Access Section: Doors.
c. Coil Section: Inspection and access panel.
d. Damper Section: Inspection and access panels.
e. Filter Section: Doors large enough to allow periodic removal and
installation of filters.
f. Mixing Section: Doors.
g. Humidifier Section: Doors.
5. Service Light: 100-W vapor proof fixture with switched junction box located
outside adjacent to door.
a. Locations: Each section accessed with door.
C. Condensate Drain Pans:
1. Fabricated with two percent slope in at least two planes to collect

condensate from cooling coils (including coil piping connections, coil
headers, and return bends) and from humidifiers and to direct water toward
drain connection.
a. Length: Extend drain pan downstream from leaving face to comply
with ASHRAE 62.1-2010.
b. Depth: A minimum of 50 mm deep.
2. Formed sections.
3. Double-wall, stainless-steel sheet with space between walls filled with foam
insulation and moisture-tight seal.
4. Drain Connection: Located at lowest point of pan and sized to prevent
overflow. Terminate with threaded nipple on one end of pan.
5. Pan-Top Surface Coating: Asphaltic waterproofing compound.
6. Units with stacked coils shall have an intermediate drain pan to collect
condensate from top coil.
2.4 FAN, DRIVE, AND MOTOR SECTION
A. Fan and Drive Assemblies: Statically and dynamically balanced and designed for
continuous operation at maximum-rated fan speed and motor horsepower.
1. Shafts: Designed for continuous operation at maximum-rated fan speed and

motor horsepower, and with field-adjustable alignment.
a. Turned, ground, and polished hot-rolled steel with keyway. Ship with a
protective coating of lubricating oil.
b. Designed to operate at no more than 70 percent of first critical speed at
top of fan's speed range.
23 73 13
B. Centrifugal Fan Housings: Formed- and reinforced-steel panels to form curved

scroll housings with shaped cutoff and spun-metal inlet bell.
1. Bracing: Steel angle or channel supports for mounting and supporting fan
scroll, wheel, motor, and accessories.
2. Horizontal-Flanged, Split Housing: Bolted construction.
3. Housing for Supply Fan: Attach housing to fan-section casing with metal-
edged flexible duct connector.
4. Flexible Connector: Factory fabricated with a fabric strip, galvanized-steel
sheet or aluminum sheets; select metal compatible with casing.
a. Flexible Connector Fabric: Glass fabric, double coated with neoprene.

Fabrics, coatings, and adhesives shall comply with UL 181, Class 1.
C. Backward-Inclined, Centrifugal Fan Wheels: Single-width-single-inlet and double-

width-double-inlet construction with curved inlet flange, back plate, backward-
inclined blades welded or riveted to flange and back plate; cast-iron or cast-steel
hub riveted to back plate and fastened to shaft with set screws.
D. Fan Shaft Bearings:
1. Pre lubricated and Sealed, Ball Bearings: Self-aligning, pillow-block type with
a rated life of 200,000 hours according to ABMA 9.
2. Grease-Lubricated, Tapered-Roller Bearings: Self-aligning, pillow-block type
with double-locking collars and 2-piece, cast-iron housing with grease lines
extended to outside unit and a rated life of 200,000 hours according to
ABMA 11.
3. Grease-Lubricated Bearings: Self-aligning, pillow-block-type, ball or roller
bearings with adapter mount and two-piece, cast-iron housing with grease
lines extended to outside unit.
E. Belt Drives: Factory mounted, with adjustable alignment and belt tensioning, and
with 1.5 service factor based on fan motor.
1. Pulleys: Cast iron or cast steel with split, tapered bushing; dynamically
balanced at factory.
2. Motor Pulleys: Adjustable pitch for use with 3.7kW motors and smaller; fixed
pitch for use with motors larger than 3.7kW. Select pulley size so pitch
adjustment is at the middle of adjustment range at fan design conditions.
3. Belts: Oil resistant, non sparking, and non static; in matched sets for multiple-
belt drives.
4. Belt Guards: Comply with requirements specified by OSHA and fabricate
according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards"; diamond-mesh
wire screen, welded to steel angle frame; prime coated.
5. Where the unit is used for smoke control application including those supplying
makeup air to the smoke control shall have 1.5 times the number of belts
required for design duty and not fewer than 2nos.
F. Variable-Inlet Vanes: Steel, with blades supported at both ends with permanently
lubricated bearings. Variable mechanism terminating in single lever for connection
to control actuator with connecting shaft for second set of variable inlet vanes on
double-width fans.
23 73 13
G. Discharge Dampers: Heavy-duty steel assembly with channel frame and sealed
ball bearings, and opposed blades constructed of two plates formed around and
welded to shaft, with blades linked out of air stream to single control lever.
H. Internal Vibration Isolation: Fans shall be factory mounted with manufacturer's

standard vibration isolation mounting devices having a minimum static deflection
of 25 mm.
I. Motor: Comply with NEMA designation, temperature rating, service factor,

enclosure type, and efficiency requirements for motors specified. Motor KW rating
shall be minimum 20% more than the BKW absorbed in the actual operating
condition with service factor of 1.2. The motor KW indicated in Equipment
schedule is to be used as guidance only. Final required KW rating shall be selected
with no extra cost.
1. Enclosure Type: Totally enclosed, fan cooled.

2. NEMA Premium (TM) efficient motors as defined in NEMA MG 1.
3. Motor Sizes: Minimum size as indicated. If not indicated, large enough so
driven load will not require motor to operate in service factor range above
1.0.
4. Controllers, Electrical Devices, and Wiring: Comply with requirements for
electrical devices and connections specified in Division 26 Sections.
5. Mount unit-mounted disconnect switches on exterior of unit.
J. Variable Frequency Controllers:
1. Description: NEMA ICS 2, IGBT, PWM, VFC; listed and labeled as a complete
unit and arranged to provide variable speed of an NEMA MG 1, Design B, 3-
phase induction motor by adjusting output voltage and frequency.
2. Individual variable frequency drive with individual manual bypass (star delta)
shall be provided for individual units.
3. Output Rating: 3-phase; 6 to [60 Hz, with voltage proportional to frequency
throughout voltage range] [66 Hz, with torque constant as speed changes]
[120 Hz, with horsepower constant throughout speed range].
4. Unit Operating Requirements:
a. Input ac voltage tolerance of 220 V, plus or minus 5 / 400 to 500 V, plus

or minus 10 percent.
b. Input frequency tolerance of 50Hz, plus or minus 6 percent.
c. Minimum Efficiency: 96 percent at 50 Hz, full load.
d. Minimum Displacement Primary-Side Power Factor: 96 percent.
e. Overload Capability: 1.1 times the base load current for 60 seconds; 2.0
times the base load current for 3 seconds.
f. Starting Torque: 100 percent of rated torque or as indicated.
g. Speed Regulation: Plus or minus 1 percent.
5. Isolated control interface to allow controller to follow control signal over an

11:1 speed range.
6. Internal Adjustability Capabilities:
a. Minimum Speed: 5 to 25 percent of maximum rpm.

b. Maximum Speed: 80 to 100 percent of maximum rpm.
c. Acceleration: 2 to a minimum of 22 seconds.
d. Deceleration: 2 to a minimum of 22 seconds.
e. Current Limit: 50 to a minimum of 110 percent of maximum rating.
23 73 13
7. Self-Protection and Reliability Features:
a. Input transient protection by means of surge suppressors.

b. Under voltage and overvoltage trips; inverter over temperature,
overload, and over current trips.
c. Adjustable motor overload relays capable of NEMA ICS 2, [Class 10]
[Class 20] [Class 30] performance.
d. Notch filter to prevent operation of the controller-motor-load
combination at a natural frequency of the combination.
e. Instantaneous line-to-line and line-to-ground over current trips.
f. Loss-of-phase protection.
g. Reverse-phase protection.
h. Short-circuit protection.
i. Motor over temperature fault.
j. Built-in DC link filters to reduce harmonic distortion on the main supply.
The 5th harmonic must be reduced to 35% or below in accordance with
IEEE Standard 519-1992. No external reactors allowed.
8. Automatic Reset/ Restart: Attempts three restarts after controller fault or on

return of power after an interruption and before shutting down for manual
reset or fault correction. Bidirectional auto speed search shall be capable of
starting into rotating loads spinning in either direction and returning motor to
set speed in proper direction, without damage to controller, motor, or load.
9. Power-Interruption Protection: To prevent motor from re-energizing after a
power interruption until motor has stopped.
10. Torque Boost: Automatically varies starting and continuous torque to at least
1.5 times the minimum torque to ensure high-starting torque and increased
torque at slow speeds.
11. Motor Temperature Compensation at Slow Speeds: Adjustable current fall-
back based on output frequency for temperature protection of self-cooled,
fan-ventilated motors at slow speeds.
12. Door-mounted LED status lights shall indicate the following conditions:
a. Power on.
b. Run.
c. Over voltage.
d. Line fault.
e. Over current.
f. External fault.
13. Panel-Mounted Operator Station: Start-stop and auto-manual selector

switches with manual-speed-control potentiometer and elapsed time meter.
14. Meters or digital readout devices and selector switch, mounted flush in
controller door and connected to indicate the following controller
parameters:
a. Output frequency (Hertz).

b. Motor speed (rpm).
c. Motor status (running, stop, fault).
d. Motor current (amperes).
e. Motor torque (percent).
f. Fault or alarming status (code).
g. Proportional-integral-derivative (PID) feedback signal (percent).
h. DC-link voltage (volts direct current).
i. Set-point frequency (Hertz).
23 73 13
j. Motor output voltage (volts).
15. Control Signal Interface:
a. Electric Input Signal Interface: A minimum of 2 analog inputs (0 to 10 V

or 0/4-20 mA) and 6 programmable digital inputs.
b. Remote signal inputs capable of accepting any of the following speed-
setting input signals from the control system:
1) 0 to 10-V dc.
2) 0-20 or 4-20 mA.
3) Potentiometer using up/down digital inputs.
4) Fixed frequencies using digital inputs.
5) RS485.
6) Keypad display for local hand operation.
c. Output signal interface with a minimum of 1 analog output signal (0/4-

20 mA), which can be programmed to any of the following:
1) Output frequency (Hertz).

2) Output current (load).
3) DC-link voltage (volts direct current).
4) Motor torque (percent).
5) Motor speed (rpm).
6) Set-point frequency (Hertz).
d. Remote indication interface with a minimum of 2 dry circuit relay

outputs (120-V ac, 1 A) for remote indication of the following:
1) Motor running.
2) Set-point speed reached.
3) Fault and warning indication (over temperature or over current).
4) High- or low-speed limits reached.
16. Communications: RS485 interface allows VFC to be used with an external

system within a multi drop LAN configuration. Interface shall allow all
parameter settings of VFC to be programmed via BMS control. Provide
capability for VFC to retain these settings within the nonvolatile memory.
17. Integral Disconnecting Means: NEMA AB 1, instantaneous-trip circuit breaker
with lockable handle.
18. Accessories:
a. Devices shall be factory installed in controller enclosure unless otherwise

indicated.
b. Push-Button Stations, Pilot Lights, and Selector Switches: NEMA ICS 2,
heavy-duty type.
c. Standard Displays:
1) Output frequency (Hertz).

2) Set-point frequency (Hertz).
3) Motor current (amperes).
4) DC-link voltage (volts direct current).
5) Motor torque (percent).
6) Motor speed (rpm).
7) Motor output voltage (volts).
23 73 13
2.5 COIL SECTION
A. The coil shall be free flow type and shall be designed to meet the performance
required as per the schedule. The cooling coils shall be arranged in the unit for
horizontal air flow and selected for a maximum face velocity of not exceeding 2.5
m/sec.
B. The coil shall be made of seamless copper tubes firmly bonded to the aluminum
fins by mechanical expansion with pre-coating. Headers shall be formed and bent
from single section of copper pipe with brass male pipe thread connection. The
coil casing shall be constructed of heavy gauge galvanized metal.
C. The coil shall be drainable water type and shall be designed to operate at 17
kg/cm2 design working pressure and up to 148 deg. C. and shall be tested under
water with compressed air at not less than 22 kg/cm2. Circuiting shall provide free
draining and venting when installed. The water velocity shall not exceed 2.2
m/sec. and without exceeding 5 to 7 meter pressure drop. All coil shall have the
same end connections regardless of the number of rows deep (minimum 3 row).
D. The coil sections having stacked coils one above the other shall have additional
intermediate drain pan, each with drop tubes to guide condensate to the main
drain pan. The coil sections must have tracks extended up to full width of the unit
and depth of the coil to provide easy removal for service and maintenance.
E. The Air handling unit shall have drip eliminator section after the cooling coil.
F. In FAHU cooling coil & hot water temperature coil shall be provided in series to
ensure effective dehumidification. Coil leaving conditions specified shall be
achieved, throughout the year.
G. In FAHU, provide refrigerant filled wrap around heat pipes, consisting of two coil
block mounted on either side of the cooling coil constituting pre cool and reheat
sections. Heat pipe shall be selected to have an outlet temperature of the reheat
coil at 18oC. All the three coil block (cooling and heat pipes) shall be mounted
within a single sheet metal framework.
H. General Requirements for Coil Section:
1. Comply with ARI 410.

2. Fabricate coil section to allow removal and replacement of coil for
maintenance and to allow in-place access for service and maintenance of
coil(s).
3. For multi zone units, provide air deflectors and air baffles to balance airflow
across coils.
4. Coils shall not act as structural component of unit.
I. Electrical Heating Coils, Controls, and Accessories: Comply with UL 1995.
1. Casing Assembly: Slip-in/ Flanged type with galvanized-steel frame.

2. Sheathed Heating Elements: Coiled resistance wire of 80 percent nickel and
20 percent chromium surrounded by compacted magnesium-oxide powder
in tubular-steel sheath; with spiral-wound, copper-plated, steel fins
continuously brazed to sheath.
3. Open Heating Elements: Resistance wire of 80 percent nickel and 20 percent
chromium supported and insulated by floating ceramic bushings recessed
23 73 13
into casing openings, fastened to supporting brackets, and mounted in

galvanized-steel frame.
4. Over temperature Protection: Disk-type, automatically resetting, thermal-
cutout, safety device; serviceable through terminal box without removing
heater from coil section.
5. Secondary Protection: Load-carrying, manually resetting or manually
replaceable, thermal cutouts; factory wired in series with each heater stage.
6. Control Panel: Remote mounted with disconnecting means and over current
protection.
a. Magnetic contactor.
b. Solid-state, step less pulse controller.
c. Toggle switches, one per step.
d. Step controller.
e. Time-delay relay.
f. Pilot lights, one per step.
g. Airflow proving switch.
7. All coils shall be with factory applied corrosion protection coating with
minimum 5 years warranty
2.6 AIR FILTRATION SECTION
A. The filter section shall be panel type filter in flat or angle configuration as pre-filter
and bag filter. For 100% fresh air application, a sand filter and an additional set of
extended surface bag filter as final filter shall be provided. The filter section shall be
incorporated as a standard section for all AHUs. The pre-filter shall be cleanable
panel type consisting of continuous filament glass fibre of progressive density
construction. The construction shall allow dirt to penetrate deep into the media
utilizing its full depth. Metal retainers shall be placed on both sides of the media
pad to provide support as the resistance increases.
B. The media pad and retainers shall be contained in a sturdy aluminum sheet frame
work for dependable operation. The depth of the media shall be 50mm
approximately and the face velocity shall not exceed 2.0 m/sec. The average
arrestance shall be 70 to 75% as per ASHRAE 52-76 test methods. The initial
resistance shall not exceed 40 Pa and the final resistance not more than 60 Pa.
C. The final filter shall be extended surface bag or pocket filter in synthetic fibre
media. These filters shall be washable type. The average efficiency shall be 80 to
85% as per ASHRAE 52-76 test methods. The initial resistance shall not exceed 60 Pa
and the final resistance shall not be more than 150 Pa.
D. General Requirements for Air Filtration Section:
1. Comply with NFPA 90A.

2. Provide minimum arrestance according to ASHRAE 52.1, and a minimum
efficiency reporting value (MERV) according to ASHRAE 52.2. In any case the
filters shall have a minimum of MERV 13
3. Provide filter holding frames arranged for flat or angular orientation, with
access doors on both sides of unit. Filters shall be removable from one side or
lifted out from access plenum.
23 73 13
2.7 DAMPERS
A. General Requirements for Dampers: Leakage rate, according to AMCA 500,

"Laboratory Methods for Testing Dampers for Rating," shall not exceed 2 percent of
air quantity at 2000-fpm (10-m/s) face velocity through damper and 4-inch wg
(1000-Pa) pressure differential.
2.8 SUPPLY FAN SECTION
1. Class II: AMCA 99-2408.

2. Drive: V-belt.
3. The Fan section shall be equipped with double inlet double width centrifugal
type medium pressure fan. The wheel and the scroll shall be constructed of
mill galvanized sheet.
4. Fan bearing shall be self aligning, pillow block type regreaseable ball bearing
and shall be supplied for an average life expectancy of 200,000 hours. The
bearings shall be factory lubricated and shall be equipped with standard
hydraulic grease fittings. Extended tube liner shall be provided outside the
drive end of each unit to allow easy greasing at site.
5. The fan shaft shall be selected to operate well below the first critical speed
and each shaft shall be coated with anti rust coating after assembly.
6. The fan wheel and shaft shall be designed to operate continuously at
maximum rated speed.
7. The fans and shaft shall be statically and dynamically balanced after
assembly.
8. The vibration shall be minimized to acceptable norms by providing anti-
vibration springs. The spring isolators shall be adjustable to arrest the natural
frequency range.
9. In general the fans shall be tested to relevant ARI/AMCA Standards.
2.9 ENERGY WHEEL SECTION
1. Construction shall be all welded, stainless steel hub, spoke and rim assembly
independent of the heat transfer media.
2. Heat transfer segments shall be removable type
3. The following performance characteristics should be certified by ARI Std 1060
a. Total Effectiveness
b. Latent Effectiveness
c. Sensible Effectiveness
d. Exhaust air transfer ratio
f. Outside air correction factor
e. Pressure drop
4. Test shall be in accordance to ASHRAE 84
5. Wheel shall be with permanently lubricated wheel bearing to provide L10,
400000hour life expectancy.
6. The heat transfer media shall be dry desiccant type such as Silica Gel with an
affinity for water molecules and high working capacity at relative humilities of
above 30%.
7. The heat transfer media shall be physically embedded in the surface of
polymer film substrate without the use of adhesives to allow the segments to
be washed without significant loss in material.
8. Wheel shall be selected to have 75% to 80% effectiveness
9. Fans shall be arranged to give draw though counter flow airflow
23 73 13
10. Provide access do as required for cleaning.
A. Fan Sound-Power Level Ratings: Comply with AMCA 301, "Methods for Calculating
Fan Sound Ratings from Laboratory Test Data." Test fans according to AMCA 300,
"Reverberant Room Method for Sound Testing of Fans." Fans shall bear AMCA-
certified sound ratings seal.
B. Fan Performance Rating: Factory test fan performance for airflow, pressure, power,
air density, rotation speed, and efficiency. Rate performance according to
AMCA 210, "Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Aerodynamic Performance
Rating."
C. Water Coils: Factory tested to 300 psig (2070 kPa) according to ARI 410 and
ASHRAE 33.
D. Refrigerant Coils: Factory tested to 450 psig (3105 kPa) according to ARI 410 and
ASHRAE 33.
2.11 SPECIAL FEATURES AND ACCESSORIES
A. The unit shall be provided with steel frame and spring isolators of high efficiency to
eliminate transfer of vibration to the building structure.
B. The unit shall be provided with neoprene type flexible connection between the fan
outlet and the duct work.
C. The unit shall be provided with automatic two chilled water control valve
modulating type and other valves and fittings as described elsewhere.
D. The units required for 100% fresh air application shall be provided with motorized
damper to shut off the air intake incase AHU fan motor is stopped or tripped.
E. The unit shall be provided with condensate drain piping, from unit outlet to the floor
drain point. Provide water seal in the piping.
F. Provide sound attenuators on supply and return side of recirculating air handlings
units and on supply side of 100% fresh air handling units as shown in the drawings.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with
of the Work.
B. Examine casing insulation materials and filter media before air-handling unit
installation. Reject insulation materials and filter media that are wet, moisture
damaged, or mold damaged.
C. Examine roughing-in for hydronic, and condensate drainage piping systems and
electrical services to verify actual locations of connections before installation.
23 73 13
D. Prior to commencing equipment installation, installer shall inspect hoist ways, hoist
way accesses/openings, space for the unit its foundation etc., as constructed, shall
verify all dimensions, an examine supporting structure and all other conditions
under which unit is to be installed.
E. Co-ordinate with the contractor if any dimensional discrepancies or other

conditions detrimental to the proper installation or performance of the unit.
F. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Equipment Mounting: Install air-handling units on concrete bases using elastomeric

pads/ elastomeric mounts/ restrained spring isolators suitable for the purpose.
Secure units to anchor bolts installed in concrete bases. Comply with requirements
for concrete bases specified "Cast-in-Place Concrete/ Miscellaneous Cast-in-Place
Concrete." Comply with requirements for vibration isolation devices specified in
Division 23 Section "Noise & Vibration Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment."
1. Minimum Deflection: 13 mm.

2. Install galvanized-steel plate to equally distribute weight over elastomeric
pad.
3. Install epoxy-coated anchor bolts that extend through concrete base and
anchor into structural concrete floor.
equipment.
B. Suspended Units: Suspend and brace units from structural-steel support frame using
threaded steel rods and spring hangers. Comply with requirements for vibration
isolation devices specified in Division 23 Section "Nose & Vibration Controls for
HVAC Piping and Equipment."
C. Comply with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations for work required

during installation. Installation and start up of the unit shall be carried out only by
qualified installers and service mechanics.
D. Co-ordinate unit installation work with the work of other trades, for proper time and
sequence to avoid construction delays and also to avoid hindrance to work of
other trades. Use bench marks, lines and levels designated by Contractor, to
ensure dimensional co-ordination of the work
E. Arrange installation of units to provide access space around air-handling units for
service and maintenance.
F. Do not operate fan system until filters (temporary or permanent) are in place.
Replace temporary filters used during construction and testing, with new, clean
filters.
G. Install filter-gage, static-pressure taps upstream and downstream of filters. Mount

filter gages on outside of filter housing or filter plenum in accessible position.
Provide filter gages on filter banks, installed with separate static-pressure taps
upstream and downstream of filters.
23 73 13
H. At time of substantial completion of the unit work, provide suitable protective

covering, barriers, devices, signs or such other methods or procedures to protect
the work from damage or deterioration. Maintain protective measures throughout
remainder of construction period.
3.3 CONNECTIONS
A. Comply with requirements for piping specified in other Division 23 Sections.

Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
B. Install piping adjacent to air-handling unit to allow service and maintenance.
C. Connect piping to air-handling units mounted on vibration isolators with flexible

connectors.
D. Connect condensate drain pans using PPR pipes. Extend to nearest equipment or
floor drain. Construct deep trap at connection to drain pan and install cleanouts
at changes in direction.
E. Hot- and Chilled-Water Piping: Comply with applicable requirements in Division 23

Section "Hydronic Piping." Install shutoff valve and union or flange at each coil
supply connection. Install balancing valve and union or flange at each coil return
connection as specified.
F. Refrigerant Piping: Comply with applicable requirements in Division 23 Section

"Refrigerant Piping." Install shutoff valve and union or flange at each supply and
return connection as specified.
G. Connect duct to air-handling units with flexible connections.
A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative

to inspect, test, and adjust components, assemblies, and equipment installations,
including connections.
B. Perform tests and inspections.
1. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service

representative to inspect components, assemblies, and equipment
installations, including connections, and to assist in testing.
C. Tests and Inspections:
1. Leak Test: After installation, fill water coils with water, and test coils and
connections for leaks.
2. Charge refrigerant coils with refrigerant and test for leaks.
3. Fan Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units
to confirm proper motor rotation and unit operation.
controls and equipment. The Contractor shall carry out all the tests to establish
the actual capacity of the unit as specified under the schedules of the
equipment and recommended under relevant clauses of ARI, ASHRAE etc.
23 73 13
5. Wherever maximum specified noise level is asked for in the occupied zones,
the Contractor shall perform 'Noise level' test with the help of 'db' meter to
ensure that the noise level does not exceed the permissible limits. This will be
done on proper operation of air conditioning and ventilation equipment and
adjustments of grilles/diffusers, dampers, etc.
6. For other requirements on 'TEST ON COMPLETION' refer relevant Clauses in
SECTION 230100.
D. Air-handling unit or components will be considered defective if unit or components

do not pass tests and inspections.
E. Prepare test and inspection reports.
3.5 STARTUP SERVICE
A. Perform startup service.

instructions.
2. Verify that shipping, blocking, and bracing are removed.
3. Verify that unit is secure on mountings and supporting devices and that
connections to piping, ducts, and electrical systems are complete. Verify that
proper thermal-overload protection is installed in motors, controllers, and
switches.
4. Verify proper motor rotation direction, free fan wheel rotation, and smooth
bearing operations. Reconnect fan drive system, align belts, and install belt
guards.
5. Verify that bearings, pulleys, belts, and other moving parts are lubricated with
factory-recommended lubricants.
6. Verify that zone dampers fully open and close for each zone.
7. Verify that face-and-bypass dampers provide full face flow.
8. Verify that outdoor- and return-air mixing dampers open and close, and
maintain minimum outdoor-air setting.
9. Comb coil fins for parallel orientation.
10. Verify that proper thermal-overload protection is installed for electric coils.
11. Install new, clean filters.
12. Verify that manual and automatic volume control and fire and smoke
dampers in connected duct systems are in fully open position.
B. Starting procedures for air-handling units include the following:
1. Energize motor; verify proper operation of motor, drive system, and fan wheel.
Adjust fan to indicated rpm.
2. Measure and record motor electrical values for voltage and amperage.
3. Manually operate dampers from fully closed to fully open position and record
fan performance.
3.6 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust damper linkages for proper damper operation.
23 73 13
B. Comply with requirements in Division 23 Section "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing

for HVAC" for air-handling system testing, adjusting, and balancing and
commissioning of HVAC system
3.7 CLEANING
A. After completing system installation and testing, adjusting, and balancing air-
handling unit and air-distribution systems and after completing startup service,
clean air-handling units internally to remove foreign material and construction dirt
and dust. Clean fan wheels, cabinets, dampers, coils, and filter housings, and
install new, clean filters.
3.8 DEMONSTRATION
A. Instruct Employer's personnel in proper use, operation and daily maintenance of

the unit. Train Employer's personnel in normal procedure to be followed in
checking for sources of operational failure or malfunctioning. Confer with Employer
on requirements for a complete unit maintenance program.
23 73 13
23 80 00 - Liquid Heat Transfer
PART 1 GENERAL
Provide and install a complete chilled water system and DX system as indicated
on the drawings together with all associated equipment.
This section to be read in conjunction with the following:
Number Description
230713 INSULATION
1.2 DESCRIPTION OF SYSTEM:

For detailed HVAC System description refer to section 15590.
1.2.1 Design Intent:

1. Chilled Water Temperatures
The system is designed to cool and circulate chilled water at a flow
temperature of 4.5±10C., the return water temperature is dependent on the
load diversity. The chilled water flow to each AHU and FCU coil to be
regulated by PICV (diaphragm type) by DDC Controller.
2. Air Conditioning Systems

Designed to limit the temperature in the treated spaces to values given in
the following table as measured in the space and in conjunction with
outside conditions stated.
Outside Design Conditions

Summer maximum temperature. 46.10C. db 33.30C. Wb
Winter minimum temperature 9.00C. db 8.00C. Wb
3. Internal Design Conditions:

Temperature
Rooms Humidity
Summer Winter
All rooms, Lift lobbies etc. 55 ± 5% 22 +10C -
Plant rooms & Panel rooms 26 +10C
23 80 00
1.3.1 Workmanship and Material

The installations throughout are to be of the best quality materials erected by
skilled workmen under competent supervision and left in good working order on
completion to the satisfaction of the Architect.
1.3.2 Compliance with Standards and Regulations

Except where otherwise specified all work is to conform with the relevant
provisions of appropriate British Standards and British Standard Codes of
Practice currently applicable including the following:
BS 5155 Butterfly Valves
BS 5194 Copper Alloy Globe, globe stop and check, check and gate
valves.
BS 2879 Drain taps
BS 5158 Cast iron and carbon steel valves for general purposes.
BS 5159 Cast iron and carbon steel ball valves for general purposes.
AND ASHRAE Standards.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
1.4.1 Product Data:

Submit manufacturer's data for all equipment identifying model reference and
types. Information submitted to include:
a) Materials
b) Methods of Construction
c) Installation Requirements
d) Performance
1.4.2 Shop Drawings

a) Submit working drawings showing detailed arrangement of system and
equipment. Drawings to show all supports required and to be co-
coordinated with both building structure and other trades.
b) Separate schematic diagrams indicating pipes sizes and instrumentation
to be submitted for the complete installation with design flow data.
c) The pump head indicated in equipment schedule is for guidance only.
Contractor to submit detailed calculations for computations of head
required for selection of pumps based on final layout schemes/drawings
and ensure that the operating point for pump model selected is in stable
zone and with best operating efficiency possible; before placement of
order.
d) Refer to Section 230000 for other detailed requirements. Final required
pump H.P. motor shall be provided with no extra cost.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 PIPE WORK AND FITTINGS:
To be black mild steel medium duty with appropriate fittings. See Section 23 05
00 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC
Contractor to include provision of the following fittings/accessories/instrumentation in the
chilled water piping network. Other controls are specified under Div 25.
23 80 00
2.1.1 For each plate heat exchanger

a) Isolating valve and Y strainer at inlet.
b) Commissioning set (diaphragm type) and isolating valve at outlet line of
Plate Heat Exchanger on secondary side.
c) Motorized butterfly valve at inlet / outlet as recommended by the District
Cooling Provider.
d) Drain valves and vent valves.
e) Flexible connectors at inlet and outlet.
f) Pressure gauges at inlet and outlet.
g) Commissioning set valve at outlet.
h) Thermometer at inlet and outlet.
i) Test ports or plug inserts at inlet and outlet for the measurement of
temperature and pressure.
j) Flow failure switch at outlet.
2.1.2 For each secondary chilled water circulating pump

a) Isolating valves at inlet and outlet.
b) Y Strainer at inlet
c) Non-return valve at outlet.
d) Pressure gauges at inlet and outlet.
e) Commissioning set valve (Triple Duty Valve) at outlet.
f) Test ports or plug inserts at inlet and outlet for measurement of
g) Flexible connectors at inlet and outlet.
2.1.3 For each air handling unit

a) Isolating valve at inlet.
b) Y Strainer at inlet.
c) Commissioning set valve at outlet.
d) Pressure gauges at inlet and outlet.
e) Thermometer at inlet and outlet.
f) Test ports or plug inserts at inlet and outlet for the measurement of
g) Air vent at the outlet.
h) 20mm diameter size descaling valve at inlet and outlet.
i) PICV (diaphragm type) motorized modulating valve in return line (outlet).
j) Flexible connectors at inlet and outlet.
k) Dielectric unions at supply and return
2.1.4 For each fan coil unit

a) Isolating or ball valve and Y strainer at inlet.
b) Commissioning valve at outlet.
c) Test ports or plug inserts at inlet and outlet for measurement of
d) PICV (diaphragm type) modulating valve at outlet.
e) Dielectric union at supply and return
2.1.5 For each flow and return riser

a) Isolating valves and commissioning set at roof level.
b) Drain valve at the bottom with drain pipe extended to the floor trap in the
shaft or nearest floor drain.
c) Test ports or plug inserts for pressure and temperature measurement at
roof level.
23 80 00
2.1.6 Automatic type air vents to be provided at all high points, and in inverted U-
loops.
2.1.7 Necessary provision for all expansion joints in flow and return pipes. (Flexible
connectors or expansion loops).
2.2 INSULATION:
The whole of the chilled water piping system is to be insulated in accordance with
SECTION 230713 - INSULATION.
2.3 CHILLED WATER STRAINERS:

a) Provide pipeline strainers on the pump suction connections and in the position
shown on the drawings.
b) Strainers to be 'Y' type with bodies constructed from cast iron suitable for
operating pressures of minimum 16 bar and with flanged ends. Body to be
fitted with blow-down cock not less than 32mm and complete with hose
union, to enable the screen to be blown down over an adjacent gully without
need to open strainer body.
c) Screen to be in brass with 3mm diameter perforations.
d) In addition, provide pipeline strainers (bronze, Y-type) upstream of any

automatic control valve or similar device wherever shown on drawing or as
required where correct operation would be prevented by particles entrained
in the water flow.
e) Size of screen in these instances to be determined by the size of orifice in the

device in line with manufacturer's recommendations.
2.4 SEALED PRESSURIZATION UNIT WITH AIR CONTROL FOR CHILLED WATER CIRCUIT
SYSTEM:
In order to provide for system pressurization and air control in closed chilled water
circulation system, a fully automatic twin pump pressurization unit with sealed
expansion tank and air separator shall be used.
2.4.1 Air Separator:

Furnish and install an air separator. The air separator shall be centrifugal type or
velocity reducer type. The unit shall have flanged inlet and outlet connections.
The vessel diameter shall approximately be three times the nominal inlet/outlet
pipe diameter.
The air separator shall enable air to rise to the automatic air eliminator positioned
on the top of the separator.
2.5 FULLY PACKAGED MAKE UP AND EXPANSION UNIT:
2.5.1 Furnish and install a twin pump pressurization unit complete with a minimum 400
litre or equal to system requirements expansion vessel fully packaged with inter-
connecting pipe work and valves, control console etc., on a common base
plate. The pumps shall be suitable for 230V/1ph/50Hz power supply.
23 80 00
The control features shall incorporate:
a) Auto change-over to standby pump on failure to maintain the system pressure.
b) Inter-locking contacts from chiller safety control circuit.
2.4.2 Common hand/off/auto switch

1. The selection of sealed pressurization unit shall be done by the Contractor for
the chilled water close loop. Furnish manufacturer's data confirming the
selection of the equipment/system for Engineers review and approval.
2. A safety valve shall be provided to protect the system against excess pressure
built-up.
3. The panel shall be provided with the following additional control features from
a programmable pump controller in the control panel operating via a pressure
transducer and giving digital display with individually programmable switching
points
a) Auto rotation of duty pump status.

b) Omission of faulty pump from the rotation cycle.
c) Low water cut-out circuitry.
d) High system pressure chiller cut-out.
e) Visual LED display indicating: power on, warning and danger level, pump
run and tripped, duty pump failed and excessive operation.
f) Volt free contacts for Building Management System giving indication of
panel live status, ON/OFF status and fault alarm.
4. The system shall also be provided with alarm bell, and adequate number of
automatic air vents.
2.6 CHEMICAL CLEANING AND WASHING OUT OF PIPEWORK:
2.4.1 Chilled Water System - Water Treatment - System Flushing

a) The chilled water system shall be chemically cleaned and flush through after
the system has been tested in order to ensure a thoroughly clean system free
from soil, grease and swarf deposits. Necessary Provisions shall be made to Slug
feed initial cleaning chemical.
b) Introduce a suitable solvent based on inhibited Ammonium Citrate for pre-

commissioning cleaning. The concentration ratio shall be as specified by the
manufacturer of chemical additive used.
c) This solution shall be recirculated for at least two hours before draining to waste
and thoroughly flushed with fresh water.
2.6.2 Fully Automatic Dozing Unit for Water Treatment:

a) At the time of final filling of the chilled water system with fresh water a suitable
combined inhibitor/biocide additive shall be introduced at the concentration
ratio specified by the manufacturer. The chemical additive used is to provide
permanent protection against corrosion, grassing and electrolytic action.
b) The correct concentration of the inhibitor/biocide shall be verify by means of a
simple PH check. The min/max PH of the treated water shall be as those stated
by the chemical additive manufacturer when used in the aforementioned
23 80 00
context. After commissioning, PH tests should be made at intervals; should the

concentration fall below the minimum PH value given by the manufacturer, a
further addition of the additive should be made of approximately 25% of the
original dose.
2.6.3 Water Specification

1. The water condition shall be within the parameters of the following:
- PH Value : Dependent on chemical type used, but

not less than 8.5 or higher than 12.0
- Electrical Conductivity : 3500 microhms maximum.
- Chloride Level : Less than 500 mgs/litre
- Treatment Reserves : As recommended by the chemical

additive manufacturer and for the duration as stated under
SECTION 230100- OPERATION & MAINTENANCE OF HVAC SYSTEM.
2.6.4 Treatment Scheme

1 The following treatment scheme shall be applied to the chilled water
system:
Manual shot dosing of corrosion inhibitors and biocide.
2.6.5 Equipment and Chemicals

Dozing pot complete with all necessary valves, filling funnel, air release
valve, drain cock for automatic operation and fixing brackets.
Corrosion inhibitor/biocide sufficient for charging the complete chilled
water system and for topping up for minimum one year period.
NOTE: Only the system manufacturers in U.S.A., U.K. and other European
countries will be acceptable.
1 Only approved manufacturers and their authorized Agent or Approved

Sub-Contractor will be permitted to execute work under the contract.
The approved Sub-Contractor who executes the work will NOT be a
nominated Sub-Contractor under the terms of the Contract, but will be
considered a 'domestic' Sub-Contractor employed directly by the Main
Contractor.
2 Should the Main Contractor include prices from a Sub-Contractor and
Manufacturer whose name is not included in the approved list then the
Contractor shall bear the extra cost of employing as approved Sub-
Contractor/Manufacturer who will be nominated by the Architect.
2.7 CIRCULATING PUMPS:
a) The Contractor shall supply and install the circulating pumps as specified and
as per the schedule.
b) The pump set shall be horizontal, volute casing centrifugal single stage pump,
end suction type.
c) The pump casing shall be cast iron fitted with a suction side wearing ring.
23 80 00
d) The impeller shall be constructed from zinc free bronze. The impeller shall be
dynamically balanced and hydraulically relieved by means of compensating
bores.
e) The shaft shall be stainless steel. Shaft seal shall be maintenance free
mechanical seal.
f) The pump shall be fitted with an adaptor for connection of drain pipe.
g) The pump shall be coupled with TEFC motor, fabricated steel or cast-iron base
plate. The coupling to be three component coupling with spacer and to be
provided with coupling guard.
h) Pump to have concrete inertia base resting on spring vibration isolators.
i) All pumps shall be suitable for parallel operation.
NOTE: Only Pumps manufactured in U.S.A., U.K. and other European countries with
local service support will be acceptable.
1 Only approved manufacturer's and their authorized Agent or Approved

Sub-Contractor will be permitted to execute work under the Contract.
The approved Sub-Contractor who executes the work will NOT be a
nominated Sub-Contractor under the terms of the Contract but will be
considered a 'domestic' Sub-Contractor employed directly by the Main
Contractor.
2 Should the Main Contractor include prices from a Sub-Contractor and

Manufacturer whose name is not included in the approved list then the
Contractor shall bear the extra cost of employing an approved Sub-
Contractor/Manufacturer who will be nominated by the Architect.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PRESSURE TESTING:
Pressure test all pipe work in accordance with SECTION 230500 – COMMON WORK
RESULTS FOR HVAC SYSTEM to 1.5 times the maximum working pressure.
3.2 COMMISSIONING:
To be in accordance with SECTION 230500 – COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC

SYSTEM and 23 08 00 - COMMISSIONING OF HVAC
Care to be taken on initial start-up to limit condensation by gradual reduction of
chilled water temperature
23 80 00
23 81 00 - Unitary Air Conditioners
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 Description of the system
1.1.1 Extent of Unitary Air-conditioners work is indicated on drawing, in schedules

and by provision of this section.
1.1.2 Type of Unitary Air-conditioners shall be DX type split system air-conditioners

(mini split or duct able) and window air-conditioning units.
1.2 Definitions
The unit work is hereby defined to include, but not limited to following:
The Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials, equipment, accessories, services
and tests necessary to complete and make ready for operation by the
employer, the unit installations as shown in the drawing and herein after
specified. The installation shall be complete workable system including electric
power cables and control wiring work from equipment up to the isolator
(isolator covered under Division Twenty-Six-Electrical).
All electrical work shall conform to the requirements of Division Twenty-Six-
Electrical.
All builder’s work in connection with the installations of the Unitary Air-
conditioners.
1.2.1 Builders Work

The following builder’s work shall be allowed for by the Contractor under this
section.
Necessary concrete pedestal for the outdoor condensing unit and supports for
refrigerant piping.
Forming, cutting away for and making good all openings, holes, chases
mortises etc.
Necessary material and equipment for lifting, hoisting etc. to allow installation of
unit at the required location.
Supplying, during the erection electrical power of necessary characteristic to
provide illumination, operation of required tools and hoists and power for
starting, testing and adjusting the equipment.
Cable duct/conduits etc. for the installation of Elect. /Control Wiring and
Refrigerant piping.
Painting as specified elsewhere.
All the above builder’s work shall be carried out to the entire satisfaction of the
Engineer and in accordance with the unit specification.
1.3 Related Works
This section on Unitary Air Conditioners is to be read in conjunction with the
following section.
Number Description
230713 INSULATION
23 81 00

1.4.1 Factory Test: The performance test for the equipment at the simulated
dispatch of the equipment. The test shall be witnessed by the Engineer. Allow
for visit by two personnel from Consultant/Client for the factory test visit.
1.4.2 Installer Qualifications

1. Either the unit manufacturer or a license of the manufacturer who has not
less than 10 years successful experience with the installation of similar
equipment.
2. The Contractor shall provide the services of an experienced
superintendent who shall constantly be in-charge of the unit installations,
together with all necessary mechanics and labourers required to properly
unload, transfer, erect, connect up, adjust, start, operate and test the
installation and other applicable standards of ASTM, ASHRAE, ASME etc.,
and shall be UL approved.
1.4.3 All the sections and components of the unit shall be shipped together in a
single consignment only.
1.4.4 The unit shall be stored and handled as per unit manufacturer’s instructions.
1.5 Submittals
1.5.1 Product Data

Submit manufacturer’s detailed technical product selection data, method of
construction material data and installation proceedings for each principal
component or unit and include certified test report on required testing. List and
describe features of control system, performances, and operating
characteristics together with any further information pertinent to the adequacy
of the equipment.
1.5.2 Shop Drawings

1. The layouts shown on drawings are to be considered as diagrammatic
and it shall be the Contractor’s responsibility to check all dimensions, pipe
and duct locations against Architect’s drawings, or if the work is sufficiently
advanced, by actual measurements on site, to ensure the proper
matching of mating parts. The Contractor shall provide suitable
clearances where required.
2. The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer shop drawings showing
detailed construction and detailed layout of the units, its associated
components and any other related equipment materials to be installed.
No work shall be carried out before approval of shop drawings or
equipment has been given by the Architect.
23 81 00
3. Where data certified drawings or other required information is not

available until all requested drawings and information have been supplied
to the Engineer and approved by him, it is the Contractor’s responsibility to
ensure that all necessary information is supplied to the Engineer in
accordance with the progress of the work.
4. Should the Engineer give provisional approval only of an order due to lack
of complete information and should the missing information not eventually
meet with approval, the Engineer will not be held responsible for any delay
incurred. For equipment where information from the manufacturers is likely
to be delayed, it is essential that the Contractor places provisionally
approved orders at the earliest possible date so as to ensure approval of
orders in complete conformity with the progress of the works.
5. Submittals and shop drawings shall as far as possible be complementary
so that drawings and submittals can be cross-checked.
1.5.3 Maintenance Manual

Submit bound manual for the unit with operating and maintenance instructions,
parts listing, recommended parts inventory listing, emergency instructions and
similar information.
1.5.4 Product Certificates: For each unit, from manufacturer
1.5.5 Manufacturer's factory test reports of fully assembled and tested

equipment prior to shipment of equipment from factory.
1.5.6 ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1-2007 Compliance: Provide compliance form as per

1.6 WARRANTY
1.6.1 Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer

agrees to repair or replace components of air conditioners unit that fails in
materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
a) Warranty Period for Compressors and Condenser coil: Manufacturer's

standard, but not less than five (5) years from date of practical
Completion.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 Approved manufacturers
The materials shall be from the following manufacturers and from the country of
origin as mentioned or approved equal. In case the contractor intends to
propose an alternate make and/or origin, the contractor shall furnish separate
cost as an option and qualify for the same in his tender submission.
Manufacturers Agent
York Almoayyed Air-conditioning
U.S.A. Contracting
P O Box 32232
Bahrain
Tel. 17400407 Fax: 17400396
23 81 00
Carrier Yateem Air-conditioning

U.S.A. P O Box 60
Manama Bahrain
Tel. 253177 Fax: 250483
The Trane Company Bahrain Trading Agencies

International Divn. P O Box 30540
La Crosses, Wisconsin Bahrain
54601, U.S.A. Tel. 691650/252894 Fax: 593113
2.2 Equipment and components
2.2.1 Split System Air-conditioners

The Split System Air-conditioners shall be as per the following specification and
as per the schedule covered under the relevant drawing.
2.3 Condensing Units
1. Each Condensing Unit shall be complete unit with compressor and motor
assembly, air cooled condenser, condenser fan with motor, internal
piping, control panel, switches and internal wiring and shall be enclosed in
a weatherproof outdoor type housing suitable for high humidity climate.
2. The condenser coil shall be air cooled type with aluminum fins and copper
tubes and necessary refrigerant connections. The copper tubes shall not
be less than 12mm O.D. The fins shall be mechanically bonded over the
tubes.
3. The condenser air fan shall be propeller type direct driven, each complete
with motor. The air quantity and area of the condenser shall be adequate
for working in the outdoor ambient temperature of 52ºC.
4. The casing shall be fabricated from Phosphatized, zinc coated steel and
finished with baked enamel paint. The casing shall make the whole unit
fully weatherproof, suitable for outdoor installation.
5. The unit shall include a remote relay assembly with a thermostat, starting
switches and minimum 2 speed fan regulators. The relay assembly should
also have indicating light to indicate mode of operation of the unit. The
sensor for the thermostat should preferably be within the indoor fan coil
unit cabinet.
6. The necessary charge of Refrigerant gas and lubricating oil shall be
provided to run the system.
2.4 Indoor Unit
1. The indoor units shall be high wall type and matched to the respective
condensing unit. Each unit shall consist of cooling coil, fan section, filters,
outer casing and accessories.
2. The cooling coil shall have copper tubes of not less than 10 mm/e/8@ dia
O.D. and continues aluminium plate fins. The tubes shall be staggered in
the direction of the air flow. The fins shall be mechanically bonded on the
tube.
3. The fan section shall consist of forward curved fan complete with scroll,
shaft and self aligning bearings and fan motor mounted on flexible
supports.
4. Low velocity cleanable filters of not more than 25mm thickness shall be
provided before the coil.
5. The unit casing shall be made of finished plastic compact, post-modern
aesthetic design.
23 81 00
6. The refrigerant pipe, condensate drain and control wire shall be drawn in
the pipe sleeve embedded in the walls and hence, sufficient care shall be
taken at drawing and execution stage for proper co-ordination.
2.5 Refrigerant Piping
1. The condensing unit and evaporating unit shall be inter-connected by
one shot pre-charged seamless refrigerant pipe or by type L seamless
copper refrigerant liquid and suction lines using flared or brazed fittings.
Necessary accessories shall be incorporated in the circuit.
2. The suction line shall be insulated with minimum 25mm thick approved
quality foam insulation rubber.
3. The piping at roof level shall be further covered with canvas cloth dipped
in Fire Retardant and weatherproof adhesive.
2.6 Miscellaneous
Each system shall be provided with the following.
1. LCD wireless remote controller with mounting bracket, micro processor
based stand alone type controller with auto re-start feature, back-up
memory, vertical auto-swing, speed regulation, timer (24 hrs.).
2. All power/control wiring from DP switch/weatherproof isolator to the indoor
and outdoor unit and thermostat.
3. Provide insulated condensate drain from indoor unit up to the nearest
drain point as shown in the drawing or as approved by the Architect.
4. Necessary charge of refrigerant and lubricating oil.
5. Control and monitoring on BMS shall be described in the drawings.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 Inspection
3.1.1 Prior to commencing equipment installation, installer shall inspect hoistways,

hoistway accesses/openings, space for the unit, its foundation etc., as
constructed, shall verify all dimensions, and examine supporting structure and
all other conditions under which unit is to be installed.
Co-ordinate with the Contractor if any dimensional discrepancies or other
conditions detrimental to the proper installation or performance of the unit. Do
not proceed with the unit installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected in a manner acceptable to the installer.
3.2 Installation:
3.2.1 General: Comply with manufacturer’s instruction and recommendations for

work required during installation.
Installation and start up of the units shall be carried out only qualified installers
and service.
also, to avoid hindrance to work of other trades. Use bench makers, lines and
levels designated by Contractor to ensure dimensional co-ordination of the
work.
3.2.2 Comply with the requirements specified in Section 220800
23 81 00
3.3 Tests on completion
3.3.1 The Contractor shall carry out all the tests to establish the actual capacity of
the unit as specified under the schedules of the equipment and
recommended under relevant clauses of ARI, ASHRAE etc.
For other requirements on ‘TEST ON COMPLETION’ refer relevant clauses in
SECTION 230100 – OPERATION & MAINTENANCE OF HVAC SYSTEM
3.4 Protection:
3.4.1 At the time of substantial completion of the unit work, provide suitable
protective covering, barriers, devices, signs or such other methods or
procedures to protect the work from damage or deterioration. Maintain
protective measures throughout remainder of construction period.
3.5 Instruction and maintenance
3.5.1 Instruction the Employer’s personnel in proper use, operation and daily
maintenance of the unit. Train Employer’s personnel in normal procedure to
be followed in checking for sources of operation failure or malfunctions.
Confer with Employer on requirements for a complete unit maintenance
program.
3.6 Warranty:
Provide warranty of 5 years from date of taking over certificate for the
compressor and condenser coils
23 81 00
23 81 23 – Computer Room Air - Conditioners
PART 1 - GENERAL

B. This section on Computer Room Air-conditioners is to be read in conjunction with the

following section:
Number Description
230713 INSULATION
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section Includes the following listed units and accessories, built in a cabinet
design and shall have autonomous micro processor control as specified in the
drawings:
1. Floor-mounted computer-room air conditioners - CCU system (DX type).

2. Floor-mounted computer-room air conditioners - CCU system (CHW type).
1.3 SUBMITTALS

specialties, and accessories. Submit manufacturer's detailed technical product
selection data, method of construction, material data and installations procedures
for each principal component or unit and include certified test reports on required
testing. List and describe features of control system, performances together with any
further information pertinent to the adequacy of the equipment.
23 81 23

a. The layouts shown on contract drawings are to be considered diagrammatic

and it shall be the Contractor's responsibility to check all dimensions, pipe and
duct locations against Architect's drawings, or if the work is sufficiently
advanced, by actual measurements on site, to ensure the proper matching of
mating parts. The Contractor shall provide suitable clearances where
required.
b. The Contractor shall submit to the Architect shop drawings showing detailed
construction and detailed layout of the unit, its associated components and any
other related equipment material to be installed. No work shall be carried out
before approval of shop drawings or equipment.
c. Where data certified drawings or other required information is not available until
all requested drawings and information have been supplied to the Engineer and
approved by him, it is the Contractor's responsibility to ensure that all necessary
information is supplied to the Engineer in accordance with the progress of the
work.
d. Should the Engineer give provisional approval only of an order due to lack of
complete information and should the missing information not eventually meet with
approval, the Engineer will not be held responsible for any delay incurred. For
equipment where information from manufacturers is likely to be delayed, it is
possible date so as to ensure approval of orders in complete conformity with the
e. Submittals and shop drawings shall as far as possible be complementary so

that drawings and submittals can be cross-checked
C. Coordination Drawings: Floor plans, reflected ceiling plans, and other details, drawn
to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other,
based on input from installers of the items involved:
1. Ceiling suspension components.

2. Method of attaching hangers to building structure.
3. Items penetrating finished ceiling, including the following:
a. Lighting fixtures.
b. Air outlets and inlets.
c. Speakers.
d. Sprinklers.
e. Access panels.
f. Smoke Detectors.
4. Perimeter moldings for exposed or partially exposed cabinets.
D. Samples for Initial Selection: For units with factory-applied color finishes as per
instructions by the Architect.
23 81 23
E. ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1-2010 Compliance: Provide compliance form as per applicable

F. Builder's Work: The following builder's work shall be allowed for by the Contractor
under this section:
1. Necessary steel plate, hanger, support in the ceiling, floor or wall for the support of
the unit.
etc.
3. Necessary materials and equipment for lifting, hoisting etc., to allow installation of
6. Painting as specified elsewhere.

C. ASHRAE Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE 62.1-2010, Section 5 -

D. ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1-2010 Compliance: Applicable requirements in

1.5 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of Computer Room Air-conditioning units and

installation components with other construction, including light fixtures, fire-
suppression-system components, and partition assemblies.
B. Coordinate size and location of wall sleeves for fresh/ outdoor-air intake, wherever
required as per approved drawings.
C. Shop Drawings: For computer-room air conditioners. Include plans, elevations,

sections, details, and attachments to other work.

D. Color Samples: For unit cabinet, discharge grille, and exterior louver and for each
color and texture specified.
23 81 23
1.6 WARRANTY

repair or replace components of computer-room air conditioners that fail in
materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
1. Warranty Period for Compressors: Manufacturer's standard, but not less than
five (5) years from date of Taking Over Certificate.
2. Warranty Period for Humidifiers: Manufacturer's standard, but not less than
three (3) years from date of Taking Over Certificate.
3. Warranty Period for Control Boards: Manufacturer's standard, but not less
than three (3) years from date of Taking Over Certificate.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
B. In the Computer Room Air-Conditioning Unit Schedule, the following requirements


products by one of the manufacturers whose equipment must have been
used in the Kingdom in last 5-10 years.
2. Worldwide service: The manufacturer shall have a worldwide service

organization available consisting of factory trained field service personnel to
perform start-up, preventative maintenance, and service of the power
equipment & Cooling system. The service organization shall offer a 24 hour a
day, 7 days a week, 365 days a year service support.
3. Replacement parts: Parts shall be available through the world-wide service

organization 24 hours a day, 7 days a week, and 365 days a year. The
worldwide service organization shall be capable of shipping parts, so that the
parts may be delivered to the customer site within 24 hours.
2.2 FLOOR MOUNTED CLOSE CONTROL UNITS
A. Description: Self-contained, factory assembled, prewired, and pre-piped;

consisting of cabinet, fan, filters, and autonomous microprocessor controls; for
vertical floor mounting with discharge from bottom and suction from up flow
configuration.
B. The unit shall conform to all technical standards and safety regulations. The
unit shall be CE Certified for electrical and mechanical safety, manufactured to
ISO 9001 Quality Assurance System
C. The water supply and drain provisions for the unit are to be in the scope of the main
contractor and coordinated with equipment vendor.
23 81 23
D. Cabinet and Frame:
1. The unit shall have self supporting construction in a modern design for highest
stability and air conduction, harmonized color, side walls and doors made of
steel protected by high quality powder coating. All panels and walls shall be
lined with a noise absorbing thermal insulation.
2. The unit shall be with adjustable legs and provided with vibration isolation
pads.
3. The complete panel work shall be assembled to the unit with special
security fasteners to prevent unauthorized access to the unit
4. Finish of Interior Surfaces: Surfaces in contact with the airstream shall comply
with requirements in ASHRAE 62.1-2010
E. Supply-Air Fan:
1. High efficiency EC radial Fan shall be made of galvanized steel, double

lateral inlet, statically and dynamically balanced, backward curved blades,
low revolutions for low noise emissions. Maintenance free ball bearings shall
be life time lubricated.
2. Fan shall be mounted on anti-vibration rubber elements.
3. The motor can be adjusted by a fan speed controller which is installed
in the electrical cabinet. The fan speed controller has two different outputs
i. Dehumidification stage
ii. Regular Stage.
4. Both stages can be adjusted to individual airflow requirements by
potentiometer
F. Refrigeration System:
1. Compressor: Hermetic scroll compressor with increased EER and complete

with locking device, non return valves in discharge line, oil strainer, internal
motor overload protection, resilient suspension system, and crankcase heater.
2. Refrigeration Circuit: Low-pressure switch, manual-reset high-pressure switch,

thermal-expansion valve with external equalizer, Liquid receiver, Filter dryer,
sight glass with moisture indicator, service shutoff valves, charging valves,
solenoid valve in liquid line and rotalock valve on receiver outlet for an easy
filter dryer replacement and charge of refrigerant.
3. Refrigerant: R-407C/ R-410A/ R 134a.
4. Refrigerant Evaporator Coil: Large surface direct expansion evaporator coil

shall be with multiple injection for an optimized refrigerant distribution on the
coil and shall be located on the suction side of the Fan for an equal air
flow over the complete coil. Evaporator coil shall be made of copper
tubes with mechanically bonded aluminium Fins and the Frame is made of
aluminium.
a. Mount coil assembly over stainless-steel drain pan complying with

ASHRAE 62.1-2004 and having a condensate pump unit with integral
float switch, pump-motor assembly, and condensate reservoir.
b. Drip tray and drain syphon, made of aluminium to provide max.
corrosion protection and shall be easily accessible and cleanable.
23 81 23
c. The coil shall be designed in a way that in normal operation, no

dehumidification happens and only sensible cooling capacity is
provided.
d. The dehumidification is realized by a signal which is provided by the
controller b y reducing the fan speed the evaporating temperature is
also reduced, so that the temperature is decreased below the dew
point which finally causes dehumidification by condensation.
5. Remote Air-Cooled Refrigerant Condenser:
a. Air cooled condenser shall be suitable for outdoor installation and

shall be of self supporting design made of aluminium housing, axial fan
with grid cage in corrosion resistance allows for horizontal / vertical
installation on site.
b. Condenser coils shall be made of copper tubes with mechanically

bonded aluminium fins. Headers shall be with copper soldering
connections. Each circuit shall be equipped with a Schrader valve for
pressostat and a free Schradervalve for connection of pressure
gauge. Condenser coils shall be Black epoxy coated to safe guard
against salt and sand laden corrosive atmosphere
c. Split system shall have suction- and liquid-line compatible fittings and
refrigerant piping for field interconnection.
G. Electric-Resistance Heating Coil: Finned-tube electric elements with contactor and

high-temperature-limit switches.
H. Filter: 1-inch- (25-mm-) thick, disposable, glass-fiber media/ synthetic large surface
material with a high dust holding capacity and shall have EU4 Filter quality.
1. Pressure differential switch for clogged Filter indication by micro processor

shall be provided.
I. Infrared Humidifier: High-intensity quartz lamps mounted above stainless-steel

evaporator pan, serviceable without disconnecting water, drain, or electrical
connections; prepiped and located in bypass airstream; with flush-cycle timer and
solenoid drain valve.
J. Disconnect Switch: Non-automatic, molded-case circuit breaker with handle

accessible when panel is closed and capable of preventing access until switched
to off position.
K. Control System: Unit-mounted panel with main fan contactor, compressor

contactor, compressor start capacitor, control transformer with circuit breaker, solid-
state temperature and humidity control modules, humidity contactor, time-delay
relay, Heating contactor, and high-temperature thermostat. Provide solid-state,
wall-mounted control panel with start-stop switch, [adjustable humidity set point,]
and adjustable temperature set point.
L. Cooling Coil System: Cooling System shall include valve package with PICV control
valve, Leakage Sensor, Temperature sensors, Condenser pump, Condensate Sensor,
overflow hose, Flow Sensor and cooling coil and stainless-steel condensate
collection tray etc.
23 81 23
M. Fan section shall include fan module, air inlet, heat exchanger, air outlet etc. fans
shall be with permanently lubricated ball bearings, and single-phase motors with
internal overload protection and integral electric control panel and disconnect
switch G-MOUNTED UNITS.
1. High efficiency radial Fan shall be made of galvanized steel, double lateral
inlet, statically and dynamically balanced, forward curved blades, low
revolutions for low noise emissions.
2. Fan shall be mounted on anti-vibration rubber elements.
N. Disconnect Switch: Non-automatic, molded-case circuit breaker with handle

accessible when panel is closed and capable of preventing access until switched
to off position.
O. Control System: Unit-mounted panel with main fan contactor, compressor

contactor, compressor start capacitor, control transformer with circuit breaker, solid-
state temperature-[ and humidity-]control modules[, humidity contactor], time-
delay relay, Heating contactor, and high-temperature thermostat. Provide solid-
state, wall-mounted control panel with start-stop switch, adjustable humidity set
point, and adjustable temperature set point.
P. The unit shall be provided with integral electronic control system to ensure
independent, monitoring operation and control of each unit from remotely located
Building Management System as described under SECTION 230900 on CONTROL
AND INSTRUMENTATION. Provide all the necessary controls, software to provide
complete diagnostic data at one point for BMS hook up in BACnet protocol. Ensure
the full integration is complied with specified BMS suppliers. This point shall be
demonstrated at the time of testing & commissioning.
MICROPROCESSOR CONTROLLER:
a) The controller shall consists of a relay board, a microprocessor including inputs
and outputs, the front plate and a Front foil which includes a 4 digit
display and 4 operation keys. The controller shall provide a common alarm
and an interface for remote control. After a power interruption, the controller
creates an automatic restart of the unit.
b) Temperature and humidity can be adjusted with a very large hysteresis for
energy saving as well as a very small hysteresis for precision control tasks.
c) The following shall be the inputs/outputs:
d) 4 sensor inputs
e) 4 Analogue outputs
f) 11 alarm inputs
g) 1 remote on / off (inputs)
h) 7 Digital outputs
i) On the relay board additional dip switches are available for setting the
display and for changing the free alarm input into a water detector alarm
which cuts off the humidification.
j) The controller has been designed for control of air conditioning units with: Fan
drive, 2 Heater stages, Humidifier, Compressor etc.
k) The controller has a PI logic, the I part is adjustable.
2.3 FAN MOTORS:
Default motor characteristics are specified in Division 23 Section "Common Motor

Requirements for HVAC Equipment." Comply with NEMA designation, temperature
rating, service factor, enclosure type, and efficiency requirements for motors
23 81 23
specified in Division 23 Section "Common Motor Requirements for HVAC

Equipment."
1. Motor Sizes: Minimum size as indicated. If not indicated, large enough so

driven load will not require motor to operate in service factor range above
1.0.
Controllers, Electrical Devices, and Wiring: Comply with requirements for
electrical devices and connections specified in Division 26 Sections.
2. The motor can be adjusted by a fan speed controller which is installed
in the electrical cabinet. The fan speed controller has two different outputs.
a) Dehumidification Stage
b) Regular Stage
Both stages can be adjusted to individual airflow requirements by potentiometer.
2.4 MISCELLANEOUS
Each system shall be provided with the following:

Supervision: The supervision of the following functions and signals by the controller:
a) Air flow, Heating, Humidification Filter, 2 Auxiliary alarms for water detection and
smoke detection
b) Display: LED display the set points and actual values of Temperature and
humidity, as well as all control parameters and various alarm codes are
displayed. The status of operation is shown by LED for the following functions:
c) Cooling, Heating, Humidification, Dehumidification, Alarm, Stop of units by
remote control, Stop of units by manual operation.
d) Operation: Using the controller, the different parameters can be displayed and
also be changed after entering the password. By pressing a certain key
combination an alarm can be re-setted. All entered parameters shall be stored
and protected against power interruption.
e) Sequencing: The controller has an integrated sequencing of function. By
connecting two units with the same controller type, the following functions are
provided.
1. Stand by operation of one of the units
2. Periodic switch-over from „stand by‟ to „run‟ every week i.e. 168 hours.
3. Shortly before Room temperature limit is reached, the second unit
is switched on to remove temporary heat loads.
4. Immediate switch over to the stand by unit in case of failure of the unit
which is in operation.
f) Sensor Calibration: Sensors of the controller can be calibrated by adjusting
indicated values to actual readings which are shown by different devices also
used in the room.
g) Password Protection: The controller shall be protected against unauthorized
access by a password.
h) Electrical Reheat: Electrical re-heater of specified capacity shall be installed in
the unit, made of Aluminium using aluminium fins for reducing surface
temperature. The heater element is protected by a thermostat to avoid
overheating.
i) Steam Humidifier: Steam Humidifier shall be provided in full automatic production
and discharge of odour less, germless and demineralized steam. Nominal
pressure shall be 1–6 bars. Steam capacity in the range of 25-100% of the
nominal capacity adjustable on the unit.
Completely assembled as a kit including a strainer, an inlet and outlet solenoid
valve, a steam cylinder with the boiling electrodes, a separate control box with
23 81 23
control devices, contactors, and autonomous control microprocessor for all

modes of operation.
2.5 DRY COOLER
A. SUMMARY
The drycooler shall be designed to reject waste heat to outdoor air and to control
glycol temperature as pumped glycol rates and outdoor ambient conditions change.
The manufacturer shall design and furnish all equipment in the quantities and
configurations shown on the project drawings.
Standard 50Hz units are CSA certified to the harmonized U. S. and Canadian product
safety standard CSA C22.2 No 236/UL 1995 for “Heating and Cooling Equipment” and
are marked with the CSA c-us logo.
B. DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
The drycooler shall be a factory-assembled unit, complete with integral electrical
panel, designed for outdoor installation and vertical airflow only. (The drycooler shall
be a draw-through design.)
The drycooler shall have a total heat rejection capacity of as shown in the schedule
rated at an outdoor ambient of 46oC
C. SUBMITTALS
Submittals shall be provided with the proposal and shall include: Dimensional,
Electrical and Capacity data; and Piping and Electrical Connection drawings.
D. QUALITY ASSURANCE
The specified system shall be factory-tested before shipment. Testing shall include, but
shall not be limitedto: Quality Control Checks, “Hi-Pot” Test (two times rated voltage
plus 1000V, per NRTL agency requirements) and Metering Calibration Tests. The system
shall be designed and manufactured according to world class quality standards. The
manufacturer shall be ISO 9001 certified.
2.5.1 PRODUCT
A. STANDARD FEATURES—ALL DRYCOOLERS

The drycooler shall consist of drycooler coil(s), housing, propeller fan(s) direct-driven by
individual fan motor(s), electrical controls and mounting legs. The air-cooled drycooler
shall provide glycol temperature control to the indoor cooling unit by adjusting heat
rejection capacity. Various methods shall be available to match indoor unit type,
minimum outdoor design ambient and maximum sound requirements.
B. DRYCOOLER COIL
The manufactured coil shall be constructed of copper tubes in a staggered tube

pattern. Tubes shall be expanded into continuous, corrugated aluminum fins. The fins
shall have full-depth fin collars completely covering the copper tubes, which are
connected to heavy wall Type “L” headers. Inlet coil connector tubes pass through
relieved holes in the tube sheet for maximum resistance to piping strain and vibration.
Coil shall be split flow into multiple coil circuits, combined to yield a drycooler with 2
internal circuits. The supply and return lines shall be (spun shut [1-4 fan models]),
(brazed with a cap [6 or 8-fan models]) and shall include a factory-installed Schrader
valve. Coils shall be factory leak-tested at a minimum of 300 psig (2068kPag),
23 81 23
dehydrated, then filled and sealed with an inert gas holding charge for shipment. Field
relief of the Schrader valve shall indicate a leak-free coil.
1. Housing
The drycooler housing shall be constructed of bright aluminum sheet and divided into
individual fan sections by full-width baffles. Structural support members, including coil
support frame, motor and drive support, shall be galvanized steel for strength and
corrosion resistance. Aluminum legs shall be provided to mount unit for vertical air
discharge and shall have rigging holes for hoisting the unit into position. An electrical
panel shall be inside an integral NEMA 3R weatherproof section of the housing.
2. Propeller Fan
The propeller fan shall have aluminum blades secured to a corrosion protected steel
hub. Fans shall be secured to the fan motor shaft by means of a keyed hub and dual
setscrews. Fan diameter shall be 26" (660mm) or less. Fans shall be factory-balanced
and run before shipment. Fan guards shall be heavy gauge, close-mesh steel wire with
corrosion-resistant polyester paint finish that shall be rated to pass a 1000-hour salt
spray test.
3. Fan Motor
The fan motor shall be continuous air-over design and shall be equipped with a rain
shield and permanently sealed bearing. Motors shall be rigidly mounted on die-
formed galvanized steel supports.
4. Electrical Controls
Electrical controls, overload protection devices and service connection terminals shall
be provided and factory-wired inside the integral electrical panel section of the
housing. A locking disconnect switch shall be factory-mounted and wired to the
electrical panel and controlled via an externally mounted locking door handle. An
indoor unit interlock circuit shall enable drycooler operation whenever indoor unit
compressors are active. Only supply wiring, indoor unit interlock wiring and high
voltage wiring to pumps when controlled by the drycooler shall be required at
drycooler installation.
5. Pump Controls
The control for pump(s) up to 7.5hp shall be incorporated into the drycooler electrical
panel and shall be available on all Fan Speed and Fan Cycling Control drycoolers.
The pump fuses, overload heaters and flow switch (dual pump control models) for the
drycooler electrical panel shall be included with the pump packages or shall be field-
supplied for field-supplied pumps.
The dual pump control option shall provide controls for primary and standby pump
operation. A flow switch shall be field-installed into glycol piping and wired into the
drycooler electrical panel. A loss of glycol flow shall be sensed by the flow switch and
the pump controls shall energize the standby pump and reenergize the primary
pump. An internal switch shall allow manual selection of the lead/lag pump for the
Balance of run time.
C. ANCILLARY ITEMS
1. Expansion Tanks, Fluid Relief Valves, Air Management and Other Devices
An expansion tank shall be provided for expansion and contraction of the glycol fluid
due to temperature change in the closed system. The tank and air vents shall be field-
installed at the system’s highest elevation to allow venting of trapped air. A fluid
pressure relief valve shall be provided for system safety.
23 81 23
The system shall include (tank-steel [expansion, compression, diaphragm, bladder], air
separator, air vent, fluid pressure relief valve, pressure gauges, flow switches,
tempering valves, [primary, primary and
Standby] pumps, supply and return piping).
2.5.2 BACnet Interface:

1. Provide BACnet / IP or BACnet/MSTP interface between each Computer room
Closed Control (CCU) Air conditioning and Main BMS Client server.
2. With BACnet interface all points on the CCU shall be represented as BACnet
objects on the BMS Client.
3. BACnet interface shall provide all control & monitoring points to the BMS.
4. BACnet output provided shall be compitable to the Main BMS System of the
project.
5. Contractor shall provide necessary BACnet Gateway unit if the interface output is
in a different protocol then the central BMS protocol.
2.5.3 EXECUTION
A. INSTALLATION OF AIR CONDITIONING UNIT
6. General
The air conditioning unit shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s
installation instructions. Install unit plumb and level, firmly anchored in location
indicated, and maintain manufacturer’s recommended clearances.
7. Electrical Wiring
Install and connect electrical devices furnished by manufacturer but not specified to
be factory-mounted.
Furnish a copy of the manufacturer’s electrical connection diagram submittal to the
electrical contractor.
Install and wire per local and national codes.
8. Piping Connections
Install and connect devices furnished by manufacturer but not specified to be
factory-mounted. Furnish a copy of manufacturer's piping connection diagram
submittal to the piping contractor.
9. Field Quality Control

Start cooling units in accordance with manufacturer’s startup instructions. Test controls
and demonstrate Compliance with requirements. These specifications describe
requirements for a computer room environmental control system. The system shall be
designed to maintain temperature and humidity conditions in the rooms containing
electronic equipment.
The manufacturer shall design and furnish all equipment to be fully compatible with
heat dissipation requirements.
23 81 23
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas to receive Computer Room Air conditioning Units for compliance
with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting
performance.
B. Examine roughing-in for piping and electrical connections to verify actual locations
before fan-coil-unit installation.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install computer-room air conditioners level and plumb, maintaining manufacturer's

recommended clearances. [Install according to ARI Guideline B.]
B. Computer-Room Air-Conditioner Mounting: Install using leveling legs. Comply with

requirements for vibration isolation devices specified in Division 23 sections.
1. Minimum Deflection: 6 mm to 25 mm.
C. Air-Cooled Refrigerant Condenser Mounting: Install using elastomeric pads. Comply

with requirements for vibration isolation devices specified in Division 23 Section
"Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment."
1. Minimum Deflection: 6 mm to 25 mm.
3.3 CONNECTIONS
A. Piping installation requirements are specified. Drawings indicate general

B. Install piping adjacent to machine to allow service and maintenance.
C. Water and Drainage Connections: Comply with applicable requirements in

Division 22 Section "Domestic Water Piping." Provide adequate connections for
water-cooled units, condensate drain, and humidifier flushing system.
D. Refrigerant Piping: Comply with applicable requirements in Division 23 Section

"Refrigerant Piping." Provide shutoff valves and piping.
A. Tests and Inspections:
1. Inspect for and remove shipping bolts, blocks, and tie-down straps.
2. After installing computer-room air conditioners and after electrical circuitry
has been energized, test for compliance with requirements.
confirm proper motor rotation and unit operation.
23 81 23
B. Computer-room air conditioners will be considered defective if they do not pass

tests and inspections.
C. Prepare test and inspection reports.
D. After startup service and performance test, change filters and flush humidifier.
3.5 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust initial temperature and humidity set points.
B. Set field-adjustable switches and circuit-breaker trip ranges as indicated.
C. Occupancy Adjustments: When requested during Defects Liability period from the
date of Substantial Completion, provide on-site assistance in adjusting system to suit
actual occupied conditions.
3.6 QUALIFICATION/ CRITERIA FOR THE SELECTION OF LOCAL SERVICE PROVIDER
A. A complete offering of preventative and full-service support for the complete system
during warranty period shall be available.
B. Maintenance work shall be performed by Manufacturer factory trained service

personnel.
C. The respective local company needs to be authorized service provider for that
particular Manufacturer.
D. Local Service Provider shall have adequate number of spares at any point of time.
23 81 23
23 81 29 – Variable Refrigerant Flow HVAC Systems
PART 1 - GENERAL

Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Heating and Cooling is to be provided by utilizing the Air-cooled VRV modular

systems comprising a number of external condensing units connected via
refrigerant pipework to internal direct expansion fan coil units
B. Section includes complete VRF HVAC system(s) including, but not limited to the
following components to make a complete operating system(s) according to
requirements indicated:
1. R410A Heat Pump High Ambient Condensing Unit.

2. Indoor Fan Coil Units.
3. Ancillary items.
4. Controls.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Air-Conditioning System Operation: System capable of operation with all zones in

cooling /Heating only.
B. EEPROM: Electrically erasable programmable read-only memory.
C. Electronic Expansion Valve (EEV): EEV's are used in heat pump.
D. Heat Pump (HP) System Operation: System capable of operation with all zones in
either heating or cooling, but not with simultaneous heating and cooling zones that
transfer heat between zones.
E. HSP: High static pressure.
F. MSP: Medium static pressure.
G. Low Voltage: As defined in NFPA 70 for circuits and equipment operating at less
than 50 V or for remote-control, signaling power-limited circuits.
H. OAP: Outside air processing.
I. PCB: Printed circuit board.
23 81 29
J. Plenum: A space forming part of the air distribution system to which one or more air
ducts are connected. An air duct is a passageway, other than a plenum, for
transporting air to or from heating, ventilating, or air-conditioning equipment.
K. VRF: Variable refrigerant flow.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product.
1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual

components and profiles, and finishes for indoor and outdoor units.
2. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, electrical characteristics,
and furnished specialties and accessories.
3. Include operating performance at design conditions and at extreme
maximum and minimum outdoor ambient conditions.
4. Include description of system controllers, dimensions, features, control
interfaces and connections, power requirements, and connections.
5. Include system operating sequence of operation in narrative form for each
unique indoor- and outdoor-unit control.
6. Include description of control software features.
7. Include total refrigerant required and a comprehensive breakdown of
refrigerant required by each system installed.
8. Include refrigerant type and data sheets showing compliance with
requirements indicated.
9. For system design software.
10. Indicate location and type of service access.
B. Sustainable Design Submittals:

1. Product Data: For minimum energy performance.
2. ASHRAE 62.1 Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE 62.1,
Section 7.2.2 - "Air Balancing."
3. ASHRAE/IES 90.1 compliance.
4. Air-Balance Report: Documentation indicating that Work complies with
ASHRAE 62.1, Section 7.2.2 - "Air Balancing."
5. HVAC Flush Report: Documentation indicating that building HVAC system flush
complies with Green Globes v1.4, Section 3.2.4.4 - "IAQ during Construction."
C. Shop Drawings: For VRF HVAC systems.
1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and mounting details.

2. Include details of equipment assemblies. Indicate dimensions, weights, loads,
3. Vibration Isolation Base Details: Detail fabrication including anchorages and
attachments to structure and to supported equipment. Include adjustable
motor bases, rails, and frames for equipment mounting.
4. Include diagrams and details of refrigerant piping and tubing showing
installation requirements for manufacturer-furnished divided flow fittings.
5. Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring.
D. Samples for Initial Selection: For fully and partially exposed indoor units with factory
finishes viewable by occupants.
23 81 29
1. Include a Sample for each unique finish with unit identification, detailed
description of application, and cross-referenced floor plans showing locations.
E. Delegated-Design Submittals:
1. Include design calculations for selecting vibration isolators and for designing
vibration isolation bases.
2. Include design calculations with corresponding diagram of refrigerant piping
and tubing sizing for each system installed.
3. Include design calculations with corresponding floor plans indicating that
refrigerant concentration limits are within allowable limits of ASHRAE 15 and
governing codes.
4. Include calculations showing that system travel distance for refrigerant piping
and controls cabling are within horizontal and vertical travel distances set by
manufacturer. Provide a comparison table for each system installed.
1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Coordination Drawings: Plans, elevations, sections, and details, drawn to scale, on

which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input
from installers of the items involved:
1. Suspended ceiling components.

2. Structural floors, roofs and associated members to which equipment, piping,
ductwork, cables, and conduit will be attached.
3. Size and location of initial access modules for acoustical tile.
4. Wall-mounted controllers located in finished space showing relationship to
light switches, fire-alarm devices, and other installed devices.
5. Size and location of access doors and panels installed behind walls and
inaccessible ceilings for products installed behind walls and requiring access.
6. Items penetrating finished ceiling including the following:
a. Luminaires.
c. Speakers.
d. Sprinklers.
e. Service access panels.
B. Qualification Data:
1. For Installer: Certificate from VRF HVAC system manufacturer certifying that
Installer has successfully completed prerequisite training administered by
manufacturer for proper installation of systems, including but not limited to,
equipment, piping, controls, and accessories indicated and furnished for
installation.
a. Retain copies of Installer certificates on-site and make available on

request.

3. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity
and locate and describe mounting and anchorage provisions.
23 81 29

C. Product Certificates: For each type of product.
D. Product Test Reports: Where tests are required, for each product, for tests performed
by manufacturer at factory and witnessed by Engineer. Allow for 2 personnel to
witness the factory test
E. Source quality-control reports.
F. Field quality-control reports.
G. Sample Warranties: For manufacturer's warranties.
1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For VRF HVAC systems to include in emergency,
operation, and maintenance manuals. Service and installation manuals must be
readily available on the manufacturer’s website without entering a username and
password.
B. Software and Firmware Operational Documentation:
1. Software operating and upgrade manuals.

2. Program Software Backup: On CD or DVD, USB media, or approved cloud
storage platform, complete with data files.
3. Device address list.
4. Printout of software application and graphic screens.
1.7 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
1. Filters:
a. 20% replaceable filters.

b. 20% washable filters.
2. Controllers for Indoor Units: One for each unique controller type installed.
and humidity condition should carried out at the factory prior to dispatch of the
B. Manufacturer Qualifications:
23 81 29
1. Rrecognized manufacturer of VRF HVAC systems and products who has

experience with similar installation.
2. VRF HVAC systems and products that have been successfully tested and in
use on at least five completed local projects.
3. Having complete published catalog literature, installation, and operation and
maintenance manuals for all products intended for use.
4. Having full-time in-house employees for the following:
a. Product research and development.

b. Product and application engineering.
c. Product manufacturing, testing, and quality control.
d. Technical support for system installation training, startup, commissioning,
and troubleshooting of installations.
e. Owner training.
C. Factory-Authorized Service Representative Qualifications:
1. Authorized representative of, and trained by, VRF HVAC system manufacturer.
2. Demonstrated past experience with products being installed for period within
three consecutive years before time of bid.
3. Demonstrated past experience on five projects of similar complexity, scope,
and value.
a. Each person assigned to Project shall have demonstrated past

experience.
4. Staffing resources of competent and experienced full-time employees that

are assigned to execute work according to schedule.
5. Service and maintenance staff assigned to support Project during warranty
period.
6. Product parts inventory to support ongoing system operation for a period of
not less than five years after Substantial Completion.
D. Installer Qualifications: An entity that employs installers and supervisors who are
trained and approved by VRF HVAC system manufacturer.
1. Each employee shall be certified by manufacturer for proper installation of

systems, including, but not limited to, equipment, piping, controls, and
accessories indicated and furnished for installation.
2. Installer certification shall be valid and current for duration of Project.
3. The installing contractor shall have attended VRF HVAC system manufacturer's
installation training prior to installing the system.
4. Retain copies of Installer certificates on-site and make available on request.
5. Each person assigned to Project shall have demonstrated past experience.
a. Demonstrated past experience with products being installed for period

within three consecutive years before time of bid.
6. Installers shall have staffing resources of competent, trained, and experienced

full-time employees that are assigned to execute work according to schedule.
E. Mockups: Build mockups to set quality standards for materials and execution.
23 81 29
1. Build mockups to show a finished installation for each of the following

applications:
a. For each different indoor unit type with exposed surfaces viewable by
occupants.
2. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the
Contract Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically
approves such deviations in writing.
3. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become
part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.
F. ISO Compliance: System equipment and components furnished by VRF HVAC

system manufacturer shall be manufactured in an ISO 9001 and ISO 14001 facility.
A. Deliver and store products in a clean and dry place.
B. Comply with manufacturer's written rigging and installation instructions for unloading
and moving to final installed location.
C. Handle products carefully to prevent damage, breaking, denting, and scoring. Do

not install damaged products.
D. Protect products from weather, dirt, dust, water, construction debris, and physical
damage.
1. Retain factory-applied coverings on equipment to protect finishes during

construction and remove just prior to operating unit.
2. Cover unit openings before installation to prevent dirt and dust from entering
inside of units. If required to remover coverings during unit installation, reapply
coverings over openings after unit installation and remove just prior to
operating unit.
E. Replace installed products damaged during construction.
1.10 WARRANTY
A. Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace equipment and

components that fail(s) in materials or workmanship within specified warranty
period.
a. Structural failures.
b. Faulty operation.
c. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond
normal weathering and use.
2. Warranty Period:
a. For Compressor: Five year from date of Substantial Completion.
23 81 29
b. For Parts, Including Controls: Five year(s) from date of Substantial

Completion.
c. For Labor: One year(s) from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide VRF, split

system heat pump, or a comparable product by one of the following:
1. Daikin AC, Inc.
2. York
B. Source Limitations: Obtain products from single source from single manufacturer
including, but not limited to, the following:
1. Indoor and outdoor units, including accessories.

2. Controls and software.
3. EEVs.
4. Refrigerant isolation valves.
5. Specialty refrigerant pipe fittings.
A. Direct-expansion (DX) VRF HVAC system(s) with variable capacity in response to

varying cooling and heating loads. System shall consist of multiple indoor units,
[MCUs, ]outdoor unit(s), piping, controls, and electrical power to make complete
operating system(s) complying with requirements indicated.
1. System(s) operation, air-conditioning heat pump or heat recovery as
indicated on Drawings.
2. Each system with one refrigerant circuit shared by all indoor units connected
to system.

application.
C. AHRI Compliance: System and equipment performance certified according to

AHRI 1230 and products listed in AHRI directory.
D. ASHRAE Compliance:
1. ASHRAE 15: For safety code for mechanical refrigeration.

2. ASHRAE 62.1: For indoor air quality.
3. ASHRAE 135: For control network protocol with remote communication.
4. ASHRAE/IES 90.1 Compliance: For system and component energy efficiency.
E. UL Compliance: Comply with UL 1995.
23 81 29
A. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, to design complete

and operational VRF HVAC system(s) complying with requirements indicated.
1. Provide system refrigerant calculations.
a. Refrigerant concentration limits shall be within allowable limits of

ASHRAE 15 and governing codes.
b. Indicate compliance with manufacturer's maximum vertical and
horizontal travel distances. Prepare a comparison table for each system
showing calculated distances compared to manufacturer's maximum
allowed distances.
2. Include a mechanical ventilation system and gas detection system as

required to comply with ASHRAE 15 and governing codes.
3. System Refrigerant Piping and Tubing:
a. Arrangement: Arrange piping to interconnect indoor units and outdoor

unit(s) in compliance with manufacturer requirements and requirements
indicated.
b. Routing: Conceal piping above ceilings and behind walls to maximum
extent possible.
c. Sizing: Size piping system, using a software program acceptable to
manufacturer, to provide performance requirements indicated.
Consider requirements to accommodate future change requirements.
4. System Controls:
a. Network arrangement.
b. Network interface with other building systems.
c. Product selection.
d. Sizing.
B. Service Access:
1. Provide and document service access requirements.

2. Locate equipment, system isolation valves, and other system components
that require service and inspection in easily accessible locations. Avoid
locations that are difficult to access if possible.
3. Where serviceable components are installed behind walls and above
inaccessible ceilings, provide finished assembly with access doors or panels to
gain access. Properly size the openings to allow for service, removal, and
replacement.
4. If less than full and unrestricted access is provided, locate components within
an 450-mm reach of the finished assembly.
5. Where ladder access is required to service elevated components, provide an
installation that provides for sufficient access within ladder manufacturer's
written instructions for use.
6. Comply with OSHA regulations.
23 81 29
C. System Design and Installation Requirements:
1. Design and install systems indicated according to manufacturer's

recommendations and written instructions.
2. Where manufacturer's requirements differ from requirements indicated,
contact Engineer for direction. The most stringent requirements should apply
unless otherwise directed in writing by Engineer.
D. Isolation of Equipment: Provide isolation valves to isolate each indoor unit and
outdoor unit for service, removal, and replacement without interrupting system
operation.
E. System Capacity Ratio: The sum of connected capacity of all indoor units shall be
within the following range of outdoor-unit rated capacity:
1. Not less than 70 percent.

2. Not more than 130 percent.
3. Range acceptable to manufacturer.
F. System Turndown: Stable operation down to 10 percent of outdoor-unit capacity.
G. System Auto Refrigerant Charge: Each system shall have an automatic refrigerant
charge function to ensure the proper amount of refrigerant is installed in system.
H. Outdoor Conditions:
1. Suitable for outdoor ambient conditions encountered.
a. Design equipment and supports to withstand wind loads of governing

code.
b. Provide corrosion-resistant coating for components and supports where
located in coastal or industrial climates that are known to be harmful to
materials and finishes.
Composition and layers of marine fin coating shall be as follows:-
Aluminum sheet (Fin)

Corrosive resistance acrylic resin
Hydrospheric film
Vinilex primer
Marine Neppelux Enamel Marine Coat.
Total Film Thickness 150μM
The last two layers shall also be applied on the remaining components
(Eg. Sheet metal, brackets, piping…etc)
2. Maximum System Operating Outdoor Temperature: 52 oC
I. Sound Performance: Sound levels generated by operating HVAC equipment shall

be within requirements indicated.
1. Indoor: As per acoustic requirement. Refer acoustic report.
23 81 29
2. Outdoor Unit – Heat Pump: Outdoor air-source heat pump units (individual
modules) shall have a sound rating no higher than 64 dBA. Refer acoustic
requirements
J. Thermal Movements: Allow for controlled thermal movements from ambient,

surface, and system temperature changes.
K. Capacities and Characteristics: As indicated on Drawings.
2.4 OUTDOOR UNITS (Manufacturing Source Europe/ USA/ Japan)
A. R410A Heat Pump High Ambient Condensing Unit
1. The units shall be air-cooled type incorporating 4 sides heat exchanger coils
manufactured from copper tubes and aluminium fins, factory treated to
reduce the effect of atmospheric corrosion. The unit casing shall be
manufactured from (70µ) polyester powder coated baked enamel finish sheet
steel in order to have a high corrosion resistance and to protect against salt
laden environment close to where the units may be installed. The colour shall
be manufacturer’s standard ‘Ivory White’. The air outlet shall have plastic
coated wire guards.
2. The 4 sides Condenser coil Fins shall have Factory applied, Bluefin PE coating
3. The outdoor units shall have all inverter driven Scroll compressor(s)
electronically controlled and capable of changing speed to follow the
variation in cooling or heating requirements, and from same manufacturer of
main equipment.
4. The compressor shall be scroll type with fixed and orbiting scrolls. The low
pressure refrigerant shall be fed directly into the scroll and the discharge
refrigerant shall cool the motor windings and place the compressor shell under
discharge pressure.
5. The lubrication oil of the compressor shall be fed through the centre of the
crankshaft and then across the complete area of the scrolls from the centre
outwards to ensure the complete contact area is positively lubricated
maximizing compressor efficiency and minimizing wear and tear.
6. The outdoor unit fan motor will be inverter driven ODM (Outer Rotor DC Motor)
type and without shaft and shall operate electronically by sensing operational
temperatures, pressures and ambient temperature and monitoring the
dictates of the indoor units. For Easy commissioning, The Outdoor unit shall be
able to communicate and upload / download data directly from software via
VRV Configurator. The outdoor unit shall have 3-digit, 7-segment display.
7. The units shall be fitted with all key components such as Inverter
compressor(s), electronic expansion valve(s), oil separator(s), suction
accumulator, high pressure switches, inverter driven fan motors, safety
thermostat, over current relay, inverter overload protection, fuses, necessary
solenoid valves, liquid shutoff valves, gas line shut off valves, short re-cycling
23 81 29
guard timer and all necessary sensors for optimized, safe and trouble free
operation. Shall be fitted with an in built Earth Leakage protection.
8. The access to the internal components for maintenance purposes shall be by

removable panels.
9. Inverter PCBs of outdoor units shall be cooled by a dedicated Refrigerant

circuit mechanism. Other types such as Air cooled PCBs are not acceptable.
This feature is for high ambient condition.
10. It shall be possible to connect up to 54 indoor units, with a connection index

ratio between 70% - 130%, capacity permitting, to one outdoor unit.
Additionally, the system shall allow connection to FAHU/AHU and other indoor
unit on same system.
11. The 8, 10 & 12 HP unit shall have a single inverter driven scroll compressor with
inverter driven variable speed propeller type fan(s).The 14 and 16 HP units shall
have two off scroll inverter compressors and will be capable of operating on
one compressor under emergency condition.
12. Free Combination shall be possible to make alternative selections with energy
efficient or space saving as per project requirements
13. The Outdoor Unit Fans shall be capable of overcoming a minimum of 78

Pascal of external static pressure.
14. The units shall be capable of being combined to provide multi systems using
combinations of two or three outdoor units connected to achieve the
capability of higher capacities up to a maximum of 48HP.
15. All refrigerant connections both internal within the unit and the external
connections to the indoor units shall be brazed. Flared or mechanical
connections will not be acceptable on the outdoor unit.
16. The unit shall have required interface for the advanced online Failure
Predictive system provided by Manufacturer.
17. The system shall be tested by a recognized 3rd party as per AHRI 1230:2010
and shall meet or exceed relevant Local Standards
2.5 INDOOR UNITS
2.5.1 Round Flow (360° discharge) ceiling Cassette
1. The unit casing shall be manufactured from galvanized steel plate. The use of
a polystyrene only construction for the outer casing will not be acceptable.
Suitable provision shall be available for duct connection for introduction of
fresh air to the unit and branch ductwork from the unit.
2. The fan shall be of the dual suction multi blade type, statically and
dynamically balanced to ensure low noise and vibration free operation.
23 81 29
3. The heat exchanger coils shall be manufactured from copper tubes and
aluminium fins. It shall have electronic expansion valve to control refrigerant
flow rate in response to the load variation in the conditioned space. The
expansion valve shall be controlled by an integral computerized PID control
system to maintain the designed room temperature.
4. A dedicated round flow (360° air discharge) decoration panel shall be

provided for each unit. The decoration panel shall incorporate the return air
grille and supply air louvers.
5. A condensate lift pump shall be provided within the unit and shall be capable
of discharging above the drain outlet.
6. The air filters shall be incorporated within the unit and shall be mould resistant
washable resin net type.
2.5.2 Ducted type – Medium ESP
1. The fan motor shall be DC inverter motor. The unit static pressure shall be
automatically adjustable from the unit wired remote controller (service
mode).
2. The nominal fan external static pressure shall be from 30 to 100 Pa (depends
on unit sizes) however, the unit static pressure can be adjusted up to 150 /
200 Pa (depends on unit sizes) to match the static pressure of the duct
connected to that unit.
3. The sound pressure level of these indoor units shall in no case exceed 45 dbA
at high fan speed mode when measured 1.5m distance from the unit.
4. A condensate lift pump shall be provided within the unit and shall be capable
of discharging above the drain outlet.
5. The unit casing shall be manufactured from galvanized steel. The use of a
polystyrene only construction for the outer casing will not be acceptable.
Facility shall be provided for duct connection for introduction of fresh air to
the unit and branch ductwork from the unit..
aluminium fins and have 2 to 3 rows of cooling coil. It shall have electronic
expansion valve to control refrigerant flow rate in response to the load
variation in the conditioned space. The expansion valve shall be controlled
by an integral computerized PID control system to maintain correct room
temperature.
7. The return air to the unit shall be through the back of the unit as standard
however shall have bottom return option
2.5.3 Ducted type – Large Capacity
23 81 29
the unit and branch ductwork from the unit. The return air to the unit shall be
through the back of the unit as standard.
3. Return air filter and filter frame shall be field supplied by others, however shall
be available as an option.
system to maintain correct room temperature.
5. The condensate shall be drained from the unit using suitable tube and run
directly to a main drainage point. A drain trap shall be fitted to compensate
for negative air pressure. Drain Pump shall be available as an option.
2.5.4 Ducted type Low static / low height Concealed model
the unit and branch ductwork from the unit. The return air to the unit shall be
through the back of the unit as standard.
directly to a main drainage point. A condensate lift pump shall be provided
within the unit as a standard part.
2.5.5 Ceiling suspended type
1. The unit casing shall be manufactured from Heat resistant plastic resin. The
casing Colour shall be Fresh White.
dynamically balanced to ensure low noise and vibration free operation. Fan
motor shall be higher efficiency DC Motor.
3. The return air shall be through the bottom grille while the supply air shall be
through the louver situated at the front of the unit. A facility shall be provided
23 81 29
to automatically swing the supply air louvers or lock them at five adjustable
settings and flaps shall be able to close completely when unit is switched off.
directly to a main drainage point.
6. The air filters shall be incorporated within the unit and shall be washable resin
net type.
2.5.6 Wall mounted type
1. The unit casing shall be manufactured from heat resistant plastic. The casing
Colour shall be Fresh White. The back plate and the support frames shall be
manufactured from galvanized steel plate.
2. The fan shall be multi blade cross flow type, statically and dynamically
balanced to ensure low noise and vibration free operation.
3. The heat exchanger coils will be manufactured from copper tubes and
net type. Drain pump shall be available as an option.
2.5.7 Floor standing cased type
1. The unit casing shall be manufactured from galvanized steel plate and
finished in pure white and iron grey The use of a polystyrene only construction
for the inner casing will not be acceptable.
3. The return air shall be through the bottom of the unit while the supply air shall
be through the louvers situated on the top of the unit. These louvers shall be
manually adjustable to select most suitable airflow pattern.
aluminium fins.
23 81 29
5. It shall have electronic expansion valve to control refrigerant flow rate in

response to the load variation in the conditioned space. The expansion valve
shall be controlled by an integral computerized PID control system to maintain
correct room temperature.
net type.
2.5.8 Floor standing un-cased type
1. The unit casing shall be manufactured from galvanized steel plate, and
suitable to be wall concealed or window sill installation to suit the building
decor. The use of a polystyrene only construction for the unit casing will not be
acceptable.
3. The return air shall be through the bottom of the unit while the supply air shall
be through the top of the unit. The supply and the return air grilles are to be
provided by the builder and should be selected for minimum pressure drop.
The return air grille is to be located at the bottom of the casing and the supply
air grille is to be located on the top of the casing. These grilles must cover the
full width and depth of the respective apertures provided on the unit. A short
piece of ductwork must be installed between the discharge air spigot as
provided on the unit and the supply air grille.
net type.
2.6 ANCILLARY ITEMS
1. Proprietary REFNET joints and headers, manufactured by VRV equipment

supplier only, shall be used throughout the installation to reduce imbalance in
refrigerant flow between indoor units. Size shall be suggested and approved
by the VRV manufacturer.
23 81 29
2.7 CONTROLS
1. Mains Power Wiring shall be the responsibility of the Electrical Contractor who
shall provide 3-phase 400V main isolators mounted on the VRV Condensing
Units and a 1-phase 230V fused spur located within 1m of fan coil units.
Inverter PCB shall be cooled by Refrigerant and air-cooled PCBs are not
acceptable. All solid-state components shall be able to withstand 105 C
temperature.
2. Controls wiring shall be the responsibility of the Air Conditioning Contractor
who shall provide system control wiring in accordance with the
3. Control Cabling shall be two core flex to BS6500 and 0.75-1.25mm2.
4. The minimum separation from mains power cabling shall be as follows:
Current Capacity
Minimum separation (mm)
of Power Cable
Based upon 100M Run of Parallel Cables
(>100V)
0 – 10A 300
11-50A 500
51 – 100A 1000
>100A 1500
2.7.1 Remote Controller
1. Local control will be provided via BRC1E remote controllers mounted within
the occupied space, providing individual start/stop, run/fail indication, set
point adjustment and fault code diagnosis. Time Clock control shall be
flexible with seven independent day settings, five actions per day of ON or
OFF which can be can be configured in any desired pattern. The controller
shall contain an internal temperature sensor, which can be used for system
control or Fabric Protection control. Fabric protection shall be configurable
with a start temperature of between 5 – 150C and adjustable differential for
the off temperature of between 1 – 50C higher. The controller shall have the
ability to be locked down without the need of any other external adapter PCB
or Centralised device to leave only the following functions operable:
LEVEL 1 ACCESS
• All buttons operational
LEVEL 2 ACCESSES
• On/off button
• schedule timer on/off button
• Temperature adjust button
• Operation adjust button
• Fan speed button
• Air direction adjust button
23 81 29
LEVEL 3 ACCESSES
• On/off button
• Temperature adjust button
• Fan speed button
2.7.2 Intelligent Touch Manager Controller
2.7.2.1 Intelligent Touch Manager

Intelligent Touch Manager System shall be provided with a true touch active screen
with colour Liquid Crystal Display with Icon displays to provide simple user friendly
operation:
1. Have no physical buttons, all commands via Touch Screen
2. Have the capacity to control up to 64 Addressable Groups in standard format and
be capable of controlling up to 512 Addressable Groups with optional expansion
adapter DCM601A52 using the one touch screen display
3. Be capable of WEB connection via the inbuilt Ethernet port
4. Proportional power consumption to make the controller capable of providing
energy monitoring & client billing requests
2.7.2.2 Controller Display
On/Off selection
Set Point adjustment (Range 16-32oC)
Fan speed adjustment
Heat/cool/auto changeover mode selection
Frost protection set point
Timer settings
Holiday period settings
Priority settings for restriction of local access for start/stop, heat/cool mode and set
point adjustment range limitation
Reset ability for filter maintenance warnings
2.7.2.3 Indoor Units Monitoring Display
Room set point

Room Temperature Display
Operation mode; Heating or Cooling
Display of number of devices operating within system
1. Start/stop operation, set point control, cool/heat mode selection, air volume setting,
air flow direction setting and enabling/disabling operation of the remote controllers
by group, zone or collectively.
2. Monitoring of operation status of the indoor units, filter change indication and error
code of the group or the zone.
3. Comprehensive schedule set up to start/stop the air conditioning systems. This can be
set for year, month, weekday, hour and minute. This will enable normal day-to-day
time clock functions as well as yearly holiday set up. Up to 5 settings can be
configured up to 13 months in advance and allocated to various groups/zones.
23 81 29
4. Volt free forced stop input possible such as fire shut down.
5. Flexible Group/ Zone selection Remote monitoring of common operation
7. Power proportional distribution
8. Running cost per indoor unit via optional software licence and external kWh meter(s).
9. Password protection for zone, group operation and setup screen for various functions.
10. The controller shall have accessibility from remotely by using PC.
11. The controller shall have wide touch screen control colour display and can be wired
by a non-polar 2-wire transmission cable to a distance of 1 km away from the outdoor
units.
12. The controller shall accept a direct connection of a 230V AC power supply
2.7.3 BACnet Gateway

Integration device will be provided to enable communication between the VRV
system and the third party supplied BMS.
Gateway HUB
kWh-meter
BMS
DIII [F1/F2]
VRV
A. Outline of Functions
1. The device enables interfacing between VRV system and central monitoring board.
2. Data of up to 256 groups of air-conditioners are controllable by the BACnet
Gateway
3. Air conditioners are operable and the state can be monitored from the central
monitoring board by BACnet communication.
B. Main Functions
The device should monitor and control air conditioners from a maximum of 256
groups, on a unit by unit basis. Major features are listed below:
23 81 29
1. Switches the ON/OFF operation and monitors operational state.

2. Monitors indoor units for malfunctions
3. Monitors and changes temperatures
4. Monitors indoor unit temperature
5. Monitors and reset filter clean sign
6. Switches the operation mode.
7. Sets remote control operation
8. PPD data available to BMS-system.
C. Additional Requirement For Power Proportional Distribution (PPD)
1. Power consumption meter is needed for PPD calculation

2. The power consumption meter specifications are:
 pulse contact (kWh meter should not give a voltage output!)
 one pulse for each 1 OR 10 kWh consumed
 pulse width should be between 40 and 400 milliseconds
 maximum cable length between the power consumption meter and the
Gateway is 200 metres
3. Power consumption meters need to be connected to the 12 Pulse input contacts
on the Gateway option board DAM412B51
4. PPD setup tool: SetupPPDV2100; same tool as for iTouch controller
2.8 REFRIGERANT PIPEWORK
A. The interconnecting refrigerant piping shall be manufactured from seamless quality

phosphorous dioxide soft/medium drawn copper to BS2781 Part II ASTM, DIN
1754/8905, fully tested by the eddy current method, dehydrated and capped.
B. The copper tubing shall be of a suitable thickness to be capable of withstanding

pressure test as detailed in the current revision of BS/EN378.
C. The copper tubing shall be suitably selected with a wall thickness capable of
withstanding the system operating pressures on Refrigerant R410A, all as described
within the outdoor unit’s installation manual.
D. Pipework shall be supported and not secured at regular intervals not exceeding 1.5m.
Preferably to create a method of adequate support ant containment, piping should
be laid on suitably supported galvanised cable tray, insulated and held in position
with plastic coated steel banding. Due care and attention shall be taken at all times
to allow pipework to freely expand and contract naturally.
2.9 INSULATION
A. All Refrigerant pipework to be insulated with slip-on close cell elastomeric pipe
insulation, with a fire performance rating class “O” of the 1985 Building Regulations,
having a wall thickness of not less than 13mm. After commissioning, all joints to be
properly sealed to provide and adequate seal and clearly marked for ease of
identification.
B. Where required external insulation shall be protected with a suitable enclosure to
encase the piping, as to reduce the effects of Bird, Vermin and Environmental attack.
23 81 29
2.10 REFRIGERANT PIPEWORK INSTALLATION
A. Pipework shall be installed by a Supplier’s Approved Installer in accordance with the

current revision of BS/EN378 and in accordance with Supplier’s Design and Installation
Instructions and the unit’s installation manual.
B. Brazing shall be carried out by skilled operatives, in accordance with the HVCA Code
of Practice – Brazing and Bronze Welding of Copper Pipe and Sheet.
C. During brazing, oxygen free nitrogen shall be passed through the pipework to
displace oxygen and ensure that oxidisation does not occur.
D. Longest possible lengths of copper pipe shall be utilised to minimise joints on site.
E. Appropriate refrigerant tools shall be utilised at all times. The use of hacksaw or any
tool that creates filings is prohibited.
F. Pipework shall remain capped at all times other than when actually being installed to
prevent the ingress of moisture and contaminants.
2.11 CONDENSATE PIPEWORK
G. Condensate pipework shall be installed by the supplier’s approved Installer in

accordance with supplier’s Design and Installation Instructions and the unit’s
installation manual.
2.12 POWER CIRCUIT AND CABLE REQUIREMENTS
i) Control Cable shall be two core flex to BS6500 and 0.75-1.25mm2

ii) Power cable & Size shall be as per IOM manual.
iii) Power circuit shall be fitted with suitable Residual Current operated Circuit breakers
(type 300mA).
A. Factory Tests: Test and inspect factory-assembled equipment.
B. Equipment will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.
C. Prepare test and inspection reports for historical record. Submit reports only if
requested.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with
of the Work.
23 81 29
B. Examine products before installation. Reject products that are wet, moisture
damaged, or mold damaged.
C. Examine roughing-in for piping and tubing to verify actual locations of connections
before equipment installation.
D. Examine roughing-in for ductwork to verify actual locations of connections before

equipment installation.
E. Examine roughing-in for wiring and conduit to verify actual locations of connections
before equipment installation.
F. Examine walls, floors, roofs, and outdoor pads for suitable conditions where
equipment will be installed.
G. Prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to

performance of the Work.
H. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Clearance:
1. Maintain manufacturer's recommended clearances for service and

maintenance.
2. Maintain clearances required by governing code.
B. Loose Components: Install components, devices, and accessories furnished by

manufacturer, with equipment, that are not factory mounted.
1. Loose components shall be installed by system Installer under supervision of

manufacturer's service representative.
C. Equipment Restraint Installation: Install equipment with seismic-restraint device.

Comply with requirements for seismic-restraint devices specified in Section 230548
"Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC."
3.3 INSTALLATION OF INDOOR UNITS
A. Install units to be level and plumb while providing a neat and finished appearance.
B. Unless otherwise required by VRF HVAC system manufacturer, support ceiling-

mounted units from structure above using threaded rods; minimum rod size of 3/8
inch (10 mm).
C. Adjust supports of exposed and recessed units to draw units tight to adjoining
surfaces.
D. Protect finished surfaces of ceilings, floors, and walls that come in direct contact
with units. Refinish or replaced damaged areas after units are installed.
23 81 29
E. In rooms with ceilings, conceal piping and tubing, controls, and electrical power
serving units above ceilings.
F. In rooms without ceiling, arrange piping and tubing, controls, and electrical power
serving units to provide a neat and finished appearance.
G. Provide lateral bracing if needed to limit movement of suspended units to not more
than 13 mm
H. For floor- and wall-mounted units that are exposed, conceal piping and tubing,
controls, and electrical power serving units within walls.
I. Floor-mounted units located in mechanical rooms or spaces .
J. Install floor-mounted units on support structure indicated on Drawings.
K. Install floor-mounted units on cast-in-place concrete equipment bases. Comply with

requirements for equipment bases and foundations
L. Attachment: Install hardware for proper attachment to supported equipment.
M. Grouting: Place grout under equipment supports and make bearing surface
smooth.
3.4 INSTALLATION OF OUTDOOR UNITS
A. Install units to be level and plumb while providing a neat and finished appearance.
B. Install outdoor units on support structures indicated on Drawings.
C. Pad-Mounted Installations: Install outdoor units on cast-in-place concrete

equipment bases. Comply with requirements for equipment bases and foundations
1. Attachment: Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment

to supported equipment.
2. Grouting: Place grout under equipment supports and make bearing surface
smooth.
D. Roof-Mounted Installations: Install outdoor units on equipment supports specified in

Section 077200 "Roof Accessories." Anchor units to supports with removable,
stainless-steel fasteners.
3.5 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR PIPING INSTALLATION
A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and

arrangement of piping and tubing systems. Install piping and tubing as indicated
unless deviations to layout are approved on coordination drawings.
B. Install piping and tubing in concealed locations unless otherwise indicated and
except in equipment rooms and service areas.
23 81 29
C. Install piping and tubing at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs
are prohibited unless specifically indicated otherwise.
D. Install piping and tubing above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for
ceiling panel removal.
E. Install piping and tubing to permit valve servicing.
F. Install piping and tubing at indicated slopes.
G. Install piping and tubing free of sags.
H. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.
I. Install piping and tubing to allow application of insulation.
J. Install groups of pipes and tubing parallel to each other, spaced to permit applying
insulation with service access between insulated piping and tubing.
K. Install sleeves for piping and tubing penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors.
Comply with requirements for sleeves specified in Section 230517 "Sleeves and
Sleeve Seals for HVAC Piping."
L. Install escutcheons for piping and tubing penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors.
Comply with requirements for escutcheons specified in Section 230518 "Escutcheons
for HVAC Piping."
3.6 INSTALLATION OF SYSTEM CONDENSATE DRAIN PIPING
A. General Requirements for Drain Piping and Tubing:
1. Install a union in piping at each threaded unit connection.

2. Install an adjustable stainless-steel hose clamp with adjustable gear operator
on unit hose connections. Tighten clamp to provide a leak-free installation.
3. If required for unit installation, provide a trap assembly in drain piping to
prevent air circulated through unit from passing through drain piping. Comply
with more stringent of the following:
a. Details indicated on Drawings.

b. Manufacturer's requirements.
c. Governing codes.
d. In the absence of requirements, comply with requirements of ASHRAE
handbooks.
4. Extend drain piping from units with drain connections to drain receptors as
indicated on Drawings. If not indicated on Drawings, terminate drain
connection at nearest accessible location that is not exposed to view by
occupants.
5. Provide each 90-degree change in direction with a Y- or T-fitting. Install a
threaded plug connection in the dormant side of fitting or future use as a
service cleanout.
23 81 29
B. Gravity Drains:
1. Slope piping from unit connection toward drain termination at a constant

slope of not less than one percent.
C. Pumped Drains:
1. If unit condensate pump or lift mechanism is not included with an integral

check valve, install a full-size check valve in each branch pipe near unit
connection to prevent backflow into unit.
3.7 INSTALLATION OF REFRIGERANT PIPING
A. Refrigerant Tubing Kits:
1. Unroll and straighten tubing to suit installation. Deviations in straightness of

exposed tubing shall be unnoticeable to observer.
2. Support tubing using hangers and supports indicated at intervals not to
exceed 1.5 m. Minimum size, 6.4 mm or as required by the piping as per
manufacturers requirements
3. Prepare tubing ends and make mating connections to provide a pressure
tight and leak-free installation.
B. Install refrigerant piping according to ASHRAE 15 and governing codes.
C. Select system components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system
operating pressure.
D. Install piping as short and direct as possible, with a minimum number of joints and
fittings.
E. Arrange piping to allow inspection and service of equipment. Install valves and
specialties in accessible locations to allow for service and inspection. Install access
doors or panels as specified in Section 083113 "Access Doors and Frames" if valves or
equipment requiring maintenance is concealed behind finished surfaces.
F. Install refrigerant piping and tubing in protective conduit where installed

belowground.
G. Install refrigerant piping and tubing in rigid or flexible conduit in locations where
exposed to mechanical damage.
H. Unless otherwise required by VRF HVAC system manufacturer, slope refrigerant

piping and tubing as follows:
1. Install horizontal hot-gas discharge piping and tubing with a uniform slope
downward away from compressor.
2. Install horizontal suction lines with a uniform slope downward to compressor.
3. Install traps to entrain oil in vertical runs.
4. Liquid lines may be installed level.
I. When brazing, remove or protect components that could be damaged by heat.
23 81 29
J. Before installation, clean piping, tubing, and fittings to cleanliness level required by
VRF HVAC system manufacturer.
K. Joint Construction:
1. Ream ends of tubes and remove burrs.

2. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of tube and
fittings before assembly.
3. Construct joints according to AWS's "Brazing Handbook," "Pipe and Tube"
Chapter.
a. Use Type BCuP (copper-phosphorus) alloy for joining copper fittings with
copper tubing.
b. Use Type BAg (cadmium-free silver) alloy for joining copper with bronze.
3.8 INSTALLATION OF PIPING AND TUBING INSULATION
A. Seal longitudinal seams and end joints with manufacturer's recommended adhesive
to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being
insulated. Installation to maintain a continuous vapor barrier.
B. Insulation Installation on Pipe Fittings and Elbows:
1. Install mitered sections of pipe insulation.

2. Secure insulation materials and seal seams with manufacturer's
recommended adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow
passage of air to surface being insulated.
C. Insulation Installation on Valves and Pipe Specialties:
1. Install preformed valve covers manufactured of same material as pipe

insulation when available.
2. When preformed valve covers are unavailable, install cut sections of pipe and
sheet insulation to valve body. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing
and to allow valve operation without disturbing insulation.
3. Secure insulation to valves and specialties and seal seams with manufacturer's
recommended adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow
passage of air to surface being insulated.
D. Where PVC jackets are indicated, install with 25-mm overlap at longitudinal seams
and end joints; for horizontal applications. Seal with manufacturer's recommended
adhesive.
1. Apply two continuous beads of adhesive to seams and joints, one bead under
lap and the finish bead along seam and joint edge.
E. Where metal jackets are indicated, install with 50-mm overlap at longitudinal seams
and end joints. Overlap longitudinal seams arranged to shed water. Seal end joints
with weatherproof sealant recommended by insulation manufacturer. Secure
jacket with stainless-steel bands 300 mm o.c. and at end joints.
23 81 29
3.9 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
A. Comply with requirements indicated on Drawings and in applicable Division 26

Sections.
B. To extent electrical power is required for system equipment, components, and

controls, and is not indicated on Drawings and addressed in the Specifications, the
design for such electrical power shall be delegated to VRF HVAC system provider.
1. Delegated design of electrical power to equipment, components and

controls, and associated installation shall be included at no additional cost to
Owner.
C. Connect field electrical power source to each separate electrical device requiring
field electrical power. Coordinate termination point and connection type with
Installer.
D. Comply with requirements of "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and

Cables" for wiring connections.
E. Comply with requirements of "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems" for
grounding connections.
F. Install nameplate or acrylic label with self-adhesive back for each electrical
connection indicating electrical equipment designation and circuit number feeding
connection.
1. Nameplate shall be laminated phenolic layers of black with engraved white

letters. Letters at least 13 mm high.
2. Locate nameplate or label where easily visible.
G. Comply with requirements in Section 260533 "Raceways and Boxes for Electrical
Systems" for raceway selection and installation requirements for boxes, conduits,
and wireways as supplemented or revised in this Section.
1. Outlet boxes shall be no smaller than 50 mm wide, 75 mm high, and 64 mm

deep.
2. Outlet boxes for cables shall be no smaller than 102 mm square by 38 mm, 53
mm deep with extension ring sized to bring edge of ring to within 3.1 mm of
the finished wall surface.
3. Flexible metal conduit shall not be used.
H. Comply with TIA-569-D for pull-box sizing and length of conduit and number of
bends between pull points.
I. Install manufactured conduit sweeps and long-radius elbows if possible.
J. Install metal conduits with grounding bushings and connect with grounding
conductor to grounding system.
3.10 INSTALLATION OF SYSTEM CONTROL CABLE
A. Comply with NECA 1.
23 81 29
B. Installation Method:
1. Install cables in raceways except as follows:
a. Within equipment and associated control enclosures.

b. In accessible ceiling spaces where open cable installation method may
be used.
c. In gypsum board partitions where cable may be enclosed within wall
cavity.
2. Conceal raceway and cables except in unfinished spaces.
C. General Requirements for Cabling:
1. Comply with TIA-568-C Series of standards.

2. Comply with BICSI ITSIMM, Ch. 5, "Copper Structured Cabling Systems."
3. Terminate all conductors; no cable shall contain unterminated elements.
Make terminations only at indicated outlets, terminals, and cross-connect and
patch panels.
4. Cables may not be spliced and shall be continuous from terminal to terminal.
Do not splice cable.
5. Cables serving a common system may be grouped in a common raceway.
Install control cable in separate raceway from power wiring. Do not group
conductors from different systems or different voltages.
6. Secure and support cables at intervals not exceeding 760 mm and not more
than 150 mm from cabinets, boxes, fittings, outlets, racks, frames, and
terminals.
7. Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal points without exceeding
manufacturer's limitations on bending radii, but not less than radii specified in
BICSI ITSIMM, Ch. 5, "Copper Structured Cabling Systems." Install lacing bars
and distribution spools.
8. Do not install bruised, kinked, scored, deformed, or abraded cable. Remove
and discard cable if damaged during installation and replace it with new
cable.
9. Cold-Weather Installation: Bring cable to room temperature before dereeling.
Do not use heat lamps for heating.
10. Pulling Cable: Comply with BICSI ITSIMM, Ch. 5, "Copper Structured Cabling
Systems." Monitor cable pull tensions.
11. Support: Do not allow cables to lie on removable ceiling tiles or access panels.
12. Secure: Fasten securely in place with hardware specifically designed and
installed so as to not damage cables.
13. Provide strain relief.
14. Keep runs short. Allow extra length for connecting to terminals.
15. Do not bend cables in a radius less than 10 times the cable OD.
16. Use sleeves or grommets to protect cables from vibration at points where they
pass around sharp corners and through penetrations.
17. Ground wire shall be copper, and grounding methods shall comply with
IEEE C2. Demonstrate ground resistance.
D. Balanced Twisted-Pair Cable Installation:
1. Comply with TIA-568-C.2.

2. Do not untwist balanced twisted-pair cables more than 13 mm at the point of
termination to maintain cable geometry.
23 81 29
E. Open-Cable Installation:
1. Suspend copper cable not in a wireway or pathway a minimum of 200 mm

above ceilings by cable supports not more than 760 mm apart.
2. Cable shall not be run through or on structural members or in contact with
pipes, ducts, or other potentially damaging items. Do not run cables between
structural members and corrugated panels.
F. Separation from EMI Sources: Comply with BICSI TDMM and TIA-569-D
recommendations for separating unshielded cable from potential EMI sources
including electrical power wiring and equipment.
3.11 FIRESTOPPING
A. Comply with requirements in Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping."
B. Comply with TIA-569-D, Annex A, "Firestopping."
C. Comply with BICSI TDMM, "Firestopping" Chapter.
3.12 GROUNDING INSTALLATION
A. For data communication wiring, comply with TIA-607-B and with BICSI TDMM,
"Bonding and Grounding (Earthing)" Chapter.
B. For low-voltage control cabling, comply with requirements of "Grounding and

Bonding for Electrical Systems."
3.13 IDENTIFICATION
A. Identify system equipment, piping, tubing, and valves. Comply with requirements for
identification for "Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment."
B. Identify system electrical and controls components, wiring, cabling, and terminals.
Comply with requirements for identification for "Identification for Electrical Systems."
1. Identify each control cable on each end and at each terminal with a
number-coded identification tag. Each cable shall have a unique tag.
A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage VRF HVAC system manufacturer's service

representative to advise and assist installers; witness testing; and observe and
inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including controls
and connections.
1. Field service shall be performed by an employee or a factory-trained and -

authorized service representative of VRF HVAC system manufacturer whose
primary job responsibilities are to provide direct technical support of its
products.
23 81 29
a. Additional factory-authorized representatives may assist with

completion of certain activities only if supervised by manufacturer's
employee. A factory-authorized representative shall not provide
assistance without manufacturer's employee supervision.
B. Refrigerant Tubing Positive Pressure Testing:
1. Comply with more stringent of VRF HVAC system manufacturer's requirements

and requirements indicated.
2. After completion of tubing installation, pressurize tubing systems to a test
pressure of not less than 1.5 times VRF HVAC system operating pressure, but
not less than 4137 kPa (600 psig), using dry nitrogen.
3. Successful testing shall maintain a test pressure for a continuous and
uninterrupted period of 24 hours. Allowance for pressure changes attributed
to changes in ambient temperature are acceptable.
4. Prepare test report to record the following information for each test:
a. Name of person starting test, company name, phone number, and e-

mail address.
b. Name of manufacturer's service representative witnessing test,
company name, phone number, and e-mail address.
c. Detailed description of extent of tubing tested.
d. Date and time at start of test.
e. Test pressure at start of test.
f. Outdoor temperature at start of test.
g. Name of person ending test, company name, phone number, and e-
mail address.
h. Date and time at end of test.
i. Test pressure at end of test.
j. Outdoor temperature at end of test.
k. Remarks:
5. Submit test reports for Project record.
C. Refrigerant Tubing Evacuation Testing:
1. Comply with more stringent of VRF HVAC system manufacturer's requirements

and requirements indicated.
2. After completion of tubing positive-pressure testing, evacuate tubing systems
to a pressure of 500 microns.
3. Successful testing shall maintain a test pressure for a continuous and
uninterrupted period of one hour(s) with no change.
4. Prepare test report to record the following information for each test:
a. Name of person starting test, company name, phone number, and e-

mail address.
b. Name of manufacturer's service representative witnessing test,
company name, phone number, and e-mail address.
c. Detailed description of extent of tubing tested.
d. Date and time at start of test.
e. Test pressure at start of test.
f. Outdoor temperature at start of test.
g. Name of person ending test, company name, phone number, and e-
mail address.
23 81 29
h. Date and time at end of test.

i. Test pressure at end of test.
j. Outdoor temperature at end of test.
k. Remarks:
5. Submit test reports for Project record.

6. Upon successful completion of evacuation testing, system shall be charged
with refrigerant.
D. System Refrigerant Charge:
1. Using information collected from the refrigerant tubing evacuation testing,

system Installer shall consult variable refrigerant system manufacturer to
determine the correct system refrigerant charge.
2. Installer shall charge system following VRF HVAC system manufacturer's written
instructions.
3. System refrigerant charging shall be witnessed by system manufacturer's
representative.
4. Total refrigerant charge shall be recorded and permanently displayed at the
system's outdoor unit.
E. Products will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.
F. Prepare test and inspection reports.
3.15 STARTUP SERVICE
A. Engage a VRF HVAC system manufacturer's service representative to perform

system(s) startup service.
1. Service representative shall be a factory-trained and -authorized service

representative of VRF HVAC system manufacturer.
2. Complete startup service of each separate system.
3. Complete system startup service according to manufacturer's written
instructions.
B. Startup checks shall include, but not be limited to, the following:
1. Check control communications of equipment and each operating

component in system(s).
2. Check each indoor unit's response to demand for cooling and heating.
3. Check each indoor unit's response to changes in airflow settings.
4. Check each indoor unit and outdoor unit for proper condensate removal.
5. Check sound levels of each indoor and outdoor unit.
C. Installer shall accompany manufacturer's service representative during startup

service and provide manufacturer's service representative with requested
documentation and technical support during startup service.
1. Installer shall correct deficiencies found during startup service for

reverification.
23 81 29
D. System Operation Report:
1. After completion of startup service, manufacturer shall issue a report for each
separate system.
2. Report shall include complete documentation describing each startup check,
the result, and any corrective action required.
3. Manufacturer shall electronically record not less than two hours of continuous
operation of each system and submit with report for historical reference.
a. All available system operating parameters shall be included in the

information submitted.
E. Witness:
1. Invite Engineer and Commissioning Agent to witness startup service

procedures.
2. Provide written notice not less than 21 business days before start of startup
service.
3.16 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust equipment and components to function smoothly, and lubricate as

recommended by manufacturer.
B. Adjust initial temperature and humidity set points. Adjust initial airflow settings and
discharge airflow patterns.
C. Set field-adjustable switches and circuit-breaker trip ranges according to VRF HVAC
system manufacturer's written instructions, and as indicated.
D. Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within 12 months from date of

Substantial Completion, provide on-site assistance in adjusting system to suit actual
occupied conditions.
E. Readjust the system during the peak summer months and submit report of the same.
3.17 PROTECTION
A. Protect products from moisture and water damage. Remove and replace products
that are wet, moisture damaged, or mold damaged.
B. Protect equipment from physical damage. Replace equipment with physical

damage that cannot be repaired to new condition. Observable surface
imperfections shall be grounds for removal and replacement.
C. Protect equipment from electrical damage. Replace equipment suffering electrical

damage.
D. Cover and seal openings of equipment to keep inside of equipment clean. Do not
remove covers until finish work is complete.
23 81 29
3.18 MAINTENANCE SERVICE
A. Initial Maintenance Service: Beginning at Substantial Completion, maintenance

service shall include 12 months' full maintenance by manufacturer's authorized
service representative. Include service visits for preventive maintenance, repair or
replacement of worn or defective components, lubrication, cleaning, and adjusting
as required for proper equipment and system operation. Parts and supplies shall be
manufacturer's authorized replacement parts and supplies for the period of 12
months from the date of Substantial Completion.
3.19 SOFTWARE SERVICE AGREEMENT
A. Technical Support: Beginning at Substantial Completion, service agreement shall

include software support for two years.
B. Upgrade Service: At Substantial Completion, update software to latest version.

Install and program software upgrades that become available within two years from
date of Substantial Completion. Upgrading software shall include operating system
and new or revised licenses for using software.
1. Upgrade Notice: At least 30 days to allow Owner to schedule and access the
system and to upgrade computer equipment if necessary.
3.20 DEMONSTRATION
A. Engage a VRF HVAC system manufacturer's employed training instructor to train

Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain entire system.
B. Instructor:
1. Instructor shall be factory trained and certified by VRF HVAC system

manufacturer with current training on the system(s), equipment, and controls
that are installed.
2. Instructor's credentials shall be submitted for review by Engineer before
scheduling training.
3. Instructor(s) primary job responsibility shall be Owner training.
4. Instructor(s) shall have not less than five years of training experience with VRF
HVAC system manufacturer and past training experience on at least ten
projects of comparable size and complexity.
C. Schedule and Duration:
1. Schedule training with Owner at least 20 business days before first training
session.
2. Training shall occur before Owner occupancy.
3. Training shall be held at mutually agreed date and time during normal
business hours.
D. Location: Owner shall provide a suitable on-site location to host classroom training.
E. Training Attendees: Assume five people.
23 81 29
F. Training Attendance: For record purposes, document training attendees at the start
of each new training session. Record attendee's name, signature, phone number,
and e-mail address.
G. Training Format: Individual training modules shall include classroom training followed
by hands-on field demonstration and training.
H. Training Materials: Provide training materials in electronic format to each attendee.
1. Include instructional videos showing general operation and maintenance that

are coordinated with operation and maintenance manuals.
2. Video record each classroom training session and submit an electronic copy
to Owner before requesting Owner acceptance of training.
I. Acceptance: Obtain Engineer’s and Owner written acceptance that training is

complete and requirements indicated have been satisfied.
23 81 29
23 82 19 - Fan Coil Units
PART 1 - GENERAL

B. This section on Fan Coil Unit is to be read in conjunction with the following section:
Number Description
230713 INSULATION
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes fan-coil units and accessories suitable for chilled water
circulation or DX type as specified in the drawings.
1.3 SUBMITTALS

specialties, and accessories. Submit manufacturer's detailed technical product
selection data, method of construction, material data and installations procedures
for each principal component or unit and include certified test reports on required
testing. List and describe features of control system, performances together with
any further information pertinent to the adequacy of the equipment.

a. The layouts shown on contract drawings are to be considered diagrammatic

and it shall be the Contractor's responsibility to check all dimensions, pipe and
duct locations against Architect's drawings, or if the work is sufficiently
advanced, by actual measurements on site, to ensure the proper matching of
mating parts. The Contractor shall provide suitable clearances where
required.
23 82 19
b. The Contractor shall submit to the Architect shop drawings showing detailed
construction and detailed layout of the unit, its associated components and any
other related equipment material to be installed. No work shall be carried out
before approval of shop drawings or equipment.
c. Where data certified drawings or other required information is not available until
all requested drawings and information have been supplied to the Engineer and
approved by him, it is the Contractor's responsibility to ensure that all necessary
information is supplied to the Engineer in accordance with the progress of the
work.
d. Should the Engineer give provisional approval only of an order due to lack of
complete information and should the missing information not eventually meet with
approval, the Engineer will not be held responsible for any delay incurred. For
equipment where information from manufacturers is likely to be delayed, it is
possible date so as to ensure approval of orders in complete conformity with the
e. Submittals and shop drawings shall as far as possible be complementary so

that drawings and submittals can be cross-checked
C. Coordination Drawings: Floor plans, reflected ceiling plans, and other details, drawn
to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other,
based on input from installers of the items involved:
1. Ceiling suspension components.

2. Structural members to which fan-coil units will be attached.
3. Method of attaching hangers to building structure.
4. Items penetrating finished ceiling, including the following:
a. Lighting fixtures.
c. Speakers.
d. Sprinklers.
e. Access panels.
5. Perimeter moldings for exposed or partially exposed cabinets.
D. Samples for Initial Selection: For units with factory-applied color finishes as per
instructions by the Architect.
E. Builder's Work: The following builder's work shall be allowed for by the Contractor
under this section:
1. Necessary steel plate, hanger, support in the ceiling, floor or wall for the support of
the unit.
etc.
3. Necessary materials and equipment for lifting, hoisting etc., to allow installation of
23 82 19

F. ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1-2010 Compliance: Provide compliance form as per applicable


C. ASHRAE Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE 62.1-2007, Section 5 -

D. ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1-2007 Compliance: Applicable requirements in

1.5 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of fan-coil units and suspension system

components with other construction that penetrates or is supported by ceilings,
including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, fire-suppression-system components, and
partition assemblies.
B. Coordinate size and location of wall sleeves for outdoor-air intake, wherever
required as per approved drawings.
1.6 SPARE PARTS/ EXTRA MATERIALS
contents.
1. Fan-Coil-Unit Filters: Furnish FIVE percent spare filters for each type of filters
installed.
2. Fan Belts: Furnish TWENTY percent of spare fan belts for each type of belt
installed.
3. Fan Motors: Furnish FIVE percent of spare fan motors for each type of motor
installed.
4. Fan Section: Furnish FIVE percent of spare fan sections for each size.
23 82 19
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
B. In the Fan-Coil-Unit Schedule where titles below are column or row headings that
introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection:

products by one of the manufacturers whose equipment must have been
used in the Kingdom in last 5-10 years or ‘Approved equal’.
a) York
b) Carrier
c) Trane
2.2 FAN-COIL UNITS
A. General:
The Fan Coil Unit shall be generally ceiling hung concealed type as shown in the
drawings. The size and capacity shall be as indicated in the equipment schedule
drawings. Each unit shall have a cabinet fan, fan motor, cooling coil, filter extended
drain pan, control valve assembly etc. The store rooms, Mechanical plant rooms and
electrical rooms shall be provided with exposed type fan coil units.
B. The Fan Coil Units shall be capable to operate at 7.0 ˚C/12.0 ˚C OR 5.0 ˚C/14.0 ˚C
inlet/out temperature of chilled water as specified in the equipment schedule
drawings.
C. Description: Factory-packaged and -tested units rated according to ARI Standard

441 and other applicable standards of ASTM, ASHRAE, ASME etc., and shall be UL
approved.
D. Coil Section Insulation: 13-mm thick, foil-covered, closed-cell foam/ matte-finish,

closed-cell foam complying with ASTM C 1071 and attached with adhesive
complying with ASTM C 916.
1. Fire-Hazard Classification: Insulation and adhesive shall have a combined

maximum flame-spread index of 25 and smoke-developed index of 50 when
tested according to ASTM E 84.
2. Airstream Surfaces: Surfaces in contact with the airstream shall comply with
requirements in ASHRAE 62.1-2007.
E. Main and Auxiliary Drain Pans: Insulated galvanized steel with plastic liner.
Fabricate pans and drain connections to comply with ASHRAE 62.1-2007.
The drain pan shall be 1.2mm (18-gauge) galvanized steel with interior and exterior
surfaces sprayed with a fire retardant closed cell, polyurethane, foam insulation.
The pan shall be pitched for positive drainage and shall project under full length of
coil, including return bends and headers and control valve and piping assembly.
The drain fan shall be complete with minimum 20mm dia internal threaded pipe
connection at both ends.
23 82 19
F. Chassis: Galvanized steel where exposed to moisture. Floor-mounting units shall

have leveling screws.
G. Cabinet: Steel with baked-enamel finish in manufacturer's custom paint color as

selected by Architect.
1. Vertical Unit Front Panels: Removable, steel, with steel discharge grille and
channel-formed edges, cam fasteners, and insulation on back of panel.
2. Horizontal Unit Bottom Panels: Fastened to unit with cam fasteners and hinge
and attached with safety chain; with cast-aluminum discharge grilles.
3. Stack Unit Discharge and Return Grille: Aluminum double-deflection
discharge grille, and louvered- or panel-type return grille; color as selected by
Architect from manufacturer's custom colors. Return grille shall provide
maintenance access to fan-coil unit.
4. Steel recessing flanges for recessing fan-coil units into ceiling or wall.
5. The basic unit shall be fabricated of 18 gauge (1mm) galvanized steel. All units
shall be acoustically and thermally insulated with 10 mm, 24 kg/m3 density
acoustic insulation meeting NFPA-90A requirements. Wherever the fan coil
units are not surrounded by return air, and additional 25mm thickness of
insulation shall be provided to eliminate the condensation formation on the
outer body of the fan coil unit. Exterior of the exposed mounted unit shall be
aesthetically acceptable to the Architect. Contractor to obtain approval of
color/ finish etc., from the Engineer before ordering the unit.
6. All models shall have removable bottom and side access panel to provide
complete access to the motor blower assembly, cooling coil, control valve
and piping assembly and the filter. Filter shall be removal from return air
opening which shall again be covered with decorative return air grille in case
of direct exposed units
H. Outdoor-Air Wall Box: Minimum 3.2-mm thick, aluminum, rain-resistant louver and
box with integral eliminators and bird screen.
1. Louver Configuration: Horizontal, rain-resistant louver.

2. Louver Material: Aluminum.
3. Bird Screen: 13-mm mesh screen on interior side of louver.
4. Decorative Grille: On outside of intake.
5. Finish: Baked enamel, color as selected by Architect from manufacturer's
custom colors.
I. Outdoor-Air Damper: Galvanized-steel blades with edge and end seals and nylon
bearings; with two-position handle.
J. Filters: Minimum arrestance according to ASHRAE 52.1, and a minimum efficiency

reporting value (MERV) according to ASHRAE 52.2.
K. Hydronic Coils: Copper tube, with mechanically bonded aluminum fins spaced no
closer than 2.5 mm, rated for a minimum working pressure of 1703 kPa and a
maximum entering-water temperature of 104 deg C. Include manual air vent and
drain valve. Coil shall be minimum 4 row deep and shall have 9.52mm O.D. copper
tubes. All coil shall be leak tested at 27.0 bar minimum air pressure. Each coil shall
have manual air vent as standard. Coil sweat connections shall be 16mm O.D.
copper.
L. Electric-Resistance Heating Coils: Nickel-chromium heating wire, free of expansion

noise and hum, mounted in ceramic inserts in a galvanized-steel housing; with fuses
23 82 19
in terminal box for over current protection and limit controls for high-temperature
protection. Terminate elements in stainless-steel machine-staked terminals secured
with stainless-steel hardware.
M. Fan and Motor Board: Removable.
1. Fan: Fan shall be centrifugal, forward curved, type and shall be both statically
and dynamically balanced to ensure quite and vibration free operation. Fan
wheels and housing shall be galvanized steel. For ducted type fan with high
external static resistance, the fan shall be equipped with heavy duty
adjustable speed V- belt drive. The fan shaft shall be supported by heavy duty
permanently sealed ball bearings.
2. For fan coil units having low external resistance, the fan shall be Aluminium
forward curved fan wheels mounted directly on the motor extension shaft.
Motor and fan assembly shall be dynamically balanced to ensure quiet,
vibration free operation. The fan volute shall be of minimum 1mm thick
galvanized steel.
3. Motor: Permanently lubricated, multispeed; resiliently mounted on motor
board. Comply with requirements in Division 23 Section "Common Motor
Requirements for HVAC Equipment."
4. Fan Motor for directly driven Fan Coil units having low external static
resistance shall be 3 speed, continuously rated permanent split capacitor
type, with UL listed thermal overload protection. Motor bearings shall be of
sleeve type with oil tubes and oversized oil reservoir to ensure positive
lubrication.
5. Wiring Termination: Connect motor to chassis wiring with plug connection.
N. Factory, Hydronic Piping Package: ASTM B 88, Type M (ASTM B 88M Type C) copper
tube with wrought-copper fittings and brazed joints. Label piping to indicate
service, inlet, and outlet.
1. PICV (diaphragm type) modulating control valve for chilled-water coil as

specified in drawings.
2. Hose Kits: Minimum 2758-kPa working pressure, and operating temperatures
from 0.5 to 99 deg C. Tag hose kits to equipment designations.
a. Length: 600 mm.

b. Minimum Diameter: Equal to fan-coil-unit connection size.
3. Two-Piece Ball Valves: Bronze body with full-port, chrome-plated bronze ball;
PTFE or TFE seats; and 4140-kPa minimum CWP rating and blowout-proof stem.
4. Calibrated-Orifice Balancing Valves: Bronze body, ball type; 860-kPa working
pressure, 121-deg C maximum operating temperature; with calibrated orifice
or venturi, connections for portable differential pressure meter with integral
seals, threaded ends, and equipped with a memory stop to retain set position.
5. Automatic Flow-Control Valve: Brass or ferrous-metal body; 2070-kPa working
pressure at 121 deg C, with removable, corrosion-resistant, tamperproof, self-
cleaning piston spring; factory set to maintain constant indicated flow with
plus or minus 10 percent over differential pressure range of 13.8 to 552 kPa.
6. Y-Pattern Hydronic Strainers: Cast-iron body (ASTM A 126, Class B); 125-psig
(860-kPa) working pressure; with threaded connections, bolted cover,
perforated stainless-steel basket, and bottom drain connection. Include
minimum DN 15 hose-end, full-port, ball-type blowdown valve in drain
connection.
7. Wrought-Copper Unions: ASME B16.22.
23 82 19
8. Risers: ASTM B 88, Type M (ASTM B 88M Type C) copper pipe with hose and
ball valve for system flushing.
O. Special Features and Accessories:

1. The unit shall be provided with spring type vibration isolator of high efficiency to
eliminate transfer of vibration to the building structure.
2. The ducted type unit shall be provided with neoprene type flexible connection
between the fan outlet and the duct work.
3. The unit shall be provided with chilled water control valve package and fittings
and controls as specified in the drawings. The piping close to the FCU shall be
resiliently supported.
4. The unit shall be provided with a U trap & condensate drain piping in UPVC if
concealed in the floor or wall thickness. All exposed piping shall duly insulate. The
drain piping shall be extended from unit up to the nearest floor drain outlet as
shown in the drawings or agreed by the Architect.
5. The fan coil units with return duct shall be provided with an additional return air
plenum constructed of heavy gauge galvanized steel, insulated with 25mm thick,
24 kg/M3 density rigid skin glass fibre insulation. Access panel shall be provided for
maintenance purpose.
6. The auxiliary drain pans shall be provided for the FCU and the Valve Package in
critical areas such as Electrical Room, ELV Room, Control Room, etc…
P. Operational sequences are specified in the drawings.
Q. Basic Unit Controls:
1. Control voltage transformer.

2. Guest Room fan coil units must be provided as part of the guest room
management system and the guestroom thermostat shall be a remote, wall-
mounted, electronic digital thermostat specifically designed for guestroom
applications
3. Wall-mounting thermostat with the following features:
a. Heat-cool-on/off switch.
b. Fan on-auto switch.
c. Fan-speed switch.
d. Fan mode button that allows guest to have either continuous fan, fan
cycling on demand of heating/cooling, and manual speed selection.
e. Automatic or Manual heating/cooling selection.
f. Backlit, Touch Screen, Full color HD, LED/LCD digital display with
temperature numerals that are at least 12.0 mm in height
g. Adjustable dead band.
h. Concealed temperature limits for heating and cooling.
i. Concealed/ Exposed indication.
j. Degree F/ Degree C indication.
k. Control algorithm that causes fan speed to increase as the room
conditions increase above set point, returning to low speed as set point
is reached.
l. Provides energy management through a passive infrared occupancy
sensor for energy management and space humidity control with
wireless interface to building automation system and entry electronic
door lock.
4. Wall-mounting/ Unit-mounted temperature sensor.
23 82 19
5. Unoccupied-period-override push button.

6. Data entry and access port.
a. Input data includes room temperature set points and occupied and
unoccupied periods.
b. Output data includes room temperature, supply-air temperature,
entering-water temperature, operating mode, and status.
R. DDC Controller:
1. Scheduled Operation: Occupied and unoccupied periods on seven-day

clock with a minimum of four programmable periods per day.
2. Unoccupied Period Override Operation: Two hours.
3. Unit Supply-Air Fan Operation:
a. Occupied Periods: Fan runs continuously.

b. Unoccupied Periods: Fan cycles to maintain room setback
temperature.
4. Hydronic-Cooling-Coil Operation:
a. Occupied Periods: Open/ Modulate control valve to maintain room

temperature.
b. Unoccupied Periods: Close control valve after maintaining room
temperature.
5. Heating-Coil Operation:
a. Occupied Periods: Energize electric-resistance coil to provide heating if

room temperature falls below thermostat set point.
b. Unoccupied Periods: Start fan and energize electric-resistance coil if
room temperature falls below setback temperature.
6. Dual-Temperature Hydronic-Coil Operation:
a. Occupied Periods: When chilled water is available, open/ modulate

control valve if room temperature exceeds thermostat set point. When
hot water is available, open control valve if temperature falls below
thermostat set point.
b. Unoccupied Periods: When chilled water is available, close control
valve. When hot water is available, open/ modulate control valve if
room temperature falls below thermostat setback temperature.
S. Building Automation System (BAS) Interface Requirements:
1. Interface relay for scheduled operation.

2. Interface relay to provide indication of fault at the central workstation.
3. Provide BACnet interface for central BAS workstation for the following
functions:
a. Adjust set points.

b. Fan-coil-unit start, stop, and operating status.
c. Data inquiry, including supply- and room-air temperature.
d. Occupied and unoccupied schedules.
23 82 19
T. Electrical Connection: Factory wire motors and controls for a single electrical
connection.
U. Capacities and Characteristics: Refer equipment schedule drawings for the

capacities of all the equipment.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas to receive fan-coil units for compliance with requirements for
installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.
B. Examine roughing-in for piping and electrical connections to verify actual locations
before fan-coil-unit installation.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install fan-coil units level and plumb.
B. Install fan-coil units to comply with NFPA 90A.
C. Suspend fan-coil units from structure with elastomeric hangers. Vibration isolators
are specified in Division 23 Section "Noise and Vibration Controls" for HVAC Piping
and Equipment.
D. Verify locations of thermostats, humidistats, and other exposed control sensors with
Drawings and room details before installation.
E. Install new filters in each fan-coil unit within two weeks after Substantial Completion.
F. At the time of substantial completion of the unit work, provide suitable protective
covering, barriers, devices, signs or such other methods or procedures to protect the
work from damage or deterioration. Maintenance of protective measures
throughout remainder of construction period.
3.3 CONNECTIONS

indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. Specific
connection requirements are as follows:
1. Install piping adjacent to machine to allow service and maintenance.

2. Connect piping to fan-coil-unit factory hydronic piping package. Install
piping package if shipped loose.
3. Connect condensate drain to indirect waste.
a. Install condensate trap of adequate depth to seal against the pressure

of fan. Install cleanouts in piping at changes of direction.
23 82 19
B. Connect supply and return ducts to fan-coil units with flexible duct connectors
specified in Division 23 Section "Air Duct Accessories." Comply with safety
requirements in UL 1995 for duct connections.
C. Ground equipment according to Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for

D. Connect wiring according to Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power


including connections. Report results in writing.
confirm proper motor rotation and unit operation.
2. Operate electric heating elements through each stage to verify proper
operation and electrical connections.
3. Test and adjust controls and safety devices. Replace damaged and
malfunctioning controls and equipment.
C. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.
3.5 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust initial temperature and humidity set points.
B. Occupancy Adjustments: When requested during Defects Liability period from the
date of Substantial Completion, provide on-site assistance in adjusting system to suit
actual occupied conditions.
3.6 DEMONSTRATION

personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain fan-coil units.
23 82 19
25 00 00 – Building Management System
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes control equipment and installation for HVAC systems and
components, including control components for terminal heating and cooling units
not supplied with factory- furnished controls.
B. See "Sequences of Operation" for requirements that relate to this Section.
A. Drawings and Specification Sections of the Contract, including General and

Supplementary
Conditions, apply to this Section.
1. General Requirements Section 01 00 00
2. Section 01 00 00 – General and Special Requirements
3. Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Requirements
4. Section 27 05 26 – Commissioning of HVAC
5. Section 05 45 19 – Commissioning of Integrated Automation
6. Section 23 31 03 – Detection and Alarm (Fire and Smoke Alarm Systems)
7. Section 01 60 00 – Materials and Equipment
8. Section 23 05 00 – Common Work Results for HVAC
9. Section 23 05 93 – Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC
10. Section 26 01 00 – General Electrical Provisions for Electrical Work
11. Section 26 05 00 – Common Work Results for Electrical
12. Section 26 05 19 – Low Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables
13. Section 26 05 29 – Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems
14. Section 26 05 33 – Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems
15. Section 26 05 53 – Identification for Electrical Systems
16. Section 26 27 26 – Wiring Devices
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. BACnet: An industry standard data communication protocol for Building

Automation and
Control Networks. Refer to AHSRAE standard 135-2010
B. BIBB: BACnet Interoperability Building Blocks
C. DDC: Direct digital controls
D. IP: Internet Protocol
E. I/O: Input/ Output
F. LAN: Local area network.
G. MS/TP: Master-slave/token-passing. Refer to AHSRAE standard 135-2010
25 00 00
H. TCP: Transfer Control Protocol
I. ICT Contractor: Tel / Data LAN Network contractor
I. Scope Terminology
1. Provide = Furnish equipment, engineer, program and install
2. Furnish = Furnish equipment, engineer and program
3. Mount = securely fasten or pipe
4. Install = mount and wire
5. Wire = wire only
A. The Building Automation System (BAS) contractor shall furnish and install a
networked system of HVAC, Fire Fighting, Energy Metering, Electrical System
controls. The contractor shall incorporating direct digital control (DDC) for central
plant equipment, building ventilation equipment, supplemental heating and
cooling equipment, terminal units etc.
B. Provide networking to new DDC equipment using communication standards.

System shall be capable of BACnet communication according to ASHRAE standard
ANSI/ASHRAE 135-2010 for interoperability with smart equipment and for the main IP
communication trunk to the BAS Server. The system shall not be limited to only
standard protocols, but shall also be able to integrate to a wide variety of third-
party devices and applications via drivers and gateways.
C. Provide dedicated DDC controllers where called for on the drawings or sequences.
1.5 WORK INCLUDED
A. The installation of the control system shall be performed under the direct supervision
of the controls manufacturer with the shop drawings, flow diagrams, bill of
materials, component designation, or identification number and sequence of
operation all bearing the name of the manufacturer.
B. Furnish a complete distributed direct digital control system in accordance with this
specification section. This includes all system controllers, logic controllers, and all
input/output devices.
Items of work included are as follows:
1. Provide a submittal that meets the requirements below for approval.
2. Coordinate installation schedule with the mechanical contractor and
general contractor.
3. Provide installation of all panels and devices unless otherwise stated.
4. Provide power for panels and control devices.
5. Provide all low voltage control wiring for the DDC system.
6. Provide miscellaneous control wiring for HVAC and related systems regardless
of voltage.
7. Provide engineering and technician labor to program and commission
software for each system and operator interface. Submit commissioning
reports for approval.
8. Participate in commissioning for all equipment that is integrated into the BAS
(Refer to Commissioning sections of the equipment or systems in other parts of
this specification.)
9. Provide testing, demonstration and training as specified below.
25 00 00
1.6 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE
A. Comply with the following performance requirements:

1. Graphic Display: Display graphic with dynamic points which updates current
data in real time.
2. Object Command: Fast reaction time between operator command of a
binary object and device reaction.
4. Object Scan: Transmit change of state and change of analog values to
control units.
5. Alarm Response Time: Annunciate alarm at workstation within 2 seconds.
Multiple workstations must receive alarms within five seconds of each other.
6. Program Execution Frequency: Programmable controllers shall execute DDC
PI control loops, and scan and update process values and outputs at least
once per second.
7. Reporting Accuracy and Stability of Control: Report values and maintain
measured variables within tolerances as follows:
a. Water Temperature: Plus, or minus 0.25 deg C.
b. Water Flow: Plus or minus 5 percent of full scale.
c. Water Pressure: Plus or minus 2 percent of full scale.
d. Space Temperature: Plus or minus 0.25 deg C.
e. Ducted Air Temperature: Plus or minus 0.25 deg C.
f. Outside Air Temperature: Plus, or minus 0.5 deg C. g.
g. Dew Point Temperature: Plus or minus 0.25 deg C.
h. Temperature Differential: Plus or minus 0.25 deg C.
i. Relative Humidity: Plus or minus 2 percent.
j. Airflow (Pressurized Spaces): Plus or minus 3 percent of full scale.
k. Airflow (Measuring Stations): Plus or minus 5 percent of full scale.
l. Airflow (Terminal): Plus or minus 10 percent of full scale.
m. Air Pressure (Space): Plus or minus .25mm of WC.
n. Air Pressure (Ducts): Plus or minus 2.5 mm of WC.
o. Carbon Monoxide: Plus or minus 5 percent of reading.
p. Carbon Dioxide: Plus or minus 50 ppm.
q. Electrical: Plus or minus 5 percent of reading.
1.7 SUBMITTALS
A. Provide a complete submittal with all controls system information for approval
before construction starts. Include the following, but not limited to:
1. Valve schedule and cut sheets
2. Total I/O Point Schedule
3. Individual DDC I/O Schedule with 20% Spare per DDC.
4. Data Sheets of each item / equipment of complete BMS System.
5. Data sheets for UL Listed DDC proposed for Fire Fighting system with UL
Certificate.
6. BOM (Bill of Material)
7. Country of Origin confirmation letter.
8. Wiring Schedule
9. Factory mounting and wiring diagrams and cut sheets.
10. Thermostat locations
11. DDC Locations.
12. Fire Alarm interface I/O Module requirement schedule.
13. Details of control panel faces, including sizes, controls, instruments, and
25 00 00
labeling.
14. Schedule of dampers and actuators including size, leakage, and flow
characteristics.
15. If dampers are furnished by other, submit a damper actuator schedule
coordinating actuator sizes with the damper schedule.
16. Schedule of valves including leakage and flow characteristics.
17. Written description of the Sequence of Operations.
18. Network riser diagram showing wiring types, network protocols, locations
of floor penetrations and number of control panels. Label control panels
with network addresses and BACnet device instance numbers. Show all
routers, switches, hubs and repeaters.
19. DDC Controller Schematic for each DDC / Equipment / System. Point list
for each system controller including both inputs and outputs (I/O), point
numbers, controlled device associated with each I/O point, and
location of I/O device.
20. Starter and variable frequency drive wiring details of all automatically
controlled motors.
21. Floor plan drawings showing locations of control panels, thermostats
and any devices mounted in occupied space.
B. Wireless Communication: If wireless sensors and / or network are used, submit a

radio signal layout showing the signal reach of every wireless mesh device. Show
where repeaters are needed so that a wireless signals overlap
C. Product Data: Include manufacturer's technical literature for each control device
indicated, labeled with setting or adjustable range of control. Indicate dimensions,
capacities, performance characteristics, electrical characteristics, finishes for
materials, and installation and startup instructions for each type of product
indicated. Submit a write-up of the application software that will be used on the
operator workstation including revision level, functionality and software applications
required to meet the specifications.
D. Submit PICS statements for all direct digital controllers and interfaces.
E. Submit a description of the application software that will be used on the operator
workstation including revision level, functionality and software applications required
to meet the specifications.
F. Wiring Diagrams: Detail the wiring of the control devices and the panels. Show
point-to-point wiring from field devices to the control panel. Show point-to-point
wiring of hardwired interlocks. Show a ladder diagram or schematic of wiring
internal to the panels, including numbered terminals. Clearly designate wiring that
is done at a factory, at a panel shop or in the field.
G. Submit blank field check-out and commissioning test reports, customized for each
panel or system, which will be filled out by the technician during start-up.
H. Variance letter: Submit a letter detailing each item in the submission that varies
from the contract specification or sequence of operation if any.
I. After the BAS system is approved for construction, submit sample operator
workstation graphics for typical systems for approval. Print and submit the graphics
that the operator will use to view the systems, change set points, modify parameters
and issue manual commands. Sample Graphics / Screen shots shall be submitted
immediately after the approval of MAC. Programming of the System shall be done
only as per the approved Graphics / Screen shots.
25 00 00
A. Codes
1. Perform all wiring in accordance with Division 26, NEC, local codes and
Engineer/Owner/Operator’s requirements.
2. Uniform Building Code (UBC)
3. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as
defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities
having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.
4. Comply with NFPA 90A, "Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilation
Systems."
5. Comply with ASHRAE 135-2010 BACNet: A Data Communication Protocol for
Building Automation and Control Networks.
6. All equipment shall be UL listed and approved and shall meet with all
applicable NFPA standards, including UL 916 - PAZX Energy Management
Systems,
7. Provide UL 864 – UUKL Smoke Control, where controllers and networks are
used for that purpose.
a. Provide written approvals and certifications after installation has been
completed.
8. All electronic equipment shall conform to the requirements of FCC
Regulation, Part 15, Governing Radio Frequency Electromagnetic
Interference and be so labeled.
9. The manufacturer of the building automation system shall provide
documentation supporting compliance with ISO-9002 (Model for Quality
Assurance in Production, Installation, and Servicing) and ISO-140001 (The
application of well-accepted business management principles to the
environment). The intent of this specification requirement is to ensure that the
products from the manufacturer are delivered through a Quality System and
Framework that will assure consistency in the products delivered for this
project.
B. Qualifications
1. Installing contractor shall be in the business of installing and servicing DDC
controls for mechanical systems, temperature and ventilation control,
environmental control, lighting control, access and security controls, and
energy automation as their primary business. Installer Qualifications: An
experienced installer who is the authorized representative of the automatic
control system manufacturer for both installation and maintenance of
controls required for this Project.
2. Engineering, drafting, programming, and graphics generation shall be
performed by the local branch engineers and technicians directly employed
by the Building Automation
System Contractor.
3. Supervision, checkout and commissioning of the system shall be by the local
branch engineers and technicians directly employed by the Building
Automation System
Contractor. They shall perform commissioning and complete testing of the
BAS system.
C. The BMS contractor shall maintain a service organization consisting of factory

trained service personnel and provide a list of ten (10) projects, similar in size and
scope to this project, completed within the last five years.
25 00 00
D. Final determination of compliance with these specifications shall rest solely with the
Engineers and Engineer/Owner/Operator who will require proof of prior satisfactory
performance.
E. For any BAS system and equipment submitted for approval, the BAS contractor shall
state what, if any, specific points of system operation differ from these
specifications.
A. Factory-Mounted Components: Where control devices specified in this Section are

indicated to be factory mounted on equipment, arrange for shipping of control
devices to unit manufacturer.
1.10 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate location of thermostats, humidistats, panels, and other exposed control

components with plans and room details before installation.
B. Coordinate equipment with Section 28 11 00 "Fire Alarm" to achieve compatibility

with equipment that interfaces with that system.
C. Coordinate power for control units and operator workstation with electrical
contractor.
D. Coordinate equipment with provider of starters and drives to achieve compatibility

with motor starter control coils and VFD control wiring.
E. Coordinate scheduling with the mechanical contractor and general contractor.

Submit a schedule for approval based upon the installation schedule of the
mechanical equipment.
F. Products submittal shall include but not limited to:

1. Hydronic Piping:
a. Control Valves
b. Temperature Sensor Wells and Sockets
c. Flow Switches
d. Flow Meters
2. Refrigerant Piping
a. Pressure and Temperature Sensor Wells and Sockets
3. Sheetmetal accessories
a. Dampers
b. Airflow Stations
c. Terminal Unit Controls
4. Refrigeration Equipment:
a. Refrigerant Leak Detection System
b. Proof of flow pressure switches
5. Rooftop Air Handling Equipment:
a. Thermostats
b. Duct Static Pressure Sensors
G. Integrate to equipment as called for in the sequence of operations
25 00 00
1.11 WARRANTY
A. Conform to the warranty requirement of the Contract Documents, General

Requirements and this section or a minimum of 12 months. Provide whichever is
higher or strictest.
B. Warranty shall cover all costs for parts, labor, associated travel, and expenses for a
period of one year from completion of system demonstration.
C. Hardware and software personnel supporting this warranty agreement shall provide
on-site or off-site service in a timely manner after failure notification to the vendor.
The maximum acceptable response time to provide this service at the site shall be
24 hours.
D. During normal building occupied hours, failure of items that are critical for system
operation shall be provided within 4 hours of notification from the
Engineer/Owner/Operator’s Representative.
E. This warranty shall apply equally to both hardware and software.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 ACCEPTABLE SYSTEMS
A. Building Automation System proposed shall be from one of following manufacturer or

approved equal.
1. Honeywell
2. Johnson Controls
3. Schneider Electric
B. The vendors and products listed shall comply with these specifications. It shall not
be assumed that standard products and methods will be acceptable without prior
approval
2.2 BAS NETWORK
A. All networked control products provided for this project shall be comprised of an
industry standard open protocol internetwork. Communication involving control
components (i.e. all types of controllers and operator interfaces) shall conform to
ASHRAE 135-2010 BACnet standard. Networks and protocols proprietary to one
company or distributed by one company are not acceptable.
B. Access to system data shall not be restricted by the hardware configuration of the
building management system. The hardware configuration of the BMS network shall
be totally transparent to the user when accessing data or developing control
programs.
1. Software applications, features, and functionality, including administrative
configurations, shall not be separated into several network control engines
working together.
C. The operator interface shall be served up by a web Server imbedded in a controller

field panel.
The BMS Contractor shall provide PCs and web Browsing tools to interface to the
system.
25 00 00
D. The network architecture shall consist of three levels of networks:

1. Management Level:
BACnet over IP.
DDC Controllers in individual Buildings / Blocks / Villas are connected over IP /
LAN Network of the Project.
2. Automation Level:
The Automation level network shall be BACnet/IP over Ethernet. It shall
network the Automation Server, Operator workstations, and Building level
controllers. Provide network media converters, routers and switches as
necessary for a complete network.
3. Field Level:
The Floor / Field level network shall be BACnet over MS/TP.
DDC controllers within the Building / Hotel / Villa shall be networked on
BACnet over MSTP network.
E. The primary backbone network between the building level controllers shall be
based upon BACnet/IP. Contractor shall coordinate with the ICT contractor to
integrate the BACnet over IP DDC controllers strategically placed throughout the
project to cover all the Blocks / Villas as shown in BMS network schematic.
F. The Building Level Controllers (DDC) shall be able to support sub-network protocols
that may be needed depending on the type of equipment or application.
Sub-networks shall be limited to:
1. BACnet MS/TP
2. Modbus
3. LON Talk
G. BACnet MSTP Setup rules

1. Addressing for the MSTP devices shall start at 00 and continue
sequentially for the number of devices on the subnetwork.
2. No gaps shall be allowed in the addresses.
3. Set the Max Master property to the highest address of the connected device.
4. Max Master property shall be adjusted when devices are added to the
subnetwork.
H. Application specific controllers for smaller single zone, supplemental or special

systems can reside on the BACnet/MSTP network or on a sub-network.
I. Floor level controllers, terminal units, package AC units, auxiliary equipment, VFDs,
meters shall reside on one of the sub-networks above.
J. Provide all communication media, connectors, repeaters, bridges, switches, and

routers necessary for the internal network.
K. Coordinate with ICT Specialist contractor of the project for Data points required for
Building LAN Network interface of BACnet over IP DDC controllers.
L. Controllers and software shall be BTL listed at the time of installation.
M. Provide all communication media, connectors, repeaters, bridges, switches, and

routers necessary for the internetwork.
N. The system shall meet peer-to-peer communication services such that the values in
any one DDC level controller can be read or changed from all other controllers
25 00 00
without the need for intermediary devices. The software shall provide transparent
transfer of all data, control programs, schedules, trends, and alarms from any one
controller through the internal network to any other controller, regardless of
subnetwork routers.
O. Systems that use variations of BACnet using Point-to-Point (PTP) between controllers,
gateways, bridges or networks that are not peer-to-peer are not allowed.
P. Remote Communications: Provide a TCP/IP compatible communication port for

connection to the ICT LAN network for remote DDC Controller for communications.
Provide coordination with the ICT Contractor for addressing and router
configuration on both ends of the remote network.
Q. Where a smoke control application is required IP Network, UUKL listed network

switches shall be provided by BMS Contractor with NFPA approved cabling,
enclosures and installation methods.
R. The system shall be installed with a 20% spare capacity on each network for the
addition of future controllers.
2.3 DISTRIBUTED CONTROL REQUIREMENTS
A. The failure of any one DDC controller shall not affect the operation of HVAC, Fire
Fighting & Other systems connected to other DDC controllers.
B. The system shall be scalable in nature and shall permit expansion of both capacity
and functionality through the addition of sensors, actuators, DDC Controllers, and
operator devices.
C. System architectural design shall eliminate dependence upon any single device for
alarm reporting and control execution. Each DDC Controller shall operate
independently by performing its own specified control, alarm management,
operator I/O, and data collection. The failure of any single component or network
connection shall not interrupt the execution of any control strategy, reporting,
alarming and trending function, or any function at any operator interface device.
D. DDC Controllers shall be able to access any data from, or send control commands
and alarm reports directly to, any other DDC Controller on the network without
dependence upon a central processing device. DDC Controllers shall also be able
to send alarms to multiple operator workstations without dependence upon a
central or intermediate processing device.
E. The DDC control panel shall be mounted in the same mechanical room as the
equipment being controlled, or an adjacent utility room.
F. A DDC Control panel can combine multiple DCC Controller with common power
supply.
G. DDC Control panel shall be fed with DG / Emergency power with internal battery
backup. Backup shall be sufficient to keep the DDC controllers within the DDC
panel to be operational for minimum One hour.
H. Multiple systems can be programmed on the same controller / control panel as

long as they are in the same room. Systems on separate floors shall have separate
controllers.
25 00 00
I. Combining multiple systems / equipment’s at various rooms or different locations or

in different floors to single DDC Controller / DDC control panel is not acceptable.
J. FCU Controllers & VAV controllers on sub networks shall be connected to the AHU
controller that feeds those zones. If multiple sub networks are needed, then the
FCU / VAV shall be grouped into sub networks in an orderly method, such as per
floor, per wing, per zone etc.
K. Remote sensors shall be wired to the control panel of the equipment it is controlling,
not across the network.
L. Signals to remote motor control centers shall be hard wired to the control panel, not
across the network.
M. Terminal units shall each have their own controller. Only exceptions are:
1. Groups of reheat coils
2. Groups of exhaust fans
3. Groups of chilled beams serving same zone or several adjacent zones
2.4 WEB BASED OPERATOR INTERFACE SOFTWARE
A. Provide a web-based graphical interface that allows users to access the BAS data
via the Internet, extranet, or Intranet (TCP/IP). The Web-based graphical interface
shall use HTML- based pages to send and receive data directly from a network of
BAS Field Panels to a Web browser.
B. The web server shall support browser access via Microsoft Internet Explorer latest
vesrion, Firefox, or any browser that supports the compatible plug-in.
1. Cookies are allowed for compatibility
2. Microsoft Java Applet (JVM) is allowed for compatibility
3. Adobe Flash Player shall be allowed for compatibility
C. The web server shall support access via handheld, web enabled devices through
apps. The apps shall be available for download from public sites, such as Android
play Store or IOS app store.
D. The Web server shall allow monitor and control of data in any field panels
networked together on the same automation level TCP/IP Ethernet network.
1. The Web server must provide a common alarm display that shows alarms in all
field panels on the network.
2. The Web server must be able to provide common graphics that
simultaneously display the current value and status for points residing in
multiple field panels.
3. The Web server must be able to display daily mode schedules for points from
multiple field panels simultaneously.
E. Access to the Web interface shall be username and password protected. A user’s
rights and privileges to database objects within the BAS shall be configurable on a
per-user basis. An option shall exist to only allow users “read” access to BAS objects
via the Web browser. Operator sessions shall be configurable for “auto-logoff” after
a designated period of user inactivity.
1. A graphic selector list shall allow or limit the graphic displays that a user
account has access to.
25 00 00
2. The embedded Web server shall support an unlimited number of user

accounts. A minimum of five concurrent user sessions shall be available for
simultaneous operator access to the Web server’s pages.
3. The embedded Web server shall be compatible with and allow coexistence
within standard IT security policies and tools (e.g., Firewall protection).
F. The embedded Web server shall provide the following functionality to users via Web
browser, based on their access and privilege rights:
1. Point Navigation – Provide a screen that allows users to see all of the points
that are active in the system. The points shall include hardwired, software,
schedules, trends, alarms and network setup.
a. The point navigation shall display the point name, descriptor, command
priority, alarm status, and current value.
b. The user shall be able to run and print a pre-configured point log report
through a web interface client that shows the point name, descriptor,
command priority, alarm status, and current value.
c. The interface and report shall allow selection filter such that the
operator can select or deselect the types of point that are visible.
2. Alarm Display –displays current BAS alarms to which the user has access will
be displayed. Users will be able to acknowledge active alarms, erase
resolved alarms, and directly link to the Point Commanding feature.
a. The alarm display must provide a filter that displays all alarms whether
acknowledged or not.
b. The alarm display must provide a filter that displays only alarms that
have not yet been acknowledged.
c. The alarm display must provide a persistent indication whenever there is
one or more unacknowledged alarm in any connected field panel.
3. Point details – users will have access to point detail information including
operational status, operational priority, physical address, and alarm limits, for
point objects to which they have access rights.
4. Point Commanding – users will be able to override and command points they
have access to via the Web browser interface.
5. Scheduling – allows operators, depending on their current user privileges, to

override schedules selected by date, and to modify the properties of a
selected schedule.
a. The scheduler display must be able to represent facility mode
schedules in a graphical format.
6. Trend Data Report – allows users to run and print a pre-configured trend data
report for historical data reporting, including a representation of the alarm
status of the each point for each Trend sample. The report shall allow
selection of individual points or wildcard selection of points.
a. Trend data shall be exportable to a data file, such as .csv or
other comparable.
7. Network navigation - Provide a screen that allows users to navigate to the

panels and terminal units via the network architecture.
G. Graphic Displays – The BAS contractor shall provide a graphical display for each
system that is controlled.
25 00 00
1. Display of system graphics shall be available for viewing over the Web
browser.
Graphic displays will automatically refresh with the latest change of values.
Users shall have the ability to command and override points directly from the
graphic display as determined by their user accounts rights. The Graphic
Display shall accommodate a minimum of 50 customized graphics.
2. The Graphic Display shall accommodate the terminal unit graphics related to
the Application Specific Controllers tied in to the Field Panels within the
system.
H. The web server shall send SMTP text messages to notify users of alarm status. The
Engineer/Owner/Operators shall provide a mail server and a connection port. SSL
shall not be required.
I. The operator shall be able to add modify and delete controller database program,
including points, schedules, alarms, and trends.
1. The operator shall be able to edit the custom program in the field panel that
executes the sequences of operations, control loops and logic for the systems
controlled.
2. The operator shall be able to add terminal unit controllers that reside on field
panel subnetworks.
J. Internet connections, ISP services, as well as necessary firewalls or proxy servers shall
be provided by the Engineer/Owner/Operator as required to support the Web
access feature.
2.5 ELECTRONIC DOCUMENTATION
A. Provide software applications and files to view documentation through the GUI.
B. Provide a CAD viewer to view all project AutoCAD documents that are made
available by the Architect and Owner.
C. Provide all controls cut sheets in PDF format. Make them available to any user
accessing the system over the Internet.
D. Provide a text version of the sequence of operation. Make the written sequence
available from the graphic that represents each system. The sequence shall pop
up in a printable format such as HTML or PDF.
2.6 CONTROLLER SOFTWARE (i.e. Building Controller software, DDC software, Field Panel
software)
A. Provide a full capability user license to the Engineer / Owner / Operator for the
operator to be able to see, modify, create, upload, download and save control
programs to the DDC controllers.
B. The software program shall be provided as an integral part of DDC Controllers and
shall not be dependent upon any higher level computer or another controller for
execution.
C. The software application shall be accessible from a PC using the Windows

environment, but shall use all of its own services and data files so as to not be
susceptible to Microsoft Windows operating systems based viruses.
25 00 00
D. The software shall be provided with an interactive HELP function to assist operators
with syntax, abbreviations, commands and saving programs.
E. Point naming and communication format:

1. All points, panels, and programs shall be identified by a 30-character name.
All points shall also be identified by a 16-character point descriptor. The same
names shall be displayed at both Building Controller and the Operator
Interface.
2. All digital points shall have a consistent, user-defined, two-state status
indication with 8 characters minimum (e.g., Summer, Enabled, Disabled,
Abnormal).
3. The Building Controller Software shall be capable of BACnet communications.
The BACnet Building Controller (B-BC) shall have demonstrated
interoperability during at least one BTL Interoperability Workshop, have
demonstrated compliance to BTL through BTL listing and shall substantially
conform to BACnet Building Controller (B-BC) device profile as specified in
ANSI/ASHRAE 135-2004, Annex L.
F. System Security
1. User access shall be secured using individual security passwords and user
names.
2. Passwords shall restrict the user to the objects, applications, and system
functions as assigned by the system manager.
3. Building Controllers shall be able to assign a minimum of 50 passwords access
and control priorities to each point individually. The logon password (at any
Operator Interface or portable operator terminal) shall enable the operator
to monitor, adjust and control only the points that the operator is authorized
for. All other points shall not be displayed at the Operator Interface or
portable terminal. Passwords and priorities for every point shall be fully
programmable and adjustable.
4. User Log On/Log Off attempts shall be recorded.
5. The system shall protect itself from unauthorized use by automatically logging
off following the last keystroke. The delay time shall be user-definable.
6. Use of workstation resident security as the only means of access control is not
an acceptable alternative to resident system security in the DDC controller
software.
G. User Defined Control Applications: The applications software shall program DDC
routines to meet the sequences of operations.
1. Building Controllers shall have the ability to perform energy management
routines including but not limited to time of day scheduling, calendar-based
scheduling, holiday scheduling, temporary schedule overrides, start stop time
optimization, automatic daylight savings time switch over, night setback
control, enthalpy switch over, peak demand limiting, temperature-
compensated duty cycling, heating/cooling interlock, supply temperature
reset, priority load shedding, and power failure restart.
2. The Building Controllers shall have the ability to perform the following pre
tested control algorithms:
a. Two position with differential control and time delays
b. Floating control
c. Proportional control
d. Proportional plus integral control
e. Proportional, integral, plus derivative control
f. Automatic tuning of control loops
g. Model-free adaptive control
25 00 00
3. Controllers shall be able to execute custom, job-specific processes defined by

the user, to automatically perform calculations and special control routines.
4. Each controller shall support plain language text comment lines in the
operating program to allow for quick troubleshooting, documentation, and
historical summaries of program development.
H. Peer-to-peer access to other DDC controllers

1. It shall be possible to use any actual or virtual point data or status, any system
calculated data, a result from any process, or any user-defined constant in
any controller in the system.
2. Any process shall be able to issue commands to points in any and all other
controllers in the system.
3. Processes shall be able to generate operator messages and advisories to
other operator I/O devices. A process shall be able to directly send a
message to a specified device or cause the execution of an advanced
annunciation feature, such as:
a. Generate a report
b. Annunciate an alarm
c. Issue a text message or email
I. Alarm Management
1. Alarm management shall be provided within the controller software to
monitor and direct alarm information to operator devices.
2. Each Controller shall perform distributed, independent alarm analysis,
minimize network traffic and prevent alarms from being lost. At no time shall
the Controllers ability to report alarms be affected by either operator or
activity at a PC workstation, local I/O device or communications with other
panels on the network.
3. Conditional alarming shall allow generation of alarms based upon user
defined multiple criteria.
4. An Alarm “shelving” feature shall be provided to disable alarms during
testing. (Pull the Plug, etc.).
5. Binary Alarms. Each binary alarm object shall be set to alarm based on the
operator- specified state. Provide the capability to automatically and
manually disable alarming.
6. Analog Alarms. Each analog alarm object shall have both high and low
alarm limits. Alarming must be able to be automatically and manually
disabled.
7. All alarm shall include the point's user-defined language description and the
time and date of occurrence.
8. Alarm reports and messages shall be routed to user-defined list of operator
workstations, or other devices based on time and other conditions. An alarm
shall be able to start programs, print reports, be logged in the event log,
generate custom messages, and display graphics.
9. The user shall be able to add a 200-character alarm message to each alarm
point to more fully describe the alarm condition or direct operator response.
Each Building Controller shall be capable of storing a library of at least 50
alarm messages. Each message may be assigned to any number of points in
the Controller.
10. Operator-selected alarms shall be capable of initiating a trigger to an
advanced annunciation, such as text, email, etc.
11. An alarm history log shall report the start of the alarm condition,
acknowledgement by a user and return of the alarm to normal condition.
25 00 00
J. Scheduling:
1. Provide a comprehensive menu driven program to automatically start and
stop designated multiple objects or events in the system according to a
stored time.
2. Schedules shall reside in the building controller and shall not rely on external
processing or network.
3. It shall be possible to define a group of objects as a custom event (i.e.,
meeting, athletic activity, etc.). Events can then be scheduled to operate all
necessary equipment automatically.
4. For points assigned to one common load group, it shall be possible to assign
variable time delays between each successive start and/or stop within that
group.
5. The operator shall be able to define the following information:
a. Time, day
b. Commands such as on, off, auto, etc.
c. Time delays between successive commands.
d. There shall be provisions for manual overriding of each schedule by an
authorized operator.
6. It shall be possible to schedule calendar-based events up to one year in
advance based on the following:
a. Weekly Schedule. Provide separate schedules for each day of the
week. Each of these schedules should include the capability for start,
stop, optimal start, optimal stop, and night economizer. When a group
of objects are scheduled together as an Event, provide the capability
to adjust the start and stop times for each member.
b. Exception Schedules. Provide the ability for the operator to designate
any day of the year as an exception schedule. Exception schedules
may be defined up to a year in advance. Once an exception schedule
is executed, it will be discarded and replaced by the standard
schedule for that day of the week.
K. Peak Demand Limiting (PDL):

1. The Peak Demand Limiting (PDL) program shall limit the consumption of
electricity to prevent electrical peak demand charges.
2. PDL shall continuously track the amount of electricity being consumed, by
monitoring one or more electrical kilowatt-hour/demand meters. These
meters may measure the electrical consumption (kWh), electrical demand
(kW), or both.
3. PDL shall sample the meter data to continuously forecast the demand likely
to be used during successive time intervals.
4. If the PDL forecasted demand indicates that electricity usage is likely to
exceed a user preset maximum allowable level, then PDL shall automatically
shed electrical loads.
5. Once the demand peak has passed, loads that have been shed shall be
restored and returned to normal control.
L. Temperature-compensated duty cycling

1. User defined conditions shall be able to initiate a Duty Cycle Control Program.
2. The Duty Cycle Control Program (DCCP) shall be configured to periodically
stop and start loads according to various patterns.
3. The loads shall be cycled such that there is a net reduction in both the
electrical demands and the energy consumed.
25 00 00
M. Automatic Daylight Savings Time Switchover. The system shall provide automatic
time adjustment for switching to/from Daylight Savings Time.
N. Night setback control. The system shall provide the ability to automatically adjust set
points for night control.
O. Enthalpy switchover (economizer). The Building Controller Software (BCS) shall

control the position of the air handler relief, return, and outside air dampers. If the
outside air dry bulb temperature falls below changeover setpoint the BCS will
modulate the dampers to provide 100 percent outside air. The user will be able to
quickly change over to an economizer system based on dry bulb temperature and
will be able to override the economizer cycle and return to minimum outside air
operation at any time.
P. Control Loop Algorithm

1. Provide a PID (proportional-integral-derivative) closed-loop control algorithm
with direct or reverse action and anti-windup. The algorithm shall calculate a
time-varying analog value that is used to position an output or stage a series
of outputs. The controlled variable, setpoint, and weighting parameters shall
be accessible from the operator workstation.
Q. Adaptive Loop Tuning

1. Building Controllers shall also provide high resolution sampling capability for
verification of DDC control loop performance. Documented evidence of
tuned control loop performance shall be provided on a monthly, seasonal,
quarterly, annual period.
2. For Model-Free Adaptive Control loops, evidence of tuned control loop
performance shall be provided via graphical plots or trended data logs.
Graphical plots shall minimally include depictions of setpoint, process variable
(output), and control variable (e.g., temperature). Other parameters that
may influence loop control shall also be included in the plot (e.g., fan on/off,
mixed-air temp).
3. For PID control loops, operator-initiated automatic and manual loop tuning
algorithms shall be provided for all operator-selected PID control loops.
Evidence of tuned control loop performance shall be provided via graphical
plots or trended data logs for all loops.
a. In automatic mode, the controller shall perform a step response test
with a minimum one-second resolution, evaluate the trend data,
calculate the new PID
gains and input these values into the selected LOOP statement.
b. Loop tuning shall be capable of being initiated either locally at the
Building Controller, from a network workstation or remotely using dial-in
modems. For all loop tuning functions, access shall be limited to
authorized personnel through password protection.
R. Logic programming: Provide a software routine that can build ladder logic to
control using many conditional statements.
1. The logic programming syntax shall be able to combine ladder logic with
other software features, such as combining status, scheduling, PDL and alarm
conditions into one conditional decision.
2. Logic programming shall be able to reference conditions in any other
controller in the system.
S. Staggered Start:
1. This application shall prevent all controlled equipment from simultaneously
25 00 00
restarting after a power outage. The order in which equipment (or groups of
equipment) is started, along with the time delay between starts, shall be user
definable in an application and shall not require written scripts or ladder
logic.
2. Upon the resumption of power, each Building Controller shall analyze the
status of all controlled equipment, compare it with normal occupancy
scheduling and turn equipment on or off as necessary to resume normal
operations.
T. Totalization Features:
1. Run-Time Totalization. Building Controllers shall automatically accumulate and
store run-time hours for all digital input and output points. A high runtime
alarm shall be assigned, if required, by the operator.
2. Consumption totalization. Building Controllers shall automatically sample,
calculate and store consumption totals on a daily, weekly or monthly basis for
all analog and digital pulse input type points.
3. Event totalization. Building Controllers shall have the ability to count events
such as the number of times a pump or fan system is cycled on and off. Event
totalization shall be performed on a daily, weekly or monthly basis for all
points. The event totalization feature shall be able to store the records
associated with events before reset.
U. Data Collection:
1. A variety of historical data collection utilities shall be provided to manually or
automatically sample, store, and display system data for all points.
2. Building Controllers shall store point history data for selected analog and
digital inputs and outputs:
3. Any point, physical or calculated may be designated for trending. Any point,
regardless of physical location in the network, may be collected and stored
in each Building Controllers point group.
4. Two methods of collection shall be allowed: either by up to four pre-defined
time intervals or upon a pre-defined change of value. Sample intervals of l
minute to 7 days shall be provided.
5. Each Building Controller shall have a dedicated RAM-based buffer for trend
data and shall be capable of storing a minimum of 10,000 data samples.
6. Trend data shall be stored at the Building Controllers and uploaded to the
workstation when retrieval is desired. Uploads shall occur based upon either
user-defined interval, manual command or when the trend buffers are full. All
trend data shall be available for use in third-party personal computer
applications.
2.7 DDC CONTROLLERS (DDC)
A. Provide all necessary hardware for a complete operating system as required. The
DDC Controller shall be able to operate as a standalone panel and shall not be
dependent upon any higher level computer or another controller for operation.
B. Basis of design is Modular and Compact Controllers.
D. This controller shall have the BTL listing and meet the BACnet device profile of a
DDC Controller.
1. The DDC Controller on the BACnet network in field level shall have the capability
to be the BACnet/MSTP Broadcast.
2. The DDC Controller on Management level network connected thru LAN
25 00 00
network shall have the capability of BACnet / IP Broadcast.

3. The Building Level Controller in individual Blocks (Utility Building, Villas etc) shall
have the capability to act as a BACnet router between MS/TP sub networks and
BACnet/IP.
D. Dedicated DDC controller / DDC Panel shall be used for the following types of
systems:
1. Chiller plant systems
2. Heating plant systems
3. Cooling Towers
4. Pumping systems
5. VAV air handlers
6. Fire Fighting Systems
7. Pumps
8. Exhaust Fans
9. Diesel Distribution System
10. LPG Distribution System
11. Air handlers over 7000 l/s
12. Systems with over 24 input/output points
13. System / Equipment’s in dedicated rooms.
14. Diesel Generator
15. HV Panel
16. LV Panel
17. Lift Machine
E. Computing power and memory minimum:

1. A 32-bit, stand-alone, multi-tasking, multi-user, real-time 1000MHz digital
control microprocessor module.
2. Inputs shall be 16-bit minimum analog-to-digital resolution
3. Outputs shall be 10-bit minimum digital-to-analog resolution
4. Memory module (24 Megabyte, minimum) to accommodate all Primary
Control Panel software requirements, including but not limited to, its own
operating system and databases (see Controllers Software section), including
control processes, energy management applications, alarm management
applications, historical/trend data for points specified, maintenance support
applications, custom processes, operator I/O, dial-up communications.
5. Real time clock and battery
6. Data collection/ Data Trend module sized for 10,000 data samples.
7. Flash Memory Firmware: Each Building Level Control Panel shall support
firmware upgrades without the need to replace hardware.
8. UPS / Battery backup for minimum One hour backup.
F. Onboard or Modular hardware and connections:

1. Primary Network communication module, if needed for primary network
communications.
2. Secondary Network communication module, if needed for secondary
network communications.
3. RJ45 port 10/100/1000Mbaud
4. RS485 ports for sub networks and point expansion
5. Man to Machine Interface port (MMI)
6. USB Port
G. Input and Output Points Hardware

1. Minimum 16 Universal Inputs, 8 Analog output & 8 Digital output per controller
/ panel.
25 00 00
2. 20% spare capacity.

2. Monitoring of the status of all hand-off-auto switches.
3. Monitoring of all industry standard types of analog and digital inputs and
outputs, without the addition of equipment to the primary control panel.
4. Local status indication for each digital input and output for constant, up-to-
date verification of all point conditions without the need for an operator I/O
device. Each primary control panel shall perform diagnostics on all inputs
and outputs and a failure of any input or output shall be indicated both
locally and at the operator workstation.
5. Graduated intensity LEDs or analog indication of value for each analog
output.
H. Code compliance
1. Approvals and standards: UL916; CE; FCC
2. Provide UL864-UUKL Listed DDC Controller for Fire Fighting / Smoke Control
applications.
I. Accessories:
1. Appropriate NEMA rated metal enclosure.
2. Power supplies, UPS, Battery as required for all associated modules, sensors,
actuators, etc.
J. Keypad.
1. A local keypad and display shall be provided for each control panel. The
keypad shall be provided for interrogating and editing data. An system
security password shall be available to prevent unauthorized use of the
keypad and display.
K. The operator shall have the ability to manually override automatic or centrally
executed commands at the primary control panels via local, point discrete, on-
board hand/off/auto operator override switches. If on board switches are not
available, provide separate control panels with HOA switches. Mount panel
adjacent to primary control panel. Provide hand/off/auto switch for each digital
output, including spares.
L. Each Control Panel shall continuously perform self-diagnostics on all hardware

modules and network communications. The System Level Control Panel shall
provide both local and remote annunciation of any detected component failures,
low battery conditions or repeated failure to establish communication with any
system.
M. Panel setup, point definitions and sequencing diagrams shall be backed up on

EEPROM memory.
N. Power loss. All DDC Controllers / Control Panel shall be fed through DG /
Emergency power with Battery Backup in each panel supporting operation of
Controller for a hour without normal power. In the event of the total loss of power,
there shall be an orderly shutdown of controller to prevent the loss of database or
operating system software. Non-volatile memory shall be incorporated for all critical
controller configuration data and battery backup shall be provided to support the
real-time clock and all volatile memory for a minimum of 30 days.
O. Control panels shall be powered with Emergency / DG power of the building.

Battery backup shall be provided to ensure continuous operation between the
Normal power failure & EM / DG Power restoration. Controller shall transmit the loss
of power alarm message to the BMS monitoring station.
25 00 00
O. Control panels shall provide at least two serial data communication ports for
operation of operator I/O devices such as industry standard printers, operator
terminals, modems and portable laptop operator's terminals. Primary control
panels shall allow temporary use of portable devices without interrupting the
normal communications, operation of permanently connected modems, printers or
terminals.
P. Controllers shall have the capability to serve as a gateway between Modbus, Lon-
talk sub-networks and BACnet objects. Provide software, drives and programming
as required.
Q. Isolation shall be provided at all primary control panel terminations, as well as all
field point terminations to suppress induced voltage transients consistent with IEEE
Standards 587-1980.
R. Spare Capacity: Provide enough inputs and outputs to handle the equipment
shown to be “future” on drawings and 20% more of each point type. Provide all
hardware modules, software modules, processors, power supplies, communication
controllers, etc. required to ensure adding a point to the spare point location only
requires the addition of the appropriate sensor/actuator and field wiring/tubing.
S. Environment.
1. Controller hardware shall be suitable for the anticipated ambient conditions.
2. Controllers used outdoors and/or in wet ambient conditions shall be mounted
within waterproof enclosures and shall be rated for operation at 0°C to 49°C
(32°F to 120°F).
3. Controllers used in conditioned space shall be mounted in dust-proof
enclosures and shall be rated for operation at 0°C to 49°C (32°F to 120°F).
T. Immunity to power and noise.

1. Controller shall be able to operate at 90% to 110% of nominal voltage rating
and shall perform an orderly shutdown below 80% nominal voltage.
2. Operation shall be protected against electrical noise of 5 to 120 Hz and from

keyed radios up to 5 W at 1 m (3 ft).
3. Isolation shall be provided at all primary network terminations, as well as all

field point terminations to suppress induced voltage transients consistent with:
a. RF-Conducted Immunity (RFCI) per ENV 50141 (IEC 1000-4-6) at 3V.
b. Electro Static Discharge (ESD) Immunity per EN 61000-4-2 (IEC 1000-4-2)
at 8 kV air discharge, 4 kV contact.
c. Electrical Fast Transient (EFT) per EN 61000-4-4 (IEC 1000-4-4) at 500V
signal, 1 kV power.
d. Output Circuit Transients per UL 864 (2,400V, 10A, 1.2 Joule max).
4. Isolation shall be provided at all Building Controller’s AC input terminals to

suppress induced voltage transients consistent with:
a. IEEE Standard 587 1980
b. UL 864 Supply Line Transients
c. Voltage Sags, Surge, and Dropout per EN 61000-4-11 (EN 1000-4-11)
2.8 ADVANCED APPLICATION SPECIFIC CONTROLLERS
A. Provide all necessary hardware for a complete operating system as required. The
25 00 00
Advanced Application level controller shall be able to operate as a standalone

panel and shall not be dependent upon any higher level computer or another
controller for operation.
B. Basis of design is Unitary Equipment Controller.
E. This controller shall have the BTL listing and meet the BACnet device profile of an
Application Controller.
D. Communication:
1. BAS Network: The Advanced Application Controller shall support the
following Data
Link Layers:
a. MS/TP Master
2. Serial Communication: Temporary use of portable devices shall not
interrupt the BAS communication, nor the normal operation of permanently
connected printers or terminals.
a. Provide at least one EIA-232C serial data communication port for
operation of operator I/O devices such as industry standard printers,
operator terminals, and portable laptop operator's terminals.
b. A USB port shall alternatively be available to support local HMI tools
connection.
E. Software
1. The software programs specified in this section shall be provided as an
integral part of Application Specific Controllers and shall not be dependent
upon any higher level computer or another controller for execution.
2. Advanced Application Controllers shall have the ability to perform energy
management routines including but not limited to
a. scheduling, calendar-based scheduling, holiday scheduling,
temporary schedule overrides
b. automatic daylight savings time switch over
c. night setback control
d. economizer switch over using enthalpy, dry bulb or a combination
e. peak demand limiting,
f. temperature-compensated duty cycling
g. heating/cooling interlock
h. supply temperature reset
i. priority load shedding
j. power failure restart
3. The software shall have a routine for automatic tuning of control loops
4. System Security in the Field Panel
a. User access shall be secured using individual security passwords and user
names.
b. Passwords shall restrict the user to the objects, applications, and
system functions as assigned by the system manager.
c. The system shall protect itself from unauthorized use by automatically
logging off following the last keystroke. The delay time shall be user-
definable.
d. Use of workstation resident security as the only means of access
control is not an acceptable alternative to resident system security in
the field panel.
5. User Defined Control Applications:
a. Controllers shall be fully-programmable. Controllers shall execute
custom, job- specific sequences to automatically perform calculations
25 00 00
and special control routines. Factory installed or pre-configured

sequences shall only be allowed if they exactly match the sequence
specified herein.
b. Programs shall combine control logic, control loop algorithms, and
energy management routines
c. Each controller shall support plain language text comment lines in the
operating program to allow for quick troubleshooting, documentation,
and historical summaries of program development.
d. Controller shall provide a HELP function key, providing enhanced
context sensitive on-line help with task oriented information from the
user manual.
F. This level of controller shall be used for the following types of systems:
1. Systems with custom sequences that meet all of the criteria below:
• Secondary Pumping systems that are remote from Central Plants
• Air handlers up to 15,000 cfm
• Systems up to 20 input/output points
• Room control sequences that do not fit into an ASC controller
• BAS Network or Architecture or Sequences do not require the system
to be on an IP network
• Systems that require integration to meters, VFDs or other smart
equipment
• Integration to smart thermostats
G. Each System Level Control Panel shall, at a minimum, be provided with:

1. Appropriate NEMA rated metal enclosure.
2. A 32-bit, multi-tasking, real-time 100 MHz digital control microprocessor with
plug-in, enclosed processors.
3. Each Application Controller shall have sufficient memory, a minimum of 24
megabyte, to support its own operating system and databases,
including control processes, energy management applications,
alarm management applications,
historical/trend data for points specified, maintenance support
applications, custom processes, and operator I/O.
4. Real time clock and battery
5. Data collection/ Data Trend module sized for 10,000 data samples.
6. Power supplies as required for all associated modules, sensors, actuators, etc.
7. Monitoring of all industry standard types of analog and digital inputs
and outputs, without the addition of equipment to the primary control panel.
8. Local status indication for each digital input and output for constant,
up-to-date verification of all point conditions without the need for an
operator I/O device.
9. Each control panel shall perform diagnostics on all inputs and outputs and a
failure of any input or output shall be indicated both locally and at the
operator workstation.
10. Graduated intensity LEDs or analog indication of value for each analog
output.
H. Power loss. In the event of the loss of power, there shall be an orderly shutdown of
all controllers to prevent the loss of database or operating system software. Non-
volatile memory shall be incorporated for the operating system software and
firmware.
1. Application specific controller shall be powered from DG / Emergency
power.
25 00 00
2. Controller shall be able to operate at 90% to 110% of nominal voltage

rating and shall perform an orderly shutdown below 80% nominal voltage.
2. Brownout protection and power recovery circuitry protect the controller
board from power fluctuations.
3. Battery backup shall be provided to support the real-time clock for 10 years
4. The program and database information stored SDRAM memory shall be
battery backed for a minimum of 30 days and up to 60 days. This eliminates
the need for time consuming program and database re-entry in the event of
an extended power failure.
I. Database Restore: Each Application controller shall automatically save the latest
programmed database. The controller shall be able to automatically restore a lost
or corrupt database without involvement from the operator.
J. Each System Level Control Panel shall continuously perform self-diagnostics on all
hardware modules and network communications. The System Level Control Panel
shall provide both local and remote annunciation of any detected component
failures, low battery conditions or repeated failure to establish communication with
any system.
K. Each Control Panel shall support firmware upgrades without the need to replace
hardware.
1. The AAC level controller shall be upgradable to a BC level controller
with a flash upgrade of the firmware.
L. System Level control panels shall provide at least two RS-232C serial data
communication ports for operation of operator I/O devices such as operator
terminals, and additional memory. Control panels shall allow temporary use of
portable operator interface devices without interrupting the normal
communications.
M. Immunity to noise.
1. Operation shall be protected against electrical noise of 5 to 120 Hz and from
keyed radios up to 5 W at 1 m (3 ft).
2. Isolation shall be provided at all primary network terminations, as well as all
field point terminations to suppress induced voltage transients consistent with:
a. RF-Conducted Immunity (RFCI) per ENV 50141 (IEC 1000-4-6) at 3V.
b. Electro Static Discharge (ESD) Immunity per EN 61000-4-2 (IEC 1000-4-
2) at 8 kV air discharge, 4 kV contact.
c. Electrical Fast Transient (EFT) per EN 61000-4-4 (IEC 1000-4-4) at 500V
signal, 1 kV power.
d. Output Circuit Transients per UL 864 (2,400V, 10A, 1.2 Joule max).
3. Isolation shall be provided at all Advanced Application Controller’s AC
input terminals to suppress induced voltage transients consistent with:
a. IEEE Standard 587 1980
b. Voltage Sags, Surge, and Dropout per EN 61000-4-11 (EN 1000-4-11)
N. Agency Compliance
1. UL UL916 PAZX (all models)
2. UL916 PAZX7 (all models)
3. FCC Compliance CFR47 Part 15, Subpart B, Class B
4. Australian EMC Framework
5. European EMC Directive (CE)
6. European Low Voltage Directive (LVD)
7. BACnet Testing Laboratories (BTL) Certified
25 00 00
O. Spare Capacity: Provide enough inputs and outputs to handle the equipment
shown to be “future” on drawings and 10% more of each point type. Provide all
hardware modules, software modules, processors, power supplies, communication
controllers, etc. required to ensure adding a point to the spare point location only
requires the addition of the appropriate sensor/actuator and field wiring/tubing.
P. Local Operator Interfaces: Provide if called for elsewhere in the specification or the
sequences of operations.
1. Controllers shall support an optional Operator Interface Module.
2.9 APPLICATION SPECIFIC CONTROLLERS
A. Each Application specific Level Control Panel shall operate as a stand-alone

controller capable of performing its user selectable control routines independently
of any other controller in the system. Each application specific controller shall be a
microprocessor-based, multi-tasking, real-time digital control processor.
B. Basis of design controller.
C. This controller shall have the BTL listing and meet the BACnet device profile of an
Application Specific Controller.
D. Provide a Application Specific Control Panel for each of the following types of
equipment (if applicable):
1. Constant Air Volume (CAV) boxes
2. Chilled beams
3. Duct mounted reheat coils
4. Fan coil Units
5. Fan Powered Variable Air Volume (VAV) Boxes
6. Reheat Coils
7. Supplemental AC units
8. Variable Air Volume (VAV) Boxes
9. Other terminal equipment
E. Each Application Specific Controller shall, at a minimum, be provided with:

1. Appropriate NEMA rated enclosure
2. Floor Level network communications ability
3. Power supplies as required for all associated modules, sensors, actuators, etc.
4. Software as required for all sequences of operation, logic sequences and
energy management routines.
5. A portable operator terminal connection port
6. Auxiliary enclosure for analog output transducers, isolation relays, etc. Auxiliary
enclosure shall be part of primary enclosure or mounted adjacent primary
enclosure
7. Each controller measuring air volume shall include provisions for manual and
automatic calibration of the differential pressure transducer in order to
maintain stable control and insuring against drift over time
8. Each controller measuring air volume shall include a differential pressure
transducer
9. Approvals and standards: UL916; CE; FCC
F. Each Application Specific Controller shall continuously perform self-diagnostics on

all hardware and secondary network communications. The Application Specific
Controller shall provide both local and remote annunciation of any detected
component failures, low battery conditions, or repeated failure to establish
25 00 00
communication to the system.
G. Provide each Application Specific Controller with sufficient memory to

accommodate point databases, operating programs, local alarming and local
trending. All databases and programs shall be stored in non-volatile EEPROM,
EPROM and PROM. The controllers shall be able to return to full normal operation
without user intervention after a power failure of unlimited duration. Provide
uninterruptible power supplies (UPSs) of sufficient capacities for all terminal
controllers that do not meet this protection requirement. Operating programs shall
be field-selectable for specific applications. In addition, specific applications may
be modified to meet the user's exact control strategy requirements, allowing for
additional system flexibility. Controllers that require factory changes of all
applications are not acceptable.
H. The Application Specific Controller shall be powered from DG / Emergency power

source provided by this contractor and shall function normally under an operating
range of 180v to 240 VAC, allowing for power source fluctuations and voltage
drops. Install plenum data line and sensor cable in accordance with local code
and NEC. The controllers shall also function normally under ambient conditions of 32
to 122 F (0 to 50 C) and 10% to 95%RH (non-condensing). Provide each controller
with a suitable cover or enclosure to protect the intelligence board assembly.
2.10 CHILLER PLANT MANAGER (CPM)
Each Chiller should be factory run tested. A factory-furnished, programmed,

microprocessor based controller should be provided to supervise and optimize the
operation of the individual chiller. All application software actually performing the
required control functions should be factory-supplied controller and should be pre-
tested and pre-configured.
The CPM should include software that allows integration between the CPM and
chillers and other mechanical plant equipments. The Chiller Plant Manger shall be
supplied by the Chiller manufacturer.
The CPM will enhance the operation of local controller by providing the following
inherent capabilities as a minimum.
A. CPM System Requirements
1. The CPM should include the ability to rotate the chiller sequence while chillers
are running.
2. The CPM should include the capability to automatically change the rotation
based on runtimes and a rotation day and time input by the operator panel.
3. Pull-down Timer: This delay time should allow the lead chiller a chance to cool
down the building chilled water loop before starting the lag chillers during
system start-up.
4. Chiller Faulting: A chiller should be considered faulted if a fault status is
reported to the CPM by the chiller Microtech. Chillers having a
communication failure (after the operator adjustable start time value has
expired) should be left in their last commanded state.
5. Chillers faulted for any other reason should be commended off. All faulted
chillers should be automatically replaced, if healthy units are available to
maintain on line capacity.
6. Start/ Stop Delay Timers: The CPM should include operator adjustable time
delay values to prevent chillers from cycling due to short duration conditions.
7. The Chiller Plant Manager should consist of web server operator interface.
8. The Chiller Plant Manager should be supplied by the chiller manufacturer.
25 00 00
9. The Chiller Plant Manager has to control and monitor the chillers and
associated chilled water pumps, condenser water pump and cooling towers.
10. The chiller plant data should interface with the BMS (Building Management
Control System) via open standard BACNet/IP protocol for monitoring.
B. CPM should provide following monitoring functions through HMI.
1. Status monitoring
2. Alarming
C. Scope of CPM
Following equipments should be controlled through the supplied CPM:

1. Chillers – 4no
2. Primary Chilled Water Pump-5no (4+1)
3. Cooling Tower Circulation Pump -5no (4+1)
4. Heat Exchanger- 4no
5. Condenser Pump -5no (4+1)
6. Cooling Tower-2no
7. Software integration of various mechanical equipments (Monitoring & Control)
D. Technical Specifications
Chiller Plant Manager (CPM) Standard should be a factory-engineered system
control to optimise the energy efficiency and the reliability of a chiller plant room.
With a pre-set library of applications, CPM should be able to manage different
configurations within both constant and variable primary flow.
It can be integrated in a building management system through BACNet/IP or
Modbus RTU/RS-485 Main functionalities are as follows:
1. Availability of chillers
2. Sequencing control: Operating hours and sequencing
3. Staging control: Capacity optimisation, supply water temperature and time
rotation.
4. Last chiller stop control strategy
5. Minimum and maximum operating chiller setting
6. Primary Pumps control: Variable speed drive controls, availability of pumps,
staging depending on differential pressure, time rotation, minimum and
maximum operating pump setting
7. Evaporator Shut-Off Valves control
8. Bypass valve control
9. External Emergency Stop
E. Technical Overview
Chiller Plant Manager (CPM) should consist of:
1. Control Panel
2. Panel mounted HMI Touch Screen
F. Electrical Panel
CPM Control Panel as minimum shall meet the electrical panel specifications in
section 26
25 00 00
G. CPM Control Panel
1. The controllers provided should offer maximum flexibility in the control and
monitoring of chiller plant systems. The controller should be UL listed. The
controller should be designed to be easily mounted in a standard IP42 or higher
enclosure (indoor) as local and national code dictates.
2. Proposed controller as a minimum should provide below features:

i. Chiller Management through Modbus RTU/RS485
ii. Integration by BMS (Building Management Station)
a) BACnet IP communication module
b) Modbus RTU/TCP communication module
iii. 10% free space for racks & I/O card in the I/O chassis.
iv. Power supply to have minimum of 20% current load as spare.
v. All Input /Outputs to be wired through the fused terminals
vi. All panel wiring to be properly lugged & crimped
vii. Controller should allow for future expansion of the plant as well as the
main backbone network meant for monitoring/control
viii. Open communication protocol support over Bacnet IP, Modbus RTU,
Modbus TCP
ix. All control panel’s should be of light gray (RAL7035). The control panels
should be properly ventilated to take out the heat dissipated by the
processors and other network devices.
x. The panel should be equipped with a drawing pocket.
xi. Necessary lighting should be provided by inter-locking with the panel
door limit switch. Panel light.
xii. All networking components – Ethernet switch, Gateway,etc. which are
linked to CPM controller operation should be sized for 24Vdc supply
xiii. The panel should be provided with properly sized fans and cross
ventilation. Fan should be inter-locked with the panel door limit switch
and thermostat
xiv. All power distribution should be isolated from all control signals
xv. All terminals should be fused and I/O cards should be isolated from field
side in the interest of safe guarding the I/O cards & Controller in term
field side wiring errors and over voltage/current.
xvi. All digital outputs should be isolated using control relays followed with
Terminal Block termination
xvii. Separate power and instruments earthing requirements
xviii. Ethernet switches should have a minimum of below features :
a) DIN-Rail mounting
b) Ambient Relative Humidity: 5 to 95% (non-condensing)
c) Storage Temperature: -40 to 85°C (-40 to 185°F)
d) Minimum four (4) ports on ethernet switch
H. Main Controller
1. The main CPM controller provide the following functions

i. Control functions
ii. Modbus 485 for connection with Chiller Modbus network as Master
device.
iii. Onboard Ethernet Service Interface port for connection with Ethernet
network
iv. Provision for adding extension I/O modules
v. Provision for adding communication modules
25 00 00
vi. Should have a minimum central processing unit with working memory
100 kb for program and 750 kb for data. One (1) no on-board Ethernet
interface expandable to three (3) using bus adapter. The Ethernet port
should support a minimum of TCP/IP, ISO-on-TCP, UDP, SNMP, DCP, LLDP
& Modbus TCP. The Ethernet port should also support Web server
features over HTTP and HTTPS. Memory card provision required on-
board the controller. Controller should accept 24Vdc power supply.
Typical processing time should be as following or better :
vii. For bit operations, typical 72 ns ,for word operations, typical 86
ns,for fixed point arithmetic, typical 115 ns, for floating point arithmetic,
typical 461 ns
viii. The Controller should support standard programming platforms like -
Ladder, Function block, Structure text ,etc
ix. The controller should support a minimum of 32 Distributed I/O
systems & Clock synchronization over Ethernet NTP.
x. The controller should allow for online forcing of variables & should
facilitate online program editing.
xi. Following diagnostic indication should be available via LED on board
the controller – Run/Stop, Error.
xii. The controller should work in ambient temperature of 0-60degC
and storage/transportation at -40degC-70 degC
xiii. The controller should also have a feature to password protect
program & access protection read, write options
xiv. 30 % memory for application program should be free.
I. I/O Modules
1. The I/O modules provide additional I/O points by connecting to the
main controller sensors, valve actuators, pumps and cooling towers are
connected through the I/O module. The types of I/O points include the
following.
2. The CPM controller should be able to connect to input and output

cards. The Digital Input card should feature a minimum of following
functions :
i. Input channel density of 16 points over 24Vdc
ii. Input characteristic curve in accordance with IEC 61131-type 1 ,3
iii. Diagnostics indication LED for module and channel
iv. Digital Inputs are: Potential free / Potential contacts (Voltage)
3. The Analog Input card should feature a minimum of following functions :

i. Input channel density of 8 points - 4-20mA/0-10V
ii. Should support two(2) wire/four(4) wire connection
iii. Re-parameterization in RUN mode should be possible
iv. Diagnostics alarm & message like –error and wire break
v. Diagnostics indication LED for module
4. The Digital Output card should feature a minimum of following functions :

i. Output channel density of 16 points over 24Vdc
ii. Diagnostics alarm & message like –alarm and wire break
iii. Diagnostics indication LED for module and channel
iv. Digital Outputs: Potential free contacts (Non-Voltage) should be
connected to interposing relay. Contacts of interposing relay to be
wired to field terminal block.
25 00 00
5. The Analog Output card should feature a minimum of following functions :

v. Input channel density of 4 points -4-20mA (two wire) /0-10V (two/four
wire)
vi. Re-parameterization in RUN mode should be possible
vii. Diagnostics alarm & message like –error and wire break
viii. Diagnostics indication LED for module
J. I/O Mapping
The number of I/O modules needed varies depending on the system configuration
The mapping of I/O’s on the main controller and the I/O modules is customized to
project requirement.
K. Panel Mounted HMI Touch Screen

Each CPM panel should be provided with a Panel mounted HMI touch panel with a
minimum of below specification:
i. TFT widescreen 12” or more display, LED backlighting
ii. Horizontal image resolution 1280 Pixel
iii. Vertical image resolution 800 Pixel
iv. Touch Screen panel powered on 24Vdc
v. Should have on-board Ethernet and USB interface
vi. Should support TCP/IP,DHCP,SNMP,DCP,LLDP
vii. IP 65 at the front of panel
viii. Should be CE mark ,cULus, RCM (formerly C-TICK),KC approved
ix. Should work at ambient of 0-50degC with storage/transportation from -
20degC-60degC
x. Should operate till Relative Humidity 90% (no condensation)
L. Networks
Minimum of three (3) communication Networks should be provided with the CPM:
i. Modbus® / RS485 for the integration of chiller data into the CPM
controller
ii. BACNet / IP or Modbus®RTU / RS485 for the connection between the
CPM controller and a general BMS
iii. Web Based IP Service interface over Ethernet for communication with
Controller.
M. Functional Overview
1. Functions for Controlling Peripherals

Comprehensive system functions such as staging, sequencing and alarm
management cover all requirements associated with the operation of a
chiller plant room system
N. Chiller Staging and Sequencing
a) Chiller fault logic and automatic change over to available chiller (s).
b) Available Function
1. This function should determines if a chiller is Available or not, based on: If the
unit controller reports that the chiller is in Alarm status.
2. If the unit controller reports chiller Local/Remote is set to Local operation
and consequently CPM can’t command points in the unit controller.
3. If an available chiller fails on start-up request
4. If the Chiller is not in Auto mode from the software
c) Staging
25 00 00
The CPM should release an additional Stage when all of the following
conditions apply:
1. Running Chiller is running over the Stage Up capacity set point
2. The chilled water supply temperature is greater than the <Actual system set-
point> and
3. Stage up flow condition is healthy Conditions (1), (2) & (3) above have been
true for a period of time specified by the <Chiller stage Delay timer> i.e. 10
minutes (adjustable). Once it has been determined that stage-up of capacity
is needed the Next-On chiller is enabled.
The CPM decreases system capacity by one stage (one chiller) when the following
conditions apply:
1. The chilled water delta T temperature is less than the < Design set-point
2. If the Active Capacity for the Next-OFF chiller < Spare Capacity Factor * (Sum
of the Spare Capacity of all other running chillers), the Next-OFF chiller may be
disabled. Default=0.9
3. Stage down flow condition is healthy Condition (1), (2) & (3) has been true for
a period of time specified by the <Chiller stage down delay Timer> i.e. 10
minutes (adjustable)
d) Rotation
To allow for rotation when the load is constant and staging doesn’t occur,
NEXT-ON chiller train can be forced to be turned ON.
O. Primary Pump Control
a) Primary VFD Control optimization based on plant Differential pressure

Based on the differential pressure (D/P), the speed of the primary pump is varied. If
the D/P is low the speed of the pump is increased to maintain the D/P and if the
D/P is high the speed of the pump is decreased to maintain the DP
The pump is set as Not Available if any of the following conditions are met: Alarm
digital input for the pump became ON
The pump is manually set as Not Available
c) Staging Function
Pumps should be staged up/down based on no. of Chiller running .Flow rate
fluctuation through the chiller should not exceed the design percent of the design
flow rate change per minute. The rate of flow change should also be in
synchronization with BMS system controls for secondary Chilled water circuit such as
tertiary pumps ,AHU’s, FCU’s, etc.
d) Rotation
To allow for rotation when the load is constant and staging doesn’t occur, NEXT-ON
pump can be forced to be turned ON
P. Cooling Tower Circulation Pump

a) Available Function
b) Staging Function
Pumps should be staged up/down based on the request from Chiller.
c) Rotation
25 00 00
Q. Heat Exchanger
a) The Heat exchanger on-off motorized valve shall be opened upon the
condenser pump request from respective Chiller Microtech controllers.
R. Condenser Pump Control

a) Available Function
b) Staging Function
Pumps should be staged up/down based on the request from Chiller.
c) Rotation
S. Cooling Tower Fan Control

a) Cooling Tower fan speed control optimization based on ambient wet bulb
temperature The Cooling tower fan speed should be regulated per the controller
PID output ensuring that speed changes satisfies the Chiller condenser inlet
temperature based on the ambient wet bulb temperature and Cooling tower
approach.
The fan is set as Not Available if any of the following conditions are met: Alarm
digital input for the fan became ON
The fan is manually set as Not Available
c) Staging Function
The Cooling tower fan staging should be regulated to maintain the condenser inlet
temperature & no of chiller(s) running.
d) Rotation
fan can be forced to be turned ON
T. Evaporator & Condenser shut off valve control

a) Isolation valves should be opened upon the pump request from respective
Chiller Microtech controllers
b) Slow acting on-off isolation valve with a linear (flow v/s opening) profile to be
selected to avoid sudden flow fluctuation
U. Bypass valve control

a) The Chiller minimum flow By-Pass line and valve shall be sized to allow for the
manufacturer’s recommended minimum flow, with all load building side valve
closed, for the chiller with the largest minimum flow rate in the system
b) The system minimum flow by-pass valve shall be a normally open valve.
c) The system minimum flow by-pass valve shall be modulated to the fully open
position to ensure minimum recommended flow through the chiller
V. Interface
CPM should interface with following balance of plant independent sub-systems:
a) Cooling Tower Make Up system

b) Cooling Tower basin Sweep System
25 00 00
c) Full Stream filtration unit

d) Pressurization System
e) Cooling Tower Water Treatment System
f) Variable Refrigerant Flow System
2.11 Energy Metering
2.11.1 BTU Metering system

a. The BTU metering system shall consist of the ultrasonic volume measuring
component (flow sensor), the integrator with integral hardware and software
for measuring flow rate, temperature and energy consumption as well as 2 or 4
wired temperature sensors. The BTU Meter has to be equipped with an internal
M-Bus / BACnet interface module for automatic meter reading.
b. The system shall measure with exceptional accuracy especially for the sizes of
qp 1.5;
c. 2.5 and 6.0 m3/h where a dynamic range of 1:100 (qi (minimum flow): qp
(permanent flow)) must be available. The meters dynamic range shall be
certified by an independent approval authority.
d. Each zone shall be fitted with a suitable flow sensor, integrator and factory
matched pair high accuracy temperature sensors and sensor pockets.
e. The meter shall provide the EEPROM storage facility for hourly or daily logs and
for monthly logs of 24 months.
f. The meter manufacturer shall provide test report for each meter produced
which shall acknowledge the meters performance in the following aspects:
Metrology and accuracy at test conditions.
g. MBUS Processing Units (M-BUS Master & Repeater)
h. The M-Bus central processing unit shall be capable to act as a fully digital M-
Bus Level Converter / Repeater and as M-Bus Master.
i. The M-Bus central processing unit shall provide the following interfaces:
M-Bus interface for connecting M-Bus devices
Serial RS232 interface for connecting a modem / computer.
USB interface to connect to computer.
Integrated M-Bus Repeater functionality.
BACnet Interface for reading data from BMS software.
j. LAN interface for remote readings.
k. The rail-mount housing with fuse profile shall be made of heat resistant plastic,
respectively shall simplify the installation.
l. The M-Bus transmission speeds shall be 300, 600, 1200, 2400 baud with
automatic baud rate detection.
m. The M-Bus master shall provide status LED’s, visualizing the following
information:
25 00 00
M-Bus current:
0 .. 50 % of the maximum bus current
50 .. 100 % of the maximum bus current
100 .. 130 % of the maximum bus current (Warning)
Overload
n. Signal activity on one of the input channels (Modem, PC, USB, M-Bus Repeater,
BACnet and LAN):
Data reception
Data transmission
Modem connectivity status.
o. M-Bus central processing unit with memory:
p. The device shall provide a minimum 256 MB flash memory, capable of storing
approximately 500,000 meter values. The internal real time clock with date and
time shall have a deviation not exceeding ± 1 minute per month provided
power supply is not disconnected for more than one month.
q. The meter list as well as the programmable automatic meter read out intervals
shall be internally stored. This information must not be erased in case of power
drops, or power failures.
r. The M-Bus central processing unit shall allow the manual / automatic readout
of its memory. The M-Bus Master shall be programmable via RS 232 or USB or
remotely via telephone (PSTN or GSM) or even via TCP/IP (Ethernet 802.3)
network with an operating system Windows XP or above.
s. Each BTU meter shall have BACnet over MSTP RS485 port to communicate on
the BMS network as field level device.
t. BMS Monitoring software shall have the capability to process the Data from
the BTU meters and develop various trend chart / tables as per the Engineer /
Operator / Client requirement.
2.11.2 Flow Meter
a. The ultrasonic technology of the flow sensor has to provide very high
measuring accuracy. It shall allow its installation either in forward or return line
in horizontal or vertical line. The volume measuring component must conform
to the requirements of EN 1434 / class 2.
b. Ultrasonic flow sensor qp 0.6/1.5/2.5/3.5/6.0m³/h.
c. Design shall prevent sedimentation of dirt particles on reflectors (test results of
adequate measurements shall be provided with delivery of meters)
d. Insensitive to dirt particles
e. Design shall secure that only correct ultrasonic signals passing through the
measuring tube are measured.
f. Metrological dynamic range (qi:qp) 1 : 100
g. To be approved according to EN 1434 class 2
h. Cable length between flow sensor and calculator should be between 3 - 5m
(as per site requirements)
i. Mounting of the flow sensor in any installation position
j. Temperature range: 5°C to 90°C
k. Protection class IP68 for cooling applications
25 00 00
l. Air in the pipe shall not be measured

m. Pressure rate of PN 16 and PN 25 shall be available in either threaded or
flanged version.
n. Intergrator / Calculator Software on BMS
o. The integrator shall contain all the necessary circuits for recording the flow rate
and temperature and for calculating, logging and displaying the data. Its
housing shall be mountable directly (only for heating) or with an adapter on
the flow sensor, or on the wall. The meter to allow conveniently reading from a
single line 8-digit display with units and symbols. All failures and faults need to
be recorded automatically and shown on the LC display. To protect the
reading data, all the relevant data to be stored in a non-volatile memory
(EEPROM). This memory shall save the measured values, device parameters
and types of error at regular intervals.
p. The integrator shall be equipped as standard with IrDA / ZVEI optical interface
with the M-Bus protocol as per EN 1434. This interface may be used, for
communication with the adequate software for parameterisation and single
readout. The integrator shall provide plug and play communication modules.
q. Modular concept for future integration of optional modules:
r. Plug & Play modules (2 available slots in the calculator with addition to built-in
Radio). The modules function shall automatically be set upon installation.
s. Modules required in BTU meter:
t. MBUS module (minimum reading cycle 5 minutes)
u. Temperature Sensors (Matched Pair)
v. Pt500, 2-wire / 4-wire, Diameter 5.2mm (type PS Pocket Sensor), cable length
2m
w. Technical characteristics of Pt500:
x. Platinum-Chip temperature sensor according DIN EN 60751
y. Temperature range – 20 ... +105°C (150°C)
z. Tolerance class B (in K): ± (0.30 K + 0,005 x |t|)
aa. Current to be measured 0,7mA recommended
bb. Maximum current 3.0 mA
cc. Temperature coefficient: α = 3,850 x 10-3°C-1 (between 0°C and 100°C)
dd. Long term stability max. R0 - drift 0.05% / year
ee. Resistance of the isolation >10 MΩ at room temperature
ff. Each flow meter shall have BACnet over MSTP RS485 port to communicate on
the BMS network as field level device.
gg. BMS Monitoring software shall have the capability to process the Data from
the flow meters and develop various trend chart / tables as per the Engineer /
Operator / Client requirement.
2.11.3 Water Metering

a. The meters shall be static cold water meter, without moving parts incl. an
integrated radio unit. The flow measurement is based on the ultrasonic
measuring principle, to ensure optimum accuracy and long term stability. It
should be equipped with an internal M-BUS module / BACnet interface
based on OMS (Open Metering Standard), OMS 3, Security Profile A, Mode
5 or OMS 4, Security Profile B, Mode 7; OMS Version based on customer
requirement.
b. Design prevents sedimentation of dirt particles to reflectors, No

measurement of air, should be approved for rough and harsh conditions:
Humid, corrosive, sandy, heavy condensation, air blown salinity and
sandstorms.
25 00 00
c. The meter should be IP 68 approved (meter is waterproof & potted). The

ultrasonic water meter can be installed in any mounting position without
requiring any calming sections (Horizontal, vertical and inclined installation
without loss of accuracy). No manipulation with magnets should be
possible, Battery should be provided with a lifetime of up to 16 years.
d. Applicable Norms & Certificates:
• MID approval (LNE – 14586 rév 10) for T30 up to T90

• ISO 9001 & 14001
• ISO 17025 (certified test lab for meter testing and calibration)
• ISO 4064-1:2005
• OIML R49
• EN 14154
• IEC 60529 ‐ Degree of protection provided by enclosures (IP Code)
• IEC 61000 ‐ Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) – Electromagnetic
environmental classes E1 & E2
• Declaration of Conformity that all materials are according to the
requirements of UBA and DVGW W270
• Drinking Water Approval (German KTW and TVO)
• Drinking Water Approval ACS
• Water Meters Technical data:
• Water Temperature (Min. – Max): 0.1°C – 90°C
• Ambient Temperature: 0.1°C – 70°C
• Relative Humidity: 100%
• Ambient Storage Temperature Range: -20°C – 70°C (>35°C max. 4 weeks)
• Nominal pressure (PN): 16 bars
• Interfaces: Optical, Radio – 434 & 868 MHz, L-Bus-Radio, M-Bus, Pulse (M-BUS
& Pulse cable length 1.5m)
• Radio unit is integrated in the meter
• Pressure loss not greater than 0.63
• Environmental Class C
• Electromagnetical class E1 and E2
• Mechanical class M1
• Temperature Sensor for internal measurements (measuring water
temperature) and temperature sensor for ambient temperature
• Dynamic range up to R400
e. Each water meter shall have BACnet over MSTP RS485 port to communicate
on the BMS network as field level device.
f. BMS Monitoring software shall have the capability to process the Data from
the water meters and develop various trend chart / tables as per the
Engineer / Operator / Client requirement.
2.11.4 Electricity Metering

a. Electricity Kwh Meters are to be designed for up to eight tariff measuring of
active, reactive and apparent energy in one or two energy flow directions.
The meter measures consumed energy in three-phase four-wire networks for
direct or indirect connection.
b. Measuring and technical characteristics of the meter comply with the IEC
(International Electro technical Commission) 62052-11 and IEC 62053-21
international standards for electronic active energy meters, class 1 and 2,
25 00 00
and reactive energy meters, classes 2 or 3 in compliance with IEC 62053-23

as well as a standard for time switches IEC 62052-21.
c. Meters are designed and manufactured in compliance with the standards

and ISO 9001 (International Organization for Standardization).
d. Meter utilizes the DLMS (Device Language Message Specification)

communication protocol in compliance with the IEC 62056-46 standard as
well as IEC 62056-21.
e. The meter should be capable of reading power factor and total harmonic
distortion also.
f. The meters should be with the following common functional properties:

• Time-of-use measurement of active energy and maximum demand
• (In up to 8 tariffs)
• Load-profile registration,
• LCD (Liquid Crystal Display),
• Internal real-time clock,
• Two push buttons: Reset and Scroll button,
• Optical port (IEC 62056-21 standard) for local meter programming and data
downloading,
• P1 port for sending data to in-house display,
• Built-in RS485 communication interface for a remote two-way
communication,
• Two inputs (alarm input, external button input),
• Solid state relay output,
• 6A bi-stable relay output,
g. Integrated switching device at single-phase meters and external switching
device at
Three-phase meters for remote disconnection / reconnection of the
customer premises,
h. Remote connection and disconnection the energy supply of individual
customers,
i. External magnet field detector,
j. Meter cover and terminal cover opening detector.
k. Each Kwh meter shall have BACnet over MSTP RS485 port to communicate
on the BMS network as field level device.
l. BMS Monitoring software shall have the capability to process the Data from
the Kwh meters and develop various trend chart / tables as per the
Engineer / Operator / Client requirement.
2.11.5 Approved Energy Metering System Manufacturers:

Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following
or ‘Approved equal’.
• Diehl Metering (Germany)

• Iskraemeco (Slovania)
• Siemens (Germany)
2.12 BACnet Gateway:

Provide BACnet Gate way between various third party systems i.e. CBS System,
Lighting Control, GRMS, Fire Alarm Control Panel, CCU etc. and as shown on
layouts and drawings but not limited to.
25 00 00
BACnet Gateway shall communicate with the BACnet/ MSTP or BACnet / IP out put
on third panels & systems.
With BACnet Gateway interface, devices on the third party panels & systems shall
be represented as BACnet objects the BMS Client.
Each BACnet Gateway shall provide minimum 15000 objects. It shall be possible to
connect multiple BACnet gateways to the Main BMS Client software.
2.13 ROUTERS
A. Provide a router for each sub network to connect the floor level network to the
base building backbone level network. The router shall connect BACnet MS/TP
subnetworks to BACnet over Ethernet.
B. The router shall be capable of handling all of the BACnet BIBBs that are listed for the
controller that reside on the subnetwork.
2.14 CONTROL PANELS
A. Control Panels / Outstation Panels shall be provided for accommodating single or

multiple DDC Controllers as per the following specifications.
B. Control panels & DDC Controllers for life safety systems shall be UL Listed UL864 &
UUKL Certified.
C. Control Panels shall be located in ELV Rooms, Electrical Rooms & Mechanical
rooms.
D. Control panels shall be in NEMA 1 enclosures.
E. Mount on walls at an approved location or provide a free standing rack.
F. Panels shall be constructed of 16 gauge, furniture-quality steel, or extruded-

aluminum alloy, totally enclosed, with hinged doors and keyed lock and with ANSI
61 gray polyester-powder painted finish, UL listed. Provide common keying for all
panels.
G. Provide power supplies for control voltage power. Power supplies for controllers shall
be a transformer with a fuse or circuit breaker / Electronic Power supply with Fuse /
Circuit Breaker including Battery charger circuit and Battery Back up for critical
systems.
H. Dedicate 1 power supply to the DDC controller. Other devices shall be on a

separate power supply, unless the power for the control device is derived from the
controller terminatio
I. All power supplies for 24V low voltage wiring shall be class 2 rated and less than
100VA. If low voltage devices require more amps, then provide multiple power
supplies. If a single device requires more amps, then provide a dedicated power
supply in a separate enclosure and run a separate, non-class 2 conduit to the
device.
J. Surge transient protection shall be incorporated in design of system to protect

electrical components in all DDC Controllers and operator’s workstations.
25 00 00
K. All devices in a panel shall be permanently mounted, including network switches,

modems, media converters, etc.
L. Provide a pocket to hold documentation.
2.13 GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR DEVICES
A. Provide mounting hardware for all devices, including actuator linkages, wells,
installation kits for insertion devices, wall boxes and fudge plates, brackets, etc.
B. If a special tool is required to mount a device then 2nos of particular tool shall be
provided as part of final handing over.
2.14 SENSORS
A. Terminal Unit Space Thermostats

1. Each controller performing space temperature control shall be provided with
a matching room temperature sensor.
a. Plain Space Temperature Sensors – Wired: Where called for in the
sequences or on the drawings, provide sensors with plain covers.
b. The sensing element for the space temperature sensor shall be
thermistor type providing the following.
1) Element Accuracy: + /- 0.5°C
2) Operating Range: 12.5 to 35°C
3) Set Point Adjustment Range: 12.5 to 35°C
4) Calibration Adjustments: None required
5) Installation: Up to 100 ft. from controller
6) Auxiliary Communications Port: as required
7) Local LCD Temperature Display: as required
8) Setpoint Adjustment Dial : as required
9) Occupancy Override Switch as required
c. Auxiliary Communication Port. Each room temperature sensor shall
include a terminal jack integral to the sensor assembly. The terminal
jack shall be used to connect a portable operator's terminal to control
and monitor all hardware and software points associated with the
controller. RS-232 communications port shall allow the operator to query
and modify operating parameters of the local room terminal unit from
the portable operator’s terminal.
2. Digital Display temperature sensor specifications – Wired:

a. As called for in the sequences of operations or on the drawings,
provide temperature sensors with digital displays.
b. The sensing element for the space temperature sensor must be IC-
based and provide the following.
1) Digitally communicating with the Application Specific Controller.
2) Mountable to and fully covering a 2 x 4 electrical junction box
without the need for an adapter wall plate.
3) IC Element Accuracy: +/- 0.5°c
4) Operating Range: 12.5 to 35°C
5) Setpoint Adjustment Range: User limiting, selectable range
between 12.5 and 35°C
6) Display of temperature setpoint with numerical temperature
values
7) Display of temperature setpoint graphically, with a visual
25 00 00
Hotter/Colder setpoint indication

8) Calibration: Single point, field adjustable at the space sensor to
+/- 1°C
9) Installation: Up to 30m from controller
10) Auxiliary Communications Port: included
11) Local OLED Temperature Display: included
12) Display of Temperature to one decimal place
13) Temperature Setpoint Adjustment included
14) Occupancy Override Function included
c. Auxiliary Communication Port. Each room temperature sensor shall

include a terminal jack integral to the sensor assembly. The terminal
jack shall be used to connect a portable operator's terminal to control
and monitor all hardware and software points associated with the
controller. RS-232 communications port shall allow the operator to query
and modify operating parameters of the local room terminal unit from
the portable operator’s terminal.
3. Provide the following options as they are called for in the sequences or on the
drawings:
a. Set point Adjustment. The set point adjustment function shall allow for
modification of the temperature by the building operators. Set point
adjustment may be locked out, overridden, or limited as to time or
temperature through software by an authorized operator at any central
workstation, Building Controller, room sensor two-line display, or via the
portable operator's terminal.
b. Override Switch. An override button shall initiate override of the night
setback mode to normal (day) operation when activated by the
occupant and enabled by building operators. The override shall be
limited to two (2) hours (adjustable.) The override function may be
locked out, overridden, or limited through software by an authorized
operator at the operator interface, Building Controller, room sensor
two-line display or via the portable operator's terminal.
c. Space Combination Temperature and Humidity Sensors. Each controller
performing space temperature control shall be provided with a
matching room temperature sensor, which also includes the ability to
measure humidity for either monitoring or control purposes. The
combination temperature and humidity sensors shall have the same
appearance as the space temperature sensors. Humidity elements shall
measure relative humidity with a +/- 2% accuracy over the range of 10
to 90% relative humidity. Humidity element shall be an IC (integrated
circuit) sensing element. Humidity sensing elements shall be removable
and field replaceable if needed.
B. Temperature Sensors
1. All temperature sensors shall meet the following specifications:
a. Accuracy: Plus or minus 0.2 percent at calibration point.
b. Wire: Twisted, shielded-pair cable.
c. Vibration and corrosion resistant
2. Space temperature sensors shall meet the following specifications:
a. 10k ohm type 2 thermistors
3. Insertion Elements in Ducts shall meet the following specifications:
a. Single point 10k ohm thermistor
b. Use where not affected by temperature stratification
c. The sensor shall reach more that 1/3 the distance from the duct wall
25 00 00
d. Junction box for wire splices

4. Averaging Elements in Ducts shall meet the following specifications:
a. 1800 mm long
b. Flexible
c. Use where prone to temperature stratification, in front of coils, or where
ducts are larger than 0.75 sq. m.
d. Junction box for wire splices
5. Insertion Elements for Liquids shall meet the following specifications:
a. Platinum RTD with 4-20mA transmitter
b. Threaded mounting with matching well
c. Brass well with minimum insertion length of 65mm for pipes up to 10mm
diameter
d. Brass well with insertion length of 150mm for pipes up to 250mm
diameter
e. Junction box for wire splices
6. Outside-Air Sensors Platinum RTD with 4-20mA transmitter:
a. Watertight enclosure, shielded from direct sunlight
b. Circulation fan
c. Watertight conduit fitting
C. Where called for in the sequences of operations, provide the following feature on
space sensors and thermostats:
1. Security Sensors: Stainless-steel cover plate with insulated back and security
screws
2. Space sensors with setpoint adjust: Plain white plastic cover with slide
potentiometer to signal a setpoint adjustment to the DDC
3. Space Sensors with LCD display:
a. Operator buttons for adjusting setpoints, setting fans speeds and
overriding unit to on/off
b. Graphical LCD icons for signaling heating/cooling mode, fans speed,
schedule mode, actual temperature and current setpoint
D. Humidity Sensors shall meet the following specifications:

1. Bulk polymer sensor element
2. Accuracy: 2 percent full range with linear output
3. Room Sensors: With locking cover matching room thermostats, span of 0 to
100 percent relative humidity
4. Duct and Outside-Air Sensors: With element guard and mounting plate,
range of 0 to 100 percent relative humidity
E. Air Static Pressure Transmitter shall meet the following specifications:

1. Non-directional sensor with suitable range for expected input, and
temperature compensated.
2. Accuracy: 2 percent of full scale with repeatability of 0.5 percent.
3. Output: 4 to 20 mA.
4. Building Static-Pressure Range: 0 to 6mm of WC.
5. Duct Static-Pressure Range: 0 to 125 mm of WC.
F. Pressure Transmitters: Direct acting for gas, liquid, or steam service; range suitable
for system; proportional output 4 to 20 mA.
G. Equipment operation sensors as follows:

1. Status Inputs for Fans: Differential-pressure switch with adjustable range of 0
to 125 mm of WC
25 00 00
2. Status Inputs for Pumps: Differential-pressure switch piped across pump with
adjustable pressure-differential range of 5 to 42 m of WC.
3. Status Inputs for direct drive electric motors: Current-sensing relay with current
transformers, adjustable and sized for 175 percent of rated motor current.
4. Status inputs for belt drive electric motors: Current sensing transmitter with
linear 4- 20mA output
H. Electronic Valve/Damper Position indication: Visual scale indicating percent of

travel and 0 to 10 V dc, feedback signal.
I. Water-Flow Switches: Pressure-flow switches of bellows-actuated mercury or snap-

acting type, with appropriate scale range and differential adjustment, with
stainless-steel or bronze paddle. For chilled-water applications, provide vapor proof
type.
J. Air Differential Pressure Switches: Diaphragm type air differential pressure switches
with die cast aluminum housing, adjustable setpoint, minimum 5 amp switch rating
at 120VAC, SPDT switches, and the switch pressure range shall be suited for the
application. Provide Dwyer or equal. These switches shall be utilized for filter status.
K. Leak detectors: Provide spot leak detectors that can be secured to the floor or
secured to a drain pan. The detection shall used a microchip controlled energized
probes. The detector shall operate on 24Vor less. Provide a way to adjust the
height of the leak probes. The SPDT contacts shall be inside a watertight enclosure.
2.15 ELECTRO-MECHANICAL THERMOSTATS
A. Fire-Protection Thermostats: UL listed with fixed or adjustable settings to operate at

not less than 75 deg C above normal maximum operating temperature, with the
following:
1. Reset: Automatic with control circuit arranged to require manual reset at

central control panel, with pilot light and reset switch on panel labeled to
indicate operation.
B. Electric Low-Limit Duct Thermostat: Snap-acting, single-pole, single-throw, manual-

or automatic-reset switch that trips if temperature sensed across any 300 mm of
bulb length is equal to or below set point. Setpoint shall be adjustable.
1. Bulb Length: Minimum 6m.

2. Quantity: One thermostat for every 2-sq. m. of coil surface.
C. Electric space thermostats: Provide a charged element type stat with snap acting
SPDT switch.
The switch shall be rated for 16A or 1HP at 120V.
D. Aquastat: Provide a charged element type stat with snap acting SPDT switch. The
switch shall be rated for 16A or 1HP at 120V.
2.16 SMOKE DETECTORS
A. Provide a smoke detector for each unit above 1000 l/s. Turn it over to the
mechanical contractor for installation. Wire it to stop the fan upon sensing smoke.
25 00 00
2.17 AUTOMATIC CONTROL VALVES
A. General:
1. All automatic control valves shall be fully proportioning, unless specified
otherwise. The valves shall be quiet in operation and fail-safe in either
normally open or normally closed position in the event of control air failure.
All valves shall be capable of operating at varying rates of speed to
correspond to the exact dictates of the controllers and variable load
requirements. The valves shall be capable of operating in sequence with
other valves and/or dampers when required by the sequence of operation.
All control valves shall be sized by the control vendor and shall be
guaranteed to accommodate the flow rates as scheduled. All control valves
shall be suitable for the pressure conditions and shall close against the
differential pressures involved. Body pressure rating and connection type
construction shall conform to fitting and valve schedules. Control valve
operators shall be sized to close against a differential pressure equal to the
design pump heads plus 10 percent.
2. Cold water, hot water and steam valves, throttling type, and bypass valves
shall have equal percentage flow characteristics.
3. Unless otherwise specified, control valves 50mm and smaller shall have cast
iron or bronze bodies with screwed NPT connections.
4. Valves between 65mm and 100mm shall have cast iron bodies with flanged
connections.
5. All automatic control valves installed exposed to the elements shall be
provided with electric actuators with operating characteristics and
accessories as described in herein. Coordinate with electrical contractor for
power availability and point of connection.
6. All automatic control valves controlled by the BAS shall be furnished by the
controls contractor unless noted otherwise in these documents.
7. All automatic control valves shall be installed by the mechanical trade.
8. The controls contractor shall provide wiring as follows:
a. All line voltage power for electric valve actuators shall be wired by the
controls contractor from the nearest available power panel.
Coordinate with electrical trade.
b. All wiring between the central control system (ATC/BMS) and the valve
actuator shall be wired by the controls contractor.
c. All wiring between the valve actuator and their associated thermostats,
pressure switches, control devices, etc. shall be wired by the controls
contractor.
d. All wiring shall comply with code requirements. Segregate high and low
voltage wiring & circuits and segregate the FAS and controls (BMS)
terminals.
B. Hot Water / Condenser Water / Control Valves

1. Single-seated.
2. Fully proportioning with modulating plug or V-port inner valves.
3. Body pressure rating and connection type construction shall conform to fitting
and valve schedules. The ANSI rating of the valve shall match the ANSI rating
of the piping in which the valve is installed. Minimum ANSI rating shall be ANSI
125.
4. Stainless steel stems and trim.
5. Spring loaded Teflon packing
6. Quiet in operation.
7. Fail-safe in either normally open or normally closed position in the event of
25 00 00
power failure.
8. Capable of operating in sequence with other valves and/or dampers when
required by the sequence of operation.
9. Capable of operating at varying rates of speed to correspond to the exact
dictates of the controller and variable load requirements.
C. Differential Pressure Control Valves:

1. Provide for all water systems where modulating water flow conditions are
required to prevent excessive pump pressure build-up. Provide a valve for
each closed loop water system. Valve to be globe type. Provide valves
50mm and smaller with screwed end bodies and provide valves 65mm and
larger with flanged ends.
D. Butterfly Valves
1. Furnish automatic butterfly valves for isolation requirements as shown on the
drawings or required herein.
2. Butterfly valves shall have body ratings in accordance with the piping
specifications.
3. Valves that are in high static locations or where flanges are ANSI300 per the
piping design shall be high performance, fully lugged with carbon steel body
ANSI 300 as required by pipe specifications.
4. Valves that are in locations where ANSI150 flanges are allowed shall be ANSI
150 valves.
5. Valves shall be bubble tight with 316 stainless steel disc, stainless steel shaft
and reinforced Teflon seat.
6. Actuators shall be fail in place with factory mounted open and closed
position limit switches mounted.
7. Provide fail in place, electric actuators with waterproof enclosure and
crankcase heater for actuator and accessories mounted outside.
8. Provide manual override hand wheels for each valve.
9. Butterfly valves will only be approved for cooling tower bypass and all two-
position (open or close) applications.
10. Valves must have full lug type body connections.
E. Steam Valves:
1. Steam control valves shall be of linear flow characteristics for modulating

service.
2. Sizing Criteria:
a. 15 psig or less; pressure drop 80% of inlet psig.
b. 16 to 50 psig; pressure drop 50% of inlet psig.
c. Over 50 psig; pressure drop as scheduled on plans.
d. Steam valves shall fail normally open or closed, as scheduled on plans,
or as follows:
1) Heating coils in air handlers: normally open.

2) Steam to hot water heat exchanger: normally closed.
3) Other applications: as required by sequences of operation.
2.18 ELECTRONIC ACTUATOR SPECIFICATION
A. ELECTRONIC VALVE ACTUATORS

1. Actuator shall be fully modulating, floating (tri-state), two position, and/or
spring return as indicated in the control sequences. Specified fail safe
25 00 00
actuators shall require mechanical spring return.

2. Modulating valves shall be positive positioning, responding to a 2-10VDC or 4-
20mA signal. There shall be a visual valve position indicator.
3. The actuator shall have the capability of adding auxiliary switches or
feedback potentiometer if specified.
4. Actuator shall provide minimum torque required for proper valve close-off.
The actuator shall be designed with a current limiting motor protection. A
release button (clutch) or handle on the actuator shall be provided to allow
for manual override (except when actuator is spring return type).
5. Actuators shall be UL listed.
B. ELECTRONIC DAMPER ACTUATORS

1. Actuator shall be direct coupled (over the shaft), enabling it to be mounted
directly to the damper shaft without the need for connecting linkage. The
actuator-to-shaft clamp shall use a "V" bolt and "V" shaped, toothed cradle to
attach to the damper shaft for maximum holding strength. Single bolt or set
screw type fasteners are not acceptable.
2. Actuator shall have electronic overload or digital rotation sensing circuitry to
prevent damage to the actuator throughout the rotation of the actuator.
End switches to deactivate the actuator at the end of rotation or magnetic
clutch are not acceptable.
3. For power-failure/safety applications, a mechanical, spring return mechanism
shall be used.
4. Actuators with spring return mechanisms shall be capable of either clockwise
or counterclockwise spring return operation by simply changing the mounting
orientation.
5. Proportional actuators shall accept a 2-10VDC, 4-20mA signal, or be of the 2
point floating type and provide a 2-10VDC actuator position feedback signal.
6. All actuators shall have an external manual gear release (clutch) or manual
crank to aid in installation and for allowing manual positioning when the
actuator is not powered.
7. All actuators shall have an external direction of rotation switch to aid in
installation and to allow proper control response.
8. Actuators shall be provided with a factory-mounted 3-foot electrical cable
and conduit fitting to provide easy hook-up to an electrical junction box.
9. Actuators shall be listed under Underwriters Laboratories Standard 873 and
Canadian Standards Association. They must be manufactured under ISO
9001.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. The project plans shall be thoroughly examined for control device and equipment
locations.
Any discrepancies, conflicts, or omissions shall be reported to the
architect/engineer for resolution before rough-in work is started.
B. The contractor shall inspect the site to verify that equipment may be installed as
shown. Any discrepancies, conflicts, or omissions shall be reported to the engineer
for resolution before rough-in work is started.
C. The contractor shall examine the drawings and specifications for other parts of the
work. If head room or space conditions appear inadequate—or if any
25 00 00
discrepancies occur between the plans and the contractor’s work and the plans
and the work of others—the contractor shall report these discrepancies to the
engineer and shall obtain written instructions for any changes necessary to
accommodate the contractor’s work with the work of others.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Provide all relays, switches, sources of emergency and UPS battery back-up
electricity and all other auxiliaries, accessories and connections necessary to make
a complete operable system in accordance with the sequences specified. All field
wiring shall be by this contractor.
B. Install controls so that adjustments and calibrations can be readily made. Controls
are to be installed by the control equipment manufacturer.
C. Mount surface-mounted control devices on brackets to clear the final finished

surface on insulation.
D. Install equipment level and plumb.
E. Install control valves horizontally with the power unit up.
F. Unless otherwise noted, install wall mounted thermostats and humidistat 60” above
the floor measured to the center line of the instrument, or as otherwise directed by
the Architect.
F. Install averaging elements in ducts and plenums in horizontal crossing or zigzag

pattern.
H. Install outdoor sensors in perforated tube and sunshield.
I. Install damper motors on outside of duct in protected areas, not in locations

exposed to outdoor temperatures.
J. Install labels and nameplates on each control panel listing the name of the panel
referenced in the graphics and a list of equipment numbers served by that panel.
K. Furnish hydronic instrument wells, valves, and other accessories to the mechanical
contractor for installation.
L. Furnish automatic dampers to mechanical contractor for installation.
3.3 ELECTRICAL WIRING SCOPE
A. This contractor shall be responsible for power that is not shown on the electrical
drawings, to controls furnished by this contractor. If power circuits are shown on the
electrical drawings, this contractor shall continue the power run to the control
device. If power circuits are not shown, this contractor shall coordinate with the
electrical contractor to provide breakers at distribution panels for power to controls.
This contractor is then responsible for power from the distribution panel.
1. Coordinate panel locations. If enclosures for panels are shown on the
electrical drawings, furnish the enclosures according to the electrician’s
installation schedule.
B. This contractor shall not be responsible for power to control panels and control
devices that are furnished by others, unless it is part of the control interlock wiring.
25 00 00
C. Refer to Coordination section for what devices this contractor is responsible to

mount and which are turned over to others to mount.
D. This contractor shall be responsible for wiring of any control device that is furnished
as part of this section of specification.
E. Wiring for controls furnished by others:

1. Provide control wiring for HVAC controls furnished by others. Wiring may
include, but not limited to, interlocks, standalone thermostats, safeties and
remote control devices such as valves, sensors, etc.
F. Interlock wiring shall be run in separate conduits from BAS associated wiring.
G. Provide network wiring for equipment that is called to be integrated to the BAS.
3.4 ELECTRICAL WIRING AND CONNECTION INSTALLATION
A. All low voltage control wiring shall be class 2. Control wiring that is not class 2 shall
be run in separate conduits from class 2 wiring.
B. Floor level network wiring between terminal units can be combined with thermostat
and other low voltage wiring in the same conduit. All other network wiring shall be
in dedicated conduits.
G. All control and monitoring wiring for Fire-fighting, Smoke Management & Life Safety
system shall be with fire resistant PH120 Cable within conduits. Exposed areas shall
be with GI Conduits.
H. Install raceways, boxes, and cabinets according to Division 26 Section "Raceways

and Boxes."
I. Install building wire and cable according to Division 26 Section "Conductors and
Cables."
J. Installation shall meet the following requirements:

1. Conceal cable and conduit, except in mechanical rooms and areas where
other conduit and piping are exposed.
2. Install exposed cable in raceway or conduit.
3. Install concealed cable using plenum rated cable.
4. Bundle and harness multiconductor instrument cable in place of single cables
where several cables follow a common path.
5. Fasten flexible conductors, bridging cabinets and doors, along hinge side;
protect against abrasion. Tie and support conductors.
6. Number-code or color-code conductors for future identification and service
of control system, except local individual room control cables.
7. All wiring in lab areas shall be in conduit.
8. All unsupported risers shall be rigid steel conduit. Supported risers shall be
EMT.
K. Rigid conduit shall be steel, hot dip galvanized, threaded with couplings, ¾ inch
minimum size, manufactured in accordance with ANSI C-80-1. Electrical metallic
tubing (EMT) with compression fittings or intermediate metallic conduit (IMC) may
be used as conduit or raceway where permitted by the NEC.
25 00 00
L. Concealed control conduit and wiring shall be provided in all spaces except in the
Mechanical Equipment Rooms and in unfinished spaces. Install in parallel banks
with all changes in directions made at 90 degree angles.
M. Install conduit adjacent to machine to allow service and maintenance.
N. Connect manual-reset limit controls independent of manual-control switch

positions.
O. Automatic duct heater resets may be connected in interlock circuit of power

controllers.
P. Connect hand-off-auto selector switches to override automatic interlock controls

when switch is in hand position.
Q. Ground equipment.
3.5 COMMUNICATION WIRING
A. All cabling shall be installed in a neat and workmanlike manner. Follow

manufacturer’s installation recommendations for all communication cabling.
B. Do not install communication wiring in raceway and enclosures containing Class 1
wiring.
C. Maximum pulling, tension, and bend radius for cable installation, as specified by the
cable manufacturer, shall not be exceeded during installation.
D. Contractor shall verify the integrity of the entire network following the cable
installation. Use appropriate test measures for each particular cable.
E. Cable bundling:
1. RS485 cabling run open air in accessible areas can be bundled with other
class 2 low voltage cabling.
2. RS485 cabling run between terminal units in conduits above ceilings or under
floors or in inaccessible areas can be bundled with other class 2 low voltage
cabling.
3. RS485 cabling run between floors shall be in a communication only conduit.
4. RS485 conduit run long distances between utility rooms or between buildings
shall be in a communication only conduit.
5. Ethernet cabling shall be in a communication only conduit.
6. Ethernet and RS485 can be run together.
7. Fiber optics can be run with Ethernet and RS485 cabling as long as the
conduit is bent to fiber optic standards and junction boxes are sized for fiber
optic use.
F. RS485 Cabling
1. RS485 cabling shall be used for BACnet MS/TP networks.
2. RS485 shall use low capacitance, 20-24 gauge, twisted shielded pair.
3. The shields shall be tied together at each device.
4. The shield shall be grounded at one end only and capped at the other end.
5. Provide end of line (EOL) termination devices at each end of the RS485
network or subnetwork run, to match the impedance of the cable, 100 to
120ohm.
G. Ethernet Cabling
1. Ethernet shall not be run with any Class 1 or low voltage Class 2 wiring.
25 00 00
2. Ethernet Data point requirements shall be coordinated with ICT Contractor of

the project.
H. When a cable enters or exits a building, a lightning arrestor must be installed

between the lines and ground. The lighting arrestor shall be installed according to
the manufacturer’s instructions.
I. All runs of communication wiring shall be unspliced length when that length is
commercially available.
J. All communication wiring shall be labeled to indicate origination and destination
data.
K. Grounding of coaxial cable shall be in accordance with NEC regulations article on

“Communications Circuits, Cable, and Protector Grounding.”
3.6 IDENTIFICATION
A. Permanent warning labels shall be affixed to all equipment that can be

automatically started by the DDC system.
1. Labels shall use white lettering (12-point type or larger) on a red background.
2. Warning labels shall read as follows: C A U T I O N This equipment is operating
under automatic control and may start or stop at any time without warning.
Switch disconnect to “Off” position before servicing.
B. Permanent warning labels shall be affixed to all motor starters and all control panels
that are connected to multiple power sources utilizing separate disconnects.
1. Labels shall use white lettering (12-point type or larger) on a red background.
2. Warning labels shall read as follows: C A U T I O N This equipment is fed from
more than one power source with separate disconnects. Disconnect all power
sources before servicing.

inspect field-assembled components and equipment installation, including piping
and electrical connections. Report results in writing.
confirm proper unit operation. Remove malfunctioning units, replace with
new units, and retest.
controls and equipment, and retest.
3. Calibration test controllers by disconnecting input sensors and stimulating
operation with compatible signal generator.
B. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup service.
C. Replace damaged or malfunctioning controls and equipment.
1. Start, test, and adjust control systems.

2. Demonstrate compliance with requirements, including calibration and
testing, and control sequences.
3. Adjust, calibrate, and fine tune circuits and equipment to achieve sequence
of operation specified.
25 00 00
3.8 SYSTEM CHECKOUT AND STARTUP
A. Inspect each termination in the MER control panels and devices to make sure all
wires are connected according to the wiring diagrams and all termination are tight.
B. After the controls devices and panels are installed and power is available to the
controls, perform a static checkout of all the points, including the following:
1. Inspect the setup and reading on each temperature sensor against a
thermometer to verify its accuracy.
2. Inspect the setup and reading on each humidity sensor against a hygrometer
to verify its accuracy.
3. Inspect the reading on each CO2 sensor using a calibration kit to verify the
sensor range accuracy matches the DDC setup.
4. Inspect the reading of each status switch to verify the DDC reads the open
and close correctly.
5. Command each relay to open and close to verify its operation.
6. Command each 2-position damper actuator to open and close to verify
operation.
7. Command each 2-position valve to open and close to verify operation.
8. Ramp each modulating actuator to 0%, 25%, 50%, 75% and 100% to verify its
operation.
9. Ramp each modulating output signal, such as a VFD speed, to verify its
operation.
10. Test each safety device with a real life simulation, for instance check freeze
stats with ice water, water detectors with water, etc.
C. Document that each point was verified and operating correctly. Correct each
failed point before proceeding to the dynamic startup.
D. Verify that each DDC controller communicates on its respective network correctly.
E. After all of the points are verified, and power is available to the mechanical system,
coordinate a startup of each system with the mechanical contractor. Include the
following tests:
1. Start systems from DDC.
2. Verify that each setpoint can be met by the system.
3. Change setpoints and verify system response.
4. Change sensor readings to verify system response.
5. Test safety shutdowns.
6. Verify time delays.
7. Verify mode changes.
8. Adjust filter switches and current switches for proper reactions.
9. Adjust proportional bands and integration times to stabilize control loops.
F. Perform all program changes and debugging of the system for a fully operational
system.
G. Verify that all graphics at the operator workstations correspond to the systems as
installed. Verify that the points on the screens appear and react properly. Verify
that all adjustable setpoints and manual commands operate from the operator
workstations.
H. After the sequence of operation is verified, setup the trends that are listed in the
sequence of operations for logging and archiving for the commissioning
procedure.
25 00 00
3.9 SYSTEM COMMISSIONING, DEMONSTRATION AND TURNOVER
A. The BAS Contractor shall prepare and submit for approval a complete acceptance
test procedure including submittal data relevant to point index, functions,
sequence, inter-locks, and associated parameters, and other pertinent information
for the operating system. Prior to acceptance of the BAS by the Owner and
Engineer, the BAS contractor shall completely test the BAS using the approved test
procedure.
B. After the BAS contractor has completed the tests and certified the BAS is 100%
complete, the Engineer shall be requested, in writing, to approve the satisfactory
operation of the system, subsystems and accessories. The BAS contractor shall
submit Maintenance and Operating manuals at this time for approval. An
acceptance test in the presence of the Engineer and Owner's representative shall
be performed. The Engineer/Owner/Operator will then shake down the system for a
fixed period of time (30 days).
C. The BAS contractor shall fix punch list items within 30 days of acceptance.
D. When the system performance is deemed satisfactory in whole or in part by these

observers, the system parts will be accepted for beneficial use and placed under
warranty.
3.10 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
A. Project Record Documents: Submit copies of record (as-built) documents upon

completion of installation. Submittal shall consist of:
1. Project Record Drawings. As-built versions of the submittal shop drawings
provided as AutoCAD compatible files in electronic format and as A1 prints.
2. Testing and Commissioning Reports and Checklists. Completed versions of
reports, checklists, and trend logs used to meet requirements in the Control
System Demonstration and Acceptance section of this specification.
3. Operation and Maintenance (O & M) Manual.
a. As-built versions of the submittal product data.
b. Names, addresses, and 24-hour telephone numbers of installing
contractors and service representatives for equipment and control
systems.
c. Operator’s Manual with procedures for operating control systems,
logging on and off, handling alarms, producing point reports, trending
data, overriding computer control, and changing setpoints and
variables.
d. Programming manual or set of manuals with description of
programming language and of statements for algorithms and
calculations used, of point database creation and modification, of
program creation and modification, and of editor use.
e. Engineering, installation, and maintenance manual or set of manuals
that explains how to design and install new points, panels, and other
hardware; how to perform preventive maintenance and calibration;
how to debug hardware problems; and how to repair or replace
hardware.
f. Documentation of all programs created using custom programming
language, including setpoints, tuning parameters, and object
database.
25 00 00
g. Graphic files, programs, and database on electronic media.

h. List of recommended spare parts with part numbers and suppliers.
i. Complete original-issue documentation, installation, and maintenance
information for furnished third-party hardware, including computer
equipment and sensors.
j. Complete original original-issue copies of furnished software, including
operating systems, custom programming language, operator
workstation software, and graphics software.
k. Licenses, guarantees, and warranty documents for equipment and
systems.
B. Operating manual to serve as training and reference manual for all aspects of day-
to-day operation of the system. As a minimum include the following:
1. Sequence of operation for automatic and manual operating modes for all
building systems. The sequences shall cross-reference the system point names.
2. Description of manual override operation of all control points in system.
3. BMS system manufacturers complete operating manuals.
C. Provide maintenance manual to serve as training and reference manual for all
aspects of day-to- day maintenance and major system repairs. As a minimum
include the following:
1. Complete as-built installation drawings for each building system.
2. Overall system electrical power supply schematic indicating source of
electrical power for each system component. Indicate all battery backup
provisions.
3. Photographs and/or drawings showing installation details and locations of
equipment.
4. Routine preventive maintenance procedures, corrective diagnostics
troubleshooting procedures, and calibration procedures.
5. Parts list with manufacturer's catalog numbers and ordering information.
6. Lists of ordinary and special tools, operating materials supplies and test
equipment recommended for operation and servicing.
7. Manufacturer's operation, set-up, maintenance and catalog literature for
each piece of equipment.
8. Maintenance and repair instructions.
9. Recommended spare parts.
D. Provide Programming Manual to serve as training and reference manual for all
aspects of system programming. As a minimum include the following:
1. Complete programming manuals, and reference guides.
2. Details of any custom software packages and compilers supplied with system.
3. Information and access required for independent programming of system.
3.11 TRAINING
A. During System commissioning and at such time as acceptable performance of the

Building Automation System hardware and software has been established, the BAS
contractor shall provide on-site operator instruction to the Engineer /Owner /
Operator's operating personnel. Operator instruction during normal working hours
shall be performed by a competent building automation contractor representative
familiar with the Building Automation System's software, hardware and accessories.
B. At a time mutually agreed upon, during System commissioning as stated above, the
BAS contractor shall give 16-hours of onsite training on the operation of all BAS
25 00 00
equipment. Describe its intended use with respect to the programmed functions
specified. Operator orientation of the automation system shall include, but not be
limited to:
1. Explanation of drawings and operator’s maintenance manuals.
2. Walk-through of the job to locate all control components.
3. Operator workstation and peripherals.
4. DDC Controller and ASC operation/sequence.
5. Operator control functions including scheduling, alarming, and trending.
6. Explanation of adjustment, calibration and replacement procedures.
C. Additional 8-hours of training shall be given after the 30 day shakedown period.
D. Since the Engineer/Owner/Operator may require personnel to have more

comprehensive understanding of the hardware and software, additional training
must be available from the Contractor. If the Engineer/Owner/Operator requires
such training, it will be contracted at a later date. Provide description of available
local and factory customer training. Provide costs associated with performing
training at an off-site classroom facility and detail what is included in the
manufacturer’s standard pricing such as transportation, meals, etc.
END OF 25 00 00
25 00 00
26 01 00 - Operation & Maintenance of Electrical Systems
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1.1 The works covered by this specification to supply, install, test, commission and
maintenance during defects liability period of the whole of the electrical installation
detailed within the Electrical specifications, Hotel operators guidelines, and also as
indicated on the drawings.
Contractor shall comply with all information as explained in Operator’s Completion and
Handover Requirements as detailed in the annexure of the Project Requirement Manual.
Without restricting the generality of the above, the following specific items of work are
included.
1.1.2 The Contractors Scope of Work includes following items of work including necessary
liaison with EDD to arrange permanent power supply to the project in line with approved
project programme.
1.1.3 11 KV Switchgear, RMU, 11KV/0.4 KV Distribution Transformers and associated HV cabling

complete.
1.1.4 Electrical Panels, distribution boards, cabling and wiring.
1.1.5 External Lighting Installation complete.
1.1.6 Internal Lighting Installation complete.
1.1.7 Complete small power installation, socket outlets etc.
1.1.8 Power supply to all HVAC systems and all other mechanical services and equipments.
1.1.9 Earthing and lightning protection system complete.
1.1.10 Complete system, including cabling, power supply for the Fire alarm system in
accordance with spec ref: 283100.
1.1.11 Cable Containment system, including conduit and draw wire including junction box to
be provided for all ELV systems like ICT,Tel/Data,CCTV/Access control system,GRMS etc.
1.2 Codes and standards
1.2.1 All works under this Contract shall be executed strictly in the manner set out in these
Specifications.
1.2.2 All work shall conform to the best principles of modern practice and shall be carried out
by competent tradesmen of appropriate grades.
1.2.3 The whole of the work shall be carried out in strict accordance with the latest applicable
standards and codes of practice.
26 01 00
ELECTRICAL - REV. C Page 1 of 16
1.2.4 British Standards Specification and Codes of Practice.
1.2.5 The Regulations for the Electrical Equipment of buildings (current edition with
amendments) issued by the Institution of Electrical Engineers, London (BS 7671).
1.2.6 The current Regulations and Requirements of the Electricity Distribution Directorate,
Electricity & Water Authority, Kingdom of Bahrain.
1.2.7 Where the requirements of any such regulations conflict with the requirements of this
specification, the Contractor shall refer to the Engineer before putting that section of
work in hand.
1.3 System voltage

The definitions of voltage in this Specification shall be as follows (R.M.S. values for AC):
1.3.1 Extra Low

Normally not exceeding 50 volts AC between conductors and not exceeding 50 volts AC
between any conductor and earth.
1.3.2 Low
Normally exceeding extra-low voltage but not exceeding 1000V AC between
conductors, or 600V AC between any conductor and earth.
1.3.3 Medium/High
Normally 11KV, AC and above.
1.4 Quality Assurance/Quality Control (QA/QC)
1.4.1 Contractors responsibilities

1. The Contractor shall note that the Electrical drawings are generally diagrammatic and are
not intended to show the exact physical location or configuration of work except where
actual dimensions are indicated.
2. The Specifications and tender drawings shall be read together and the tenderer shall,
before submitting his tender, draw the Engineers attention to any discrepancies which, in
his opinion, may be unsuitable, undesirable or inconsistent with his guarantees and
responsibilities under the Contract, verification must be obtained before sending in the
tender. NO EXTRA PAYMENT WILL BE ALLOWED FOR ANY EXTRA WORK CAUSED BY ANY
DISCREPANCY OR MISUNDERSTANDING.
3. The tender drawings are prepared essentially so that, in conjunction with the specification,
a correct engineering interpretation may be put on the design scheme for the works and
an estimate of cost prepared.
4. Where the drawings are to a small scale and/or are expressed in symbolic terms or are in
the form of a diagram then indication of the exact location and details of conduits,
cables or other components shall not be inferred.
5. Such work shall be installed to clear all obstructions, permit proper clearances for the work
of other trades, and present an orderly appearance where exposed and allow easy
maintenance of the installation in future.
6. The Contractor immediately on receipt of order, shall take steps to acquaint himself with
the general construction especially with precast hollow core slab, piling/ foundation work
and details of the work of other trades on site, in particular the air conditioning and
plumbing contractors, in order to ensure that these works will not in any way hinder or
obstruct the electrical work as planned and specified.
26 01 00
7. The Contractor shall supply all superintendence and labour, skilled and unskilled,
necessary to carry out the works in the best possible manner. The Contractor must have a
minimum of five years experience in executing similar installations and having a proven
track record.
8. The Contractor shall keep a team of competent Engineers and Foreman/supervisors on
site at all working times throughout the course of the Electrical Works. Engineer and
supervisor/Foreman assigned for the project shall be fully conversant with the details of the
installation and shall be licensed by local Electricity Distribution Directorate and shall have
such competence and responsibility as to enable him to accept and carry out instructions
from the Engineer when necessary.
1.4.2 The Contractor, prior to the commencement of the Works, shall submit for the Supervision
Consultant’s approval comprehensive QA/QC programme for the installation which shall
include, but not be limited to the following:-
1. QA/QC programme of the manufacturing process of equipment.
2. Method statement of all site erection/installation works.
3. Method of protection for material/equipment during delivery, and stored on and off the
site.
4. Testing and commissioning programmes, procedures, etc.
1.4.3 The QA/QC programme and procedures shall generally be in conformance with the
guidelines of ISO 9000.
1.4.4 All work under this Contract shall be performed in a skilful and workmanlike manner and in
accordance with best workshop practice.
1.4.5 All components shall be easily accessible for maintenance/replacement.
1.4.7 All instrumentation and equipment required for inspection, testing and commissioning shall
be calibrated and maintained by the contractor. The contractor shall submit all valid
calibration records from manufacturer and/or recognized laboratories and testing
authorities before the use of such instrumentation and equipment.
1.5 Submittals
1.5.1 Working drawings for approval

1. The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for approval five sets of working drawing within
four weeks of an order being placed in accordance with the approved drawing schedule
register.
2. The working drawings shall provide all such information for the works to be executed and
shall include full dimensions for locating all items of equipment, routes of cable, tray,
trunking, conduits, busbars etc. and shall take into account building restrictions and other
services. No part of the installation shall be installed until the working drawings have been
approved. The contractor shall submit separate drawings for each items of work as listed
under scope of work.
3. These services drawings shall be carefully co-ordinated with the General Contractor for
Architectural and Structural elements and all other services and trades. Each working
drawing shall be stamped "Co-ordinated with all other services", and signed by all other
service engineers and/or representatives. Working drawings shall be prepared generally to
scale of 1:50; however working drawings shall not be prepared to scale not less than the
corresponding layout drawings issued by the Employer. Enlarge plan/details shall be
submitted as and when required by Engineer.
4. The Contractor shall submit minimum four sets of approved working drawings for site and
office reference.
26 01 00
5. The Contractor shall be responsible for any omission, errors or any discrepancies in the
drawings and other particulars supplied by him or his suppliers, whether or not such
drawings or particulars have been commented upon by the Engineer. This responsibility
shall hold unless such omission, errors or discrepancies are due to inaccurate information
of particulars furnished in writing to the Contractor by the Engineer.
6. Builder's work drawings shall show fully dimensioned, all foundations, bases plinths,
sumps, holes and sleeves details required and the overall size and weights of the plant
concerned.
7. If abbreviations are employed for the designation of components, an integral schedule
shall be provided on the drawings to explain the meanings of the abbreviations.
1.5.2 As built record drawings

1. During the progress of the work, the Contractor shall record on drawings in an approved
manner, details and routes of cables and conduits and details of electrical services
exactly as installed on site.
2. Record drawings of underground cables shall give a complete description of cables, the
number and cross-sectional area of conductors and the exact positions of all cable
manholes and earth plates.
3. The Contractor shall give facilities to enable the Engineer to check the drawings as work
proceeds. Preparation of record drawings shall not be left until the completion of the
work.
4. Within a period of one month before practical completion of the work, the Contractor
shall submit the Engineer with three sets of "as installed" drawings for approval in a scale
not less than those submitted for the working drawings. After obtaining final approval of
"as installed” drawings, Contractor shall submit five sets of "as installed" drawings and five
sets of electronic version in CD-ROM in latest version of REVIT platform with LOD 500 with
representation in terms of size and shape,location,quantity,orientation,manufacturer’s
5. Schematic diagrams for lighting, power distribution and control schemes, fire alarm system
showing the type, size and manufacturer of equipment.
6. Arrangement of complete conduit and trunking installation for lighting, power, SMATV
system, Tel/Data system etc.
7. General arrangement of lighting and power points including the location and circuits of
lighting points, switches, socket outlets.
8. Schedule of light fittings, wiring accessories, panel boards, submain panels, D. Boards, Fire
Alarm System, etc. giving details of manufacturer's reference, catalogues numbers etc.
9. Schedule of Symbols (to BSS 108 where applicable).
10. All "as installed" drawings to be submitted in separate plastic folder bound in hard cover
files and electronic version in CD-ROM in REVIT platform with LOD 500 of each approved
as-built drawings.
1.5.3 Operating and maintenance manuals

1. The Contractor shall prepare and deliver to the Engineer three copies of an Operating
and Maintenance Manual for all systems detailed within this specification appertaining to
this project.
2. The Manual shall include all necessary information to enable a suitably qualified
electrician to strip down, repair, replace or maintain any component part of the
installation. Full setting up and operating instructions shall be included for all installed plant
along with manufacturer's recommended inspection procedure for same.
3. The manual shall include original catalogues/instruction manuals/circuit drawings from
manufacturer for all products used on the project.
4. The Manual shall also include a comprehensive list of spare parts for each and every
installed item of plant.
5. The Manual shall also include the contact address/details of relevant suppliers/
subcontractors.
26 01 00
6. The manual shall include warranties of electrical equipment.

7. In general, each manual shall consist, but not be limited to the following section:-
1. General
a. This section shall include the purpose of the manual and brief description of the manual
directory.
2. System Description
a. This section shall include the following as a minimum:-
1) Description of the overall system.
2) General operation of plant, starting up and shutting down procedures, location of each
equipment, normal and emergency operation of systems/equipment, control settings
and tolerances.
3) Size and capacity of all the major equipment and components of the system.
4) The proposed initial setting of protective devices and other adjustable components of
the system. Space shall be reserved for the insertion of final commissioned and
accepted settings.
5) Normal sequence of equipment and plant operation and alternative sequence to
maintain operation of part of the total facilities during abnormal circumstances.
3. Technical Specification
a. This section shall include the technical descriptions and functions of all equipment and
components and shall generally include :
1) Schedules of equipment showing quantities, locations, types, operating duties.
2) Technical description of all systems and equipment, including circuit diagrams of each
printed circuit board and component layout diagram for each printed circuit board
installed for this project.
3) Wiring diagrams.
4) Manufacturer’s drawings.
5) Equipment list, stating the make, model, serial number, accepted settings (after
commissioning).
6) Catalogues, certificates and performance data sheets for all equipment.
4. Maintenance
a. This section shall include the required operating and maintenance procedures of all the
equipment.
This shall include the following as a minimum:-
1) Inspection manual for all system/equipment;
2) Operation manual for all system/equipment;
3) Procedure of changing components of equipment requiring regular replacement;
4) Maintenance instructions, calibration procedures and fault finding instructions for all
systems;
5) Precautions when carrying out operation and maintenance procedures;
6) Storage and inventory systems; and
7) Procedures for system fault finding.
5. Safety
a. This section shall include the following as a minimum:-
1) Proper procedure of equipment operation;
2) General description of plant hazards, where appropriate, including the following:-
• Protection against electrical hazards
• Protection against mechanical and physical hazards
• Protection against fire and explosion hazards
• Protection against chemical hazards
• Protection during fuel and chemical handling
• First aid and accident reporting
26 01 00
6. Directory of Suppliers
a. This section shall list the name of suppliers and agents of each type of equipment,
materials and accessories. Correspondence address, telephone number, fax number,
pager number, and E-mail address shall be included.
7. List of Spares
a. This section shall list all the spares, consumable materials, and maintenance tools that will
be maintained and kept to ensure continued satisfactory operation of the equipment
and systems.
8. Organisation of Maintenance Team
a. This section shall include detailed organisation of the Maintenance team deployed for
the Defect liability Period with names and CV’s, of all key staff. Contact telephone or
pager numbers for emergency and/or twenty-four (24) hour call shall also be included.
9. List of As-Built Drawings
a. This section shall contain a full list of all “as-built” and “as-manufactured” drawings.
1.5.4 Packaging and storage on site

1. All apparatus shall be carefully packed for transport in such a manner that it is protected
against all climatic conditions. All openings shall be protected by means of a blank disc
bolted to each face.
2. Electrical equipment shall be sealed in non-hygroscopic bags with a liberal supply of
desiccant.
3. Packing generally should be designed to avoid corrosion and spoilage for a minimum of
12 months and non-deteriorating labels shall be fitted to each package giving
manufacturer's name and reference as shown in information books etc. supplied with the
Contract.
4. The cases shall preferably be of tongue and groove boarding marked with the Contract
number, details and dispatch address. Each case shall include a list of the items enclosed.
1.5.5 Corrosion:
The Contractor shall take care to prevent possible effects of corrosion to equipment or
inter-connection of dissimilar materials used in the installation, and between the materials
of the installation and other pieces of equipment of building fabric.
1.5.6 Painting:
1. The Contractor shall include for complete painting of all un-galvanized, galvanized metal
parts, preceded by complete removal of rust by cleaning and wire brushing and rust
proofing by use of an approved rust inhibitor.
2. Manufactured cable trays, trunkings etc. supporting and fixing materials shall be hot
dipped galvanized and to be painted as per Architect's requirements.
3. All purpose made site fabricated steel-work shall receive two coats of red oxide paint,
prior to final painting. Ensure all steel components such as studding, bolts and steel screws.
nuts and washers are either cadmium plated and passivated or zinc electroplated to BS
3382 after manufacture. Do not use metal fixing components likely to deteriorate and /or
cause damage through electrolytic action.
1.6 Builder's work

Unless otherwise specified in the Specification, the Main Contractor shall be responsible for
all cutting away holes and chases in brickwork, concrete or other building materials,
together with the lifting of floorboards and channeling of joists and the excavation of
trenches for outside runs of cable, together with all the subsequent making good, relaying
of boards, filling in and re-surfacing of trenches. In these circumstances, however, the
26 01 00
Contractor must always include for the drilling of steelwork where necessary for the fixing
for passage of conduits, etc. the coring for and fitting of all plugs, bolts, and other fixings,
the final trimming and adjustment for depth for accessory boxes and the supply and
laying of protective tiles. However, coordination of these activities shall be services
contractor’s responsibility.
1.6.1 Further, the Contractor must plan and set out his runs and give full details of his
requirements to the Main Contractor well in advance of his immediate needs especially
in precast hollow core slab.
1.6.2 All holes through walls, etc., must be cast as carefully as possible and made up solid after
completion. Holes through ceiling cornices must be bored from underneath to cause the
least disturbance.
1.6.3 Chases in plaster, brickwork and concrete must be sufficiently deep to give a minimum
6mm thick cover to all conduits and fastenings embedded. These works shall be neatly
executed, and be of minimum width to meet requirements.
1.6.4 Make provision in conduit, trunking etc at expansion and settlement joints to allow for
movement of building structure.
1.6.5 The cost of all unnecessary cutting away and making good occasioned by faulty
marking out and/or incorrect instructions being given by the Contractor shall be borne by
him.
1.6.6 The Contractor shall provide plant and equipment foundation drawings for items
supplied under this Contract and any other Builder's Work drawings necessary for the
correct and efficient execution of the work, with the selected and approved
manufacturer’s requirements. These drawings must be submitted for Engineers approval.
1.6.7 The Engineer reserves the right to reject or modify the location of any chases or holes
which may have a detrimental effect on the structure without incurring extra costs.
1.6.8 All openings made for cable trays, trunkings, conduits, ducts etc., in riser shaft, slabs, walls,
perimeter of fire compartments and such other places in the building shall be sealed with
fire proof materials in an approved manner and to the full satisfaction of Engineer and to
BS 7671.
1.7 Supports & brackets
1.7.1 Provide proprietary suspension systems comprising channel sections with return lips and
compatible fixing accessories made of materials to BS EN 10162, BS EN 10210 and/or
slotted angles to BS 4345.
1.7.2 The Contractor shall provide and install ancillary supporting steelwork, cable trays,
brackets, etc., necessary to support in accordance with best current practice, all cables,
conduits and trunking light fittings etc. This applies to all systems, whether such supports
are called for in the Specification, or shown on the drawings but excluding only those
cases where it is specifically stated that supports will be provided by others.
1.7.3 Fabricated brackets, etc., wherever possible shall be welded in preference to the use of
bolts. A 25% reserve margin in size and weight carrying capacity shall be made for any
traywork installed.
26 01 00
1.8 General Fixing:

1. Lightweight equipment and conduit saddles may be fixed to the building structure by
means of screws in approved plugs subject to approval.
2. Fixing to blockwork shall be made in the blocks and not in the cement bond. If it is not
possible to make all the fixings in the blockwork then the equipment shall be positioned to
enable the upper fixings to be made in the blockwork.
3. Woodscrews shall be the correct size for the equipment and rawlplug fixings used.
4. Woodscrews for external use shall be sheradised or solid brass.
5. Machine thread screws shall be solid brass except as otherwise specified. Heavy
equipment shall not be fixed by plugs or shot bolts without the written approval of the
Engineer. Approved purpose clamp brackets, ragbolts or patent fixing bolts such as
rawbolts shall be used.
6. The supply and fixing of all supports, brackets, clamps and spacers or any other steelwork
whether or not shown in detail on the Drawings or otherwise which may be required for
the proper and effective fixing of equipment, shall be considered to be included in the
material and labour for the supply and fixing of the equipment unless this work is
specifically detailed elsewhere.
7. The drilling, welding to or cutting of steelwork (structural or otherwise) shall be avoided. If
drilling, welding or cutting appears essential the Contractor must first obtain the approval
of the Engineer before such work is undertaken.
8. When trunking, trays, cable or conduits pass through walls, floors, partitions, ceilings, riser
shafts etc., the hole provided shall, after installation, be made good with cement or similar
incombustible material to the full thickness of the wall, floor, partition or ceiling.
1.9 Radio/TV Interference

All apparatus that would be likely to cause radio and/or television interference shall be
provided with an appropriate suppression device.
1.10 Power System Harmonics

For the purpose of this provision, “PIP” means the power supply interface point being
the terminals of the mechanical equipment power interfacing units at the point where
they connect to the electrical distribution system. The Contractor shall demonstrate the
installation carried out will be complying with current international and European
Community electrical immunity and emission standards. In order to ensure that the
consumer network does not elevate the harmonic content of the supply at the interface
with the EDD power system the Contractor must comply with each of the following :
1. The Contractor shall provide adequate measures including active harmonic filters to limit
the total harmonic distortion at the PIP to 5% for voltage and less than 12% for current for
all phases, in accordance with the requirements of the Institution of Electrical and
Electronic Engineers Standard IEEE 519. The Contractor shall take particular care in the
selection of equipment that may produce harmonics including without limitation
electronic ballasts, UPS, soft starters and variable speed drives, to ensure that these limits
are met at all times.
2. The Contractor shall ensure that the power factor at the PIP is equal to or better than 0.9
lagging.
3. The Sub-contractor shall complete the installation to meet all current international and
European Community emission standards for electrical interference for light commercial
buildings, including without limitation EN50082, IEC1547, CISPR11, CISPR15, CISPR16,
EN55015, EN55011, EN50081, EN60555, EN61000, IEC801, IEC1000 and EN61800
26 01 00
1.11 Spares:
1. The Contractor shall indicate separately price for supply of all spare parts and accessories
of a type and manufacture as supplied by, or approved by, the respective equipment
supplier/manufacturer recommended for not less than five years continuous operation,
under local climatic conditions.
2. A fully itemized list of the above spares shall be submitted for approval, to the Engineer,
with the returned tender bid.
3. All parts proposed must be strictly interchangeable and suitable for use in place of the
corresponding parts supplied with the electrical equipment.
4. They shall comply with the specification and must be suitably marked and numbered for
identification and prepared for storage by greasing or painting to prevent deterioration.
5. The Contractor shall keep sufficient spare parts during the Defect Notification Period to
ensure that replacement work for faulty parts or components can be carried out
immediately.
6. Any other requirement as detailed in the Project Requirements Manual (PRM).
1.12 Access to dangerous voltages:
The following precautions are to be incorporated by the Electrical Contractor throughout
the installation.
1.12.1 Any terminals which must normally remain live, such as the incoming terminals of main
switches, are to be shrouded such that accidental contact at any time is impossible.
1.12.2 All removable covers to switchgear, fuse boards, terminal boxes, etc. are to be bolted on
so that they cannot be opened by hand.
1.12.3 All such covers enclosing HV and/or LV terminals are to be labelled in block capitals, red
lettering on a white background:
"DANGER ===== VOLTS"
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 Materials
2.1.1 The Contractor shall ensure the following:

All materials shall be in accordance with the type and manufacturer described in the
Specification and/or shown on the Electrical Legend drawings.
Where the Contractor desires to use materials differing from those described he shall first
obtain the approval of the Engineer.
Materials shall comply fully with the appropriate British Standards Specification (BSS) unless
otherwise described in the Particular section of Specification and/or on the drawings.
The engineer reserves the right to inspect materials on site at reasonable times and to
reject any materials not complying with the Specification.
The cost of any dismantling and re-erection on the installation occasioned by the removal
of rejected materials shall be borne by the Contractor concerned.
The Contractor will be held entirely responsible for ensuring that all materials to be
imported arrive on Site in sufficient time to maintain the programme.
The Bills of Quantities shall NOT be used as a basis for ordering materials and the
Contractor is entirely responsible for assessing the quantities of materials to be ordered.
26 01 00
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 Permissions
The Contractor shall liaise with the local Electricity Distribution Directorate as necessary
and submit application for temporary and permanent power connections, obtain/pay
Capital Contribution bills, arrange for inspection/testing prior to connections etc. Also
Contractor shall liaise with EDD for the approval of parallel runs of cables, DB location,
Incomer Breaker ratings etc.
The Contractor shall follow up with Electricity Distribution Directorate as necessary to
ensure that the temporary and permanent power connections are established as per the
approved Construction Programme/Completion schedule.
The Contractor shall liaise with Telecommunication Regulatory Authority /other service
provider and obtain their approval for all shop drawings in respect of all necessary
provisions for telephone installation within the building prior to commencement of works.
3.2 Testing and commissioning:
Testing of Installations:
3.2.1 The whole of the installation shall be tested at both stages of completion (in the presence
of, and to the satisfaction of, the Engineer in the manner prescribed in Part 7 of the IET
Regulation as applicable to the particular installation concerned. The Contractor shall
submit the results of the test to the Engineer in duplicate, on a certificate of the type
described in the above Regulations or, alternatively complete test certificates supplied to
the Contractor by the Engineer.
The first stage of installation shall cover the establishment of complete temporary power
system and the final stage of installation shall cover the establishment of complete
permanent power system including the necessary change over from temporary to
permanent power supply required.
For all tests a minimum of 15 days notice in writing shall be given by the Contractor to the
Engineer to enable the tests to be witnessed, if considered necessary.
3.2.2 A pre-closing Inspection shall be carried out on all items of Electrical equipment, cables
and conduit to be permanently concealed i.e. underground cables and ducts, conduit
in screed or plastered into walls, above ceiling etc.
3.2.3 The Contractor shall provide the Engineer with 3 clear working days notice of his intention
to cover the works. Failure to comply with this requirement shall result in the re-exposure.
Engineer’s inspection and re-exposure of the works being carried out shall be at the
Contractor's expense.
3.2.4 Workmanship shall be checked during work in progress and completed work inspections.
Any work not to the satisfaction of the Engineer during such inspection shall be replaced
to a standard approved by the Engineer at the Contractor’s expense, and prior to any
subsequent inspection.
3.2.5 A complete written record shall be made by the Contractor of all inspections and tests.
These records shall be made at the time of the tests and shall be countersigned by the
Engineer, if present, as a true record. A copy of each record sheet shall be included with
the operation and maintenance manual. Inspection or approval of tests, acceptance of
test certificate and waiving of tests, by the Engineer, of any equipment, works or
installation shall not relieve the Contractor from the obligation to supply the complete
equipment and complete work and installations in accordance with the Project
Specification and suitable for the purpose intended.
26 01 00
3.2.6 Certificates of tests shall contain and shall be attached to them, the following
information:-
3.2.6.1 The job name and number as designated by the Engineer.
3.2.6.2 The name, address and contract or order number of the Contractor.
3.2.6.3 A description of the item, component, equipment, system or installation tested including
any fabrication, block or production number.
3.2.6.4 Date and time of test.
3.2.6.5 Environmental conditions including weather, if relevant.
3.2.6.6 The testing party (if other than the Contractor) and signature of the Engineer.
3.2.6.7 The properties to be tested and the source of the parameters for such properties, i.e. British
Standard, Codes of Practice, EWA Regulation, Specifications, etc.
3.2.6.8 The results of the tests and any divergence from the specification, production drawings or
statutory requirements.
3.2.7 The Contractor shall supply all necessary labour, apparatus and instruments necessary for
carrying out all tests. The Engineer or his representative shall be at liberty to demand the
use of any testing instruments or apparatus that he may consider necessary to carry out
the test.
3.2.8 The Contractor shall provide attendance during the commissioning of all plant and
apparatus connected under this Contract, whether or not the plant and apparatus was
supplied under this Contract. He shall also demonstrate the operation of all electrical
plant, apparatus and installations necessary under this Contract, and hand over full
operating and maintenance instructions.
3.2.9 The Contractor shall associate Employer's Staff and Engineer's representatives with his
commissioning crew during the demonstration.
Commissioning:
3.2.10 This section deals with the Contractor’s work involved in commissioning to energise the
electrical distribution systems, installations and plants after inspections and tests to ensure
safety and proper operation; and the evaluation of performance by means of further
inspection and tests to ensure the works operate in conformity with the design
specification.
Electrical systems to be commissioned include the following:
1. Consumer HV Switchgear
2. RMU
3. Distribution Transformers
4. 11 KV Cables
2. LV Main Panels, SMDB’s, Motor Control Centers
3. Distribution and Branch Circuit Panel boards.
4. LV Cabling and bus-bar system.
5. Lighting Fixtures and Controls.
6. Lightning Protection Systems.
9. Fire Alarm Equipment/Fire Alarm Equipment Monitoring System.
10. Earthing Systems.
12. Emergency Generators and Distribution System (Automatic transfer switches, fuel delivery
pumps and motors, battery charging and instrumentation, muffler and exhaust system,
and vibration isolation).
13. Uninterruptible Power Systems and UPS Power Distribution Systems.
15. Power Factor Correction System.
26 01 00
3.2.11 Commissioning works shall be carried out by the Contractor using trained, experienced
commissioning engineers or a third party commissioning Agency (Approved by the
Engineer). The commissioning engineer shall perform switching operations and also must
be in charge for the opening and closing of circuits, interlocks and safety devices as
applicable.
The requirement for commissioning shall be in accordance with the spec Ref 018113
Sustainable Design Requirement.
3.2.12 The Contractor in conjunction with the Engineer shall prepare a commissioning schedule.
This shall show a time scale and the extent of power or other services requirements for
setting the plant to work.
3.2.13 The following information shall be made available to the Engineer.

3.2.13.1 Specification of work.
3.2.13.2 Test certificates from works test at manufacturers.
3.2.13.3 Test results from site progress tests.
3.2.13.4 Notes from pre-commissioning meetings.
3.2.14 The method statement shall be submitted to the Engineer and get it approved at least 1
month before the commencement of commissioning tests.
3.2.15 After commissioning, the plant shall operate for the guarantee period as per the
requirements of the Project Documentation, from the date of practical completion
certificate issue in accordance with normal requirements without defect of any kind. Any
defect which appears shall be remedied forthwith by the Contractor without any cost to
the contract and reliability run shall start after re-commissioning. The guarantee period
shall be calculated from the latest date of such re-commissioning.
Copies of the single line diagram endorsed by the Contractor’s authorized personnel, shall
be framed behind glass or transparent plastic and mounted in a prominent position in the
corresponding switch rooms and plant rooms.
3.3 TRAINING
Submit a written training plan to the Owner and Engineer for review and approval.
Contractor’s training plan shall cover the following elements:

1. Equipment included in training.
2. Intended audience.
3. Location of training.
4. Objectives.
5. Subjects covered.
6. Duration of training on each subject.
7. Instructor for each subject.
8. Methods (classroom lecture, video, Site walk-through, actual operational demonstrations,
written handouts, etc.).
9. Instructors and qualifications.
Contractor shall have the following training responsibilities:
1. Provide a training plan ten (10) calendar days prior to the scheduled training.
2. Provide Owner/operator personnel with comprehensive training in the understanding of

the systems and the operation and maintenance of each major piece of commissioned
mechanical equipment or system.
26 01 00
3. Training shall start with classroom sessions, if necessary, followed by hands-on training on
each piece of equipment, which shall illustrate the various modes of operation, including
Start- up, shutdown, fire/smoke alarm, power failure, etc.
4. During any demonstration, should the system fail to perform in accordance with the
requirements of the O&M manual or sequence of operations, the system will be repaired
or adjusted as necessary and the demonstration repeated.
5. The appropriate trade or manufacturer's representative shall provide the instructions on

each major piece of equipment. This representative may be the Start-up technician for
the piece of equipment, the installing contractor, or manufacturer’s representative.
Practical building operating expertise as well as in-depth knowledge of all modes of
operation of the specific piece of equipment are required. More than one party may be
required to execute the training.
6. The training sessions shall follow the outline in the Table of Contents of the O&M manual
and illustrate whenever possible the use of the O&M manuals for reference.
7. Training shall include:

a. Usage of the printed installation, operation and maintenance instruction material included
in the O&M manuals.
b. Review of the written O&M instructions emphasizing safe and proper operating
requirements, preventative maintenance, special tools needed and spare parts
inventory suggestions. The training shall include Start-up, operation in all modes possible,
shutdown, seasonal changeover and any emergency procedures.
c. Discussion of relevant health and safety issues and concerns.
d. Discussion of warranties and guarantees.
e. Common troubleshooting problems and solutions.
f. Explanation of information included in the O&M manuals and the location of all plans and
manuals in the facility.
g. Discussion of any peculiarities of equipment installation or operation.
h. Hands-on training shall include Start-up, operation in all modes possible, including manual,
shutdown, and any emergency procedures and maintenance of all pieces of equipment.
8. Training shall occur after Functional Performance Tests are complete and shall be
scheduled with the Owner’s representative.
3.4 Defects Liability Period:
3.4.1 The Contractor shall maintain, replace, repair with utmost speed and at his own expense,
any part of the plant or material or work performed or furnished under the contract for
the permanent power supply system which may prove defective in design, erection,
operation, performance, workmanship or from any act of omission on the part of the
Contractor that may develop under the conditions provided for by the contract and
under proper use in the works or any section thereof within 24 months after the Taking
over certificate or that portion thereof, as the case may have been or has been taken
over by the Employer.
3.4.2 The Contractor shall maintain, replace, repair with utmost speed and at his own expense,
any part of the plant or material or work performed or furnished under the contract for
the temporary power supply system; which may prove defective in design, erection,
operation, performance, workmanship or from any act of omission on the part of the
Contractor that may develop under the conditions provided for by the contract and
26 01 00
under proper use in the works or any section thereof, until the permanent power supply
system is commissioned.
During the Defect liability Period, the Sub-contractor shall be responsible for the complete
comprehensive maintenance of the entire installation under the contract. All necessary
spare parts and consumable materials shall be deemed to be included.
3.4.3 The Contractor shall obtain and submit to the Engineer any guarantee or certificates of
warranty available from the manufacturers, but only as supplementary to the
Contractor's own guarantee and in no way invalidating them.
3.4.4 If any defect as above mentioned should occur, the Employer shall inform the
Contractor thereof, stating the nature of the defect and if the Contractor replaces or
renews any portion of the works, the provisions of this Clause shall apply to the portion of
the works so replaced or renewed as if that portion had been taken over on the date of
replacement or renewal.
3.4.5 If any defects are not remedied within a reasonable time, the Employer may proceed to
do the work at the Contractor's risk and expense.
3.4.6 If the replacement or renewals are of such a character as may affect the efficiency of
the works or any portion thereof, the Employer may, within one (1) month of such
replacement or renewal give to the Contractor notice in writing requiring that tests at site
be made, in which case, such tests shall be carried out as provided in details of tests
upon completion earlier in this section.
3.4.7 These Specifications shall apply to all inspections, adjustments, replacements and
renewals as well as to all tests associated thereby carried out by the Contractor pursuant
to the Clause.
3.4.8 The Contractor shall include for complete monthly routine maintenance checks of all
plant and equipment provided by him under the contract, throughout the whole defects
liability period to demonstrate that the operation of the completed system including the
automatic controls, interlocks and safety devices for the various plant and auxiliaries are
in satisfactory working order.
All required checks or tests shall be witnessed by the Employer's representative and the
Engineer’s representative. The Contractor shall prepare and fill-in the routine maintenance
service chart carried out and the name of the Engineer's representative witnessing the test
and shall submit same in duplicate to the Employer after every check.
A maintenance schedule setting out the proposed programme of maintenance,

inspection and servicing together with advice of arrangement of prompt attention to
emergency call shall be submitted to and approved by the Supervision Consultant before
the issue of Taking Over Certificate
3.4.9 Until the defects liability certificate have been issued, the Contractor shall have the right
of access at all reasonable working hours at his own risk and expense for himself and / or
his duly authorized representative whose name shall have been communicated
previously in writing to the Engineer, to all parts of the works for the purpose of the working
and performance thereof, for the purpose of inspecting the same and taking notes there
from. Subject to the approval of the Engineer which shall not be unreasonably withheld,
the Contractor may at his own risk and expense make any tests which he considers
desirable.
26 01 00
3.4.10 Before the termination of the defects liability Period, the Contractor shall upon the
request of the Engineer assume responsibility for dismantling of any part of the plant and
apparatus indicated by the Engineer.
If such dismantling, however, necessitates the interruption of service of the works, such
period of interruption shall not affect the extent of the Maintenance Period as provided for
in this Clause.
3.4.11 Application for the Defects liability Certificate shall be made by the Contractor at any
time after the Contractor has ceased to be under any obligation under "Defects Liability
Period" provided that if a Taking Over Certificate has been issued in respect of any
portion of the Works, the Contractor may apply for a separate Defects Liability certificate
in respect of each such portion at any time after the said obligation has ceased in
relation to such portion and provided also that, if by reason of the fact that it has
become necessary for the Contractor to replace or renew any portion of the Works, the
obligations of the Contractor under "Defects Liability Period" shall continue after the
period first therein mentioned, the right of the Contractor to apply for a Defects liability
Certificate in respect of the works or portion thereof other than the portion so replaced or
renewed shall not be affected by that fact and after the Contractor has ceased to be
under any obligation under "Defects liability period" in respect of the portions replaced or
renewed, he may apply for Final Completion Certificate in respect thereof.
The Contractor shall, at the same time, furnish the Engineer, with a copy of his application
for such Defects Liability Certificate.
A Defects Liability Certificate will be issued to the Contractor only after he has fulfilled his
obligations under the contract, and shall have delivered at site and handed to the
Engineer all spare parts, as per the contract.
3.4.12 Regular maintenance shall be carried out and emergency service shall be carried out on
a 24 hour call out basis.
3.4.13 Maintenance procedures shall be as appropriate to ensure the safe and proper
operation of all systems and shall be in accordance with current standard requirements
and local Authority regulations. Maintenance works shall not affect the operation of the
occupants within the building / development.
3.3.14 Routine maintenance shall be deemed to be the regular maintenance of equipment

and shall include not less than:
1. MV Main Switchboard Inspection (By EDD authorized person only).

2. Distribution Transformer Inspection (By EDD authorized person only).
2. Batteries and Charger Inspection on Current and Voltage Record, Monthly.
3. Busbar Trunking Inspection on Temperature, Quarterly.
4. Standby generator Inspection on Test Run, Monthly and changeover.
5. Sub main panelboard / Distribution Inspection on Tripping record and function of
instrument, Quarterly.
6. LV main and sub-main System Inspection on Tripping record and function of Instrument,
Quarterly.
7. Final sub-circuit Distribution System Inspection on Tripping record, Test trip of RCD and
function of Instrument, Quarterly.
8. Lit-on test of Emergency battery Luminaries, Monthly.
9. Lightning Protection System Inspection on no loose connection, Quarterly.
10. Lightning Protection System Resistance Testing, Yearly.
26 01 00
11. Earthing System Inspection on no loose connection, Quarterly.

12. Earthing System Resistance Testing, Yearly.
3.3.15 The last maintenance visit prior to the end of the Defect Notification Period shall be a
major visit for complete service and shall include the following:
1. All the test in Routine Maintenance.

2. Infrared thermoelectric Detection for all LV Main Switchboard, Busbar
3. Trunking and Generator ,UPS with specialist report .
4. Tripping Test to all circuit breaker and relay.
5. Full service to all the equipment to manufacturer’s recommendation
3.3.16 At the end of each maintenance visit, check list of items serviced shall be recorded, the
service book shall be signed and check list shall be submitted to the responsible person
representing the building owners. Within 7 days of the date of the service visit, a report
shall be forwarded together with a copy of the check list.
3.3.17 The Employer shall be advised of the proposed service programme for the last major visit
not less than 7 days prior to the date of the proposed last visit so that a representative may
be present to inspect and witness the maintenance works.
3.3.18 All materials/equipment’s supply & installed under this Contract shall be guaranteed for 2
years from date of practical completion unless specified otherwise elsewhere in this
document.
26 01 00
26 05 00 - Basic Materials & Methods
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 Cable Trunking
1.1.1 Metal trunking may be approved or specified for use in certain installations instead of
multiple conduit runs. Such trunking shall be heavy gauge type with minimum thickness
as follows:
Up to (50 x 50) mm : 1.2mm
Above (50 x 50) mm up to (150 x100) mm : 1.5mm
Above (150 x100) mm : 2.0mm
It shall be internally reinforced by cross stays in such manner that a distortion will not occur
during and after the installation of the cables. The internal free area of the trunking shall be
such that the quantity of specified cables shall not occupy more than 45% of the volume
and to meet this requirement, Contractor shall select the size of trunking as necessary. All
steel trunking shall be B.S. 4678 Part 1.
1.1.2 Unless otherwise specified, trunking runs shall be so arranged that the lid or cover plate is
always on the top side and not underneath. Cover plates shall be secured by turnbuckle
type arrangement. Covers held by self-tapping screws or spring tension will not normally
be accepted. Spring clips shall be provided at 500mm intervals to retain the cables in the
trunking. The electrical continuity of any trunking systems from end to end or from any
point of the system to the main earth connection shall not exceed a resistance value of
1/2 ohm. Copper links shall be provided at couplings to reduce the resistance to the
above value.
1.1.3 Lengths of trunking shall be connected by internally fixed rectangular coupling units of
sufficient width to provide a minimum bearing face of 25mm to which the lengths shall
be welded or bolted. Paint and/or enamel shall be scraped away between the coupler
and trunking to provide a good efficient earth continuity joint.
1.1.4 The lengths of lids shall be so arranged that the joint always coincides with the center of
the coupling unit.
1.1.5 Due allowance shall be made for expansion on long installed lengths of trunking.
1.1.6 The pieces and bends shall be formed with similar means of connection and the inner
radii shall be such that the cables will not be bent through a bend of less radius than that
prescribed in the BS 7671(IEE/IET) for the particular cables concerned.
Bends, tees and angles of similar gauge, type and finish as trunking body shall be from
same manufacturer of trunking.
1.1.7 Where a change in direction of a trunking run occurs, the deviation must be effected by
a purpose made unit manufactured on similar lines to the bends and tee pieces
described above, not by manipulation of the trunking.
1.1.8 Trunking shall be firmly attached to its associated equipment either by bolted flanges or
by hexagonal male bushes, couplings and compression washers, according to the
direction of run in relation to the equipment.
1.1.9 Where trunking does not terminate in equipment, the otherwise open end shall be
capped with a flanged cover suitably bolted in position.
26 05 00
1.1.10 Vertical runs of ducting exceeding 2m in length shall be fitted with pin racks or other
approved type of support to carry the weight of the cable.
1.1.11 Where trunking passes through walls and/or floors, that normally constitute a fire barrier in
a building, care should be taken to see that no orifice is left between the trunking and
the building structure through which fire might spread.
1.1.12 In addition a suitable barrier or incombustible material shall be provided and fitted inside
the trunking to prevent the passage of internal fire.
1.1.13 Electrical continuity shall be achieved by using copper link at each joint of entire trunking
run.
1.2 Steel conduits:
1.2.1 Where the installation of steel conduits is specified they shall be heavy gauge screwed,
welded and galvanized all to relevant British Standards.
1.2.2 No conduit less than 20mm diameter shall be used unless otherwise specified elsewhere.
1.2.3 The runs shall be so arranged that any condensed moisture can drain to the lowest point,
where a screwed plug shall be provided for the purpose of `draining off'.
1.2.4 Conduit runs shall be arranged in a neat and inconspicuous manner. Due consideration
shall be given to the other services and the Contractor shall ensure that his selected
routes will enable the necessary clearances to be obtained between the electrical and
other service lines.
Bends shall be made on a pipe bending machine fitted with formers of correct radii for
the particular conduit. Where bends and sets occur in multiple conduit runs they shall be
arranged symmetrically to present a uniform and neat arrangement.
1.2.5 Not more than two right angle bends will be allowed between draw-in boxes. All burrs
shall be removed from cut lengths.
1.2.6 Conduit systems concealed in walls, floors and roof slabs shall be so designed that the
wiring can be readily inserted after the whole of the conduit installation has been
erected and all wall, ceiling and floor finishes have been completed. All conduit chased
into walls shall be recessed sufficiently to permit a minimum thickness of 6mm of plaster or
other finish to be obtained.
1.2.7 Ceiling boxes for lighting fittings, etc., shall be brought flush with the ceiling plaster or
finish. Extension rings shall be provided where necessary to facilitate this. The boxes of
flush pattern switches and sockets, etc., shall be recessed into the wall structure until the
front edge is level both horizontally and with the finished surface of the plaster or other
wall covering.
1.2.8 Surface mounted conduits shall be secured at a maximum interval of 600mm (and
150mm on either side of any bend, lighting fitting or junction box, etc.) by means of
spacer bar / saddles where multiple runs occur. ‘Distance' saddles shall be used on
individual runs such as down drops to switches, plug points etc.
1.2.9 In no case shall the conduit be mounted directly on the surface of walls and ceilings. A
minimum spacing of 6mm to the back of the conduit to the supporting structure shall be
maintained.
26 05 00
1.2.10 The use of crumpets shall be restricted to the securing of conduits to floor slabs and in
chases pending plastering or other finishes. In roof voids and similar spaces where the
conduits pass across the ceiling beams, plain stamped saddles will be used.
1.2.11 Purpose made fixing clips and brackets may be necessary in buildings of special
construction or in industrial premises and the Contractor shall be deemed to be aware of
this at the time of tendering and to have included for the supply and fixing of the same.
1.2.12 Details of the proposed clips and/or brackets shall be submitted to the Engineer for
approval prior to the manufacture of same being commenced.
1.2.13 Holes shall not be drilled in any structural steelwork or pre-stressed concrete without first
obtaining the approval of the Engineer.
1.2.14 Conduits shall be terminated in accessories, fuse boards, and the like either by being
screwed into the tapped spout or holes where such is provided or by locking into
clearance holes by means of couplers and smoother bore hexagonal male bushes.
1.2.15 All conduit joints shall butt in solidly to boxes, couplings etc., with no exposed threads
except at running couplings.
1.2.16 Where surface type fuse boards are to be installed on a concealed conduit installation,
the conduits shall terminate in an adaptable box behind the fuse board. Where possible
an extra 20mm conduit shall be installed to a suitable termination point such as in a roof
void or services duct to allow for future extension.
1.2.17 Where the conduit system is left temporarily incomplete, all open ends shall be sealed by
means of a coupler and screwed plug. Steps shall be taken to prevent the ingress of
plaster into junction boxes.
1.2.18 Where the galvanizing has been damaged during the course of erection, it shall be
made good with aluminium on zinc paint immediately. All exposed threads shall be
similarly treated.
1.2.19 All boxes carrying lighting fittings, switches, sockets and other accessories shall be rigidly
and securely fixed independently of the saddles.
1.2.20 Sufficient draw-in boxes shall be installed to permit the rewiring of the installation and to
ensure that no box shall be installed in an inaccessible position. The Contractor shall
check all proposed positions with the Engineer before installation.
1.3 Plastic conduit:
1.3.1 Where plastic conduits are specified, it shall be high temperature, high impact, heavy
gauge PVC construction to BSEN 50086-1, BSEN 61386-1.
1.3.2 All exposed conduits installed inside buildings within ceiling voids shall be low smoke
flame retardant type.
1.3.3 All boxes, fittings and the like shall be secured to the conduit using a waterproof vinyl
solvent adhesive specifically designed for this purpose.
1.3.4 Adhesive shall be applied strictly in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions
taking care to prepare the items to be bonded in the specified manner.
26 05 00
1.3.5 All boxes shall be fitted with an earth terminal and a separate protective conductor sized
in accordance with the IEE Regulations shall be installed throughout the conduit system.
1.3.6 Where conduits are surface fixed, they shall be secured to the building fabric using bar
saddles fixed at centers not exceeding 600mm and 150mm on either side of each and
every bend and box.
1.3.7 Saddles shall be of a sliding fit around conduits to allow for movement due to expansion.
1.3.8 On straight runs, purpose made expansion couplings shall be installed at every 5 metres.
1.3.9 Where fittings and accessories are to be supported from plastic boxes, the maximum
suspension weight shall be limited to 3 kg.
1.3.10 Boxes subject to temperature in excess of 600C or used to support Tungsten luminaries
shall be manufactured from high temperature plastic such as Noryl or equal approved.
1.4 Flexible metallic conduit:
1.4.1 Flexible conduit shall be used for the final connection of the rigid conduit to the terminal
boxes of machines fitted with a means of drive adjustment and/or where vibration is likely
to occur.
1.4.2 Flexible conduit shall also be provided to semi-portable equipment such as cookers,
washers and similar machines where a limited amount of movement is required for
cleaning and maintenance purposes.
1.4.3 The above does not apply to small machines normally connected to socket outlets by
flexible cable.
1.4.4 Unless specified otherwise, the flexible conduit shall be galvanized and non-watertight
where normal conditions are anticipated, but the watertight class with PVC sheath shall
be used where exposed to the weather or where the conduit is likely to be splashed or
subjected to heavy moisture conditions.
1.4.5 In all instances the conduit shall be terminated in the approved type glands by being
screwed into same.
1.4.6 Flexible conduit will not be permitted in lieu of bends in the rigid conduit system.
1.5 Electrical Ducts:
UPVC Pipe ducts shall be installed in accordance with the configuration and methods
detailed in EWA (Electricity) standard drawing for road crossings and elsewhere as
described on the drawings.
Electrical Ducts used for Cables etc., shall be of the following types, as per EWA
Regulations & TRA standards and supplied by an approved manufacturer.
Material - High Impact Resistant PVC
Internal Diameter - 200 mm. Dia, 150mm Dia., 100mm
Dia., 75mm Dia., 50mm Dia., as specified
Minimum Wall thickness - 5.9 mm for 200 mm.Dia
- 3.6mm for 150mm Dia.,
26 05 00
For Telephone Cables - 90mm Dia., Ducts as per TRA Standards.

1.6 Cavity floor trunking:
The cavity floor trunking system shall comprise standard multi compartment return edge
cable trunking installed within the cavity floor space and shall be clear by a minimum of
28mm from the slab using top brackets or similar means.
The type and size of the cavity trunking floor system shall be in accordance with the
drawings.
1.6.1 The trunking and fittings shall be manufactured from prime hot dipped galvanized sheet
steel to BS: 2989 and in accordance with BS: 4678, BSEN 50085-2-2 and IEC 61084-2-2.
1.6.2 The body and covers of trunking shall be manufactured from 1.6mm thick sheet steel.
1.6.3 The covers/lids shall be fixed by means of quick release clips.
1.6.4 The vertical top of the trunking lid shall be pierced with 3 x 20/25mm knockouts at 1.0m
centers to allow connections to service outlet boxes using flexible conduits.
1.6.5 Flyovers shall be provided where a conduit connection to a remote service box is to be
made to maintain full segregation between knockout and compartments.
1.6.6 Header Boxes shall be provided to connect the trunking with the service outlet box.
1.6.7 Bends, offsets, tee pieces, gusset bends/tee pieces shall be purpose made, matching
with trunking.
1.6.8 The junction boxes shall be complete with die cast aluminium traps and trays, flanges for
securing box to trunking, locking screws and cross overs.
1.6.9 The service outlet units shall be manufactured from 1.6mm thick galvanized sheet steel,
with full 2.5mm hinged cover for complete access, earthed cover, reversible inner unit,
grommet, suitable for mounting on cavity floor by using suspension flanges.
1.6.10 Connections between the service boxes and the cavity floor trunking shall be made
using flexible steel conduits, the length of the conduits being limited to a maximum of 3
metres. In addition, an equipotential bonding conductor shall be supplied and installed
between each service outlet box and the cavity floor trunking.
1.6.11 The pedestal of the raised floor system shall be properly earthed at regular intervals.
1.7 Accessories:
1.7.1 Switch boxes, accessory boxes and the like shall be manufactured from Zintex coated
steel complete with purpose made conduit clamps.
1.7.2 Conduit shall be terminated in accessory boxes allowing for a minimum projection of
3mm within the box. Conduits shall be stripped from the cables in such a manner as to
ensure no damage occurs to the cables.
1.7.3 Boxes shall be sealed prior to casting or the application of plaster finish in such a manner
as to ensure against the ingress of slurry.
26 05 00
1.7.4 Where conduits are to be laid within insitu cast concrete, they shall be installed in the
middle third of the floor, tied to the reinforcement mats. Conduits shall be fully supported
along their length prior to pouring of concrete to avoid the risk of sagging and distortion.
Where switch drops are required down walls to be constructed after the casting of floor
slabs, they shall be run to the location of the switch drop and coiled within purpose made
protection box.
1.7.5 Where conduits are to be run in a screed they shall be installed direct to the structural
slab using purpose saddles. Holes shall be formed for ceiling boxes within the structural
slab and boxes shall be secured above these holes using purpose made hangers.
1.7.6 The Contractor shall include for having a representative in accordance during any
casting operation in order to ensure that conduits are not damaged or inadvertently
moved.
1.7.7 All conduit fitting shall be of similar materials and finish to the particular conduit being
used and comply with BSS 31 or BSS 4607 part 5 unless otherwise specified.
1.7.8 Elbows and tees, inspection or solid types will not normally be allowed, but where
conditions warrant the use of these fittings the Contractor shall apply to the Engineer for
permission to use same.
1.7.9 Standard circular boxes shall be used at lighting points unless otherwise specified.
1.7.10 Looping-in boxes used on concealed conduit systems shall be 'medium' pattern where
the floor slab thickness permits 900 bends to be obtained in the conduit.
1.7.11 Angle pattern looping-in boxes may be used where the slab thickness is limited.
1.7.12 Adaptable boxes shall be heavy gauge pattern and of ample size for the quantity of
conduits that are to be accommodated.
a) For conduits up to 20mm dia boxes shall be 50mm in depth.
b) For conduits up to 32mm dia boxes shall be 65mm in depth.
c) For conduits up to 50mm dia boxes shall be 100mm in depth.
1.7.13 Where inspection boxes occur in floor slabs a non-ferrous floor trap shall be installed over
the box. The aperture area of the trap shall be sufficient to enable the cover of the
inspection box to be easily removed. Trap covers shall be recessed or plain type to suit
the particular floor finish.
1.8 Cable trays
1.8.1 All cable trays shall be heavy duty, heavy gauge, perforated sheet steel, hot dipped
galvanized after manufacture and of min. 1.2mm thickness for cable trays up to 300 mm
and 1.5 mm thickness for cable trays exceeding 300 mm width. Tray for HV cables shall
be blind type and with cover.
1.8.2 All cable trays shall be of return flange (min. 50mm), heavy duty type.
1.8.3 The perforated cable trays & Ladders shall be formed using plain sheet steel hot dipped
galvanized to EN ISO 1461, unless otherwise specified for internal applications
corresponding to a zinc protection coating of 40 – 60 micron meter. For all external and
exposed installations the cable trays shall be deep galvanized corresponding to a zinc
protection coating of 80 micron meter.
26 05 00
1.8.4 Where trays are intended for external locations or in corrosive atmosphere, they shall be
coated liberally with an approved plasticated finish.
1.8.5 External application cable trays shall be with 2 mm thickness throughout the range
irrespective of the size
1.8.6 Cable trays shall be provided with tray covers for trays fixed on roof, plant rooms, etc.
Tray cover shall be heavy duty type on roof.
1.8.7 Trays shall be adequately supported on galvanized steel brackets such that there is no
perceptible sagging of the trays when all the cables are in position.
1.8.8 Galvanized mushroom-head steel roofing bolts and nuts shall be used to fix together
adjacent sections of cable tray and/or accessories along with HDG straight connector
assembly. The head of any fixing screw shall be presented to the surface of the tray on
which the cables are to be fixed. The straight connector assembly shall hold the
adjacent sections from inside the cable tray surface, supporting and strengthening the
return flange.
1.8.9 There must be complete earth continuity throughout the entire cable tray system in
accordance with the latest edition IEEE Regulations. All the necessary earth bonding is to
be provided on the system in accordance with these regulations.
1.8.10 Cable trays shall be adequately supported by electro-galvanised ‘U’ channel with
galvanised threaded rod for indoor suspended tray and hot-dipped galvanised for area
subject to weather. The supports shall be such that there is no perceptible sagging of the
trays when all the cables are in position.
1.8.11 Trays and bracketing shall be sized to allow for at least 30% spare capacity throughout
their length.
1.8.12 Factory formed purpose made bends, sets; tee pieces only shall be used.
1.8.13 Cables shall be secured to cable trays by means of proprietary forms of plastic cable
clips, saddles, straps and the like. All screws, bolts, nuts, etc., shall be rust proofed and
shall be cadmium plated or electolytically galvanized to BS-1706.
1.8.14 Precautions shall be taken to ensure against contact of dissimilar metals.
1.8.15 Where cable trays extend transversely through fire rated partitions and walls additional
protection in the form of fire-proof non-combustible barriers shall be provided in line with
the required fire rating as applicable. The gaps around the cables and cable trays shall
be sealed with intumescent materials packed in sacks to achieve fire separation; at all
walls/slabs crossings.
1.8.16 Every cable tray shall be marked at both ends at interval of 2 mtrs.
1.9 Wiring devices
All technical submissions shall be approved by the Engineer prior to the respective stages
of construction.
As a minimum requirement, the submission shall include the following:
1. Equipment catalogues submission with manufacturer’s data.
2. Sample submission should includes all wiring accessories.
1.9.1 Sockets and plugs:
26 05 00
All sockets and plugs shall be supplied and installed in accordance with the manufacture,
type, sizes and finish indicated in the specification or shown on the drawings and to meet
relevant Standards.
Each socket shall be supplied with a plug complete with a fuse where applicable. Where
13 Ampere sockets are installed for a specific appliance the associated plug shall be
fitted with a fuse or rating to suit the appliance concerned. Plugs not required for a
specific appliance shall be handed over as directed by the Engineer.
Sockets shall not be recessed into or mounted on skirting boards. In those situations where
low level sockets are required they shall be mounted to provide a minimum gap of 25mm
between the top of the skirting board and the underside of the cover plate.
In industrial and similar premises the sockets shall be mounted in accordance with the
specified instructions.
All socket outlets and plugs shall be supplied and installed in accordance with BS 1363,
4343 and EDD’s regulations Clauses 750 & 760.
All emergency sockets are to be supplied with pilot light and should be engraved with
letter ‘emergency’.
All sockets connected to UPS power should be supplied with pilot light, with ‘T’ shaped
earth pin OR a Red coloured face plate (Exact type to be finalized as per site
requirement) and should be engraved with letter ‘UPS’.
The wring accessory finishes shall be as given below unless otherwise mentioned.
1. FOH areas – As per ID
2. BOH areas – Matt Chrome
3. Plant rooms – Metal Clad
4. MEP plant rooms – Metal clad (surface)
5. Ceiling void spaces – Metal clad (surface)
6. Concealed within furniture – white plastic (flush)
7. Floor Boxes – White plastic (flush)
8. External/ Wet area – Weather Proof IP 65
1.9.2 Local operated lighting switches:
Lighting switches shall be of the types and sizes specified and unless otherwise stated, wall
mounted types shall be fixed at a height of 1.35m from the floor to the bottom edge of
the box or cover plate and 150mm distant from the edge of the architrave.
Where the operated `Pull' type ceiling switches are specified to be used at door positions
they shall be located on the ceiling in such a manner that the cord will hang free
approximately 75mm from any wall face and also be clear of the door movement. Where
this cannot be achieved the Engineer should be consulted.
The cords of all ceiling switches shall be in sufficient lengths (without joints) to reach a point
1.5m from floor level unless otherwise specified.
Where several switches on one phase are shown at one position a ganged box shall be
used, otherwise separate units or a `barrier' fitted to separate each phase.
Where several switches on different phases occur at one position each switch shall be
provided with an internal warning plate indicating the maximum voltage present.
The arrangements of switches in ganged boxes shall be similar in plan to the lighting points
which they control. Switches not so arranged shall be labelled in an approved manner to
indicate the circuits controlled.
All lighting switches shall comply with BS 3676 EDD Regulation & end users satisfaction.
1.9.3 Fused Connection Unit:

All fused connection units shall be double pole switched, rated at 13 Amp unless otherwise
specified, with fuse-links to BS 1362.
26 05 00
Units shall be of moulded ivory plastic, flush mounted, suitable for housing into galvanised
steel boxes to BS 4662 with conduit knockouts.
Fused connection units shall be of the same manufacture as 13 Amp socket outlets and of
matching appearance.
1.9.4 15 Amps Switched Socket Outlets:

15 Amp switched socket outlets shall be 3 pin round type to BS 546 shuttered, of a finished
similar to 13 Amp switched socket outlets and flush mounted in galvanised steel conduit
boxes to BS 4662 requirements.
1.9.5 Time Switches (If required):

Time switches shall be self-contained units suitable for mains operation. All units shall have
a self-starting synchronous motor with a single-pole fuse in the motor circuit, a 3-way
terminal block and a thirty-six (36) hours spring reserve complete with an automatic solar
dial.
When fitted, the solar dial shall be capable of switching ON at sunset and OFF at sunrise
throughout the year by control of a secondary calendar dial with month and day settings,
and the automatic switching time shall be adjustable.
Time switches shall be encased in a dust-tight metal casing have a hinged front cover with
a clear perspex window. The casing shall be effectively earthed.
A manual bypass switch shall be incorporated with the time switch to facilitate
maintenance of the latter.
1.9.6 Cooker Control Units:

Cooker Control Units shall be flush mounted conforming to BS 3676 having a double pole
AC switch rated at 45 amps complete with pilot indicating lamps and a self adhesive
plastic identification label mounted on a removable chassis contained within a steel box
finished aluminium stoved enamel provided with conduit knockouts and earthing
terminals. The cover plates shall be of the same finish as those specified for the lighting
switches.
Associated connector units shall be provided adjacent to the cooker units.
Wirings between the cooker control units and associated connector units shall be
provided in concealed conduits.
1.9.7 Water Heater Switches:

Water heater switches shall be flush mounted conforming to BS 3676 having double pole
AC switch rated at 20 amps fitted with pilot lamp and marked “water heater”. The cover
plates shall be of the same finish as those specified for the other switches. Associated
connector units shall be provided next to the water heater units.
1.10 Motors
Where the Contractor is required to supply and install electric motors either separately or
part of packaged equipment he shall ensure that they comply with all relevant Standards
and are totally suitable for the process intended and with the environmental conditions in
which they are to operate.
Where motors are to be supplied by others, the Contractor shall fully acquaint himself as to
their intended use and connect them accordingly.
Generally, all motors rated less than 1 KW shall be suitable for single phase operation
unless indicated otherwise.
26 05 00
Starting arrangements for motors up to 5.0 HP (3.75 KW) shall be direct on line and motors
above 3.75 KW shall have assisted start facilities.
Electric motors shall comply with B.S. 5000 and B.S. 2048 or with B.S. 5000 and B.S. 5000 Part
17 and EDD regulations as appropriate. All motors shall have insulation not lower than
Class F to withstand maximum temperature of 120 deg. C unless otherwise specified.
However for the chiller pump motors the insulation shall be Class C to withstand maximum
temperature of 130C and for special cases it shall be Class F. All motors shall be
continuously rated and shall be totally enclosed fan cooled type unless otherwise
indicated. For motors located outdoors, it shall be weatherproof with minimum IP 55
degree of protection. Each motor shall be adequately rated to drive the fan, pump
compressor, etc. under all normal conditions without being overloaded and overheated.
All motors larger than 2.5 KW output shall be three-phase, motors in excess of 3.75 KW and
up to 15 KW must be started Star-Delta. Slide rails shall be provided for the motors driving
through V-belt.
Motors which are automatically controlled shall be provided with a prominent label of
durable material bearing in clearly inscribed characters in both English and Arabic the
following legend:
DANGER THIS MOTOR IS AUTOMATICALLY CONTROLLED AND MAY START WITHOUT

WARNING. ISOLATE BEFORE INSPECTION.
All electric motor should fully comply with EDD’s regulations Section 6 (Clause 611) and
Section 8.
1.11 Motor starters and contactors
Motor starters and contactors shall conform to BSS 587:1957 and/or BSS 755:1956 and have
the following features:-
i) Fused control circuit.

ii) Inherent under voltage release.
iii) Magnetic or thermal overloads on starters only.
iv) Manual stop/start and/or remote control facility.
v) Integral isolators which shall be fully interlocked with the door of the enclosure and
shall be capable of breaking stalled motor current.
vi) In cases where MICC cables are used starters and contactors shall have surge
diverters connected across the coil.
The Contractor shall be responsible for setting all overloads and protective devices to the
recommended or specified values and the filling of dash-pots, starter tanks and similar
equipment with the recommended grade of insulating oil. He shall also ensure that the
direction of rotation of all motors is correct for the purpose concerned.
1.12 Local isolators
Unless otherwise stated, local isolators shall be supplied and installed adjacent to all items
of electrical plant where the distance from the plant and the origin of the installation
serving that plant is greater than 2.0 mtrs.
The Contractor shall supply and install all local isolators other than those specifically
detailed on the drawings as supplied by others. Isolators shall be rated to interrupt stall
load and shall be of the type and manufacture detailed on the drawings and with the
particular specification.
1.13 Fuses
All switchboards, fused switches, switch fuses, section boards and distribution fuse boards
shall be fully equipped including spare ways, with HRC cartridge fuse links to BSS 88 Type Q
26 05 00
ASTA certified, 440 volts, AC5 category, and of the ratings specified in the particular
specification, or on the drawings.
The Sub-Contractor shall, unless specified otherwise, supply and handover, in a metal box
to be mounted on the switchroom, the following spare fuses:
Switchboards, Fuse Switches, Switch Fuses and Section Boards - one full set of each size
used.
1.14 Fire seals
Reusable fire seals shall be provided for all walls/floor slabs/fire walls wherever rising cable
trays with power cables, cable trays, trunking systems, etc., with other service cables,
singular cables are penetrating the structure.
The fire seals shall provide same fire rating as that of wall/slab adjoining.
The fire seals shall remain flexible at normal ambient temperatures. Under fire conditions
the bags shall expand to form a durable, smoke resistant seal - the fillers fusing together to
maintain the seal after the bag is destroyed.
The fire seals shall be supported on an approved mesh support system to ensure integrity
for bags in floor penetrations which shall be fixed to the soffit around penetration. The
structural system shall be suitably designed and treated to have the same fire rating as the
adjoining slab.
26 05 00
26 05 19 - Low Voltage Electrical Power Conductors & Cables
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1.1 Provide, install, test and connect complete low voltage wiring cables and power cables
in conduits/trunking and cable trays all in accordance with the drawings, specifications
and as per relevant standards.
1.1.2 This section is to be read in conjunction with the following:

260526 Earthing System
262000 Services and Distribution Systems
262300 Low Voltage Switchgear
262600 Distribution Circuits
263213 Auto Diesel Generator Set
1.2.1 Workmanship and Materials

The installations throughout are to be of the best quality materials erected by skilled

All cable types shall be certified and marked in accordance with the British approvals
services for Electric Cables (BASEC) Regulations or the equivalent CENELEC harmonized
cable certification markings.
Except where otherwise specified all work is to conform to the relevant provisions of
appropriate British Standards and British Standards Codes of Practice currently applicable
including the following:
BS 7671 (IEE Regulations - 16th Edition)
EDD Electricity Regulations - Latest Edition.
The equipment shall be manufactured and conform to the following standards:
BSEN 50525
BS 6500
BS 6207
BS 5467
BS 6724
BS 7846
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 Description:
2.1.1 PVC INSULATED WIRING CABLES (450/750V GRADE):

PVC insulated cables intended for installation within conduit/trunking systems shall be
copper cored insulated with PVC compound applied by extrusion and manufactured in
accordance with BSS 6004. Cores shall be coloured as detailed within the latest IEE
Regulations. They shall be 450/750V grade.
2.1.2 XL LSF INSULATED WIRING CABLES (450/750V GRADE):

XL LSF insulated cables intended for installation within conduit/trunking systems shall be
copper cored insulated with LSF compound applied by extrusion and manufactured in
26 05 19
accordance with BS 7211. Cores shall be coloured as detailed within the latest IEE
Regulations. They shall be 450/750V grade.
2.1.3 PVC INSULATED PVC SHEATHED CABLES:

These cables shall be PVC insulated and sheathed to BSS 6004:1969 including latest
amendments. Where twin and multicore cables with integral protective conductors are to
be used the Contractor shall ensure that the size of the protective conductor is not less
than that specified for the circuit to be installed. Cable shall be copper conductor type
and shall be 600/1000V and 450/750V grade. The smallest size to be used shall be 1.5mm².
2.1.4 FLEXIBLE CORDS:

Flexible cords shall be PVC insulated to BSS 6500:1969, 250 volt grade. They shall be circular
finished with a PVC or polychloroprene sheath of the specified colour.
2.1.5 MINERAL INSULATED COPPER SHEATHED CABLES (MICS):

Those cables shall be high conductivity copper cored mineral insulated with copper
sheath and, where specified, PVC over sheath manufactured to BSS 6207 - Part 1. They
shall be light duty (600 volt grade) or heavy duty (1,000 volt grade) as specified. Where
these cables are to be used in the installation of fire detection circuits, they shall be tested
to IEC 321.
2.1.6 XLPE/SWA/PVC CABLES (600/1000V GRADE):

Armoured XLPE insulated multicore cables shall be manufactured in accordance with BSS
5467. They shall be XLPE insulated and bedded single wire armoured with PVC oversheath.
Single core cables are aluminium wire armoured.
All cables on a project shall be from one manufacturer.
2.1.7 XLPE/SWA/LSF CABLES (600/1000V GRADE):

Armoured XLPE insulated multicore cables shall be manufactured in accordance with BSS
6724. They shall be XLPE insulated and LSF bedded galvanized steel wire armoured with
LSF over sheath. Single core cables are aluminium wire armoured.
All cables on a project shall be from one manufacturer.
2.1.8 XLPE/MGT/LSF/SWA/LSF CU CABLES (600/1000V GRADE)

Armoured XLPE insulated multicore cables shall be manufactured in accordance with BS
7846.They shall be XLPE insulated with mica glass tape as fire resistant material and LSF
bedded galvanized steel wire armoured with LSF over sheath .The above type of cables
shall be used for feeders connected to Life safety systems.
2.2 Submittals:
2.2.1 Product Data

Submit manufacturer's specifications and technical data for all cables along with
manufacturer’s catalogue.
2.3 Manufacturers
Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following or
‘Approved equal’.
1. Dubai Cable Co. (DUCAB)

2. Oman Cables,(Oman)
26 05 19
3. Gulf Cable Co. (Kuwait)

4. National Cables (Sharjah)
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 Installation of cables
3.1.1 Cables laid direct in ground:

1. Cables shall be laid at a depth of not less than 600mm, below finished site levels and in
such a manner that cross overs are eliminated unless absolutely necessary and no
electrical or mechanical damage is sustained during the laying process. At road crossing
and entries to buildings, cables shall normally be drawn through PVC ducts with a min.
150mm thick concrete surround.
2. After the installation of cables, ducts shall be sealed with a hessian plug and "Densoplast".
Spare ducts shall be sealed by plugging with elmwood and "Densoplast".
3. All cables laid direct in the ground shall have interlocking cover tiles of hard burnt clay
covering them with engraved letters ÈLECTRIC CABLES' and shall be impressed into
Arabic.
4. Cable tiles shall be of the following sizes:

i) For one high-voltage cable plus one pilot or telephone cable 300mm x 175mm.
ii) For one high-voltage cable only 300mm x 150mm.
iii) For one medium voltage cable 250 mm x 110 mm.
1. All cables shall be separated by at least 50mm and have at least 250mm clearance from
gas and water mains.
2. The radii of bends shall not be less than those shown in Table 52C of the IEE Regulations.
3. Cable warning tape to be provided throughout length and shall be kept 150mm above
tiles in the trench.
4. Cables shall be anchored at gradients and snaked at all joint and junction boxes.
5. Concrete marker posts shall be erected at 60m intervals on straight runs and elsewhere
where the cables change direction to indicate the route of the cables. Lead identification
tags shall be fitted to all cables at intervals of 30m along the route length and at both
ends of ducts.
6. Cable trenches will be excavated and backfilled by the main contractor, but all marking
out of cable routes is the Contractor's responsibility. The Contractor must allow for
trimming the bottom of trenches level and laying a 75mm thick layer of fine washed sand
before laying the cables. After laying the cables, a further 75mm thick layer of fine
washed sand shall be placed in the trenches. Protective cover tiles shall then be laid in the
trench in line over the cables.
7. The backfilling of the trenches will then be completed by the Main Contractor.
8. This entire activity shall be coordinated by the Electrical Contractor.
9. When the routing of cables is not indicated on a drawing or described in the particular
specification, the Contractor shall submit details of his proposed routing to the Engineer for
approval prior to commencing the installation.
26 05 19
10. It is the Electrical Contractor's responsibility to assess the actual length of any cable unless
the Specification and/or drawing states that a given route length is to be allowed and to
make all necessary allowances for bends, rises and falls, connections, jointing, etc.
11. The Contractor shall be responsible for all off-loading and handling of cables, etc., on site,
and he shall ensure that cables are delivered on site on drums properly protected against
mechanical damage.
12. Cable shall not be laid in a frozen state.
3.1.2 Cables not buried underground:

1. Cables erected on walls or steelwork shall, so far as is practicable, be so supported that no
flexing can occur. In general cables shall be supported on cleats which clamp the cables
to prevent longitudinal movement. Designs of special multi-way racks shall be submitted
to the Engineer for approval before use.
2. Where multiple runs occur the cables shall be installed in such an order that cross overs
are eliminated unless absolutely necessary. Cables shall be kept clear of other service lines
or pipes. The spacing of support shall not exceed those shown in Table 11A of the IEE
Regulations.
3. In all cases cables shall be secured in the proper manner and joints and terminations shall
not be subjected to weight or strain.
4. Where cable trays are to be provided they shall be of the perforated type and of
sufficient strength and gauge for the subjected loading. They shall be supported at
sufficient intervals to ensure that no bending or buckling can take place.
5. Cables shall be laid side by side and the widths of the trays shall be sufficient for this to be
effected. Stacking of cables will not be permitted. This does not preclude the laying of
single core cables in ‘trefoil’ formation.
6. The Contractor shall take all reasonable precautions to ensure that the cables are not
subjected to excess heating from adjacent service lines, heater units or plants operating
at abnormal temperatures. Where these conditions are likely to be severe and cannot be
avoided, baffle of heat resistant material shall be removed from cables immediately they
emerge within buildings.
7. Cables rising from the ground shall be protected to a minimum height of 2m by means of
G.I. Pipe sleeves, or G.I. casing whichever is more appropriate for the particular situation.
Any metal protection shall be either electrically bonded to the cable sheath or insulated
from it, whichever is the more appropriate.
8. When the routing of cables is not indicated on a drawing or described in the particular
specification the Contractor shall submit details of his proposed routing to the Engineer for
approval prior to commencing the installation.
9. Where cables are routed externally and are subject to exposure to direct sunlight, they
shall be protected with a suitably ventilated cover designed to shade the cables from
direct sunlight and to allow adequate ventilation so as not to derate the cables below
their designed current carrying capacity.
10. It is the Electrical Contractor's responsibility to assess the actual length of any cable unless
the specifications and/or drawing states that a given route length is to be allowed and to
make all necessary allowances for bends, rises and falls, connections, jointing, etc.
26 05 19
11. The Contractor shall be responsible for all offloading and handling of cables, etc., on site
and he shall ensure that cables are delivered to site on drums properly protected against
mechanical damage.
12. Where changes in direction occur in cable runs, slow bends or sets having a radius of
curvature not less than the minimum bending radius recommended by the manufacturer
shall be used.
13. It is the Contractor's responsibility to ensure that the wire armouring of any cable is not
subject to caging.
14. All cables run between defined terminal points shall be installed without intermediate
joints.
3.2 Wiring by means of cables drawn into conduit or trunking:
1. Before any cables are installed, the conduit installation and erection of fuse boards shall
be complete and inspected by the Engineer. The whole, or any part of the installation,
shall at the discretion of the Engineer and in his presence, be subjected to a "dead
weight" load of 25 kg. Any conduit rejected by the Engineer shall be changed at the
Contractor's own expense to the Engineer's satisfaction.
2. In the event of any protective insulation being damaged whilst cables are being
threaded in conduit the whole of the particular length concerned must be replaced and
refixed by the Contractor at his own expense.
3. Except where otherwise specified in the particular specification, all cables shall be PVC to
BSS 6004 including latest amendments. No conductor smaller than 1.5 sq.mm shall be used
for control wiring and no smaller than 2.5 sq.mm for lighting and S. power sub-circuits.
4. The wiring installation must be done in strict accordance with the mains scheme, cable
sizes and circuit details given in the specification, schedules and drawings issued for
particular projects concerned.
5. All wiring of multi-point sub-circuits shall be carried out in the looping in system and no
joints or connectors, other than those required for the connection of special fittings and
others that may be particularly mentioned in the scheme, will be allowed. On all AC
Suppliers, care must be taken to ensure that both lead and return are contained in the
same conduit, and that every single pole switch and circuit breaker must be fitted in the
phase conductor or non-earthed conductor of the supply. As much free cable as possible
must be left in conduit boxes and switch and distribution gear, tightness or strain being
eliminated.
6. The quantity and size of cables contained in any one conduit shall not be in excess of the
capacities of conduits prescribed in appendix 12 of the IEE Regulations and Appendix 3 of
EDD’s regulation.
7. The conduit system shall have been designed to provide for easy cable insertion after
erection of a complete section and the use of draw wires shall not be permitted without
the permission of the Engineer.
8. Water that has entered a conduit system construction shall be completely removed by
drawing suitable swabs through the conduit. Cables shall not be installed until the system
has dried out, the building made fully waterproof and walls plastered.
26 05 19
9. In situations where condensation is possible within the conduit and in all external conduit,
boxes shall be plugged with plastic compound.
10. Cables installed in trunking shall be taped or bound at 500mm intervals throughout the run
and suitably labelled at each junction for identification purposes.
3.3 Wiring by means of mineral insulated copper sheathed cables:
1. All operation employed by the Contractor on this type of work shall have received an
approved course of instruction on the installation of this system.
2. All cables shall be of voltage grade not less than the maximum voltage present in the
circuit, mineral insulated copper sheathed (of a make approved by the Engineer) and all
accessories used in conjunction with them shall be made by the same manufacturer. All
cables used on any particular project shall be of the same manufacture.
3. The end of all cables shall be terminated with sealing pots made off without delay in
accordance with the manufacturer's instructions, with due regard to the maximum
operating temperature, and fitted with compression ring type glands, unless otherwise
specified.
4. All seals shall be tested not less than 24 hours after completion with an insulation tester at a
voltage of not less than 500 volts. Nothing less than an infinity reading will be accepted
between conductors or between conductor and the cable sheath, all conductors being
disconnected from any apparatus.
5. All insulated tails shall be fitted with sleeves on a colour complying with Table 52A of the IEE
Regulations.
6. All joints shall be made in circular conduit boxes complying with BSS 31, or in rectangular
adaptable boxes of not less than No. 16 s.w.g. Junction boxes may only be used (with the
Engineer's approval) for surface installations. Straight through joints will not be permitted
without the special permission of the Engineer.
7. Where cast boxes and the cases of metal clad gear are not provided with screwed spout
entries, they shall have tapped holes into which the terminations shall be screwed and
locked with lock-nuts. Where it is impracticable to have the holes tapped in sheet steel
boxes the terminations shall be fixed with two lock-nuts.
8. Circular conduit boxes into which the cable terminations shall be screwed, shall be
installed at lighting points except where the lighting fittings have conduit entries.
9. Unless otherwise specified all conduit boxes and adaptable boxes shall be galvanized.
10. All connections within boxes shall be made by means of porcelain insulated brass
connectors with pinching screws.
11. Cables shall be fixed with copper wiring clips, copper saddles or purpose made saddles
constructed of copper strip. Clips and saddles shall be secured with brass fixing screws.
Except in situations where cables are inaccessible and unlikely to be disturbed, the
spacing of the clips or saddles shall not be greater than the figures given in the following
table:
26 05 19
Cable Size (Twin, Three or Four Core) Maximum Spacing of Fittings

Horizontal Vertical
1.5mm2 to 2.5mm2 300mm 450mm

600 volts
4 mm2 to 6mm2 400mm 600mm
10 mm2 450mm 700mm
16 mm2 to 25mm2 600mm 900mm
12. Where more than 2 runs cables of MICS are used, cable tray shall be used.
13. All bends in cables shall have an inside radius not less than that recommended by the
manufacturers and in no case shall the inside radius be less than twice the overall
diameter of the cable.
14. In all cases where single conductors of mineral insulated cable of 6 mm2 and below are
secured in a terminal with a pinching screw, the ends shall be doubled back before
insertion. For cables of 95 sq.mm and above the ends shall be terminated in the Cone
Grip Cable socket of the Lug or Tag type specially manufactured for the purpose and size
of conductor concerned.
15. Where mineral insulated copper sheathed cables are fixed in contact with stone work or
any other materials (e.g. new oak) liable to give rise to corrosion or drawn through
conduits, the cables shall be provided with a PVC serving. The fixing clips, saddles and
screws, shall be made of suitable corrosion resistant material.
16. Consideration shall be given to the colour of the serving so that the cable will be as
unobtrusive as possible.
17. In all positions where cables rise from the floor they shall be enclosed to a height of 1m in
steel conduit or hardwood casing whichever is more appropriate for the particular project
concerned. Single core cables shall not be enclosed in metal conduits. Any metal
protection shall be either electrically bonded to the cable sheath or insulated from it
whichever is the more appropriate.
18. Where cables pass through holes in the building structure where there is a risk of corrosion
or abrasion, either the cable shall be lapped with PVC tape or the holes shall be suitably
bushed.
19. In any situation where MICC cables are laid before screeding such cables if liable to
mechanical damage shall be provided with adequate temporary protection in the form
of sheet steel troughing or other approved methods. It will be the Contractor's
responsibility to renew all damaged cables free of charge, if mechanical damage occurs
where such protection has not been carried out.
20. Cables after installation on the surface, or in builder's ducts, shall be banded every six
meters (6m) with 300mm long identifying colours generally in accordance with BSS
617:1942.
21. Where MICC cables are used for final connections to machines subject to vibration and
final connection to semi-portable equipment, a suitable loop of cable shall be
incorporated between the final point of fixing of the MICC cable and the equipment
ongoing terminal box.
26 05 19
22. There shall be no sharp bends in the cable between these two points, and the loop of the
cable shall consist of at least one complete turn of cable radius not less than 12 times the
outer diameter of the cable sheath.
3.4 Wire Connections and Devices
3.4.1 Cable jointing:

1. Cable joints on PVC insulated and sheathed and MICC cables will not be permitted under
any circumstances.
2. If joints are required on XLPE/SWA/PVC mains and Sub main cables, these must only be
undertaken with the Engineer's written permission and the following clauses will apply.
i) Conductors shall be jointed colour to colour (or number to number).

ii) They shall be tested for condition and insulation resistance before jointing is commenced.
iii) The seals of cables shall not be removed until preparations for jointing are completed.
iv) Joints shall be completed on the same day as commenced.
v) Straight through joints will not normally be permitted.
3. Joints in the copper conductors shall be by means of tinned copper connectors with the
conductor firmly butted together and sweated solid with tinman's solder.
4. Joints in rubber insulated or polyvinyl chloride cables shall be insulated with pure rubber
tape served to a thickness equal to the cable insulation.
5. All joint boxes shall be completely filled with insulating compound of a suitable grade.
Each box shall be topped up as necessary to ensure that it is properly filled.
6. Joint box compound shall have high dielectric strength and insulation resistance suitable
for the working voltage of the cable. It shall be non-hygroscopic and be suitable in all
respects for the type of joint being made.
7. Where there is any possibility of the ingress of oil into the sealing box, the compound used
shall be of oil resistant type.
8. The jointing compounds shall be poured at the correct temperature specified by the
makers. No plug or air vent shall be fitted until all air has been released from the joint box.
Plugs and air vents shall be sealed with compound after filling.
9. The Contractor shall employ staff who are fully qualified and competent for types of joint
& termination to be made. Qualifications of such staff shall be submitted to the Engineer /
Architect for approval prior to taking up any jointing activity.
3.5 Mains Cable Termination:
3.5.1 Unless otherwise specified, all cable terminations shall be in suitable sealing boxes and
comply with the preceding clause where applicable.
3.5.2 Tails shall be of such cross section as to carry the full rated current of the cables to which
they are connected and shall be VRI, TRS, PVC, or Varnished Cambric, as specified.
3.6 Connections to Lighting Fittings:
Except for lighting fittings employing lamps of 40 watts or less, and well ventilated pendant
fittings employing lamps of 100 watts or less the precautions given in details below should
be taken.
i) Where mineral insulated cables terminate in lighting fittings, high temperature sleeving
shall be used.
26 05 19
ii) Where it is required to connect PVC cables to lighting fittings the cables shall be
terminated outside, and well clear of the fitting, and the final connection made by means
of tails and insulated with silicone rubber.
iii) Where it is required to connect PVC cables to lighting fittings the cables shall be
terminated outside, and well clear of the fitting, and the final connection made by means
of tails and insulated with silicone rubber.
In case of using same sub-circuit cables for final connection to fittings, single core cables
shall be drawn through flexible PVC conduit.
3.7 Connection to all other electrical equipment:
1. Connections to electrical accessories and equipment shall only be made with
manufacturer's approved terminating and shall comply with Section 526 of the IEE
Regulations.
2. Where shrouded clamp type terminations are to be used the cable insulation shall be
removed sufficiently to allow for metal to metal contact without the bare conductor
protruding outside the terminations.
3. Terminals screws shall be tightened to manufacturer's recommended torque.
4. Where terminations are to be made onto studs, approved type compression/solder lugs
shall be used. Terminations shall be effectively shrouded and shall comply fully with Section
412 of the IEE Regulations - protection against direct contact.
3.8 Flexible cords:
1. Flexible cords to all equipment must be kept as short as practicable.
2. The weight supported by any flexible cord shall not exceed 3kg for 24/.02mm or 5kg for
32/.02mm.
3. Where excessive temperatures may be encouraged silicone rubber flexible cords

manufactured in accordance with BSS 6500 must be used.
3.9 Voltage drop:
1. Cable sizes are normally specified throughout the installations so that EDD wiring
Regulations the requirements in respect of voltage drop is not contravened, but if, for any
reason, the sizes are not given for a particular project (such as day work, renewal or where
the Contractor is, in an emergency, acting without supervision) the Contractor must use
cables of sufficient cross sectional area to carry the full load without exceeding a volt
drop of two and half percentage of the supply authority's declared voltage between the
main service termination and any part of the installation.
2. The maximum permissible drop in voltage from substation L.V. bus bars to any points in the
installation shall not exceed 2.5% of the supply authorities declared voltage.
26 05 19
26 05 26 - Earthing System
PART 1 GENERAL
Provide and install a complete solid earthing system in order to protect against indirect
contact by means of automatic disconnection of the electricity supply within the time
limits specified within the IEE Regulations.
1.1.2 This Section to be read in conjunction with the following:

260100 Operation Maintenance of Electrical systems
260500 Basic Materials and Methods
262000 Services and Distribution System
263213 Auto Diesel Generator set
265000 Lighting Installation
264100 Lightning Protection System
260850 Electrical Services to Mechanical Plant
1.2 Description of system:
1.2.1 The main earthing system comprises the following all in accordance with the drawings:
HV Switchgear Panel Earth
RMU (Ring Main Unit) Earth
Transformer Body Earth
Transformer Neutral Earth
LV Main Panel Earth
Diesel Generator set Body Earth
ELV Earth
1.2.2 The main earth electrodes shall be copper bond rods driven into the ground in sufficient
number in order that their resistance to earth of each separate main earth section shall
be less than 1 ohms.
1.2.3 Arrangements must be made for the conductor to rod joints to be made below ground
level inside a small concrete chamber with a removable cover, so that the joint may be
inspected at regular intervals. Each separate insulated down conductor from the main
earth bar will be connected to separate groups of rods so that at any time it will be
possible to disconnect and test the earthing system in two complete sections.
1.2.4 The conductors terminating at the main earth bar shall be terminated with solder or
compression pattern lugs and bolted to the earth bar using brass of cadmium plated
bolts, two nuts and shake proof washers. A label shall be fixed above the earth bar
inscribed "MAIN EARTH BAR. DO NOT REMOVE OR DISCONNECT CONDUCTORS".
1.2.5 Supplementary Bonding Conductors

The following items of exposed metal work shall be bonded using supplementary bonding
conductors of min. sizes indicated and/or as per EDD regulations.
Cable Trays - 16sqmm PVC insulated cable

Metal Sinks - 6sqmm PVC insulated cable
Metal Wastes
Fittings - 6sqmm PVC insulated cable
26 05 26
All metal Pipework in

Kitchens & Toilets - 6sqmm PVC insulated cable
All bonding connections shall be fitted with a label inscribed "Safety Electrical Earth - Do
not Remove".
1.2.6 Circuit Protective Conductors (CPC)

Circuit protective conductors shall comprise the following:
1. For circuits wired using XLPE/SWA/PVC cable, only the armouring of the cable shall not be
considered satisfactory for use as the CPC. Separate earth conductors shall be provided
as indicated on the drawings or as per requirements of BS 7430 and EDD Wiring
Regulations.
2. For circuits enclosed in metal trunking, separate earth conductors shall be provided for
each circuit.
3. For circuits enclosed in PVC conduit, a separate CPC shall be installed for each circuit
enclosed within that conduit, sizes to be as per EDD regulations.

the satisfaction of the engineer.

All works carried out should conform to the relevant sections of the IEE Regulations - 16th
Edition, (BS 7671) and where applicable, British Standards Codes of Practice. BS 7430
Earthing and local EDD Regulations.
1.4 Submittals
1.4.1 Product Data

Submit manufacturer's specifications for all equipment.
Information submitted to include:
Materials
Detailed layout showing cable sizes etc.
Shop drawings indicating routes/locations.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 Cables:
PVC insulated copper conductor colouring green/yellow to BS 7211 as specified in Section
260519 – Low Voltage Electrical Power conductor and cables.
2.1.1 Rods
Shall be of 20mm Copper Bonded.
2.1.2 Tape
Shall be hard drawn high conductivity copper.
26 05 26
2.1.3 Fittings
Such as rod to tape etc. shall be made of high strength corrosion resistant bronze alloy.
2.1.4 Earth pits

Shall be precast concrete with removable inspection cover. For pits located in basement,
the pits shall be water tight with water seal.
2.2 Manufacturers
Thomas & Betts (Furse), UK

A N Wallis, UK
Erico,UK
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 The whole installation shall be carried out and tested in accordance with the latest IET
Regulations (BS 7671) and BS 7430.
3.2 Earth fault loop impedance tests shall be conducted on each and every circuit and the
results recorded.
3.3 Copies of the tabulated results shall be affixed within the relevant distribution boards along
with details of circuit route lengths and circuit protective conductor sizes.
26 05 26
26 05 53 – Identification for Electrical Systems
PART 1 GENERAL
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
The works related to this section shall also be read in conjunction with the operator’s
requirements and guidelines.
1.2 Summary
1. Identification for cable Trays, Trunking and conduits.
2. Identification of power and control cables.
3. Identification for conductors.
4. Underground-line warning tape.
5. Warning labels and signs.
6. Instruction signs.
7. Equipment identification labels.
8. Miscellaneous identification products.
1.3 Submittals
A. Shop drawings should be submitted to include the labeling and Identification Plan.
B. Include Product Data sheets for identification materials furnished.
C. Include schedule for nameplates and labels.
D. Include sample for each type of label and sign to illustrate size, colors, lettering
style, mounting provisions, and graphic features of identification products.
C. Identification Schedule: An index of nomenclature of electrical equipment and system
components used in identification signs and labels.
1.4 Quality Assurance
A. Comply with BS 7671

B. Comply with BS 5378 Part 1, 3
E. Comply with BS 3858
1.5 Coordination
A. Coordinate identification names, abbreviations, colors, and other features with

requirements in other Sections requiring identification applications, Drawings, Shop
Drawings, manufacturer's wiring diagrams, and the Operation and Maintenance
Manual; and with those required by codes, standards. Use consistent designations
throughout Project.
B. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with completion of covering and painting of
surfaces where devices are to be applied.
C. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with location of access panels and doors.
D. Install identifying devices before installing ceilings and similar concealment.
26 05 53
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 POWER AND CONTROL CABLE TRAYS/TRUNKING/CONDUITS (CONTAINMENT)

IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS
A. Comply with codes for minimum size of letters for legend and for minimum length of color
field for each raceway size.
B. Colors for Containment Carrying Circuits at 600 V or Less:

1. Black letters on an Orange field.
2. Legend: Indicate voltage and system or service type.
C. Colors for Containment Carrying Circuits at More Than 600 V:

1. Black letters on an Orange field.
2. Legend: "DANGER - HIGH VOLTAGE CABLES."
D. Vinyl Labels for Containment Carrying Circuits at 600 V or Less: Preprinted, flexible label
laminated with a clear, weather- and chemical-resistant coating and matching
wraparound clear adhesive tape for securing ends of legend label.
E. Snap-Around Labels for Containment Carrying Circuits at 600 V or Less: Slit, pretensioned,
flexible, preprinted, color-coded acrylic sleeve, with diameter sized to suit diameter of
raceway or cable it identifies and to stay in place by gripping action.
F. Snap-Around, Color-Coding Bands for Containment Carrying Circuits at 600 V or

Less: Slit, pretensioned, flexible, solid-colored acrylic sleeve, 50 mm long, with diameter
sized to suit diameter of raceway or cable it identifies and to stay in place by gripping
action.
G. Tape and Stencil for Containment Carrying Circuits More Than 600 V: 100-mm wide black
stripes on 250-mm centers diagonally over orange background that extends full length of
raceway or duct and is 300 mm wide. Stop stripes at legends.
H. Metal Tags: Brass or aluminum, 50x50x1.3 mm, with stamped legend, punched for use with
self- locking cable tie fastener.
I. Write-On Tags: Polyester tag, 0.25 mm - 0.38 mm thick, with corrosion-resistant grommet
and cable tie for attachment to conductor or cable.
1. Marker for Tags: Permanent, waterproof, black ink marker recommended by tag
manufacturer.
2. Marker for Tags: Machine-printed, permanent, waterproof, black ink marker
recommended by printer manufacturer.
2.2 ARMORED AND METAL-CLAD CABLE IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS
A. Comply with BS 5378 for minimum size of letters for legend and for minimum length of color
field for each cable size.
B. Colors for Cables Carrying Circuits at 600 V and Less:

1. Black letters on an orange field.
2. Legend: Indicate voltage and system or service type.
C. Colors for Cables Carrying Circuits at More Than 600 V:

1. Black letters on an orange field.
26 05 53
2. Legend: "DANGER HIGH VOLTAGE WIRING."
D. Vinyl Labels: Preprinted, flexible label laminated with a clear, weather- and chemical-
resistant coating and matching wraparound clear adhesive tape for securing ends of
legend label.
E. Self-Adhesive Vinyl Tape: Colored, heavy duty, waterproof, fade resistant; 50

mm wide;compounded for outdoor use.
F. Heat-Shrink Preprinted Tubes: Flame-retardant polyolefin tube with machine-printed

identification label. Sized to suit diameter of and shrinks to fit firmly around cable it
identifies. Full shrink recovery at a maximum of 93 deg C. Comply with UL 224.
2.3 POWER AND CONTROL CABLE IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS
A. Comply with BS 5378 for minimum size of letters for legend and for minimum length of color
field for each cable size.
B. Vinyl Labels: Preprinted, flexible label laminated with a clear, weather- and chemical-
resistant coating and matching wraparound clear adhesive tape for securing ends of
legend label.
C. Self-Adhesive, Self-Laminating Polyester Labels: Preprinted, 0.08-mm thick flexible

label with acrylic pressure-sensitive adhesive that provides a clear, weather- and
chemical-resistant, self- laminating, protective shield over the legend. Labels sized to fit
the cable diameter such that the clear shield overlaps the entire printed legend.
D. Heat-Shrink Preprinted Tubes: Flame-retardant polyolefin tube with machine-printed

identification label. Sized to suit diameter of and shrinks to fit firmly around cable it
E. Metal Tags: Brass or aluminum, 50x 50x1.3 mm, with stamped legend, punched for use
with self- locking cable tie fastener.
F. Write-On Tags: Polyester tag, 0.25 mm - 0.38 mm thick, with corrosion-resistant grommet
manufacturer.
2. Marker for Tags: Machine-printed, permanent, waterproof, black ink marker
recommended by printer manufacturer.
G. Snap-Around Labels: Slit, pretensioned, flexible, preprinted, color-coded acrylic sleeve,

with diameter sized to suit diameter of cable it identifies and to stay in place by gripping
action.
H. Snap-Around, Color-Coding Bands: Slit, pretensioned, flexible, solid-colored acrylic sleeve,

50 mm long, with diameter sized to suit diameter of cable it identifies and to stay in place
by gripping action.
2.4 CONDUCTOR IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS
A. Color-Coding Conductor Tape: Colored, self-adhesive vinyl tape not less than 0.08 mm
thick by 25 to 50 mm wide.
26 05 53
B. Self-Adhesive, Self-Laminating Polyester Labels: Preprinted, 0.08-mm thick flexible

label with acrylic pressure-sensitive adhesive that provides a clear, weather- and
chemical-resistant, self- laminating, protective shield over the legend. Labels sized to fit
the conductor diameter such that the clear shield overlaps the entire printed legend.
C. Snap-Around Labels: Slit, pretensioned, flexible, preprinted, color-coded acrylic

sleeve, with diameter sized to suit diameter of conductor it identifies and to stay in place
by gripping action.
D. Snap-Around, Color-Coding Bands: Slit, pretensioned, flexible, solid-colored acrylic sleeve

with diameter sized to suit diameter of conductor it identifies and to stay in place by
gripping action.
E. Heat-Shrink Preprinted Tubes: Flame-retardant polyolefin tube with machine-printed

identification label. Sized to suit diameter of and shrinks to fit firmly around conductor it
F. Marker Tapes: Vinyl or vinyl-cloth, self-adhesive wraparound type, with circuit

identification legend machine printed by thermal transfer or equivalent process.
G. Write-On Tags: Polyester tag, 0.25 mm - 0.38 mm thick, with corrosion-resistant grommet
manufacturer.
2. Labels for Tags: Self-adhesive label, machine-printed with permanent, waterproof, black
ink recommended by printer manufacturer, sized for attachment to tag.
2.5 UNDERGROUND-LINE WARNING TAPE
A. Tape:
1. Recommended by manufacturer for the method of installation and suitable to identify
and locate underground electrical and communications utility lines.
2. Printing on tape shall be permanent and shall not be damaged by burial operations.
3. Tape material and ink shall be chemically inert, and not subject to degrading when
exposed to acids, alkalis, and other destructive substances commonly found in soils.
B. Color and Printing:

1. Comply with Local EDD regulations as a minimum.
2. Comply with BS 5499-11.
3. Inscriptions for Red-Colored Tapes: ELECTRIC LINE, HIGH VOLTAGE, etc.
4. Inscriptions for Orange-ColoredTapes: TELEPHONE CABLE, CATV CABLE,
COMMUNICATIONS CABLE, OPTICAL FIBER CABLE, etc.
C. Tag: ELV CABLES:

1. Pigmented polyolefin, bright-colored, continuous-printed on one side with the inscription
of the utility, compounded for direct-burial service.
E. Tag: LV CABLES:
1. Multilayer laminate consisting of high-density polyethylene scrim coated with
pigmented polyolefin, bright-colored, continuous-printed on one side with the
inscription of the utility, compounded for direct-burial service.
26 05 53
F. Tag: MV CABLES:
1. Detectable three-layer laminate, consisting of a printed pigmented polyolefin film, a solid
aluminum-foil core, and a clear protective film that allows inspection of the continuity of
the conductive core, bright-colored, continuous-printed on one side with the inscription of
the utility, compounded for direct-burial service.
2.7 WARNING LABELS AND SIGNS
A. Comply with NFPA 70 and 29 CFR 1910.145.

B. Self- Adhesive Warning Labels: Factory-printed, multicolor, pressure sensitive adhesive
labels, configured for display on front cover, door, or other access to equipment unless
C. Baked-Enamel Warning Signs:

1. Preprinted aluminum signs, punched or drilled for fasteners, with colors, legend, and size
required for application.
2. 6.4-mm grommets in corners for mounting.
3. Nominal size, 180 by 250 mm.
D. Metal-Backed, Butyrate Warning Signs:

1. Weather-resistant, nonfading, preprinted, cellulose-acetate butyrate signs with 1-
mm galvanized-steel backing; and with colors, legend, and size required for application.
2. 6.4-mm grommets in corners for mounting.
3. Nominal size, 250 by 360 mm.
E. Warning label and sign shall include, but are not limited to, the following legends:
1. Multiple Power Source Warning: "DANGER - ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARD - EQUIPMENT HAS
MULTIPLE POWER SOURCES."
3. Warning signs or labels: Exact TEXT requirements will be advised as per site.
2.8 INSTRUCTION SIGNS
A. Engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine plastic, minimum 1.6 mm thick for signs up to 129
sq. cm and 3.2 mm thick for larger sizes.
1. Engraved legend with black letters on white face.
2. Punched or drilled for mechanical fasteners.
3. Framed with mitered acrylic molding and arranged for attachment at applicable
equipment.
B. Adhesive Film Label: Machine printed, in black, by thermal transfer or equivalent process.
Minimum letter height shall be 10 mm.
C. Adhesive Film Label with Clear Protective Overlay: Machine printed, in black, by thermal
transfer or equivalent process. Minimum letter height shall be 10 mm. Overlay shall
provide a weatherproof and UV-resistant seal for label.
2.9 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION LABELS
A. Adhesive Film Label: Machine printed, in black, by thermal transfer or equivalent process.
Minimum letter height shall be 10 mm.
B. Adhesive Film Label with Clear Protective Overlay: Machine printed, in black, by thermal
transfer or equivalent process. Minimum letter height shall be 10 mm. Overlay shall
provide a weatherproof and UV-resistant seal for label.
26 05 53
C. Self-Adhesive, Engraved, Traffolyte Label: Adhesive backed, with white letters on a dark-
gray background. Minimum letter height shall be 10 mm.
D. Engraved, Traffolyte Label: Punched or drilled for screw mounting. White letters on a
dark-gray background. Minimum letter height shall be 10 mm.
E. Stenciled Legend: In nonfading, waterproof, black color ink or paint. Minimum letter
height shall be 25 mm.
2.10 CABLE TIES
A. General-Purpose Cable Ties: Fungus inert, self-extinguishing, one piece, self-locking, Type
6/6 nylon.
1. Minimum Width: 5 mm.
2. Tensile Strength at 23 deg C, According to ASTM D 638: 82.7 MPa.
3. Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 85 deg C.
4. Color: Black except where used for color-coding.
B. UV-Stabilized Cable Ties: Fungus inert, designed for continuous exposure to exterior
sunlight, self-extinguishing, one piece, self-locking, Type 6/6 nylon.
1. Minimum Width: 5 mm.
2. Tensile Strength at 23 deg C, According to ASTM D 638: 82.7 MPa.
3. Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 85 deg C.
4. Color: Black.
2.11 MISCELLANEOUS IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTS
A. Paint: Comply with requirements in painting Sections for paint materials and
application requirements. Select paint system applicable for surface material and
location (exterior or interior).
B. Fasteners for Labels and Signs: Self-tapping, stainless-steel screws or stainless-steel

machine screws with nuts and flat and lock washers.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Verify and identity of each item before installing identification products.
B. Location: Install identification materials and devices at locations for most convenient
viewing without interference with operation and maintenance of equipment.
C. Apply identification devices to surfaces that require finish after completing finish work.
D. Self-Adhesive Identification Products: Clean surfaces before application, using materials

and methods recommended by manufacturer of identification device.
E. Attach signs and plastic labels that are not self-adhesive type with mechanical fasteners
appropriate to the location and substrate.
26 05 53
G. System Identification Color-Coding Bands for Raceways and Cables: Each color-coding
band shall completely encircle cable or conduit. Place adjacent bands of two-color
markings in contact, side by side. Locate bands at changes in direction, at penetrations
of walls and floors, at 15-m maximum intervals in straight runs, and at 7.6-m maximum
intervals in congested areas.
H. Aluminum Wraparound Marker Labels and Metal Tags: Secure tight to surface of
conductor or cable at a location with high visibility and accessibility.
I. Cable Ties: For attaching tags. Use general-purpose type, except as listed below:
1. Outdoors: UV-stabilized nylon.
2. In Spaces Handling Environmental Air: Plenum rated.
J. Underground-Line Warning Tape: During backfilling of trenches install continuous

underground-line warning tape directly above line at 150 to 200 mm below finished
grade. Use multiple tapes where width of multiple lines installed in a common trench or
concrete envelope exceeds 400 mm overall.
K. Painted Identification: Comply with requirements in painting Sections for surface

preparation and paint application.
3.2 IDENTIFICATION SCHEDULE
A. Concealed Raceways, Duct Banks, More than 600 V, within Buildings: Tape and stencil
100-mm wide black stripes on 250-mm centers over orange background that extends full
length of raceway or duct and is 300 mm wide. Stencil legend "DANGER CONCEALED
HIGH VOLTAGE WIRING" with 75-mm high black letters on 500-mm centers. Stop stripes at
legends.
Apply to the following finished surfaces:
1. Floor surface directly above conduits running beneath and within 300 mm of a floor that is
in contact with earth or is framed above unexcavated space.
2. Wall surfaces directly external to raceways concealed within wall.
3. Accessible surfaces of concrete envelope around raceways in vertical shafts, exposed in
the building, or concealed above suspended ceilings.
B. Accessible Raceways, Armored and Metal-Clad Cables, More than 600 V: Self-adhesive
vinyl or Snap-around labels. Install labels at 3-m to 10-m maximum intervals.
C. Accessible Raceways and Metal-Clad Cables, 600 V or Less, for Service, Feeder, and
Branch Circuits More Than 30 A, and 230 V to ground: Identify with self-adhesive vinyl
label or self- adhesive vinyl tape applied in bands. Install labels at 3-m maximum intervals.
D. Accessible Raceways and Cables within Buildings: Identify the covers of each junction
and pull box of the following systems with self-adhesive vinyl labels with the wiring system
legend and system voltage. System legends shall be as follows:
1. Emergency Power.
2. Power.
3. UPS.
4. CBS
E. Power-Circuit Conductor Identification, 600 V or Less: For conductors in vaults, pull and
junction boxes, manholes, and hand holes, use color-coding conductor tape to identify
the phase.
26 05 53
1. Color-Coding for Phase Identification, 600 V or Less: Use colors listed below for
ungrounded service conductors.
a. Color shall be factory applied or field applied.
b. Colors for 400/230 V Circuits:
1) Phase A: Red.
2) Phase B: Yellow.
3) Phase C: Blue.
c. Field-Applied, Color-Coding Conductor Tape: Apply in half-lapped turns for a minimum

distance of 150 mm from terminal points and in boxes where splices or taps are made.
Apply last two turns of tape with no tension to prevent possible unwinding. Locate bands
to avoid obscuring factory cable markings.
F. Power-Circuit Conductor Identification, More than 600 V: For conductors in vaults, pull
and junction boxes, manholes, and hand holes, use nonmetallic plastic tag holder with
adhesive-backed phase tags, and a separate tag with the circuit designation.
G. Install instructional sign including the color-code for grounded and ungrounded
conductors using adhesive-film-type labels.
H. Control-Circuit Conductor Identification: For conductors and cables in pull and junction
boxes, manholes, and hand holes, use self-adhesive, self-laminating polyester labels or self-
adhesive vinyl labels with the conductor or cable designation, origin, and destination.
I. Control-Circuit Conductor Termination Identification: For identification at terminations

provide self- adhesive, self-laminating polyester labels or self-adhesive vinyl labels with
the conductor designation.
J. Conductors to Be Extended in the Future: Attach marker tape to conductors and list
source.
K. Auxiliary Electrical Systems Conductor Identification: Identify field installed alarm, control,
and signal connections.
1. Identify conductors, cables, and terminals in enclosures and at junctions, terminals, and
pull points. Identify by system and circuit designation.
2. Use system of marker tape designations that is uniform and consistent with system used by
manufacturer for factory-installed connections.
3. Coordinate identification with Project Drawings, manufacturer’s wiring diagrams, and the
Operation and Maintenance Manual.
L. Locations of Underground Lines: Identify with underground line warning tape for power,
lighting, communication, and control wiring and optical fiber cable.
1. Limit use of underground-line warning tape to direct-buried cables.
2. Install underground-line warning tape for both direct-buried cables and cables in
raceway.
M. Workspace Indication: Install floor marking tape to show working clearances in the
direction of access to live parts. Workspace shall be as required by NFPA 70 and 29 CFR
1926.403 unless otherwise indicated. Do not install at flush-mounted panel boards and
similar equipment in finished spaces.
N. Warning Labels for Indoor Cabinets, Boxes, and Enclosures for Power and Lighting: Self-
adhesive warning labels of Baked-enamel warning signs or Metal-backed, butyrate
warning signs.
26 05 53
1. Comply with 29 CFR 1910.145.

2. Identify system voltage with black letters on an orange background.
3. Apply to exterior of door, cover, or other access.
4. For equipment with multiple power or control sources, apply to door or cover of
equipment including, but not limited to, the following:
a. Power transfer switches.
b. Controls with external control power connections.
c. Exact TEXT requirements will be advised at Site.
O. Operating Instruction Signs: Install instruction signs to facilitate proper operation and
maintenance of electrical systems and items to which they connect. Install instruction
signs with approved legend where instructions are needed for system or equipment
operation.
P. Emergency Operating Instruction Signs: Install instruction signs with white legend on
a red background with minimum 10-mm high letters for emergency instructions at
equipment used for power transfer/ load shedding.
e.g. CAUTION – THE SET MAY START AUTOMATICALLY AT ANY TIME.
Q. Equipment Identification Labels: On each unit of equipment, install unique designation

label that is consistent with wiring diagrams, schedules, and the Operation and
Maintenance Manual. Apply labels to disconnect switches and protection equipment,
central or master units, control panels, control stations, terminal cabinets, and racks of
each system. Systems include power, lighting, control, communication, signal, monitoring,
and alarm systems unless equipment is provided with its own identification.
1. Labeling Instructions:
a. Indoor Equipment: Self-adhesive/ Fastened, engraved, Traffolyte label. Unless otherwise
indicated, provide a single line of text with 13-mm high letters on 38-mm high label; where
two lines of text are required, use labels 50 mm high.
b. Outdoor Equipment: Engraved, Traffolyte label with Stenciled legend 100 mm high.
c. Elevated Components: Increase sizes of labels and letters to those appropriate for
viewing from the floor.
d. Unless provided with self-adhesive means of attachment, fasten labels with appropriate
mechanical fasteners that do not change the NEMA or NRTL rating of the enclosure.
2. Equipment to Be Labeled:
a. Panel boards: Panel board identification shall be self-adhesive/ fastened engraved

Traffolyte label.
b. Enclosures and electrical cabinets.
c. Access doors and panels for concealed electrical items.
d. Switchgear.
e. Switchboards.
f. Transformers: Label that includes tag designation shown on Drawings for the
transformer, feeder, and panel boards.
g. Substations.
h. Emergency system boxes and enclosures.
i. Motor-control centers.
j. Enclosed switches.
k. Enclosed circuit breakers.
l. Enclosed controllers.
26 05 53
m. Variable-speed controllers.
n. Push-button stations.
o. Power transfer equipment.
p. Contactors.
q. Remote-controlled switches, dimmer modules, and control devices.
r. Battery-inverter units.
s. Battery racks.
t. Power-generating units.
u. Monitoring and control equipment.
v. UPS equipment.
w. CBS.
x. Any other equipment not listed above.
26 05 53
26 08 50 - Electrical Services to Mechanical Plant
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1.1 The Electrical Contractor to provide and install electrical services to all items of
mechanical plant inclusive of provision of PVC heavy duty conduits and/or G.I. Conduit
and/or trunking with draw wires and pull boxes for all control wiring (control wiring by
Mechanical Contractor) together with all equipment necessary to provide a working
system, as shown on Electrical Drawings and Schematic Diagrams, and as described in
specifications. Exact location, type and rating of isolators, D.P. switch etc. shall be co-
ordinated with mechanical services contractor and other Specialist Contractors.
1.1.2 All electrical works related to mechanical services and other related works shall be
carried out as per the latest EDD regulations for electrical installations.

260100 : Operation & Maintenance of Electrical systems
260500 : Basic Materials and Methods
260526 : Earthing Systems
262600 : Distribution Circuits
230000 : Heating, Ventilation & Air Conditioning System
and all other relevant sections for other Mechanical Services under DIVISION 21 and 22.
1.2.1 Heating, Ventilation and Air-conditioning Systems

Power Supply for Chillers
Electrical Contractor to supply and install MV switchgear and associated HV cables run on
cable trays up to respective chiller, including termination of the HV cables onto the power
connection box on the chiller. These works will be carried out by the Electrical contractor.
1.2.2 Power Supply for Chilled Water Pumps in Pump Room
1. Electrical Contractor to supply and install XLPE armoured cables to run on cable trays
from SMP – CHWP to VFD control panel. This SMP shall be supplied and installed by
Electrical Contractor. From this panel, cables will be run on cable trays terminated upto
the VFD control panel individually, by Electrical Contractor.
2. The VFD control panels for the chilled water pumps will be part of the mechanical
contractor/ pump supplier scope. The cabling from the VFD panel up to the pump will be
part of mechanical contractor’s scope.
3. Necessary volt-free contacts, auxiliary contact and Auto/Manual switch on the
mechanical services panel shall be provided to enable operation of the system from
Building Management System.
1.2.3 Power Supply for Cooling Tower
1. Electrical Contractor shall provide sub main panel and power supply to the isolator at
each Cooling Tower location. Supply and installation of sub main panel and isolator shall
be by Electrical Contractor.
2. The Mechanical Contractor shall include the following in his Scope of Work:
3. Supply and installation of Control Panel for the unit.
26 08 50
4. Power and Control Wiring from isolator to all control panel/equipment/controls.

5. Provision of remote monitoring of the data from Building Management System.
6. Electrical Contractor shall also be responsible for supply and installation of all necessary
conduits, draw wires, trunking, cable trays etc., as per local EDD Regulation for electrical
installation.
1.2.4 Power Supply for Cooling Tower Secondary Pumps

1. Electrical Contractor to supply and install XLPE armoured cables to run on cable trays from
SMP – MCC to pumps and emergency push buttons near pumps. This SMP/MCC shall be
supplied and installed by Electrical Contractor and shall be complete with motor soft
starters as required and power wiring etc. as required. From this panel, cables will be run
on cable trays terminated on the motor individually, by Electrical Contractor. A remote off
push button with facility for locking to be provided near each pump to switch off power
during maintenance and/or emergency. Provision will be made in this panel to install
indicator lights for start-stop-trip indication for each pump.
1.2.5 Power Supply for Chiller Condenser Pumps

1. Electrical Contractor to supply and install XLPE armoured cables to run on cable trays from
SMP – MCC to pumps and emergency push buttons near pumps. This SMP/MCC shall be
supplied and installed by Electrical Contractor and shall be complete with motor soft
starters as required and power wiring etc. as required. From this panel, cables will be run
on cable trays terminated on the motor individually, by Electrical Contractor. A remote off
push button with facility for locking to be provided near each pump to switch off power
during maintenance and/or emergency. Provision will be made in this panel to install
indicator lights for start-stop-trip indication for each pump.
1.2.6 Power Supply Basin Sweeping Pumps

1. Electrical Contractor shall provide sub main panel and power supply to the isolator at
each Pump location. Supply and installation of sub main panel and isolator shall be by
Electrical Contractor.
4. Power and Control Wiring from isolator to all control panel/equipment/controls.
5. Provision of remote monitoring of the data from Building Management System.
installation.
1.2.7 Power Supply for Air Handling Unit (s)

1. Electrical Contractor shall provide power supply to the isolator at each A.H.U. location.
Supply and installation of isolator shall be by Electrical Contractor.
2. The Electrical Contractor shall also include wiring from Main Fire Alarm Panel to the AHU
panel to trip the power supply in case of smoke/fire signal from respective floor and/or as
described in Section 283100.
26 08 50
5. Power and Control Wiring from isolator to all control panel/equipment/controls including
AHU, fresh air fan unit heaters, control valves, motorised damper etc.
6. Provision of remote monitoring of the data from Building Management System
installation.
1.2.8 Power Supply for Fan Coil Units / VAV Units

1. Electrical Contractor shall provide necessary power supply from respective distribution
board up to a 20A DP switch with neon indicator/20A isolator for FCU near each unit.
Rating of DP switch/isolators is indicative and to be verified with approved equipments.
2. Mechanical Contractor shall include power wiring from 20A DP switch/20A isolator to the
Fan Coil Unit and its thermostat etc. Electrical Contractor shall also be responsible for
supply and installation of all necessary conduits, draw wires, trunking, cable trays etc., as
per local EDD Regulation for electrical installation in coordination with Mechanical
Contractor.
1.2.9 Power Supply for Wall Window Air-Conditioners and VRV units, Split System Air-
Conditioners
1. The Electrical Contractor shall provide necessary power as follows:
2. For Window Air-Conditioners the power shall be supplied up to 32A DP switch located
near each unit.
3. For Split System Air-Conditioner the power shall be supplied up to 45A DP switch located
near each unit and up to 3 phase isolator of adequate rating located near each outdoor
unit.
5. For Window Air Conditioner, power wiring from DP switch to the unit.
6. For Split System Air Conditioner, VRV units, power and control wiring from DP switch and 3
phase isolator to the equipment and its controls.
conduits, draw wires, trunking, cable trays etc. as per local EDD Regulations for electrical
installation and as per approval equipments.
1.2.10 Power Supply for Ventilation Units
1. General Purpose Ventilation Units

2. An exhaust ventilation fan has been provided at different level and/or at roof level as per
the HVAC drawings.
3. The electrical Contractor shall provide necessary power as follows:
4. For all ventilation unit the power shall be supplied to the 1 Ph/3 Phase isolator (including
isolator) near the unit.
5. Mechanical Contractor shall include the following in his Scope of Work as necessary:
7. Power Control wiring from the isolator to the Control Panel and onwards from Control
Panel to the fans and its controls.
8. Provision of remote monitoring of the data from Building Management System
installation.
1.2.11 Power Supply for Cold Water Booster Set and Transfer Pump Set
Electrical Contractor to supply and install armoured cables & isolators adjacent to pumps.
The cables to be run on cable trays. The isolator for pump set to be provided with a
26 08 50
suitable enclosure by the Electrical Contractor. (Control panels by Mechanical

Contractor).
1.2.12 Power Supply for Water Heaters

Electrical Contractor to supply and install 20 A DP switch near for each water heaters and
to be terminated in suitable terminal connection units located near the unit in co-
ordination with specialist suppliers. Water heaters shall be supplied by
mechanical/plumbing contractor.
Wherever the water heaters are installed at roof a 20 A SP isolator shall be installed next to
the water heater unit with localized control from each utility area via a 20 A DP switch as
indicated.

the entire satisfaction of the Engineer. The workmen to hold valid licenses as required by
EDD/Government Authorities concerned.1.3.2 Compliance with Standards &
Regulations: Except where otherwise specified all work is to comply with the relevant
provisions of the latest IET Regulations; appropriate British Standards and British Standard
Codes of Practice currently applicable.
1.4 Submittals
The following will be required for approval prior to work commencing:
1.4.1 Product Data

1. Submit manufacturer’s specifications for all equipment showing materials used in
manufacture, sizes and types of fittings and methods of installation.
2. Information to include:
3. Materials
4. Methods of Construction
5. Installation Requirements
6. Performance
1.4.2 Shop drawings

Submit working drawings showing layout of distribution systems and equipment. Drawings
to show supports required to be co-ordinated with both building structure and other
trades.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 Cables
All as detailed on the drawings - See SECTION 260519 – LOW VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER
CONDUCTORS & CABLES.
2.2 Cable Trays
To be heavy gauge return flange perforated sheet steel to BS 1449 Part B, hot dipped
galvanized to BS 729 Part 1, as detailed in SECTION 260500 - BASIC MATERIALS AND
METHODS.
26 08 50
2.3 Isolators
To be weatherproof for outdoor installations as shown on drawings. For indoor installations
the isolators shall be of type and rating as indicated on drawings.
2.4 Control Panels
To be suitable for the application as detailed in SECTION 260500 BASIC MATERIALS AND
METHODS and as per the Mechanical equipment/HVAC systems requirement.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 The Contractor shall co-ordinate with other mechanical services for operational
Requirement, location, type, rating and other relevant technical data in respect of
isolators, junction boxes, control panels, cable tray/conduit runs and include complete
system as necessary.
3.2 The Contractor shall obtain necessary load details/particulars to select and finalize the
isolator rating and other switchgear as necessary.
3.3 The Contractor shall arrange to conduct the testing of installations when completed in
liaison with other services as necessary and demonstrate the correctness of power supply
to various services.
26 08 50
26 09 43 – Lighting/ Dimming Control System
1. GENERAL
Provide and install a complete Networked Lighting/Dimming Control system as detailed

within this specification and in accordance with the drawings.

262000 Services and Distribution System
265000 Lighting Installation
250000 Building Management System
1.2 Applicable Standards
International Standard (ISO/IEC14543-3)
European Standard (CENELEC EN50090 and CEN EN 13321-1 &13321-2)
ANSI/ASHRAE Standard (ANSI/ASHRAE 135)
1.3 System Description

The Lighting/Dimming control system shall cover the building control requirements for
lighting control, based on applications such as manual override switches, presence &
movement detection, central timers, photocell, day light harvesting, control via touch
panels and integration to central lighting management server. Dimmable lighting
circuits shall be controlled via appropriate actuators/gateways.
The System shall be designed and developed in accordance with multi-vendor open
protocol. Systems which are single vendor based and supporting proprietary
protocols shall not be acceptable. The system shall ensure that devices from different
manufacturers are interoperable and compatible thus providing the end user of
flexibility of operation.
1.3.1 System Concept
The programmable lighting/dimming control system (LCS) consists of three levels of

operation:
1.3.1.1 The first and primary level of lighting control shall be through a central PC software for
time based control or manual control by the operator. All the lighting control panels
(LCP) shall be controllable through the central timer. The graphical display enables to
view the entire building, floors or even individual rooms. It shall be possible to pre-
program the time channels in advance for any upcoming events as per the
requirement.
1.3.1.2 The second level of operation shall be achieved via Central Touch Panels located at
the reception or BMS room or Engineering Office and shall be capable of being
programmed with switching times locally which can control the whole system in case
of PC shutdown. The Touch Panel shall have Control buttons for manual override. It
shall be possible to implement functions such as displaying switching status, fault
26 09 43
reports & measured values, central switching of lighting circuit groups, time programs,
scenes, generating acoustic and visual alarm signals, creating logical functions,
limiters, multiplexers etc. The Display & Control device shall be a flush mounted
device.
1.3.1.3 The third level of operation is based on manual override switches/Control Plates and
the override switches plates to be installed in the respective floor electrical rooms,
FOH areas, public areas like entrance lobby, ballroom, F&B outlets etc. Other circuits
are controlled based on daylight, movement/presence detection, local timers, etc.
The Lighting Control system shall be programmed in such a way that unnecessary
usage of power is minimized. Lighting control in different areas shall be as follows:
a. ID/Public Area/FOH areas
1. Dimming shall be provided for the specified common areas like the receptions, main
lobbies, main corridors, restaurants, coffee shops, ball rooms, meeting rooms, conference
center, SPA areas, Gyms, banquet halls, and bar areas etc. These lights shall be
controlled from Dimmer racks linked to either local intelligent control plates,
movement/presence detector and also through central touch screen wherever
applicable. Refer to the specialist lighting consultant's control schedule for details of
dimming scenes and circuits which are to be dimmed or switched.
2. A separate system for dimming control system shall not be accepted. The lux level to
be maintained should be as per the IESNA/CIBSE standard.
3. The lighting/dimming control system should be compatible with all dimming
technologies as listed below;
• Direct/Phase dimming
• 1-10V analogue dimming and
• DALI dimming (Digital Addressable Lighting Interface).
b. Guest Room level- corridor lighting:
1. Lights shall be dimmable through LCP/ Dimmer rack and the circuits shall be grouped
to have 30/50/100% lighting based on programmable time schedules. Local control
from scene selection control plates located in nearest electrical room also shall be
possible. In addition to this, control from the master control plate located at Main
reception in the lobby level also shall be possible.
c. Common Area /BOH lighting:
1. All lights in the lift lobbies, back of house offices, public toilets shall be controlled using
a movement/presence detector and override control plates/ switches. Central
control from the PC software also shall be possible. For the lobbies and public areas,
Lighting Circuits should be designed to achieve a minimum light level (for example 35
- 40%) during non-activity period.
2. All service rooms like Electrical Rooms/IDF Rooms/GSM Room/Central Battery
Rooms/Mechanical plant rooms etc shall be controlled from manual switches as
indicated in the drawing.
3. During a Fire condition all the lights should automatically be switched ON to 100 %
until the situation is restored.
d. Exterior Lighting:
1. Lights fed from external lighting DBs catering to the external areas like open car parks,
landscapes, external pool area and façades should be controlled based on daylight.
26 09 43
A 3-channel daylight switch/intelligent photo-sensor capable of switching up to three

lighting groups where each individual channel has a separate switching set point
shall be used.
2. The brightness range of the set points shall be adjustable from 1 to 20000 lux as
agreed with the engineer at the time of commissioning. A light sensor shall be
connected to the switch to detect daylight. In addition these lights shall be controlled
in combination with a timer according to the schedules proposed by the end
user/engineer in line to the availability of the natural light. Astronomical clock shall
schedule the timer to calculate the daytime as during different months of a year.
3. The actuators/contactor timer etc may be installed in suitable whether proof
enclosures inside the External lighting Feeder pillar where applicable.
4. Day light sensors shall be linked to the LCS so as to control various LCPs controlling
external lights.
5. External feeder pillars shall be provided with KNX relay or equivalent and an IP router
which shall be linked to the nearest building data network. KNX relay shall switch on
all lights in the feeder pillar remotely from the main LCS based on time schedules.
e. Basement Car park:
1. All the covered car park lights and driveway lights would be switched "ON" based on
programmable time intervals/weekly time schedules from the central timer. Circuits
shall be grouped in such a way that 30% / 50% /100% of the lights could be switched
ON as per pre-programmed time schedules. All ramp lights should be kept ON
always.
2. There shall be local override control from an LCD Display and Control unit located in
the Security room/Engineering office. In addition to this, control from the master
control plate located at Main reception in the lobby level also shall be possible.
3. Lighting controls shall be integrated with central battery system using dedicated
control modules of CBS suitable for switching/dimming of the lights. During a fire
condition all the lights should be switched ON to 100% illumination until the situation is
restored.(Also applicable for Dimmer Racks used elsewhere)
f. Staircase lights:
1. All staircase lights shall be controlled via intelligent Push buttons located on each
entry to the stair. The “lights ON delay” of the push buttons shall be programmable
from the LCS central software.
2. In addition to the push buttons, ceiling mounted PIR/movement detectors with
360Degree coverage shall be provided on each landings to avoid inadvertent
switching OFF of the lights after the elapse of time delay.
3. All stair case lights shall be fed from circuits of DB in the lowest level of the stairwell.
4. During a Fire condition all the staircase the lights should automatically be switched
ON until the situation is restored.
1.4 Submittals
1. Specification compliance Document: Indicate whether the submitted equipment

meets specification exactly as stated.
2. Shop Drawings should include:
a) Load schedule indicating actual connected load, load type, and control schedule.
b) Schematic Diagram of complete system.
26 09 43
c) GA drawings of LCP/Dimmer racks.
3. Product Data: Catalog cut sheets with performance specifications demonstrating

compliance with specified requirements.
1.5 Quality Assurance
Manufacturer: Minimum 15 years’ experience in manufacture of lighting control

system products.
Manufacturer’s Quality System: Registered to ISO 9001:2000 Quality Standards,
including in-house engineering for product design activities.
1.6 Project Conditions
Do not install equipment until following conditions can be maintained in spaces to

receive equipment:
1. Ambient temperature: 0 degrees to 40 degrees C.
2. Relative humidity: Maximum 90 percent, non-condensing.
3. Lighting Control system components must be protected from dust during installation.
1.7 Warranty
1. Provide Manufacturer’s Warranty:

2. Standard 2 Year warranty from date of successful handing over of project, Includes
replacement Parts for Manufacturer lighting control system component
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1 Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following or ‘Approved equal’.
Acceptable Manufacturers:
• ABB- GERMANY
• SCHNEIDER, UK,
• LUTRON- USA
2.2 General
1. Acceptable System Protocols are KNX, Bacnet, OPC or similar. In case of using a
different protocol than the ones specified, the proposed protocol must have a
minimum of 300 manufacturers producing devices which operate using the proposed
protocol. Devices from these manufacturers should be compatible and interoperable
in field level without the need of server/PC integration. Any protocol not abiding by
the latter shall not be accepted.
2. The system is completely de-centralized and programmable. Each individual device

shall have its own intelligence (EEPROM) and programmed parameters configured by
using PC or notebook computer located anywhere in the system. In case of power
failure all the configuration and status information are to be stored and retained in
the EEPROM. This data shall be pushed back to the device once electrical current is
26 09 43
back. System with additional built-in or external battery that needs to be changed
periodically for information storage shall not be accepted.
3. The entire system consists of bus lines each consisting of up to 64 devices which can
be extended up to 255 devices and shall have a topology supporting more than
57000 devices. The system topology has the capability to be interfaced to the TCP/IP
platform via the IP routers.
4. The communication cable that links all the devices in the system bus with the data
and power residing on the same medium. It is also be possible to lay the cable along
with the power mains.
5. The LCPs shall be networked through KNX bus cable and shall be connected to a
data point in the nearest IDF of the hotel network. Apart from this additional KNX bus
cable shall be provided for redundancy.
6. The bus connection terminal of all the devices has 4 bus connection possibilities for
looping or branching of bus cable and shall laid in all possible configurations i.e.
linear, star or tree architecture similar to the power mains. It is thereby possible to
disconnect the devices without interrupting the bus line.
7. Online programming of any device on the system shall be possible without affecting
the other devices on the system as well as off-line prior to dispatch of the material to
site. In the event of failure of a device in one line, only the control functions controlled
by that device would be affected and all other devices operate as normal.
8. Each device operates via the 21-30VDC made available on the bus line. The power
supply unit should be 640mA/ 320mA /160mA version depending upon the network
density. The power supply module feeding power to the network shall be an
uninterrupted power supply and shall be able to provide back-up power to
compensate short voltage interruptions of up to 200 ms (without connected battery)
and up to 10 minutes battery backup in case of mains failure. This back-up power
shall enable the system to put all actuators in a fail-safe position (either on or off or as
it is) in the event of power failure
9. There is a Diagnosis and Protection unit which enables quick diagnostics of the bus
state and indicates bus traffic via an LED. A bus fault (U < U min) is indicated by
normally open and normally closed contact. The unit incorporates a suppressor diode
which suppresses transient over voltages and interference voltage spikes on the bus.
10. Devices are protected internally against overvoltage impulses up to 2 kV (1.2/50),

which is achieved via overvoltage protector (surge arrester).
11. There shall be a dedicated Lighting Control Panel (LCP) for every DB intended to
control lights, as indicated in the schematic. Contractor has to group the circuits of
adjacent DBs so as to optimize the number of LCPs. The LCPs shall house the system
devices and the related control equipment depending on the no. of circuits being
controlled. This is to ensure the power wiring between the DB’s and the control
modules inside the LCP is kept to a minimum. The LCP shall be made of minimum 1.6
mm thick sheet steel and shall be surface mounted in metallic enclosures together
with built-in DIN-rails for easy installation of the control equipment. Minimum 25% spare
ways shall be considered while selecting the number of channels.
26 09 43
12. Dimmer racks shall be 3 Phase type, made of minimum 1.6 mm thick sheet steel and
shall incorporate suitably rated 3 phase Isolator , 300 mA RCD and outgoing circuit
protection single pole MCBs. Dimmer racks shall be used for dimming as well as
switching as detailed in the control schedule by the specialist lighting consultant.
Required number of DALI / 1-10V gateways and Switching actuators shall be housed
in the dimmer racks. Minimum 25% spare ways shall be considered while selecting the
number of channels. There shall be separate a section for terminating wiring to
outgoing DALI control groups.
13. For external lighting applications, the LCP shall be surface mounted in IP65 GRP
enclosures together with built-in DIN-rails within Feeder Pillars for outdoor application.
a. The lighting system proposed shall have the ability of direct connectivity with Dimming
Control System (if applicable) on the same protocol & platform.
14. Each of the devices in the network shall operate with low current consumption not
exceeding 40 mA in full operation. The system devices / Switches requiring higher
current that increases the total running cost of the system are not acceptable.
15. The system shall have the capability do the configuration and modifications onsite
with a certified engineer. System which uses firmware downloads and patches for
each modification from the supplier factory are not acceptable.
16. The system shall communicate through CSMA/CA with parity checks in order to avoid
collision in the bus thereby increasing the system flexibility and bandwidth allocation.
System which works on Polling or master- slave configurations shall not be accepted.
17. The system should be based on open protocol which is a peer-to-peer, event driven
technology. Systems which are not able to achieve communication via standard
communication protocols are not acceptable.
18. The Lighting Control System supports open protocol over OPC Server/Client or BACnet
to integrate with other systems such as Building Management System (BMS), Fire,
Security and Access Control System, where applicable.
19. The Lighting Control System shall be capable of controlled via Smart Devices
(iOS/Android Tablets) using secure building IT infrastructure. The Smart Devices shall
connect as web-client to the central Lighting control server.
2.3 System Components:
The System shall include but not limited to the following:
• Switch Actuator
• Dimming Actuators / Gateways
• Diagnosis Unit
• Ceiling mounted Presence Detector
• Lux Sensor
• Central Touch Screens with Display unit
• Control plates for switching/dimming scene selection,
ON/OFF/Raise/Lower of light levels
• System Devices
• Head End PC with Visualization Software.
• Fire Alarm Interface ( Free Contacts )
26 09 43
• System level integration with BMS
2.3.1 Switch Actuator:
Shall be DIN rail mounted consisting of two (2), four (4), eight (8) or (12) individual
programmable channels with integral relays (contactor). Each channel of the switch
Actuator shall be suitable for 16/20AX C-Load for both AC1 & AC3 loads according to
standard EN 60947-4-1, especially suitable for switching of loads with high surge
current such as lighting with compensatory capacitor or fluorescent lighting loads
according to EN 60 669. Each channel of the switch actuator shall have manual
operation and display of the switching status and also a maximum peak inrush
current capacity of 600A. The electrical endurance for AC1 load shall be 100,000
operations and for AC3 load shall be 30,000 operations according to IEC 60947-4-1.
The mechanical contact endurance shall be 1,000,000 operations. The contactors
should also have a capacitive load rating of at least 200 microfarads. The module
shall derive its control supply via the bus.
2.3.2 Direct Dimming modules/Phase Dimming:
2.3.2.1 for loads up to 2400VA:

1. Dimming modules shall be universal (phase and phase interval control) in order to dim any
type of filament type fittings (such as Incandescent, Low voltage halogen, Halogen,
xenon…etc.). Additional ballasts / dimmable transformers shall not be used to dim any of
these lamps. It shall be connected directly to the bus via bus connecting terminals.
2. They shall be plug-in type DIN rail-mounted self-contained with driver PCB, Transistors, filters
and related circuitry providing noise free dimming and protection against round control
pulses.
3. They shall be available in 4 independent channels each 210VA or 315VA or 600VA each
channel shall be able to operate different load types. It shall be possible to combine
channels to provide maximum load output of 840VA, 1260VA, 1890VA or 2400VA.
4. Universal Dimming modules shall have automatic load detection facility then the
controller will be able to set the operating mode accordingly (phase control or phase
interval control).
2.3.2.2 for loads 1.2KW & 2KW:

1. Dimming modules shall be available in phase control in order to dim filament type fittings
(such as Incandescent, Low voltage halogen with conventional transformers, Halogen,
xenon…etc.).
2. They shall be plug-in type DIN rail-mounted self-contained with driver PCB, SCRs, filters and
related circuitry providing noise free dimming and protection against round control pulses.
3. They shall be available in one or two independent channels. Each channel shall be able
to operate different load types.
4. Universal Dimming modules shall have automatic load detection facility then the
controller will be able to set the operating mode accordingly (phase control or phase
interval control).
5. The output channels of the dimming modules shall have an electronic current limiting in
case of exceeding the maximal temperature. They shall have also protection against
voltage peaks.
2.3.2.3 For loads 3KW,5KW,8KW:

1. Dimming Controllers shall be plug-in modules type operating in phase control mode with 2
thyristor integrated harmonic filter and suppression according to VDE Norm 0875/N.
26 09 43
2. The dimmers shall have a base plate with terminal blocks so that it can be mounted and
wired first without the essential dimmer module, which can be plugged onto the base
when actually required.
3. An electronic lock, allowing no current flow, shall prevent the insertion of a wrong plug-in
module to a base plate.
4. Load amplification shall be achieved by combination of up to 3 such modules.
5. All Dimming modules 2KW to 8KW shall be in uniform size to be plugged into the Dimmer
rack cabinet and to be connected to the Dimmer controller.
6. Dimming modules shall be self-contained with thyristor and related circuitry providing noise
free dimming and protection against round control pulses.
2.3.3 Dimming control modules for fluorescent type light fittings:

1. Dimming modules shall be plug-in type DIN rail-mounted comprising of two-16A AC1
switching channels (latch-on type relay) and two passive 0 – 10 VDC channels for the high
frequency dimmable ballasts. Dimmers providing 1 – 10 VDC (10 – 100 % brightness) signal
shall not be acceptable.
2. Each of the dimming modules shall be designed to operate the load as per the consultant
approved load schedule.
3. Each of the switching channels shall be used to switch the light fittings On/Off while the
corresponding 0 – 10 VDC channel will provide the control (dimming) for the high
frequency dimmable ballasts. Dimmers without latch-on type relay switching channel shall
not be acceptable.
4. Each of the channels shall be individually programmed to control a circuit irrespective of
the other channel-controlled circuit.
5. The dimming module shall include an additional two signal input terminals for connecting
light sensors, thus dimmer module when combined with light sensor can be used as 2-
channel light controller for constant light control if required.
6. Dimming circuits shall be able to be switched on with preprogrammed value from 0 –
100%, additionally dimming shall be also possible between preprogrammed minimum and
maximum values.
7. Dimming controller shall be capable of being programmed to attain a fail-safe position in
the event of power failure. On power restoration after a power loss to the system, the
control system shall automatically revert back to the particular setting for each channel
prior to the power loss.
8. Fluorescent type light fittings shall be equipped with High Frequency Dimmable Ballasts
accepting 0-10 VDC signal. These High Frequency dimmable ballasts should be an
integral part of the light fittings and supplied by the light-fitting manufacturer.
2.3.4 Dimming control modules for light fittings with DALI ballast:
1. The DALI Gateway (DALI = Digital Addressable Lighting Interface) is used for
controlling DALI equipment (ballasts, transformers, LED converters, etc. using the DALI
interface to IEC/EN 62 386/60 929) via open protocol.
2. Up to 64 DALI devices can be connected to a main channel. Each one of the 64
individual devices can be directly switched, dimmed or brightness controlled with just
one communication object. A further 64 DALI devices on a second auxiliary channel
can be individual controlled with two communication objects.The 64 DALI slaves on a
channel can be controlled and monitored via broadcast mode.
3. The following functions shall be available:
• Switching
• Dimming
• Set brightness value
• Feedbacks such as ballast and lamp faults
• “Burn in” function for lamps
26 09 43
4. The parameterisation of the DALI gateway shall be carried out via the Engineering
Tool Software (ETS). The DALI address is implemented automatically by the DALI
Gateway. The DALI devices are immediately available for control via system bus.The
group assignment is implemented with the group functions. The DALI current source is
integrated into the gateway for the 128 DALI slaves.
• Outputs 2 independent DALI channels
• Number of DALI devices max. 64 per channel
• Operating voltage 85…265 V AC, 45...65 Hz 110...240 V DC
• Connection Screw terminal
• Bus connection terminal
• Type of protection IP 20,
• DIN EN 60 529 Installation on 35 mm mounting rail, DIN EN 60 715
• Width 4 modules at 18 mm
2.3.5 Diagnosis Unit:

Diagnosis unit shall be installed to monitor the bus control status and indicate bus
traffic via an LED. Bus voltage drop from the minimum value shall be indicated by
a normally open and normally closed contact as well. The module shall
incorporate with a suppressor diode to avoid interferences voltage spikes and
suppresses transient over voltages on the bus.
2.3.6 Ceiling mounted Presence Detector:

The sensor shall be able to control up to 29 different group addresses
 Ceiling: Concealed RCC, Gypsum, steel false ceiling

 Sensor angle: 360°
 Detection range: at 2.50 m mounting height: 8 m in dia.
 Double Height Ceiling detection range: at 6 m mounting height: 18 m in dia.
 Adjustable brightness: 5 to 1000 Lx
 Product standard: EN 60669-2-1
 Type of protection: IP 20, EN 60 529
 Switching channels: 2 switching channels to control switch
actuator at different brightness levels
2.3.7 Brightness/LUX Sensor (for Outdoor):

3-channel, Modular DIN rail component.
 LUX settings: 1…20,000 lx
 Type of protection: Control device IP 20, EN 60 529 (Inside the enclosure)
Light sensor IP 54, EN 60 529
2.3.8 Touch Screen

• 7 inch Color Touch Screen with:
- Indication of switching states, fault signals and measured values
- Central manual switching of loads
- setting of time programs
- Issue of acoustic warning signals.
• Up 20 Pages
• With Scene Controller and Time Functions.
• Power supply: 230 V AC, 50 Hz via screw terminals
• Type of protection: IP 20, EN 60 529
• Installation: Flush-mounted or cavity wall installation in wall box.
26 09 43
2.3.9 Time Switch

Time Switch sends current time and date on the bus. Furthermore, the device can
be used to easily adjust the time programs.
Functions:
• 800 memory locations
• Astronomical function with automatic calculation of sunrise and sunset times
• Operation on the device with display backlight
• Programming of the time programs on a PC
• Transfer of time programs via memory card or via the system bus
• Automatic summer/winter time changeover
• Holiday and random programs
• Protection against unauthorized access (PIN)
• 8 years power reserve (lithium backup battery)
• Number of channels: 8
• Supply voltage: 110…240 V AC, 50/60 Hz
• Connection: Screw-less terminals
• Mounting: 35 mm mounting rail, IEC/EN 60 715
2.3.10 System Devices
2.3.10.1 System Power Supply:

The power supply for the lighting control system shall be reliable and designed to
withstand any severe severe conditions during commissioning and operation. It
shall be able to withstand high voltage surges in the line. The common power
supplies available in the market shall not be accepted. The rating of the power
supply shall be 640/320mA which can power up to 64/32 bus devices. The bus line
shall be decoupled from the power supply with the integrated choke. The Power
supply shall have the capacity to withstand short-circuit in the Bus for an infinite
time. Once the short circuit is removed it shall retain its normal operation. The
power supplies with output fuse protection are not accepted. The unit shall have
Green LED for output voltage and Red LED overload/short circuit. The power
supply shall be reliable and to be from the same manufacturer. The CE
certification and Environmental information stating the model number showing
manufacturer name shall be submitted along with the submittal and same shall
be downloadable from online resources.
Power supply 230 VAC, 50 ... 60 Hz
Output nominal voltage 30 VDC +1 /-2 V, SELV
Output nominal current 640 mA, short circuit proof (not by fuse)
Connection
30 VDC Connection terminals
Protection IP 20 to EN 60 529
Installation on 35mm DIN rail, DIN EN 50 022
Width 6 modules at 18 mm
2.3.10.2 IP Router:
The IP Router connects the System bus with the Ethernet network. The device uses
the System Bus/IP protocol for communication (Routing and Tunnelling). It can be
used as a fast line and area coupler and can utilise the local network (LAN) for
fast exchange of telegrams between the lines/areas. Devices can be
programmed via the LAN. The IP address can be fixed or can be received from a
DHCP server. The power supply range is from 10 to 30 V DC.
26 09 43
2.3.11 Centralized Monitoring/Control & interfaces:
The entire system shall be based on a Lighting control server mounted on a

dedicated rack located in the BMS room or Engineering Office. This rack shall be
provided with UPS supply. Centralized monitoring & control server shall be
available at the LCS head-end PC and equipped with Graphical User Interface
Software (GUI).The LCS head-end PC shall be located at the BMS room or Hotel
Engineering office.
2.3.12 BACnet Interface to BMS System:
a. The system shall be integrated to the Building management system over

BACnet/IP to provide the relevant Lighting data points for monitoring. The
integration shall be seamless integration via software.
b. Necessary BACnet / Other Protocol Gateway with software & licenses for
interfacing of Lighting Management with BACnet System shall be provided.
c. Provide BACnet / IP or BACnet/MSTP interface between the Lighting Control

System and Main BMS Client server.
d. With BACnet interface all points on the Lighting Control System shall be
represented as BACnet objects on the BMS Client.
e. BACnet interface shall provide all control & monitoring points of the Lighting
Control System to the BMS.
f. BACnet output provided shall be compatible to the Main BMS System of the
project.
g. Contractor shall provide necessary BACnet Gateway unit if the interface output is
in a different protocol then the central BMS protocol.
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.1 Installation:
Install equipment in accordance with manufacturer’s installation instructions.

Provide complete installation of system in accordance with Contract Documents.
Provide equipment at locations and in quantities indicated on Drawings. Provide any
additional equipment required to provide the control intent as per the drawings.
Contractor has to submit the following:

1. Method statement for installation
2. Provide mock-up of installation
3.2 Start Up, Testing and Commissioning:
Contractor has to submit the following:

1. Method statement for Testing & Commissioning
2. Test the entire system to the satisfaction of Engineer's representative and submit test
reports.
26 09 43
3. Provide detailed maintenance schedule. Schedule has to be submitted during the (T

& C) period for review/comments.
4. Detailed Test Report for Systems Services, stamped by approved specialist.
5. Contractor has to provide the End-User/Client proper training for operating all systems
training schedule/agenda has to be submitted for approval in (15) days prior
handing over date.
26 09 43
26 23 00 - Low-Voltage Switchgear
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1.1 Provide, install, test, commission and maintain during the defects liability period Low
voltage switchgear panel with all accessories, including sub main panel boards,
Distribution Boards, complete with all equipment to meet the full requirements of a
working system and in accordance with the drawings.

260100 : Operation & Maintenance of Electrical Systems
262000 : Services and Distribution Systems
264100 : Lightning Protection System
260526 : Earthing System
263213 : Auto Diesel Generator Set
1.2.1 The LV switchgear and control gear is a combination of one or more LV switchgear
devices together with associated control, measuring, protective and regulating
equipment, completely assembled with all the internal electrical, mechanical
interconnections and structural parts meeting the requirements of BS 5486 Part 1 and
comprising:
- Air Circuit Breakers to BS4752/IEC 60947-2
- HRC Fuse Switches to BS5419/IEC 408
- On-load Switches to BS 5419/IEC 408
- Heavy Duty Isolators to BS5419/IEC 408
- HRC Fuse Cartridges to BS88/IEC 269
- HRC Fuse Units to BS88/IEC 269
- Miniature Circuit Breakers to BS3871 Part 1/IEC 60947-2 & IEC 60898
- Moulded Case Circuit Breakers to BS387 Part 2/ IEC 60947-2
- Distribution Boards to BS214 and BS5486 Part 2
- Motor Starter Panels to BS5486 Part 1
- Contactors to BS5424/IEC 158

The installation throughout shall be of the best quality materials erected by skilled

Except where specified otherwise, all work shall conform to the relevant Standards Codes
of Practice currently applicable including the following:
a) IEC 61439-1/2 Low voltage switchgear & controlgear assemblies – Part 2

Power switchgear and controlgear assemblies
b) IEC61641 Enclosed low voltage switchgear and controlgear assemblies Guide for testing
under conditions of arcing due to internal fault
c) IEC60044-1 Current transformers
d) IEC60186 Voltage transformers
26 23 00
e) IEC60529 Degrees of protection provided by enclosures

f) IEC60947-2 Low voltage switchgear & control gear – part 2 Circuit breakers
g) IEC60947-3
h) IEC60068 Environmental testing
i) IEC61140 Protection against electric shock – Common aspects for installation and
equipment – Basic safety publication
j) IEC60 947-4-1 Contactors and motor starters
1.3.3 The manufacturer’s quality management systems shall be in accordance with British
Standard Specification BS: 5750 Part 1:1979 which cover the specification for design,
manufacture and installation.
The system shall also be backed by the control of measuring devices, measuring gauges
and test equipment in accordance with BS: 5781 Parts 1 & 2 "Measurement and
Calibration Systems".
1.4 Submittals
The Contractor shall submit following details for approval prior to commencement of work:
1.4.1 Product Data:

Submit manufacturer’s specifications for all equipment showing materials used in
manufacture, sizes and profiles of fittings, methods of jointing and installation instructions.
Submit manufacturer's data for all equipment identifying model references and types.
i) Materials
ii) Methods of Construction
iii) Installation Requirements
iv) Performance
1.4.2 Manufacturing & working drawings:

The manufacturer shall provide three sets of manufacturing and working drawings for
approval. Any comments made thereon shall be incorporated and three further copies of
the drawing shall be submitted for approval. Once approval has been given, by stamped
notation by the Engineer, three sets of drawings shall be submitted, marked by
manufacturer as "APPROVED FOR CONSTRUCTION". No manufacture of the panels shall
commence until approval has been obtained. Should manufacture commence prior to
approval and modifications are required, these to be carried out at the manufacturers
own expense.
The drawing submission shall include but shall not be limited to the following:
i) External panel construction: detailing all dimensions, method of construction, and position
of equipment.
ii) Internal panel construction: detailing position of equipment, terminals, wire ways, cabling,
busbars and connection, indicating fixed and withdraw able components complete with
dimensions.
iii) Schematic and wiring Diagram: detailing system arrangement, equipment ratings,
interlocks and instrumentation.
iv) Legend: Schedule of symbols and their functions.
vi) Schedule of components: Defining manufacturer, ratings, type or list numbers and their
quantities.
vii) Catalogues of various components such as ACB, MCCB, MCB, instruments etc. in original.
1.5 Quality control
1.5.1 L.V. Switchgear panel shall be fully tested at the factory, prior to shipping, in the presence
of Engineer of Architect Firm and/or Client’s Engineer.
26 23 00
1.5.2 Engineer’s inspection and testing of L.V. Switchgear panel will be to verify visual qualities
and to witness tests only.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 Mains panels:
a) Mains switchboards within the LV Switch room shall be of the type and rating detailed on
the drawings and shall be free standing, floor mounted type & FORM 4B construction
and shall be ASTA certified type or other Equal Approved Independent testing bodies in
accordance with Design verified acc. to IEC 61439
b) Panel board enclosures shall be metal clad painted in accordance with BS 3810 and
thickness shall be 2mm.
c) The Electrical Contractor shall include for all protective devices such as earth leakage
trips, overloads, relays and interlocking devices, low voltage phase indicator lamps etc. as
detailed on the drawings and within the particular specification. Spare MCCBS shall be
provided in Main Panels as indicated on the drawings.
d) Full working drawings of the mains panels shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval
prior to manufacture and in sufficient time so as not to delay the progress of the works.
e) The Contractor shall ensure that adequate cable entry positions are provided to suit the
particular site conditions.
f) In case of locally assembled Main Panels, it should be from an EDD Approved Franchised
Panel builder certified and guaranteed by Original Manufacturer having minimum 5 yrs
supply record in the Kingdom of Bahrain. Also enclosure system shall be type tested units
from the original manufacturer that of components.
g) All the equipment like ACB, Motor protection MCCB, MCBs, Contactors, Drives, Soft
Starters, Overload Relays etc., shall be of the latest technology having latest protection
and metering system and shall be from one single manufacturer.
h) The switchboard shall be totally compartmentalized and manufactured to IEC

61439-1 Form 4 with IP 42 degree of protection as per IEC 60529. All the
compartments of switchboards shall be adequately vermin proofed.
i) Control wiring within the cubicle shall be neatly arranged and cleated. Cleats shall
be fixed to the switch board structure at sufficient intervals to avoid cable sag.
Adequate cable loops must be allowed to accessories on doors to avoid cable
stretch.
j) Control wiring within the panel boards shall be a minimum 2.5 sq.mm and
protected by HRC fuses of 10A mounted directly on the bus bars in an accessible
location. The bus bar shroud shall be extended around the fuse bases to prevent
accidental contact with the bus bars while replacing the fuses.
k) The neutral bus bars shall be of 100% of that of phase and linked to the earth bus
bars. These links shall be removable. The earth bar shall be a minimum of 300 sq. mm and
continuous throughout the length of the panel. Under no circumstance, a common
earth/neutral bar will be accepted.
26 23 00
l) All earth bars shall be so mounted that there is no restriction to the cable access by the
structure / frame work. If required, cable trays shall be mounted to support the cables.
2.1.1 Air Circuit Breakers

a) The Air circuit breakers shall comply with IEC 60947-2 utilization category-B. The breaking
performance shall be such that Service breaking capacity (Ics) should be equal to the
Ultimate breaking capacity (Icu). The breaking capacity selected shall be in line with the
drawings/data sheets provided.
b) The ACBs shall have a rated operational voltage of 690V AC (50/60Hz) and rated
insulation voltage 1000V AC (50/60Hz). The ACBs shall be fully tropicalised (T2) as standard.
The ACBs shall have one size from 800A to 2500A. The main contacts shall be encased in a
reinforced polyester casing and offer double insulation from the operators on the breaker
front face.
c) All ACB’s shall be draw out type and of 3 or 4 pole as indicated on the drawing. The draw
out operation shall be possible through a closed door, while the racking handle shall be
stored on the ACB in such a manner as to be accessible without defeating the door
interlocking. Bus-coupler ACB”s shall be of the 4 pole type. Insulated safety shutters shall
be provided over the incoming and outgoing main circuits and over the auxiliary circuits
in all draw out ACB”s.
i. The ACB’s shall be operated via a stored energy mechanism for instantaneous opening
and closing. The mechanism shall be charged manually (or electrically if required as per
Single line diagram). Closing and opening operations can be initiated from the local push
buttons on the circuit breaker front face (or by remote control).
ii. The ACB”s shall be equipped with shunt trip mechanism for tripping.
iii. The ACB’s used for the bus coupler shall be manual operating type.
d) The ACB’s shall be equipped with a solid state microprocessor based control unit for
protection against Overload, Short-circuit and earth fault and shall have the following
function:
• LT (Adjustable Long time protection (0.64 to 1 x In) with Time delay (15 to 480s)
• ST (Adjustable Short time protection with Time delay
• I (Instantaneous protection)
• Earth Fault Protection.
• Local fault trip Indicator
• Differentiated Fault trip indicator.
• Remote fault trip indication with remote indication output.
• Local pre alarm indication
• Three phase load bar graph Indicator
• In built digital Ammeter
• Provision for adapt communication facilities in future.
The ACB’s used for bus couplers shall be without any protection unit and would act as a
switched disconnector.
e) The ACB section of the switch board shall be in separate cubicle separated from other
parts of the switch board. This section shall not have any outgoing feeders.
f) The gland plate for the incoming cables shall be non-ferrous material with brass
compression type glands, earthing tags and shrouds.
2.1.2 Outgoing feeders

Moulded Case Circuit Breaker
a) Contactor to provide MCCBs as indicated on the tender drawings of the outgoing
feeders. They shall be triple pole, 415volts, 50Hz with magnetic short circuit and thermal
26 23 00
over load protection complying with IEC 60947-2 category A. MCCB shall be of
interrupting capacity as indicated in the drawing.
b) The breaking performance shall be such that Service breaking capacity (Ics) should be
equal to the Ultimate breaking capacity (Icu). The breaking capacity selected shall be in
line with the drawings / data sheets provided. The MCCBs shall have a rated operational
voltage of 690V AC (50/60Hz) and rated insulation voltage 1000V AC (50/60Hz).The
MCCBs shall be fully tropicalized (T2) as standard.
c) The MCCBs shall be capable of limiting currents. For short-circuits, the maximum thermal
stress I2t shall be limited to:
106A2s for ratings up to 250A.
5 x 106A2s for ratings between 400A and 630A.
In general, all outgoing MCCBs shall be adjustable type.
d) MCCBs up to 250A rating shall be equipped with Thermal-Magnetic trip units. The trip units
shall have adjustable Thermal protection, Fixed magnetic protection for ratings up to 160A
and adjustable thermal and magnetic protection for ratings greater than 200A. MCCBs
over 250A shall be equipped with Electronic trip units having the following function:
LT (Adjustable Long time protection (0.4 to 1 x In)
ST (Adjustable Short time protection with Time delay)
I (Instantaneous protection)
2.2 Submain Panels
a) The sub main board shall be suitable for operation on 3phase, 4wire, 50 HZ, 400 volts, A.C.
supply. The panel shall be cubicle type suitable for floor/wall mounting comprising of
isolator, contactor, MCCB or switch fuse units as shown on the electrical schematic
drawing. The type of construction shall be minimum FORM -2B and in accordance with
the drawings.
b) Factory Built and Type Tested Assemblies (FBA and TTA) of switchgear in
accordance with IEC 61439-2
c) In case of locally assembled Sub main Panels, it should be from an EDD approved
Franchised Panel builder certified and guaranteed by Original Manufacturer having
minimum 5 yrs supply record in the Kingdom of Bahrain. Also enclosure system shall be
type tested units from the original manufacturer that of components.
d) The bus bars shall be electrolytic copper, PVC sleeved or enclosed, supported on non-
hygroscopic insulating supports.
e) The board shall be equipped with name plates to identify the feeders and also danger
boards as specified earlier. The minimum fault level of this panel shall be 36 kA.
f) The breaking performance shall be such that Service breaking capacity (Ics) should be 50
% of the Ultimate breaking capacity (Icu).
g) The MCCBs shall be triple pole, moulded case type complete with magnetic short circuit
and thermal overload protection, suitable for the ambient temperature of 50°C.
h) For the MCCBs equipped with Electronic trip units on the outgoing feeders of sub main
panel, shall have the following function:
LT (Adjustable Long time protection (0.4 to 1 x In)
I (Instantaneous protection).
i) The panel shall be complete with 3 ammeters with current transformers, Voltmeter and
Neon phase indicators or as indicated in the Single line diagram.
2.3 Distribution boards
a) Distribution boards shall be metal clad and totally rust proof and conform to IEC 60439-1
and be suitable for operation on 230/400 volts, 1 phase/3 phase, 50 Hz, 4 wire A.C. system.
These boards shall be factory assembled, either flush or surface mounted as indicated on
the tender drawings. Total assemblies are to be type tested with type test certificate
by ASTA or KEMA.
b) The boards generally shall have mixed capacity for lighting and general power sub-
circuits for items as shown and indicated on the drawings or in these electrical
26 23 00
specifications. All boards shall be complete with MCBs, RCCBs, main incoming isolator
which shall be connected directly to the D.B bus bars and other accessories as required.
c) The enclosure shall be fabricated from zinc coated steel sheet having adequate gauge
to ensure a rigid robust construction free from distortion. Each enclosure shall be of
adequate size to accommodate all the components specified, stove enamelled.
d) The enclosure shall be fitted with a sheet steel front panel which shall be firmly fixed by
cheese-head screws. Screw holes shall have a minimum depth of 6 mm. The front panel
shall be cut neatly to allow the MCBs/RCCBs levers to protrude through. The front panel
shall however effectively conceal all conductors, contactors, bus bars and any other live
parts installed within the enclosures.
e) Each enclosure shall be fitted with a rigidly constructed double hinged steel sheet door.
All doors shall be provided with gaskets and fitted with at least two robust hinges. Each
enclosure shall be fully equipped to accommodate the number of MCBs/RCCBs of ratings
as indicated on the drawings. Where the Contractor offers enclosures designed to
accommodate a greater number of breakers than indicated on the drawings, the
Contractor shall supply the additional breakers of rating to be agreed with the Engineer.
Blank shields shall be provided for the rest of the space.
f) Where single phase distribution boards are specified they shall be complete with double
pole isolator and where three phase distribution boards are specified they shall be
complete with triple pole isolator and a demountable/removable neutral link. These
isolators shall be integral and connected directly to bus bars. These bus bars shall be
shrouded.
g) Each distribution board shall have separate earth neutral bars having the same number of
connections as there are phase connections. A cable connection shall be made from
earth bar to the incoming cable gland earth tag.
h) All phase and neutral bars shall be sized to carry the full load current of the controlling
breaker which shall be of flat tinned copper rigidly mounted, supported on shock-resisting,
non-hygroscopic, high grade insulators with high resistance to tracking, not subject to
mould growth or termite attack with adequate spacing and clearance.
I) Connection from the bus bars to the breakers shall be made by using solid circular
insulated conductors or insulated and tinned copper strip neatly set and formed. Each
connection to or from a phase or neutral bar shall have its own brass fixing screws,
washers, butts and locknuts. All live terminals of parts and bus bars shall be shrouded with
insulating materials to ensure that it is impossible for any live metal to be touched while
withdrawing or replacing MCBs.
j) All breakers and DBs shall be of one make throughout the whole of the works.
k) Each distribution board shall be fitted with an identification label on its front cover. The
label shall be suitably inscribed stating the distribution boards reference number/letter,
rating in volts & amperes and the number of ways in English and Arabic. In addition to the
above a reference card shall be fitted inside the distribution board giving details of each
circuit, MCB size, cable size and location. The reference card shall be affixed to the inside
of the distribution boards door via a transparent envelope.
2.3.1 Miniature Circuit Breakers (MCB)

a) Miniature circuit breakers shall be of an approved make and comply with IEC. 60947-2 &
IEC 60898 with magnetic or temperature compensated thermal overload trips with
magnetic short circuit trips. They shall be of current limiting Type and bolt on to the busbar.
MCBs shall be single pole rated for an ambient temperature of 50ºC. They shall be of
hermetically sealed type with minimum breaking capacity of 9kA according BSEN 60947-
2/ IEC 60947-2 at 415V or otherwise indicated on the tender drawings. The frame size of all
MCBs shall be identical so that they can be easily interchanged. Circuit breaker dollies
shall be of the trip free pattern to prevent closing the breaker on a faulty circuit without
resetting and shall also indicate the ON/OFF positions. Standard rating of MCBs shall be
used for ease of availability.
26 23 00
b) The selection of circuit breaker for installation shall be based on the type of load to be
protected by MCB in each circuit.
i). Load which does not vary much above its rated value, e.g. light, heating loads - the
circuits feeding such apparatus are called steady load circuits and such circuits shall be
protected by miniature circuit breakers for steady load circuits. Their current ratings shall
be at least equal to that of the load and shall be of Class 'B' or 'C' for trip characteristics.
ii). Loads which may have peaks of comparatively short duration above its rated value, e.g.
motors, capacitors etc. Circuits feeding such apparatus are called fluctuating load
circuits and such circuits shall be protected by miniature circuit breakers for fluctuating
load circuits. For these loads, the circuit breakers shall have time/current characteristics
that will allow the transient over current to be carried without tripping or derate the size of
MCB to take care of this transient current as recommended by the manufacturer. These
MCBs shall be of Class 'D' for trip characteristics.
2.3.2 Residual Current Circuit Breaker (RCCB)

a) Current operated residual current circuit breakers (RCCB) shall comply with IEC
61008/BSEN 61008. They shall consist of a current transformer, tripping coil with contactor
assembly, main supply contacts, ON/OFF switch, test button and trip free mechanism all
mounted on a robust body of insulated material. The number of poles and the rated
current shall be as detailed on the drawings and the terminal sizes shall be suitable for the
cables to be connected.
b) The sensitivity of the breakers shall be such that they are capable of detecting earth
leakages of 30 milli amps and the operating time shall not exceed 200 milli seconds under
earth fault conditions. The breaking capacity shall not be less than 3 kA; tripping time shall
be unaffected by temperature changes and shall not be possible to hold the trip
mechanism closed under fault conditions.
c) The windings and coils shall be suitably tropicalised for operating in a relative humidity of
98%. All contacts shall be of robust construction and be of non-welding, self-wiping and
self-aligning type designed for a minimum of 10,000 switching operations.
2.3.3 Residual Current Circuit Breaker with MCB (RCBO)

a) Where combined RCCB/MCB devices are specified, the Contractor shall provide earth
leakage, overload and short circuit protection within the same unit, and shall comply with
IEC61009 /BSEN61009.
b) The sensitivity and tripping time shall be 30 mA and 200 ms respectively. The unit shall be
compatible to other breakers installed within the board and shall have a test circuit with a
test button.
2.4 Construction:
a) The manufacture of panel boards/switchboard should be fully complied with the
requirement of the relevant British Standards and EDD requirements and whose products
have been in satisfactory use in similar for not less than 10 years.
b) All main panels shall be constructed to Form 4B of BS 5486.
c) Frames are to be constructed from folded steel angles strengthened by horizontal and
vertical folded channels and corner gussets. Frameworks are to be enclosed by cold
rolled sheet steel of minimum thickness of 2 mm. Where joints or seams are welded to
provide additional rigidity the welds are to be cleaned off and ground flush. Any grinding
works are to be filled to prevent them from being visible after painting.
d) All frame works, enclosures and doors are to be gasketted to achieve the IP ratings
specified. Gaskets shall form a seal when compressed under pressure between rigid faces.
When compressed the thickness of the gasket shall not be less than two-thirds of the
uncompressed thickness. Gaskets shall be butyl rubber of polychloroprene (neoprene)
which shall be securely fixed by base hardened adhesive (Aeroldrite) or set into retaining
26 23 00
channels. Shrouds shall be purpose made covers of a polycarbonate (Makrolan)

transparent fixed to the steelwork by a minimum of 4 x 1/4" turn quick release screws with
gaskets between surfaces.
e) Enclosure fixings shall relate to the IP rating required to ensure ingress of dust and water
does not occur. For larger panels the steelwork is to be manufactured so that it can be
split into manageable segments for transporting to site. Each segment shall have lifting
eyes fitted such that the weight is taken without distortion. Where lifting eyes are bolted to
the enclosure suitable infills are to be provided so that the defined IP standard is not de-
rated. The segments are to be bolted together and line up and all equipment fitted inside
the various components are wired and tested at works. The fixing bolts used for bolting the
segments together should be tied to the inside of the segments and their purpose clearly
defined on a label attached to them. Wiring connections between segments to be made
by means of kippon plugs and socket connectors which when plugged together are then
fixed by means of screws into tapped holes.
f) Each segment shall have provision in the base for fixing to a concrete plinth within the
plant room. The height of the switchboard shall be limited to 2200mm unless specifically
required to meet the site constraints and approval in writing by the Engineer.
g) The switchgear panels are to comprise of separate compartments within the overall panel
of steelwork to house the individual controls, instrumentation and switchgear. The
individual compartments are to be sized to enable the components to be installed in
accordance with the manufacturer (position of use, clearances to be observed for
electric arc, for the removal of the arc chute, removal of contactor coils etc.). The
apparatus, functional units mounted on the same support and the terminals for external
conductors shall be so arranged to be accessible for mounting, wiring, maintenance,
replacement and resetting.
h) Where frameworks are bolted together the bolts shall be hexagonal head M6x25 zinc
plated into tapped holes, hank bushes fixed to the main steelwork or nuts. Self tapping
bolts or screws will not be permitted.
I) The compartment doors are to be rigid horizontally and vertically stiffened to prevent any
distortion, particularly when manual control and indication components are mounted on
the door.
j) The compartment doors are to be fitted with gaskets so as to protect the interior against
the ingress of duct and damp when the door is closed to meet the IP ratings.
k) The hinges on compartment doors are to allow for the doors to be opened to greater
than 900C movement without undue strain on the hinges and without causing the doors to
distort.
l) Where permanently fixed removable covers are fitted they are to be gasketted in the
same manner as the doors. For cover plates over 600 x 600mm in addition to the four fixing
screws at the corners, extra fixing screws are to be provided at not greater than 300mm
centers to ensure the gasket is held in position. All fixing screws shall be countersunk
shallow domes head M8 x 40 chromium plated brass with recessed collar. All cut-outs on
compartment doors shall be accurately made using a template and all edges finished
smooth and free from burrs and burns.
m) The panel steelwork shall be protected against climatic conditions by degreasing acid
etching the steelwork followed by one coat of rust inhibitor, then two coats of
polyurethane primer followed by two coats of polyurethane top coats, final colours to be
agreed.
n) The interior compartment mounting plates shall be constructed from a minimum of 16
SWG flat sheet steel and are to be rigidly fixed into the compartment and stiffened by
bending of the two longer edges into a 900C lip. The mounting plate shall be thick enough
to enable a minimum of three full threads to be available when tapped holes are made
for fixing the compartment components to the back plate. The mounting plates are to be
removable from the front of the panel and must not deflect on the operation of
switchgear mounted onto them or not set up vibrations when the switchgear is closed.
26 23 00
o) It shall be the manufacturer's responsibility to ensure that the LV switchgear panels are
constructed of materials capable of withstanding the mechanical, electrical and thermal
stress as well as the effect of humidity which will be encountered in normal service.
Information and certified test certificates will be required to indicate the mechanical
strength of the enclosure and shall include:-
i) Thickness of steel used in the construction.
ii) Impact strength test.
iii) Mandrel bending test.
iv) Cone bending test.
v) Persoy hardness.
p) The switchgear panel when fabricated will be dead front, true and will be finished to a
standard BS colour to approval, primed, undercoated and top coated to give a final
appearance entire free from blemishes, undulations, scratches or any defects
whatsoever.
q) The steelwork paint finish shall be subjected to a corrosion resistance test at ambient
temperature on a coated sample of the sheet metal enclosure. Duration of test will
indicate corrosion resistance depending on material coated and on surface condition.
2.4.1 Degrees of protection of enclosures: (IP)

a) Standards IEC 529, BS 5490 and NFC 20.010 give a protection index IP which characterizes
the ability of equipment to withstand the external influences of solid bodies and water.
b) The determination of the IP rating shall depend upon the location of panel which shall fall
into three main categories:-
i) External : IP65
ii) Within a room enclosure classi-

fied as a plant area including
mechanical or plumbing or
electrical or a multi-service
riser shaft including
mechanical or electrical or
plumbing. : IP54
iii) Controlled environment for
temperature, moisture, dust
and maintenance factors as
internal residential and
office accommodation. : IP31
c) The manufacturer shall substantiate the protective index given to the equipment following
a series of tests laid down in the respective standards.
2.4.2 Meters & instrumentations:
a) All meters and indicating or recording instruments including ammeters, voltmeters,

wattmeters, frequency meters, energy sub-meters, power factor meters etc., will be of the
flush mounted, square pattern and be in accordance with BS 89 1977.
b) KWH meters shall be full Electronic, DIN – rail mounted type for 3-phase low voltage
application with or without external CT connection. The meter shall measure active
energy and have a pulse output. The accuracy shall be Class 1 or 2. The meter shall
comply to IEC 62052-11 and IEC 62053-21 and should have capability to connect to the
BMS system via BACNET over MSTP Interface.
The Metering system shall be an integrated micro-processor based
multifunction metering package, capable of displaying:
i. Line and phase volts (V).
26 23 00
ii. Line Current (A).

iii. Power factor (Cos F).
iv. Frequency (Hz).
v. Kilovolt amperes (KVA).
vi. Kilovolt amperes reactive (KVAR).
vii. Kilowatt hours (KWH).
viii. Neutral current (A).
ix. Total Harmonics Distortion (THD)
c) Each instrument shall have an accuracy of not less than that defined in BS 89 and will be
subject to a high voltage test of 2KV for 1 minute and an overload capacity test of 10 x full
load current for 3 seconds in accordance with BS 89 1977.
d) The instruments will incorporate scale marking in accordance with BS 3693 and moving
iron movements will be provided.
e) Each current or voltage transformer used in conjunction with meters, instruments or
protection relays will be in accordance with BS 3938 and BS 3941.
f) Protection relays and associated equipment will be in accordance with BS 142.
g) Provision shall be made for the acquisition of following data on the Building Management
System.
LV Main Panels
• Incomer ACB – ON/OFF/Trip Status
• KWH Meter Interface to BMS over BACNET
Sub main panels

• KWH Meter Interface to BMS
Emergency main panel

• Incomer MCCB – ON/OFF/Trip Status
ATS panel Status as mentioned on drawings
2.4.3 Busbar:
a) Busbar and busbar connections shall be manufactured in accordance with BS 159:1957.
b) Busbars and busbar connections shall be rated in terms of the following:
i) Voltage
ii) Normal current
iii) Frequency
iv) Short time current either 1 sec. or 3secs.
c) Busbar and busbar connections shall be capable of carrying continuously their rated
normal current with a temperature rise being taken into account. The limits of temperature
rise shall be based on ambient temperature having a peak value not exceeding 450C
and an average value not exceeding 350C. measured over a 24 hour period. The
temperature rise of busbars and busbar connections above the ambient temperature,
when carrying rated normal current at rated frequency shall not exceed 500C. If the
ambient temperature exceeds that defined above, the permissible temperature rise shall
be reduced by an amount equal to the amount of excess ambient temperature. The
busbar and busbar connections shall be hard drawn, electro-tinned, high conducting,
hard copper bar running the complete length of the panel. Flexible busbar and busbar
connections will not be permitted. Busbar and busbar connections shall be sized to carry
the normal current and withstand the fault (short circuit) current.
26 23 00
d) Bends formed in the busbar shall be carried out in a cold state on a proprietary made
mechanical or hydraulic bending machine. The busbar shall be bent over formers sized to
accord with the thickness of the bar so that the mechanical, thermal and dielectric
properties are not devalued. The distortion imposed on a busbar shall not exceed 2mm for
1 metre length of bar.
e) The minimum clearances for open, indoor, air insulated busbars and busbar connections
shall be for 0.42kv to earth in air 19.0mm, and between phases in air 25.4mm.
f) The busbars shall run the complete length of the panel and shall be supported by
synthetic resin bonded paper or synthetic bonded laminated wood and shall be capable
of safely withstanding stresses to which they may be subjected, including those due to
short circuit and climatic conditions. Provision shall be made to allow for expansion and
construction caused by temperature variation. All busbars shall be heat shrink sleeved
through out the length with appropriate colour sleeves.
g) Terminations onto and the jointing of the busbar shall be by bolting using M10 high tensile
(8.8) steel bolts of sufficient length to give at a minimum two complete threads through
the retaining nut.
h) Hole tolerances shall be 11mm diameter clean and free of burrs. All bolts shall be torqued
tightened to 58.3 N/M to give a surface torque between conductors or not less than 25
N/M. All torque tightened bolts shall be clearly and permanently distinguishable by
painting colours of which are coded to define the torque rating.
i) Type test will be required to prove the performance of the busbars and busbar
connections. The performance of the arrangement shall be substantiated by test data
from a recognized testing authority (The Association of Short-Circuit Testing Authorities -
ASTA), and such data shall include drawings, diagrams, photographs, oscillograms and
any other data that will enable the manufacturer to satisfy the Engineer that the
arrangement tested and the arrangement offered are compatible. In the absence of
such data, tests will be required to be carried out by the manufacturer under full
laboratory conditions to include:
i) Temperature test.
ii) Short-time current test.
Temperature-rise test:
a) The test of temperature rise for AC busbars and busbar connections shall be made with
alternating current at an average frequency not below 950C of the rated frequency. For
D.C. busbars and connections either alternating or direct current may be used.
b) The test shall be arranged to produce conditions equivalent to those which would obtain
in practice when one section of a busbar and typical busbar connections, together with
any enclosures, are connected to similar adjacent sections on either side.
c) Where the busbars and busbar connections are being tested, any busbar connections
not carrying the test current shall have the lowest rating assigned to the connections for
use with that busbar arrangement.
d) The temperature-rise measurement may be made at normal room temperatures, as they
are not materially affected by moderate changes in ambient temperature. Measurement
shall be made using either thermometer or thermocouple (see BS 159 Appendix B).
Short-time current test

a) The test shall be arranged to produce conditions equivalent to those which would obtain
in service when a section of busbars, including one joint, and typical busbar connections,
carry fault currents.
b) The r.m.s. value of the short-time current shall be not less than the rated short-time current,
and the highest peak value of the major current loop during the first cycle of the test shall
be not less than the rated making-capacity of any directly associated circuit-breaker or
switch.
c) Where, however, the characteristics of the test plant are such that the above
requirements cannot be met, the following deviations are permitted provided that in (i)
26 23 00
and (ii) the product of the square of the short-time current and the duration is not less than
the product of the square of the rated short-time current and the rated time.
i) If the decrement associated with the test plant is such that the rated short time current
measured in accordance with BS 159 Appendix F cannot be obtained for the rated short-
time duration without applying initially an excessively high current, the current may be
permitted to fall during the test below the specified value and the duration of the test
increased appropriately, provided that the initial value of both peak and r.m.s. current are
not less than those set out above.
ii) If in order to obtain the required initial peak value, the r.m.s. value of the short-time current
is increased above the value of the rated short-time current, the duration of the test may
be reduced below the rated short-time duration.
d) For busbars and busbar connections in accordance with BS 159 clause 7b and 7c used in
direct association with a fuse or a circuit-breaker fitted with series trip-coils, or other
overcurrent devices, the circuit shall be set to give a prospective current equal to the
rated symmetrical breaking-capacity of the associated fuse or circuit-breaker, and the
current shall be maintained for the total break-time of the circuit-breaker when set for a
maximum time-lag, or the operating time of the fuse when fitted with the fuse-link giving
the highest current rating of the size of fuse concerned. Three tests shall be made with
intervals of three minutes between them.
e) The short-time current shall not produce any mechanical damage, such as permanent
distortion or burning of parts, and shall not cause a temperature rise that, added to the
maximum temperature attained at rated normal current, would damage the insulation of
the current-carrying parts.
f) After the test the busbars and busbar connections shall be in a condition to comply with
their rating when they are again at the ambient temperature.
g) The busbar and busbar connections shall be tested at 31 MVA, 415 volts in accordance
with IEC 439 to withstand a fault level of 50 kA for 1 second.
2.4.4 Protective measures with regard to shock:

a) The following requirements shall be complied with. All external surfaces shall conform to
the degree of protection for the particular panel defined under the previous heading of
Protection Ratings. The distance between the mechanical means provided for protection
and the live parts they protect shall be not less than the values specified hereafter for
clearance and creepage distances unless the mechanical means are of insulating
materials.
- Clearance - 19.0 mm minimum
- Creepage - 19.0 mm minimum
b) Where it is necessary to make provision for the removal of barriers, opening of enclosures,
or withdrawal of parts of enclosures (doors, casings, lids, covers, and the like) this shall be in
accordance with ONE of the following requirements.
i) Removal, opening or withdrawal shall necessitate the use of a key or tool.
ii) All live parts which can accidentally be touched after the door has been opened shall be
disconnected before the door can be opened. This shall be achieved by interlocking the
door with a disconnector so that it can only be opened when the disconnector is open
and so that the disconnector cannot be closed when the door is open. If, for reasons of
operation, the panel is fitted with a device permitting authorized persons to obtain access
to live parts while the apparatus is live, the interlock shall automatically be restored on
closing of the door.
iii) The panel shall include an internal barrier or shutter shielding all live parts in such a manner
that they cannot accidentally be touched when the door is open. This barrier or shutter
shall meet the requirements for its IP rating and secure fixing as previously described. It shall
either be fixed in place or shall slide into place the moment the door is opened. It shall not
be possible to remove this barrier or shutter except by a key or tool. Warning labels must
be displayed clearly on all such barriers or shutters.
26 23 00
iv) Where any part behind a barrier or enclosure need occasional handling (such as
replacement of a lamp or fuse-link), the removal, opening or withdrawal without the use
of a key or tool and without switching off shall only be possible if the following condition is
fulfilled:
v) A second barrier shall be provided inside the barrier or enclosure so as to prevent persons
coming into accidental contact with live parts not protected by another protective
measure. This barrier need not prevent persons from coming intentionally into contact by
by-passing this barrier with the hand. It shall not be possible to remove the barrier except
through the use of a key or tool.
c) A protective circuit in the panel shall consist of a separate protective conductor running
the complete length of the panel to provide protection against the consequences of fault
within the panel and protection against the consequences of faults in external circuits
supplied through the panel. The protective conductor shall no be less than 322 sq.mm in
section with dimensions not less than 50 x 6mm of hard drawn copper bar.
d) Continuity of protection shall be ensured by effective interconnections either directly or by
means of protective conductor.
i) When a part of the panel is removed from the enclosure, e.g. for routine maintenance,
the protective circuits for the remainder of the panel shall not be interrupted. Means used
for assembling the various metal parts of the panel are considered sufficient for ensuring
continuity of the protective circuits if the precautions taken guarantee a permanent good
conductivity and a current carrying capacity sufficient to withstand the earth fault current
that may flow in the panel.
ii) When removable or withdrawable parts are equipped with metal supporting surfaces,
these surfaces are considered sufficient for ensuring continuity of protective circuits
provided that the pressure exerted on them is sufficiently high. Precautions may have to
be taken to guarantee a permanent good conductivity. The protective circuit of a
withdrawable part shall remain effective from the connected position to the test position
inclusively.
iii) For lids, doors, cover plates and the like, the usual metal screwed connections and metal
hinges are considered sufficient to ensure continuity provided that no electrical
equipment is attached to them.
iv) All parts of the protective circuit within the panel shall be so designed that they are
capable of withstanding the highest thermal and dynamic stresses that may occur at the
place of installation of the panel.
v) When the enclosure of a panel is used as part of a protective circuit, the cross-sectional
area of this enclosure shall be at least electrically equivalent to the minimum cross-
sectional area specified.
vi) Where continuity can be interrupted by means of connectors or plug and socket devices,
the protective circuit shall be interrupted only after the live conductors have been
interrupted and continuity established before the live conductors are reconnected.
vii) Protective circuits within a panel shall not include a disconnecting device (switch, isolator,
etc.) the only means permitted in the run of protective conductors shall be links which are
removable with the aid of a tool and accessible only to authorized personnel (these links
may be required for certain tests).
e) The connecting devices for external protective conductors grouped in a cable
containing phase conductors shall be the same as those for the neutral conductors but
not less than 1.5 sq.mm.
f) The cross-section of protective conductors shall be as follows:
i) equal to that of the phase conductors if the cross-section of the latter does not exceed 16
sq.mm. if the protective conductors are made of a material different from that of the
phase conductors, their cross-section shall be so fixed as to give the same conductivity;
ii) equal to the value calculated with the aid of the formula indicated in BS 5486 Appendix B.
g) For fixing the cross-section of protective conductors, the following conditions have to be
satisfied simultaneously.
26 23 00
i) The value of the fault-loop impedance shall fulfill the conditions required for the operation
of the protective device.
ii) The conditions of operation of the electrical protective device shall be so chosen as to
eliminate the possibility of the fault current in the protective conductor causing a
temperature rise that tends to impair this conductor or its electrical continuity. This is
considered to be achieved if in the case of a fault arising which will produce maximum
prospective short-circuit current, the temperature rise of the protective conductor does
not exceed the following values:
- 1200C for insulated conductors
- 1800C for uninsulated conductors
It is assumed that the starting temperature does not exceed + 400C.
h) Protective circuit not insulated from the exposed conductive parts. In the case of a panel
containing structural parts, frameworks, enclosures, etc. made of conducting material, a
protective conductor, if provided, need not be insulated from these parts.
i) Protective conductors to be insulated from the exposed conductive parts. Conductors to
certain protective devices - including the conductors connecting them to a separate
earth electrode - shall be carefully insulated. This applies, for instance, to voltage-
operated fault detection devices, and can also apply to the earth-connection of the
transformer neutral.
2.4.5 Wiring:
a) All small wiring shall be a minimum of 2.5 sq.mm PVC cable enclosed in plastic cable
trunking with removable lids. The trunking shall be securely fixed to the mounting plates
within the section compartments. Where small wiring is extended to components
mounted on doors, the doors shall be protected by `looming' using plastic cable tee.
Sufficient wiring shall be allowed to enable the door to fully open without putting strain
onto the terminations. Both ends of all wires shall be identified with its circuit reference
number using Ò' type cable markers.
b) Terminations on the end of cables shall be by proprietary crimp connectors. Where two
wires are made off into one terminal, both must have a crimp connector. Terminal and
terminal boards for small wiring shall be accessibly located and so positioned as to
minimize the number of small wiring connections impending access to other connections.
2.4.6 Protective devices:

a) Devices shall provide protection against overload current and short circuit current and
shall be capable of making or breaking any current up to and including the prospective
short circuit current at the point where the device is installed. Such protective devices may
be circuit breakers incorporating overload release, or fuses, or circuit breakers in
conjunction with fuses. Protective devices shall have a rated breaking capacity of not less
than the prospective short circuit current (fault level).
2.4.7 Labelling:
a) All components within the panel or those on the section compartment doors shall be
identified with its circuit reference or function. The labels are to be manufactured out of
white/black/white traffolyte labels and engraved with the appropriate information. These
labels are to be fixed using a minimum of two self-tapping screws, adhesive labels will not
be permitted. Minimum lettering shall be 10mm high characters.
b) Adhesive film labels for phase marking shall be applied to all live conductors and shall be
coloured for three phase RED, YELLOW, BLUE, BLACK for neutral GREEN for earth.
c) Removable covers which expose conductors or terminals are to have danger flashes.
26 23 00
2.4.8 Factory tests:

Factory-built assemblies shall undergo a series of works tests at the manufacturer's premises
in accordance with the tests stipulated in BS 5486 and shall be witnessed by Engineer /
Architect.
Factory tests to be carried out:
Visual Inspection:
i) Cubicle structure.
ii) Bolt inspection.
iii) Wire check.
iv) Fuse rating and tightness.
v) Current transformer rating
vi) Phase clearances and earth clearance
vii) All label and terminal identification
viii) Cable entry/access and glands
ix) Phase colour markings throughout
x) Shrouding terminal shields.
xi) Component voltages, currents and frequency
xii) Paints
xiii) Quality of fabrication
Function Test:
i) Phase sequence/polarity check.
ii) Remote switching and indication.
iii) Sequence and outputs.
iv) Electrical operation.
v) Mechanical operation.
vi) Instrument readings.
TYPE TESTS:
The low-voltage electrical switchboard must be a Type Tested Assembly (TTA), compliant
with IEC 61439-1/2. The switchboard type-test certificates shall be originated by a
worldwide known third-party certification organization such as ASEFA, or KEMA.
The selected switchgear and control gear brands shall be equal to the ones mentioned in
the type tests reports of the equipment
a) Type test will be required to prove the performance of the panel and shall be
substantiated by test dates from a recognized testing authority. Certificate schemes are
operated by:-
i) British Standards Institution
ii) British Electro technical Approvals Board
iii) British Approval Service of Electrical Cables
iii) Association of Short Circuit Testing Authorities
b) The certification of data shall include drawings, diagrams, photographs, oscillograms and
any other data that will enable the manufacturer to satisfy the Engineer that the
arrangement offered is compatible. In the absence of such data tests will be required to
be carried out by the manufacturer under full laboratory conditions and as defined in BS
5486 Clause 8.2 and shall include:
i) Verification of temperature-rise limits.
ii) Verification of the dielectric properties.
iii) Verification of the short-circuit strength.
iv) Verification of the continuity of the protective circuit.
26 23 00
v) Verification of Clearances and Creepage distances.

vi) Verification of the mechanical operation.
vii) Verification of the degree of protection.
DEFINITIONS OF TYPE TESTS

Verification of Temperature-Rise Limits:
a) General:
i) The temperature-rise test is designed to verify that the temperature-rise limits defined in BS
5486 Clause 7.3 for the different parts of the panel are not exceeded.
ii) The test shall normally be carried out at the values of rated current as defined in the sub-
heading temperature-rise test using current on all apparatus with the apparatus of the
panel installed.
iii) In certain cases, the test may be carried out with the aid of heating resistors of an
equivalent power loss as defined in the sub-heading.
iv) The test shall be carried out in accordance with the type of duty for which the sample is
designed.
v) The temperature-rise test on the individual circuits shall be made with the type of current
for which they are, intended, and at the design frequency. The test voltages used shall be
such that a current equal to the current determined flows through the circuits. Coils of
relays, contactors, releases, etc., shall be supplied with rated voltage.
b) Arrangement of the Panel:

The panel shall be arranged as in normal use, with all covers, etc., in place. When testing
individual parts or constructional units, the adjoining parts of constructional units shall
produce the same temperature conditions as in normal use. Heating resistors may be
used.
c) Temperature-Rise Test Using Current on all Apparatus:

i) The test shall be made on one or more representative combinations of circuits so chosen
as to cover with reasonable accuracy the worst condition for which the panel is designed.
ii) For this test, each circuit is loaded with rated current, taking account of the values of the
diversity factor. If the panel includes fuses, these shall be fitted, for the test, with fuse-links as
specified by the manufacturer. The power losses of the fuse-links used for the test shall be
part of the test report.
iii) The size and the disposition of external conductors used for the test shall be part of the test
report.
iv) The test shall be made for a time sufficient for the temperature rise to reach a constant
value (but not exceeding 8 h). In practice, this condition is reached whether variation
does not exceed 10 C per hour.
v) In the absence of detailed information as to the service conditions, the cross-section of
the external conductors shall be as follows:
vi) For values of test current up to and including 400 A:
- The connections shall be single-core, PVC insulated, copper cables or wires with cross-
sectional areas as given in the following table;
- As far as practicable the connections shall be in free air;
- The minimum length of each temporary connection from terminal shall be:
- 1m for cross-sections up to and including 10 sq.mm.
- 2m for cross-sections larger than 10 sq.mm.
26 23 00
Standard Cross-Sections of Copper Conductors to the Test Current:

Range of
test
0 7.9 15. 22 30 39 54 72 93 117 147 180 216 250 287 334
current1
(A)
7.9 15. 30 39 54 72 93 117 147 180 216 250 287 334 400
22
S(mm2) 1 1.5 2.5 4 6 10 16 25 35 50 70 95 120 150 185 240

8 16 40
Values of 10 25 32 50 63 80 100 125 160 200 250 --- 315 400
the rated
6 12 20
current2)
(A))
vii) For value of test current higher than 400 A but not exceeding 1600 A:
- the connections shall be finished matt black copper strips of the sizes stated hereafter;
- the connections shall be in free air and spaced not less than the distance existing
between the terminal;
- the minimum length of each temporary connection from terminal to terminal shall be 2m.
Standard Test Connections for Test Currents Higher than 400 but not exceeding 1600 A 1):
______________________________________________________________
TEST CONNECTIONS 2)
TEST CURRENT (A) NUMBER DIMENSIONS 3) (mm)
_______________________________________________________________
400 To 500 2 30 x 5
500 To 650 2 40 x 5
650 To 800 2 50 x 5
800 To 1000 2 60 x 5
1000 To 1250 2 80 x 5
1250 To 1600 4 50 x 5
______________________________________________________________
- The spacing between two parallel bars of the same polarity shall be approximately 5mm.
- If the connection of the bars indicated to the terminals of the apparatus under test is not
possible, the use of bars having the same cross-section but a width equal to that of the
terminals is allowed.
- The use of cables instead of bars is permissible. Standard values for cables are under
consideration.
d) Temperature-Rise Test using Heating Resistors with an Equivalent Power Loss:

i) For certain types of enclosed panels with main and auxiliary circuits having comparatively
low rated currents, the power loss may be simulated by means of heating resistors which
produce the same amount of heat and are installed in suitable places inside the
enclosure.
ii) The cross-section of the leads to these resistors shall be such that no appreciable amount
of heat is conducted away from the enclosure.
iii) This test with heating resistors is considered to be reasonably representative of all panels
using the same enclosure, even if they are equipped with different apparatus, provided
that the sum of the power loss of the built-in apparatus, taking into account the diversity
factor, does not exceed the value applied in the test.
iv) The temperature rise of the built-in apparatus shall not exceed the values given in Table 11
(BS 5486 Sub-Clause 7.3). This temperature rise can be approximately calculated by taking
the temperature rise of this apparatus, measured in the open air, increased by the
26 23 00
difference between the temperature inside the enclosure and the temperature of the air
surrounding the enclosure.
e) Measurement of Temperature:
i) Thermocouples or thermometers shall be used for temperature measurements. For
windings, the method of measuring the temperature by resistance variation shall generally
be used. For measuring the temperature of the air inside a panel, several measuring
devices shall be arranged in convenient places.
ii) The thermometers or thermocouples shall be protected against air currents and heat
radiation.
f) Ambient Air Temperature:

i) The ambient air temperature shall be measured during the last quarter of the test period
by means of at least two thermometers or thermocouples equally distributed around the
panel at about half its height and at a distance of about 1m from the panel. The
thermometers or thermocouples shall be protected against air currents and heat
radiations.
ii) If the ambient temperature during the test is between +100C and +400C, the values of
Table 11 of BS 5486, Sub-Clause 7.3, are the limiting values of temperature rise.
iii) If the ambient air temperature during the test exceeds + 400C or is lower than + 100C., this
recommendation does not apply and the manufacturer and the user shall make a
special agreement.
g) Temperature Rise of an Element or Part:

For the temperature-rise test with the apparatus in the panel in place and the circuits
being loaded with the specified current, the temperature rise of an element or part is the
difference between the temperature of this element or part measured as defined in
heading "Measurement of Temperatures" and the ambient air temperature outside the
panel.
h) Results to be obtained:
At the end of the test the temperature rise shall not exceed the values specified in Table II
of BS 5486, Sub-Clause 7.3. The apparatus shall operate satisfactorily within the voltage
limits specified for them at the temperature inside the panel.
Verification of Dielectric Properties:

a) General:
i) This type test need not be made on such parts of the panel which have already been
type tested according to their relevant specifications provided their dielectric strength is
not impaired by their mounting.
The test voltage shall be applied:
- between all live parts and the frame of the panel;
- between each pole and all the other poles connected to the frame of the panel.
ii) When the panel includes a protective conductor insulated from the exposed conductive
parts, this conductor shall be regarded as a separate circuit, i.e., it shall be tested with the
same voltage as the main circuit to which it belongs.
iii) The test voltage at the moment of application shall not exceed 50% of the values given
hereafter for test voltage. It shall then be increased steadily within a few seconds to its full
value defined hereafter maintained for 1 minute. The A.C. power sources shall have
sufficient power to maintain the test voltage irrespective of any leakage currents. The test
voltage shall have a practically sinusoidal wave form and a frequency between 45 Hz
and 65 Hz.
26 23 00
b) Testing of Insulated Enclosures:

For enclosures made of insulating material, an additional dielectric test shall be carried out
by applying a test voltage between a metal foil laid on the outside of the enclosure over
openings and joints, and the interconnected live and exposed conductive parts within
the enclosure located next to the openings and joints. For this additional test, the test
voltage shall be equal to 1.5 times the values indicated hereafter.
c) External Operating Handles of Insulating Material:
In the case of handles made of insulating material, a dielectric test shall be carried out by
applying a test voltage equal to 1.5 times the test voltage indicated hereafter between
the live parts and a metal foil wrapped round the handle. During this test, the frame must
not be earthed or connected to any other circuit.
d) Value of the Test Voltage:
i) The value of the test voltage shall be as follows:

RATED INSULATION VOLTAGE DIELECTRIC TEST
VOLTAGE (a.c.)
(r.m.s.)
Upto 60 1000
60 to 300 2000
300 to 660 2500
660 to 800 3000
800 to 1000 3500
1000 to 1200* 3500
*for d.c. only

ii) For control circuits and auxiliary circuits which are indicated by the manufacturers as
unsuitable for connection to the main circuit:
- Where the rated insulation voltage U1 does not exceed 60V:1000V.

- Where the rated insulation voltage U1 exceeds 60V:2 U1 + 1000V.
e) Results to be obtained:
The test is considered to have been passed if there is no puncture or flash-over.
Verification of the Short-Circuit Strength:
a) Test Arrangements:
The panel or its parts shall be set up as in normal use. Except for tests on the busbars and
depending on the type of construction of the panel it will be sufficient to test a single
functional unit if the remaining functional units are constructed in the same way and
cannot affect the test result.
b) Performance of the Test: General:
i) If the test circuit incorporates fuses, fuse-links of the maximum current rating
(corresponding to the rated current) and, if required, of the type indicated by the
manufacturer to be acceptable, shall be used.
ii) The supply conductors and short-circuit connections required for testing the panel shall
have sufficient strength to withstand short-circuits and be so arranged that they do not
introduce any additional stresses.
iii) Unless otherwise agreed, the test circuit shall be connected to the input terminals of the
panel. Three-phase panels shall be connected on a three-phase basis.
iv) The value of the prospective short-circuit current shall be determined from a calibration
oscillogram which is taken with the supply conductors to the panel short-circuited by a
connection of negligible impedance placed as near as possible to the input supply of the
panel.
26 23 00
v) During the test, an oscillogram shall be taken of the current curve. The oscillogram shall
show that there is a fairly constant flow of current up to the moment of operation of a
protective device or for a specified period of time, this current approximating the value
specified under the heading "Value and Duration of Short Circuit Current" defined
hereafter.
vi) When using protective devices whose performance depends on the voltage or
frequency or both, attention shall be paid to relevant specifications for such protective
devices.
vii) For A.C. tests, the frequency of the test circuit during the short- circuit tests shall be that of
the rated frequency subject to a tolerance of 25%.
viii) All parts of the equipment normally earthed in service, including its enclosure, shall be
insulated from earth but shall be connected to the neutral of the supply or to a
substantially inductive artificial neutral permitting a prospective fault-current of at least
100A. This connection shall include a reliable device - such as a fuse consisting of a
copper wire of 0.1mm diameter and not more than 50mm in length for the detection of
the fault-current and, if necessary, a resistor limiting the value of the prospective fault-
current to about 100A.
c) Testing of the Main Circuits:
i) For testing an outgoing circuit, the associated outgoing terminals shall be provided with a
bolted short-circuit connection.
ii) Where an outgoing circuit included a component which has not been tested previously
the following tests shall apply:
iii) The switching device shall be closed and held closed in the manner normally used in
service. The test voltage shall then be applied once and for a time sufficiently long to
enable the short-circuit protective device in the outgoing unit to operate to clear the
fault, and, in any case, for not less than 10 cycles (test voltage duration).
iv) Panels containing main busbars shall be subjected to one additional test to prove the
short-circuit strength of the main busbars and the incoming circuit comprising at least one
joint. The point where the short-circuit is produced shall be (2 + 0.40m) distant from the
nearest point of supply. If the length of the busbars of the panel is less than 2m, the short-
circuit shall be established at the end of these busbars. If a set of busbars consist of
different sections (as regards cross-sections, distance between adjacent busbars, type
and number of supports per metre), each section shall be tested separately.
v) In exceptional cases, subject to agreement between manufacturer and user, a special
test may be carried out with the short-circuit obtained by bolted connections on the
conductors connecting the busbars to a single outgoing unit as near as practicable to the
supply terminals of the outgoing unit.
vi) The value of the short-circuit current shall be subject to an agreement between
manufacturer and user.
vii) If a neutral bar exists, it shall be subjected to one test to prove its short-circuit strength in
relation to the nearest phase busbar including at least one joint. For the connection of the
neutral bar to this phase busbar, the requirements of testing of the main cable apply. The
test current shall be stated by the manufacturer.
d) Value and Duration of the Short-Circuit Current:
i) Panels with a short-circuit protective device incorporated in the incoming unit (refer BS
5486 see Sub-Clause 7.5.2.1.1).
ii) The current corresponding to the stated prospective short-circuit current shall flow until it is
broken by the protective device.
iii) Panels which do not incorporate a short-circuit protective device in the incoming unit
(refer BS 5486 Sub-Clause 7.5.2.1.1).
iv) For panels with rated short-time withstand current and rated peak withstand current, the
dynamic and thermal strength shall be verified with the rated currents.
v) The short-time withstand current shall be maintained for the specified time as defined in BS
5486 Clause 4.3.
26 23 00
Note: However, if necessary due to test limitations, a shorter test period is permissible:
then the test current shall be increased in accordance with formula I (sq.) x t - constant,
provided that the calculated peak value does not exceed the rated peak withstand
current.
vi) The short-time current test may be made at any suitable voltage and with the busbars at
any convenient temperature. The highest peak value of the major loop during the first
cycle of the test shall not be less than the rated peak withstand current.
vii) For panels having rated conditional short-circuit currents or rated fused short-circuit
currents, the dynamic and thermal strength shall be verified with a protective short-circuit
current, at the supply side of the specified protective device, equal to the value of the
conditional or fused short circuit current.
After the test, the conductors shall not show any undue deformation. Slight deformation
of busbars is acceptable provided that the clearances and creepage distances specified
in BS 5486 Sub-Clause 7.1.2 are still complied with. Also, the insulation of the conductors
and the insulating parts shall not show any signs of deterioration.
The earth fault indicating fuse shall remain intact.
There shall be no loosening of parts used for the connection of conductors.
The effectiveness of the protective conductors ensuring protective against electric shock
in case of a fault shall not be impaired.
Deformation of the enclosure is permissible to the extent to which the degree of
protection is not impaired and the clearances are not reduced to values which are less
than those specified.
The apparatus incorporated in the panel shall be in a condition as prescribed in relevant
specifications.
Verifications of the Effectiveness of the Protective Circuits:

a) Verification of effective connection between the exposed conductive parts of the panel
and the protective circuit.
b) It shall be verified that the different exposed conductive parts of the panel are effectively
connected to the protective circuit.
c) In case of doubt, where constructional methods other than those quoted in BS 5486 Sub-
Clause 7.4.2.1.1 are used to ensure continuity, a measurement may be carried out to
verify that the resistance between the terminal for the incoming protective conductor
and the relevant exposed conductive part of the panel is sufficiently low.
d) Verification of the Short-Circuit Strength of the Protective Circuit:
i) A single phase test supply shall be connected to the incoming terminal of one phase and
to the terminal for the incoming protective conductor. When the panel is provided with a
separate protective conductor, the nearest phase conductor shall be used.
ii) For each representative outgoing unit, a separate test shall be made with a bolted short-
circuit connection between the corresponding outgoing phase terminal of the unit and
the terminal for the relevant outgoing protective conductor.
iii) Each outgoing unit on test shall be provided with that protective device of those intended
for the unit which lets through the maximum values of peak current and I(sq.) x t. The test
may be made with the protective device located outside the panel.
iv) For this test, the frame of the panel shall be insulated from earth. The values of prospective
current and voltage used shall be the single-phase values derived from the three-phase
short-circuit strength of the panel.
e) Results to be obtained:
i) The continuity and the short-circuit strength of the protective circuit, whether it consists of a
separate conductor or the frame, shall not be impaired.
ii) Besides visual inspection, this may be verified by measurements with a current in the order
of the rated thermal current of the relevant outgoing unit.
f) Notes: Where the frame is used as a protective conductor, sparks and localized heating at
joints are permitted, provided they do not impair the electrical continuity, and provided
that adjacent flammable parts are not ignited.
26 23 00
A comparison of the resistance measured before and after the test, between the terminal
for the incoming protective conductor and the terminal for the relevant outgoing
protective conductor gives an indication of conformity with this condition.
g) Verification of Clearances and Creepage Distances:
It shall be verified that the clearances and creepage distances comply with the values
specified in BS 5486 Clause 7.1.2. If necessary, these clearances and creepage distances
shall be verified by measurement, taking account of possible deformation of parts of the
enclosure or of the internal screens, including any possible changes in the event of a short-
circuit. If the panel contains withdrawable parts, it is necessary to verify that both in the
test position and in the disconnected position the clearances and creepage distances
are complied with.
h) Verification of Mechanical Operation:
This type test shall not be made on such devices of the panel which have already been
type tested according to their relevant specification provided their mechanical operation
is not impaired by their mounting. For those parts which need a type test, the satisfactory
mechanical operation shall be verified after installation in the panel. The number of
operating cycles shall be 50. At the same time, the operation of the mechanical interlocks
associated with these movements shall be checked. The test is considered to have been
passed if the operating conditions of the apparatus, interlocks, etc., have not been
impaired and if the effort required for operation is practically the same as before the test.
i) Verification of Degree of Protection:
The degree of protection provided shall be verified in accordance with BS 5486 Sub-
Clause 7.2.1 shall be verified in accordance with IEC Publication 144, making, where
necessary, adaptations to suit the particular type of panel.
ROUTINE TESTS:
a) Routine tests are intended to detect faults in materials and workmanship they are to be
carried out on every panel after its assembly or on each transport unit. The manufacturer
shall declare the type of test equipment to be used and the Engineer will require a testing
authority's certification to the accuracy of the test equipment.
b) Routine tests shall include:
i) High tension flash tests at 2-5 kV for one minute between all poles/neutral and earth.
ii) Injection test. Primary injection (whole current).
2.4.9 Information to be supplied by the manufacturer:

a) The manufacturer's name or trademark. (The final assembler of the switchgear is deemed
to be the manufacturer).
b) Type designation, serial or identification number making it possible to obtain relevant
information from the manufacturer.
c) Type of current (and frequency in the case of AC).
d) Rated operated voltage.
e) Rated insulation voltage.
f) Rated voltage of auxiliary circuit.
g) Limits of operation.
h) Rated current of each circuit.
i) Short circuit strength (ISC).
j) Degree of protection.
K) Measure for the protection of persons.
l) Service conditions for indoor use, outdoor use for special use, if different from usual service
conditions.
m) Dimensions (height x length x depth).
n) Weight.
o) Operation and maintenance manuals to enable site erection to be carried out and
spares obtained.
26 23 00
2.5 Manufacturer:
Schneider, France.
ABB SACE, Italy.
GE (EU).
Manufacturer's Qualifications:
EDD Approved Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of switch gear and their assembly,
whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5 years.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 The Contractor shall co-ordinate with structural work as necessary and ensure that the
opening in the slab, cable termination space etc. are incorporated as required.
3.2 The installation area shall provide enough space in order to allow the following:
a) Future extension of the switchgear on both sides,
b) Opening of front and/or rear doors if any.
3.3 Depending on cable connection way, the following shall be foreseen:

a) Connection from top shall provide at least 800mm to allow cable connection,
b) Connection from bottom shall provide at least 800mm on either a trench or a false floor.
3.4 Extensions to the low-voltage electrical switchboard shall be possible on either side (right
or left) of the switchboard.
3.5 Rubber Mats shall be fixed in front of all floor mounted Panels. Install a properly framed
single Line diagram in all LV rooms.
3.6 Requirements for over current protective device coordination studies:

a) The contractor in coordination with the approved panel/switchgear
manufacturer shall be responsible for carrying out a short circuit and
coordination study for the electrical over current devices to be installed under
this project to assure proper equipment and personnel protection.
b) The study shall present an organized time-current analysis of each protective
device in series from the final circuit accessory or device back to the utility
connection and the on-site generator sources. The study shall reflect the
operation of each device during normal and abnormal current conditions.
c) The complete study shall include a system single line schematic diagram, short
circuit and earth fault analysis, and protective coordination plots for each
transformer and associated distribution system.
d) All final circuit breaker and relay settings and fuse sizes shall be made in
accordance with the recommendations of the protective device study.
3.7 All accessories and equipments that are necessary whether specified or not shall be
provided, installed and connected up to ensure a fully operation system.
3.8 The installation shall be tested in accordance with IEE regulation.
26 23 00
3.9 The Contractor shall include for training the Clients staff in the operation and
maintenance of the system.
3.10 The Contractor shall include for coordination with EDD to commission/energize the LV
switchgear.
26 23 00
26 27 13 – Electricity KWH Metering System
PART 1 GENERAL
Provide and install integral digital electronic metering in low voltage switchboard and Sub
main panel board as detailed within this specification and in accordance with the power
schematic drawings.
The electronic meters/ sub-meters shall be monitored via the BMS and be able to be
linked to a billing software which will be provided by the Contractor under this contract.

260850 Electrical Services to Mechanical Plant
250000 Building Management System

the satisfaction of the engineer.
IEC 62052-11 and IEC 62053-22
1.3 Submittals
1.3.1 Product Data

Submit manufacturer's specifications for all equipment.
Materials
Shop drawings indicating routes/locations.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 Electricity Metering
A) General Requirements for Owner's Meters:
1. Comply with UL 508.

2. Meters used for billing shall have an accuracy of 0.5, 1.0 percent of reading, complying
with requirements in IEC 62053-22.
3. Provide Instrument monitoring on MV / LV MDB Panels.
5. Memory Backup: Self-contained to maintain memory throughout power outages of 72
hours, minimum.
26 27 13
6. Sensors: Current-sensing type, with current or voltage output, selected for optimum range
and accuracy for meters indicated for this application.
a. Type: Split and solid core.
7. Current-Transformer Cabinet: Listed or recommended by metering equipment
manufacturer for use with sensors indicated.
8. Building Automation System (BAS) Interface: Refer BMS specification
B) Kilowatt-hour Meter: Electronic single- and three-phase meters, measuring electricity used.
1. Voltage and Phase Configuration: Meter shall be designed for use on circuits with voltage
rating and phase configuration indicated for its application.
2. Display: LCD with characters not less than 6 mm high, indicating accumulative kilowatt-
hours and current kilowatt load. Retain accumulated kilowatt-hour in a nonvolatile
memory, until reset.
3. Display: Digital electromechanical counter, indicating accumulative kilowatt-hours.
C) Kilowatt-hour/Demand Meter: Electronic [single- and three -phase meters, measuring

electricity use and demand. Demand shall be integrated over a 15-minute interval.
1. Voltage and Phase Configuration: Meter shall be designed for use on circuits with voltage
rating and phase configuration indicated for its application.
2. Display: LCD with characters not less than 6 mm high, indicating accumulative kilowatt-
hours, current time and date, current demand, and historic peak demand, and time and
date of historic peak demand. Retain accumulated kilowatt-hour and historic
peak demand in a nonvolatile memory, until reset.
D) Data Transmission Cable: Transmit KY pulse data over Class 1 control-circuit conductors in
raceway.
E) Software: PC based a product of meter manufacturer, suitable for calculation of utility

cost allocation and billing.
F) The Contractor shall provide metering in low voltage switchboard and Sub main panel
board as shown in the drawings. Panels boards shall be supplied with integral digital
electronic meters meeting with the minimum requirements listed.
G) The electronic meters/ sub-meters shall be monitored via the BMS and be able to be
linked to a billing software which will be provided by the Contractor under this contract.
2.2 Manufacturers
ABB (Germany)
Schneider (France)
Siemens (Germany)
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 Inspection
3.1.1 Examine pathway elements intended for cables. Check raceways, cable trays, and other
elements for compliance with space allocations, installation tolerances, hazards to cable
installation, and other conditions affecting installation.
26 27 13
3.2 Installation
3.2.1 Comply with equipment installation requirements in NECA 1.
3.2.2 Install modular meter center according to NECA 400 switchboard installation
requirements.
3.2.3 Install cables and wiring according to requirements in Division 27 Section

"Communications Horizontal Cabling."
3.2.4 Wiring Method: Install wiring in raceway and cable tray except within consoles, cabinets,
desks, and counters. Conceal raceway and wiring except in unfinished spaces.
3.2.5 Install LAN cables using techniques, practices, and methods that are consistent with
specified category rating of components and that ensure specified category
performance of completed and linked signal paths, end to end.
3.2.6 Install cables without damaging conductors, shield, or jacket.
3.3 Identification
3.3.1 Identify components and power and control wiring according to Division 26 Section
"Identification for Electrical Systems."
3.3.2 Label each power monitoring and control module with a unique designation.
3.4 Grounding
3.4.1 Comply with IEEE 1100, "Power and Grounding Sensitive Electronic Equipment."
3.5 Field Quality Control
3.5.1 Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to

inspect, test, and adjust components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including
connections. Report results in writing.
3.5.2 Perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports.
Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to

inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections,
and to assist in testing.
3.5.3 Tests and Inspections:
Metering Test:
Load feeders, measure loads on feeder conductor with an rms reading clamp-on
ammeter, and simultaneously read indicated current on the same phase at central-
processing workstation. Record and compare values measured at the two locations.
Resolve discrepancies greater than 5 percent and record resolution method and results.
Record metered values, control settings, operations, cues, time intervals, and functional
observations and submit test reports printed by workstation printer.
26 27 13
3.5.4 Correct deficiencies, make necessary adjustments, and retest. Verify that specified
requirements are met.
3.5.5 Test Labeling: After satisfactory completion of tests and inspections, apply a label to
tested components indicating test results, date, and responsible agency and
representative.
3.5.6 Reports: Written reports of tests and observations. Record defective materials and
workmanship and unsatisfactory test results. Record repairs and adjustments.
3.5.7 Remove and replace malfunctioning devices and circuits and retest as specified above.
3.6 Demonstration
3.6.1 Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance

personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain systems.
26 27 13
26 32 13 - Auto Diesel Generator Set
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1.1 Provide, install, test, commission and maintain during the defects liability period,
complete prime rating with 10% overload at any one hour capacity auto diesel
generator set complete. All associated equipments and as shown on drawings to meet
the full requirements of a working system.

260100 : Operation & Maintenance of Electrical System
262000 : Services and Distribution System
1.2.1 The generator set shall be 400/230 volts 3 phase, 4 wire, 50Hz at 1500 rpm under NTP
conditions. The exact quantity and rating to be verified from the drawings.
1.2.2 The above set along with Generator Output panel and all associated equipments shall
be located in generator room.
1.2.3 Power supply from generator set shall be connected to the main L.V. panel via an auto
transfer switch.

the satisfaction of the Architect.

Except where otherwise specified all work to conform to the relevant provisions of
appropriate British Standards and British Standard Codes of Practice currently applicable
including the following.
IEE Regulations - 16th Edition (BS 7671)
EDD Electricity Regulations - Latest Edition,
NFPA 110
Latest IEC Editions of IEC 34-1,
IEC 34-2, IEC 34-4 and 34-4A, IEC 34-6, IEC 79-7.
1.3.3 Quality Control
1.3.4 D.G. SET shall be fully tested at the Manufacturer’s factory, prior to shipping to the site, in
the presence of Engineer of Consultancy Firm. The Contractor shall include for all related
expenses for up to 3 nominated Engineers to attend the FAT.
Engineer’s presence during the inspection and testing of generators will be to verify visual
qualities and to witness all required tests only.
26 32 13
1.4 Submittals
The Contractor shall submit following for approval prior to work commencing.
1.4.1 Product Data

Submit manufacturer's specifications for all equipment showing materials used in
manufacture, sizes and profiles of fittings, methods of jointing and installation
instruction.
a) Materials
b) Method of construction
c) Installation requirements
d) Performance
1.4.2 Shop Drawings

Submit working drawings showing detailed installation layout including exhaust piping,
radiator ducting and ventilation. Drawings to show all supports/bases required and to be
coordinated with both building structure and other trades.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 Emergency diesel generator - data sheet
Rating : As shown on drawings
Engine : Diesel Engine
Governor : Mechanical
Specification : Generator set complete with daily fuel tank, exhaust gas
silencer, tropical radiator, lead acid batteries, set of manuals/drawings anti-vibration
mounts and control panel.
Panel Arrangement : PH300 automatic start with 4 pole changeover contactors
(rating as shown on drawings).
Additional Items : Engine instruments, Emergency stop, tool kit.
Warranty : 365 days from days of practical completion.
2.2 Accessories
a) All the equipment and fittings necessary to realize local manual control.
b) Contactors, disconnecting switches, logic relays.
c) Measuring instruments.
d) Protection relays.
e) Diesel engine with all instruments.
f) Starting batteries with chargers (Batteries shall be maintenance free type).
g) Automatic starting control.
h) Alternator.
i) Alternator control panel.
j) Engine mounted start-stop controls.
k) An automatic load transfer control to provide automatic starting and stopping of the
general unit.
l) Fuel supply provisions.
m) Radiator.
n) Exhaust provisions including muffler insulated with asbestos rope.
o) Local alarm annunicator.
p) Vibration eliminators.
q) Flexible connectors.
r) Fuel tank with individual earthing.
26 32 13
s) Fuel pump.
t) Earthing system.
u) Engine instruments.
v) Emergency stop.
w) Tool kit.
2.3 General control panel
1. The control panel shall be set mounted and shall house all the necessary relays and
contactors to give mains failure operation. The control cubicle shall be of the enclosed
type of heavy gauge sheet steel construction and fitted with removable access covers
with suitable ventilation louvres. It shall house all switches, instruments indicator lamps and
push buttons mounted on the front of the cubicle and be clearly labelled. All necessary
fuses main and ancillary terminals, contactors, relays and all other components shall be
located inside the cubicle in a readily accessible manner.
2.4 Relay Panel
The supply shall include also the relay panel which shall:
1. Contain all the protection relays as recommended by the manufacturer for the safe
operation and performance of the equipment. Each relay shall be equipped with an
optical fault indication to be hand reset. All the relays shall have a setting range suitable
for the protected machine. The relay panel shall be complete with the devices suitable
for relay test.
2. Supply shall include all the inter-linking cables.
3. The cubicle shall include all the necessary outgoing terminals with indicating labels and all
internal wiring will be coloured and will generally meet the IEE, EDD regulations.
4. Three ammeters and a voltmeter with selector switch shall be provided
5. The D.G. set shall automatically, on detecting a failure of any or all phases of the mains
supply and within ten seconds shall run to speed and take over the load and carry it until
the mains supply is fully restored. Then the generator shall shut down ready for the next
operation.
2.5 Engine
1. The engine shall be a direct injection diesel engine cooled by a set mounted radiator with
thermostatic control. The fuel injection system shall be electrically governed and
complete with lift pump and full flow fuel oil filters with replacement elements. The engine
shall comply with B.S. 649.
2.6 Alternator
1. The alternator shall be self regulating, self exciting fan ventilated machine with heavy duty
ball bearings and shall be fitted with static control and include radio and television
suppressors to BS 800, suitable for motor starting loads.
2. Voltage regulation shall be maintained within + 2.5 % from no load to full load including
cold to hot variations at any power factor from 0.8 to unity.
3. The alternator shall be constructed in accordance with relevant British/IEC/ International
Standards.
4. The engine and Alternator shall be from the same manufacturer.
2.7 Fuel tank (day tank)
1. The fuel tank shall be of a minimum capacity for minimum 8 hours operation and shall be
complete with all necessary stand brackets, fuel piping and complete earthing system.
The fuel tank shall be fabricated from mild steel plates and shall be painted externally. The
fuel piping shall be of carbon steel to AP1 5L Gr. B.
26 32 13
2.8 In addition to the control and instrumentation required for the Auto Diesel Generator Set,
a provision shall be made for the acquisition of following data on the Building
Management System (Refer to Section 250000 of Division Twenty five of Building
Management System).
AUTO DIESEL GENERATOR SET
Generator “START/STOP” status.
Generator Breaker “ON/OFF” status.
Fail Status.
Common Fault Alarm Status.
Fuel Level Alarm Status.
Battery Charger Fault Status.
Standby
For data acquisition on BMS, all the above signals shall be made available by the system
installer in the following form:
Volt free contacts
Variable resistance
4 to 20mA signal
0 to 10V DC signal
BACnet gateway for software interface
The Contractor shall co-ordinate with the Building Management System installer for all the
above requirements.
2.9 Acoustic Treatment
The Contractor/Generator specialist shall submit calculations, engineering, supply and
install the acoustic treatment for the Generator Room to ensure that the noise level is not
more than 60 dBA measured at 1.0m externally away from the doors and lourves of the
Generator Room.
2.10 Manufacturer
Caterpillar, USA
Cummins Power, UK
F.G.Wilson ,UK
Kohler SDMO , France
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 Testing
i. The whole of the installation shall be tested in accordance with the IEE Regulations - 16th
Edition (BS 7671) in presence of Architect/Client's Representatives.
ii. The Contractor shall include for training the Client's staff in the operation and
maintenance of the system.
iii. The Contractor shall coordinate the exact routing of engine exhaust piping at site.
iv. The contractor shall include all necessary works associated with the loading/lifting and
installation of DG set at location.
26 32 13
v. The contractor shall include for all necessary works associated with the Acoustic treatment
for the generator room in coordination with the manufacturer’s recommendations.
vi. The Contractor shall verify and ensure sufficient ventilation in accordance with
vii. The contractor shall carry out testing at site using a suitable Resistor Load bank.
viii. The Load bank test shall be carried out for a total period 90 minutes as per the following
loading pattern:
25 % Load – 15 Mins
100 % Load – 15 Mins.
ix. During the above test, the Voltage, Current, Frequency, Oil pressure and Temperature
shall be monitored and recorded for each loading stage.
3.2 Handover to Employer
i. Provide comprehensive training to the Employer on all aspects of the generator

installation, including means of automatically starting the generator and transfer of the
essential load onto the system.
ii. Provide all standard spares and tools required to operate and maintain the system
26 32 13
26 33 23 – Central Battery System
PART 1 GENERAL
Provide all labour, materials, products, equipment and services to design, supply and
install the emergency lighting systems as indicated on the drawings and as detailed in
these specifications, to provide a complete and operational installation
1.2.1 The design of the emergency Lighting system and accessories shall comply with the
requirements of the latest current edition of following standards and with the specific
requirements of this specification.
• BS5266-1, BS-5266-7 (Called as EN1838), BS 5266-8 (EN50172) - Emergency lighting;

Latest edition.
• BS 5499 - Graphical symbols and signs, Safety signs, including fire safety signs; Latest
edition.
• BS EN 13032 - Light and lighting. Measurement and presentation of photometric data
of lamps and luminaries; Latest edition.
• BS EN 50171 - Central power supply systems; Latest edition.
• BS EN 60529 - Degree of protection provided by enclosures; Latest edition.
• BS EN 60598 Part 2-22- Luminaires - Luminaires for emergency lighting; Latest edition.
• BS EN 60896-21, 22 - Stationary lead acid batteries. General requirements and
method of test; Latest edition.
• BS EN 60929 - AC-supplied electronic ballasts for tubular fluorescent lamps.
Performance requirements; Latest edition.
• BS EN 61347 - Lamp control gear; Latest edition.
• EN 61000 (3-2) - EMC Compatibility; Latest edition.
• EN 550011 - EMC Compatibility; Latest edition.
• British Approvals Service for Electric Cables (BASEC).
• NFPA 101 -Life Safety Code; National Fire Protection Association; Latest edition.
• NFPA 110 - Standard for Emergency and Standby Power Systems; Latest edition.
• NFPA 111 - Standard on Stored Electrical Energy Emergency and Standby Power
Systems; Latest edition.
• Local Authority Regulations and Requirements.
1.2.2 Emergency and EXIT luminaires must be Type Tested to EN60598.2.22 and approved by
Local Civil Defense requirements.
1.2.3 All electrical installations shall be carried out in accordance with current International
Standards and Codes of Practice specifically with the current issue of the IEEE Regulations
(BS 7671) and the requirements of the local supply authority.
1.2.4 The entire installation shall be installed and tested in accordance with the relevant
International Standards and any requirements of the local Civil Defense and / or the local
municipality authority.
26 33 23
1.3 Submittals
1.3.1 Product Data:

i) Materials
ii) Methods of Construction
iii) Installation Requirements
iv) Technical Data sheets
v) Point-wise compliance statement to the specifications, duly signed by the manufacturer /
manufacturer’s authorized representative and the contractor
1.3.2 Drawings:
The submittals shall include but not limited to the following:
i) External panel construction: detailing all dimensions, method of construction, and position
of equipment.
ii) Shop drawing showing, containment, builders work, power supplies, panel location (Plan
& Section), luminaire location/type/mounting details –Non-Maintained/maintained,
converted, sub circuit monitor location/connection details, lux levels at various areas
during emergency operation, viewing distance, escape route marked etc. Ensure to
coordinate the requirement of the contract drawings and specifications including the
rational fire design drawings.
iii) Schematic drawing showing all luminaires, sub circuit monitor, change over module, sub
panel, main panel, control panels, wiring scheme, source of supply (Phase/Transformer),
cable size and type.
iv) System philosophy indicating various sequence of events both in case of normal and
emergency (local and mains power failure) operation should also be detailed.
v) Battery selection calculations, battery discharge curves, Battery rack details.
iv) Legend: Schedule of symbols and their functions.
vi) Schedule of components: Defining manufacturer, ratings, type or list numbers and their
quantities.
1.4 Description of the System:
1.4.1 Definition of Category:
The following definitions shall apply:-
1. Maintained - where the luminaire contains one or more lamps all of which operate from
the normal supply or from the emergency supply at all times.
2. Non-Maintained - where the luminaire contains one or more lamps, which operate from
the emergency supply only on failure of the normal mains supply.
3. Sustained - where the luminaire contains two or more lamps at least one of which is
energized from the emergency supply and the remainder from the normal supply. Such a
luminaries is intended to sustain illumination at all material times.
1.4.2 Requirements:
1.4.2.1 The Emergency Lighting shall achieve the following minimum requirements:
26 33 23
a) Clearly and unambiguously indicate all egress routes from the building.
b) Illuminate all escape routes and staircases to an illumination level as per NFPA 101 life
safety code and Local civil defense regulations.
c) Provide illumination to Fire Alarm Call Points, Fire Extinguishers, Hose Reels and other safety
equipment as indicated by the engineer.
d) Provide illuminations to First Aid points.
e) Minimum illumination for floors and walking surfaces shall be 10.8 lux average measured at
the floor and not less than 1.1 lux minimum measured along the path of egress at floor
level.
f) The emergency and exit light circuits shall be interleaved so that failure of one circuit shall
not result in complete darkness in the area.
g) A maximum to minimum illumination uniformity ratio of 40 to 1 shall not be exceeded.
h) Provide illuminated exit signage to all egress routes as part of risk assessment plan.
1.4.2.2 The emergency lighting installation provided for the project shall be a Central Battery
type, with the following functions:
a) Serve escape routes via distributed units located in the electrical cupboards / rooms.
b) On local mains failure either adjacent to, or within each Luminaire, shall be monitored
locally or the Luminaire input power should be always fed from Central Power Supply
without any additional changeover devices.
c) Under normal conditions the maintained emergency luminaries shall operate from the
normal supply, however the battery backup supply shall be available at all times.
d) If mains Luminaries are to be converted as per project requirement, an address module of

3-70W or 1A based on connected luminary load shall be provided. Each Address module
shall have unique address code without any DIP/ Rotary switches or hand held
programming devices.
e) It shall be possible to integrate DALI/ DSI or 0- 10V Dimming concept as per project
requirements. Address Module offered shall have features to integrate these dimming
concepts as required.
f) Control and monitoring device shall be provided for every 2 emergency circuits freely
programmable to monitor up to 8 no. of normal DB reference circuits switched or Un-
switched.
g) Central Monitoring Software, PC and printer shall be provided and comply fully as per
BS5266 standards.
1.4.2.3 Specific Requirements
a) All EXIT lights shall be configured as "maintained type” (always "ON") light.
26 33 23
b) All dedicated emergency lights in guest rooms shall be configured as "non-maintained

" (normally "OFF") light.
c) Sub-circuit monitoring modules shall be fitted into all lighting DBs for monitoring of normal
supply fed lighting circuits/dg supply fed lighting circuits, so that in the event of failure of
those lights, non-maintained emergency lights in those are shall be activated.
d) All emergency lights shall be provided with addressable control modules. wherever
dimmable lights are used, those lights shall be fitted with CBS DALI address modules. in the
event of emergency, dimmed lights shall go to 100% brightness.
e) Wherever emergency lights are switched through manual switch/ lighting control panel
(LCP) /Dimmer control, the same shall be over-ridden during emergency evacuation
scenario.
f) In the emergency scenario, stairwell light switching push buttons/PIR sensor shall be over-
ridden and all lights shall be switched ON.
1.5 Warranty
a) Manufacturer’s Warranty: Submit a written warranty signed by the manufacturer agreeing
to repair, restore or replace any defective equipment specified in this section during the
specified warranty period
b) Warranty Period: 24 months from date of successful Handing over of the Project.
c) Battery: The battery manufacturer’s warranty (minimum 24 months) is to be passed

through to the final customer and shall have a minimum period of two year.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 Central Battery System- General
a) The Central Emergency Lighting Battery system shall comply with the following
specification
1. Input Voltage: 400V AC 3 Phase
2. Output -Mains mode : 230V AC 1 phase
3. Output -Emergency mode : 220V DC
b) The emergency lighting system shall be of a fully addressable type, with central battery
panels in conjunction with sub-panels providing back up power for a continuous duration
of 3 hours at 100% light output from each lamp designated as emergency/exit luminaire
during emergency condition/operation.
c) The system shall be so configured to ensure that it operates not only under complete
failure of the main electrical system but also under local failure including final sub circuit
failure.
d) Central battery main panel and battery racks shall be located in CBS rooms as indicated
in the floor plans.
e) Each central battery unit shall serve multiple sub-panels located in CBS room or electrical
cupboards / rooms.
26 33 23
f) The emergency lighting system shall be a combination of maintained, non-maintained,

sustained systems, operating at mains rated voltage with back-up emergency power
provided by secondary batteries as indicated in the following specification section or
shown on the drawings.
g) The panel shall be built up in a modular format, with all modules being of a plug in type
design.
h) The emergency lighting system shall allow for connection of luminaires in each circuit to
be maintained, switched maintained or non-maintained.
i) The emergency lighting system shall be arranged to provide the required illumination
automatically in the event of any interruption of normal lighting.
j) Emergency lighting system in addition shall be fed by essential power from the building
standby generator. Generators shall be installed, tested and maintained in accordance
with NFPA 110, Standard for Emergency and Standby Power Systems.
2.2 Central Emergency Battery System

a Each of the electronic cabinets shall be built with individual components like a
controller, charger and change over units and each component shall be fully
modular permitting easy Maintenance. Hot swap facility for replacing faulty
outgoing changeover modules is recommended.
b The system will be an intelligent fully addressable system where all circuits, all
luminaires and all sub circuit monitors shall be addressable with an individual
address.
c A choice of the operation modes like maintained light or non-maintained light or
switched maintained light shall be possible to be connected in each outgoing
circuit without the need for additional data cable.
d Each individual luminaire shall be programmable with an individual name / text
location(20 characters)
e Each individual circuit shall be programmable with an individual name / text
location (20 characters)
f Each individual sub panel unit shall be programmable with an individual name /
text location (20 characters).
g It shall be possible to carry out the system programming from the central battery
system controller as well as ability to download the complete programming via USB
interface devices programmed from an office PC directly on to the respective
Control Module in the panels.
h Defect of a luminaire shall be indicated at the integral controller in each panel and
at the Central computer: the individual luminaires address, the circuit address and
the text location of the luminaires shall be displayed at the control module.
1. CONSTRUCTION
a MECHANICAL CONSTRUCTION:
1. The Electronic and Battery Compartment shall be separate. The Electronics
compartment shall have clear polycarbonate window to display the status of
the Control Module. Battery housing shall be sheet steel, powder coated
housing to IP20. Both the Electronic section as well as the battery cabinet shall
have removable hinged front door to provide complete access to the
batteries. and relevant components.
26 33 23
2. The electronic compartment shall have large cabling compartments with

cable entries from top via undrilled removable metal flange plates. All
incoming cables & looping circuits shall be connected on 3 tier 4mm2 terminal
blocks, DIN Rail mounted at the top of the cabinet.
3. If the batteries cannot be accommodated in one enclosure placed below the
Electronics cabinet, then they shall be installed in a separate adjacent
enclosure to the same specification as the battery cabinet. Space
requirements and cable entries shall be well coordinated.
b ELECTRONIC CONSTRUCTION:
1. CHANGEOVER MODULES:
i. Changeover modules shall be provided at the Central battery panels and Sub
panels. These modules shall have automatic changeover to Emergency
operation in the case of Mains failure even in the case of failure of Control
Module.
ii. The system shall be built up in a modular format with all units being plug-in-
type. Hot Swap facility to enable replacement of Changeover modules shall
be available to avoid the need for de-energizing a panel for replacement of a
faulty Changeover unit. The Modules shall be accessible and visible from the
front of the panel (Fixed output type modules fixed to the back plate of the
panels are not acceptable as they prevent future expansion/ addition of
circuits/modules)
iii. Emergency & Exit lights shall be connected to each circuit without the need
for additional data cable, thereby allowing connection of luminaires of all
switching modes, namely:
a. maintained.
b. non-maintained.
c. switched maintained.
iv. All outgoing circuits shall be load and short circuit protected with a Fuse
accessible from the front face of the panel.
v. Outgoing changeover Modules shall have LED indicators for each circuit to
indicate Maintained/ Non-Maintained operation and any Fault in each circuit
to enable daily visual inspection.
vi. The Changeover modules shall be rated for 4x2A, 2x4A, 2x3A or 1x6A.
2. CHARGING MODULES
i. Charger module shall be fully encapsulated plug-in type, microprocessor
controlled module with temperature controlled voltage charging and rated for
7A or 3A. Automatic boost charging facility shall be built in to the system
depending on the required total battery capacity. It shall have charging &
supervising method via battery monitoring at intervals of 5 minutes or less for
failure indication of battery circuit as well as battery charger. The charger shall
be designed for 80% recharge of a fully discharged battery set within 12 hours
ii. It shall come complete with earth leakage monitor for battery circuit
monitoring. LED/Graphic & Text indications shall be provided via the Control
Module in each panel for:-
a. Operation
b. Charger/ Booster On
c. Mains Operation
d. Battery capacity > 10%, >50%, 100%
e. Charging Failure
f. Insulation fault
iii. Potential free indicator contacts shall be available in each panel for:-
26 33 23
a. Charging failure
b. Insulation fault
iv. It shall have Menu option in Control module to simulate earth leakage failures.
v. It shall include plug-in-type terminals as well as the protection fuses for mains &
battery accessible via the front plate of the charger.
3. CONTROL MODULES
i. Each panel will have modular, plug in type, freely programmable control
module with:
a. TFT touch screen.
b. Touch screen for programming and monitoring of the panel.
c. Constant memory back up with a minimum of two years logbook facility.
ii. It should have separate buttons/ menu option for:
a. Function Test.
b. Battery duration test
c. Blocking function of outgoing circuits.
iii. The control module should have the following features as a minimum:-
a. Monitor and display the Temperature and Voltage readings from the
Battery Monitoring System for each battery block.
b. Indicate every status of the system & the connected luminaires
c. Programming of the control module shall be possible by downloading the
contents of a pre-programmed USB device.
d. Programming for the potential free contacts for BMS and Fire Alarm
interface.
e. Programming and status of the sub circuit monitoring inputs
iv. It shall display;
a. Overall battery voltage.
b. withdrawn battery current in test or emergency modes,
c. charge failures
d. interrupted battery charge circuit
e. luminaire failure with address and with text location
f. sub-circuit or sub distribution board supply failure with address & text
location
g. function test
h. battery duration test
i. Deep Discharge protection status of battery sets
j. Log book of at least 2 years.
v. LED indicators shall be available for:

a. Mains operation – Mains incomer healthy.
b. Battery operation – Mains incomer failure
c. Charging failure.
d. Common LED for any other failure
2.3 Components/ Interfacing

A. BATTERIES
1. Each central battery panel shall have maintenance free sealed lead acid
batteries with 10 years' service life at 25 Deg C.
2. The batteries shall have an autonomy of 3 hours for full load with all lamps at
100% output.
26 33 23
3. The battery sizing shall be calculated on 3 hours full connected load with 20%
spare capacity and 25% aging factor and temperature compensation.
Detailed calculations need to be submitted for Engineer's approval.
4. Batteries shall be monitored with a Battery Management System integrated
with the Control Module in each panel in such a way that each battery block
shall display its Voltage and Temperature at all times. These readings shall be
constantly logged and any failure of individual battery blocks shall be flagged
for replacement.
5. This Automatic Battery Monitoring system shall include a feature to disable the
Charger of a Central Battery Panel where Temperature of a particular battery
block has exceeded 60Deg C to prevent a battery explosion due to battery
block internal damage.
6. In addition, the battery monitoring system data shall be available at the
central monitoring PC.
7. The contactor shall demonstrate the more or less identical battery block
readings on each central battery panel battery bank at the time of handover
of the system.
8. Batteries shall be from a globally reputed battery manufacturer like Exide,
Yuasa, C&D Technologies.
B. SUB PANELS
1. Dedicated CBS supply distribution boards shall be provided by the same

supplier of CBS system in accordance with the number of circuits and in
coordination with the Electrical contractor. Central battery sub-panels shall be
similar in construction to lighting distribution boards with minimum 14 SWG thick
sheet steel enclosures. The incomer shall consists of an isolator and 300 mA
ELCB of appropriate rating with outgoings as MCB with ratings of 10 A. Sub-
panels shall also house necessary control modules/ sub-circuit monitoring
modules/hold-off relays etc.
2. sub panels shall be located based on the emergency lighting distribution

schematic and shall optimize the field wiring. These panels shall be powered
from one of the Central Battery Panel.
3. Change over modules, sub circuit monitors and data communication terminals
as required shall be installed within the sub panel.
4. Sub panel shall be manufactured and delivered by the Central Battery Panel
manufacturer from their European factory.
C. SUB-CIRCUIT MONITORING MODULES

1. Sub Circuit monitoring shall be provided to ensure that any power failure within
a particular area shall turn the relevant emergency lighting circuit ON for the
respective zone only.
2. In case of Guest room, Sub Circuit monitors shall be provided in the same guest
room DB for local monitoring such that any failure of that DB will enable the Em
light in that room to be Switched on.
3. The Central Battery System design shall incorporate feature wherein when local
lighting DB’s monitored for failure fail, the Emergency & Exit lights are powered
on via the Mains supply of the Central Battery/ Substation panel. Only when
the Mains supply to the Central battery/ substation panel fails is the battery
26 33 23
supply available at the Emergency and Exit lights. This facility ensures that the
batteries are only used on a full mains failure
D. FIRE ALARM INTERFACE

1. The central battery system panels shall be interfaced with the Fire alarm panel
by hard wired potential free contacts to enable the emergency lights to be
switched ON locally in the event of a fire condition.
E. BMS INTERFACE
1. The Central battery panels shall be interfaced with the BMS over open
protocols like Bacnet/IP, Modbus/IP, LON/IP in such a way that each panel has
a built in gateway that communicates with the BMS PC as well as the Central
Monitoring PC for the Emergency lighting system. A scheme where a single
gateway gathers data from multiple panels and then relays it on to the BMS is
not recommended as failure of a single gateway affects data communication
from multiple panels. The data information available at the BMS shall be the
same as that at the Central Monitoring PC.
2.4 Wiring Standards
The Contractor shall be responsible for the supply, installation and commissioning of the
emergency lighting system and all its components which shall be designed, installed,
tested and commissioned to meet the local Civil Defense requirements and the
respective EN standards and BS 5266/ NFPA standards/ SASO 2012. The product(s) shall
bear CE certification for electromagnetic compatibility.
a. Contractor to ensure BS7671 wiring standards to be followed in termination of luminaires in

the final circuits and avoid any branches/spurs/ Tree arrangement. Loop IN/OUT of cables
not allowed within the luminaires.
b. If the Normal luminaries are required to be used for Emergency lighting application,
Modifications are allowed only at factory level to retain warranty by both parties and must
follow Emergency lighting Standards of EN60598-1 guidelines for conversion and Samples
to be tested to EMC compliance of EN55015 and EN61547, prior delivering to site.
c. It is not allowed for any on site modifications within the Normal luminaries for Emergency
lighting application which can cause hindrance to performance guarantee from the
luminary manufacturers and compromise CE mark.
d. If above point. c if not applicable for justified reasons, contractor to ensure conversions
are done and tested as per EN60598-1 only using remote enclosures for mounting of
address modules and related controls.
e. Installations of final assemblies for address module and related controls must be either
integral part of the fixture or must be via Remote enclosures only, Installing on false ceiling
void etc is not acceptable.
f. Luminaries used for Emergency lighting application must have Integral Fused terminal/
block as per EN60598-1/ EN60598.2.22 standards.
g. Normal luminaires prequalified for Emergency lighting conversions, especially used in

Means of egress path must be Fire Retardant and ‘F’ marked apart from ‘CE/ UL’
compliance.
26 33 23
h. Normal luminaires used for Emergency lighting applications shall be fitted with address
modules compatible with the central battery system. Central battery supplier shall
coordinate this with Electrical contractor to verify the quantities required for such address
modules.
i. Normal luminaires used for Emergency lighting applications must able to withstand 500V if
dual supplies possible within the luminaire and fixture must be labeled with Notice
“CAUTION! 500V DISCONNNECT MAINS ELSEWHERE” as HSE requirements.
2.5 Central Testing & Monitoring

a. The central monitoring and Automatic Testing features shall be in line with IEC62034
standards to include following but not limited to:
b. The Focal point of the monitoring network shall be a PC complete with printer.
c. Basic Specification:
d. Centrino, 64 MB RAM, 10 GB Hard Disk, 15” Monitor
e. Manufacturer: HP, IBM, Dell or ‘Approved equal’.
f. The software should be Windows based providing detailed address information of all
connected luminaries and sub-circuit monitors.
g. Provide PC equipment complete with Windows based software to provide detailed

information for all luminaries connected to the system:
h. Standard features shall include (but not limited to):

1. Live status of every individual luminary compared against pre-programmed threshold
data to identify any discrepancies.
2. Conduct Manual Function Tests.
3. Conduct Automatic Tests, programmable for at least once in every month.
4. Conduct Duration Test.
5. Password protected.
6. Create and store Test reports/logs with date and time stamp for period of >5 years.
7. Easily programmable or retrievable data using USB or memory sticks.
i. It shall be possible to network multiple Central battery units to a single control PC.
j. It shall be possible to remote monitoring using LAN/WAN network or carry BMS interfacing
using LON module (if and when required by BMS).
k. PC supplied shall be used for Central monitoring and testing features only. Emergency
luminaries and its standard operation shall not be PC dependent for any reason.
l. Automatic testing of the emergency luminaries is done as follows:
m. Multi – Lamp Switching and Monitoring
n. Monitoring Interface -
A monitoring interface at the beginning of each circuit known as a sub circuit monitor is
used and individual address modules are connected to each emergency luminaire for
addressing scheme without any additional data cable in the field
26 33 23
o. The Power supply to these circuits shall be made available to each and every luminaire
connected to ensure continuous source until last luminaire connected and without any
intermediate changeover relays as fail safe concept.
p. Each sub circuit monitoring interface can support 40 Luminaires in 2 circuits of 20, fused at
5A each, freely programmable with minimum of 8 inputs made available for sub circuit
monitoring cum switching signals. The System should allow maintained, non-maintained &
switched luminaries on the same circuit without any additional data line.
q. Final Sub –Circuit Monitoring -
1. The Central Power System design shall incorporate sub-circuit monitoring where
indicated. When a normal lighting circuit fails the dedicated emergency fittings shall be
powered from the central battery supply. System shall have built-in facility to ensure that
the batteries are only used on a full mains failure.
2. The address modules for Emergency/ sustained luminaire shall have inbuilt sub circuit
monitoring cum switching inputs for detection of normal lamp switching and override the
position of switch to full emergency mode in case of local switch or normal lamp supply
failure.
3. Programming of final circuit luminaries and its function shall not be dependent on
intermediate control modules or system interface which can jeopardize the luminary
function in case of malfunction or failure of control modules. This shall not cause incorrect
operation of emergency luminaries during emergency mode.
2.6 Luminaires
a) The emergency lighting luminaries shall provide 100% lumens output during Emergency
mode and the product should comply with BS EN 60598.2.22 standard.
b) Exit luminaries shall be maintained type and shall use LED Lamps and designed as per
BSEN 60598.2.22 Standards.
c) Emergency lights shall mainly comprise the following types;
• Ceiling recess mounted 1x 4W LED type lights for guest rooms ( non-maintained)
• Ceiling recess mounted 1x 8W LED type lights for Ball room/ Lobby/High ceiling
areas ( non-maintained)
• Mains lights connected to Central battery( maintained type)
• Mains lights connected to DG supply( maintained type)
• EXIT lights( maintained type) connected to Central battery
d) Viewing distance for all Exit lights shall be 23m to 30meters with the calculation basis being
200 times the height of the legend panel as per EN1838.
e) All the exit luminaires shall have pictogram with Euro legend as per the latest BS/EN codes
and local authority Fire Code.
f) In addition, all the emergency and exit lights shall have their integral addressable HF
electronic control gear/ LED Driver compliant to EN60924/ EN61347 with Loop in and Loop
Out terminals. Fittings without this internal Loop in Loop Out arrangement shall not be
acceptable.
g) IP rating and mounting of the luminaires shall be as appropriate to the installation location
and shall be to approval of the Engineer. In front of house areas compliance to aesthetic
requirements of the interior designer and architect would be required.
26 33 23
2.7 BACnet Interface:

i) Provide BACnet / IP or BACnet/MSTP interface between CBS System and Main
BMS Client server.
ii) With BACnet interface all points on the CBS shall be represented as BACnet
iii) BACnet interface shall provide all control & monitoring points of the CBS to the
BMS.
iv) BACnet output provided shall be compatible to the Main BMS System of the
project.
v) Contractor shall provide necessary BACnet Gateway unit if the interface

output on CBS is in a different protocol then the central BMS protocol.
2.8 Manufacturer:
• CEAG, UK
• INOTEC, Germany,
• GESSLER GmbH, Germany
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 General
The overall system shall be installed to the manufacturers recommendations and comply
with BS 5266/ NFPA Standards/SASO 2012 and as per Local Civil Defense Regulations.
The entire installation, relating to the system shall be carried out by a Civil Defence/ fire
authority licensed and approved contractor. Testing and commissioning shall be
conducted by the factory trained engineers/technicians from the authorized local agent
of the manufacturer.
3.1.1 Containment, Wiring and Circuiting:
1. Emergency lighting wiring shall not be drawn into the same conduit, trunking
compartment or ducting compartment as cables of other Category 3 circuits (BS 7671) if
applicable / mechanical protection needed. The cores of emergency lighting circuits
shall not be contained within the same multi-core cable, flexible cable or flexible cord as
cores of any other circuits.
2. All wiring associated with the emergency lighting system shall be 300/500V enhanced
grade fire resistant to BS-5839-1, BS8434-2 (930 degree C for 120min, 60min with fire and
mechanical shock plus 60min with fire, mechanical shock and water), EN50200 PH120
(120min at 830 degree C with fire and mechanical shock), BS 6387 (CWZ)and LPCB
approved. Cables shall be approved by local civil defense authority.
3. Outgoing circuits from the final distribution boards shall not exceed 200 meters in length.
This should not contain more than 40 luminaries and consist of more than 2 circuits.
26 33 23
4. Distribution cables from the output of the Central Power system to the sub-circuit and final
circuit emergency lighting distribution boards shall all be Fire Rated/ LSOH cables with steel
wire armored protection (as FP400 or equal approved)
5. All containment works shall be dedicated to the system. The conduits along with GI
tray/GI trunking shall be dedicated to the emergency lighting system and shall be routed
through low fire risk zones. Conduits/Trays/Trunking when installed on surface shall be GI
metallic type. No surface PVC conduits will be allowed. Direct surface fix of cables is also
not allowed. Specific installation guidelines for emergency lighting from local fire
code/BS5266/ NFPA standards shall be followed.
6. The cables necessary for the system shall generally be provided as recommended by the
manufacturer and in accordance with the local civil defence/ fire authority regulations
and as shown on the schematics. Dual alternative circuiting (50% illumination) shall be
allowed for staircases.
7. Wiring between the central battery, sub panels and luminaires shall be carried out using
fire resistant cables of suitable size as per the local civil defence/ fire authority
requirements. All elements which are required to retain their integrity during fire conditions
shall be fire resistant. Wires on vertical riser shall be tied using fire resistant cable ties.
Proprietary fire resistant cable glands shall be used at all termination points including at the
panels and luminaires.
8. Appropriate caution labels complete with circuit and luminaire reference/address

number, to Engineer’s approval, shall be provided at all connected emergency and exit
luminaires.
9. Laminated schematic showing the wiring and power source details should be affixed at all
the sub panels and central battery panels. In addition, glazed schematic showing the
entire distribution network, uniquely referred luminaires, sub circuit monitor, change over
modules, cable type, schedule of luminaire location, type of luminaire - slave, maintained,
etc. shall also be provided near each of the central battery panel.
10. Voltage drop shall be calculated and if required contractor shall allow additional sub-
station panels or central battery panels to meet the voltage drop requirements as per BS
5266/Local Authority requirements. Detailed calculations shall be submitted for Engineers
approval.
3.2 Testing
1) All site tests for the complete emergency lighting installation shall be carried out in
accordance with BS 5266 Part 8 (EN 50172) and BS EN 62034:2000. It should be noted that,
immediately after a test, the battery might not have sufficient capacity to provide
emergency lighting cover. For this reason all tests should be performed, where possible, at
a time of minimum risk.
2) A test report shall be submitted.
3) Provide detailed Record drawings showing location and type of all emergency lighting
luminaries throughout the project.
4) Provide detailed operating and maintenance manuals and demonstration and training of
staff in the operation of the system.
26 33 23
5) Testing and commissioning report format and maintenance record formats must be
submitted as part of Technical submittals.
3.3 Training
Factory Trained specialist for Emergency lighting system is responsible to conduct onsite
training sessions for the Client maintenance team as per project requirements.
3.4 Identification and Labeling

1. Contractor to ensure Central Power Supply equipment and its distribution arrangement
are properly labeled and tagged as per Bldg code of practices.
2. Caution Notice stickers to be placed for all Battery cubicles as per HSE guidelines.
3. Individual Batteries must be labeled for routine maintenance and records to be kept
within the panels as per EN50172 requirements. Emergency contact details shall be made
available near the CENTRAL BATTERY Equipment. Final as built Emergency lighting SLD
must be made available near the CENTRAL BATTERY equipment’s.
26 33 23
26 33 53 - UPS System
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1.1 Supply, install, test, commission and maintain during the defects liability period an
uninterruptable Power Supply (UPS) system. For exact quantity, type and ratings refer to
the drawings.
This system will provide nominal 400V 50 Hz low voltage electrical power for the ICT
equipment’s/Servers, IDF’s, CCTV ONU’s, Security system, certain Computer stations,
certain Utility Equipment. Battery back-up for 20 minutes at rated capacity shall be
planned.
The UPS will be operating in double-conversion mode (also called on-line mode); it shall
be a VFI-type UPS (as per standard IEC 62040-2), made up of the following components:
a. Rectifier
b. Battery charger
c. Inverter
d. Battery
e. Automatic bypass (via a static switch)
f. Manual maintenance bypass
g. User and communications interface
h. Battery management system
i. Any and all other devices required for safe operation and maintenance, including circuit
breakers, switches, etc
For single phase output units (up to and including 10KVA) the following to be noted.
A. The UPS shall be a self-contained unit complete with integral batteries. The system shall be
hard wired to the power supply cable via an isolating switch disconnector. Unless
specified otherwise the output shall be single phase and neutral.
B. UPS shall be provided with internal bypass and input power factor correction.
C. The output power (inverter) stage operates directly from the DC bus and produces a
configurable AC output voltage of 220, 230 or 240 Vac output. The output of the UPS is
connected either to the inverter or through a bypass relay or static switch to the filtered
input line.
D. System capacity: The system is rated to be capable of supporting rated load in KVA @ 0.9
PF.
E. Efficiency: The UPS full-load efficiency mentioned below shall be without degradation of
output regulation as specified:
Efficiency is at least 92%
F. Standards Applicable:
C-tick, CE, EN 50091-1, EN 50091-2, EN 55022 Class A, EN 60950, EN 61000-3-2, GOST, VDE

260100 : Operation &Maintenance
26 33 53

263213 : Auto Diesel Generator Set

The installation throughout shall be of the best quality materials erected by skilled

Except where specified otherwise, all work shall conform to the relevant Standards Codes
of Practice currently applicable including the following:
i. IEE Wiring Regulations
ii. IEC 60140-4: UPS - Performance.
iii. IEC 62040-1 and EN 62040-1: UPS - Safety.
iv. IEC 62040-2 and EN 62040-2: UPS - Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC), level B.
v. IEC 62040-3 and EN 62040-3: UPS - Performance.
vi. IEC 60950 / EN 60950: Safety of IT equipment, including electrical business equipment.
vii. IEC 61000-2-2: EMC, levels of compatibility.
viii. IEC 61000-3-4: Limits for harmonic current emissions (equipment input current > 16
A/ph).
ix. IEC 61000-4: EMC – Immunity tests.
x. IEC 439: Low-voltage switchgear and control gear assemblies.
xi. IEC 60529: Degrees of protection provided by enclosures (IP Code).
xii. ISO 3746: Sound power levels.
xiii. CE marking.
Certification of conformity: The manufacturer shall provide a complete qualification file

demonstrating compliance with the above standards. What is more, the indicated levels
of performance shall be confirmed by certification from independent laboratories (e.g.
TÜV or Veritas).
1.2.3 Quality Systems and Test Procedures
A. Test procedures:
i. The manufacturer shall provide proof of a quality-assurance system. In particular, the main
manufacturing steps must be subject to suitable tests such as:
a. Inspection of incoming components, tests on discrete subassemblies
b. Complete functional checks on termination of manufacture.
ii. The equipment shall be subject to burn-in under load conditions prior to shipping.
iii. Final checks and adjustments shall be recorded in a report drafted by the quality-
inspection department of the supplier.
iv. Certification of the industrial facilities in compliance with ISO 9001 or 9002 shall be
required.
B. Quality system: The UPS must be designed using an ISO 9001 quality system and a
dependability study to ensure maximum reliability.
1.3 Submittals
26 33 53
1.3.1 Product Data

a) Materials
b) Methods of Construction
c) Installation Requirements
d) Performance
1.3.2 Shop Drawings

Manufacturer's shop drawings giving control diagrams dimensional details, layout details,
trench requirements.
1.4 Manufacturers
Subject to compliance with requirements of manufacturers offering products that may be
incorporated in the works include, but are not limited to the following:
Schneider Electric APC, France

Chloride Power, U.K.
Liebert, UK
Power ware, U.K.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 Operating requirements
A. Each single-UPS unit shall operate in double-conversion mode (also called on-line mode);
it shall be a VFI-type UPS (as per standard IEC 62040-2).
B. Normal operation (normal AC source available): The rectifier shall supply the inverter and
the charger with DC current. The inverter shall continuously supply the load with backed
up electrical energy and the charger shall float charge the battery.
C. Operation on battery power (normal AC source not available or outside tolerances):

Upon failure or excessive deterioration of the normal AC source, the inverter shall continue
to supply the load from battery power without interruption or disturbance, within the limits
imposed by the battery backup time.
D. Battery recharge (normal AC source restored): When the normal AC source is restored,
the rectifier shall again power the inverter, without interruption or disturbance to the load,
while the charger automatically recharges the battery.
E. Transfer to bypass AC source:

1. In case of a major overload or if the UPS shuts down, the static switch shall instantaneously
transfer the load, without a break in the supply of power, to the bypass AC source if it is
available and within tolerances.
2. Transfer of the load back to the UPS output, synchronized with the bypass AC source, shall
be automatic or manual. During transfer, the load shall not suffer an outage or
disturbance in the supply of power.
26 33 53
3. On request, the UPS system may automatically transfer the load with a micro-interruption
(adjustable from 15 to 1000 ms) if a major fault occurs on the UPS system and if
synchronization with the bypass source has not been established.
4. In all cases, to ensure load transfer in complete safety, the system shall simultaneously
control all the static switches.
G. UPS maintenance:
1. All power and control electronics of the modular UPS units making up the UPS system shall
be accessible from the front of the UPS.
2. For maintenance purposes, the UPS system shall include an external, mechanical, manual
bypass system with one-button operation, common to all modular UPS units.
3. For personnel safety during servicing or testing, this system shall be designed to isolate the
UPS system while continuing to supply power to the load from the bypass AC source.
4. The UPS shall also include a device making it possible to isolate the rectifier and the
charger of each modular UPS unit from the normal AC source.
H. Battery maintenance: For safe maintenance on the battery, the system shall include a
circuit breaker to isolate the battery from the rectifier, the charger and the inverter. When
the battery is isolated from the system, the UPS shall continue to supply the load without
interruption or disturbance, except in the event of a normal AC source outage.
I. Cold start (normal AC source absent): The battery shall be capable of starting the UPS if
the normal AC source is absent and continue supplying power to the load within the
specified backup time. Cold start on battery power shall be possible on the condition that
the system shall have started at least once on normal AC power
2.2 Sizing and General Characteristics
Technology: The UPS shall be based on six-pack IGBT technology with built-in thermal
monitoring and a high free-frequency chopping mode to dynamically optimize efficiency
and power quality.
A. Rating: The UPS shall be sized to continuously supply a load of [as per drawings] kVA at a
power factor of 0.9.
B. Battery backup time:

1. The battery backup time in the event of a normal AC source outage shall be 30 minutes,
for a load power factor of 0.9.
2. The battery shall be designed for a service life of 10 to 12 years. It shall be selected and
sized correspondingly, for a load power factor of 0.9.
C. Types of loads accepted:

1. The UPS system shall accept high crest factors without derating (kW) to ensure correct
operation with computer loads and loads where the leading power factor can reach 0.9.
2. The total harmonic voltage distortion at UPS output (THDU downstream) shall respect the
following limits:
a. THDU downstream ph/ph < 2% for non-linear loads.
D. PFC sinusoidal-current input rectifiers:

1. The UPS shall not draw a level of harmonic currents that could disturb the upstream AC
system, i.e. it shall comply with the stipulations of guide IEC 61000-3-4.
26 33 53
2. The PFC input rectifiers of the modular UPS units, using sinusoidal-current IGBTs, shall have
the following performance levels:
a. Total harmonic current distortion (THDI) upstream of the rectifier not exceeding 5%
b. Input power factor (PF) greater than 0.99 from 50% load upwards.
E. Outputs without a transformer: To reduce losses, dimensions and weight, the output of
each UPS unit shall be of the transformer-less type and the neutral shall be recreated
electronically.
F. Efficiency: Overall efficiency (between the rectifier inputs and the UPS output) shall be
greater than or equal to:
1. 94.5% from 50% load to full rated load (In);
G. Noise level: The noise level, measured as per standard ISO3746, shall be less than [75 dBA
(for 160, 200, 250, 300, 400, 500 kVA)]
2.3 AC Sources
A. Normal AC source (rectifier input): The normal AC source supplying the UPS shall, under
normal operating conditions, have the following characteristics:
1. Rated voltage: 380, 400 or 415 V at full rated load Pn.
2. Input voltage range: 250 V (at 30% load) to 470 V.
3. Number of phases: 3, a neutral is not necessary.
4. Frequency: 50 Hz ± 10%.
B. Bypass AC source (automatic-bypass input):
1. The characteristics of the bypass AC source supplying the UPS in the event of an inverter
shutdown (maintenance, failure) or an overload (short-circuit, very high inrush current)
shall be the following:
a.Voltage: 380, 400 or 415 V volts, ± 10%
b. Number of phases: 3 ph + N + earth (a non-distributed neutral is possible)
c. Frequency 50 Hz ± 8%
2. Outside these tolerances, it shall be possible to supply the load, but in downgraded mode.
2.4 Electrical Characteristics
A. Rectifier and charger
1. Supply: The PFC rectifier, drawing sinusoidal current, shall be supplied by the normal AC
source, without a neutral. It shall provide power for the load as well as charge or float
charge the battery. The battery charger shall be supplied by the rectifier to avoid
transmitting any AC fluctuations to the battery.
2. Inrush current: A device shall be provided to limit inrush currents. When AC power fails and
during Genset start, the rectifier shall limit the power drawn to 70% of its rating for ten
seconds. The remaining 30% shall be supplied by the battery
3. Phase sequence: A device shall check that the phase sequence is correct to protect the
power system from the effects of incorrect connections. The device shall also check the
bypass AC input.
4. Operating mode: The standard charger shall be sufficient to charge the battery rapidly.
For a backup time of 30 minutes, battery recharging shall take less than 10-12 hours
26 33 53
(values after discharge to Pn/2 and recovery of 90% of total battery charge for a recent
battery).
5. Input power factor > 0.99 @ 100% load.
6. Charger regulation and monitoring:
a. The battery recharge system shall include independent regulation and monitoring devices
to ensure conformity with standard NFC 58311.
b. The battery recharge voltage shall be a function of the ambient temperature in the
battery room.
B. Batteries: Each modular UPS unit shall be equipped with its own battery of the:
1. The UPS shall be equipped with a battery of the sealed lead-acid type, mounted and
wired in a cabinet identical in aspect to that of the UPS and shall have a service life of 10 /
12 years.
2. The battery shall be sized to ensure a continuous supply to the inverter for at least 30
minutes, in the event the normal AC source fails, given that the inverter is at full rated load,
i.e. UPS rating in kVA for a power factor PF = 0.9.
3. Sizing calculations shall assume an ambient temperature between 0°C and 35°C.
C. Inverter: The inverter shall be sized to supply a rated load of …60/80/120/200/250 / 300 /
400 / 500… kVA at 0.9 PF and shall satisfy the specifications listed below.
1. Output voltage
a. Rated voltage: …380 / 400 / 415 volts rms, adjustable via the user interface, within
tolerances of +/- 3% in order to take into account voltage drops in the cables.
b. Number of phases: 3 phases + neutral + earth.
c. Steady-state conditions: Variations in the rated voltage shall be limited to ± 2% for a
balanced load between 0 and 100% of the rated load, whatever the voltage level on the
normal AC source and the DC voltage level, within the defined limits.
d. Voltage variations for load step changes: Output voltage transients shall not exceed ± 1%
of rated voltage for 0 to 100% or 100 to 0% step loads. In all cases, the voltage shall return
to within steady-state tolerances in less than 100 milliseconds.
e. Unbalanced conditions: For a load unbalance between phases, the variation in the
output voltage shall be less than 1%.
2. Output frequency
a. Rated frequency: - 50 or 60 Hz.
b. Variations in the free-running frequency: - ± 0.5 Hz,
3. Synchronization with bypass power

a. When bypass power is within tolerances: To enable transfer to bypass power, the inverter
output voltage shall be synchronized with the bypass source voltage whenever possible.
To that end, during normal operation, a synchronization system shall automatically limit the
phase deviation between the voltages to 3 degrees, if the bypass source frequency is
sufficiently stable (within adjustable tolerances of 0.5% to 8% with respect to the rated
frequency).
b. Synchronization with an external source: It shall be possible to synchronize with all types of
external source.
c. Autonomous operation following loss of synchronization with bypass power: When the
bypass source frequency deviates beyond these limits, the inverter shall switch over to
free-running mode with internal synchronization, regulating its own frequency to within ±
0.02 Hz. When bypass power returns to within tolerances, the inverter shall automatically
resynchronize.
26 33 53
d. Variation in frequency per unit time: To avoid transmitting to the inverter any excessive
frequency variations on the bypass AC source when it is within tolerances, inverter
frequency variations per unit time (dF/dt) shall be limited to 1 Hz/s or 2 Hz/s (user defined).
4. Overload and short-circuit capacity: The UPS shall be capable of supplying for at least:
a. 10 minutes at a load representing 125% of the rated load

b. Minimum 30 to 60 seconds at a load representing 150% of the rated load.
c. If necessary, the UPS shall operate as a generator (current limiting) with a peak capacity
of from up to 245 % for 150 milliseconds, to allow highly disturbed transient operating states
(high overloads, very high crest factors, etc.) without transferring the load to the bypass.
D. Automatic bypass
1. Load transfer to the static bypass:
a. The UPS shall be equipped with an automatic bypass comprising a static switch
b. Instantaneous transfer of the load from the inverter to bypass power and back shall take
place without a break or disturbance in the supply of power to the load, on the condition
that the bypass source voltage and frequency are within the specified tolerances and
that the inverter is synchronized.
c. Transfer shall take place automatically in the event of a major overload or an internal
inverter fault. Manually initiated transfer shall also be possible.
d. If the bypass power is outside the specified tolerances or is not synchronized with the
inverter, automatic transfer of the load from the inverter to bypass power shall take place
after a calibrated interruption adjustable from 15 to 1 000 milliseconds.
2. Static-switch protection: The static switch shall be equipped with an RC filter for protection
against switching over voltages and lightning strikes.
3. Static-switch withstand: The static switch shall be capable of handling an over current of
min 16 to 25 times the rated current of the UPS to facilitate discrimination within the
electrical installation.
E. Discrimination and short-circuit capacity

1. If the bypass power is within the specified tolerances, the static switch shall make it
possible to use the short-circuit power of the bypass source to trip the downstream
protection devices of the inverter.
2. To ensure tripping in a selective manner, the total available power shall be sufficient to trip
protection devices with high ratings (circuit breaker rated In/2 or UR fuses rated In/4,
where In is the rated inverter current).
3. If the bypass source is outside the specified tolerances, all the inverters in operation shall,
for the same discrimination requirements, be capable of tripping circuit breakers rated
In/2 or UR fuses rated In/4, irrespective of the type of short-circuit.
F. System earthing (grounding) arrangement (SEA): The UPS shall be compatible with the
following system earthing arrangements (SEA):
1. Upstream source SEA: [TT/ IT / TNS / TNC]
2. Downstream installation SEA: [TT/ IT / TNS / TNC]
3. If the upstream and downstream SEAs are different, galvanic isolation shall be provided
on the normal and bypass lines.
26 33 53
2.5 Mechanical Characteristics
A. Mechanical structure: The UPS and batteries shall be installed in cabinet(s) with an [ IP 20]
degree of protection (standard IEC 60529). Access to the subassemblies making up the
system shall be exclusively through the front.
B. Dimensions: The UPS shall require as little floor space as possible. To gain space, it shall be
possible to install the UPS with the back to the wall or back to back.
C. Connection:
1. To facilitate connections, all terminal blocks must be easily accessible from the front when
the modular UPS units are installed with the back to the wall. Entry of upstream and
downstream power cables, as well as any auxiliary cables, shall be possible through the
bottom without requiring a false floor.
2. The UPS shall be equipped with an earth-circuit connector, in compliance with the listed
standards. The cables shall comply with the listed standards and be mounted in
compliance with the safety stipulations.
D. Ventilation:
1. System cooling of shall be by forced-air ventilation. To facilitate layout (particularly when
installed back to the wall), air input shall be through the front and bottom, exit through
the top.
2. All power electronics shall be equipped with a redundant ventilation system including
fault detection.
E. Safety:
1. For the safety of maintenance personnel, the cabinet shall be provided with a manually
operated mechanical bypass designed to isolate the rectifier, charger, inverter and static
switch while continuing to supply the load from the bypass AC source.
2. The UPS shall be equipped with a terminal block for reception of an external EPO order
resulting in opening of the battery circuit breaker and shutdown of all converters.
2.6 Environmental Conditions
A. UPS (not including battery)

1. Operation: The UPS, not including the batteries, shall be capable of operating under the
following environmental conditions without loss of performance:
a. Ambient temperature range: 0° C to +35° C.
b. Maximum temperature: 40°C for eight hours
c. Recommended temperature range: +20° C to + 25° C;
d. Maximum relative humidity: 95% at 25° C;
e. Maximum altitude without derating: 1000 meters.
2. Storage
a. The UPS, not including the battery, shall be designed for storage under the following
conditions: ambient temperature range: -25° C to +45° C.
2.7 Battery Management
A. Batteries are components whose service life is sensitive to operating conditions, i.e.
particular care is required for their management. In addition to the protective systems,
battery management shall include the systems listed below.
B. Measurement of actual backup time: The battery function shall be equipped with the
means to know at all times the real backup time available (AC power available) or
26 33 53
remaining (AC power not available), taking into account the true load on the inverter, the
battery temperature and battery ageing.
C. Digital battery monitoring

1. The UPS shall be equipped with a system for battery digital management.
2. Based on a number of parameters (percent load, temperature, battery type and age),
the system shall control the battery charge voltage and continuously calculate:
a. The true available backup time
b. The remaining service life.
D. Block by block monitoring

1. To further optimise battery availability and service life, it shall be possible to equip the UPS
with an optional system to continuously monitor all battery strings and display a block by
block failure prediction. The system shall include the functions listed below.
a. Continuous measurement of the voltage of each block.
b. Continuous measurement of the internal resistance.
c. Identification of faulty blocks (trend curves).
d. Possibility of replacing individual blocks.
e. Remote monitoring of all information via Ethernet, dry contacts or JBus.
2.8 Display
A. User interface: UPS operation shall be facilitated by a user interface comprising:

1. A graphic display (at least quarter VGA and high resolution are preferable);
2. ON and OFF control buttons (independent of the display);
3. Status indications with mimic panel.
B. Graphic display: The mimic diagram shall enable display of installation parameters,
configuration, operating status and alarms and indication of operator instructions for
switching operations (e.g. bypass). It shall be capable of supervising a single UPS unit or a
parallel system (up to eight UPS units with the external bypass).
1. Display of measurements: It shall be possible to display the following measurements for any
one of the modular UPS units or for the entire system:
a. Inverter output phase-to-phase voltages
b. Inverter output currents
c. Inverter output frequency
d. Voltage across battery terminals
e. Battery charge or discharge current
f. Rectifier/charger input phase-to-phase voltages
g. Rectifier/charger input currents
h. Crest factor
i. Active and apparent power
j. Power factor of the load
k. Battery temperature
l. Battery percent charge
m. Available backup time
n. The remaining battery service life
5. Display of status conditions and events: It shall be possible to display the following
indications:
a. Load on battery power
b. Load on UPS
c. Load on automatic bypass
26 33 53
d. General alarm
e. Battery fault
f. Remaining battery backup time
g. Low battery warning
h. Bypass AC source outside tolerances
i. Battery temperature
j. Additional information shall be provided in view of accelerating servicing of the system.
6. Display of operating graphs: It shall be possible to graphically display the measurements
mentioned above on the screen over significant periods.
7. Statistics: Number of overloads, number of transfers to battery power, cumulative time on
battery power, maximum power levels, demand power levels.
8. Log of time-stamped events: This function shall store in memory and make available, for
automatic or manually initiated recall, time-stamped logs of all important status changes,
faults and malfunctions, complete with an analysis and display of troubleshooting
procedures. It shall be possible to time stamp and store at least 2 500 events.
C. Controls: The UPS shall comprise the following controls:

1. Two ON and OFF buttons: Located on the front panel of the UPS, they shall control UPS-
unit ON/OFF status. It shall be possible to turn OFF the UPS externally via an isolated dry
contact.
2. EPO terminal block: The UPS shall be equipped with an emergency power off (EPO)
terminal block for complete system shutdown following reception of an external control
signal. The EPO command shall result in:
a. Shutdown of UPS units;
b. Opening of the static switches on the bypass line and of the battery circuit breaker;
c. Opening of an isolated dry contact on the programmable card.
3. Alarm reset button: This button shall turn off audio alarms (buzzer). If a new alarm is
detected after clearing the first, the buzzer sounds again.
D. Status indications with mimic panel: Indication of status conditions shall be distinct of the
graphic display.
1. Three LEDs on the control panel on each modular UPS unit indicate the following status
conditions:
a. Load protected;
b. Minor fault;
c. Major fault.
2. The mimic panel shall represent the modular UPS and indicate the status of the load
supply using five two colour (red and green) LEDs:
a. Load supplied (LED at UPS output on mimic panel),
b. Inverter on (inverter LED on mimic panel),
c. Operation on battery power (LED between battery and inverter on mimic panel),
d. Bypass activated (bypass LED on mimic panel),
e. PFC rectifier on (rectifier LED on mimic panel).
3. A buzzer shall warn the user of faults, malfunctions or operation on battery power.
2.9 Communication
A. Standard communication: It shall be possible to remote the following controls, indications

and measurements. To that end, the UPS shall have as standard equipment:
1. A programmable card with four inputs and six outputs.
26 33 53
B. Communications options: The UPS shall be designed to enable the extension of

communications, without system shutdown, to the following types of cards:
1. Multi-standard communications card with two outputs:
a. An RS485 serial-link implementing the JBus/Mod Bus protocol for connection to a building
management system (BMS).
b. Ethernet 10/100 Mbps using one of the protocols below:
• XML-Web for direct UPS connection to an intranet network, without connection to a
server, capable of supplying information via a standard web browser SNMP for
connection to a computer-network management system
• Multi-standard communications card with three outputs:
i) The two outputs listed above, plus a modem output for communication with a tele
maintenance system.
a. The UPS shall be detectable by supervision software for large UPS systems.
b. Shutdown and administration software shall be available in addition to the
communication cards.
For single phase UPS units, for purposes of remote communications with the UPS the
following shall be available and contained within the UPS:
a) A serial port to allow communications with a host computer to gracefully shut down one
or more operating systems.
b) Network Management Card, which allows communications over a network via web
browser or SNMP.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 Installation and commissioning
3.1.1 The Contractor shall co-ordinate with civil works as necessary and ensures that sufficient
clearances are maintained during installation.
3.1.2 The Contractor shall include for site installation and commissioning of the UPS system.
3.1.3 Allow for coordination of output alarms to be registered onto the BMS system. Include the
provision of SMS alarms and output relays as required to ensure the signals are relayed to
the 3rd party system.
3.1.4 Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect, test, and adjust

components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections.
3.1.5 The installation shall be tested and commissioned in accordance with IEE regulation and
in lines with manufacturer’s recommendation.
3.1.6 Standards: IEC 146, IEC 529, IEC 801, IEC 350, NFC 15-100, NFC 58-311, 150, 3746, EN 50091.
3.1.7 Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner’s maintenance

personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain the UPS.
3.1.8 The contractor shall submit all relevant Warranty for the installed system.
26 33 53
26 35 33 – Power Factor Correction Equipment
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 Description of Work
This article specifies the requirements for the design, manufacture, testing of low voltage
power factor correction sets with all necessary ancillary equipment in accordance with
the drawings.
Three phase automatic power factor correction sets shall be installed indoor.
The design of the low voltage capacitor bank and accessories shall comply with the
requirements of the latest current edition of following standards and with the specific
requirements of this specification.
IEC 60831 : Part 1&2- Shunt power capacitors of the self healing type for A.C. systems
having rated voltage up to and including 1 kV.
IEC 60439-1: Low Voltage Switchgear and Control gear Assemblies.
IEC 60947: Low Voltage Switchgear
Part 2: Circuit Breakers
Part 4: Control gear for voltages up to and including 1000 V a.c .
IEC 60269: LV fuses.
IEC 60289: Reactors
IEC 60529: Degree of protection provided by enclosures (IP code).
IEC 60076-6: Power Transformers – Part 6: Reactors
1.3 Design Conditions
1.3.1 Ambient temperature
The LV capacitor banks shall be designed for the following ambient temperature
inside the electrical room:
Maximum: 40°C
Average over 24 hours: 35°C
Annual average: 25°C
Minimum: -5°C
In case of higher temperature, the components must be overrated.

With overrated components (capacitors, reactors, fans), the LV capacitor banks must be
able to withstand the following ambient temperature inside the electrical room:
Maximum: 50°C
Average over 24 hours: 45°C
Annual average: 35°C
Minimum: - 5°C
1.3.2 Altitude
The LV capacitor bank shall be designed to be installed at a maximum of 2000m.
1.3.3 Humidity
The humidity withstand by the equipment shall be according to IEC 60439-1.
26 35 33
ELECTRICAL - Rev. C PAGE 1 OF 7
1.3.4 Site Pollution Conditions

The site pollution conditions shall be maximum class 3 according to IEC 60815
1.4 Electrical System Characteristics
1.4.1 Low voltage network system

Nominal system voltage: 400V
Voltage tolerance (400 V): +/- 6%
Rated frequency: 50 Hz
1.4.2 Harmonic pollution

The capacitor bank shall be designed to withstand harmonic pollution and avoid
harmonic amplification as mentioned in section 260100 clause 1.10.
The following rules shall be taken into account.

 Capacitors rated 400/415 V ( for 400 V network ) shall be used if the power of
harmonic generating loads in kVA is lower or equal than 15 % of the power of the
transformer.
 Capacitors rated 470 V (for 400 V network) shall be used if the power of harmonic
generating loads is between 15 and 25 % of the power of the transformer.
 Capacitors rated 470 V with Reactors tuned to 215 Hz shall be used if the power of
harmonic generating loads in kVA is between 25 and 50 % of the power of
transformer.
1.5 Submittals:
The Contractor shall furnish the following drawings and documents:

• Dimensioned drawing sharing outline of the capacitor bank.
• Single line diagram showing all the major electrical components.
• Protection and control schematics of the capacitor bank
• Detail of cable termination and fittings.
• Foundation plan including foundation loading.
• Original catalogues for various proposed components
• Type test certificates of the capacitor bank as per IEC 61921.
• Schedule of recommend spare parts.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 Power Supplies
Power supplies for LV capacitor bank shall be: 400/415V, 3 phases, 4 wire, 50 Hz, 230 V
single phase 50 Hz for control circuits, fans and anti-condensation heaters.
2.2 Capacitors
a. The capacitors shall be low-losses units, tested in accordance with IEC 60831 part
1&2. Each element is to be of a dry self healing metalized polypropylene film and to
be housed in an individual case.
b. A protection system shall be fitted to each element which shall comprise an HRC
26 35 33
cartridge, an integral discharge resistor and an overpressure disconnect device.
c. Each element forming the three phase capacitor shall be fitted with an internal
discharge resistor to ensure that the capacitor is discharged to a voltage not
exceeding 50 V measured at the capacitors terminals, one minute after
disconnection from the power supply.
d. The use of polychlorinated biphenols (PCB) and oil as capacitor impregnation is not
acceptable.
e. The capacitor losses in Watts shall not exceed 0.7 W/kvar, discharge resistor included.
2.2.1 Enclosure and connection

The group of elements forming a three phase capacitor unit shall be installed in a plastic
enclosure.
The capacitor shall be indoor type.
Each capacitor shall be provided with three terminal pads and shall not require earth
connection.
2.2.2 Certification
The three phase capacitor shall be designed and manufactured in an ISO 9001 and ISO
14000 certified plant.
2.2.3 Technical data

Tolerance on capacitance value: 0, + 10 %.
Insulation level:
 50 Hz , 1 minute withstand voltage : 6 kV
 1.2 / 50 µs : 11 kV
Temperature class : - 25 / D
Surrounding temperature:
 Maximum : 55 °C
 Average over 24 hours : 45°C
 Annual average : 35°C
Admissible current overloads : 30 %
Admissible voltage overloads :
 8 h in any 24 h period : 10 %
 30 min in any 24 h period : 15 %
2.3 Power Factor Controller
The power factor controller shall be of the electronic type capable of switching
capacitor contactors in 12 steps.
The technical specification should be as follows :
Connection type : Line to line or Line to neutral .
Connection features: Insensitive to CT direction/Insensitive to phase rotation polarity
Voltage input: 220 / 240 V
Voltage measurement :
Frequency: 50 Hz ( +/- 1 Hz )
Current input: CT …../5 A class 1 .
Step output contacts: 12 volt free contacts
Alarm output contact: 1 volt free contact
26 35 33
Momentary no voltage function: Disconnection of all steps. Once Voltage is restored (for
more than 15 ms), automatic reconnection shall be made.
Step configuration programming: Fixed / Auto / Not used .
It shall provide the following information:
• Cosine phi
• Connected steps
• Period before switching
• Step output status ( capacitance loss survey )
• Load and reactive current
• Total voltage harmonic distortion
• Voltage , temperature, Power ( S,P,Q)
• Voltage harmonic spectrum ( 3,5,7,11,13 )
It shall provide the following Alarms and warning:

 Low power cosine phi
 Hunting
 Abnormal cosine phi
 Overcompensation
 Frequency not detected
 Over current
 Under voltage
 Over voltage
 Over temperature
 Total voltage harmonic distortion
 Capacitor overload
Power factor setting : Digital , 0.8 ind to 0.9 cap

C/K setting : Automatic search or manual setting
Accuracy class : 1.5 %
Display : 7 segments LED
Temperature : Working state 0 to 50°C
2.4 Contactors
Contactors shall be used to switch capacitors in or out of service. They shall comply with
IEC 60947-4 and shall have a rating suitable for the service required. Specially suitable
Capacitor Switching Contactors, which include a current limiting device, with a proven
track record should be used
2.5 Fuses
Each step of the capacitor bank shall be protected by fuses. Fuses shall be of the HRC
cartridge approved type to IEC 60269. Fuse shall be correctly sized according the type
offered.
2.6 Reactors
Detuned reactors shall be used in case of harmonic pollution (see clause 1. 4.2)
The detuned reactor shall be three phase iron core with copper winding.
The reactor shall comply with IEC 60289.
Tolerance : +/- 5 %
Tolerance between phase : Lmax/Lmin < 1.07
26 35 33
Tuning order : 4.3 ( relative impedance : 5.4 % )

Harmonic current spectrum for tuning order 4.3 :
I3 = 2 % I1
I5 = 69 % I1
I7 = 19 % I1
I11 = 6 % I1
Permissible overload fundamental current : 1.1 time the nominal current ( I1 ).

Insulation level : 1.1 kV according to IEC 76
Test voltage ( coil to core ) : 3 kV 1 minute
Distance between terminals and earth : 20 mm
2.7 Current Transformers
The current transformer shall comply with IEC 44 and shall be of 5 A output, class 1, 5 VA
minimum.
The current transformer to be supplied by the Panel builder.
2.8 Cables
2.8.1 Control cables

Small wiring shall be carried out in PVC insulated 1000 V conductor and with core
ferruled.
The cross section shall be minimum 1.5mm² except for the power supply of the power
factor controller which shall be 2.5 mm².
The colours used shall be red, black, white, Yellow, Green.
Plastic clips shall be fitted at the end of the conductor to identify it.
2.8.2 Power cable

The power cable used shall be black PVC insulated 1000V, 1000V2K type.
No identification of each cable shall be done.
2.9 Design Features
The equipment shall be housed in a metal enclosure with an IP 31 protection degree.

The doors of the capacitor bank enclosure shall be interlocked to prevent access to the
bank, unless the capacitor bank has protection against direct contact when door is
opened.
The capacitor bank could be forced cooling according to the reactive power and
theambient temperature.
Each panel shall be fitted with an earth terminal in the form of a 10 mm diameter
threaded bolt and fitted with two nuts and washers.
2.9.1 Design data

IEC standard : 60439-1
Protection degree : IP 31, Indoor type.
Insulation level : 0,66 kV
Withstand 50 Hz , 1 minute : 2.5 kV
Short circuit level for 1 sec.: 25 kA
Gland plates : Un-drilled
Incoming cable entry : Bottom .
26 35 33
2.9.2 Enclosure Thickness

The thickness of the metal sheet of the enclosure shall be 1.5 mm.
However some metal parts and devices inside the enclosure may have a lower thickness.
2.9.3 Surface treatment:

The metallic parts of the enclosure shall be washed at 40°C minimum to take off grease.
Rinsed in water.
Painting:
A powder Epoxy Polyester shall be applied with a thickness of 30 microns.
Epoxy protects against chemical attack and polyester protects against mechanical
attack.
The painting shall be polymerized into an oven.
Without any specific information or requirement the colour shall be the standard of the
supplier.
2.9.4 Rating Plate

Self-stick shall be fitted inside the cubicle with the following information:
Reactive power
Nominal voltage
Frequency
IEC 60439-1 standard compliance
2.9.5 Components Identification

Self-stick shall be used to identify each components fitted in the capacitor banks
capacitors, contactors, power factor controller, fuses, reactors (if any).
2.10 Circuit Breakers
If a Circuit Breaker is used as the main supply isolator to the capacitor bank it should be
properly sized to ensure an overload and short circuit protection.
Recommended rating:
 1.36 times the nominal current of the complete bank, for Standard type.
 1.43 times the nominal current of the complete bank , for Overrated type.
 1.31 times the nominal current of the complete bank, for Detuned reactor type
2.11 Inspection and Testing
Tests shall be performed at the manufacturer’s works in accordance with the relevant
IEC standards.
The tests shall include:

1. Routine tests for capacitor bank:
 Inspection for conformity with the specifications
 Dielectric test : 3 kV 1 minute
 Insulation resistance measurement at 500V.
During inspection, routine test shall be carried out only on some samples (2 or 3 capacitor
banks).
2. Routine tests for capacitor:

 Voltage withstand test between terminals ( 2 s )
 Capacitance measurement
26 35 33
 Loss angle measurement on similar capacitor
3. Type tests:
Type testing shall be only supplied for loose capacitors on similar capacitor. Type test
certificate shall be issued by an independent test station of international repute.
2.12 Manufacturers

Schneider Electric, France
ABB, Italy
ICAR, Italy
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 Installation & Commissioning:
The Tender Specification of the installation is based on calculations to correct the power
factor on the LV system to 0.9 lag. The P.F.C. equipment shall provide multi-stage
operation of capacitors banks according to the load characteristics, the sizes and
number of stages of capacitors as required. Notwithstanding the tender estimate, the
Contractor shall include for sizing and providing under this section the appropriate power
factor and harmonic corrective equipment and include independent testing and
commissioning of the installation upon completion in an operational condition.
3.2 The Contractor shall liaise with structural and civil works and finalize the foundation.
3.3 The Contractor shall obtain approval from EDD for the particular project.
26 35 33
26 41 00 - Lightning Protection System
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1.1 Design, supply, install, test and connect a complete lightning protection system to meet
the latest applicable governing code requirements including local and international
building code, local and international codes for lightning protection systems and IEC for
quick and safe discharge of lightning strikes. The proposed system may be based on
standards described under item-1.3.2 together with, BSEN 62035 Code of Practice for
Protection of Structures against Lightning.
1.1.2 Provide Electronic Surge Protection of combined Type 1, 2 and 3 tested protector (to BS
EN 61643) for use on mains power distribution systems primarily to protect connected
electronic equipment from transient overvoltage’s on the mains supply, e.g. computer,
communications or control equipment.
Transient overvoltage protectors shall be installed on Telecom lines entering the Main
Telecom Provider room in order to protect equipment connected to the line, against
transient over voltages. (Where data lines link equipment in separate buildings, transient
overvoltage protectors should be installed at both ends of the line in order to protect
both pieces of equipment.)

260100 : Operation & Maintenance of Electrical Systems
262600 : Distribution Circuits
260850 : Electrical Services to Mechanical Plant
1.2.1 The entire system shall be designed, supplied, installed, tested and connected by a
specialist Contractor licensed by relevant authority for lightning protection system work.
The specialist Contractor shall provide complete set of design/installation documents to
Architect for review prior to start of work. The specialist Contractor shall determine the
proper level of protection based on system manufacturer’s recommendations and
requirements of local authorities and local & international codes and practices. Tender
drawings shown are for guidance purpose only. Upon completion of work, contractor
shall furnish a certificate of the work approved by local authority.
1.2.2 The installed system shall ensure an effective and satisfactory long term performance. All
fittings shall be mechanically robust and provide good corrosion resistance in conditions
of 50 deg c and 95% relative humidity.
1.2.3 Earth rods and inspection pits shall be installed in locations at ground level and shall be
interconnected with earth tapes/rebars used as down conductors/70mm2 earth cable in
32mm conduit as shown on drawings. Test link shall be provided for each down drop
conductors at ground level at suitable location.
1.2.4 All exposed metallic structures like Chillers, AHUs, cable trays, antenna mast, pipe work,
flag mast and equipments, etc., shall be bonded with the lightning protection system.
26 41 00

the satisfaction of the Architect.

All work is to conform to the relevant provisions of appropriate British Standards and British
Standard Codes of Practice currently applicable including the following or any equivalent
international standards:
BS 6651,
BS 7430,
BS EN 50164,
BS EN 61633
BSCP 7430
BSCP 326:1965
BSEN 62305, 2006
BS 7430/1998
1.4 Submittals:
1.4.1 Product Data:

Submit manufacturer’s data for all equipment identifying model references and types.
Materials
Methods of construction
Installation requirements
Performance
1.4.2 Working Drawings:

Submit design and working drawings and all design calculations from the manufacturer
showing detailed layout of systems and equipment. Drawings to show all supports
required and to be co-ordinated with both building structure and other trades. The size of
earth tapes/conductors, no. of down conductors, no. of earth pits etc. shown on the
contract drawings are for guidance only and shall be verified and confirmed by the
manufacturer as stated above. All drawings submitted shall be stamped and signed by
manufacturer.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
The lightning protection system shall consist of:
2.1 Perimeter Earth Tape: To be 25 x 3mm plain copper.
2.1.1 Down Conductor: Rebar shall be used as down conductors. The down conductors shall
be placed around the periphery of the building. A minimum of two re-enforcing bars shall
be used as down conductors in each column. The minimum overlap dimension to
connect two re-bars shall be at least 20 times the diameter of the re-bar. If it not practical
to arc-weld two re-bars then suitable clamps should be used at a distance of each 10cm
26 41 00
till the above dimension is achieved. Re-enforcement bars in the designated columns
should be used as down conductors, with a suitable junction box to be recessed at
approx. 500mm above the ground for the test link.
2.1.2 Tape Fixing: To be 25 x 3mm polypropylene DC cleats with brass/stainless steel fixing
screws and plastic expansion plugs. Spaced at 1.2 meter centre horizontal and 1.0 meter
centres vertical.
2.1.3 Strike Pads: To be 112 mm dia.
2.1.4 Joints and Bonds: To be with exothermic welding system suitable for copper to
copper/copper tested joints.
2.1.5 Curtain Wall Bonding:

All metallic elements of the façade shall be directly earthed to the structure for the
purpose of lightning protection. The contractor shall make himself aware of the
requirements under the latest revision of the standard. All necessary connections,
conductors, earthing connectors etc shall be deemed to be included.
The contractor shall co-ordinate with the Curtain Wall Supplier/Sub-contractor for the
exact interface and bonding requirements. The curtain wall is to be electrically
continuous and the installation shall comply with the standards. Tests shall be carried out
to the satisfaction of the Supervision Consultant to ensure electrical continuity as
stipulated in the code.
Lightning protection bonding terminals along each re-bar down conductor shall be
provided at the lowest levels and roof levels for bonding with curtain walls.
Intermediate bonding terminals shall be provided at an interval of not exceeding 30m
apart at each of the vertical intervals as required by the standard. Lightning protection
bonding terminals shall be confirmed with the Curtain Wall Supplier/Sub-contractor.
As a general practice, bonding points shall be provided and located on the internal face
of the claddings. A conductor shall be provided and installed by the contractor for
lightning protection bonding at the down conductors.
The Curtain Wall Supplier/Sub-contractor shall be required to confirm his details on the
lightning protection bonding of curtain walls. It is the responsibility of this Sub-contractor
to ensure all details (both locations and quantity) agreed complied with BSEN 62035.
All metal cladding components including panels, glazing frames, mullions, transoms,
fixings and support structures shall be fully bonded electrically to ensure electrical
continuity of the building development.
2.1.6 Test Clamps: To be 25 x 3mm gunmetal.
2.1.7 Tape Connection to Earth Rods: To be 25 x 3mm plain copper.
2.1.8 Earth Rods: To be 20mm dia. Copper bonded (length as required).
2.1.9 Inspection Earth Pits: To be concrete type C10 or to suite site requirements.
MANUFACTURERS
Thomas & Betts/ABB (Furse) – UK

A N Wallis, UK
26 41 00
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 Soil Resistivity Tests
3.1.1 The Contractor shall conduct soil resistivity tests in the proximity of the proposed earth rod
locations as soon as it is possible to do so, and shall determine the sufficiency of the
length of earth rod specified.
3.1.2 Should the tests prove additional, or longer earth rods be required. He shall inform the
Architect in writing.
3.2 Co-ordination
The Contractor shall be responsible for liaising directly with the Main Contractor for the
installation of bonds welded to structural steelwork, installation of earth pits, puddle flanges
and any item of equipment which requires a joint involvement. Also the location of earth
pits and the finish of the earth pit cover shall be agreed with the architect/ engineer at
site.
3.3 Testing on Completion
The whole of the system shall be tested in accordance with BSCP 326-1965 or equivalent
standards and test certificates submitted to the Architect.
The Specialist Lightning Protection Installer must submit the Test Certificates of the materials
materials used as per BSEN 50164, which should be attested in original by the
manufacturer or the manufacturer’s authorized representative.
3.4 Installation
3.4.1 The lightning protection shall be provided in accordance with local codes and all down
conductors shall be connected to the grounding of the building foundation. All roof
mounted metal objects are to be connected to the system with proper connectors. As a
protection against secondary discharge the cabin rail of the elevator shall be connected
to the system.
3.4.2 Install lightning copper tape conductor and strike pads on roof top as shown on the
drawings and based on system manufacturer’s design recommendations. Do not
penetrate roofing with conductors or fasteners. Secure assemblies and conductors with
system manufacturer’s recommended hardware to suit specific applications
3.4.3 Run roof conductors using proper conductor supporting studs and connect to down
strips using proper fasteners.
3.4.4 The resistance value of each earth termination system shall be 10 ohms or less.
3.4.5 Connect to main earth/ground termination system specified elsewhere in this Section.
Cover earth inspection pits with suitable marking tape.
26 41 00
26 50 00 - Lighting Installations
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1.1 Provide and install a complete lighting installation throughout the development all as
detailed on the drawings and within the specifications.

260100 Operation & Maintenance of Electrical system
260500 Basic Materials & Methods
262000 Service & Distribution
260526 Earthing System
1.2.1 Contractor shall provide all Luminaires as detailed on the drawings and in accordance
with the performance specifications detailed in the Legend drawings.
1.2.2 System of Wiring: Lighting circuit shall be installed using pvc insulated cables enclosed in
high impact PVC conduit within ceiling voids, flush within the building fabric and in heavy
gauge galvanized steel conduit within car park, pump rooms, plant rooms, utility areas,
substation block and such externally exposed situations.
1.2.3 Ceiling roses fitted directly to conduit boxes shall be of the semi-recessed type and if
fitted to flush boxes, a break joint ring shall be provided. Ceiling roses shall not be
connected to fixed wiring in such a manner that one of its terminals remains live when
the associated switch is off, unless that terminal cannot be touched when the ceiling rose
is dismantled to the extent necessary for the replacement of the associated flexible cord.
1.2.4 Every ceiling rose shall be provided with an earthing terminal, for compliance with IEE
Regulations.
1.2.5 The lights in ID areas shall be either switched or dimmed and controlled by touch screens
or lighting control plates or motion/daylight sensors within the lighting control system all in
accordance with the drawings.
1.3.1 The installations throughout shall be of the best quality materials erected by skilled
workmen under complete supervision and left in good working order on completion to
1.3.2 All ballast/control gear units, contactors, circuit breakers and the like shall be suitable for
operation under local ambient conditions.
1.3.3 All submittals shall be complete with catalogue reference number, technical details of
light fittings, control gear, photometric data, type test certificates from internationally
accredited bodies.
26 50 00
1.3.4 Luminaire Photometric Data Testing Laboratory Qualifications: Provided by

manufacturers' laboratories that are accredited under the National Volunteer Laboratory
Accreditation Program for Energy Efficient Lighting Products.
1.3.5 All internal light fittings shall have ‘RAL 9010' finish, unless otherwise stated.
1.3.6 Compliance with Standard: All work shall conform to relevant provisions of appropriate
British Standards, British Standard Codes of Practice currently applicable and the IEE
Regulations - 16th Edition and CIBSE code.
1.4 Submittals
1.4.1 Product Data:

For light fittings:
a) Submit manufacturer’s data on features, accessories, finishes, and the following as under:
i) Physical description of lighting fixture including dimensions.
ii) Emergency lighting units including battery and charger.
iii) Ballast.
iv) Energy-efficiency data.
v) Life, output, and energy-efficiency data for lamps.
vi) Materials, dimensions, and finishes of poles.
vii) Means of attaching luminaires to supports, and indication that attachment is suitable for
components involved.
viii) Anchor bolts for poles.
ix) Photometric data, in IESNA format, based on laboratory tests of each lighting fixture type,
outfitted with lamps, ballasts, and accessories identical to those indicated for the lighting
fixture as applied in this Project.
x) For indicated fixtures, photometric data shall be certified by a qualified independent
testing agency. Photometric data for remaining fixtures shall be certified by the
manufacturer.
b) Submit samples of all lighting fittings for engineer’s approval prior to placement of the
orders.
Provide Mock up installation for the internal and external light fittings complete with power
and control connections.
1.4.2 Drawings:
a) General:
Submit working drawings showing lighting layouts, conduit routes and sizes,
schematic circuit arrangements and location of control equipment.
b) Show details of nonstandard or custom lighting fixtures. Indicate dimensions, weights,
methods of field assembly, components, features, and accessories.
c) Anchor-bolt templates keyed to specific poles and certified by manufacturer.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 Conduit
To be high impact PVC and heavy gauge galvanized steel as mentioned on the drawings
with appropriate fittings. Conduit fixed to metal decking to be spaced clear of decking
insulation - See SECTION 260500 - BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS.
26 50 00
2.2 Luminaires
To be provided as per light fitting schedule/cut sheets and performance specification in
Appendix. Manufacturer’s reference numbers wherever are provided to clarify the
functional requirements and to indicate quality required.
Any light fitting to be connected to central battery system shall be provided with
addressable control modules of same make as that of central battery system. Contractor
to coordinate with central battery system supplier.
The wiring connection sizes to the luminaries shall be as per the wattage of the lamps; but
not less than 2.5 sq.mm. All internal wiring within light fittings shall be by thermal resistant
flame retardant cables.
The materials shall be as described in SECTION 260500 - BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS.
2.2.1 Internal Wiring within Luminaries
2.2.1.1 Cables interconnecting components shall be heat resisting cables and shall be neatly
bundled by nylon self-locking cable ties and shall be properly routed and secured away
from heat generating accessories like control gear, etc.
2.2.1.2 Cables used for internal wiring of the luminaires shall be of appropriate type and size. The
insulation of the cables shall be able to withstand throughout the life of the luminaires the
maximum temperature of not less than 105 Deg C.
2.2.1.3 Where wiring passes through the edge of any metal section of the fitting, it shall be
protected by an approved grommet. All connections of wires to terminals shall be of
approved types. All wirings shall be concealed from view with the luminaires installed.
2.2.1.4 All cable terminations within the luminaires shall be suitably shrouded. At every luminaires,
an earthing terminal shall be provided for connection to the circuit protective conductor.
2.2.2 Fluorescent Tubes and Lamps
2.2.2.1 Fluorescent tubes shall be energy saving type and shall comply with BS1853 and shall be
as indicated on the luminaires Schedule. Fluorescent tubes shall be triphosphorus coated
type having an efficacy of not less than 96 lumen per lamp watt for standard fluorescent
tubes and 104 lumen per lamp watt for T5 slim fluorescent tubes, and eighty-five (85)
colours rendering index.
2.2.2.2 PL lamps shall be of single-ended miniature fluorescent lamps each consisting of two
narrow glass tubes welded together with a bi-pin cap and housing for starter and
capacitor at one end.
2.2.2.3 Lamp holders for PL lamps shall be of type G23 suitable to receive the bi-pin cap of the
PL lamps. Power factor correction capacitors shall be provided to correct the power
factor to better than 0.9 lagging.
2.2.3 Fluorescent Fittings
2.2.3.1 Except where specified or shown as being aluminium, metalware for florescent
fittings, reflectors, channels, etc., shall be constructed from mild steel or zinc anneal sheet
not less than 1 mm thickness. All corners and joints exposed to normal view shall be
welded, ground smooth and filled where necessary before painting.
26 50 00
2.2.3.2 Fittings shall have closed ends unless otherwise specified or detailed. Where a diffuser is
specified the diffuser shall be for the full length and width of the fitting with a surrounding
flange where applicable. Diffusers shall be arranged so that they are hinged frame
supported, or where specified to the contrary, hinged or removable and held by chains
for maintenance.
2.2.3.3 After fabrication, metal surfaces shall be thoroughly cleaned back to the parent metal
and all dust, moisture grease or oil shall be removed.
2.2.3.4 All scale and corrosion products shall be removed after which the finished article shall be
cleaned with trichloroethylene.
2.2.3.5 The metal ware shall be spray painted with high grade polyester powder coat on both
sides and stoved. Total thickness of paint build up shall be not less than 50 micron.
Finished colour shall be to approval on all surfaces.
2.2.3.6 All fittings shall be adequately ventilated to maintain the tube wall operating
temperature below 65 Deg C (50 Deg C ambient).
2.2.3.7 All plastic diffuser shall be of non-deteriorating, colour stable material and of acrylic
material.
2.2.3.8 Recessed lighting fittings shall be supported from the RC ceiling slabs using appropriate
fixing accessories such as steel rod, spring clips, ceiling brackets, suspension hooks, profile
brackets, etc. to ensure proper Installation of the fittings on different types of ceiling
panels. Where light fittings are installed directly below large ductworks etc., the Sub-
contractor shall install suitable brackets, channels, etc. to facilitate suspension/support of
the light fittings from the ceiling slabs. An adjustable resilient spring-clip shall be provided
to enable the suspension length to be adjusted to fine tolerances. Suspension sets shall
be adjustable proprietary make type manufactured to carry the weight of the lighting
fittings and shall be of adequate lengths for installation on the false ceiling panels
concerned. Suspension rods shall be of least 5mm diameter and shall fixed at positions
recommended by the lighting fitting manufacturers.
2.2.3.9 At least four (4) suspension rods shall be provided for each fitting. Lighting fittings shall be
supported in a manner that will ensure that the weight of each fitting is equally distributed
to all supporting rods with the fitting remaining in level position.
2.2.3.10 Louvered mirror reflectors of the fluorescent lighting fittings where called for shall
be manufactured for low brightness performance with double parabolic faceted, pre-
anodised high purity aluminium of 88% reflectance, with minimum of glare to comply with
Category 2 of CIBSE Lighting Guide LG3:1989. The louvre reflectors shall have a light
output ratio of at least 70%.
2.2.3.11 All diffusers shall be hinged at one side of the fitting for maintenance purposes and snap
fit back into position.
2.2.3.12 All lighting fittings used as emergency lights including exit signs shall be constructed and
installed In accordance with the current edition of BS5266 Code of Practice for the
Installation and Maintenance of Emergency Evacuation Lighting and Power Supply
Systems in Buildings. Exit signs shall be complied with Civil Defence requirements.
26 50 00
2.2.3.13 Identification symbol in accordance with BS5266 shall be displayed on or adjacent to

each emergency lighting fitting. The symbol shall not be fixed to the diffuser of an
emergency lighting fitting or to removable ceiling tiles.
2.2.4 Control Gears for Fluorescent Luminaires
2.2.4.1 All electrical control gears shall be totally built into the fitting assembly. Separate ballast,
starter and power factor correction capacitor shall be provided for individual lamp. All
control gears shall be rated for 230V AC voltage supply.
2.2.4.2 Ballasts shall be low loss type with a maximum of 6 watts loss at rated voltage and
wattage comply with BS 2818.
2.2.4.3 Power factor correction capacitors complying to BS 4017 shall be provided to correct the
power factor for each lamp to not less than 0.9 lagging two (2) hours after continuous
operation of the lamp. All capacitors shall be fitted with suitable internal discharge
resistor. Power factor capacitors shall be of a type manufactured for continuous
operation in an ambient temperature of 50 Deg C. Capacitors shall be fitted with leads in
lieu of terminals so that the component is not exposed when fitting is opened.
2.2.4.4 Starters shall be complete with bases and shall of the glow type with bi-pin to comply
with BS 3772. A radio interference suppression capacitor shall be fitted internally within the
starter.
2.2.4.5 Control gear shall be suitably selected to suit the requirements of switching and/or
dimming control as specified on the Drawings.
2.2.4.6 Electronic ballasts shall be of high frequency fixed output type, low loss of less than 6
watts, suitable for T5 slim fluorescent tubes. All electronic ballasts shall comply with
1EC928, IEC929 and EN55015.
2.2.5 High Intensity Discharge (HID) Lamps and Control Gears
2.2.5.1 High Intensity Discharge (HID) lamps where called for shall be manufactured to BS 3677 as
appropriate.
2.2.5.2 Appropriate inductive ballasts for limiting the current shall be used in conjunction with the
HID lamps and that the control gears installed shall be suitable for the lamps used. The
control gears (ballasts, ignitors, capacity or etc.) for each lamp shall be suitable for
enclosing in a weatherproof compartment where used for external areas or integrated
with the luminaires. Ballasts shall be the low loss type manufactured to BS EN 60922 and
rated for operation at
2.2.5.3 230V 50 Hz single phase AC supply. Ballasts shall be vacuum impregnated or polyester
filled to ensure good heat dissipation and maximum protection from moisture and
corrosion. The ballasts shall be of low noise type and shall be mounted tightly on a rigid
part of the lighting fitting. No one component of the lighting fitting shall be loose and
badly fastened which might become resonant. Power factor of each lamp circuit shall be
maintained at better than 0.9 lagging.
2.2.6 Light Emitting Diode (LED) Luminaire
2.2.6.1 The LED luminaire, which comprises the LED module, its associated electronic
control gears (driver) and all accessories, shall be designed for lasting
26 50 00
operation. The luminaire shall be able to fully withstand the current voltage
surges of lightning strikes and the frequent switching operation of the power
supplies. The luminaire shall be carefully selected and designed to ensure that
the functional characteristics, failure rate, operating life span and other
requirements in the specifications are fully met. The luminaire shall be provided
with a 5-year defects and performance warranty.
2.2.6.2 The Contractor shall submit test reports from local or international accredited
test labs for approval to demonstrate the performance requirement of the LED
luminaires.
2.2.6.3 Control gear shall be able to be replaced separately.
2.2.6.4 Performance Requirement

1. Luminaires
1. Operation of LED Life Span – The rated LED life should be more than
50,000 hours at ambient temperature of 50 Deg C or higher.
2. The Contractor shall ensure that the luminaire design is tested to relevant
local or international standards and including the followings.
a) LM-79-08 Approved Method: Electrical and Photometric
Testing of Solid-State Lighting Devices
Describes the procedures for performing
standardized measurements of the power,
light output, and color characteristics of SSL
products.
b) LM-80-08 Approved Method: Measuring Lumen
Depreciation of LED Light Sources Specifies
conditions for long-term testing of LED
packages, arrays, and modules.
Lamp caps and holders together with gauges

c) IEC 60061
for the control of interchangeability and safety
d) IEC 60598-1 Luminaire – General requirements and test
e) IEC 60838-2-2 Testing & Measuring Equipment /Allowed

Subcontracting Miscellaneous Lamp Holders
Part 2-2 –
Particular Requirements Connectors for LED
Modules.
f) IEC 61231 International lamp coding system (ILCOS)
g) IEC 61347 Particular requirements for d.c or a.c supplied

electronic control gear for LED modules
Part 1 and
Part 2-13
h) IEC 62031 LED module for general lighting – Safety

Specification
26 50 00
i) IEC 62471 Measuring System for Assessment of Optical

Radiation Safety
j) IEC/TS 62504 Terms and definitions for LEDs and LED

modules in general lighting
k) IEC 62560 Self-ballasted LED-lamps for general lighting

services > 50V – Safety specifications
l) IEC/PAS 62612 Self-ballasted LED lamps for general lighting

services > 50V - Performance requirements
m) IEC/PAS 62707-1 LED - Binning - Part 1: General

requirements and white grid
n) IEC/PAS 62717 LED Modules for General Lighting –

Performance requirements
o) IEC/PAS 62722-1 Luminaire performance - Part 1: General

Requirements
p) IEC/PAS 62722-2-1 Luminaire performance - Part 2-1:

Particular requirements for LED luminaires
q) IEC 62384 DC or AC supplied electronic control gear for LED

modules – Performance requirements
Ensure luminaire complies with Photo-biological Safety of lamps and lamp

systems in accordance with the requirements of BS EN 62471:2008 or ANSI/IESNA
RP-27.3-0.
Provide proof of testing and compliance with the standards with certification
provided to prove the fixture is classed as “Exempt”.
2) LED Module
The LED module shall have the following information distinctly and
durably marked:
i) Trademark or mark of origin (Brand & model of LED used)
ii) LED luminaire System efficacy Wattage
iii) Correlated Colour Temperature (CCT INK)
iv) Colour Rendering Index (CRI)
v) Weight
vi) Marking requirements in accordance to relevant local or

international standards.
The LED Module shall have the following features:
i) Heat sink with high thermal dissipation properties.
26 50 00
ii) Corrosion resistant.
iii) Diffuser shall be UV coated stabilised
iv) Operate in relative humidity of greater than 90%
The Contractor shall provide test result to indicate adequate thermal

performance for the long term operation of the LED’s at an operating
temperature of not less than 30°C in accordance with relevant local or
international standards. The LED junction temperature shall be
maintained at or below manufacturer’s recommendation.
The Contractor shall ensure that the lumen maintenance of LED

luminaire shall be better than 94%.
3) Electronic Control Gear (Driver)
i) The Contractor shall ensure that the driver comply with

the requirements of SELV systems.
ii) The driver selected shall satisfy the following requirements:-
Life Span 50,000 hours of operations at max. case

temperature of 70°C or higher
Power Factor 0.9 or better

Rated input voltage AC 240, 50Hz
iii) The electronic control gears shall power the LED module such that
the LED is flicker-free and it shall be suitable for Class 1 luminaires.
4) Accessories
i) LED Module and Driver shall be provided with DC cable

connector and internal wiring
ii) LED module connector shall be plug type
iii) Driver module connector shall be socket type
iv) The cable length for each module shall be at least 150mm and
shall be compatible with the prescribed DC cable connector.
v) The Contractor shall provide DC cable connector.
2.2.7 Emergency Light Fittings

The emergency lights being connected to CBS system shall be coordinated with
the CBS specification ref: 26 33 23.
2.2.7.1 Emergency fluorescent light fitting shall comply to BS5266 and IEC598-2
and shall be individually equipped with battery pack to provide illumination
upon sensing of power failure. The emergency fluorescent fittings are required
to be type tested by approved testing laboratory to meet BS5266 and IEC598-2.
26 50 00
2.2.7.2 Individual control unit and battery pack shall be integrated within the light
fittings.
2.2.7.3 Batteries shall be sealed nickel-cadmium re-chargeable type to IEC 285 and
shall be capable of continuos operation at cell wall temperature of 70 Deg C.
2.2.7.4 The batteries shall be capable to maintain the fluorescent lamp for up to two
(2) hours after the main supply fails. The lumen output of the light fittings shall
not be less than 50% of those under main supply condition throughout the two
(2) hours of discharge period.
2.2.7.5 The charger shall be fully automatic, solid state constant voltage type, with
electronic circuitry to protect the batteries against over-charge and over-
discharge. The charging system shall be capable of re-charging the battery to
full capacity in not more than sixteen (16) hours after a total discharge of the
battery.
2.2.7.6 The control circuits shall be suitable for 230 volt mains operation and shall be
manufactured to enable the luminaries to operate exactly like normal
conventional light fittings. An unswitched live wire shall be connected to each
and every luminaries with emergency pack so that the luminaries can be
switched off either from the associated lighting switches, timers, contactor, etc.
However, irrespective of the status of the light switch or the controlling
contactor, the light fitting shall automatically illuminate or remain illuminated
upon mains failure. Upon restoration of the mains supply, the lamp shall be
switched back to mains supply operation and the batteries shall be re-charged
again automatically.
2.2.7.7 A circuit switch shall be incorporated in the control circuit to enable testing of
the circuit to be carried out. A red neon light shall be provided to show ‘mains
supply healthy’.
2.2.7.8 A fused terminal block fitted with cartridge fuses of appropriate rating
shall be provided separately for both the charge and the maintained circuit.
2.2.7.9 All Emergency use luminaries supplied by battery or UPS shall be comply with
Civil Defence code. All time and cost required to obtain subject test certificate
to Civil Defence code shall be included in the Sub-contract.
2.2.8 Exit Lights

The emergency EXIT lights being connected to CBS system shall be coordinated
with the CBS specification ref: 26 33 23.
2.2.8.1 Exit sign shall be surface or recess mounted or suspended to suit the
Architectural detail.
2.2.8.2 The EXIT sign shall be LED type suitable for connecting to central battery system
and shall be complete with addressable module .In buildings where central
battery system is not provided, EXIT lights shall be with built-in battery pack
rated for 3 hour back-up.
2.2.8.3 The exit sign shall be constructed from mild steel zinc anneal sheet not less
than 1mm thickness. All corners and joints exposed to normal view shall be
welded, ground smooth and filled where necessary before painting).All fittings
26 50 00
shall be adequately ventilated to maintain the tube wall operating

temperature below 65 Deg C (50 Deg C ambient).
2.2.8.4 The metal shall be spray painted with high grade polyester powder coat on
both sides and stored. Total thickness of paint build up shall be not less than 50
micron. Finished colour shall be applied on all surfaces.
2.2.8.5 All EXIT lights should have both Arabic & English lettering OR shall have
pictogram with Euro legends as per EN 1838 and ISO 3864 confirming to local
civil defense requirements with viewing distance in compliance with the
relevant standard. Samples of EXIT lights shall be submitted for approval.
Installation method shall be subject to mock-up approval.
2.2.8.6 The fluorescent lamps and control gears shall comply with specification in this
specification.
2.2.9 Aviation Warning Lights
2.2.9.1 The luminaires shall be of a maintenance free obstacle light for aviation
warning with a life span of at least 100,000 hours. The lamp shall be of light
emitting diode (LED) type in accordance with local air-traffic control code
requirement and complies with international Civil Aviation Organization (ICAO)
standards.
2.2.9.2 Light Intensity: Vertical radiation to be at least 10cd with a coverage of 50o
:Horizontal radiation to be at least 10cd with a coverage of 360o
(lamp life of 100,000 hrs)
2.2.9.3 Luminaire housing shall be of high pressure die-cast aluminium housing to IP65
minimum requirement complete with all necessary accessories including
control box, solar cell, 3-way and 4-way junction box for through wiring,
mounting accessories, surge protection devices, etc.
2.3 Lighting Control

Provide and install a complete lighting control system as detailed on the drawings.
Local switches where applicable shall be 20 amp grid switch range and flush pattern. In
utility areas where surface conduiting and wiring are carried out there shall be of
surface/recessed pattern metal clad range. In all ID areas, except external, finish shall be
white plastic. External switches shall be weatherproof and watertight type.
2.3.1 Lighting control system:

Shall be in accordance with section 26 09 43.
2.3.2 Warranty:
a) Warranty Period for Emergency Lighting Unit Batteries: 5 years from date of Taking over
certificate.
b) Warranty Period for Emergency Fluorescent Ballast and Self-Powered Exit Sign Batteries: 5
years from date of Taking over certificate.
c) Warranty Period for Electronic Ballasts: 5 years from date of Taking over certificate.
d) Warranty Period for LED fixtures and modules against color consistency and lumen output:
5 years from date of Taking over certificate.
26 50 00
e) Warranty Period for LED drivers/power supply: 5 years from date of Taking over certificate.
f) Warranty Period for Metal Corrosion: 5 years from date of Taking over certificate.
g) Warranty Period for Color Retention of external light fixtures: 5 years from date of Taking
over certificate.
2.3.3 Manufacturer:
Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products as per the following or
a) Light Fixtures:
As per the Legend Drawing.
b) Manufacturer's Qualifications:
Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of interior & exterior lighting fixtures of sizes, types
and ratings required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for
not less than 5 years.
c) Local Supplier’s Qualifications:

Local Firms regularly engaged in supply and after sales service of interior & exterior lighting
fixtures of sizes, types and ratings required for not less than 5 years.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 Location of all luminaires and accessories shown on the drawings are shown symbolically.
3.2 The Contractor shall finalize exact locations of all equipment in co-ordination with ID
drawings, false ceiling layouts and other services.
3.2 Unless otherwise mentioned, where luminaires are installed within suspended ceilings they
shall be supported from the slab with purpose made fixing clips and steel wires.
3.3 Adjust aimable lighting fixtures to provide required light intensities
3.4 The Contractor shall obtain exact locations of all external lighting fixtures/luminaires from
the Engineer’s prior to installation.
3.5 The whole of the installation to be treated in accordance with IEE Regulations - 17th
Edition and test sheets made available to the Engineer.
3.6 Illumination Measurements: to be taken at selected locations, to determine level and

uniformity. Lux level results shall be submitted in tabulated format for approval.
3.7 Test for Emergency Lighting: Interrupt power supply to demonstrate proper operation.
Verify transfer from normal power to battery and retransfer to normal. Also refer to central
battery system specifications.
3.8 Prepare a written report of tests, inspections, observations, and verifications indicating and
interpreting results. If adjustments are made to lighting system, retest to demonstrate
compliance with standards.
3.9 Provide equipment earthing connections for interior lighting fixtures as indicated in Section
"Earthing". Tighten connections to comply with tightening torques specified in applicable
standards to assure permanent and effective grounds.
26 50 00
28 11 00 – Integrated Fire Alarm & Voice Evacuation Life Safety System
PART I - GENERAL
1.1.1 Provide, install, test and connect a complete electrically supervised microcomputer
based fire alarm, smoke control, voice evacuation and emergency telephone
communication system. All integrated and connected to a Fire Command Center
(central monitoring and control facility) as described herein and shown on the
drawings.
1.1.2 Integrated Fire Alarm and Voice Evacuation life safety system equipment shall be
arranged and programmed to provide an system for the early detection of fire, the
notification of building occupants, the automatic summoning of the local fire
department, the override of the HVAC system operation, and the activation of other
auxiliary systems to inhibit the spread of smoke and fire, and to facilitate the safe
evacuation of building occupants. In all operating modes, the processing of fire
alarms shall have the highest priority
1.1.3 The system supplied under this specification shall be UL Listed Fire Alarm Control
Panels, Voice Evacuation Panels, detectors & accessories.
1.1.4 This performance specification provides the minimum requirements for an Integrated
Intelligent Addressable Fire Alarm and Voice Evacuation Life Safety System.
1.1.5 System shall utilize node to node, direct wired, multi-priority peer-to-peer network
operations. The system shall utilize independently addressed, smoke detectors, heat
detectors, input/output modules as described in this specification.
1.1.6 The peer-to-peer network shall contain multiple nodes consisting of the MFACP
(Master Fire Alarm Control Panel) at Fire command center, RFACP’s (Remote Fire
Alarm control panel), FARP (Fire Alarm Repeater Panel), GDU (Graphic Display Unit)
and Graphic display with monitoring & control software workstations. Each node
(RFACP/FARP/GDU) shall be an equal, active functional member of the network,
which is capable of making all local decisions and generating network tasks to other
nodes in the event of node failure or communications failure between nodes.
1.1.7 The MFACP control panel shall include all required hardware, software and site
specific system programming to provide a complete and operational system. The
control panel(s) shall be designed such that interactions between any applications
can be configured, and modified using software provided by a single supplier. The
control panel(s) operational priority shall assure that life safety takes precedence
among the activities coordinated by the control panel.
1.1.8 All integrated system operation shall be based on application programming in order
to provide the greatest flexibility in integrating fire and Voice evacuation life safety
system assure compliance with all required codes and standards.
28 11 00
1.1.9 The proposed Fire Alarm & Voice evacuation system shall comply with the
requirements of Hotel operator Guide lines latest version.
1.2 This section shall be read in conjunction with the following:
– General Conditions and Preliminaries

– Basic Materials and Methods
– Building Management System
– Fire Protection System
– HVAC System
1.3 DESCRIPTION OF SYSTEM
1.3.1 The Main Fire Alarm and voice evacuation Control Panel MFACP, installed in the FCC
(Fire Command Center) at lobby level shall provide fire detection, control of alarm
indicating devices, and supervision of all initiating and indicating circuits. The MFACP
shall be interfaced to the BMS central PC, located in the Engineering Admin Office.
The software interface between the BMS central Controller and the fire alarm system
shall support all functionality specified for proprietary fire alarm supervisory stations.
1.3.2 A single fire alarm control panel shall have the capability for configuration and
operation of 200 fire alarm zones. In a network system, the overall system shall have
the capability for up to 1000 zones.
1.3.3 Alarm/supervisory initiating devices, indicating appliances, control elements, speakers

firefighter phones, field accessory devices, magnetic contacts, door release and all
associated work as described hereunder and/or as shown on the tender drawings.
1.3.4 Wire and Install all components of Mechanical / Electrical Specifications (Sections) of
complete Fire alarm system together with field devices and panels in accordance
with the requirements as shown on tender drawings and specification. Include wiring,
installation and termination between control components and field devices in
addition to electrical auxiliary contacts in starter panels of fans, pumps, and any
other equipment or devices as indicated in this section or required for the proper
functioning of controls as described in this section. All necessary conduits, wall boxes,
junction boxes transformers, relays, auxiliary devices shall be provided by contractor
to accomplish specified control function. Access doors / panels shall be provided for
setting in place water flow switches, manifold valves and dampers.
1.3.5 Provide and install Volt Free Contacts, Dry Volt Contact which are required to
interface any equipment with BMS as per BMS Sequence of operation for systems and
as per Smoke management strategy.
1.3.6 Provide all necessary labor, equipment, enclosures, power supplies, accessories,
cables, mounting backboxes, installation materials, and tools as described in this
specification and as detailed on the drawings, required to furnish a fully
commissioned and operational turn-key system.
1.3.7 Provide control & monitoring module for setting in place flow switches, sprinkler
supervisory switches, door contacts, door holders, smoke / fire dampers, and current
transformers etc. Requirements shall be quantified in coordination with the details
provided in the floor layouts and specifications of Electrical & Mechanical services.
28 11 00
1.3.8 Fire alarm sounders should be audible throughout the building (including
guestrooms and guest bathrooms).
1.3.9 Obtain required approval from local authorities having jurisdiction and pay for all
costs associated therewith.
1.3.10 Main Fire Alarm panel shall be connected to the nearest Fire Headquarter by auto
dialing facility and as per the local authority requirements.
1.3.11 In addition to the MFACP at fire command center, there are RFACP’s and FARP’s at
various locations as shown in the drawings.
1.3.12 All the fire alarm panels (MFACP, RFACP & FARP) Power shall be fed from emergency
main panel.
1.3.13 Each Fire alarm panel (MFACP, RFACP & FARP) & Voice evacuation panel shall have
internal back up to Power the panel for 24 Hours in standby mode and Alarm load for
01 Hour (60minutes) – Battery backup = 24hr (Std by) + 01hr (Alarm). Contractor shall
submit battery calculation sheet to confirm that the battery supplied is complying
with the requirements.

workmen under competent supervision and left in good working order on completion
to the satisfaction of the Architect.
1.4.2 The system shall be commissioned by competent technicians, with full responsibility
for proper operation of the system including debugging and proper calibration of
each component in the entire system.
1.4.3 The Fire Alarm System sub-contractor shall be experienced with minimum 10years in
the field life safety system installations with record of completing similar size of projects
to the satisfaction of Client. Contractor shall be authorized agent for supply,
installation and testing of fire alarm system for the proposed manufacturer with
factory trained technicians & supervisors for installation within the organization.
Contractor shall submit the documents to substantiate the above requirements.
1.4.4 The Fire Alarm system installation, supervision and commissioning shall be by
Technician / Engineers with minimum five years of experience in engineering of life
safety systems.
1.4.5 Installation of Fire Alarm & Voice Evacuation system including cabling / first fix to
testing & commission shall be done only by the specialist fire alarm system contractor
with trained technicians & engineers.
1.4.5 Provide satisfactory operation without damage at 110% above and 85% below rated
voltage and at 3 hertz variation in line frequency. Provide static, transient, and short
circuit protection on all inputs and outputs. Communication lines shall be protected
against incorrect wiring, static transients and induced magnetic interference. All bus
28 11 00
connected devices shall be a.c. coupled or equivalent so that any single device
failure shall not disrupt or halt bus communication.
1.5 COMPLIANCE WITH STANDARDS AND REGULATIONS
1.5.1 The fire detection system shall be installed and commissioned in accordance with,
and the requirements of BS 5839-1: 2002 Code of Practice, EN54-Part 2: 1998 and
NFPA 72 Fire Alarm Codes, NEC 70 (National Electric Code), NFPA101 & NFPA5000. The
responsible company should be able to demonstrate their competence to install and
commission the system, e.g. by certification to BAFE SP203, LPS1014 or other relevant
standard.
Style 1: As defined by NFPA 72, Class B.
Style 4: As defined by NFPA 72, Class B.
Style 6: As defined by NFPA 72, Class A.
Style 7: As defined by NFPA 72, Class A.
Style B: As defined in NFPA 72, Class B.
Style D: As defined in NFPA 72, Class A.
Style Y: As defined in NFPA 72, Class B.
1.5.2 The equipment manufacturer shall operate quality management system in

accordance with ISO 9001:2000. In addition, the equipment shall be manufactured
under a recognized factory control procedure such as UL / FM Approval.
1.5.3 All detection devices shall be independently certified as complying with the relevant
standards.
1.5.4 The Fire Alarm Control Panel shall be independently certified as complying with
requirements of UL864. The independent international recognized approvals body’s
valid certificates shall be submitted for the proposed system respective model.
1.5.5 The Fire Alarm Control Panel shall also support a number of additional functions that
shall include to following list but not limited to:
Program Cause/Effect on Outputs (e.g. Phased Evacuation)

Auxiliary Power Supply Output
Auxiliary Relay Outputs
Printer
1.6 MANUFACTURERS
Subject to compliance with specifications, manufacturers offering products that may
be incorporated in the works include, but not limited to following:
1. Edwards systems technology (GE Security) - U.S.A
2. COOPER
3. GENT
4. Honeywell – USA
5. Simplex - USA
1.7 SUBMITTALS
1.7.1 Product Data:

Submit Fire Alarm system Installation & commissioning sub-contractors Pre-
Qualification documents with details of past experience with Project specific
28 11 00
Organization chart. Submit manufacturer’s specifications for all equipment showing

materials used in manufacture data sheet with sizes and profiles of fittings, methods of
jointing and installation instructions. Submit manufacturer’s data for all equipment
identifying model references and types. Information submitted to include:
i) BOM (Bill of Material) of Complete System

ii) Materials
iii) Methods of Construction / Installation.
iv) Installation Requirements
v) Performance
1.7.2 Shop Drawings:

Submit shop drawings showing detailed detector/module/device layout with loop
numbers, addressing etc and system schematics. Drawings to show all details
required and to be coordinated with all other services i.e. Electrical, Mechanical, Fire
Fighting, RCP etc.
1.7.3 Battery Calculation Sheet:

Submit Backup battery Calculation sheet to confirm the proposed battery back-up is
in compliance with NFPA72 requirements for the Fire Alarm detection panel & Voice
Evacuation Panel & with the requirements given above in Section 1.3.12.
1.7.4 Loop Current Calculation sheet:

Submit Loop current calculation sheet generated from the Fire Alarm manufacturer
software. Number of devices in a loop should not exceed 80% of its Loop current &
device limitation capacity.
1.7.5 C & E (Cause & Effect) Matrix:

Submit detailed Cause & Effect Matrix during the progress of work. C&E Matrix shall
be prepared in coordination with the all other services of the project i.e. Fire Fighting,
BMS, Lift Machine, Pumps, Fans, Electrical & ELV Systems. C&E Matrix shall clearly
indicate the tag numbers of each equipment interfaced. C&E Matrix shall clearly
indicate separate zones of the project with sequence of operation. C&E Matrix shall
be revised until it is properly coordinated with all services and approved by
Consultant / Client / Operator. Laminated C&E Matrix with Zone details shall be fixed
at the MFACP / Fire command center location and other locations as required by
Operator Chief Engineer.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
2.1.1 General
All Life Safety System equipment shall be arranged and programmed to provide the
early detection of fire, the notification of building occupants, the automatic
summoning of the local fire department, the override of the HVAC system operation,
and the activation of other auxiliary systems to inhibit the spread of smoke and fire,
and to facilitate the safe evacuation of building occupants.
2.1.2 Display
The main display on MFACP, RFACP & FARP shall show the first and most recent
highest priority system events without any operator intervention. All system events shall
28 11 00
be directed to message queues. Messages of different types shall never be intermixed

to eliminate operator confusion. A "Detail / Info" switch shall provide additional
information about any device highlighted by the operator.
2.1.3 Initiating Device Circuits

Initiating device circuits monitoring manual fire alarm stations, smoke and heat
detectors, water flow switches, valve supervisory switches, fire pump functions, and air
pressure supervisory switches shall be Class A Circuit.
2.1.4 Automatic Device Mapping

The system shall include the feature of Automatic Device Mapping which maps
where each device is installed relative to other devices on the circuit. This Information
shall be accessed using the System program, which uses interactive menus and
graphic support, and generates layouts or as-built drawings – complete with branch
wiring (T-taps), device types and their addresses!
2.1.5 Voice Evacuation Notification Appliance Circuits

All notification appliance circuits shall be monitored Class A & Class B type circuit. All
notification appliance circuits shall have a minimum circuit output rating of: 2 amps @
24 vdc; 50 watts and 35 watts @ 70V audio. The notification circuits shall be power
limited. Non-power limited circuits are not acceptable.
2.1.6 Power Supply

Fire alarm & Voice Evacuation panels (MFACP, RFACP, FARP & VEC) Power shall be
fed from emergency main panel.
All Fire Alarm panels, Voice Evacuation Panels & Booster power supply units shall be
with internal Standby battery backup. Standby / Backup power supply shall be an
electrical battery with capacity to operate the system under maximum supervisory
load for 24 hours and capable of operating the system for 60 minutes in the alarm
mode at 100% load. The system shall include a charging circuit to automatically
maintain the electrical charge of the battery. The system shall automatically adjust
the charging of the battery to compensate for temperature. Battery backup
calculation sheet shall be submitted for approval to support the Battery capacity
provided.
2.1.7 Signaling Line Circuits

a. When a signaling line circuit covers more than one fire/smoke compartment, a
wire-to-wire short shall not effect the operation of the circuit from the other
fire/smoke compartments.
b. The signaling line circuit connecting to addressable/analog devices including,
detectors, monitor modules, control modules, isolation modules, intrusion
detection modules and notification circuit modules shall be Class A type circuit
with PH120 2hr rated fire resistance cable installed within conduits (GI Conduits in
exposed areas).
c. Cables in external ducts / manholes shall be MICC Cable or PH120 Fire resistant
jelly filled armored type cable suitable for external duct installations
d. The signaling line circuit connecting to the audio communications amplifiers,

panels, nodes & speakers shall be Class A / Class B Type monitored power limited
circuit.
28 11 00
e. The signaling line circuit connecting to the two-way communications circuit (riser)
shall be Class A / Class B monitored circuit.
2.1.8 Network Wiring

a. The system supplied under this specification shall utilize node to node, direct wired
multi-priority peer-to-peer network operations.
b. The signaling line circuit connecting network panels/nodes, annunciators,
command centers, shall be Class A type. The Cable shall be 2 Hour fire resistant
copper cable or 2hr Fire resistant fiber optic cable suitable to the System / FACP
Panel Manufacturer recommendation.
c. Network cables used in external applications shall be fire resistant outdoor cable;
jelly filled armored type for External duct / Manhole applications.
d. When a network is wired in a Class B configuration, a single break or short on the

network wiring isolates the system into two groups of panels. Each group
continues to function as a peer-to-peer network working with their combined
databases. When wired using a Class A configuration, a single break or short on
the network wiring causes the system to isolate the fault, and network
communication continues uninterrupted, without any loss of function. Should
multiple wiring faults occur, the network re-configures into many sub-networks and
continues to respond to alarm events from every panel that can transmit and
receive network messages.
2.1.9 Network Nodes

The RFACP remote control panel(s) (network nodes) shall meet the same
requirements as described in control panel section and shall contain the following;
Common control switches with LED / LCD display, Integral power supply(s) with
secondary stand-by power. Signaling line circuits for communications with
analog/addressable devices, as required. Audio amplification, as required.
Notification appliance circuits, as required and Auxiliary function circuits and
operations, as required.
2.2 PANEL COMPONENTS & FUNCTIONS
2.2.1 General
a. The control panel(s) (MFACP & RFACP) shall be a multi-processor based networked
system designed specifically for fire, one-way and two-way emergency audio
communications, manual smoke control. The control panel shall be listed and
approved for the application standard(s) as listed under the General section.
b. The MFACP Main fire alarm control panel should incorporate the following features
at minimum:
• A visual alarm indicator for each zone and detection devise.
• A visual fault indicator for each zone and detection devise.
• An alarm sounder control for each zone.
• Visual fault indicators for mains failure, battery under voltage and battery
charger failure.
• An audible alarm activated by any fault or alarm condition, complete with
muting switch.
• A general evacuation switch to operate all alarm sounders.
28 11 00
• Fireman’s control switches & status LED for manual control of ventilation systems.
c. In addition to the main fire alarm panel a graphical user interface shall be
provided within the security control room and provide the following:
• Indicate the location of the activated device on site and floor plans. Devices
will be defined as all equipment interfaced with the fire alarm system.
• Provide an audible and visual alarm on device activation.
d. Fire alarm panel shall provide a full log history of incidents for minimum 6months
including date, time, location, action taken and with time of action log.
e. The control panel shall include all required hardware, software and site specific
system programming to provide a complete and operational system. The control
panel(s) shall be designed such that interactions between any application can be
configured, and modified using software provided by a single supplier. The control
panel(s) operational priority shall assure that life safety takes precedence among
the activities coordinated by the control panel.
f. The control panel shall include the following capacities minimum:

1) The MFACP & RFACP Shall be minimum 8 Loop or above as shown on the
drawing.
2) Each loop shall support minimum 250 Devices.
3) Redundant backup loop card shall be provided in the MFACP to
automatically take over the failed loop card.
4) Support up to 2500 analog/addressable points per panel.
5) Support network connections up to 63 other control panels and annunciators.
6) Support multiple digital dialers and modems
7) Support multiple communication ports and protocols
8) Support up to 2000 chronological events.
9) Support Native Backnet output for interfacing with BMS
g. The network of control panels shall include the following features:

1) Ability to download all network applications and firmware to the configuration
computer from a single location on the system.
2) Provide electronic addressing of analog/addressable devices with Automatic
Device Mapping
3) Provide an operator interface control/display that shall annunciate, command &
control system functions.
4) Provide an internal audible signal with different programmable patterns to
distinguish between alarm, supervisory, trouble and monitor conditions.
5) Provide a discreet system control switch provided for reset, alarm silence, panel
silence, drill switch, previous message switch, next message switch and details
switch.
6) Provide system reports that provide detailed description of the status of system
parameters for corrective action or for preventative maintenance programs.
Reports shall be displayed by the operator interface or capable of being printed
on a printer. Provide an authorized operator with the ability to operate or modify
system functions like system time, date, passwords, holiday dates, restart the
system and clear control panel event history file.
7) Provide an authorized operator to perform test functions within the installed
system.
28 11 00
h. The control panel shall contain a standby power supply that automatically supplies
electrical energy to the system upon primary power supply failure. The system shall
include a charging circuit to automatically maintain the electrical charge of the
battery.
2.2.2 Operator's Interface

1. The system shall allow network functions to be configured to apply to any
combination of nodes (panels) in the network.
2. Each control panel (network node) shall have a printer. Printer shall be
configurable to output any combination of alarm, supervisory, trouble, monitor, or
service group event messages.
3. Each control panel shall have LCD display. The display on each panel (cabinet)
shall be configurable to display the status of any and all combinations of all alarm,
supervisory, trouble, monitor, or service group event messages.
4. From each LCD display on the system shall be capable of being programmed for
control functions of any panel / node or the entire network.
5. The system program shall have a minimum of 100 system definable service groups
definable within the program to allow facilitate the testing of installed system
based on the physical layout of the system. Service groups that disable the wiring
of circuits serving multiple floors or fire zones shall not be considered as equal.
6. Advanced Windows® based programming with program version reporting to

document any and all changes made during system start-up or system
commissioning. Time and date stamps of all modifications made to the program
must be included to allow full retention of all previous program versions data.
7. The operator display shall clearly identify unacknowledged and acknowledged

alarm, supervisory, trouble, and monitor status messages.
8. The system shall provide the ability to download data from the
analog/addressable detectors to a PC while the system is on-line and operational
in the protected premises. The downloaded data may then be analyzed in a
diagnostic program supplied by the system manufacturer.
9. A standby power supply shall automatically supply electrical energy to the system
upon primary power supply failure.
2.2.3 Annunciation
1. The system shall be designed and equipped to receive, monitor, and annunciate
signals from devices and circuits installed throughout the building. Standard LED
annunciators may be combined in common enclosures provided that the groups
of LED's comprising each of the required annunciators are separated from one
another (Detection, Supervisory, Status, and Status) and clearly labeled.
2. Receipt of alarm, trouble, and supervisory signals shall activate integral audible
devices at the control panel(s) and at each remote annunciation device. The
integral audible devices shall produce a sound output upon activation of not less
than 85 dBA at 10 feet.
28 11 00
3. The annunciator shall contain the following system status indicators:

Minimum 150 character backlit Liquid Crystal Display
System Normal Indicator
System Common Alarm Indicator
System Common Trouble Indicator
System Common Supervisory Indicator
System Ground Fault Indicator
System Disabled Point(s) Indicator
System Reset Switch with Indicator
System Alarm Silence Switch with Indicator
System Trouble Silence Switch with Indicator
System Message Queue Scroll Switches.
10-Digit numeric Keypad to Enable/Disable System and Functions.
4. The LED annunicator rows shall contain the following format:
5. Provide one row of red (alarm) and yellow (trouble) LED's. LED's in each row shall
be arranged in columns, one column per type of alarm initiating device, and shall
illuminate upon receipt of an alarm signal from the associated device(s).
6. Provide one row of red (alarm) LED's. LED's in each row shall be arranged in
columns, one column per type of alarm initiating device, and shall illuminate
upon receipt of an alarm signal from the associated device(s) (i.e., ZONE 1 Alarm).
7. Provide one row of yellow (supervisory) LED's. LED's in each row shall be arranged
in columns, one column per type of supervisory type device, and shall illuminate
upon receipt of an supervisory signal from the associated device(s) (i.e. Zone 10
sprinkler valve supervisory switch)
8. The LED annunciator shall be provided with spare 20% LED's minimum. Each pair
of LED's shall be labeled "Spare".
2.2.4 One way emergency voice annunciation:

1. Provide a one-way emergency voice communication system annunciator with
the following design:
2. This standard annunciator shall incorporate the microphone for the one-way
Manual Alarm message announcements at select Zones or All Zones. Push button
switches with indicator shall be provided on the Control panel to select the
paging / annunciation zones. Each 3-Way switch provided for voice
communication shall be as indicated below.
3. 3-position switch for each evacuation signaling zone, with "Voice," "Auto" and
"Evacuate" positions identified and two LED status indicators for each audio visual
evacuation signaling "zone", one red and one yellow. These LED's shall illuminate
to indicate respectively: 1) Evacuation signals activated (red), 2) Trouble in audio
(speaker) or visual (strobe) circuit(s) (yellow).
2.2.5 Two way emergency voice communication:
1. Two way emergency communications shall be possible with fireman Telephone
handsets and Fireman Telephone sockets proved for the two-way voice
communication systems, including all required zone select and manual override
control switches and the LED indicators.
2. The two-way voice communications control unit shall provide two-way
communications between remotely located phones and the command center.
The control unit shall provide the ability to individually select and display each
two-way voice communication circuit support up to five (5) remote telephones in
simultaneous two-way voice communications.
3. 2-Position Switch - Emergency Two-Way Voice Communication
4. Provide two LED status indicatiors for each two telephone zone, one red and one
28 11 00
yellow. These LED's shall illuminate to indicate respectively: 1) Telephone calling-in

and call connected (red), 2) Trouble in circuit(s) (yellow).
2.2.6 Manual Control / Activation / Bypass switch.

1. The Control panels shall contain the following switches:
2. Provide two-position switch with LED indicator to manually activate Smoke Extract
System in individual Zones.
3. Provide minimum 24nos two position switches & three position switches. (Maximum
number of switches shall be as per number of Zones in the Building). Each switch
function shall be as approval of Engineer / Client/Operator.
4. Manufacturers' standard control switches shall be acceptable if they provide the
required operation, including performance, supervision and position indication. If
the manufacturers' standard switches do not comply with these requirements,
fabrication of custom manual smoke control panel with control switches
acceptable to the Engineer / Client / Operator is required.
2.2.7 EVAC (Emergency Voice Alarm Communication) Panel

1. The system shall be capable of delivering multi-channel EVAC audio messages
simultaneously over copper and/or fiber media. All EVAC audio messages and live
pages shall originate at the one-way audio control unit at Master Fire Alarm
control panel (MFACP) in Fire Command center.
2. The one-way audio control unit shall store pre-recorded audio messages digitally
on a SD Card in the panel which shall be field programmable. These messages
shall be automatically directed to various areas in a facility under program
control.
3. The EVAC system shall consist of networked remote voice alarm panels / cabinets
with zoned amplifiers to receive amplify and send messages through speakers
over supervised circuits. System shall facilitate total campus evacuation and
paging to all the buildings connected to Fire Alarm network from Master Fire
Alarm & Voice evacuation panel in Fire command center.
4. This shall be accomplished by the means Zoned alarm paging switches for each
Zone / building and “ALL Call” switch for all areas MFACP & EVAC in FCC (Fire
command center).
5. It must be possible to transmit an alarm tone to speakers in one zone while

sending a voice message to another zone, while the rest of the building / campus
is receiving alert tone, all at the same time.
6. Each speaker zone shall have dual circuits) connected to its own amplifier in
Master EVAC & Remote EVAC Panels. It shall be therefore possible to have as
many channels as there are speaker zones. A minimum of three (3) channels must
be supplied: an ALERT channel, an EVAC channel and a PAGE channel.
7. Each speaker zone must be divided into two speaker circuits. Circuit A and
Circuit B speakers must be connected in an alternate format so that upon a
circuit failure, 50% of the speakers are still audible.
8. The emergency evacuation and voice alarm system amplification equipment

shall be sized to accommodate the total quantity of speakers for each channel
28 11 00
(total of three) plus 25% spare reserve capacity in each channel.
9. The one-way emergency audio control shall provide control switches to direct
paging messages as follows:
• "All Call" to direct the paging messages to all areas in the facility, overriding all
other messages and tones.
• "Alarm message to Evacuation Area" to direct the message to the evacuation
area(s), overriding all other messages and tones.
• "Alert message to direct page messages to the area(s) receiving the alert
message and tones, overriding all other messages and tones.
• "Standby message to Balance Building" to direct page messages to the areas)
in the facility NOT receiving either the evacuation area or alert area
messages.
• "Page by Phone" switch to select the firefighter’s telephone system as the
source for paging.
10. Each EVAC Panel (Master & Remote) shall be provided with redundant amplifiers
arranged in such a manner that failure of an amplifier will not result in loss of
acceptable audibility in any area of the building.
11. Each EVAC Panel (Master & Remote) shall have inbuilt battery backup to support
operation of EVAC alarm in the event of mains power failure. The battery backup
duration shall be in line NFPA 72 requirements for EVAC Systems.
2.2.8 EVAC Audio Amplifiers (Multi-Channel)

1. Provide monitored Amplifier modules in EVAC Panels. Amplifier modules shall be
twenty (20) / forty (40) watt power output per amplifier module.
2. The number of amplifier modules provided on each EVAC Panel shall meet the
requirement of sum of maximum output wattage (Example: If speaker has 1/3/6
Watt power tapping, 6watt to each speaker shall be considered for calculating
amplifier total power output)of all speakers connected to the individual EVAC
with 25% spare capacity.
3. Each speaker zone shall have its own amplifier modules, mixing of two different
zone to single Amplifier module is not acceptable as it will allow paging of two
different messages in two different zones.
4. The system software shall be capable of selecting the required audio source
signal for amplification thru each amplifier module in the EVAC independently.
This shall enable simultaneous paging of different messages on each zone
connected to each EVAC Panel.
5. To enhance system survivability, during an alarm condition each audio amplifier
module shall automatically provide a local 3-3-3 1000 Hz temporal pattern output
upon loss of the audio communications with the Master EVAC Panel.
6. Audio amplifier modules shall be power limited and protected from short circuits
conditions on the audio circuit wiring. Each amplifier module output shall include
a dedicated, selectable 25/70 Vrms output. Provide a standby audio amplifier
module in each EVAC Panel that shall automatically sense the failure of a primary
amplifier, and replace the function of the failed amplifier.
2.2.9 System Printer

1. The event and status printer shall be a dot matrix printer with a minimum print
speed of 232 characters per second. The printer shall be capable of serial or
parallel communications protocol. The communications speed for RS-232
28 11 00
communications protocol shall be adjustable from 300 to 9600 Baud.

2. The printer shall list the time, date, type and user defined message for each event
printed.
2.2.10 BACnet Interface:

Provide BACnet / IP or BACnet/MSTP interface between MFACP and Main BMS Client
server.
With BACnet interface all events on the MFACP shall be represented as BACnet
BACnet interface shall provide all control & monitoring points to the BMS.
BACnet output provided shall be compatible to the Main BMS System of the project.
Contractor shall provide necessary BACnet Gateway unit if the interface output on
MFACP is in a different protocol then the central BMS protocol.
2.3 SMOKE CONTROL & GRAPHIC ANNUNCIATOR PANEL
2.3.1 Graphic Annunciator

Graphical annunciator panel shall be provided to indicate the status of Smoke
control fans and dampers. All smoke control switches shall be system input points and
shall be capable of controlling any system output or function. The graphic
annunciator shall be UL and ULC Listed. Panel shall be back-lit using high intensity
LEDs. The unit shall be semi-flush/surface mounted. The main graphic door shall be
tamper resistant and equipped with a key lock. It shall be possible to update the
graphic image in the field without replacing the entire graphic. Graphic Annunciator
panel shall be located in Fire Command Center.
2.3.2 Firefighters Manual Smoke Control Station

Provide a semi-flush/surface mounted graphic Firefighter's Smoke Control Station
(FSCS) at Fire Command center adjacent to MFACP. The FSCS shall provide a graphic
representation of the facility HVAC system and stairwell pressurization system. Fan
override and control switches and fan/damper status LEDs shall be provided on the
panel. All smoke control switches shall be system input points and shall be capable of
controlling any system output or function.
The following system controls and indicators shall be provided on the FSCS at
minimum:
Power ON
Trouble signal
Sounder Silence switch & LED status.
System Reset switch & LED status.
Drill test push buttons & LED status indicator
Manual / Auto switch & LED indication for each Smoke fan Activation.
Manual Smoke Pressurization Fan activation Switch & LED Status.
Manual Activation of Smoke control in each Zone with LED status.
Additional switches & LED for Control & Status of Manual Smoke control as per
Firefighting equipment’s and C&E Matrix.
FSCS Panel front facia graphic layout with control switch and Status LED status
location shall be submitted for approval prior to fabrication of Panel.
28 11 00
2.3.3 Graphic Command Centre

1. The Graphic Display unit / Workstation shall be provided at Fire command center.
It shall function as the center point for all operational and administration functions
required for the systems provided within the specification.
2. The command center shall contain a console that shall display and house any
equipment necessary for system operation. Console space shall be provided for
other equipment provided under other sections of the specifications. A single
graphical workstation shall be provided that shall enable primary control of the
systems provided by this specification. An operator shall not have to operate
multiple workstations to receive, view, process and record system events for each
system provided. Equipment included in the command center shall include:
3. System annunciation and controls for.
• Fire detection.
• Fire suppression.
• Fire pump status
• Firefighters smoke control.
• Emergency one-way voice communications.
• Standby generator status indication and controls.
• Automatic transfer switch status indication and controls
• Radio communications
• Public intercom
• Public telephone
• Elevator monitor, status and controls
2.3.4 Graphical Command Workstation

1. The graphical command workstation(s) shall display a different color text for each
message type and color graphic diagrams/floor plans. The graphical command
workstation shall simultaneously display the following system event views; system
event display, graphical diagram display, detailed event message/instructions,
and user event log. The workstation shall be capable of annunciation and
control of all fire detection and smoke control points.
2. The computer shall be minimum of an Pentium Grade i5 fifth generation processer

2.4 Ghz with 4 GB RAM, 500 GB Hard Drive, and 18" LCD monitor. Installation of the
computer or monitor can be either desktop or floor mounting or rack/panel
mounting.
3. The software shall provide multitasking type environment that allows the user to
run several applications simultaneously. The operating program shall run within a
64-bit operating system. These Windows applications shall run simultaneously with
other programs. The mouse or Alt-Tab keys shall be used to quickly select and
switch between multiple applications. The operator shall be able to work in
Microsoft Word, Excel and other Windows based software packages, while
concurrently annunciating on-line alarms and monitoring functions.
2.3.5 Graphic Workstation Operations

1. The graphic display screen shall organize and structure system events for easy user
comprehension. The workstation display shall use four relational quadrants. When
any event occurs:
2. The "list of events area" shall display the address of the alarm or off-normal point
28 11 00
with type and description and time of the event in a prioritized color-coded event
list. Highlighting an event in the event list area shall automatically cause the
display of a graphical map and other three areas (described below) to display
information relating to the highlighted event.
3. The "map area" shall display color graphical representation of the area location in
which the alarm or off-normal device is located. It shall be possible for the
operator to manually zoom down to any portion of a vector-based graphic
without aliasing, artifacting, or pixilation of the image. Preset zoom levels shall not
be considered equal.
4. The "event action area" shall display a customized set of written operator
instructions for every state (alarm, trouble, restore, etc.) of each point. An event
log shall record all events and operator actions to history for future review. An
operator's log shall record operator's comments for each event in system history
with time and date.
5. The "image area" shall display a stored image of the device relating to the event
highlighted in the event list area.
6. Receipt of a fire alarm shall activate an audio WAV file over the workstation
speakers alerting the operator to a fire alarm, and providing audible instructions.
2.4 FIRE INITIATING DEVICES
2.4.1 Analog Addressable Detector – General requirement for all types

1. Each analog addressable smoke detector's sensitivity shall be capable of being
programmed individually with five setting from most sensitive level to least
sensitive level. In addition to the five sensitivity levels the detector shall provide a
pre alarm sensitivity setting, which shall be settable in 5% increments of the
detector's alarm sensitivity value.
2. An alternate alarm sensitivity level shall be provided for each detector, which can
be set to any of the five (5) sensitivity settings manually or automatically using a
time of day event. In addition to the five alternate sensitivity levels the detector
shall provide an alternate pre alarm sensitivity setting, which shall be settable in
5% increments of the detector's alternate alarm sensitivity value.
3. The detector shall be able to differentiate between a long drift above the pre
alarm threshold and fast rise above the threshold.
4. The detector's sensing element reference point shall automatically adjust,

compensating for background environmental conditions such as dust,
temperature, and pressure. Periodically, the sensing element real-time analog
value shall be compared against its reference value. The detector shall provide
a maintenance alert signal that 75% to 99% compensation has been used. The
detector shall provide a dirty fault signal that 100% or greater compensation has
been used.
5. The system shall allow for changing of detector types for service replacement
purposes without the need to reprogram the system. The replacement detector
type shall automatically continue to operate with the same programmed
28 11 00
sensitivity levels and functions as the detector it replaced. System shall display an
off-normal condition until the proper detector type has been installed or change
in the application program profile has been made.
2.4.2 Analog addressable 4D Multi-Sensor Ion Photo Thermal

1. Provide analog/addressable multi-sensor photoelectric thermal smoke detectors
at the locations shown on the drawings. Alarm condition shall be based upon the
combined input from the photoelectric and thermal detection elements.
2. The detector shall have the ability to set the sensitivity and alarm verification of
each individual detector on the circuit. It shall be possible to automatically
change the sensitivity of individual analog/addressable detectors for the day and
night periods. Each detector shall be capable of transmitting pre-alarm and
alarm signals in addition to the normal, trouble and need cleaning information.
The Analog addressable 4D Multi-sensor detector shall comply with the General
requirements for the detectors given above.
2.4.3 Analog Addressable Smoke Detector - Photoelectric

1. Provide analog/addressable photoelectric smoke detectors at the locations
shown on the drawings. The detector shall have LED indication to indicate System
healthy status, fault status and alarm status. The Analog addressable Photo
electric Smoke detector shall comply with the General requirements for the
detectors given above.
2.4.4 Analog Addressable Heat Detectors

Combination Fixed Temperature with ROR Heat Detector
1. Provide analog/addressable combination fixed temperature with rate-of-rise
temperature detectors at the locations shown on the drawings. The heat
detector shall have a nominal fixed temperature alarm point rating of 135°F
(57°C) and a rate of rise alarm point of 15°F(9°C) per minute.
2.4.5 Analog Addressable Heat Detectors (Car Park area)

1. UL Listed – Combination Fixed Temperature-ROR Heat Detector shall be provided
for Car Park area. The heat detector shall have a nominal fixed temperature
alarm point rating of 135°F (57°C) and a rate of rise alarm point of 15°F(9°C) per
minute.
2. Intelligent heat detectors provided for CAR Parking floors shall be UL Listed with
listed spacing between the detectors of 50ft (15.3m) as per UL approval.
2.4.6 Analog Addressable Smoke Detectors (Ceiling Void area)

1. Ceiling void areas with and above 800mm shall be provided with Smoke detector
in ceiling Void with a Remote LED indicator in ceiling level.
2. Ceiling void detectors shall be provided with Access panels for testing and
maintenance.
2.4.7 Duct Mount Smoke Detector With Housing
1. Duct mount smoke detector shall be provided in all the return air ducts & Supply
ducts irrespective of whether it’s shown explicitly in the drawing or not.
2. Provide analog addressable smoke detector with duct housing assembly with a
standard, relay or isolator detector mounting base. The housing shall also protect
the measuring chamber from damage and insects. The housing shall utilize
28 11 00
an air exhaust tube and an air sampling inlet tube that extends into the duct air
stream up to ten feet. Drilling templates and gaskets to facilitate locating and
mounting the housing shall also be provided. The housing shall be finished in
baked red enamel. Remote alarm LED indicators and remote test stations shall be
provided.
2.5 DETECTOR BASES
2.5.1 Detector Base - Audible

1. Sleeping rooms / Guest Rooms / Guest sleeping areas shall have Smoke detector
with inbuilt sounder base.
2. Provide audible standard detector mounting bases suitable for mounting on 1-
gang box.
3. The audible base shall be Configurable / Programmable for single operation
individual room alarm and Global alarm operation for activation of all sounder
base in particular zone / group. The audible base shall emit a steady or temporal
alarm tone and be selectable for low or high output. The audible bases shall
provide a reverberant room sound output of 15dba above ambient noise
measured at pillow level of the bed in sleeping room.
2.5.2 Detector Base

1. All other detectors shall have detector mounting bases with short circuit line
isolator suitable for mounting on 1-gang box. The base shall, contain no
electronics / not addressable type.
2.6 BEAM SMOKE DETECTOR
1. Areas with Ceiling level above 12meter and atriums etc shall be provided with
Beam detectors as CDPSD & code requirements.
2. The projected beam type smoke detector shall be a 4-wire 12/24 Vdc type. The
unit shall consist of an integrated transmitter and receiver. The detector shall
operate between a range of 15 to 330 ft. The temperature range of the beam
shall be -22 °F to 131 °F. The beam detector shall feature automatic gain control,
which shall compensate for gradual signal deterioration caused by dirt
accumulation on the lenses. The unit shall include a wall mounting bracket.
Testing shall be carried out using a calibrated test filter
2.7 MANUAL STATIONS
2.8.1 Manual Station - Double Action Single Stage

1. Manual call points should be installed as a minimum at all final exits plus
emergency exits of each floor or zone of the building, in major public areas/plant
rooms and back of house areas and the front desk location so that no person
travels more than 30m to reach an Manual call station alarm point.
2. Manual call point provided shall be analog/addressable double action, single

stage fire alarm stations at the locations shown on the drawings. The fire alarm
station shall be aesthetically modern design suitable to ID / Architects
requirements. A locked test feature shall be provided. The station shall be
finished in red.
28 11 00
3. Manual call point provided in outdoor areas shall be in weather proof 1P66
housing.
2.8 NOTIFICATION APPLIANCES
2.8.1 EVAC Wall Mount Speaker with Strobe:

1. Fire resistant UL Listed EVAC wall mount speaker with strobe shall be suitable for
Emergency voice alarm communications. Test certificates to establish the EVAC
speaker fire resistance ratting compliance as per NFPA requirements shall be
submitted.
2. The low profile wall mount EVAC speaker strobe shall be provided at the locations
as shown on the drawings. The speaker strobe shall have inbuilt switch selectable
audible output of 4W (96dBA), 2W (90dBA), 1W (87dBA), 1/2W (84dBA), or 1/4W
(81dBA) at 10 ft. when measured in reverberation room and Strobe with Xenon
beacon output shall be output determined as required by its specific location
and application from 15cd, 30cd, 60cd, 75cd, or 110cd inbuilt switch selectable
from the Speaker with Strobe device.
3. Wattage & Strobe setting shall be visible with the cover installed. When the cover
is installed, no mounting hardware shall be visible. In and out screw terminals shall
be provided for all wiring. The low profile speaker strobe shall be Red / White in
color as per the approval of Architect / Engineer with the word “Fire” printed on
the speaker profile.
4. The EVAC wall mounted speaker strobe shown in outdoor areas shall be provided
with IP66 weather proof housing.
2.8.2 EVAC Ceiling mount Speaker

1. Fire resistant UL Listed EVAC ceiling mount speaker shall be suitable for Emergency
voice alarm communications. Test certificates to establish the EVAC speaker fire
resistance ratting compliance as per NFPA requirements shall be submitted
2. 8" ceiling mounted EVAC speakers shall be provided at the locations as shown on
the drawings. In and out screw terminals shall be provided for wiring. Speaker
shall have fire resistant metal dome. Speaker baffles shall be round with red /
white color finish as approved by Architect / Engineer with word “ Fire” printed on
the baffle of the speaker. Provide square surface / flush mount BACK boxes with
matching finish where required. Speakers shall provide 1/2w, 1w, 2w, and 4W
power taps for use with 25V or 70V systems. At the 4 watt setting, the speaker shall
provide a 96 dBA / 15dBA above average ambient level sound output at
frequency of 1000 Hz measured at 5 ft (1.5M) from ffl.
2.8.3 EVAC Ceiling mount Speaker with Strobe.

1. Fire resistant UL Listed EVAC ceiling mount speaker with strobe shall be suitable for
Emergency voice alarm communications. Test certificates to establish the EVAC
speaker fire resistance ratting compliance as per NFPA requirements shall be
submitted.
2. Ceiling mounted EVAC speakers with strobe shall be provided at the locations as
shown on the drawings. In and out screw terminals shall be provided for wiring.
Speaker shall have fire resistant metal dome. Speaker baffles shall be round with
red / white color finish as approved by Architect / Engineer with word “ Fire”
printed on the baffle of the speaker. Provide square surface / flush mount BACK
boxes with matching finish where required. Speakers shall provide 1/2w, 1w, 2w,
28 11 00
and 4W power taps for use with 25V or 70V systems. At the 4 watt setting, the
speaker shall provide a 96 dBA / 15dBA above average ambient level sound
output at frequency of 1000 Hz measured at 5 ft (1.5M) from ffl. Combined Strobe
shall provide synchronized flash outputs. Strobe with Xenon beacon output shall
be determined as required by its specific location and application from a family
of 15cd, 30cd, 60cd, 75cd, or 110cd selectable from the Speaker with Strobe
device.
2.8.4 Speaker-Reentrant Surface

1. Provide 4" surface re-entrant speakers at outdoor locations as shown on the
drawings. Speakers shall provide 2w, 4w, 8w, and 15w power taps for use with 25V
or 70V systems. The re-entrant speakers shall utilize a high efficiency compression
drivers. Cone type drivers are not acceptable. At the 15 watt setting, the speaker
shall provide a 102 dBA sound output over a frequency range of 400-4000 Hz.
Weatherproof boxes shall be provided for outdoor mounting.
2.8.5 Strobes
1. Provide low profile wall / ceiling mounted strobes only (without speakers) at the
locations shown on the drawings. In and out screw terminals shall be provided for
wiring. Strobes shall provide synchronized flash outputs. Strobe output shall be
determined as required by its specific location and application from a family of
15cd, 30cd, 60cd, 75cd, or 110cd devices.
2.9 INITIATION & CONTROL MODULES
2.9.1 Intelligent Input & Output (I/O) Modules -- General

1. It shall be possible to address each intelligent (I/O) module without the use of DIP
or rotary switches. Devices using DIP switches for addressing shall not be
acceptable. The multifunction type modules shall be programmable at site to suit
conditions and may be changed at any time using the Loop Controller. Modules
requiring EPROM, PROM, ROM changes or DIP switch and/or jumper changes shall
not be acceptable. The modules shall have a minimum of 2 diagnostic LEDs
mounted behind a finished cover plate. A green LED shall flash to confirm
communication with the loop controller. A red LED shall flash to display alarm
status. The module shall be capable of storing up to 24 diagnostic codes which
can be retrieved for troubleshooting assistance. Input and output circuit wiring
shall be supervised for open and ground faults. The module shall be suitable for
operation in the following environment:
a) Temperature: 32oF to 120oF (0oC to 49oC)
b) Humidity: 0-93% RH, non-condensing
2.9.2 Output / Control Relay Module

1. Provide intelligent Output / control relay modules. The Control Relay Module shall
provide one form "C" dry relay contact rated at 2 amps @ 24 Vdc to control
external appliances or equipment shutdown. The control relay shall be rated for
pilot duty and releasing systems. The position of the relay contact shall be
confirmed by the system firmware.
2.9.3 Dual Input Module

1. Provide intelligent dual input modules. The Dual Input Module shall provide two
(2) supervised Class B input circuits. The dual input module shall support the
following circuit types:
28 11 00
a) Normally-Open Alarm Delayed Latching (Waterflow Switches)

b) Normally-Open Active Non-Latching (Monitor, Fans, Dampers, Doors, etc.)
c) Normally-Open Active Latching (Supervisory, Tamper Switches)
2.9.4 Single Input Module

1. Provide intelligent single input modules. The Single Input Module shall provide one
(1) supervised Class B input circuit. The module shall be suitable for mounting on
deep 1-gang boxes and 4" square boxes with 1-gang covers. The single input
module shall support the following circuit types:
a) Normally-Open Alarm Delayed Latching (Waterflow Switches)
b) Normally-Open Active Non-Latching (Monitor, Fans, Dampers, Doors, etc.)
c) Normally-Open Active Latching (Supervisory, Tamper Switches)
2.9.5 Waterflow-Tamper Module

1. Provide intelligent waterflow/tamper modules. The Waterflow/Tamper Module
shall be factory set to support two (2) supervised Class B input circuits. Channel A
shall support a Normally-Open Alarm Delayed Latching Waterflow Switch circuit.
Channel B shall support a Normally-Open Active Latching Tamper Switch.
2.9.6 Isolator Module

1. Provide intelligent fault isolators modules. The Isolator Module shall be capable of
isolating and removing a fault from a class A data circuit while allowing the
remaining data loop to continue operating.
2.10 TWO-WAY AUDIO
2.10.1 Telephone Handsets

Provide Twenty (20) firefighter's telephone handsets for use with the firefighter's
telephone jack stations. The telephone handsets shall be red in color and have a
1.3m coiled cord.
2.10.2 Telephone Jacks

Provide stainless steel firefighter's telephone jack stations at the locations shown on
the drawings. The jack station shall be clearly identified with the words "FIRE FIGHTER'S
TELEPHONE" for use with portable fire fighter telephone handsets.
2.10.3 Warden Stations

Provide remote firefighter's telephone stations / warden stations at the locations
shown on the drawings. The station shall consist of a red telephone handset housed
within a locked break glass surface or flush mounted enclosures as shown on the
drawings. The enclosure shall have a red finish, and shall be clearly marked "FIRE
FIGHTERS TELEPHONE" in large letters for easy identification.
2.11 REMOTE DIAGNOSTIC SOFTWARE
The system shall have the ability to upload its status and sensitivity remotely using
either a direct connection or dial-up modem to an owner supplied personal
computer. The remote diagnostic software shall be capable of generating sensitivity
and system status reports. The utility shall supply data for trend analysis reports using
an owner supplied spreadsheet program. The Remote Diagnostic software shall be
Windows® based and capable of receiving data from multiple installed life safety
systems. The software shall be capable of generating off-line reports to minimize
28 11 00
phone line charges. Use of the remote diagnostic software shall not compromise the
functionality of the site-installed software.
2.12 OTHER FIELD DEVICES
2.12.1 Magnetic door holders

Magnetic door holders shall release self-closing fire and smoke doors automatically
when the fire detection system goes into alarm. The door holders shall be provided
with built-in diodes to prevent coil vibration. Each unit shall have a holding force of 15
pounds minimum at 85 percent of rate voltage, and 50 pounds maximum at 110
percent of rated voltage. Electrical wall boxes shall be securely mounted and tested
to withstand a minimum of 80 pounds pulling force. Door holders shall be provided
with mounting boxes for floor and surface installation as shown on the plans.
2.12.2 Pocket Pager Interface

The system shall interface with the pocket paging system such that signals shall be
sent to permit pocket pagers to display Fire alarm messages:
• Twenty vibrating pagers should be provided for guests with impaired hearing.
These pagers should be operational throughout the complex and be activated
when the fire alarm evacuation alarm is operated
• Pagers provided to maintenance staff shall display the guestroom number if a
Guestroom smoke detector has been activated.
• An alarm codes if any other device has been activated. The alarm code shall
consist of the zone in alarm (digital number or clear text) followed by a one digit
code for the signaling device.
2.12.2 BACnet Interface to BMS:

BACnet Interface at Software level shall be provided for the interface of all the Fire
Alarm Points to BMS for Monitoring of each Device status, Alarm Status etc. Signals
from Fire Alarm shall have priority over BMS to Control Life Safety Systems.
Fire Alarm Devise status shall be visible on the floor layouts GUI on the BMS
Workstations.
2.13 Fire Alarm Cables

All cables for both signals and power shall be the PH120 Two hour Fire Resistant With
LPCB CWZ test certificates and Outdoor cable installed in external ducts shall be
MICC (Mineral Insulated Copper Sheathed) and comply with the following codes:
a) BS 6387 CWZ
b) BS 5839 : 1988 Part 1
c) BS 4066 Part 3
d) IEC 754 Part 1&2
e) IEC 331
f) IEC 332-3
g) IEC1034
The cables shall be approved as to their mechanical resistance for installation on

walls and ceilings on cable trays & conduites. Cables shall be drawn through black
enameled conduit (BS 4568 & BS31 Class 2).
28 11 00
Cable type, resistance, conductor cross-section, capacitance, and all other relevant
parameters shall be in accordance with the recommendations of the system
manufacturer.
Separate cables shall be installed for the 24Vdc and the 240Vac functions. No
common cable employing mixed voltages on different conductors shall be allowed.
2.13.1 Acceptable Fire Alarm System Cable Manufacturers:

a) BICC - U.K.
b) Datwyler- Swiss
c) Prysmian - Italy
or
Approved equal.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL
The control system shall be supplied, installed, tested and commissioned in a turnkey
fully implemented and operational manner.
3.2 CAUSE & EFFECT MATRIX & SEQUENCE OF OPERATION
3.2.1 Contractor Shall submit detailed C& E (Cause & Effect) matrix for Consultant Engineer
/ Operator approval. C & E Matrix shall provide the sequence in which the Fire
Fighting, Lift Machine & Voice Evacuation are started and HVAC equipment’s are
shut-down for each cause.
Refer Annexure - 1 Typical Cause & Effect Matrix reference
3.2.2 Sequence of Operation

The system shall be arranged for three categories of alarm inputs and to provide
output functions appropriate to each of the categories as detailed below.
Sequence of Operation shall be in compliance with following NFPA positive alarm

sequence codes. Time delay as per the approval of Bahrain CD & PSD and NFPA
Positive alarm sequence shall allow approved time delay for Operator authorized
Security personal to investigate the Alarm before Global Alarm is sounded and
Evacuation procedure started.
Positive Alarm Sequence:

Alarm initiated and sounded only at MFACP/RFACP.
Step 1: Acknowledge alarm within 15seconds at MFACP by authorized Security
personal in FCC.
Step 2: 180 Seconds time delay is provided for security personal to investigate and
activate the Global Alarm if it’s an Emergency or Re-set the panel if it’s a false alarm.
If either the alarm is not acknowledged within 15seconds in step 1 or panel is not re-
set in step 2 it will sound then automatically Global alarm will be sounded and panel
will start C&E Matrix operation immediately.
3.2.3 The system shall be arranged for three categories of alarm inputs and to provide
output functions appropriate to each of the categories as detailed below.
28 11 00
Supervisory Alarm:
Supervisory Alarm shall only cause indication at the MFACP, RFACP, GDU & Pager.
Following Alarm inputs shall be considered as supervisory Alarm Input.

• Sprinkler Valve tamper switch.
• Fire pump monitoring: Low, Fault pressure & Power fault.
• Sprinkler storage tanks LOW level.
• System fault.
• Wiring fault.
Low Priority Alarm:

Low priority alarm input, shall initiate immediate local alarm at MFACP, RFACP, GDU &
Pager.
Following Alarm conditions are considered Priority 2 Alarm:
a) Upon Detection of smoke condition in single guest room shall initiate
immediate local alarm in Sounder Base of Smoke detector within Guest Room
and Alarm indicated at MFACP, RFACP & GDU. Alarm shall converted to
Priority 1 Alarm if no response (Alarm acknowledge / Reset) within a delay of 3
minutes.
b) Single Smoke or Heat Detectors in BOH & FOH Areas.
c) Manual Call point / Beak Glass alarm.
d) Kitchen Hood suppression System
e) Pre-action detectors – Clean agent suppression system
f) Supply Duct Detector
g) Pressurization Fan Detector
Note, the above Priority 2 Alarm shall be automatically converted to Priority 1 Alarm if
any of two devices go in to alarm mode simultaneously / within alarm acknowledge
or If the alarm is not acknowledged within the pre-set approved delay period.
High Priority (Evacuation) Alarm:

High Priority alarm input, which shall initiate immediate local alarm at MFACP, RFACP,
GDU & Pagers and initiate evacuation voice messages on Speakers in respective
Alarm Zone and Alert message in other zone. Cause & Effect Matrix shall be activated
to shutdown / start HVAC / Firefighting as per approved C&E Matrix
Following Alarm conditions are considered HIGH Priority Alarm:
a) Simultaneous activation of more than one Smoke Detectors / Heat Detector /
Manual call point in same zone
b) Activation of Smoke Detector in Return air duct.
c) Activation of Flow switch
High Priority Alarm Sequence Of Operation:

a) The High Priority alarm shall be displayed on the graphic display terminal in a
pictorial graphic representation.
b) The High Priority alarm indicator on the MFACP and each FARP shall continue to
flash until the alarm is acknowledged. If a subsequent alarm is received after any
acknowledgement, the high priority alarm shall again flash.
c) An evacuation alarm shall sound on the floor of incidence / Zone and the floor
above and floor below / adjacent Zones, followed by a voice message, with an
alert pulse tone on all other floors, followed by a voice message. A time delay
28 11 00
feature shall be provided to sound a general evacuation alarm automatically

throughout the building if the initiating alarm condition is not responded /
acknowledged within a predetermined time.
d) An alarm signal shall be automatically sent to the Fire Brigade. This shall be
accomplished by means of an automatic telephone dialer direct to the Fire
brigade as approved by the authorities having jurisdiction.
e) Activate the visual alarm signaling devices (strobe lights)
f) All magnetically held smoke doors and the fire doors shall be released.
g) All lift call and door buttons and signals shall become inoperative, lifts serving that
floor shall be signaled to immediately return to the ground floor or as designated
by the local Fire Department and be held for the exclusive use of the Fire
Brigade. Should such an alarm occur on the ground floor, the lifts shall be signaled
to return to an alternate floor which is not in alarm.
h) Signals shall be sent directly to heating, ventilating and air-conditioning fan motor
controllers to initiate automatic smoke control and fan shutdown. Status
monitoring circuits shall confirm the operation of the fan systems as per approved
C & E Matrix.
i) Signals shall be transmitted to the maintenance pocket paging system to display

zone in alarm.
j) The printer shall print a clear text message on the event log printer at the MFACP.
The printer shall print the device information indicating clearly in plain language
which device is in alarm, the time, and the date associated with the alarm. The
printer shall print all follow-up information regarding this alarm, such as
acknowledge, reset, etc.
3.3 Emergency Paging and Voice Alarms

a) The automatic and manual paging shall originate from the MFACP. All speakers on
any floor or group of floors shall be selectable by manual control switches.
b) The action of operating any of these switches shall have a positive feedback
confirmation system to confirm the correct floor(s) has (have) been selected. This
shall be achieved with a floor by floor display of the building. This display shall
allow for more than one floor at a time to be displayed.
c) The automatic voice evacuation alarm shall be initiated from the fire alarm sub
system upon activation of an alarm. The alarm shall consist of a ‘slow whoop’
Temporal 3 alarm tone for a maximum of fifteen (15) seconds followed by an
automatic preselected voice evacuation message. At the end of each message
the ‘slow whoop’ shall continue for fifteen (15) seconds followed again by the
automatic voice evacuation signal. The sequence of alarm shall sound until the
signal silence switch is operated at the main fire alarm control panel or the fire
alarm has been reset as described previously. The voice evacuation signal shall be
distinct, authoritative without any inflection and may be repeated in several
languages as agreed with the Fire Brigade.
28 11 00
d) The alert tone shall consist of an introductory pulse tone for fifteen (15) seconds
followed by an alert message to advise that this floor is not in alarm but the floors
that are in alarm shall be stated. The message shall also state that the occupants
shall be prepared to evacuate the building when the evacuation alarm is given.
The alert tone must be distinctly different from that of the evacuation alarm.
e) Each stairwell shall receive a voice message without a fire alarm tone. The
message shall state that there is an emergency in the building anyone presently in
the stairwell shall not re-enter any floors but should proceed immediately to the
ground floor exit level.
f) During the automatic transmission of the fire alarm and fire alert tones, it shall be
possible at the main fire alarm panel to permit selective voice paging. Upon
activation of manual control switches and the microphone push-to-talk switch, it
shall be possible to transmit a message to the selected areas. The activation of
any such switches and microphone switch shall initiate the ’slow whoop’ alarm
tone for fifteen (15) seconds followed by an announcement or message. The
message shall follow the ‘slow whoop’ and the person making the announcement
be cued when to start the announcement by a red indicator located adjacent to
the microphone. When the microphone button is released, the ‘slow whoop’ shall
sound for fifteen (15) seconds, after which the system shall return to the automatic
voice evacuation or alert mode until reset as mentioned above.
g) It shall be possible to load a variety of prerecorded messages (to be coordinated

with the local authority and operator) plus all combinations of floor fire alarms
prerecorded messages, which shall all be selected by the system software.
Amendments to the prerecorded messages and any reprogramming of the
operating system shall be accomplished by front panel operated pushbuttons,
selector switches and a keypad.
h) Facility for total building evacuation and paging shall be provided to allow for
activation of all floor speakers. This shall be accomplished by the means of an ‘all
floor’ switch located at the MFACP.
i) It must be possible to transmit an alarm tone to speakers in one zone while sending
a voice message to another zone, while the rest of the building is receiving alert
tone, all at the same time.
j) Each speaker zone shall be with dual circuits connected to its own amplifier. It shall
therefore be possible to have as many channels as there are speaker zones. A
minimum of three (3) channels must be supplied: an ALERT channel, an EVAC
channel and a PAGE channel.
k) Each speaker zone must be divided into two speaker circuits. Circuit A and Circuit
B speakers must be connected in an alternate format so that upon a circuit failure,
50% of the speakers are still audible in the Zone.
l) The emergency evacuation and voice alarm system amplification equipment shall
be sized to accommodate the total quantity of speakers for each channel (total
of three) plus 25% spare reserve capacity in each channel.
28 11 00
m) The system shall be provided with redundant amplifiers arrange in such a manner
that failure of an amplifier shall not result in loss of acceptable audibility in any
area of the building.
3.4 Emergency Telephone System

All remote emergency telephones shall communicate with the emergency telephone
control panel at the MFACP as follows:
a) The insertion of any telephone handset into its jack shall cause the appropriate
phone location indicator to flash and a distinctive audible pulsing sound to be
heard in the fire command centre. The subsequent picking-up of the master
phone and operation of that phone selector switch shall silence the pulsing tone,
cause the phone location.
b) Indicator to stop flashing and remain on and complete the coupling of the
remote telephone to the master telephone to provide direct and private
communications.
c) Any subsequent insertion of another telephone into its jack on the same circuit
shall not cause the pulsing tone to reactivate if any two-way communication has
already been established. Any new telephone handset circuit shall, though,
cause its discreet indicator to flash until acknowledged by the master telephone
or the handset is replaced.
d) The emergency telephone system shall provide the capacity to handle

simultaneous use of multiple remote phones. All phone jacks shall be
annunciated and monitored against faults or tempering (i.e. supervised).
e) The removal of all remote telephone handsets from their jacks shall cause the
restoration of all normal supervisory functions. If any remote phone is not
removed, then the appropriate phone zone indicator shall flash and the pulsing
tone shall resume in the Fire Command Centre.
f) Telephone operation and telephone system faults shall be stored in system

memory and it shall be possible to print out these operations on demand.
3.5 ELEVATOR CONTROL & FIRE FIGHTERS EMERGENCY OPERATION OF ELEVATOR
A. Elevator / Lift Cabin Emergency operation shall be initiated by the Fire Alarm Output
control module provided at each Lift machine room. Two numbers output module
shall be provided at each lift machine room. Upon alarm condition one of the output
module will activate the Lift Cabin to return to emergency landing level. However, if
the Fire alarm is from the emergency landing level then the second output module
will communicate to Lift machine to return the lift cabin to alternate level.
B. Firefighters’ Emergency Operation shall be provided as per ASME (American Society of

Mechanical Engineers) Codes 17.1 - Section 2.27.3.1 & 2: Phase I - Emergency Re-call
operations & Section 2.27.3.3: Phase II - Emergency In car operation. A brief of Phase 1 &
Phase 2 sequence is given below for reference. Complete system provided shall be as per
ASME 17.1, NFPA 72 codes and in compliance with the requirements of AHJ (Bahrain GDCD).
28 11 00
C. Firefighters’ Emergency Operation:

Firefighters’ Emergency Operation shall be provided as per ASME (American Society of
Mechanical Engineers) Codes 17.1 - Section 2.27.3.1 & 2: Phase I Emergency Re-call
operations & Section 2.27.3.3 Phase II Emergency In car operation. A brief of Phase 1 & Phase
2 sequence is given below for reference however complete provision shall be done as per
ASME 17.1, NFPA 72 codes and in compliance with the requirements of AHJ (Bahrain GDCD).
D. Phase I Emergency Recall Operation

A three-position key-operated “FIRE RECALL” switch authorized for Fire man operation
shall be provided at the designated emergency landing level for each single elevator or
for each group of elevators.
E. Only the “FIRE RECALL” switch or fire alarm initiating device located at floors that are
served by the elevator, or in the hoistway, or in an elevator machine room, or a control
space, or a control room shall initiate Phase I Emergency Recall.
F. When a “FIRE RECALL” is manually activated by moving the switch to “ON” position by
FIREMAN or when a "FIRE RECALL" is activated automatically by Fire Alarm System all
cars controlled by the switch shall operate as follows:
(1) A car traveling towards the designated emergency exit level shall continue nonstop
to the designated emergency exit level and doors shall open and remain open.
(2) A car traveling away from the designated emergency exit level shall reverse at or
before the next available landing without opening its doors and proceed to designated
emergency exit level.
(3) The emergency stop switch in the car shall be inoperative as soon as the car moves
away from the landing in Phase 1 Emergency re-call operation.
(4) A car standing at a landing other than the designated emergency landing level,
doors shall close without delay and proceed to the designated emergency exit level.
G. Phase I Emergency Recall Operation to an alternate level shall conform to the following:
1. The activation of a fire alarm initiating device located at the designated emergency
landing level Zone shall cause all elevators serving that level to be recalled to an
alternate level.
2. The requirements of 1 to 4 as above shall remain same except that all references to
the “designated emergency landing level” shall be replaced with “alternate level”
3. The alternate recall level shall be determined by the Fire strategy & AHJ (Authority
having Jurisdiction)
H. Phase II Emergency In-Car Operation.

A three-position (“OFF,” “HOLD,” and “ON,” in that order) key-operated switch labeled
“FIRE OPERATION”; shall be provided in an operating panel in each car; and shall be
readily accessible. It shall become effective only when Phase I Emergency Recall
Operation is in effect and the car has been returned to the emergency recall level. The
switch shall be rotated clockwise to go from “OFF” to “HOLD” to “ON.”
28 11 00
I. When the “FIRE OPERATION” switch is in the “ON” position, the elevator shall be on
Phase II Emergency In-Car Operation, for use by emergency personnel (Fireman) only.
3.6 SUBMITTALS
Shop Drawing & Material approval Document shall be submitted as per Project
Master Program. Minimum document required shall be as listed below but not limited
to.
Drawings
a) Riser & Schematic diagrams
b) Floor Layout
c) Cause & Effect Matrix
d) Loop calculation Sheet
e) Battery Calculation Sheet
f) Zone Diagram
g) Typical Voice Evacuation Message
h) Sequence of operation
i) Civil Defense approval
3.7 INSTALLATION
3.7.1 Installation
The Main Fire Alarm and Control Panel shall be flush mounted in the Fire Command
Center at the Ground Floor / Lobby Level in such a position that it shall be easily
visible and accessible.
3.7.2 All field devices shall be placed in compliance with relevant NFPA / UL / BS standard,
local Fire Chief Officer’s requirements and in accordance with the contract drawings,
whichever is more stringent.
3.7.3 All system components shall be installed and mounted in accordance to the
manufacturer’s recommendations and as per Engineer’s approval.
3.7.4 Wiring
All internal wiring shall be PH120 Fire Resistant Cable within conduits and outdoor
cable shall be MICC cable installed in accordance with the requirements of the
authorities having local jurisdiction and with the wiring regulations of IEEE, National
Electric Code and Local Code.
3.7.5 All wiring shall be thru PVC conduit buried in the finished walls. All wiring within
enclosures shall be neatly bundled and anchored to prevent obstruction to devices
and terminals.
3.7.6 Fire alarm initiating circuits shall be wired in such configuration that circuits shall be
supervised for open and short circuit conditions.
3.7.7 Supervisory alarm initiating circuits shall be wired in such configuration that circuits
shall be supervised for open and short circuit conditions.
3.7.8 Emergency Voice Alarm circuits shall be supervised for and short circuit conditions.
Provide two circuits per Zone / Common area / Common corridor on all floors where
alarm annunciating appliances are installed. All adjacent appliances / speakers shall
28 11 00
be wired to alternate circuits throughout each floor.
3.7.9 Control circuits for smoke control purposes shall be polarized 24Vdc wired and shall
be supervised for open and short circuit condition. Provide circuits as detailed in the
smoke control sequence.
3.7.10 Control circuits for elevator recall and other auxiliary functions such as shut-down of
electrical and mechanical equipment other than what detailed in the smoke
sequence shall be N.O. contacts. Provide two output modules N.O contacts for
control and two input modules for monitoring per elevator.
3.7.11 Emergency phone circuits shall be supervised for open circuit condition. Provide one
circuit per emergency telephone.
3.8 ACCEPTANCE
3.8.1 Contractor shall have As built Drawings, Testing & Commissioning Reports and O& M
manual in approved status minimum 14 days prior to offering of Final Acceptance.
Contractor shall submit signed off Final record of completion with parameter of
complete system detailed within the Record of Completion.
Contractor shall submit Bahrain CD & PSD Final inspection report upon satisfactory
completion of works prior to the Final acceptance test by Consultant / Client /
Operator.
The contractor shall completely check out, calibrate and test all connected
hardware and software to insure that the system performs in accordance with the
approved specifications and sequences of operations submitted.
3.8.2 Witnessed validation demonstration shall consist of:

a) Demonstrate alarm sequence.
b) Demonstrate C&E Effect matrix operation.
c) Demonstrate Voice evacuation alarm and paging throughout the building
including Guest rooms & Guestroom toilets. Paging message intelligibility &
audibility as specified.
d) Demonstrate CD&PSD interface.
e) Demonstrate Graphic User Interface
f) Execute manual override commands.
g) Display and demonstrate panels man/machine interface functionality.
3.9 MANUALS
3.9.1 The following manuals shall be provided:

a) An Operators Manual shall be provided with graphic explanations of
keyboard use for all operator functions specified under Operator Training.
b) Computerized printouts of all panel data file construction including all point
processing assignments, physical terminal relationships, command and alarm
limits, etc.
c) A manual shall be provided including as-built documents of all materials
required under the paragraph “SUBMITTALS” on this specification.
d) Printouts of all site tests carried out shall form part of the manual.
28 11 00
e) Three sets of manuals shall be provided to the owner along with one
Set of CD.
3.10 TRAINING
3.10.1 All training shall be by factory trained fire alarm and detection system contractor and
utilizing the specified manuals and as-built documentation.
3.10.2 Operator training shall include three twelve-hour sessions minimum encompassing:
a) Sequence of Operation review
b) Selection of all displays and reports
c) Use of all specified MMI functions
d) Troubleshooting of sensors (determining bad sensors)
e) Password assignment and modification
3.10.3 Two training session shall be conducted at system completion / acceptance test,
and the other shall be conducted forty five days after system completion.
3.11 WARRANTY
3.11.1 All components, system software, parts, assemblies and installation supplied under this
specification for Fire Alarm & Voice Evacuation system shall be guaranteed against
defects in materials and workmanship for minimum one year or as per project main
contract requirement from acceptance date which ever higher / stringent is
applicable.
3.11.2 Labor to troubleshot, repair, reprogram, or replace system components shall be

furnished by the control system contractor at no charge to the owner during the
warranty period.
3.11.3 All corrective software modifications made during warranty service periods shall be
updated on all user documentation and on user and manufacturer archived
software disks.
28 11 00
ANNEXURE – 1
TYPICAL C&E MATRIX
28 11 00
ANNEXURE ‐ 1
PRILIMNERY ‐ FIRE ALARM&VOICE EVACUTION SYSTEM CAUSE AND MATRIX
EFFECT Low Priority Initial Alarm Sequence
High Priority Major Evacuation Alarm Sequence
Immediate Indication of Alarm at Following Location
All lift will come to Ground floor if Fire in GF it will land to alternate
Step 1: Alarm shall be acknowledged at MFACP within 30seconds by authorized
Voice Evacuation Message in Arabic & English with followed by

personal.
Audio Visual- Any Music inside the meeting room will Mute
GUEST ROOM LOCAL SOUNDER WILLACTIVATE IN
Temporal 3 Sound repeated in Cycles until Panel is re-set
Step 2: After acknowledging 180sec delay shall be provided to investigate the Cause of
CarParkingSmoke Extract fans-Running at High Speed

Alarm and Re-set the panel if the alarm is false alarm and activation of Evacuation
sequence Alarm if the panel is not re-set within 180seconds or if any other devise is
activated from same zone or Evacuation sequence alarm is activated from MFACP.
Barrier-Entry will close and Exit will open

Guest Floors AHU Fire Mode activated
Fresh Air handling Unit / Makeup Fan

SYSTEMS INPUT/CAUSE MFACP @FCC FARP @CSR
RFACP @ Various GDU (Graphic Display
(Fire Command (Central Security
locations Unit)
Diesel Fuel management System.

Center) Room)
Civil Defense Dialer Activated

Stair case pressurization fan
LPG Main Solenoid Valve

Guest Room Fan coil Unit
RESPECTIVE ROOMS
Main Fire alarm
Toilet Exhaust Fans

Smoke extract Fans
Panel and FARP1 Indicate Graphical User
RFACP Indicate
Printer Indicate Location of fire Interface
Non fire floor
Door holders
Location of fire
Location and with Device Will Indicate Location
with Device address
Events will be address On Graphic Map
printed
ACTIVATION OF SINGLE
DISPLAY
SMOKE DETECTOR / BREAK
ADDRESS
DISPLAY ADDRESS DISPLAY ADDRESS DISPLAY ADDRESS OFF ON ON NO ACTION
GLASS
ABOVE / BELOW FLOORS OR
IF MFACP IS NOT
ALARM / INCIDENT ZONE &
Release
Close
ACKNOWLEDGE WITHIN DISPLAY ON ‐
DISPLAY ADDRESS DISPLAY ADDRESS DISPLAY ADDRESS ON OFF OFF ON G/ Floor ON ON ON OFF ON ON OFF ON
No Action
ADJECENT ZONES
5SECONDS OR NOT RE-SET ADDRESS

WITHIN 180 SECONDS
ACTIVATION OF ADDITIONAL
Release
Close
DISPLAY ON ‐
SMOKE DETECTOR / BREAK DISPLAY ADDRESS DISPLAY ADDRESS DISPLAY ADDRESS ON OFF OFF ON G/ Floor ON ON ON OFF ON ON OFF ON
ADDRESS No Action
GLASS IN SAME ZONE
Release
Close
ACTIVATION OF SPRINKLER DISPLAY ON ‐
DISPLAY ADDRESS DISPLAY ADDRESS DISPLAY ADDRESS ON OFF OFF ON G/ Floor ON ON ON OFF ON
FLOW SWITCH ADDRESS No Action
ALL ZONES COMPLETE
AFTER 60 SECONDS OF
EVACUATION
ACTIVATION OF HIGH
PRIORITY ALARM IF THE
Release
Close
PANEL IS NOT RE-SET THEN DISPLAY
DISPLAY ADDRESS DISPLAY ADDRESS DISPLAY ADDRESS ON OFF OFF ON G/ Floor ON ON ON OFF ON ON OFF Close ON
MAJOR EVACUATION HIGH ADDRESS
PRIORITY ALARM SHALL BE
ACTIVATED FOR ALL ZONES /
AREAS OF THE PROJECT.
FIRE ALARM SYSTEM
SEQUENCE OF OPERATION
o Upon detection of fire by Single Smoke Detector, Heat Detector and Break glass the following operation will take place in sequence.
o Fire alarm Indication will flash in Master control panel FCC (Fire Command Center) and repeater panel in CSR (Central Security Room) and
in RFACP (Remote Fire Alarm Control Panel at various blocks ).
o Fire location will be indicated In GUI(Graphic User Interface) PC.
o Alarm should be Acknowledged within less than 30 seconds at MFACP and than delay of 3 Minutes will be given for Hotel Fire investigation
and Firefighting team to arrive at the scene of fire and Investigate the situation and declare following the status accordingly
Fire Status
1. If “All Clear message “ was given by the Fire investigation team due to False alarm condition then the system will be Reset at MFACP.
2. If Real Fire is confirmed By Fire investigation team then by pressing the manual Evacuation Button(Protected By Password) on the Fire
panel (MFACP)the High Priority Major Evacuation Alarm sequence will start immediately as per above C & E Matrix.
Note: If alarm is not acknowledged within 30 seconds or if the panel is not reset within 3 Minutes after acknowledging the alarm also will start
the High Priority Major Evacuation Alarm Sequence.
Supervisory Alarms & Monitoring Alarms:
Supervisory: Zone control valves & Fire pump on status
Monitoring: FM200 Panel status & LPG Gas detection panel status and Kitchen Hood Fire Suppression System
ALL THE MATERIALS SUPPLIED UNDER THIS CONTRACT SHALL BE STRICTLY FROM ONE OF THE
MANUFACTURERS LISTED BELOW. CONTRACTOR SHALL OBTAIN PRIOR APPROVAL OF THE ENGINEER
AND HIS DECISION SHALL BE BINDING FOR MAKE OF EACH ITEM BEFORE ORDERING THE SAME.
COUNTRY OF
SL.NO EQUIPMENT MAKE
ORIGIN
YORK MEXICO
WATER COOLED CENTRIFUGAL
1 DAIKIN ITALY
CHILLERS
CARRIER USA
SPX MARLEY COOLING
USA
2 COOLING TOWER TECHNOLOGIES
USA
EVAPCO INC.
GRUNDFOS HUNGARY
HOLDEN & BROOKE UK
3 CHILLED WATER PUMPS
KSB GERMANY
SPP PUMPS UK
GRUNDFOS HUNGARY
HOLDEN & BROOKE UK
4 CONDENSER WATER PUMPS
KSB GERMANY
SPP PUMPS UK
ALFA LAVAL SWEDEN
5 PLATE HEAT EXCHANGERS APV USA
TACO USA
MECHANICAL / PHYSICAL WATER
TREATMENT (BASIN SWEEPING
6 SYSTEM, FULL STREAM FILTRATION LAKOS USA
SYSTEM & ACTIVATED FILTRATION
MEDIA SYSTEM)
ITT BELL & GOSSETT USA
SPIROTECH NETHERLAND
7 PRESSURIZATION PACKAGE UNITS
HOLDEN & BROOKE UK
FLAMCO HOLLAND
CARRIER MALAYSIA
AIR HANDLING UNITS / TREATED
DAIKIN MALAYSIA/ ITALY
8 FRESH AIR HANDLING UNITS/ FAN
TRANE MALAYSIA
COIL UNITS
YORK ITALY
CARRIER MALAYSIA
DAIKIN MALAYSIA
9 FAN COIL UNITS
TRANE MALAYSIA
YORK ITALY
SPC LIMITED UAE
10 WRAP AROUND HEAT PIPE SECTION
SERCK SERVICE INTERNATIONAL UAE
BRYAIR INDIA
11 ENERGY WHEEL SECTION
INTERKLIMA USA
CALOREX UK
12 DEHUMIDIFIERS
DANTHERM UK
VARIABLE REFRIGERANT VOLUME DAIKIN EUROPE/ JAPAN
13
UNITS (VRV) YORK JAPAN
CARRIER KSA
DX DUCTED SPLIT AIR DAIKIN MALAYSIA
14
CONDITIONING UNITS TRANE
YORK BAHRAIN

MECHANICAL - REV. C PAGE 1 OF 4
CARRIER KSA/ EGYPT

DX DECORATIVE SPLIT AIR DAIKIN MALAYSIA
15
CONDITIONING UNITS TRANE
YORK BAHRAIN
SYSTEM AIR GERMANY
GREENHECK USA
16 EXHAUST FANS
PENN USA
FLAKTWOOD UK
SYSTEM AIR GERMANY
GREENHECK USA
17 SMOKE EXHAUST FANS
PENN USA
FLAKTWOOD UK
HALTON USA
18 ECOLOGY UNITS
ENVI TEC USA
STULZ GERMANY
19 PRECISION AC UNITS
EMERSON/ LIEBERT UK
FRICO GERMANY
20 AIR CURTAIN
BIDDLE BV NETHERLANDS
CHEMICAL DOSAGE POT & HOUSEMAN UK
21 CHEMICALS & BIOFILM CULLIGAN UK
MANAGEMENT SYSTEM ACCENTA UK
WEICCO INDIA
DUCT & PIPE HANGERS/ SUPPORTS/ GRINELL USA
22
ANCHORS HILTI GERMANY
MASON USA
TOBUS SPAIN
STEEL PIPES & FITTINGS (BLACK OR
23 NIPPON STEEL JAPAN
GALVANIZED)
SUMITOMO JAPAN
GRINNEL USA
MECHANICAL GROOVED
24 RAPIDDROP UK
COUPLING
VICTAULIC USA
PRE INSULATED CHILLED WATER SPPI KSA
25
PIPES & FITTINGS (CHILLED WATER) EPPI UAE
ABS PIPEWORK & FITTING EURA PIPE (HEPWORTH) UK
26
(CONDENSER WATER) DURA PIPE UK
FIBRE GLASS PIPEWORK & FITTINGS
27 ABU DHABI PIPE FACTORY UAE
(CONDENSER WATER)
COPPER PIPES & FITTINGS FOR YORKSHIRE WEDNESBURY

28 UK UK USAUK
REFRIGERANT MUELLER BRASSCRANE
NEWMAN HATTERSELY UK
29 VALVES TOUR & ANDERSON UK
CRANE UK
VALVES, STRAINERS FOR
BROOK & BANK UK
30 CONDENSER WATER CIRCUIT (SEA
SHIPHAM UK
WATER)
PRESSURE INDEPENDENT CONTROL
DANFOSS EUROPE
VALVES/ DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE
31 FLOW CON INTERNATIONAL DENMARK
CONTROL VALVES/ AUTOMATIC
TOUR & ANDERSON USA
BALANCE VALVES
FLAMCO HOLLAND
32 AUTOMATIC AIR VENT SPIRAX SARCO USA
SPIRO TECH BV NETHERLAND
VACUUM DEGASSER & DIRT
33 SPIROTEC BV NETHERLANDS
SEPARATOR
MASON USA
FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS FOR PIPE
34 MINIKIN UK
WORK
CRANE USA

AGIS UAE
35 GI. SHEETS
JINDAL STEEL INDIA
PRE INSULATED ALUMINIUM DUCT ALP ITALY
36
SYSTEM P3 (DUCTAL) ITALY
FLAMEBAR UK
37 FIRE RATED DUCT WORK
PROMAT UK
AGIS UAE
38 STAINLESS STEEL DUCTS
JINDAL STEEL INDIA
TROX USA
EURO REGISTER BELGIUM
39 SOUND ATTENUATORS / SILENCERS
RUSKIN USA
ATAI KSA
ATAI KSA
VOLUME CONTROL DAMPERS,
40 GMAMCO UAE
MOTORIZED DAMPERS
RUSKIN USA
GMAMCO UAE
LOW LEAKAGE / SHUT OFF
41 RUSKIN USA
DAMPERS
ATAI KSA
BARCOL AIR UK
42 VAV, CAV DAMPERS EURO REGISTER UK
TROX UK
FIRE DAMPERS, FIRE / SMOKE RUSKIN USA
43 DAMPERS INCLUDING MOTORIZED ATAI KSA
FIRE SMOKE DAMPERS GMAMCO UAE
FIBRE GLASS INSULATION (DUCT & AFICO KSA
44
PIPE) KIMMCO KUWAIT
RUBATEX USA
45 RUBBER FOAM INSULATION ARMAFLEX KSA
K FLEX USA
46 KITCHEN EXHAUST DUCT INSULATION UNIFRAX USA
EURO REGISTER BELGIUM
47 AIR TERMINALS & PLENUMS TROX UK
TITUS UK
TAYLOR USA
JOHNSON USA
48 INSTRUMENTS & GAUGES
WEISS USA
WINTERS CANADA
MASON USA
49 VIBRATION ISOLATORS KINETICS USA
WEICCO INDIA
DURO DYNE USA
50 DUCT FLEXIBLE CONNECTIONS CONTRACT COMPONENTS LTD. UK
CLIMA TECH INTERNATIONAL BELGIUM
ATCO KSA
51 FLEXIBLE DUCT THERMAFLEX USA
SAFID KSA
FOSTER USA
52 ADHESIVE MIRACLE USA
IDENDEN UK
FOSTER USA
53 VAPOUR BARRIER MIRACLE USA
IDENDEN UK
STERIL AIRE USA
54 UV-LIGHT PURE AQUA USA
VIQUOR CANADA
KINETICS USA
55 ACOUSTICAL LOUVER ATAI KSA
RUSKIN USA

EURO REGISTER EUROPE

56 VAV BOX ATAI KSA
BARCOL AIR UK
SIEMENS GERMANY
57 VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES ABB FINLAND
DANFOSS FRANCE
HONEY WELL EUROPE/ USA
BUILDING AUTOMATION CONTROL
58 JOHNSON CONTROL USA
SYSTEM (BACS)
SIEMENS GERMANY


04,05 - MEP Specifications PDF

Transféré par

Informations du document

Titre original

Copyright

Formats disponibles

Partager ce document

Partager ou intégrer le document

Options de partage

Avez-vous trouvé ce document utile ?

Ce contenu est-il inapproprié ?

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

04,05 - MEP Specifications PDF

Transféré par

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

16-119

AL SAHEL BEACH RESORT, BAHRAIN

Revision Date By Description Resp. Consult

NTS A4 17.12.17 DTP/SKK FD

DIVISION 21- FIRE SUPPRESSION

21 01 00 OPERATION & MAINTENANCE OF FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEM

22 01 00 OPERATION & MAINTENANCE OF PLUMBING SYSTEM

23 01 00 OPERATION & MAINTENANCE OF HVAC SYSTEM

DIVISION 25 - BUILDING MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

25 00 00 BUILDING MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

AL SAHEL HOTEL RESORT

26 01 00 OPERATION & MAINTENANCE OF ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

DIVISION 28 - ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY

28 11 00 INTEGRATED FIRE ALARM & VOICE EVACUATION LIFE SAFETY SYSTEM

SCHEDULE OF APPROVED MANUFACTURERS

AL SAHEL HOTEL RESORT

21 01 00 – Operation & Maintenance of Fire Protection System

1.1 Related Documents

1.2.2 As-Built Drawings

1.2.3 Required Submittals

c) Wiring diagrams, panel boards load schedules, etc.

1.2.4 Operations & Maintenance (O&M) Manuals

contractors, construction start date, handover date and

i. A complete inventory of original spare parts supplied (if

1.2.5 Packing, storage and protection

1.2.6 Corrosion and painting

1.2.7 Commissioning and instructions

issuance of the Taking Over Certificate. In no case, however, shall the

1.4.1 Tests at the site:

1.4.2 Operating tests

1.4.2.1 Initial Trial Test:

1.4.2.2 Tests on Piping:

1.4.2.3 Tests on Water Pumps:

1.4.2.4 Tests on Electric Motors:

1.4.2.5 Tests on other Plant and Equipment:

1.4.2.6 Reliability Tests:

1.5 Labeling and identification of services

1.5.9 Identification bands shall be painted on piping and ducting or insulation at

1. The equipment collecting and tagging process can be split into

a. Stage 1 - assign 2 digit property code

b. Stage 2 - identify separate buildings within the property and assign

c. Stage 3 - assign 3 digit floor code

d. Stage 4 - identify rooms containing maintainable equipment

e. Stage 5 - label rooms

f. Stage 6 - identify maintainable equipment within the room and

g. Stage 7 - label equipment

2. A standardised template has been created to assist in the

1.7.1 Access doors shall be provided by the Contractor as required to provide

1.10.2 The Contractor to indicate the cost of spare parts separately as

1.11.6 These Particular Specifications shall apply to all inspections, adjustments,

21 05 00 - Common Work Results for Fire Suppression

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and

210100 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE OF FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEM

210513 COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION EQUIPMENT

211200 FIRE SUPPRESSION STANDPIPES

211313 WET PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEM

212200 CLEAN AGENT FIRE EXTINGUISHING SYSTEM

C. This Section includes the following:

1. Piping materials and installation instructions common to most piping systems.

B. Exposed, Interior Installations: Exposed to view indoors. Examples include finished

C. Exposed, Exterior Installations: Exposed to view outdoors or subject to outdoor

D. Concealed, Interior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from